Quarterly Census of Employment and Wages (QCEW)

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Preface

Page vi

Preface
Purpose and Organization
This operating manual describes the approved procedures and methodology to be used by the
state offices in production of a high quality database. This state product is commonly referred to
as the QCEW file. It has several uses. The Employment and Training Administration (ETA) uses
the QCEW file for oversight of state unemployment insurance (UI) programs. State governments
use it for many internal purposes such as revenue forecasting. The QCEW file is the main
component of the personal income portion of the national and regional income and products
accounts, better known as the GDP program. It is used to benchmark national and state current
employment estimates produced by the BLS CES program. States and BLS use it to publish
detailed industry statistics on the local and national economy. The QCEW file is also used as the
sample frame for many programs.
This manual documents the responsibilities and operations of the QCEW program. It begins
with an overview and background material, then proceeds through additional chapters of state
and BLS operations. The sequence of chapters is, in a general sense, chronological. Several
early chapters cover basic concepts such as assigning classification codes and handling multipleworksite employers. These are followed by a chapter on the Annual Refiling Survey. The
remaining chapters work through the quarterly sequence of loading, editing, and transmitting the
data via the Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance [EQUI] file, including such items as
the national office processing and the national office/state coordination. Following the chapters
are appendices providing technical information such as file layouts, data element definitions, edit
conditions, imputation formulas, due dates, and a recommended processing schedule.
Deliverable percentages, methodology, calendars, and policy information are periodically
updated in this Manual. Announcements and instruction are also accompanied by numbered
QCEW Program Technical Memoranda – some intended only for regional office staff but more
frequently for joint action by state, regional, and national office staff members. The manual
updates may require the replacement of chapters, or chapter sections or appendices. The most
updated version of the Manual will be made available as an online document. Its web location as
part of the Bureau’s StateWeb resource archive should be referenced often.

Submitting Your Comments
BLS welcomes suggestions from state staff on improving this manual, as well as suggestions for
improving the QCEW program. Please provide any comments to your regional office. Regional
offices may submit comments to the national office via E-mail to the group name
[email protected]. All comments will be read and evaluated.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Preface

Page vii

Confidentiality
BLS considers maintaining the highest degree of confidentiality on the data collected to be
critical to the program’s integrity and its ability to successfully solicit employers to report for its
statistical programs. Because of this, BLS has developed rules to strenuously protect that
confidentiality. States are an integral part of the Federal-State data collection system and, as
cooperating agents, must comply with BLS regulations on confidentiality to guard the trust that
has been developed with respondents over years of operating statistical programs.
States are required to adhere to the BLS confidentiality requirements as stated in the Labor
Market Information (LMI) Cooperative Agreement.
The Confidential Information Protection and Statistical Efficiency Act (CIPSEA) of 2002 (Title
5 of Public Law 107-347) safeguards the confidentiality of individually identifiable information
acquired for exclusively statistical purposes under a pledge of confidentiality by controlling
access to and uses of such information. In some cases, CIPSEA has a significant impact on the
state’s ability to share data with other users. A copy of the CIPSEA law can be found on the
State Intranet (StateWeb) at http://199.221.111.170/security/CIPSEA%20Title%20V.doc
CIPSEA precludes the release by BLS and the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) to other
agencies or to the public of any employer reported data for individual reporting units without the
specific written authorization of the State Workforce Agency. Blanket authorization for this type
of data sharing can be granted to BLS via the LMI Cooperative Agreement by checking the
appropriate boxes in section F (Data Sharing Blanket Approval) of the QCEW program work
statement.
General guidelines for the sharing of data under CIPSEA include the following:


Data collected by UI and the State Workforce Agencies for the QCEW are sharable for
statistical and UI administrative purposes.



In the case where data collected by the states for other BLS programs that pledge
confidentiality [Current Employment Statistics (CES), Occupational Employment
Statistics (OES) and Occupational Safety and Health Statistics (OSHS)] are used in the
QCEW, these data are not sharable without intervention to remove the confidential
portion. State QCEW systems have programs that allow the creation of CIPSEA
compliant files.



Data may be shared fully between governmental agents who have sworn to protect the
confidentiality of data under CIPSEA. These include all BLS and state staff participating
in BLS programs or using BLS confidential data. As a result, states and BLS may freely
share QCEW data with each other on an as-needed basis.

Other laws that affect the release of QCEW data include:





The Social Security Act
Chapter 23 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (the Federal Unemployment Tax Act)
The Wagner-Peyser Act
Other regulations issued by the Employment and Training Administration (ETA) and/or
the Secretary of Labor

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Preface

Page viii

The regulations cited above are applicable to data collected by the state on the state's quarterly
contribution reports or initial status determination forms for inclusion in the QCEW Program.
Information collected for the QCEW Program on U.S. Office of Management and Budget
(OMB) approved forms (such as the Industry Classification Form, Industry Verification Form,
and the Multiple Worksite Report) are governed by the BLS Commissioner's Order No. 1-06
(Commissioner's Order on Confidentiality), which requires BLS to hold these data in confidence
to the full extent permitted by Federal law. The informed consent language on the individual
forms indicates that the states will use the information for Unemployment Insurance program
purposes, statistical purposes, and other purposes permitted by state law.
Public disclosure of QCEW data is limited in some cases, in order to protect the identity and
economic information of employers that provide data under a pledge or expectation of statistical
confidentiality.
Higher-level aggregates can include the non-disclosable data suppressed at the detailed levels.
However, disclosure limitation techniques have been applied to limit the extent to which these
totals could be used to reveal the data for individual employers.
Information regarding employment and wages of UCFE-covered Federal employees is deemed
to be fully disclosable under provisions of the Freedom of Information Act.
StateWeb http://199.221.111.170/ has a section on Confidentiality and Security that provides a
convenient source of information on BLS rules, including determinations on handling data based
on CIPSEA.

Authorization
COLLECTION APPROVED BY O.M.B.: O.M.B., 1220-0012
O.M.B. APPROVAL EXPIRES: FEBRUARY 28, 2021.
Reports from the "Employment, Wages, and Contributions program" (also known as the "QCEW
program") are authorized by 42 U.S.C. 503, and 20 CFR 609. Reporting is required to obtain or
retain funding by BLS.
In addition, the Annual Refiling Survey is an integral part of the QCEW program in which
employers are generally surveyed over a three-year cycle. This survey is authorized under 29
U.S.C. 2.
Comments regarding the burden estimates or any other aspect of the QCEW Program or its
Annual Refiling Survey, including suggestions for reducing the burden, should be sent to the
Bureau of Labor Statistics, Division of Administrative Statistics and Labor Turnover, Room
4860, 2 Massachusetts Ave., NE, Washington, DC 20212 and to the Office of Management and
Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project, Washington, DC 20503.

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

September 2019

Page 1-1

Chapter 1 – Overview of the QCEW Program
The Quarterly Census of Employment and Wages (QCEW) Program, formerly referred to as the
ES-202 program, is a cooperative program involving the State Workforce Agencies (SWAs) and
the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) of the U.S. Department of Labor. The QCEW program
collects employment and wage information for workers covered by State Unemployment
Insurance (UI) laws and for Federal workers covered by the Unemployment Compensation for
Federal Employees (UCFE) program. Data collected under the QCEW program serve as a
sampling frame for BLS establishment surveys and as an input to other Federal and State
programs, thereby playing a central role in monitoring the nation's economy. The data are
gathered through the cooperation of various offices within the SWAs and BLS.
The program began with the Social Security Act of 1935 and evolved into a cornerstone of
modern labor market information. The process of data collection occurs on a quarterly basis
through the production of the Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file and on
an annual basis through the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS). States produce the data and send it
to BLS using a standardized State processing system. Common terminology is used for clear and
consistent communication and reporting of data throughout the program.
------------------------- Contents of Chapter 1 ------------------------1.1 The Program and Its Data
1.1.1 Data Sources
1.1.2 Data Transmission via the EQUI
1.2 Purpose and Uses of the Data
1.3 History of the QCEW Program
1.4 Responsibilities of the Participants
1.5 Overview of Quarterly and Annual Processing
1.5.1 Main Processing Flow
1.6 Using Standardized Processing Systems
1.7 Definitions - Basic Terms
1.8 Coverage of the QCEW Program

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-2

1.1 The Program and Its Data
The Quarterly Census of Employment and Wages (QCEW) Program, formerly referred to as the
ES-202 program, is a Federal/State cooperative program between the State Workforce Agencies
(SWAs) and the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). The QCEW program collects employment
and wage information for workers covered by State unemployment insurance (UI) laws and for
Federal workers covered by the Unemployment Compensation for Federal Employees (UCFE)
program.
Jobs that are exempt or otherwise not covered by unemployment insurance are not included. In
the private sector, this includes certain wage and salary agricultural employees, self-employed
farmers, self-employed nonagricultural workers, domestic workers, and unpaid family workers.
Workers covered by the railroad unemployment insurance system and members of the Armed
Forces, including those stationed in the United States, and are also excluded. Certain types of
nonprofit employers, such as religious organizations, are given a choice of coverage or exclusion
in a number of States, so data for their employees are reported to a limited degree. Some
students and spouses of students in the employ of schools, colleges, and universities are also
excluded. Program coverage is detailed later in this manual.
New employers provide information about their owners, location(s), addresses, activities using
Initial Status Forms and other means. Ongoing employers report wage and employment data via
the Quarterly Contributions Report (QCR) or the Multiple Worksite Report (MWR). The MWR
distributes UI account level information to the worksite level. This itemized profile of an
account provides specific geographic and economic activity designations for each business
establishment a company may have at various locations across a State. MWR solicitation and
collection options provide a means for large employers with multiple locations to streamline the
reporting of their employment and wage data. The Report of Federal Employment and Wages
(RFEW) and MWR data are collected centrally for some reporters.
The QCEW program produces a collection of highly detailed, accurate, and comprehensive
employment and wage totals for every county in the United States, Puerto Rico, and the Virgin
Islands. These main data categories are combined with address and code information assigned
during a business’ Initial Registration with the Tax Department and later validated or updated
based on response to the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS). State QCEW staff are tasked with
collecting, compiling, reviewing, researching, and explaining the data using the State standard
system and methodologies outlined in this manual.
The combined information is transmitted quarterly to the Bureau of Labor Statistics in
Washington, DC, on the Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file. The
national office processes, and with Regional Offices, edits the State-supplied data. After a
rigorous review cycle, BLS publishes this multi-faceted database according to a well-publicized
schedule to a wide variety of users. A number of States choose to publish data after the
conclusion of BLS review. The State agencies work in cooperation with the BLS to gather data
and publish information derived from those data. A common set of micro data are used for State

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-3

and national purposes. These programs are funded through annual Cooperative Agreements
between the States and BLS.
The resultant micro data cover over ten million business establishments and provide a virtual
census of payroll employment. These micro data are aggregated to the macro level, screened for
confidentiality, and made available to the public. The resultant macro data series [IndustryCounty-Ownership combination] comprise the most complete universe of monthly employment
and quarterly wage information published. The data are also made available to other statistical
agencies, programs within the BLS, and academic researchers and are used as a sampling frame
for BLS surveys and linked longitudinally for labor market research. The successful cooperation
between States and the Bureau of Labor Statistics results in high-quality data that have
widespread applications.
At the macro level, the data are aggregated by industry, ownership, and county to produce a
comprehensive set of employment and wage totals for every county in the United States, Puerto
Rico, and the Virgin Islands. This macro data are then summed further to produce totals by
metropolitan area, State, and the nation as a whole at every level of industrial detail. The
resulting data are a strict hierarchical structure of over three million macro cells giving detailed,
accurate, and comprehensive macro data for every covered sector of the US economy.
The strength of the QCEW macro level data is its comprehensiveness, which results in more
accurate data and substantial industry and geographic detail. The data series produced are the
most complete universe of monthly employment and quarterly wage information available by
industry, ownership, county, and State. A limitation of QCEW data is that the QCEW data are
not as timely as other similar data series such as the Current Employment Statistics (CES) data,
which is a monthly survey of a smaller number of reporters.

1.1.1 Data Sources
New employers register their business with the State UI tax unit via Initial Status Forms,
websites, and other means. This registration provides basic business identification and
classification information to establish a UI account. UI tax administration, the Quarterly
Contribution Reports (QCRs), and the Initial Status Forms are all under the oversight of the
Employment and Training Administration (ETA). The QCRs and the Initial Status Forms are
State-specific; neither are standardized across States. UI tax departments generally handle
follow-up with employers for delinquent and missing data for these two forms.
The MWRs provide monthly employment, quarterly wages, and UI tax information. Unlike the
QCR, the MWRs break out the reported data by worksite. The cooperative program obtains
information on the location and industrial activity of each reported establishment and then
assigns location and industrial classification codes accordingly. This establishment level
information is aggregated by industry code to the county and higher aggregation levels.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-4

Some employers with more than one worksite also file Multiple Worksite Reports with the
QCEW unit of each State in which they have multiple worksites. For some employers, this
requires filing QCRs to UI tax departments in various States as well as filing MWR reports to
QCEW units in those same States. To minimize this burden, BLS has provided some of these
reporters with the means to report all of their MWR data to one central location at the Electronic
Data Interchange Center (EDIC). Such reporters include employers operating numerous
worksites in several States, large government agencies, and service bureaus who handle payroll
functions for many different firms.
The Electronic Data Interchange Center, also known as the EDI Center or EDIC, is located in
Chicago, Illinois. Employers who submit their data to the EDI Center are considered central
reporters. In addition to MWR data, the EDI Center receives files of Report of Federal
Employment and Wage (RFEW) data for some Federal government reporters including the
Department of Defense (DOD) and the United States Postal Service. (See Chapter 4.) Most EDI
data are submitted in a standard ASCII format that was developed in coordination with the CES
program. The EDI Center handles central reporting for both the QCEW and CES programs and
solicits potential central reporters for both programs. Once processing for a company’s quarterly
data is finished, the EDI Center distributes the data electronically to the States. The complexity
of operations required by the EDI Center is justified by the substantial savings in time and
money these operations provide to the SWAs.
A separate but related activity is the ARS. This survey is used to verify or update industry,
geographic, and ownership codes; collect physical location and mailing addresses; and identify
new multi-unit employers. The ARS interfaces with the regular QCEW program quarterly
processing at two points:
1. The units selected for the survey are drawn from the first quarter EQUI deliverable file and
based on BLS selection criteria.
2. The results of the survey are incorporated back into the State's micro database for processing
with first-quarter data the following summer. This information results in MWR breakouts, code
changes, and address enhancements.

1.1.2 Data Transmission via the EQUI
Approximately four months after the end of the reference quarter, States produce their key
QCEW deliverable for BLS -- the EQUI file. This file contains all business establishment
records for the applicable reference quarter plus update transactions for prior quarters. EQUI
records include the following information:
•
•
•
•

UI Account Number
Reporting Unit Number
Employer Identification Number (EIN)
Trade Name

September 2019

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-5

Legal Name
Reporting Unit Description
Addresses (up to three)
Telephone Number, Fax Number and Email Address
Monthly Employment
Quarterly Wages
Classification Codes - Industry, County/Township, and Ownership
Geocoding Information
State Analyst Comments
Predecessor/Successor Information
Numerous other data elements that serve a variety of program purposes.

States submit their EQUI file to the national office. Three transmittal methods are possible
depending on the standardized State system being used. (See Section 12.3.) For States not at the
service center, EUS Web and File Transfer Protocol (FTP) are acceptable. The states complete
and submit transmittal forms via email that give notice of the data submittal and include certain
pieces of information necessary to facilitate Division of Business Establishment Systems
(DBES) processing. As the EQUI data are received, DBES aggregates the data and provides it to
Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) for their data uses.
Each EQUI file is processed through the national office edit system, which produces a set of
reports. Some are error reports requiring further review, and some are reports counting,
tabulating, and listing the data in various ways for production review and quality control
purposes.
Reviewing the Edit Outputs
The Division of Administrative Statistics and Labor Turnover (DASLT), Division of Business
Establishment Systems (DBES), and the regional offices all play roles in reviewing the BLS edit
outputs and identifying potential problems in the data, and work with the States to perform data
clean up in response to the BLS edits. States address the most critical errors first and use the
guidance and/or priorities provided by the regional offices. States further research the data,
make necessary corrections to the micro level records, and provide standard comment codes to
explain unusual data.
Submitting EQUI Update Transactions
States can submit update transactions in response to the BLS edits and include any new or
corrected data to the initial EQUI file through a Subset file. States can also make their update
transactions in their State system and provide these transactions to the regional offices in the
State’s responses to regional and/or national office questions. The national or regional office
then updates these corrections on the BLS national database. These BLS corrections often
render Subsets unnecessary. However, States must submit a Subset if requested by the national
or regional office; otherwise it is at the State’s discretion whether or not to submit a Subset file.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-6

As with the full EQUI file, three transmittal methods are possible for the Subset file. (See
Section 12.3.)
DBES processes the EQUI updates from the States. Another set of reports is produced reflecting
the updated data. As earlier in the cycle, DASLT, DBES and the regional offices all play roles in
reviewing the BLS edit outputs and identifying any remaining problems in the data. Once the
regional office is satisfied with the data, they provide a “clean” notice to the national office
roughly 26 to 30 days after the national office receives the official EQUI file. This is, in
actuality, an interim designation that must be reconfirmed in the future quarters since update
transactions often occur concurrently with the data submittals for future quarters.
Because of the scope of the Social Security legislation and the UI system, the QCEW program
has comprehensive data on almost every business establishment in the United States. The joint
effort between cooperating States and BLS ensures that the data are collected, edited, processed
and released in a manner that is timely and guarantees quality. Over the course of its history, the
QCEW program has evolved from producing a quarterly report of employment and wage data at
the State level to serving as one of the cornerstones of modern labor market information for the
nation.

1.2 Purpose and Uses of the Data
The QCEW data are collected for statistical purposes and are used widely within the Bureau of
Labor Statistics, other government agencies, academic and research circles, and the public at
large.
The Longitudinal Database
One of the chief vehicles for using QCEW micro data is the Longitudinal Database (LDB) which
is the Bureau's central business establishment database. Numerous BLS surveys draw their
sampling frames from the LDB. A critical part of the LDB is the linking of establishment
records from quarter to quarter. While most establishments maintain the same identifying
information over time, establishments that are sold from one owner to another typically
experience a change to their primary identifier; such establishments can appear to be a business
death and birth rather than being continuous over time. LDB processing is intended to link
continuous establishments over time, regardless of any transfer of ownership. Once the data are
linked, the Division of Business Establishment Systems (DBES) makes the updated business
establishment list available for sampling by other Bureau programs. Surveys that draw their
sampling frames from the LDB include the Producer Price Index (PPI), Occupational
Employment Statistics (OES), Current Employment Statistics (CES), Occupational Safety and
Health (OSH), National Compensation Survey (NCS), and Job Opening and Labor Turnover
Survey (JOLTS).
In addition to its role as the Bureau’s business establishment sampling database, the LDB is of
great interest to labor market researchers. Longitudinally linked data can produce accurate and

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-7

extensive statistics on business births and deaths for job creation and job destruction analysis. A
set of standard tables and statistical output is produced each quarter to show these changes within
the economy as a whole.
Broad Statistical Use
The QCEW data have broad significance in evaluating labor trends and major industry
developments and are used in time series analyses, industry comparisons, and special studies
such as analyses of wages by size of establishment. The QCEW program outputs are
instrumental in determining Federal allocations of program grants to State and local governments
and they also serve as the basic source of benchmark information for employment by industry
and employment by size of establishment in the Current Employment Statistics (CES) program,
the Occupational Employment Statistics (OES) program, and the Occupational Safety and Health
(OSH) Statistics program. The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) of the Department of
Commerce uses QCEW data as a base for estimating a large part of the wage and salary
component of personal income accounts, Gross Domestic Product (GDP), and Gross Domestic
Income (GDI). The Social Security Administration and State governments also use QCEW data
in updating economic assumptions and forecasting trends in their taxable wage base. Business
and public and private research organizations find the QCEW program one of the best sources
available of detailed employment and wage statistics.
The QCEW program produces data necessary to both the Employment and Training
Administration (ETA) and the various State Workforce Agencies (SWA) in administering the
employment security program. The data accurately reflect the extent of coverage of the State
unemployment laws and are used to measure:
• UI revenues
• National, State, and local area employment
• Total and taxable wage trends
In addition to its usefulness as a measuring device, the information is used in the following ways:
• Actuarial studies
• Determining experience ratings
• Determining maximum benefit levels
• Determining areas needing Federal assistance
• Determining the solvency of unemployment insurance funds
For specific examples of who uses the QCEW data and for what purpose, refer to the following
table.
Data Users
Bureau of Economic Analysis

Data Uses
Personal Income
(National Income and Product Accounts)
County Personal and Per Capita Income
Gross Domestic Product (GDP)
Gross Domestic Income (GDI)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Data Users
Bureau of the Census
Employment and Training Administration
BLS Directly Collected Surveys
Occupational Safety and Health Statistics
Program
Office of Employment and Unemployment
Statistics (OEUS) Programs

QCEW Program Office (DASLT)

SWA Research Units (Non-OEUS Programs)
SWA Employment Security Units
SWA UI Unit

Other State Government

Local Economic Planners
Private Sector Planning

Private Consultants
Academics
Media
General Public
Publication of Data

Page 1-8

Data Uses
Industry Coding
Sampling
Actuarial and Trust Fund Analysis
Insured Unemployment Rate
Extended Benefit Trigger
Producer Price Index Sampling
NCS Sampling
Sampling and Benchmarking
CES Benchmarking and Estimation Research
Local Area Unemployment Statistics (LAUS)
Program's Small Area Employment
Estimates
OES Sampling and Benchmarking
JOLTS Sampling and Benchmarking
Publication and Press Releases
Birth/Death and Gross Flow Studies
Other Longitudinal Analysis
Wage Survey Sampling
Birth/Death Studies
Job Service Sampling for Audits
Computation of General UI Tax Rates
Setting UI Tax Rates for New Employers by
Industry
Determination of Maximum Weekly Benefit
Amounts
Revenue Department Budget Modeling
Regulatory Use (e.g., Survey Employers by
industry)
Measuring Demand for Transportation
Forecasting Demand for Schools, Roads, etc.
Economic Forecasting by Banks
Utilities Measuring Demand by Industry
Insurance Companies Setting Rates by
Industry
Econometric Modeling and Forecasting
Assorted Research
Articles and Publications
Miscellaneous

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-9

Data from the QCEW program are regularly used to publish reports and issue press releases,
such as the following examples:
1. Employment and Wages Annual Averages: This annual bulletin is a comprehensive book of
QCEW macro data published 10 to 12 months after the close of the fourth quarter in the
reference year.
2. County Employment and Wages: This publication provides a quarterly count of employment
and wages reported by employers covering more than 95 percent of U.S. jobs, available at the
county, MSA, State and national levels by industry.
3. Business Employment Dynamics: This publication and quarterly data series consist of gross
job gains and gross job losses statistics from 1992 forward. These data help to provide a picture
of the dynamic State of the labor market.
4. Public Release Files: This macro data are available to the public on the web at LABSTAT,
the Bureau's public-access site. These data are essentially the full set of data from which the
news releases are extracted. As such, the public release files are typically available shortly after
the corresponding annual or quarterly press releases. The annual data includes establishments,
employment, total wages, average pay, and average weekly wage. The quarterly data includes
establishments, total wages, average weekly wage, and average monthly employment. Data are
available at the county, metropolitan area, State, and national levels at full NAICS industry
detail.
5. Other Releases: In addition, BLS releases data through Monthly Labor Review (MLR)
articles The Editor Desk (TED), Spotlight on Statistics, social media and other means. The
cooperating SWAs also issue quarterly and/or annual reports of QCEW data. States are required
to publish QCEW data under the Labor Market Information (LMI) cooperative agreement.
These reports are issued in various formats.
To maintain the confidentiality of respondents, BLS withholds publication of UI-covered
employment and wage data that does not meet BLS disclosure criteria. (Note that federal
government data are not confidential.)
Since macro totals are hierarchically structured, totals for an entire State are the sum of each
county within the State. Likewise, totals at the national level are a sum of the State totals. If
lower-level totals are suppressed for confidentiality purposes, the upper-level totals are only
released if they do not reveal the suppressed data.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-10

1.3 History of the QCEW Program
Beginnings
The QCEW program began as a result of the Social Security Act of 1935, which among other
things, authorized collection of information to determine if State unemployment compensation
programs were in compliance with the act. Unemployment insurance was instituted to provide
temporary financial assistance to unemployed persons.
From the inception of the national UI system in 1938, when the Federal Unemployment Tax Act
(FUTA) became effective, until 1972, collection of the data, publication, and technical expertise
were the responsibilities of the U.S. Department of Labor's Manpower Administration or its
predecessor agencies. In 1972, technical responsibility was transferred to BLS.
Deliverables
In 1980, the QCEW program deliverables consisted of a macro-level report with data classified
by 4-digit Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) code by ownership at the Statewide level.
This report, due the last day of the fifth month following the end of each quarter, was transmitted
to BLS on tape. Within BLS, these macro-level data were subjected to basic edits designed to
detect invalid data and list records that failed limited month-to-month employment and/or
average wage tests. No inter-quarter edit was performed to check changes in employment and/or
wage levels between quarters even though such changes account for most of the questionable
records. Inter-quarter changes often reflect changes in employer reporting from the previous to
the current quarter, for example, not submitting a quarterly contribution report or statistical
supplement, or installing a new payroll system. The States received the edit output from BLS
and were required to complete their review and provide corrections within a 60-day clean-up
period with regional office assistance.
States also independently provided the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) with a tape of
county-level QCEW data by 2-digit industry code 30 days after the ES-202 Report due date.
BEA used this data for their Personal Income and Gross National Product estimates. (BEA now
emphasizes Gross Domestic Product rather than Gross National Product.) BEA staff manually
reviewed the data and contacted the States directly with their questions for specific records.
BEA then provided BLS with a copy of these edited county-level employment and wage data to
satisfy various metropolitan area and county data requests and to develop a Wage Index for ETA.
This index was used to determine the maximum wages that an enrollee in the Comprehensive
Employment and Training Act (CETA) Public Service Employment (PSE) program could be
paid. BLS, using ETA working funds, compensated BEA for an accelerated review of these
county-level data so that the needs of ETA could be met.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-11

An Annual Refiling Survey (ARS), used to verify or update employer industry, area, and
ownership codes, was already part of the QCEW program at that time. Most States, however,
were not meeting the program goal of conducting the survey for 1/3 of the employer universe
each year, nor were many States following the cyclical ARS schedule recommended in the
QCEW Operating Manual. At the conclusion of the ARS each year, States were required to
submit a Code Change Supplement (CCS). The CCS report at that time was only a summary
listing of all the industry and ownership changes that would be effective with the next firstquarter ES-202 Report. This listing was produced at only the Statewide level and was due on
July 31 of each year. It consisted of two sections. The first was a "To-From" arrangement that
displayed:
1. All of the movement into a 4-digit industry in SIC order
2. The corresponding 4-digit industry code that was the source of the movement and
3. The December employment being transferred.
The second section showed the "From-To" relationship. Determining the net movement within a
particular 4-digit industry code required manual computations, and sub-State analysis was
impossible.
Also in 1980, States provided a separate tape to BLS containing the names and addresses of
employers that were covered by Unemployment Insurance (UI). This was essentially
identification information for the micro records whose employment and wages formed the basis
of the States' macro data. This Name and Address tape, submitted once a year, was used to
update the BLS sampling frame for many of its various establishment surveys. The tape
contained data for the first quarter of each year and was due on October 1. All editing review
and correction of the micro-level Name and Address file were conducted by Office of Survey
Design staff in Washington. States received little or no substantive feedback on the quality of
these micro data.
Initiative and Improvement
In 1981, to increase both the geographic and industrial level of detail available, BLS proposed
that all States submit one macro-level tape each quarter providing 4-digit SIC detail by county, in
lieu of separate tapes showing different levels of detail to BLS (Statewide 4-digit industry code)
and BEA (county 2-digit SIC). BLS proposed copying this tape upon receipt and providing it to
BEA. This was phased in over a three-year period, with the last States converting with the
submittal of data for the fourth quarter of 1983.
In 1982, BLS began producing and providing multi-quarter listings to assist regional office staff
and States in their review of these employment and wage data. This was the first formal review
of employment and wage changes between quarters. The listing presented Statewide data by 4digit SIC and ownership for six quarters. It was developed as an interim measure until an interquarter edit could be designed and implemented.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-12

In 1983, an inter-quarter edit was implemented to further assist States and BLS staff in
identifying questionable data, but only at the Statewide level. This was another interim measure
until a full-scale county-level macro edit could be tested, documented, and installed.
During this same period, the funds that ETA had been providing to BLS were reduced as the
CETA PSE program was phased out. This reduction of the BEA role in the county-level edit and
review process created a void which BLS would fill about a year later.
In 1983, the Office of Employment and Unemployment Statistics assumed program office
responsibility for the BLS Universe Maintenance System (UMS) from the Office of Survey
Design. The UMS was the computer system housing the sampling frame used to conduct most
directly collected BLS establishment surveys. As noted earlier, the States had received no
feedback on the quality or content of the micro-level UI Name and Address files that were the
input to the UMS.
One of the changes that initiated a transition from a macro to a micro emphasis was the redesign
of the CCS Report. To meet many different program needs, the summary listing was replaced
with a tape that contained all noneconomic code changes at the micro level. Since the new data
were submitted at the micro level (including State-specific UI number) and included all
identifying code information along with December employment, summaries of net employment
changes could be produced at the 4-, 3-, 2-, and 1-digit industry code level of detail for the
Nation, State, or metropolitan areas. The Current Employment Statistics (CES) program was
able to use the tape to produce summaries of change for each of their basic estimating cells.
They could also use these micro-level records to update the industry, county, and ownership
codes of their sample members.
The QCEW program used the CCS micro data to verify changes in codes and also to link records
placed on the UMS database. At that time, the record key consisted of a combination of the UI
account number and the industry, county, and ownership codes. Previously, a change in industry
code, for example, created a discontinuity on the UMS by terminating the record with the old
code and replacing it with a record with the new code. The micro-based CCS permitted linkage
of these records as they were loaded to the UMS, thereby preventing the creation of false births
and deaths that would otherwise have resulted from the code changes.
In 1984, BLS introduced the county-level macro edit. This edit provided BLS with the
flexibility to adjust the edit tolerances each quarter, if desired. The edit was also exported to the
States to provide their staff with the opportunity to review these macro data prior to submittal
and update appropriate records or provide comments to BLS to explain unusual data.
Until 1986, management of the QCEW program was the joint responsibility of ETA and BLS.
Before 1984, the ETA provided States with operating funds from the UI Trust Fund and had
overall financial management responsibilities, whereas BLS had only technical responsibility.
During 1984 and 1985, funding responsibility was shared. Beginning in 1986, BLS assumed full
responsibility for both the funding and technical aspects of the program.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-13

In 1986, BLS modified an existing State system to create the SIC Refiling Control System
(SRCS) software package for States to manage ARS activities. By 1988, all but five States had
installed the SRCS, which managed the survey activities related to the 1987 SIC Revision. One
output of this software package was the ARS Control File, which included updated code
information from each employer that was sent an ARS questionnaire. The control file included
information on the following:
1. Whether the employer responded to the ARS
2. Whether the employer indicated that the industry description on the ARS questionnaire
accurately described the industrial activity
3. Updates to SIC, county and or ownership codes, plus auxiliary code, if applicable; and
4. Date the industry code was verified or corrected.
SRCS was replaced in 1988 with a newer version, Annual Refiling Control System (ARCS), due
to multiple bugs and the upcoming 1987 SIC Revision. This system was mandated by BLS to be
installed in all States.
After the 1987 SIC Revision, the control file tape became a new deliverable and was used to
supplement the BLS Universe Database (UDB), which replaced the UMS in 1989.
Universe Database (UDB)
In 1987, BLS launched a multi-year project to improve the quality of the data on the UMS and to
redesign the database on which these data were stored. States were funded to implement these
new requirements over a two-to-three year period. New data elements were added to the Name
and Address file, and the frequency of the file was increased from an annual submittal (for first
quarter) to a quarterly submittal, beginning in 1989.
BLS also developed the ability to store various types of addresses on the new database.
Emphasis was placed on obtaining physical location addresses of establishments. A Reporting
Unit Number was also added to each record to uniquely identify it and distinguish between
establishments reported under the same UI account number in the same county and industry.
Also in 1987, on the recommendation of the Economic Policy Council (EPC), OMB requested
that BLS submit a proposal to become the central agency for the collection of nonagricultural
business identification information. The main purpose of the EPC recommendation was to
increase both the quality and comparability of national economic statistics by establishing a
single, high-quality source of business data that would be available to selected Federal statistical
agencies.
To meet this challenge, BLS recognized that the business identification information currently
available on employers engaged in multiple operations within a State would have to be
improved. The Business Establishment List (BEL) Improvement project was initiated to obtain
this multi-establishment employer information on a quarterly basis.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-14

BEL Improvement Project
Under the BEL Improvement Project, collection of employment and wage data for multiestablishment employers was changed from a reporting unit (county/industry total) basis to an
individual worksite (establishment) basis. As part of this change, the size criterion used to define
multi-establishment employers was lowered to include smaller employers. As a result, the
number of establishments and the number of multi-establishment employers increased. The
State statistical supplement forms that were previously used to collect multi-establishment
employer data were replaced by a standardized form for use in all States.
This project was initiated in late 1988 using the ARS questionnaire. The survey obtained
worksite identification information for existing multi-establishment employers and identified
multi-establishment employers previously coded as single-unit employers. To capture physical
location address information for single unit employers collected from the ARS questionnaire, the
SRCS was modified in mid-1988, and the new version was exported to the States.
A new standardized statistical supplement, the Multiple Worksite Report (MWR), received OMB
clearance and was mandated for State use beginning with the first quarter of 1991. (While State
use was mandatory, the actual reporting on the form by an employer was voluntary in most
States and mandatory in others.) The MWR was intended to collect employment and wage
information quarterly from multi-establishment employers.
In 1988, as part of the 1987 SIC revision, the 60-day macro data clean-up period was reduced to
30 days to meet the tight timeframe resulting from dual submittal of QCEW program
deliverables under the two classification systems. This reduction in the time frame also
accomplished another objective: to ensure that States had clean micro data available to submit on
the Name and Address files. Prior to this change in timing, the Name and Address file had been
due 30 days after the due date for the first quarter macro report. But because the States
previously had 60 days to clean-up the macro report, the Name and Address file could have been
created from micro data that were not clean. The reduction from 60 to 30 days was a logical
step, and assumed that States would make all necessary micro-level changes to their QCEW
working files prior to creating the UI Name Address file.
Electronic Data Interchange Center (EDIC)
In February of 1995, the Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) Center opened in Chicago, Illinois.
The EDI Center provides companies and installations who have multiple worksites in more than
one State with the means to submit their MWR and RFEW data to a central location rather than
separately to each State, and to submit data electronically rather than on paper. The EDI Center
processes the data submitted and forwards these edited data to the States for inclusion in the
States' micro databases and submitted EQUI files.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-15

ES-202 Improvement Project
The Bureau continued with more improvements to the QCEW program and the BEL with the
implementation of the ES-202 Improvement Project ("Mic/Mac") in reference year 1997. One of
these improvements included replacing the three separate and somewhat redundant deliverables
with one deliverable -- the Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file. The
EQUI incorporated many new data elements, including information from the ARS. A macro file
would be generated in the national office from the micro data it contained.
Another major accomplishment of the Mic/Mac project was to convert all States to standardized
QCEW processing systems, a key to implementing timely updates to State systems at relatively
low costs. These processing systems, developed and maintained by Utah and Maine, ensure that
the changes States make to their micro database files are automatically reflected on the EQUI
file. Also entailed in the Mic/Mac project were many changes to core processing in the States
and BLS, including revamped editing routines to ensure consistent edits between BLS and the
States. These systems were also designed to accommodate the conversion to the North America
Industrial Classification System (NAICS).
Service Center
September of 1997 saw the establishment of a service center to generate and process data for the
States that use EXPO, the largest standardized QCEW State processing system. Not all EXPO
states use this facility; however, States that do so no longer need to install updates to the system
locally or generate EQUI files locally for shipment to BLS. Both of these functions are
accomplished directly at the service center. A Window’s based downsized system, WIN-202, is
used by 14 States with similar functionality.
Longitudinal Database (LDB)
Implementation of the ES-202 Improvement Project in reference year 1997 necessitated
improvements in the UDB to accommodate the new EQUI file received from the States. To this
end, the Longitudinal Database (LDB) was created. When it went online in April of 1999, the
LDB became the Bureau's official sampling frame and replaced the UDB. Initially, the LDB
only contained data from reference year and quarter 1997/1 through 1998/1. Eventually,
however, all data from reference year and quarter 1990/1 forward were made available. The
LDB had many improvements over the UDB, including new and revised data elements, the
incorporation of NAICS codes, an improved record linkage system, and the ability to conduct
longitudinal (across time) analysis of the data.
North American Industry Classification System (NAICS)
Beginning in FY 1998, the Bureau implemented the North American Industry Classification
System (NAICS). NAICS was developed in cooperation with our partners in the North

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-16

American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) and provides a consistent framework for the
collection, analysis, and dissemination of industrial statistics. Under NAICS, the U.S., Canadian,
and Mexican statistical agencies use the same detailed definitions to collect, summarize, and
publish statistics about their respective domestic economies.
NAICS can be contrasted with the older Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) system that it
replaced. NAICS represents a change in the conceptual framework of establishment
classification. Unlike the SIC system, which classified establishments by the product they
produced or the service they rendered, NAICS classifies establishments on a production-oriented
or supply-based conceptual framework. This conceptual framework groups establishments into
industries according to similarities in the processes used to produce goods or services. This
supply-based conceptual framework allows establishments to be categorized on both inputs and
outputs, rather than on outputs alone. It also allows the integration of every part of the
production process into the measurement of productivity and the classification of industry.
NAICS is a new classification system for our modern economy and reflects the emergence of
many new industries. New sectors have been added, such as the Information sector (which
includes new industries such as “Internet Publishing and Broadcasting”), and the
Accommodation and Food Services sector (which combined the accommodation and restaurant
industries).
The change in industrial classification systems from SIC to NAICS had a profound impact on the
data collected within the QCEW program. It meant recoding all eight million records in the
Bureau's business establishment list. Fortunately, approximately 45 percent of the detailed
SIC industries matched directly into NAICS industries and could be automatically recoded. The
remaining 55 percent transferred into multiple NAICS industries and had to be recoded via the
Annual Refiling Survey. Unfortunately, the recoding to NAICS for industries without a direct
counterpart meant a break in the time series, and broad sectors of the economy lost some of their
historical comparability. Nevertheless, this drawback of any change in industry classification
system was outweighed by the many benefits of NAICS, such as the production-side framework
on which it is based and the increased amount of industry detail. There are approximately 1,200
NAICS industries compared to the 1,004 SIC industries, increasing industrial detail by about 20
percent. The end result is data that are more useful to the wide variety of users the QCEW
program serves.
Under NAICS, new and emerging industries (e.g., high-technology industries and services) are
rapidly incorporated with planned five-year revision cycles. The first five-year revision replaced
the 1997 NAICS codes with 2002 NAICS codes (The 2002 NAICS revision was necessary
because the United States, Canada, and Mexico did not reach agreement on the detailed
structures for the construction and wholesale trade sectors in time for the original NAICS
publication in 1997). Beginning with 2001/1 data, all QCEW records had a 2002 NAICS code.
The second five-year revision replaced the 2002 NAICS codes with 2007 NAICS codes. The
2007 NAICS revision was much smaller in scope and only involved approximately 90,000
establishments covering two million employees. Of these, approximately 66,000 establishments
were in "split" industries in which an existing NAICS 2002 code split into more than one NAICS

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-17

2007 code. The remaining affected industries were "direct" conversions in which a NAICS 2002
code converted directly to one NAICS 2007 code. Beginning with 2007/1 data, all QCEW
records have a 2007 NAICS code.
The third five-year revision replaced the 2007 NAICS codes with 2012 NAICS codes. With the
introduction of this revision, some industries were merged into new industries, some were
merged into pre-existing industries, while others were split into two or more industries. Of the
1,193 detailed industries used by BLS under NAICS 2007, 200 industries were affected by the
NAICS 2012 revision. As a result of the various changes, the industry count declined to 1,083.
Approximately 698,000 private establishments changed industries. Beginning with 2011/1 data,
all QCEW records have a 2012 NAICS code.
The fourth five-year revision replaced the 2012 NAICS codes with 2017 NAICS codes. Eleven
NAICS 2012 codes were direct conversions to one NAICS 2017 code, affecting about 95,000
establishments and 3.2 million employment. Thirteen NAICS 2012 codes consolidated (rolled
up or combined) into five NAICS 2017 codes, affecting about 26,000 establishments and
413,000 employment. Four NAICS 2012 codes split into seven new NAICS 2017 codes,
affecting about 43,000 establishments and about 1.7 million employment that could be split into
one or more new industries. There were 1,154 new index items added. Beginning with 2017/1
data, all QCEW records have a 2017 NAICS code.
Geocoding and Information Expansion Initiatives
In FY 2003, the Bureau took steps to increase the amount of information contained on the
national office and State micro databases. In response to user demand, BLS began to geocode
the entire business register. Geocoding is the process of adding geographic information to a file
or database so that its objects can be precisely located and displayed on a map. The file must
contain data that are geographic in nature (such as State, county, zip code, and street address)
that can then be assigned x and y coordinates on a map. The QCEW micro data file contains a
rich set of geographic information that can be geocoded, allowing States and the BLS to produce
and publish sub-county employment and wage data.
In addition to geocoding information, the EQUI file was expanded with many other data
elements that were contained on the State micro databases but were not being submitted on the
EQUI file. The file expansion was an increase in information that could be used to improve the
quality and usefulness of QCEW program data.
Contracted Annual Refiling Survey (CARS) project
In 2006 CARS began with twelve pilot States participating. A commercial vendor took over the
duties of printing refile forms, stuffing envelopes, mail out and sorting returns. All forms were
sent to the State, with those requiring further review separated for State processing. Electronic
files of response status by UI number was provided to the State. The use of the contractor for
these tasks reduced survey costs and the program is now available to all States.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-18

MWR Print contract/ MWR Web
Beginning as a pilot program in 2007 The MWR Print Contract prints login credentials on the
quarterly forms or letters for respondents to register on MWR Web. DCB oversees the MWR
print contract with a private contractor who prints and mails the forms and processes the
responses. All States are enrolled in MWR Web.

1.4 Responsibilities of the Participants
The QCEW Program is a Federal/State cooperative program or "Fed/State program” in which
State agencies work in cooperation with the BLS to collect data and publish information derived
from those data. A common set of micro data are used for State and national purposes. These
programs are funded through annual Cooperative Agreements between the States and BLS.
From collection to publication, the accuracy and timeliness of QCEW data relies upon the
participation of the following organizations:
State Workforce Agencies (SWAs): These State agencies are responsible for collecting the
data, editing it to ensure that the quality is acceptable, and publishing analyses of the data. Both
the UI tax unit and the State QCEW unit are administered by the State Workforce Agencies, but
they are separate entities and have different responsibilities. The UI tax unit is primarily
concerned with administering the State's unemployment insurance system. The QCEW unit is
primarily concerned with collecting employment and wage data to be used for statistical
purposes. State agencies collect QCEW data on the quarterly UI Contribution Report or MWR
as a byproduct of the administration of the UI program.
Division of Administrative Statistics and Labor Turnover (DASLT): This office is part of
the Bureau’s Office of Employment and Unemployment Statistics. Also known as the Program
Office, DASLT oversees the funding and operations of the QCEW Program and directs the
course of program advances and methodology. Within DASLT, various branches have
responsibility for different components of the QCEW program.
Current Data Analysis (CDA): This branch reviews employment and wage totals each
quarter in support of QCEW publication activities. This branch also publishes the
County Employment and Wages news release.
Data Collection Branch (DCB): This branch oversees all coding and data collection
activities.
State Operations and Frame Research (SOFR): This branch conducts a quarterly
micro-level review using longitudinal database (LDB) files (based on the EQUI) and
oversees the LDB and Business Employment Dynamics (BED)-related activities.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-19

Systems Coordination and Redesign (SCR): This group oversees fixes and
enhancements to the EXPO and WIN systems. They also work on the development of a
new State processing system.
Division of Business Establishments Systems (DBES): This office is part of the Bureau's
Office of Technology and Survey Processing (OTSP). Also known as the Project Office, DBES
is responsible for receiving data from the SWAs, processing it through the national office's
information technology systems, and producing various data-release files and tabulations. DBES
maintains the Longitudinal Database, and develops and maintains the national office's
information technology systems.
Statistical Methods Staff (SMS): This office is part of the Bureau's Office of Employment and
Unemployment Statistics. SMS is responsible for ensuring the statistical integrity of Fed/State
programs. SMS consists primarily of statisticians who monitor and improve upon the statistical
methodologies.
Office of Field Operations (OFO): OFO operates on two levels: at the National Office and
through six regional offices.
National Office (NOs); In the national office, the Division of Cooperative Survey
Programs (DCSP) part of OFO-National Office, provides coordination between the
regional offices and the program office, ensuring that the SWAs are provided with the
funding, equipment, and information necessary for operations.
Regional Offices (ROs): OFO stations personnel in the Fed/State branch of each
regional office to ensure that the SWAs receive the resources necessary to fulfill their
obligations under the cooperative agreement providing training and procedural, technical,
and operational support.. The regional office also ensures the quality and timeliness of
State submitted data. The regional offices are the States’ primary points of contact to
BLS, acting as liaison and technical arbitrator between the States and the national office.
The regional offices are Boston/New York, Philadelphia, Atlanta, Chicago,
Dallas/Kansas City, and San Francisco.
Utah and Maine's State System Developers: Utah and Maine State offices developed and
maintain the two standardized State processing systems as described in Section 1.6.
Electronic Data Interchange Center (EDIC): This center in Chicago collects employment and
wage data centrally from multi-State companies, large payroll providers, and federal installations
in order to reduce reporter burden. This central processing saves States time and money by
sparing them the effort and expense of mailing out MWR and RFEW forms, collecting the data,
and then entering the data from the forms into an electronic format. Once EDIC completes the
processing of a company's quarterly data, it distributes the data electronically to the States. The
EDIC coordinates with DASLT to target large employers and large payroll providers, which are
used by some employers to maintain payroll records. DASLT also works with these large
payroll providers to produce the MWR data.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-20

1.5 Overview of Quarterly and Annual Processing
Quarterly and annual processing consists primarily of collecting and updating data, placing data
on a database, and distributing data. The data must be collected in an accurate and timely
manner. The database must be maintained and updated so that the data are usable and
retrievable. Once collected and stored, the data must be made available to the users in such a
way that confidentiality is preserved and the integrity of the data are not compromised.
The remainder of Section 1.5 consists of detailed diagrams showing the processing flow of the
QCEW Program. EXHIBIT 1A shows a diagram of the main processing flow for the whole
program. The numbered paragraphs that follow explain the numbered activities on the diagram.
See Appendix A for all detailed processing flow diagrams.

1.5.1 Main Processing Flow
The QCEW is a large, complex program with many outside participants that contribute to the
data flow. To minimize complexity and provide a solid understanding of the basic data flow, the
flowchart given below and those in Appendix A portray the processes for a single quarter.
Please be reminded that States update/process more than one quarter at a time. The main
processing flow is given with peripheral processes detailed later in this manual. Peripheral
processes occur at activity 4, 5, 21, 29, and 33 of the main processing flow. Activity 4 receives
data from four peripheral processes. These peripheral processes flowcharts are available in
Appendix A and the topics included are covered in the following chapters.
•
•
•
•
•

Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers (Chapter 3)
Multiple Worksite Central Reporting (Chapter 4)
Central Reporting of Federal Data (Chapter 4 section 6)
MWR Web Internet Data Collection (Chapter 4 section 8)
Annual Refiling Survey (Chapter 6)

Activity 5 receives data from peripheral process E, geocode files. Please refer to section 1.3 and
Appendix V for more information about the geocode files.
DBES provides data files and reports to BEA and CES as the States’ EQUI data are received
(peripheral process F), corrected, and/or updated (peripheral process G). After the EQUI cleanup due date for each quarter, one additional BEA deliverable and the ETA/LAUS deliverables
are generated and validated by DBES staff. They are produced both in print and file versions
that are due to BEA, ETA, and LAUS by the 5th of the month following the EQUI clean-up
deadline for that quarter (peripheral process I). These are included as peripheral process F.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-21

Activity 31 passes data from the main processing flow to the Longitudinal Database peripheral
process. The business establishment micro data that are summarized to produce the macro-level
Business Employment Dynamics (BED) data are the same source of data for the Bureau’s LDB.
Potential New MWR Reporters is discussed in section 3.3. The flowcharts are also in Appendix
A. Explanation for each activity in the main processing flow is provided in the text immediately
following the flowcharts in EXHIBIT 1A Main Processing Flow.

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

October 2018

Page 1-22

EXHIBIT 1A Main Processing Flow
1 | State, UI Tax Depts.
Receive and process QCRs
and Initial Status Forms

2 | State Systems Developers
Prepare and issue State
computer system upgrades
(as needed)
3 | State LMI Units
Install computer system
upgrades

A
D

E

ARS Web &
State collected

Federal & RFEW
State collected

Geocode Files

4 | State LMI Units
Extract quarterly data from
UI tax files

5 | State LMI Units
Place data into State QCEW
micro database
6 | State LMI Units
Implement industry,
geographic, and other
miscellaneous non-economic
and economic changes
7 | State LMI Units
Perform micro edits

8 | State LMI Units
Clean and explain data

MWR/RFEW EDI
central reporting
MWR
State collected

B
C

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

October 2018

Page 1-23

EXHIBIT 1A (continued) Main Processing Flow
9 | State LMI Units
Extract quarterly data from
UI tax files for second time

10 | State LMI Units
Impute for missing data

11 | State LMI Units
Edit, clean, and explain new
and imputed data

12 | State LMI Units
Aggregate micro data

13 | State LMI Units
Perform integrated macro
and micro edits

14 | State LMI Units
Clean and explain data

15 | State LMI Units
& R.O.’s
Report status
information
(ongoing)

16 | OFO – N
Compile and
disseminate status
information
(ongoing)

19 | State LMI Units
Produce full EQUI data
deliverable for BLS

17 | State LMI Units
Provide macro
summary data to
regional offices

18 | R.O.’s
Review macro data

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

October 2018

EXHIBIT 1A (continued) Main Processing Flow
20 | State LMI Units
Submit EQUI data deliverable
and transmittal form
21 | DBES
Generate macro level
estimates for missing or
unusable State files

Data files/reports
to BEA & CES

F

22 | DBES
Process States’ data through
BLS EQUI edit system

23 | DBES
Provide data to DASLT

24 | DASLT, DBES, R.O.’s, and
State LMI units
Review edit outputs
26 | R.O.s
Coordinate with States to
clean and explain data further
as needed
27 | State LMI Units
Clean and explain data in
response to BLS edits and
questions

25 | DASLT, DBES
Assess data for production of
deliverables

Page 1-24

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

October 2018

Page 1-25

EXHIBIT 1A (continued) Main Processing Flow
28 | DASLT, R.O.s, & State LMI
Units
Correct the Official EQUI file
29 | DBES
Process BLS Corrections and
States’ EQUI update
transactions

Data files/reports
to BEA & CES

G

30 | DASLT, DBES, R.O.’s, and
State LMI units
Review edit/correction
outputs

31 | DASLT & R.O.s
Certify data as clean

32 | State LMI Units
Produce State
Publications

33 | DBES
Pass micro data to
LDB

Business
Employment
Dynamics

I

Deliverable to BEA,
CES, & ETA/LAUS

34 | DBES
Produce CCS data
deliverables

35 | DBES
Extract files for
publication, press
releases, and data
releases

36 | DASLT, DBES
Perform nondisclosure
screening
37 | DASLT, DBES
Create & validate publication,
press and data releases
38 | DASLT, DBES
Publish

H

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-26

1. Receive and process QCRs and Initial Status Forms
The QCEW program is a census of all employers subject to State Unemployment Insurance (UI)
laws, supplemented with additional data collected for statistical purposes only. Most of the
QCEW data are collected as a by-product of the States’ administration of the Unemployment
Insurance taxes. Employers file Quarterly Contributions Reports (QCRs) with their State UI tax
department, which is separate from the Labor Market Information (LMI) unit that provides data
to BLS under guidelines set in the Cooperative Agreement. (Both departments are part of the
larger State Workforce Agency). The QCRs provide monthly employment, quarterly wages, and
UI tax information. New employers file Initial Status Forms with the State UI tax unit to initially
register their business. These initial forms provide basic business identification and
classification information to establish a UI account. UI tax administration, the QCRs, and the
Initial Status Forms are all under the oversight of the Employment and Training Administration
(ETA). The QCRs and the Initial Status Forms are State-specific; neither are standardized across
States. UI tax units generally handle follow-up with employers for delinquent and missing data
for these two forms.
2. Prepare and issue State computer system upgrades
Two standard State processing systems are available to the States (SWAs) for conducting the
QCEW program. One is the EXPO system maintained by Utah State staff; the other is the WIN202 system maintained by Maine State staff. Upgrades to the systems are released regularly and
non-scheduled fixes are issued as needed. The upgrades incorporate initiatives and
enhancements requested by BLS plus improvements suggested by State users. The EXPO
system is a mainframe system. It is available for access centrally in a service center environment
and as a distributed product for installation locally in the States. The WIN-202 system is a
client/server system that is installed and operated locally in client States.
3. Install computer system upgrades
States install or implement the system upgrades after receipt, but no later than the time allotted
by the Cooperative Agreement. EXPO States that are operating at the service center are
automatically upgraded. The State developers from Utah and Maine often assist in the
installations.
4. Extract quarterly data from UI tax files
A quarter’s processing begins with the first extract of data from the UI tax files. This extract
contains data from the new, current quarter as well as data from the prior quarter. Because the
UI tax files are State-specific, the States’ QCEW programs that pull data from these files must
also be State-specific.
5. Place data into State QCEW micro database
The extracted UI tax data are placed in the State’s QCEW micro database (State system). Other
sources of QCEW data are collected by the QCEW program itself. These data include:
A. Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) data
B. Multiple Worksite Report (MWR) and Federal (RFEW) data collected centrally from multiState reporters by the EDI Center
C. MWR data collected directly by the State
D. Federal (RFEW) data collected by the State

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-27

6. Implement industry, geographic, and other miscellaneous non-economic and economic
changes
This information comes from various sources including the Annual Refiling Survey, unclassified
account information solicitation (NCA), UI tax information updates, and independent research.
State analysts must determine if the changes are economic or non-economic. Economic changes
are revisions that capture a change occurring in the quarter first attributed the new codes. Noneconomic changes are included on the code change supplement; while economic changes are
implemented in the appropriate open quarter through to the most current quarter. The code
change supplement implementation is detailed in the cooperative agreement.
7. Perform micro edits
States have several options for editing the quarterly data within their standardized system. The
options include:
• running micro edits prior to running a fully integrated micro/macro edit
• starting with a full integrated micro/macro edit
• using a combination of approaches tied to the timing of the multiple UI tax extracts
This flow describes the first option. In the micro edits, the data are edited by establishment. An
establishment record is checked for valid values. This verification includes checks for the
reasonableness of the data (both within the quarter and across quarters).
8. Clean and explain data
The State reviews edit failures and warning flags. The data must be corrected or explained as
needed. Standard comment codes are used to explain unusual data. Narrative comments can
also be entered into the system.
9. Extract quarterly data from UI tax files for second time
States extract current quarter data from the UI tax files for a second time in the quarterly
processing cycle to pick up newly reported and posted data.
10. Impute for missing data
Some employers’ data will be missing, mostly delinquent UI tax filers. Prior to summarizing
and reviewing data at a macro cell level, States must impute for the missing micro (establishment
level) data.
11. Edit, clean, and explain new and imputed data
As earlier, the State reviews any edit failures and warning flags. The data must be corrected or
explained as needed. Standard comment codes are used to explain unusual data, and narrative
comments can also be entered into the system.
12. Aggregate micro data
The micro data are summarized by macro cell (county, ownership, industry combination) prior to
running an integrated micro/macro edit.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-28

13. Perform integrated macro and micro edits
The data at a macro cell are checked for reasonableness – for example, the cell level data are
checked for large fluctuations in employment or wages between quarters. The integrated edit
displays both the summary data for the cell as well as the micro level records that likely caused
the macro level edit flag.
14. Clean and explain data
The State reviews its edit results. The data must be corrected or explained as needed. Standard
comment codes are used to explain unusual data. All corrections are made to micro level records
with macro level data being re-aggregated as needed from the micro data.
15. Report status information (ongoing)
Shortly before the due date for producing the quarterly file deliverable for BLS, the State
formally begins reporting status for the quarter. The status reporting is an ongoing process
typically with a report due every two weeks or so on a schedule announced by OFO. The status
report includes such information as the prognosis for meeting the deliverable due date, clean-up
status for the prior quarter(s), and any changes in the State’s processing environment. The States
report the requested information to their regional offices. The regional offices compile and
submit to the national office the information for their States.
16. Compile and disseminate status information (ongoing)
The Office of Field Operations (OFO) in the national office receives the reports from the
regional offices and issues a consolidated status report for all States.
17. Provide macro summary data to regional offices
The State generates a file of macro data and sends it to the regional office.
18. Review macro data
The regional office enters the macro summary data into an Excel spreadsheet, the 'QCEW/CES
Comparison Sheet, to compare the State QCEW employment data against State CES data and to
compare current year QCEW trends against prior year QCEW patterns in both employment and
wages. The State and regional office also perform these two steps (generating macro summary
data and using it for comparison) before generating the EQUI update file.
19. Produce full EQUI data deliverable for BLS
Approximately four months after the end of the reference quarter, States produce their key
QCEW deliverable for BLS: the Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file.
This file contains all micro data records for the applicable reference quarter plus update
transactions for prior quarters.
20. Submit EQUI data deliverable and transmittal form
States submit their EQUI file to DBES. Three transmittal methods are possible depending on the
State system (refer to Section 12.3). For EXPO States operating at the service center, DBES
simply accesses the applicable files at the service center. For other States, EUS Web and File
Transfer Protocol (FTP) are options. All States complete and submit a transmittal form that

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-29

gives notice of the data submittal and includes certain pieces of information necessary to
facilitate DBES processing.
21. Generate macro level estimates for missing or unusable State files
If States have not submitted the EQUI file by the deadline date, the national office (DBES)
generates macro level estimates.
22. Process States’ data through BLS EQUI edit system into the EQUI database
Each State’s EQUI file is processed through the national office edit system. A set of reports is
produced. Some are error reports requiring further review; some are reports that count, tabulate,
and list the data in various ways for informational purposes.
23. Provide data to DASLT
As the States’ EQUI data are received, DBES also generates macro level aggregations and
provides the macro level files to DASLT for their data uses. DBES loads micro and macro data
to the ES-202 Database (EDB), a client-server system on the BLS LAN, for use by the analyst
staff in the national office and the regional offices.
24. Review edit outputs
DASLT, DBES, the States and the regional offices all play roles in reviewing the BLS edit
outputs and identifying potential problems in the data.
25. Assess data for production of quarterly deliverables
Prior to producing these data, an assessment must be made of which States’ data are usable and
which States’ data are unusable or delinquent.
26. Coordinate with States to clean and explain data further as needed
The regional offices coordinate with their States to perform data clean up in response to the BLS
edits. The most critical errors are addressed first.
27. Clean and explain data in response to BLS edits and questions
In response to the BLS edits and any guidance or priorities given by the regional offices, States
research the data further. The data must be corrected or explained as needed. Standard comment
codes are used to explain unusual data in the State system, narrative details should be provided
on responses to BLS questions. All corrections are made to micro level records on the State
system and provided in response to BLS questions.
28. Correct the Official EQUI file
BLS corrections to the official EQUI file are made based on information provided by States in
response to BLS questions or other errors. BLS may alternatively require the State to submit a
subset with the updated transactions. BLS-required update transactions should be submitted on
the subset shortly after BLS subset approval notification is received. The official deadline is
specified in the cooperative agreement. Beyond BLS required updates, States are permitted to
transmit updates on the subset determined to be critical inclusions. In preparing the subset,
States make the corrections in their State database and then run additional steps that create
matching update transactions for the BLS database. As with the full EQUI file, three transmittal

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-30

methods are possible for the EQUI update transactions file. Due to the cost associated with
subsets, States are encouraged to coordinate with regional offices to make BLS corrections
instead. Note that updates in the State system will automatically be included in the next
quarter’s official EQUI deliverable.
29. Process BLS corrections and States’ EQUI update transactions
DBES processes the BLS corrections and EQUI updates from the States. Following each, an
additional set reports is produced reflecting the revision to the EQUI.
30. Review edit/correction outputs
Similar to earlier in the cycle, DASLT, DBES, the States, and the regional offices all play roles
in reviewing the national office edit outputs and identifying any remaining problems in the data.
Minor problems may be held for submission with the next quarter's EQUI deliverable or
submitted as an additional BLS correction or State update file. Regional offices and the national
office consult to determine the best course of action.
31. Certify data as clean
Once BLS is satisfied with the data, they provide notice to States and DBES that the EQUI data
stored in the EDB is considered “clean.” This is, in actuality, an interim designation that must be
reconfirmed in the future quarters since update transactions occur concurrently with the data
submittals for future quarters.
32. Produce State publications
States publish QCEW data in various formats and on various schedules.
33. Pass micro data to LDB
The business establishment micro data that are summarized to produce the macro-level QCEW
data are the same source of data for the Bureau’s LDB.
34. Produce CCS data deliverables for users
Code Change Supplement (CCS) data are implemented in the time frame detailed in the
cooperative agreement. The CCS data show the changes in classification codes (industry,
county/township, and ownership) that are discovered through the ARS and held for
implementation. DBES produces tabs and files showing units and employment that have shifted
from one cell to another.
35. Extract files for publication, press releases, and data releases
BLS regularly produces publications, press releases, and data releases. Data are pulled at the end
of the quarterly processing for quarterly releases.
36. Perform nondisclosure screening
Nondisclosure screening is performed for publication, press releases, and other uses.
Nondisclosure screening is run so that individual company data are not revealed or discernible in
published data.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-31

37. Create and validate files for publication, press releases, and data releases
DBES and DASLT review summary counts of units, employment, and wages to verify that the
files being used for releases are complete and current. DASLT analyzes the data for publication,
as well as preliminary tables DBES produces for review. Publication tables, press release tables,
and non-disclosure datasets are produced. DBES makes changes in content or format that have
been specified by DASLT and runs the programs that produce the publication tables. DASLT
prepares the press releases and they are issued through OPUB and disseminated.

1.6 Using Standardized Processing Systems
It is imperative that States process all of their data through a standardized system. Standardized
systems allow for centralized system development and issuance of system upgrades, fixes, and
changes. States only need to install the new version and do not need to program the changes
themselves. Within the service-center environment, States always have the most current version
and do not need to install the upgrades themselves. Processing all data through standard systems
ensures uniform and consistent processing across States and efficient application of system
upgrades and changes. Collectively, this results in increased reliability and accuracy of the data.
Two standard systems are available to the States for processing data in the QCEW program.
1) EXPO: A mainframe system maintained by State staff in Utah. EXPO is available for access
centrally in a service center environment or as a distributed product for installation locally in the
States.
2) WIN: A client/server system that is installed and operated locally in client States but
maintained by State staff in Maine.
There are regular releases of upgrades to these computer systems. Non-scheduled fixes are also
issued as needed. The upgrades incorporate initiatives and enhancements requested by BLS plus
improvements suggested by State users. Non service center States install or implement the
system upgrades once received and complete their installation within the timelines stipulated by
the annual cooperative agreement. The State developers from Utah and Maine often assist in the
installations. Installation is done automatically for service center States.
States have several options for editing the quarterly data within their standardized system as
described in Section 12.1.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-32

1.7 Definitions - Basic Terms
The following terms are key concepts for the collection and use of data on the State system and
on the EQUI. These definitions also relate to the Code Change Supplement (generated from
State and BLS micro files as described in Chapter 11).
Auxiliary Units - Under NAICS, auxiliary establishments are classified with a NAICS code
according to the activity of the auxiliary establishment itself. This is in keeping with the
conceptual framework upon which NAICS is based; namely, that establishments are classified
based on their production processes. As an example, a warehouse that serves a primary unit
within the same enterprise will be assigned the NAICS code for warehouse. Thus, the industry
classification of the primary unit (car assembly plant, telephone communications, etc.) cannot be
discerned from the NAICS code assigned the auxiliary unit. (See Chapter 2 for more
information regarding industry coding.)
CARS – Contracted Annual Refiling Survey. A centralized system to augment the annual
refiling survey performed by contractors with the BLS.
Contributions - All States finance unemployment benefits through self-insurance or from
unemployment insurance taxes, or contributions. Contributions come from two sources: 1) from
subject employers based on the wages of their covered workers, and 2) in some States, from the
employees themselves.
Total contributions, therefore, are a composite of the employer's contributions and, where
applicable, the employee's contributions.
Employee Contributions - Employee contributions are the unemployment insurance taxes
required by some State unemployment compensation laws to be deducted from an employee's
pay by the employer and paid with the employer's contribution to the State agency.
Employer - The employer is the legal entity that either 1) pays the unemployment insurance tax,
or 2) elects or is required to reimburse the State unemployment fund for unemployment
insurance benefits costs in lieu of paying the UI tax. In some cases, the employer is equivalent to
the establishment or the reporting unit, while in others the employer will include several
establishments or reporting units.
For the purpose of the QCEW program, the government employer is the organizational unit, such
as the department, agency, or instrumentality, responsible for a function of government.
Employer Contributions - FUTA defines employer contributions as "payments required by a
State law to be made into an unemployment fund by any person on account of having individuals
in his (or her) employ." In general, employer contributions include any monies collected by tax,
surcharge, etc. that are deposited into the State's trust fund and may be used to calculate tax
rating. Unemployment insurance taxes are levied or assessed on taxable-subject employers at

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-33

either a standard rate or some other rate determined under the tax rating provisions (see
definition of Tax Rating) of the individual State's laws. The rate is usually defined as a certain
percentage of the taxable wages paid by the employers during the rate year for services
performed in covered employment. Taxes that are paid by employers at a flat rate with no regard
to either experience rating or benefit reimbursement are also considered employer contributions.
Included in this definition are unemployment insurance taxes that may be assessed on employers
under special provisions of State laws that become effective because of emergency conditions or
because of a low balance in the State trust fund accounts that are used to finance benefit costs.
Not included in this definition of employer contributions are:
1. Any tax, surcharge, etc. that is used to pay off the interest on a loan from the Federal
government to the State trust fund and is required by Federal law to be deposited outside
the unemployment trust fund.
2. Any temporary excise tax or permanent surcharge tax.
3. The 0.8 percent (administrative financing) excise tax paid to the Federal government since
January 1, 1983, by all employers of one or more workers in 20 weeks’ time during a
calendar year in covered industries. (This tax will revert to 0.6 percent when the
outstanding indebtedness of the Extended Unemployment Compensation account to
general revenue is repaid or removed.)
4. Payments instead of contributions by certain nonprofit organizations, State, and local
government instrumentalities that finance benefit costs on a reimbursing basis.
5. Voluntary contributions (paid by employers in some States to be credited to their
experience-rating accounts to obtain rates that are more favorable for future periods).
Employment - Employment for a given month is the number of covered workers who earned
wages during the pay period that includes the l2th of the month. A reporting unit should report
as employment the number of covered workers who worked during or received pay for any part
of the payroll period covering the workweek that includes the l2th of the month, the first of the
two semimonthly payrolls, the monthly payroll, or the payroll of any other type that includes the
l2th of the month. Where more than one type of payroll is in use, the reporting unit should report
the total number of employees on all types of payrolls that include the l2th of the month.
The employment count should include all corporation officials, executives, other supervisory
personnel, clerical workers, wage earners, persons on paid vacations or paid sick leave,
pieceworkers, part-time workers, and workers earning wages that are nontaxable because the
taxable wage limit has been exceeded.
The employment count should exclude workers who were on leave without pay or who earned
no wages during the applicable pay periods because of strikes, work stoppages, or temporary

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-34

layoffs. Workers who earned wages during the month without earning any during the applicable
pay periods should not be counted in the employment figures, although the wages are reported.
Note: Reporting units sometimes list erroneously as employment the total number of persons
who have earned wages at some time during the quarter, while others fail to report, in the
last quarters of the year, workers whose wages have gone above the taxable wage limit.
Efforts should be made to eliminate these and other errors in the reporting of
employment, possibly by means of a once-a-year notice mailed with the blank
contribution report. This notice should call attention to the kind of data to be reported as
employment, and should be in more specific form than the instructions appearing on the
contribution report.
Enterprise - An enterprise consists of all establishments having more than 50 percent common
direct or indirect ownership. In a situation where Company A owns more than 50 percent of
Company B, and Company B owns more that 50 percent of Company C; Company A would
directly own Company B – and indirectly own Company C through Company B's direct
ownership of Company C. The BLS does not gather employment or wage data for enterprises.
Establishment - An establishment is an economic unit, such as a farm, mine, factory, or store
that produces goods or provides services. It is usually at a single physical location and engaged
in one or predominantly one type of economic activity for which a single industry code is
applicable.
Where a single physical location encompasses two or more distinct and separate economic
activities for which different industry codes seem applicable, such activities should be treated as
separate establishments and classified in separate industries, provided it is determined that:
1. No one industry description in the NAICS system includes such combined activities;
2. The employment in each such economic activity is significant;
3. Such activities are not ordinarily associated with one another at common physical
locations; and
4. Separate reports can be prepared on the number of employees, their wages and salaries,
and other establishment-type data for each of the activities.
In the government sector, the term "installation" generally is used instead of establishment.
Inactive Employer - A unit, not currently reporting employment or paying wages subject to the
State's unemployment compensation law, that has been terminated, administratively inactivated,
or granted permission to suspend filing contribution reports or payment in lieu of contribution
reports (seasonal employers excluded); or who paid no wages during the eight (8) calendar
quarters immediately preceding the due date of the ETA 581, the Contribution Operations
Report. The quarter being reported or validated is included in this time span of eight (8)
quarters.
States should be careful not to inactivate a unit for a reference year/quarter in which they were
active. For example, if a unit was active in the first quarter but went out of business during

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-35

April, the unit should be reported on the first quarter EQUI file. Furthermore, if the account
went out-of-business or was terminated on April 6 and did not have employment during the pay
period including the 12th of the month, but paid wages during the period of April 1-6, the unit
should also be reported in the second quarter. This is an example of a unit that should be
included on the EQUI file because it paid wages in the quarter after it went out-of-business.
Similarly, if back wages are paid after an account is terminated, it should be reactivated or set up
as a new account and the wages reported during the quarter that they were paid.
These definitions in no way preclude immediate inactivation of an account when either the
employer notifies the agency or a determination is made that the employer has ceased paying
wages. In the absence of the administrative inactivation of the "no wages paid" employer, a limit
is imposed on the length of time that such an employer can be included in the SWAs "active
employers" workload count and in the EQUI file.
Industry Code - Each establishment is assigned a NAICS industry code based on the processes
it uses to produce goods or services. The NAICS system represents a change in the conceptual
framework of establishment classification. Unlike the older Standard Industrial Classification
(SIC) system, which classified establishments by the product produced or service rendered,
NAICS is based on a production-oriented or supply-based conceptual framework. This
conceptual framework groups establishments into industries according to similarity in the
processes used to produce the goods or services. The NAICS system completely replaced the
older SIC system.
NAICS covers the entire field of economic activity of today’s modern economy. Establishments
are classified into one of the following 20 sectors (refer to Appendix P for the NAICS
Aggregation Tree):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Agriculture, Forestry, Fishing, and Hunting
Mining
Utilities
Construction
Manufacturing
Wholesale Trade
Retail Trade
Transportation and Warehousing
Information
Finance and Insurance
Real Estate and Rental and Leasing
Professional, Scientific, and Technical Services
Management of Companies and Enterprises
Administrative and Support and Waste Management and Remediation Services
Educational Services
Health Care and Social Assistance
Arts, Entertainment, and Recreation
Accommodation and Food Services

October 2018

•
•

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-36

Other Services (except Public Administration)
Public Administration

Descriptions of the detailed industry codes for which data are submitted on the EQUI file can be
found in the NAICS manual.
Please note that this method of classification is not dependent upon the type of ownership. With
NAICS, as with the SIC system, owners may include such diverse legal organizations as
corporations, partnerships, individual proprietors, government agencies, joint ventures, etc.
Government establishments, therefore, are classified by their primary economic activity, rather
than by type of ownership. (See Section 2.1.5.)
QCEW data for the period from 1975 through 1987 were coded according to the 1972 Standard
Industrial Classification (SIC) Manual (including the 1977 amendments). QCEW data for the
period from 1988 through 2000 were coded according to the 1987 SIC Manual. Beginning with
data for first quarter 2001, QCEW data were collected and made available under the 1997 North
American Industry Classification System (NAICS). From the first quarter 2002, SIC codes were
no longer actively coded on the State micro database files and the NAICS codes were updated to
reflect the 2002 NAICS revision. Beginning with first quarter 2007, NAICS codes were updated
to reflect the 2007 NAICS revision, and beginning with first quarter 2017, NAICS codes were
updated to reflect the 2017 NAICS revision.
Nontaxable Wages - Nontaxable wages (sometimes called excess wages) are that part of an
employee's total wages that is in excess of wages that are taxable under the State unemployment
insurance law.
Number of Wage Records - The number of wage records or the wage record count for an
employer is the number of names (records) appearing on his/her wage report for the quarter.
Such a report (see EXHIBIT 3B) accompanies the contribution report in all States (except New
York). This information is required for the computation of unemployment insurance benefits.
Because of employee turnover, the number of wage records (or wage record count) for a quarter
may exceed substantially the employment figures for any month of the quarter.
Organization Type Indicator - The legal form of the organization used for tax purposes by the
establishment. It is valid for the private sector (Ownership code 5) only. This code is used on
Status Determination Forms to solicit information from private sector establishments concerning
their organizational structure.
Ownership - Reporting units are classified by ownership according to legal proprietorship –
Federal, State, or local government, or private industry – rather than by type of economic
activity. (See Section 2.1.4 for the specific ownership codes to be used in State systems and the
EQUI file.) Regardless of type of industrial activity, each establishment must carry a code
number identifying public or private ownership to distinguish between public and private
activities. These codes are used with the other classification codes to preserve the continuity and
usefulness of historic data. When tabulating QCEW data, the term "Government" is used to
include all government-owned activities (Federal, State, and local), regardless of industry code,

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-37

while the term "Public Administration" is used only for those legislative, judicial, administrative,
and regulatory activities not having a counterpart in private industry.
Predecessor - The UI/RUN under which an establishment was previously reported. For
establishments that change from one owner to another, the predecessor record typically has a
different UI number. For establishments that are reported differently within an existing UI
account (e.g. breakouts or consolidations), the predecessor record usually has the same UI
number but a different RUN. The purpose of predecessor (and successor) UI/RUN coding is to
identify establishments as continuous, especially when they change ownership or UI number.
Primary County - A primary county is defined as the county of largest employment for a multicounty employer. All other counties with employees of that multi-county employer are
secondary counties. The purpose of finding the primary county is for the purpose of assigning
the county code to multi-establishment employers who refuse to break out or who do not meet
the criteria for a breakout.
Reporting Unit - A reporting unit is the economic unit for which data are submitted on the
employer's contribution report, Multiple Worksite Report, or employment and wages report (for
a government entity or nonprofit organization, since neither may be subject to payment of
quarterly contributions). The reporting unit should be the smallest individual establishment or
installation that is identified by the contribution report or by a Multiple Worksite Report.
Reporting Unit Number – The Reporting Unit Number is a unique identifier assigned to each
reporting unit of an employer that has two or more reporting units. The Reporting Unit Number
should be assigned consistently between the State systems and the EQUI files submitted to the
national office. The same identifier should also be assigned to the same reporting unit
consistently across quarters so that the unit can be easily identified across time. The Reporting
Unit Number should never be reused under the same UI Account Number. A Reporting Unit
Number of "00000" should be assigned to multi-unit master account records and to single unit
records. (Refer to Chapter 3 for more information.)
In certain cases, two or more establishments are combined to make up one reporting unit. This
typically occurs when establishments owned by the same employer are engaged in the same
economic activity in the same county. Whenever possible, individual establishment data should
be collected and reported.
Successor - A unit that is now reported (or that will be reporting) under one UI Account Number
or Reporting Unit Number, but was previously being reported under a different UI Account
Number/Reporting Unit Number configuration. The purpose of successor (and predecessor)
UI/RUN coding is to identify establishments as continuous, especially when they change
ownership or UI number.
Tax Rating - Tax rating is the process of determining the contribution rates of individual
employers on the factors specified in a State's unemployment insurance law. Experience rating
determines contribution rates based on the employer's experience with respect to unemployment.
Conversely, some States allow certain nonprofit or governmental units to pay taxes at a flat rate

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-38

with no regard to either their experience rating or to the reimbursement of benefits paid to their
former employees.
Taxable Wages - Taxable wages (sometimes called net wages) for a quarter are that part of total
wages that is subject to the unemployment insurance tax provision of the State unemployment
insurance law. Taxable wages are reported by employers who are subject to tax rating
provisions, but are not reported by reimbursing subject employers. In some States there are
certain government units or nonprofit organizations that are taxed at a fixed percentage of the
total payroll, with no regard to their experience ratings or to the reimbursement to the UI fund for
benefits paid to their former employees. For such employers, taxable wages should be identical
to total wages.
Total Wages - Total wages (sometimes called wages or gross wages) for a quarter are the total
amount of wages paid or payable (depending on the wording of the State law) to covered
workers for services performed during the quarter, on all the payrolls of whatever type during the
quarter. Bonuses paid are included in the payroll figures. Also included, when furnished with
the job, is the cash value of such items as meals, lodging, tips and other gratuities, to the extent
that State laws and regulations provide. Total wages include both taxable and nontaxable wages.
Total wages are reported by both taxable and reimbursing subject employers.

1.8 Coverage of the QCEW Program
Coverage under State Unemployment Insurance Programs
State unemployment insurance programs, the primary source of QCEW covered employment and
wages data, have relatively comprehensive coverage in the United States labor force.
Approximately 96 percent of the wage and salary civilian labor force and 98 percent of
nonagricultural employment are covered by State UI laws, and so are reflected in QCEW data.
States establish their own unemployment insurance coverage provisions, generally in accordance
with FUTA. The FUTA establishes minimum coverage standards that States must meet to have
an approved UI program. FUTA provisions determine which employers are subject to Federal
unemployment insurance taxes and designate certain types of services that must be covered
under State UI laws to meet Federal approval. Specific coverage provisions of State UI laws
have been influenced by the FUTA through tax incentives. The incentives allow employers who
pay UI contributions under federally approved State unemployment insurance law to credit their
State contributions against a specified percentage of the Federal tax.
Coverage exclusions in the FUTA, however, do not preclude a State from covering the excluded
class or category of workers under their own State laws. Many States have chosen to expand
their coverage provisions beyond the FUTA minimum standards in certain areas. A summary of
common coverage exclusions is provided below. Detailed UI coverage information can be found
in the Comparison of State Unemployment Insurance Laws maintained by the U.S. Department
of Labor's Employment and Training Administration.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-39

Both federal and State UI coverage laws are subject to change at any time when existing laws are
amended through the legislative process or reinterpreted through judicial action. If State QCEW
staff has a question about their State’s policy in a particular area, they should contact their UI tax
unit.
Common Exclusions from UI Coverage
1. As defined by federal and State UI laws, employment is the hiring of workers by others for
wages. Self-employed individuals are therefore excluded from coverage. Incorporated selfemployed persons, however, are covered because corporations are recognized as separate
legal entities from the individual, thereby allowing the individual to be an employee of his/her
own corporation.
2. Some coverage exclusions result from the scope in which an “employer” is defined. The
FUTA defines an employer generally as one who has a quarterly payroll of $1500 in the
calendar or preceding year or who has one worker for 20 weeks.
The definition of employer differs for agriculture, domestic service in households, and nonprofit
organizations, as noted below.
•

Agriculture – The FUTA designates coverage of agricultural employers having ten or
more workers in twenty weeks, or a payroll of $20,000 or more in any quarter. Some
states have more expansive coverage of agricultural employment. Farm owners/operators
are excluded from coverage in all States.

•

Domestic Service – The FUTA designates coverage of domestic help in private
households, social clubs, and college fraternities and sororities that pay wages of $1000
or more in a quarter. Some states have more expansive coverage of domestics.

•

Nonprofit Organizations – The FUTA designates coverage of nonprofit organizations
with four or more employees in twenty weeks. Almost half of the States have elected
more expansive coverage, typically covering any organization with even one employee in
twenty weeks. Ministers employed by religious organizations to perform ministerial
duties are excluded from nonprofit coverage in all States.

3. The FUTA and State UI laws also specify certain categories of employment as not covered.
States can choose to extend coverage to a category that is excluded under the FUTA.
Common exclusions across States are noted below.
•

Minor children employed by their parents, or parents employed by their children, are
excluded from coverage in all States.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-40

•

Railroad workers are excluded from coverage in all States. They are covered by a special
Federal unemployment insurance program administered by the Railroad Retirement
Board.

•

U.S. Armed Forces military personnel are excluded in all States. They are covered under
a separate Federal program, Unemployment Compensation for Ex-Servicemen (known as
the USX program).

•

State and local government elected officials; members of the judiciary, State national and
air national guardsmen, temporary emergency employees, and policy and advisory
positions are excluded in most States.

•

College and university students employed by the school at which they are enrolled, such
as work-study students, are excluded from coverage in all States. Most States also
exclude student nurses and medical interns employed by hospitals as part of their
professional training program.

•

Insurance and real estate agents paid only by commission are excluded from coverage in
most States.

Federal Service Covered by Unemployment Compensation for Federal Employees
(UCFE)
The scope of the QCEW program also includes all federal civilian employees covered by the
UCFE program. Virtually all federal civilian employees are covered under UCFE with the
exception of some specifically excluded types of federal service listed in 5 U.S.C. 8501.
Coverage policy and determinations of what constitutes “Federal service” and “Federal wages”
under UCFE are made by the Director of the Unemployment Insurance Service of the
Employment and Training Administration, as delegated by the Secretary of Labor. When the
Unemployment Insurance Service (UIS) issues a coverage ruling, it is published in the Federal
Register and distributed to the SWAs and Federal agencies in official UI “Program Letters” and
other memoranda. (UI Program Letters (UIPL) are available on the Internet at the Information
Technology Support Center site sponsored by the Department of Labor.) Additional information
is also available in the ETA Manual, UCFE Instructions for Federal Agencies, last issued in
March 1995.
The following summarizes some previous interpretations issued on covered and non-covered
employment under UCFE.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-41

UCFE-Covered Federal Service
Department of Agriculture
•
•
•
•

Agricultural cooperative employees serving under Federal appointments, including those
with the Agriculture Extension Service
Agricultural Stabilization and Conservation Service (ASC) county and community
committee employees
Employees (but not members) of Agricultural Boards and Committees
Soil Conservation Service

Department of Commerce
•
•
•

Census Bureau enumerators
Commissioned officers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey
Paid executive directors and employees of Regional Fishery Management Councils

Department of Defense
•
•

Armed Forces non-appropriated fund activities employees
National Guard and Air National Guard civilian employees

Department of Health and Human Services
•

Commissioned officers of the Public Health Service

Department of Interior
•

Mammal control agents of the Fish and Wildlife Service

Department of Transportation
•
•
•

Administrative enrollees of the Maritime Administration
U.S. Merchant Marine Academy
Employees in Wage Marine positions

Other miscellaneous UCFE-covered employment
•
•
•
•

Administrative employees of members of Congress and congressional committees
Presidential and Schedule C appointees
National Credit Union Administration (NCUA)
Employees of partially-owned Federal instrumentalities – including any Federal
intermediate credit banks, banks for cooperatives, or production credit associations in
which the Federal government owns capital stock

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Overview of the QCEW Program

Page 1-42

Not UCFE-Covered/Not Federal Service
Note that when employment is determined not UCFE-covered/not federal service, as in the cases
below, States can and may cover these employees under their State UI law. If State QCEW staff
is unsure whether one of the categories below should be included as UI-covered, they should
contact their UI tax unit.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Persons paid from Indian tribal funds of the Department of Interior
Grantees under the Educational Exchange Program of the Department of State
Peace Corps volunteers and trainees
Federal Credit Unions
Federal Intermediate Credit Banks, banks for cooperatives, or production credit
associations in which the Federal government owns no capital stock.
Federal Home Loan Banks
Federal Land Banks
Federal National Mortgage Association
Federal Reserve Banks
Elective officials in the Executive or Legislative branches
Persons employed on a temporary basis in cases of fire, storm, earthquake, flood, or other
temporary catastrophic emergency
Enrollees or members of the Youth Conservation Corps
Participants in the Americorps program administered by the Corporation for National and
Community Service
Participants in nutritional research studies conducted by the Agricultural Research
Service of the Department of Agriculture

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

September 2019

Page 2-1

Chapter 2 – Assigning and Updating the
Classification Codes
The QCEW program assigns classification codes to provide as much detail and accuracy to
collected data as possible. This involves the use of several coding standards and systems along
multiple phases of the collection process. It is necessary that implementation of and compliance
with these coding standards be conducted at the state, regional, and national level. Because the
QCEW program is an important data source for other statistical programs, there is also a need for
continuity of coding systems between BLS programs. This continuity is especially important for
aggregated data.
The continuity of the codes themselves is maintained across time within the QCEW program.
Changes and updates to codes are taken into account and the data are adjusted in a way that
minimizes the impact of the change on the aggregated data as a whole.
---------- Contents of Chapter 2 ---------2.1 Coding Standards
2.1.1 State Codes
2.1.2 County Codes
2.1.3 Township Codes
2.1.4 County and Industry Codes for Telework Establishments
2.1.5 Ownership Codes and Organization Types
2.1.6 Industry Codes
2.1.7 Assigning Industry Codes
2.1.8 WebNAICS
2.2 Coordination of Coding with Other BLS Programs
2.3 Changes in Industrial, Ownership, and Area Classification Codes
2.3.1 Types of Code Changes
2.3.2 Timing and Reporting of Code Changes

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-2

2.1 Coding Standards
Standards exist for each of the classification codes used in the QCEW program. These standards
are defined by program convention and government legislation. The accurate assignment of
these codes is critical to continuity of the micro data and consistency of the macro data. Current
programmatic standards can be found in the cooperative agreement.

2.1.1 State Codes
The identification of the state submitting the Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance
(EQUI) file is assigned by the standard state processing systems. The Federal Information
Processing Standards (FIPS) series is used to report the state code. FIPS State codes and postal
service state abbreviations are specified in Appendix C.

2.1.2 County Codes
Each reporting unit must be identified by a FIPS county code based upon the unit's physical
location or place of business. FIPS county codes are used to report data on the EQUI file and the
state’s system. The FIPS county codes are available for download on the US Department of
Commerce website 2016 FIPS Codes. Updates are made periodically.
The following additional codes should be used to identify the locations of reporting units that
cannot be given more specific FIPS county codes:
Code

Description

900

Master Record. Assign county code 900 only to a multi-unit master record. This
type of record is the summation of all of its associated reporting units. County code
900 should not be assigned to a single establishment employer (only one establishment
with a given UI Account Number in the state). Note that use of this code is preferred
but optional; a master record may carry a specific FIPS code (especially if all or most
of its subunits are located in one county) or any of the other county equivalent codes
shown below.

995

Statewide, locations in more than one county, and no primary county. Assign
county code 995 only to reporting establishments that have locations in more than one
county, and for which a primary location has not been determined or cannot be
assigned by the state. A primary county is the county with the largest share of the total
employment of the account. See Primary Counties below in this subsection.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-3

County code 995 should not be assigned to a reporting unit based solely on its mailing
address, or based on the corporate headquarters/central office location of the
enterprise.
996

Foreign locations. Assign only to reporting units whose physical location is outside
of the United States, Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands, but which report to the state
agency for UI coverage purposes. County code 996 should not be assigned to a
reporting unit based on its mailing address or based on the corporate
headquarters/central office location of the enterprise.

998

Out-of-State locations. In general, employers must have UI accounts in all states in
which they have permanent worksites or in which they have ongoing business
operations, such as construction, which lack a fixed worksite. Therefore, employers
will typically be required to establish a UI account in every state in which they
maintain employment (as defined by state UI laws) on a regular basis.
Assign county code 998 only to a reporting unit where the worksite is located
outside of the state to which it is reported for UI purposes, and where this
worksite is not required to report in the state in which the worksite is physically
located. For example, an employer is based in state A and reports to state A for UI
coverage purposes. If this employer has a temporary worksite in state B, and is not
required by state UI laws to establish a UI account to report the worksite in state B,
then the reporting unit would be assigned county code 998 in state A.
While most out-of- state worksites will be of a temporary nature, there are a few rare
cases where an employer may maintain a worksite outside the state in which UI
coverage is based that could be classified with county code 998. For example, an
employer is based in state A and reports to state A for UI coverage purposes. This
employer maintains a training site in state B where the workers are only temporarily
assigned for training before the employer permanently assigns them to a worksite in
state A.
County code 998 should not be assigned to a reporting unit based solely on its mailing
address or based on the corporate headquarters/central office location of the enterprise.

999

Unknown locations. Assign to a unit with an unknown or undefined location.
Before assigning code 999 to any unit, states should attempt to obtain the county from
the employer. The guidelines in Section 3.3 (Identifying Multi-unit Employers) should
be followed for obtaining establishment breakouts from multi-county employers.

Some confusion in assigning county codes may occur with respect to construction companies,
utility companies, trucking companies, statewide salespersons, and other "mobile" units. Page
19 of the 2017 North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) Manual states:

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-4

Exceptions to the single location exist for physically dispersed operations, such as
construction, transportation, and telecommunications. For these activities the individual
sites, projects, fields, networks, lines, or systems of such dispersed activities are not
normally considered to be establishments. The establishment is represented by those
relatively permanent main or branch offices, terminals, stations, and so forth, that are
either (1) directly responsible for supervising such activities, or (2) the base from which
personnel operate to carry out these activities.
The following rules should be applied in defining the establishment and determining its location:
This type of "mobile" unit should be assigned a county code that corresponds to the location of
the main or branch office. Although the establishment's territory may be statewide or spread
over several counties, the county code should be consistent with the physical location address of
the establishment. The actual reporting of these individuals can vary. The physical location
address for salespeople and general contractors working out of their homes is not required. If
available, use the home address of the sales or contract person to determine the FIPS county
code. If an employer has sales representatives working out of their homes, then the employer
should summarize these employees into one reporting unit. The county code would be statewide
(995) and the Reporting Unit Description would be "Sales Reps., Statewide."
However, in the case where a construction, logging, drilling, or utility installation expects to be
working at one site for more than one year, that site should be treated as a separate establishment
and identified by its physical location during the course of the project. The county code assigned
to such a long-term project should be consistent with the physical location of the project.
In addition, those employer activities that do not meet either the general definition of an
establishment or the 12-month duration criterion may be reported as a county-level record in the
county where the activity occurs. States which have been receiving county-level data from firms
should continue to request this level of detail or request establishment-level detail (as described
in Section 3.1), whichever provides the finer level of detail.
Primary Counties
Some confusion may occur with respect to assigning primary counties in situations where a UI or
UCFE account has been identified as a multi-establishment employer, but is unable or unwilling
to provide any disaggregated data below a statewide total, or does not meet the size criteria for
solicitation of disaggregated data.
States should consider “primary county” as the county with the largest share of the employment
in the account, but should only code to primary county when 50% or more of the total
employment is in the primary county. States should assign a primary county in cases where
disaggregation is not possible from available source, or does not meet the size criteria for
solicitation of disaggregated data. See Section 3.5 for examples.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-5

2.1.3 Township Codes
In addition to the FIPS county codes, New England states and New Jersey must identify
reporting units by township codes on their micro file and on the EQUI file submitted to the
national office. The term township is used to represent areas in New England and New Jersey
that are locally referred to as cities and towns.
The following township codes, which are equivalent to the county codes, should be used to
identify the locations of reporting units that cannot be given more specific township codes:
Code

Description

900

Master Record. Assign township code 900 only to a multi-unit master record. This
type of record is the summation of all of its associated reporting units. Township code
900 should not be assigned to a single establishment employer (only one establishment
with a given UI Account Number in the state).

995

Statewide, locations in more than one township, and no primary township. Assign
township code 995 only to reporting establishments that have locations in more than
one township, and for which a primary location has not been determined or cannot be
assigned by the state. This primary location principle should be used to assign county
and town codes to an account in cases where 50% or more of the total employment of
the account resides in particular town or city.

996

Foreign locations. Assign only to reporting units whose physical location is outside
of the United States, Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands, but which report to the state
agency for UI coverage purposes.

998

Out-of-State locations. In general, employers must have UI accounts in all state in
which they have permanent worksites or in which they have ongoing business
operations, such as construction, which lack a fixed worksite. Therefore, employers
will typically be required to establish a UI account in every state in which they
maintain employment (as defined by state UI laws) on a regular basis.
Assign township code 998 only to a reporting unit where the worksite is located
outside of the state to which it is reported for UI coverage purposes, and where this
worksite is not required to report in the state in which the worksite is physically
located. For example, an employer is based in state A and reports to state A for UI
coverage purposes. If this employer has a temporary worksite in state B, and is not
required by state UI laws to establish a UI account to report the worksite in state B,
then the reporting unit would be assigned township code 998 in state A.

999

Unknown locations, or no primary township. Assign to a unit with an unknown or
undefined location. States in New England as well as New Jersey must notify the

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

October 2018

Page 2-6

national office through their regional office of any changes to their township code list
prior to submitting the affected deliverable EQUI file.
The township code should be paired with an appropriate county code to eliminate any
inconsistencies on the EQUI file and the micro file. The following table presents
acceptable code combinations in relation to the Multi Establishment Employer
Indicator (MEEI) code of each reporting unit.
MEEI
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
2

Valid County/Valid Township Combination
999/999
995/995
996/996
998/998
any county code including 900, 995, 996, 998; and township 900
or 999 (CTY and TWN code must match)

2.1.4 County and Industry Codes for Telework Establishments
Telework establishments are worksite locations that are provided by the firm as individual
establishments. However, since these establishments represent employees working from home,
specific address and industry information may not be provided. Using statewide or unclassified
county does not give an accurate picture of the employment, if a valid county can be assigned. A
framework for assigning county and NAICS codes to teleworkers has been established and can
be applied to these situations.
Teleworking units should be assigned a county and NAICS code that corresponds to the location
of the main branch or office, out of which, the teleworking employee is supervised or based. If
this information is unavailable, the state should use the “Primary County” principle of assigning
the county based on the primary county in the state. NAICS can be assigned following the same
principle.
Out-of-state telework establishments are those where the primary location(s) of a firm are
located in one State but home-based worker(s) are located in another state. In this case, the state
with the home-based establishment in another state should use the county associated with the
home-based establishment’s physical location address (PLA), if provided. If no PLA, or
adequate information to assign the county is available, county 998 should be applied. NAICS
can be assigned following the same principle as in- state locations outlined above.
Guidance for assigning County and NAICS codes for teleworking establishments can be found in
QCEWTechnical Memorandum S-13-02.

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

October 2018

Page 2-7

2.1.5 Ownership Codes and Organization Types
Because industry coding may group private sector and government operations together into
sectors (other than public administration), it is necessary to report an ownership code in addition
to the industry code. The ownership code permits separate or combined publication and analysis
of private sector and public sector employment and wages data. The valid one-digit codes for
ownership are shown below.
1
2
3
5

=
=
=
=

Federal government
State government
Local government
Private

Local government includes the governments of counties, townships, parishes, cities, towns,
villages, and municipalities. Local government is a political subdivision of a state which has
general corporate and police powers as well as the power to levy taxes and spend funds. This
ownership can cover a variety of services, education (including school districts), healthcare and
social assistance; executive, legislative, and judicial duties; special districts (water, sewage, and
other utility services); and other administrative activities.
In addition, several states use organizational type indicator codes for private ownership
establishments. (Organizational type is optional for the national office and most states.) This
information is often collected on Status Determination Forms to solicit information from private
establishments concerning organizational structure, and may be extracted for the EQUI. The
code indicates the legal form of organization the establishment used when filing taxes. The
organization options are shown below.
I = Individual
P = Partnership
C = Corporation
O = Other
Indian Tribal Councils
According to Federal law, all Indian Tribal Councils and related establishments should have an
ownership code of 3 (Local Government). The law states, as a clarification to the Federal
Unemployment Tax Act (FUTA), that Federally-recognized Indian Tribes are to be treated
similarly to state and local governments.
The EQUI file and micro file also include a data element called the special indicator (described
in Appendix B – Data Element Definitions). States should assign the value "T" (Indian Tribal
Council) to the Special Indicator field on records that represent Federally- recognized Indian

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-8

Tribal Councils or related establishments. A listing of Federally Recognized tribes can be found
on the Bureau of Indian Affairs website.
Establishments not owned by Federally-recognized Indian Tribal Councils but operating in areas
under Indian Tribal Council control should have a blank Special Indicator field and must be
assigned an ownership code of 5 (Private).

2.1.6 Industry Codes
Initial assignment of a correct industry code is critical for several reasons. It ensures that a
significant subgroup of employers (i.e., new units) are classified accurately and that the degree of
discontinuity in employment data caused by code changes is reduced.
To enable data to be classified by industry in the micro files, each operating establishment is
assigned an industry code on the basis of its primary activity, as outlined in the North American
Industry Classification System (NAICS) Manual. Under NAICS, establishments that have
similar production processes are classified in the same industry. The conceptual basis is that
establishments doing similar things in similar ways should be classified together. This supplybased system allows for the comparison of such things as productivity and labor costs on the
basis of inputs and outputs from the production process, rather than on the basis of output alone.
In the design of NAICS, special attention was given to new and emerging industries, service
industries, and industries engaged in the production of advanced technologies.
NAICS divides the economy into 20 sectors (two-digit), four of which are largely goodsproducing and 16 of which are largely service-providing. An additional sector, Sector 99 is used
within the QCEW program for unclassified industry. These sectors are broken down further into
subsector (three-digit), industry group (four-digit), and five- and six-digit NAICS codes. All
reporting units should be classified to the six-digit level of detail. The assignment of industry
codes is discussed later in this section.
For the purposes of publication and data dissemination, the QCEW program also defines
industries at levels above the official NAICS structure. This includes the grouping of the 21
sectors (the 20 sectors mentioned in the above paragraph plus the unclassified sector) into 13
supersectors, the grouping of the 13 supersectors into two domains (service-providing and
goods-producing), and the grouping of the two domains into an all-industry total.
An establishment is classified to an industry when its primary activity meets the definition for
that industry. If an establishment performs more than one activity, the industry should be
assigned based on the establishment's principal product or group of products produced or
distributed, or services rendered. Ideally, the principal good or service should be determined by
its relative share of current production costs and capital investment at the establishment. In
practice, however, it might be necessary to use other variables such as revenue, shipments, or
employment as proxies for measuring significance.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-9

There are some NAICS codes which are, by definition, a combination of activities. In these
instances, the NAICS code may not be assigned according to a single primary activity, but
according to the combination of activities performed. There are two types of combined activities
that are given special attention in NAICS. They are vertical integration and joint production.
Vertical integration involves consecutive stages of fabrication or production processes in which
the output of one step is the input of the next level. An example of joint production would be an
automobile dealer that both sells and repairs cars. See the NAICS manual for more details and
examples of vertical integration and joint production.
In general, a single establishment at a physical location engaged in activities that fall into more
than one six-digit industry should be assigned only one industry code based on its primary
activity. However, in some cases, larger employers may report these units to states separately if
they maintain separate payroll and inventory records for these activities. State agencies may
treat such special reporting arrangements as separate establishments for record-keeping purposes
and for assigning industry codes.
Use of NAICS 999999
NAICS 999999 (unclassified) is a valid temporary code for active units for which information to
assign a specific industry is insufficient. It should only be used until the employer can be
contacted and the specific NAICS code determined. Since assignment to NAICS 999999
precludes use of the employer's records for industry-specific sampling, such assignment causes
an inherent bias for the many studies that draw samples from the Longitudinal Database. The
need to recode larger units coded in NAICS 999999 to a known, valid code is critical,
particularly since large units are in certainty strata in many samples.
New employers who have not provided sufficient information for the assignment of a six-digit
NAICS should be assigned NAICS 999999. States can either participate in the NCA web letter
mailing by the BLS approved contractor or print and mail a BLS 3023-NCA (Unclassified
Industry) form on a flow basis. If a web response file is received or the NCA form is returned
that contains sufficient information to assign a code, the NAICS code should be changed at that
time. Establishments not providing sufficient information via the web or on the 3023-NCA form
or not responding to NCA requests should be contacted by phone.
Generally, a state's use of NAICS 999999 is considered excessive when it exceeds one percent of
total employment in that state. Refer to the current cooperative agreement for specific
thresholds.
Private Households
Private household employers are coded in NAICS 814110. Typically, these establishments are
private households that employ domestic employees. The code assigned depends on the
employer of record. In the case of NAICS 814110, the employer of record is a private household
rather than an operating business. Establishments that provide business services to households

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

October 2018

Page 2-10

are coded according to primary activities. For instance, businesses providing maid services are
coded in NAICS 561720, Janitorial Services, while a household that reports a domestic maid on
its own account is coded in NAICS 814110. Both types of establishments may provide these
services for households. Coding focuses on the employer of record. Establishments coded in
NAICS 814110 are excluded from the Annual Refiling Survey although they may be periodically
reviewed by the national office.
There is an exception to the rule of coding establishments in NAICS 814110 when a household is
the employer of record. Many states have programs geared towards providing funding and
assistance to the elderly and/or persons with disabilities to allow the individuals to stay in their
homes. Even though the employer of record may be the household, the funding is coming from
the state usually by or through an agency. If the state is able to identify that the
establishment/household is part of this type of funding arrangement, the establishment should be
coded in NAICS 624120-Services for the Elderly and Persons with Disabilities not NAICS
814110-Private Households. Often the contact information, UI address and/or mailing address
will be that of the agency, which can help identify such units. Additional information can be
found in QCEW Technical Memorandum S-13-04.
Coding Master Records in a Multi-Unit Account
States should code master (MEEI 2) records of a multi-unit account with the dominant NAICS
code in terms of the employment in the multi as a whole. Exceptions:
Code PEO (Professional Employer Organization) master records in NAICS 561330.
If Headquarters is the dominant industry in terms of employment, code the master records with
the NAICS code of the next dominant industry, not NAICS 551114.
Invalid NAICS Codes
States should not assign the following two codes:
NAICS Code

Description

112130
541120

Dual Purpose Cattle Ranching and Farming
Offices of Notaries

Both of these codes are listed in the April 9, 1997 Federal Register as null sets, in other words,
invalid for NAICS United States. Any record assigned these codes will continue to be flagged as
an error in the standard state systems (EXPO, WIN-202) and the national office systems.
Neither code is included in the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) descriptions and should not be
assigned to any establishment.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-11

Reference Sources
There are a number of tools available for assigning NAICS codes to reporting units. The NAICS
United States Manual is the reference tool for NAICS classification. With the 2017 Revision,
NAICS manuals will no longer be printed. There is an online pdf version available to states. An
online tool to search NAICS codes can be found on the Census Bureau NAICS website in
addition to the NAICS manual. However, it is not recommended that coders use this site as it
does not contain BLS-specific codes. WebNAICS, an online coding tool developed by DASLT
and available on the BLS public website contains more activity descriptions (e.g., index items)
than the manual, and it provides industry codes for each activity. It also contains the BLS
specific codes in the construction industry for example, which the online NAICS manual does
not have because the residential/non-residential distinction is not used by the Census Bureau.
Finally, updates to the program covering new activities and coding interpretations are provided
periodically.
NAICS Coding Interpretations
In any large-scale coding operation, coders will come across some employers that are difficult to
classify. The Industry Coding Team (ICT) was established as an advisory body with the purpose
of providing guidance on industry coding matters in the QCEW program. It is made up of
national and regional office BLS staff and state staff and can be reached via email at
[email protected]
Training
The national office and the office of field operations periodically provides introductory and
advanced NAICS training, and an online NAICS training materials are available for new coders.

2.1.7 Assigning Industry Codes
The assignment of industry codes is the process of identifying the establishment's primary
activity. Some of the confusion about industry coding is caused by the technical nature of the
industries and the descriptive language associated with these industries. The coding process is
further complicated by the industrial and technological change that occurs between revisions of
the industry codes. Using the following steps will reduce some of the difficulties associated with
assigning the proper industry code.
Step 1: Research the Case
The coder should develop a basic understanding of the primary activity or service involved to
ensure accurate coding. The terminology used by the employer can sometimes be confusing or
misleading. It is up to the coder to determine whether the terms used by the employer are

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-12

comparable to the industry coding manual terminologies; thus, personal knowledge and coding
experience are valuable.
Step 2: Identify Possible NAICS Codes
The coder should review all industry coding reference sources (e.g., NAICS online Manual, and
the WebNAICS) to determine possible NAICS codes. The coder must determine whether or not
the employer-supplied information is sufficient to assign a code. If not, the employer should be
contacted.
Step 3: Select an Appropriate NAICS Code
The coder should examine all related industry descriptions to determine the most appropriate
one. Note that NAICS classifies establishments based on their primary activity rather than just
on the products produced. The conceptual basis of NAICS is that establishments doing similar
things in similar ways are included in the same industry.
Step 4: Top-Down Approach for Difficult Cases
When the coding decision is not clear cut, narrow your choices by first determining an
appropriate NAICS sector, subsector, industry group, and eliminating unacceptable 6-digit
NAICS codes until you find a code that appears correct.
If the industry information is inadequate or insufficient at any time during the coding process, the
state should contact the employer. Large units, in particular, should be called to clarify
information. If the information is complete but it is still difficult to determine the correct
NAICS, the state should request coding assistance through the regional office or the Industry
Coding Team.
To eliminate the effect of seasonal or other short-term fluctuations, a 12-month period should be
used as the basis for determining the principal activity when assigning industry codes.
An establishment entering business for the first time should be classified according to the
anticipated primary activity indicated by the employer on the initial status determination form.

2.1.8 WebNAICS
What is WebNAICS?
WebNAICS is a public web page version of the NAICS manual that was introduced with the
2017 NAICS manual. Deployment via the public website enables the software to reach a larger
audience and assists in more consistent use of NAICS codes as implemented at BLS.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-13

WebNAICS is a resource for QCEW data users. WebNAICS provides access to both NAICS
2012 and NAICS 2017. It enables users to conduct searches by index items, short titles, full
descriptions, or all of those options combined to get matching six-digit NAICS classifications.
The search feature allows users to search by NAICS code digits. The search results contain the
NAICS full title and description, cross-reference information, and associated indexes. Users can
sort results alphabetically or by NAICS digits.
Users can download .csv files containing NAICS indexes, titles and descriptions, crossreferences, and illustrative examples. The WebNAICS page and these .csv files can be provided
to Unemployment Insurance (UI) Tax departments that need BLS-specific NAICS codes.
Link to WebNAICS:
http://www.bls.gov/cew/bls_naics/bls_naics_app.htm

2.2 Coordination of Coding with Other BLS Programs
General Coordination
QCEW reporting units which also appear in other BLS programs, such as Current Employment
Statistics (CES), Occupational Employment Statistics (OES), and Occupational Safety and
Health Statistics (OSHS) should carry the same industry and geographical codes in all programs.
The state should make every effort to assure that coding changes in one program are reflected in
the other programs as well while being mindful of CIPSEA guidelines. The QCEW staff should
serve as the central unit for resolving coding differences.

2.3 Changes in Industrial, Ownership, and Area
Classification Codes
The industry, ownership, or county code (or township code for New England states as well as
New Jersey) of a reporting unit, should be changed if the state agency has received information
that the code is incorrect because of (a) a coding error, or (b) a permanent change in the principal
activity, ownership, or location. A permanent change is considered to be one that is expected to
continue for at least the next 12 months. If the change is expected to be of shorter duration, the
code should not be changed to correspond with the new activity, ownership, or location. For
example, an employer who intermittently engages in two different activities classifiable under
different codes should not be reclassified from one activity to the other, if past experience
indicates that these changes are only temporary. The unit should be classified according to the
activity that predominates or that uses the greatest share of production costs over the year as a
whole.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-14

2.3.1 Types of Code Changes
The use of employment and wage statistics as indicators of economic trends may be affected by
changing the industry, ownership, or area codes of reporting units, which causes breaks in the
levels of industries involved. Therefore, special handling of the data for reclassified reporting
units is required. When the industry, ownership, or area code of a reporting unit is changed, the
code change should be considered as falling into one of the following three major categories:
Noneconomic Code Changes
This category includes those code changes that are not due to changes in the economic picture.
These are "structural" code changes, which are the result of changes in the coding structure, and
corrections to codes that previously were assigned incorrectly. This category includes code
changes for which it cannot be determined whether the previous code was incorrectly assigned.
Also included in this category are code changes for reporting units which have shifted gradually
from one primary activity, ownership, or location to another; or which are assumed to have
shifted gradually because of lack of sufficient information to justify classification as economic
code changes.
Noneconomic code changes may also result from the receipt of a breakout or collapse of a multiunit account that had previously not been included on the micro files. An exception to this rule
occurs when the industry and/or the county code for a multi-unit account were originally coded
as unclassified (NAICS 999999, county 999, township 999). See the procedures below on
handling changes which involve unclassified codes.
Economic Code Changes
This category includes code changes of reporting units that are known to have converted
completely from one industrial activity, ownership, or location to another. A unit may be
considered as having converted completely if there was a substantially complete shutdown of
production between the old and the new activities, ownerships, or locations which took place in
less than a month. To be considered an economic code change, the conversion must be identified
in time to report the correct new code(s) in a timely manner – when the conversion occurred.
Also, the economic change must not reflect a gradual shift.
Change from Unclassified
The assignment of a specific industry, county code, or township code to a unit for which data
previously have been reported as "unclassified" is not considered a noneconomic code change,
but is considered a separate type of code change. Note that for county and township code, a
change to a specific code from any of the county or township equivalent codes (900-999) should
be treated as a change from unclassified.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-15

2.3.2 Timing and Reporting of Code Changes
When an industry, ownership, county code, or township code change results in a significant
change in employment for an industry/ownership/county/township combination, the state should
follow the procedures described in Chapter 11 that allow the system to place the record on the
Code Change Supplement (CCS) if the code change is noneconomic. If it is an economic code
change, assign an appropriate comment code. Comment codes are discussed in Section 9.6 and
in Appendix I.
Reporting requirements for the specific types of code changes are described below.
Noneconomic Code Changes
Noneconomic code changes, except for those resulting from structural changes in coding
manuals, should be made effective only with data for the beginning of a calendar year. This may
require corrections back to the first quarter, particularly when the CCS is still open.
Partial successor situations (where part of one establishment's employment transfers to another
establishment) are handled as follows: If the transfer does not change the industry code of the
entire successor unit, it should not be treated as a noneconomic code change. Though these types
of transfers may cause a fluctuation in employment between macro cells, the overall operation of
the two units involved does not change. Therefore, in most cases, employment changes that are
a result of partial successors do not belong on the CCS.
In some cases, in conjunction with a national office recommendation, data will be corrected back
to first quarter even though the CCS may have been locked. For example, if data for a large firm
were mistakenly coded to a new county or industry in first quarter, moving the data back to their
correct coding in the subsequent year would disrupt the historical flow of both cells. In such a
case, the data would be recoded to their proper cell for the entire reference year regardless of
when the error was discovered.
Noneconomic code changes made as a result of receiving a breakout for a multi-unit account that
had not been broken out previously on the micro files should be made effective with the first
quarter’s data. Making these changes to first quarter data is important to avoid unrealistic
fluctuations in data for the industries and areas involved. Section 5.5 describes this further.
Chapter 11 explains code change concepts, rules, and BLS processing.
In the case of future structural changes in coding manuals, the national office will issue specific
instructions.
Economic Code Changes

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes

Page 2-16

For economic code changes, the time of the code change must be identifiable and not a gradual
shift. Economic code changes (ownership, NAICS, or county/town) are accepted in any open
quarter, current or previous.
Reporting units with economic code changes should be assigned an appropriate comment code.
This information should be kept on file so that units involved may be identified in the event that
studies of their effect on levels and trends of the data are undertaken.
Changes from Unclassified
Changes from unclassified industry, county, or township codes (industry code 999999 or
county/township 900-999) to a specific code should be made immediately. If the data are
significant and will affect published levels, back quarter corrections should be made to place the
data in their correct cell for all of the reference year. If these changes are identified in the ARS,
they should not be handled as noneconomic code changes identified by Response Code 46 (CCS
update) or 50 (Code change from non-ARS source). They should be assigned Response Code 41
(Reviewed, no CCS changes) to exclude them from the CCS. The following table summarizes
the information pertaining to the code changes.
Reason for change
Complete conversion
(NAICS/Own)
Gradual conversion
(NAICS/Own)
Noneconomic code
change (except change
from unclassified code –
NAICS 999999)
Change from unclassified
code (999999 for NAICS,
900-999 for county and
township)
County or township code
miscoded (except change
from 900-999)
Changes in county or
township of reporting unit

Type of code
change
Economic code
change
Noneconomic code
change
Noneconomic code
change

When code change
is to be made
As soon as
conversion occurs
First quarter

Should be on
CCS?
No

First quarter

Yes

Change from
unclassified

As soon as possible

No

Noneconomic code
change

First quarter

Yes

Economic code
change

As soon as change
occurs

No

Yes

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-1

Chapter 3 – Special Processing for Multi-Unit
Employers
Employment and wage data in the QCEW program are aggregated by type of ownership, by
industry code (see Appendix P), and by county. To report data accurately at these levels for all
establishments, states must make special provisions for employers who operate more than one
establishment under one employer UI Account Number. Disaggregated reporting provides a
more detailed industry and location information in an establishment-based database.
States should solicit multi-establishment employers to submit data for their individual
establishments (worksites) on a Multiple Worksite Report (MWR). States maintain the
disaggregated data on the QCEW state files and report it to BLS on the Enhanced Quarterly
Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file. See Appendix A for the flowchart.
------------------------- Contents of Chapter 3 ------------------------3.1 Requirements for Disaggregating Multi-unit Employers
3.2 Assigning the MEEI Code
3.3 Identifying Multi-unit Employers
3.4 Using the Multiple Worksite Report
3.4.1 Printing MWR Forms
3.4.1.1 Printing MWR Forms Locally
3.4.1.2 Centralized Printing of MWR Forms (MWR Print)
3.4.2 Solicitation and Informed Consent Letters
3.4.3 Review and Processing of MWR Data
3.4.4 Delinquent MWR Reporters
3.5 When Quarterly MWRs Are Unavailable
3.6 Report of Federal Employment and Wages

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-2

3.1 Requirements for Disaggregating Multi-unit Employers
In general, employment and wage data and identification information should be collected from
multi-establishment employers at the worksite (store, plant, etc.) level. However, if different
economic activities are being performed at one establishment, each activity should be reported as
a separate establishment. As stated in the “Definition of an Establishment” section of the NAICS
Manual:
"In such cases, each activity is treated as a separate establishment provided:
(1) no one industry description in the classification includes such combined activities;
(2) separate reports can be prepared on the number of employees, their wages and
salaries, sales or receipts, and expenses; and
(3) employment and output are significant for both activities."
An employer who has more than one establishment reporting under the same UI account number
within the state and has employment of 10 or more in the combined secondary establishments
qualifies for disaggregation as a multi-establishment employer. States have the option to
disaggregate multi-establishment employers that have fewer than 10 employees in the secondary
establishments, if sufficient resources are available.
The primary establishment is defined as the establishment with the most employment. Where
employment is equal across all of the establishments, one establishment is designated as the
primary. All other establishments are secondary establishments. Under this definition, the
industry code and county codes of the secondary establishments are not factors in the
determination of the multi-status. Once the criterion of 10 employees in secondary
establishments is met, each worksite should be reported separately, regardless of the size of each
worksite.
For clarification, some examples follow.
Example #1: Multi-establishment employer who meets the employment criterion

Primary
Secondary
Secondary

Establishment
A
B
C

NAICS
453110
453110
453110

County
011
013
015

Employment
100
40
8

Total Secondary = 48 Employees
Multi to be disaggregated? YES
Establishment A is the primary establishment. The sum of employment in secondary
establishments is 48 (40 in establishment B plus 8 in establishment C). Each establishment
should be reported separately with its proper industry code, county code, other businessidentifying information, employment, and wages.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-3

Example #2: Multi-establishment employer who meets the employment criterion

Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Secondary

Establishment
A
B
C
D

NAICS
453210
453210
453220
453210

County
011
011
013
011

Employment
6
6
6
6

Total Secondary = 18 Employees
Multi to be disaggregated? YES
Establishment A has been designated as the primary establishment even though its employment
is the same as that of the other establishments. The sum of the employment in the secondary
establishments is 18. Since the sum of the employment in the secondary establishments is 10 or
more, each establishment should be treated as a worksite with its proper industry code and
county code and reported separately, regardless of the size of each worksite.
Example #3: Multi-establishment employer who meets the employment criterion

Primary
Secondary
Secondary

Establishment
A
B
C

NAICS
453910
453910
453910

County
013
013
013

Employment
43
5
5

Total Secondary = 10 Employees
Multi to be disaggregated? YES
Establishment A is the primary establishment. The sum of the employment in the secondary
establishments is 10 (5 in establishment B plus 5 in establishment C). Since the sum of the
employment in the secondary establishments is 10 or more, each establishment should be treated
as a worksite with its proper industry code and county code and reported separately, regardless of
the size of each worksite.
Example #4: Multi-establishment employer who does not meet the employment criterion

Primary
Secondary
Secondary

Establishment
A
B
C

Total Secondary = 6 Employees

NAICS
453220
453310
453310

County
011
013
015

Employment
100
3
3

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-4

Multi to be disaggregated? NO
Establishment A is the primary establishment. The sum of the employment in the secondary
establishments is 6 (3 in establishment B plus 3 in establishment C). Since this sum is less than
10, the state is not required to solicit this employer. If the state elects to maintain this as a single
unit, all activity should be coded in NAICS 453220 in County 011 with a Multi Establishment
Employer Indicator (MEEI) code of 6 (Known multi-establishment employer reporting as a
single unit and not solicited for disaggregation because of small employment (< 10) in all
secondary establishments combined.)
Dispersed Operations, No Fixed Worksites
In industries characterized by dispersed operations, such as construction, transportation, and
communications, states should follow the guidelines provided in the 2017 NAICS Manual to
determine which particular work locations should be treated as separate establishments for data
collection and reporting purposes:
"For these activities, the individual sites, projects, fields, networks, lines or systems of
such dispersed activities are not normally considered to be establishments. The
establishment is represented by those relatively permanent main or branch offices,
terminals, stations, and so forth, that are either (1) directly responsible for supervising
such activities, or (2) the base from which personnel operate to carry out these activities."
Consequently, employment and wage data for workers in these industries should be collected for
the point of supervision or the base from which these workers operate.
In addition, states have identified employers in certain other industries that typically have no
fixed worksites. (These industries are an exception to worksite reporting.) Employment and
wage data and identification information for these employers can therefore be collected on a
county (town for New England states and New Jersey) and industry basis.
Industry
Drilling Oil and Gas Wells
Support Activities for Oil and Gas Operations
Logging

NAICS
213111
213112
113310

On the MWRs for the industries noted in the above table, the worksite descriptions should state
that the employment and wages reported include data for the entire county, such as:
"TAYLOR COUNTY OIL EXPLORATION,"
"HOWARD COUNTY OIL EXPLORATION,"
"SMITH COUNTY LOGGING."

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-5

There are other examples of work situations not considered to have fixed worksites. This
includes sales representatives working out of their homes, which should be reported as one
worksite with a Reporting Unit Description (RUD) of "sales representatives-statewide." The
County code for this unit should be 995 (Statewide).
Data for construction industries have also historically been collected at the industry code and
county level. States should continue this practice as long as employers are willing to provide the
necessary data. For those employers who are unwilling, the establishment concept outlined in
this subsection may be used.

3.2 Assigning the MEEI Code
The Multi-Establishment Employer Indicator (MEEI) codes specify the multi-unit status of each
reporting unit. These codes must be carried on states' files and reported on the Enhanced
Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file. The MEEI codes are necessary to identify and
process records properly. The MEEI code is a quarterly field and relates to the reporting for that
quarter. Each record must be assigned one of the following MEEI codes:
MEEI 1: Assign to an employer who operates at one worksite. Only one establishment for this
employer will appear on the file with a unique UI Account Number and a Reporting Unit
Number (RUN) of 00000.
MEEI 2: Assign to a record which is a multi-unit master (parent) record. That is, a record which
is the summation of all of its composite reporting units (subunits) should be assigned an MEEI of
"2." The RUN for this type of record must be 00000.
MEEI 3: Assign to the individual subunit (worksite) records for each multi-unit employer. This
MEEI code represents a true one-establishment worksite. Each subunit record will have the
same UI Account Number as its master unit record but should carry a different RUN. For
example, if an employer within a state has four establishments and each establishment has six
employees, an MEEI of "2" and an RUN 00000 would be assigned to the master. An MEEI of
"3" would be assigned to each of the four subunits. The subunits would carry different RUNs
(for example, 00001, 00002, 00003, and 00004).
MEEI 4: Assign to an employer who has been identified as a multi-establishment employer, but
is unable or unwilling to provide any breakouts below a statewide total and the state is unable to
locate information to estimate a breakout for the employer. Assign RUN 00000 to all units with
MEEI 4.
MEEI 5: Assign to a record representing a combination of subunit establishments of a multiestablishment employer but reported as one subunit. The combined record should be assigned a
unique RUN greater than 00000. (An employer who provides county-level data, for example,
should not be coded as MEEI 4, but rather as a 5.)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-6

MEEI 6: Assign to a multi-unit employer who does not meet the size criterion for soliciting
disaggregated data. For example, if an employer has three establishments with employment
levels of 60, 3, and 3, then the reporting unit would be assigned an MEEI of "6" – multiestablishment employer not solicited because the secondary employment is less than 10 (see
Section 3.1). The unit would be treated as a single unit and report the aggregate under the
primary industry and county. This unit should carry RUN 00000.
Because all records coded as MEEI of 4, 5, or 6 represent an aggregation of establishments, the
QCEW staff should provide (at least for those units with an MEEI of 5) a description of that
aggregation in the RUD field.
The following chart summarizes the proper combinations of MEEI codes and RUNs:
Unit Type
Single Establishment
Multi-establishment employer master record
(subunit data available)
Multi-subunit (worksite or establishment level)
Multi-establishment employer reporting as a
single (disaggregated data not reported)
Multi-subunit comprised of more than one
establishment or worksite
Multi not solicited because of secondary
worksites’ size and, thus, remaining a single unit

MEEI
1
2

Reporting Unit Number
00000
00000

3
4

00001-99998*
00000

5

00001-99998*

6

00000

* The Reporting Unit Number must be numeric, containing a value from 00000 to 99998 (See
Appendix B.) In obtaining RUNs for new worksites, states are to assign the next available RUN
to a new worksite. States should assign the next available number (in sequence) and are not to
reuse RUNs. States should check for new and invalid RUNs. Invalid RUNs include RUNs that
are duplicates or discontinued.

3.3 Identifying Multi-unit Employers
Identifying multi-unit firms can be difficult. Valuable sources of information for detecting
multi-unit accounts are described below.
Annual Refiling Survey
The Annual Refiling Survey (ARS), serves as one of the primary means of identifying new
multi-establishment employers as well as the instrument to collect the physical location
addresses and business activities of single and multi-unit employers. For ARS purposes, all units
coded as MEEI 1, 4, and 6 are considered “singles”. The ARS collection instrument for singles
is ARS Web, which is administered by the BLS Internet Data Collection Facility (IDCF). All

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-7

units coded as MEEI 2 are “multis”. The ARS collection instrument for multis is NVM Web,
which is also administered by the IDCF.
The ARS Web questionnaire (form BLS 3023-NVS) includes a section in which employers are
asked to identify any instances where the surveyed UI includes employment and wage data for
more than one physical location in the state. For each additional physical location, beyond the
surveyed establishment, the respondent is asked for the trade name, physical location address
(PLA), county, business activity, reporting unit description (RUD), and employment. States then
update their systems with the additional site information provided by the national office to states
via EUSWeb. (See Chapter 6 for a description of ARS Web.)
Quarterly Contribution Report Forms
Some states include a question on the quarterly contribution report (QCR) that asks directly
whether the employer has more than one establishment. In other states, the form requests
changes in business activity during the last quarter. Even if such a question is not included, a
sharp increase in reported employment over the previous quarter's employment should indicate a
need for additional research. This research may identify the opening of new establishments or
the addition of acquired reporting units (see Chapter 5). For example, the following table shows
a sharp increase in employment.
Example 1:
Establishment
A

2020/1
25

2020/2
25

2020/3
135

Establishment A increased employment from 25 in 2020/2 to 135 in 2020/3. Further research
reveals that establishment A opened a second establishment in 2020/3 under the same UI. This
establishment now meets the employment criteria and should be disaggregated as shown below.
Establishment
A
B

2020/1
25
0

2020/2
25
0

2020/3
25
110

Example 2:
Here is an example of two single UI accounts (establishments A & B) merging their reporting
into one establishment (C). The merged reported establishment has more than 10 employees and
we know that this is not a true single, because it represents two establishments, so this new firm
should be sent an MWR form to collect data for both worksites.
Establishment
A
B

2020/1
25
15

2020/2
25
15

2020/3
0
0

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

September 2019

C

0

0

Page 3-8

40

Employer's Wage Record
The wage record is also known in some states as the wage list, wage report, or the payroll report.
State UI offices require the employer to submit these data along with the quarterly contributions
report. The wage record lists the total quarterly wages for each employee, and their respective
Social Security Number and name. Wage records are a useful tool for researching suspected
multi-unit accounts. Instructions for using the wage record in obtaining breakouts from multiunit employers are provided later in this chapter.
Other Statistical Surveys
Information collected in other surveys may also assist state staff in identifying firms with more
than one establishment. Surveys which may supplement the available information include the
following: Current Employment Statistics (CES), Occupational Employment Statistics (OES),
and the Occupational Safety and Health (OSH) Survey. States should develop a procedure by
which information obtained in other surveys regarding multi-unit employers can be made
available routinely to the QCEW staff. The state QCEW staff mustindependently validate this
information to avoid violating the Confidential Information Protection and Statistical Efficienty
Act (CIPSEA).
Other Sources
Media and other local news sources, UI field offices, and business directories may be used to
validate multi-unit detail on the state system.

3.4 Using the Multiple Worksite Report
After a UI account has been identified as a multi-establishment employer, state staff must
arrange for the employer to provide quarterly breakouts of employment and wages and business
identification information for each worksite. By obtaining these breakouts, the state can ensure
detailed and accurate data in the state system and the EQUI file.
The importance of complete and accurate breakouts of multi-establishment employer data cannot
be over-emphasized. State personnel should stress the importance of disaggregated data in
soliciting breakouts and in all communications with respondents. State personnel should remind
respondents that these data are critical to the preparation of accurate reports on the economic
conditions within the state. Furthermore, the data are used to ensure an equitable distribution of
federal funds through grant programs that use county economic indicators as a basis for
allocations, and for specific sample surveys. With the move to geocoded data, the emphasis on
worksite level reporting has also increased significantly.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-9

If known multi-employer records show no indication of establishment-level data, state personnel
should point out the value of establishment reporting to the respondent and offer assistance to
overcome reporting problems. States should encourage respondents to report online via MWR
web. Reporting MWR data electronically to the EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) Center for
large accounts can also reduce employer burden. (See Chapter 4, Multiple Worksite Central
Reporting.) Firms providing computer print outs in lieu of the MWR form is acceptable. This is
the least cost-effective method of collecting the data, so it should be used only when the firm
refuses to report via MWR Web, EDIC, or using the MWR form.
The MWR is a standardized OMB approved form used to collect employment and wage data as
well as physical location addresses and business identification information for each
establishment under a multi-unit employer. The data collected is used to ensure proper industrial
and geographic detail. See examples online at https://www.bls.gov/cew/mwrforms.htm.
The most cost effective method for printing and mailing MWR forms is by utilizing the MWR
print contractor, which is discussed in detail in later in this chapter. The standardized state
systems provide the capability to print the MWR forms in states, using national-office supplied
form templates. Programmable printers that merge and print the form templates with the State
and employer identification information are generally used. Also, EXPO Service Center states
can print smaller batches of MWR forms (typically for follow-up purposes).
The employer mailing address fields are formatted as described in Appendix B – Data Element
Definitions, since this will minimize postal delivery problems. Addresses should be entered
according to the latest USPS guidelines available here:
https://pe.usps.com/text/pub28/welcome.htm
The entire form mailing address of the employer (in Section 2 of the form), including the city,
state, and Zip Code will be printed with all capital letters. Instead of a comma and a blank to
separate the City and State, only one blank space is used. Between the state and Zip Code, two
blank spaces are used. An example of a properly printed mailing city and state address is:
ANYTOWN CA 12345-6789
The multiple worksite reports are paper forms with worksite information sent to respondents
every quarter by either the state or the print contractor. A return envelope and an MWR letter is
sent with the form to address handling and information for new or continuing MWR reporters
and varies also for mandatory and voluntary states. (See Appendix P). If a first mailing for the
quarter is not returned, a second follow-up mailing is sent. Respondents are asked to enter their
monthly employment and quarterly wage totals. Completed and returned MWRs are processed
by the state based on solicitation method and response method. Note that the total employment
and wages on the MWR should match the total employment and wages on the QCR.
Alternative solicitation and response options have been introduced to reduce respondent and state
processing burden. These methods include MWR print contract, MWR Web, and states may
also refer large multi-state employers to the EDI Center (The booklet for employers Electronic
Data Reporting, April 2011 describes this process further).

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-10

Each quarter, the employer is prompted to provide monthly employment and total quarterly
wages for each worksite identified on the MWR. They may also verify the additional
information such as the trade name, reporting unit description, and physical location address for
each worksite. The reporting unit number (RUN) is preprinted on the form in the Office Use
column of the Worksites section (Section 3). The information on the MWR originates from data
maintained on the state system. Specific instructions are provided on the form as to how new,
inactive, closed, or sold units are treated.

National Office Form Printing Inputs
The state contact information is listed on the state contact information spreadsheet and is stored
on QCOM. The state contact information spreadsheet also includes: (1) the Authorization
Statement to be printed by each state onto their MWR forms (Item 1, first page of the MWR
form), (2) the state QCR name and number references to be printed onto their MWR form, (3)
the MWR Return Address and phone/fax number(s), and (4) MWR Contact for Public Website.
Any changes to these items must be updated on the state contact information spreadsheet and
notification sent to [email protected]. The QCR name and number reference information is
printed in Item 1 of the MWR form (after the Authorization Statement text). The QCR number
reference is also printed at the bottom left of the form below the last worksite box.
Once updates are received, the information is forwarded by national office to the state system
developers and the MWR print contractor for update. This information is updated on the BLS
public website, the MWR Web collection site, and the MWR Print Contract forms as needed.
This input information is requested and maintained by national office on a flow basis so that the
most current information is printed onto the MWR forms, the BLS public website, and the MWR
Web collection site for each state.

Authorization Text (Voluntary)
States that do not mandate completion of the MWR form MUST use the voluntary authorization
text on the form (as shown below):
"This report is authorized by law, 29 U.S.C. 2. Your voluntary cooperation is
needed to make the results of this survey complete, accurate, and timely."

3.4.1 Printing MWR Forms
There are two ways for states to print their MWR forms, which are mailed to respondents..
States can print the forms themselves, locally. This is covered in Section 3.4.1.1 Alternatively,
states can arrange through the national office to have their forms printed, mailed, and processed

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-11

by a contractor. This process is called the MWR Print Project or simply MWR Print; it is
covered in Section 3.4.1.2.
The first and second mailing of most MWR paper forms provides an MWR Web ID and
password, which the respondent can use to login to the website if they choose to report via the
web rather than on paper. Once MWR data are submitted using the web, paper forms will no
longer be sent. Respondents are sent an email reminder each quarter when data collection has
begun. The benefits of using MWR Web include printing and postage savings and increased
timeliness of data collection. MWR Web respondents will be able to:






view all of their worksites on a single page
report multiple UIs under one MWR Web account
add/remove/update UIs or worksites
address large employment and wage changes (system flags and questions respondent
inputs)
apply new unit NAICS as suggested based on other worksites

Here is an example of Web ID and password sent to respondents on paper MWR forms.

MWR Web is covered in Chapter 4, Multiple Worksite Central Reporting.

3.4.1.1 Printing MWR Forms Locally
The state systems will print the physical location address of each subunit record in the worksites
section of the MWR form, along with the trade or legal name and the reporting unit description if
they are present. In the most common situation, the subunit record represents a true oneestablishment worksite and the record has a physical location address.
If the Street Address Line 1 and City are blank on the physical location address block of the
worksite (MEEI 3, 5), the state systems will print the message “*** Address Unknown -- Please
Provide ***” in the space reserved for the Street Address in the Worksite box on the MWR form.
If the FIPS County code for the worksite (MEEI 3, 5) is greater than 900, the state systems will
print the following text in the space reserved for the Street Address in the Worksite box on the
MWR form.
For County 995: MANY LOCATIONS OR STATEWIDE
For County 996: PHYSICAL LOCATION(S) OUTSIDE OF U.S.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-12

For County 998: PHYSICAL LOCATION(S) OUTSIDE OF STATE
For County 999: ADDRESS UNKNOWN
The reporting unit description, if present on the worksite record, will print on the MWR form.
The employer is prompted to provide a physical location address (PLA) for the unit based on the
reporting unit description. If the employer does not provide the PLA, the state should contact the
respondent to obtain the physical location address. If physical location addresses are collected
by the EDI Center, refer to chapter 4.
If the record represents an aggregated subunit (MEEI 5) record and a physical location address is
available for each of the worksites comprising that record, the state should put the address of the
largest establishment for that (aggregated) subunit onto the record so it will print on the MWR.
Use the reporting unit description to describe the aggregation of establishments so that
employment and wage data are reported properly. (The employer should be familiar with the
aggregation since it was the employer who informed the state of the unavailability of worksitelevel data and the need to aggregate data for some combination of worksites.)
If the record represents an aggregated subunit (MEEI 5) and a physical location address is
available for only one of the worksites comprising that subunit record, that address should be
used even though the worksite may not be the largest. Again, the reporting unit description
should be used to describe the aggregation.
In converting from county level reporting to establishment level reporting, states should collect
worksite identification information so it can be pre-printed on the MWR. If a pre-existing multi
establishment employer has not provided worksite identification information prior to being
solicited for worksite level data, the worksite boxes on the MWR form would preferably be
blank and the reporting unit descriptions would not identify the county. Using only the county
name has been shown to mislead employers into submitting county level data even though
establishment-level data are desired. Of course, this practice is acceptable for those industries
identified in Section 3.1 where county and industry code reporting is appropriate.
States should retain copies of completed MWRs for eight quarters: the quarter most recently
mailed and seven prior quarters. For example, when MWR forms for 2020/1 are mailed in late
March, there should be seven prior quarters of forms on hand, 2019/4 through 2018/2, inclusive.
At the end of June 2020, the forms for 2018/2 can be destroyed (because of the confidential
nature of the data) when the forms for 2020/2 are mailed.
MWR forms should be kept in such a manner that state staff can retrieve them with reasonable
ease, for example, by batch number.

3.4.1.2 Centralized Printing of MWR Forms (MWR Print)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-13

States are encouraged to participate in the MWR print contract (also referred to as MWR Print
Project or simply MWR Print). The print contract designates a contractor to handle printing,
mailing, receiving, sorting, and scanning of the MWR forms. The employment and wage data
from the forms are scanned and a data file is created for the states to load to the state systems.
The image of the form is also scanned and provided to the states. Participation in the MWR
Print Project is voluntary.

MWR Print Project Processing and Flow
-

Twice each quarter, once for an initial mailing and once for a second/follow-up mailing
to non-respondents, participating states use their standardized QCEW processing system
to provide the national office with a print file.
o The initial print file is due from states to the national office about three weeks
before the end of the reference quarter.
o The second mail file is due about five weeks after the end of the reference quarter.
These mail files include all the information that the contractor needs to print and mail the
MWR forms.

-

Using each state’s print file, the contractor prints the MWR forms and mails them to the
address that is in the state’s system, which the state provided on the print file. Included
with each mailing is a return, postage-paid envelope addressed to the contractor.
o The first mailing is about a week before the end of the reference quarter.
o The second (follow-up) mailing is about seven weeks after the end of the
reference quarter.

-

The contractor processes the completed, returned paper MWR forms by scanning them
two different ways.
o The worksite employment and wage data written on the forms by the respondent
are scanned into a .txt file.
o Additionally, the contractor separates each form into one of two categories, each
of which is scanned into a distinct .pdf file. One category of .pdf files (known as
Category 1) includes the returned forms on which the respondent entered only
their monthly employment and quarterly wage information. The other category of
.pdf file (known as Category 2) includes all other returned forms, which include
any additional, respondent added information besides employment and wages of
continuous reporting units, written on the form by the respondent.

-

Each week, the national office provides three files to the state.
o The .txt file of the employment and wage data for each reporting unit, which the
state loads into their state system.
o A .pdf file of the form images that had nothing written on them by the respondent
except for their employment and wage data for continuous reporting units.
(Generally, states do not do much with this .pdf file, but it can be useful if the
state wants to check an unusual value on the loadable .txt file.)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-14

o A second .pdf file that includes the form images where the respondent included
any information beyond the employment and wages of continuous reporting units.
For example, this file would include the form images where the respondent
provided a corrected address for one of their reporting units or noted that a
reporting unit has closed. It is important that states review this .pdf file carefully
and make any necessary changes in their state system.
-

In addition to completed or annotated MWR forms, sometimes the respondent will return
other items (a listing or a letter, for example) to the contractor. These materials are
known as white mail or Category 3 forms. Each week, the contractor sends a package of
any such white mail that they receive from respondents to the state, where the state can
process it as necessary.

The QCEW page on StateWeb (http://199.221.111.170/program/ES202/QCEWmain.htm)
includes a calendar of all the MWR Print processing activities and due dates, which the national
office posts each year and updates as necessary

MWR Print Forms
Because they are designed to be scanned into loadable .txt files of collected employment and
wage data, the MWR forms used in the MWR Print Project look somewhat different than MWR
forms that states print. The MWR Print forms that the contractor prints and mails include small
boxes into which the respondent is to write each digit of their reported employment and wages.
EXHIBIT 3A shows an example of a Category 1 MWR Print form. This example shows a case
where the respondent did not write anything on the form besides employment and wages of
continuous reporting units. From such forms, the employment and wages will be read by the
contractor and provided to the state on the loadable .txt file. Additionally, the “picture” of this
form will be provided to the state in a .pdf file of forms that specifically included only
employment and wages of continuous reporting units.
EXHIBIT 3B shows an example of a Category 2 MWR Print form where, in addition to
employment and wages, the respondent wrote a note on the form. From such forms, the
employment and wages will be read by the contractor and provided to the state on the loadable
.txt file. Additionally, the “picture” of this form will be provided to the state in a .pdf file of
forms that specifically includes information on the form in addition to the employment and
wages of continuous subunits.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

EXHIBIT 3A Example MWR Print Form with Only Employment and Wages

Page 3-15

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

EXHIBIT 3B Example MWR Print Form with more than employment and wages

Page 3-16

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

September 2019

Page 3-17

3.4.2 Solicitation and Informed Consent Letters
Potential respondents to the MWR must know whether or not the information they provide will
be held in confidence and how this information will be used. For these reasons, the following
statement must appear on all MWR forms used in every state.
“The information collected on this form by the Bureau of Labor Statistics and the state agencies
cooperating in its statistical programs will be used for statistical and Unemployment Insurance
program purposes, and other purposes in accordance with law.”

Solicitation Letters
The national office has developed two generic solicitation letters, (EXHIBITs 3C and 3E), to be
mailed to (1) newly identified multi-establishment employers and (2) multi-establishment
employers who previously did not submit the MWR. The national office has also developed a
generic "informed consent" letter to be mailed to multi-establishment employers who have used
the MWR before (EXHIBIT 3G), and a letter to be mailed to employers who no longer meet the
definition of a multiple worksite employer (EXHIBIT 3K). The sample letters are generic so that
all states can use them as a guide in developing their own letters.
Instructions for adapting the sample letters to each state are provided in EXHIBITs 3D, 3F, 3H,
and 3J, respectively, along with an example of a hypothetical state letter for new multiestablishment employers (EXHIBIT 3L). The national office must approve the cover letters
before they are used.
One state has developed samples of completed MWRs which it reproduces on the reverse side of
the solicitation/cover letter. States using this approach must ensure that a copy of the latest form
is used as a sample so it includes the most current confidentiality statement. The samples
supplement the instructions by showing how the actual form should look when completed. A
nice feature of the samples is that the preprinted information can be easily distinguished from the
information the employer provides. One version of the form shows printed worksite
identification information for an employer that previously provided it, and a second version
shows how the form would look when used to collect the worksite identification information
initially. States may consider using similar sample forms to improve the completeness and
accuracy of employer reporting.
Letters to employers who previously did not report should be mailed one year after the initial
solicitation letter is sent. If an employer fails to respond to the initial solicitation letter and
follow-up letters after first being identified as a multi-establishment employer, a letter like that in
EXHIBIT 3E should be sent the following year. If there is no response to this letter, no followup letters should be sent.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-18

In many states, the employers are solicited via phone when the ARS form is received with
information identifying the account as a new multi-establishment employer. States should also
be aware of units pending EDI Center solicitation. The employer should not be contacted again
until after the next Annual Refiling Survey, presumably when it is again identified as a multiestablishment employer. The following example should clarify this:
Suppose an employer responded via ARS Web first identifying itself as a multi-establishment
employer in December 2018. With this information, the state solicited the employer to complete
a MWR in March 2019. Follow-up letters were sent six and eight weeks later, but the employer
did not respond. No attempt at solicitation was made in the second, third, or fourth quarters of
that year. In March 2020, the state solicited the employer again using the letter for employers
who did not report previously. Thus, one year after the initial refusal or nonresponse the
employer was solicited again, using the letter in EXHIBIT 3E. If the employer did not respond
to this letter, no follow-up letter would be sent and the employer would not be contacted again
until at least March 2021 (or March 2024). Solicitation in March 2021 (or March 2024) assumes
that the employer responded to the ARS again. Note that in this example, re-solicitation for
MWR reporting is recommended for March 2021, because companies coded in certain lowchange NAICS codes are on an every-sixth-year, rather than an every-third-year, ARS cycle.
The informed consent statement, which will be on all states’ forms should also be referenced in
the cover letters. States should provide brief descriptions of any non-statistical, non-UI uses of
the data. A state’s specific uses and confidentiality policies of MWR data should be
distinguished from any national office uses and confidentiality policies of MWR data. If states
publish industry directories, a broad description of uses and future uses of data released in these
directories should also be disclosed in the cover letters.

EXHIBIT 3C Solicitation letter to new multi-establishment employers
Dear Employer,
The enclosed Multiple Worksite Report is designed to collect employment and wage
data by location (worksite) from employers who conduct their business operations at
more than one location within the State. This survey is authorized by 29 U.S. Code 2
and completion of the form is required by Section and Title of State Law. [1] The
economic information collected on this form is shared with the U.S. Department of
Labor's Bureau of Labor Statistics as part of a Federal/State cooperative effort to reduce
employer reporting burden.
Employers fitting the above description are requested/required to complete this report.
To do this, you should/must provide employment and wage information for each
worksite (e.g., store, plant, office). Please review and update the worksite information
preprinted on the attached report and provide a trade name (e.g., division, subsidiary)
and worksite description (e.g., store number, plant name) for each of the listed
worksites. Please add any omitted worksites and indicate units that are inactive,
closed, or have been sold. A computer generated listing which includes all of the
worksite information requested on the Multiple Worksite Report is acceptable in lieu of
the form.
For employers in the construction industry, we are requesting that you provide
information for only those projects which have an expected duration of twelve months or
longer. Whether or not you have any projects of this length, please include your office
location(s) on the report. [2]
The information collected on this form by the Bureau of Labor Statistics and the State
agencies cooperating in its statistical programs will be used for statistical and
Unemployment Insurance program purposes, and other purposes in accordance with
law. Worksite-level data are necessary for this agency to prepare summaries of
economic conditions and business activities by geographical area and industry within
our State. State name may include purposes such as list additional uses of the data.
[3]
This report should be returned in the postage-paid envelope enclosed. If you have any
questions regarding these reporting procedures, please contact name and telephone
number.
Thank you for your cooperation.
Sincerely,

Note: It might be useful to put a sample completed MWR form on the back of this cover letter so
that these new respondents can see how it is supposed to be completed.
EXHIBIT 3D Instructions for solicitation letter to new multi-establishment employers

State-Specific Sections
All underlined words are state-specific and should be included if appropriate, or deleted
if not.
[1] Include this underlined phrase if completion of the MWR is mandatory in your state.
[2] States have the option to add this paragraph if they think construction industry
reporting needs to be specifically addressed.
[3] This sentence should be included by those states that use the data collected in this
survey for purposes other than the statistical and Unemployment Insurance purposes
mentioned in the first sentence of this paragraph. The state should complete the
sentence with a brief description of these non-statistical uses of the data and be broad
enough to cover any future uses.

EXHIBIT 3E Solicitation letter for multi-establishment employers who refused previous
solicitation
Dear Employer,
Last year we contacted you to request your cooperation in completing a Multiple
Worksite Report, but you either indicated that you were not able to, or chose not to,
complete the form. However, because of the importance of the information, we are
asking again for your cooperation. This survey is authorized by 29 U.S. Code 2 and
completion of the form is required by Section and Title of State Law. [1] The economic
information collected on this form is shared with the U.S. Department of Labor's Bureau
of Labor Statistics as part of a Federal/State cooperative effort to reduce employer
reporting burden.
Employers that conduct business operations in more than one location within the State
are requested/required to complete this report. To do this, you should/must provide
employment and wage information for each worksite (e.g., store, plant, office). Please
review and update the worksite information preprinted on the attached report and
provide a trade name (e.g., division, subsidiary) and worksite description (e.g., store
number, plant name) for each of the listed worksites. Please add any omitted worksites
and indicate units that are inactive, closed, or have been sold. A computer generated
listing which includes all of the worksite information requested on the Multiple Worksite
Report is acceptable in lieu of the form.
For employers in the construction industry, we are requesting that you provide
information for only those projects which have an expected duration of twelve months or
longer. Whether or not you have any projects of this length, please include your office
location(s) on the report. [2]
The information collected on this form by the Bureau of Labor Statistics and the State
agencies cooperating in its statistical programs will be used for statistical and
Unemployment Insurance program purposes, and other purposes in accordance with
law. Worksite-level data are necessary for this agency to prepare summaries of
economic conditions and business activities by geographical area and industry within
our State. State name may include purposes such as list additional uses of the data.
[3]
This report should be returned separately in the postage-paid envelope enclosed. If you
have any questions regarding these reporting procedures, please contact name and
telephone number.
Thank you for your cooperation.
Sincerely,
Note: It might be useful to put a sample completed MWR form on the back of this cover letter so
that the new respondents can see how it is to be completed.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-22

EXHIBIT 3F Instructions for solicitation letter for multi-establishment employers who did
not report previously

State-Specific Sections
All underlined words are state-specific and should be included if appropriate, or deleted
if not.
[1] Include this underlined phrase if completion of the MWR is mandatory in your state.
[2] States have the option to add this paragraph if they think construction industry
reporting needs to be specifically addressed.
[3] This sentence should be included by those states that use the data collected in this
survey for purposes other than the statistical and Unemployment Insurance purposes
mentioned in the first sentence of this paragraph. The state should complete the
sentence with a brief description of these non-statistical uses of the data and be broad
enough to cover any future uses.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Special Processing for Multi-Unit Employers

Page 3-23

EXHIBIT 3G Informed consent letter for continuing MWR reporters
Dear Employer,
Thank you for your continuing cooperation in completing the Multiple Worksite Report.
This survey is authorized by 29 U.S. Code 2 and completion of the form is required by
Section and Title of State Law. [1] The economic information collected on this form is
shared with the U.S. Department of Labor's Bureau of Labor Statistics as part of a
Federal/State cooperative effort to reduce employer reporting burden.
Employers that conduct business operations in more than one location within the State
are requested/required to complete this report. To do this, you should/must provide
employment and wage information for each worksite (e.g., store, plant, office). Please
review and update the worksite information preprinted on the attached report. Add any
omitted worksites and indicate units that are inactive, closed, or have been sold. A
computer generated listing which includes all of the worksite information requested on
the Multiple Worksite Report is acceptable in lieu of the form.
For employers in the construction industry, we are requesting that you provide
information for only those projects which have an expected duration of twelve months or
longer. Whether or not you have any projects of this length, please include your office
location(s) on the report. [2]
The information collected on this form by the Bureau of Labor Statistics and the State
agencies cooperating in its statistical programs will be used for statistical and
Unemployment Insurance program purposes, and other purposes in accordance with
law. Worksite-level data are necessary for this agency to prepare summaries of
economic conditions and business activities by geographical area and industry within
our state. State name may include purposes such as list additional uses of the data. [3]
This report should be returned separately in the postage-paid envelope provided. If you
have any questions regarding these reporting procedures, please contact name and
telephone number.
Thank you again for your cooperation.
Sincerely,

EXHIBIT 3H Instructions for informed consent letter for continuing MWR reporters

State Specific Sections
All underlined words are state-specific and should be included if appropriate, or deleted
if not.
1. Include this underlined phrase if completion of the MWR is mandatory in your state.
2. States have the option to add this paragraph if they think construction industry
reporting needs to be specifically addressed.
3. This sentence should be included by those states that use the data collected in this
survey for purposes other than the statistical and Unemployment Insurance purposes
mentioned in the first sentence of this paragraph. The state should complete the
sentence with a brief description of these non-statistical uses of the data and be broad
enough to cover any future uses.

EXHIBIT 3J Instructions for informed consent letter to MWR respondent using magnetic
media

State Specific Instructions
1. Firms reporting to state, only.
2. Firms reporting to Data Collection Center, only.
3. The phrase "is held confidential to the full extent permitted by law " should be
included by only those states for which it is true.
4. This sentence should be included by those states that use the data collected on this
survey for purposes other than the statistical and Unemployment Insurance uses
mentioned in the second paragraph of the letter. The state should complete the
sentence with a brief description of these additional uses of the data and be broad
enough to cover any future uses.

EXHIBIT 3K Letter to multi-establishment no longer meeting MWR definition
Dear Employer:
Thank you for your past cooperation in completing the Multiple Worksite Report. The
information you have provided is authorized by 29 U.S. Code 2 and is
requested/required by State Law XXX-XXX.
The information obtained from this report is used for both statistical and Unemployment
Insurance purposes to the full extent permitted by law. The worksite-level data provided
by multi-business establishments are used to prepare summaries of economic
conditions and business activities by geographical area and industry within our State.
Because your most recent report indicated that you no longer meet the requirements
necessary to identify multiple worksites within this State, you will no longer be requested
to complete this report form. The Bureau of Labor Statistics has established ten as the
minimum number of employees working outside of the primary worksite (defined as the
largest worksite in terms of employment) for an employer to be considered a multiple
worksite employer.
If at some future point your worksite employment in State should increase, such as
through the addition of new worksites, you may again be requested to complete the
Multiple Worksite Report.
Again, thank you for your cooperation. If you have any questions, please contact Mr.
John Doe at (123) 456-7890.
Sincerely,

3.4.3 Review and Processing of MWR Data
The flow chart in EXHIBIT 3M is a useful guide for state staff as they review returned MWRs
(paper forms or facsimiles) and process the data for existing multi-unit employers. While special
circumstances may cause state procedures to differ slightly from this workflow, the activities
shown are all needed to meet the full range of QCEW program needs. States whose processing
of the existing MWRs deviates significantly from this workflow should review their current
procedures to determine if the suggested workflow is more efficient.
The processing of MWR data collected by the EDI Center and through MWR Web, is covered in
Chapter 4, Multiple Worksite Central Reporting.
When MWRs are received, they generally are in one of two formats: paper or facsimile (e.g.,
computer-generated report). Facsimiles are generated by the employer and may or may not
resemble the MWR (BLS 3020) form. Paper MWR forms are printed by the state system and are
returned by the employer.
In processing MWRs, both formats have common tasks. The main difference between the two is
the assignment of RUNs. For facsimile copies, states have to compare the previous quarter’s
MWR to assign the RUNs to each worksite. This comparison varies by state. Some states write
the RUNs on the facsimile and then transfer the RUNs to the current quarter’s facsimile, while
other states may reprint the previous quarter’s MWR for the comparison. With the paper format,
the RUNs are printed onto the MWR form, thus the assignment of RUNs is unnecessary (except
for new worksites or locations).
Once the MWR is received, a cursory review prior to inputting the monthly employments and
total wages should be made. This review should cover changes and/or comments made by the
employer, and large data changes (employments and wages).
Employer changes could include the following:











Mailing Address and/or contact name or phone number
Trade Name and/or RUD for a worksite
Address change for a worksite
Narrative comments from the employer
New worksites (locations)
Worksites that are no longer in business (deaths) or transferred to another UI account
Worksites that are sold
Worksites that are broken out further
Worksites that are combined (two or more worksites combine into one worksite)
Worksites that transfer employees to another worksite (new or existing)

Changes to Mailing Addresses, Trade Names, RUDs, Physical Location Addresses (PLA), and
narrative comments should be made immediately. If a PLA change causes the County code to
change, assign the new County code and comment code 82 (economic code change).
For new worksites, additional information is needed to determine the action required. In most
cases, a new worksite is a result of a new opening. These new worksites are considered “births”
and NAICS, County, and Ownership codes should be assigned along with comment code 85

[new establishment or worksite]. In other cases, these new worksites may have come from
another UI number (predecessor) or from another worksite within the UI account due to a
transfer or merger. In these cases, refer to Chapter 5 to assign proper predecessor/successor links
and comment codes.
Conversely, if an employer closes a worksite, it is considered a “death.” These worksites should
be given an End of Liability (EOL) Date and comment code 86, establishment permanently out
of business. As with new worksites, “deaths” could be caused by worksites that are sold to
another UI account or by combining one or more worksites into one worksite. New RUNs
should be assigned, if applicable. In these cases, refer to Chapter 5 to assign proper
predecessor/successor links and comment codes.
If the UI number changes due to a merger or some other reason, add predecessor/successor links
to the master and each RUN. Also, assign new RUNs (if applicable), appropriate comment
codes, and termination dates to the master and each RUN for the predecessor. Refer to Chapter 5
for more information on processing predecessor and successor transactions.

EXHIBIT 3M Recommended processing flow for existing multi-establishment employers.
Returned MWR

Paper MWR

MWR print

MWR Web

EDI

[email protected]

[email protected]

https://199.221.111.47/login.aspx

Transcribe revisions and
update M1-3 quarterly
employment and wage
data

Load Transmittal

Cursory review, examine for:
 Changes
 Comments
 Large changes in employment and wage data

Change to Existing
Runs

Deaths: Economic
change. Unit
closed/out of
business in this
quarter. CC: 86

County | Ownership
| NAICS: Determine
if economic or noneconomic and apply
change accordingly

New RUNs added

Transfers. Pred/succ
CC: 92/93. Link &
verify county, own,
NAICS, & flow of
E&W

Improved Reporting.
Previous distribution
incorrect. CC: 48

Questions: States my contact the respondent
and/or MWR print, MWR Web, or the EDI
center depending on collection methodology.

Add comment codes and narrative to help explain the data

3.4.4 Delinquent MWR Reporters

Births: Economic
change. New unit
opening in this
quarter. CC: 85

The QCEW program depends upon accurate employment and wage data submitted by employers
on a quarterly basis. This is especially important since the QCEW program is publishing on a
quarterly basis. Much of these quarterly employment and wage data comes from the Multiple
Worksite Report. For this reason, MWR reporters who are delinquent in submitting their
quarterly reports must be contacted as soon as possible to obtain the necessary information. This
will ensure that the QCEW data are timely and accurate.
The state of Louisiana created a follow-up cover letter that has proven very effective in soliciting
information from delinquent MWR reporters. Their form has been modified by national office
for use in all states. EXHIBIT 3N contains a template that should be used for contacting
delinquent reporters in voluntary states, and EXHIBIT 3O contains a template for use in
mandatory states.
When using the templates, states must replace the generic information found within the form’s
body with state-specific information. This information includes state Workforce Commission
name, relevant state laws, state data uses, state contact names, and state contact telephone
numbers. A MWR form must be enclosed with the cover letter. The cover letter also mentions
the alternative methods by which an employer may submit MWR data in addition to returning
the MWR paper form.

EXHIBIT 3N Cover Letter for Delinquent MWR Reporters (Voluntary States)
Dear Employer:
RE: Failure to Report Notice – Multiple Worksite Report
The (insert State Workforce Commission) sends your company quarterly the Multiple Worksite Report that
is a nationally standardized form to collect employment and wage data from employers that have more than
one location or economic activity in (insert state). This survey is authorized by 29 U. S. Code 2 and
completion of the form is requested by (insert State Law XXX-XXX). Our records indicate that your
company is not completing and returning this form to our office.
The information collected on this form, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics and the (insert State Workforce
Commission) cooperating in its statistical programs, will be used for statistical and Unemployment
Insurance (UI) program purposes, and other purposes in accordance with law. In addition to the statistical
and UI uses of these data, (insert State Workforce Commission) also uses the data for (insert state data
uses). The information supplied on this report is a direct input into the unemployment rate for
(counties/townships/parishes) throughout the state and can affect government funding to these
(counties/townships/parishes).
We have enclosed the Multiple Worksite Report form, designed to collect employment and wage
information quarterly for each worksite (e.g., store, plant, office), preprinted with the latest available
information on your company. Please review the form and update the worksite information by adding any
omitted worksites and indicate units that are inactive or have been sold. A reporting unit number will be
assigned to each location and/or establishment and will become a permanent identification number for that
particular worksite.
In order to reduce your workload, we will accept a computer-generated listing that includes all the requested
information including the reporting unit number that we have assigned to each location.
We appreciate your cooperation in this matter. If you have any questions concerning this report, please
contact (insert name) at (insert state phone #).
Sincerely,

EXHIBIT 3O Cover Letter for Delinquent MWR Reporters (Mandatory States)
Dear Employer:
RE: Failure to Report Notice – Multiple Worksite Report
The (insert State Workforce Commission) sends your company quarterly the Multiple Worksite Report that
is a nationally standardized form to collect employment and wage data from employers that have more than
one location or economic activity in (insert state). This survey is authorized by 29 U. S. Code 2, and
completion of the form is required by (insert State Law XXX-XXX). Our records indicate that your
company is not completing and returning this form to our office, and is therefore not in compliance with
the above referenced statue.
The information collected on this form, by the Bureau of Labor Statistics and the (insert State Workforce
Commission) cooperating in its statistical programs, will be used for statistical and Unemployment
Insurance (UI) program purposes, and other purposes in accordance with law. In addition to the statistical
and UI uses of these data, (insert State Workforce Commission) also uses the data for (insert state data
uses). The information supplied on this report is a direct input into the unemployment rate for
(counties/townships/parishes) throughout the state and can affect government funding to these
(counties/townships/parishes).
We have enclosed the Multiple Worksite Report form, designed to collect employment and wage
information quarterly for each worksite (e.g., store, plant, office), preprinted with the latest available
information on your company. Please review the form and update the worksite information by adding any
omitted worksites and indicate units that are inactive or have been sold. A reporting unit number will be
assigned to each location and/or establishment and will become a permanent identification number for that
particular worksite.
In order to reduce your workload, we will accept a computer-generated listing that includes all the requested
information including the reporting unit number that we have assigned to each location.
We appreciate your cooperation in this matter. If you have any questions concerning this report, please
contact (insert name) at (insert phone #).
Sincerely,

3.5 When Quarterly MWRs Are Unavailable
There may be instances in which a multi-establishment employer either refuses or is unable to
provide a complete establishment-level breakout on a quarterly basis. To ensure the validity and
reliability of the QCEW data, both industry and county breakouts are necessary. Therefore as an
interim measure – until such time as the employer can provide complete establishment breakouts
each quarter – state staff should take the following steps, in the order they are listed, to obtain the
necessary data.

Yearly Submission of a Breakout
If state staff determine that it is impossible for the employer to provide an establishment
breakout each quarter, the state agency should negotiate an alternative solution with the
employer. One solution might be for the employer to submit a complete establishment breakout
for one quarter each year. The state can then prorate the aggregate data for the remainder of the
year. (See Section 8.3.2 for the proration procedures.) The national office prefers that the first
quarter data be obtained. However, if the first quarter is not representative of the other quarters
in the year, states should work with the firm to select the most representative quarter's data for
that employer. For school districts, it is preferable to have two quarters of data each year – the
third quarter (the beginning of the school year) and the second quarter (the end of the school
year).

Compiling a Breakout from Other Available Records
It is preferable that data by establishment be obtained from the employer even if it must be
provided on some schedule other than a quarterly basis. However, if such a solution cannot be
negotiated with the employer, state staff should attempt to compile establishment breakouts
using various other sources of information available. These sources include the employer's wage
records.
One of the best sources of information on some large employers is the company’s website.
Many of these firms list all of their locations for their customers’ convenience. It is better to use
this information and prorate the employment and wage data from the Quarterly Contributions
Report (master record) than to collapse this record to one county or a statewide report.

Employer's Wage Record
The wage records can be useful in approximating breakouts by establishment. If possible, sort
by establishment and the establishments' addresses. However, even when the data are not
arranged by establishment, it may still be possible to determine breakouts for smaller multiestablishment accounts. This determination will be possible if establishment identifier codes are
provided along with names, addresses, or other types of identifying information. Location of
stores identified by store numbers can usually be obtained by calling the corporate office and
requesting a list.

One limitation of the wage records is that it includes data for all employees for the account – not
just those employed during the pay period including the 12th of the month. Thus, in
approximating employment data for establishments, state staff should consider the impact of
employee turnover and any other factors that could result in fluctuations of the data.
Furthermore, controls should be set up to ensure that the sum of approximated employment data
for individual establishments does not exceed the total reported employment for the employer on
the contribution report.
State staff should be cognizant of the limitations involved in using wage records to approximate
establishment data.

Handling a New Breakout for an Uncooperative Employer
In some instances the employer may have been unable or unwilling to provide establishment,
industry, or county breakouts on a quarterly basis or on any other schedule. State staff may have
contacted the employer to negotiate yearly submission and then reviewed other available records
– all to no avail. The state agency may have exhausted all acceptable methods for obtaining
establishment breakouts, including business directories, the internet, etc. In this case, as a last
resort, the following procedures should be used to properly code the data for the multiestablishment employer.
1. The primary county should be identified.
States should consider primary county as the county with the largest share of the employment in
the account, but should only code to primary county when 50% or more of the total employment
is in the primary county.
Some examples of this primary county coding concept are presented below.
Example 1: A multi-unit account has the following locations.
Location
A (primary)
B
C

Employment
8
2
7

County
001
003
003

The state should assign county 003 to the single unit (combined) record because the employment
for this county is more than 50% of the total employment for the account.
Example 2: A multi-unit account has the following locations.
Location
A
B
C
D (primary)

Employment
2
3
1
4

County
101
103
105
107

The state should assign county code 995 (Statewide, locations in more than one county, or no
primary county) to the single unit (combined) record because the primary county’s employment
(location D) does not make up 50% or more of the total employment for the account. County
code 995 should also be used if state staff have exhausted every source of information, including
estimates by the employer, and is still unable to determine whether 50% or more of the
employees work in the primary county.
2. The primary industry should be identified.
The primary industry is the industry with the largest revenue or receipts. Sometimes, however,
where diverse industrial activities exist for a multi-establishment employer, revenues or receipts
cannot be determined or estimated for each product or service. In other instances, the revenues
or receipts for each product or service do not adequately reflect the economic importance of each
establishment within the firm. In these situations, as well as for agencies involved in public
administration, employment or payroll information should be used to determine the primary
industry.
The state must determine the approximate employment for the primary county and primary
industry. Information from the following sources should be used in determining employment:
employer contacts, employer wage records, industrial classification statements, newspaper
articles, information gathered during previous attempts to obtain establishment breakouts, and
any other sources available.
If the industry breakout is not available, then the state should code all the employer's
establishments into the primary industry as previously defined.

3.6 Report of Federal Employment and Wages
The national office collects the RFEW from federal departments and agencies. This is discussed
in Section 4.6, Central Reporting of Federal Data. Presently, federal employment and wage data
are centrally collected by the EDI Center in Chicago for virtually all federal civilian
employment.

Federal Agency Delinquency and Data Problems Resolution
Questions on federal agency data supplied by the EDI Center should be addressed to the EDI
Center staff using their existing form.

State Agency Publication of Federal Civilian Employment and Wage Data
Federal civilian employment and wage data are subject to provisions of the Freedom of
Information Act. Accordingly, there are no restrictions on state publication of federal
government civilian employment and wage figures, including Department of Defense civilian

employment and wage data. The Privacy Act of 1974 does not prohibit disclosure of the salaries
paid to individual federal government employees.

QCEW Operating Manual
Multiple Worksite Central Reporting

September 2019

Page 4-1

Chapter 4 – Multiple Worksite Central Reporting
BLS developed the central collection of Multiple Worksite Report (MWR) and Report of Federal
Employment and Wages (RFEW) data to streamline the process of data collection from large
employers and clients of payroll outsourcing firms. The Electronic Data Interchange Center
(EDIC) in Chicago, Illinois is responsible for processing and editing the data and forwarding the
clean data to the states each quarter. States are able to access their quarterly MWR and RFEW
data provided by the EDIC through Employment and Unemployment Statistics (EUS) Web, as
well as through the Data Management Associates (DMA). State staff should then use their state
processing system to load their quarterly electronic MWR/RFEW files directly to their QCEW
micro database files.
To supplement central data collection by the EDIC, the national office also collects MWR and
RFEW data via the internet. The MWR Web application at the Internet Data Collection Facility
(IDCF) allows employers with a small to moderate number of worksites, or their payroll
outsourcing firms, to report their data centrally. See Appendix A for the flowchart.
------------------------- Contents of Chapter 4 ------------------------4.1 Data Collection by the EDI Center
4.2 Data Processing at the EDI Center
4.3 Communications between the EDI Center and the States
4.3.1 Coordinating the Employer's Transition to Central Reporting
4.3.2 New and Discontinued Worksites
4.3.3 Data Transmission to the States
4.4 Communication with Central Reporters
4.5 Handling Special Situations
4.5.1 Data Quality
4.5.2 Employment and Wage Totals
4.6 Central Reporting of Federal Data
4.7 Employer Reporting of MWR Data Directly to States
4.8 MWR Web Internet Data Collection

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Multiple Worksite Central Reporting

Page 4-2

4.1 Data Collection by the EDI Center
BLS developed the central collection of the MWR and the RFEW data to streamline the process
of data collection from large employers and clients of payroll outsourcing firms. With the
opening of the EDIC in February 1995, multi-state employers have the option of submitting their
data for all states to one location instead of multiple state agencies. The central collection option
(which requires just one data submission per quarter per account) encourages large employers,
who may have refused in the past to complete the MWR or RFEW in all or some states, to begin
reporting their data at the worksite level. The EDIC maintains a list of centrally reporting firms
and payroll outsourcing firms on its website.
Companies submit their data to the EDIC using a 350-position ASCII or EXCEL spreadsheet
record format. The current file formats appear in Appendix N. EDI only offers MWR Web
Upload or FTP file transmission methods for new firms. Please note that the EDIC collects data
only for the QCEW (MWR and RFEW) and CES programs.
The standard state systems have been programmed to accept the 424-position format shown at
the beginning of Appendix N (the first export layout), so the EDIC transmits employers’ data to
the states in this format. The EXPO system also maintains the capability of handling the 310character format for employers that still use the earlier 310-character format and report directly
to the state.
The electronic MWR and RFEW data received from an employer may contain single-unit
Unemployment Insurance (UI) Accounts in a state. However, the EDIC does not export the data
for single-unit accounts of private sector companies. These employment, total wages, as well as
taxable wages and contributions data are provided by the employer directly to the state on the
Quarterly Contribution Report each quarter. Only data from the National Finance Center (NFC),
Department of Defense (DoD), and other federal agencies can have zero-filled Reporting Unit
Numbers (RUN) and still be exported. The main reason that single worksites can be exported for
federal agencies is that there are no corresponding Quarterly Contribution Reports (QCR) filed
with UI staff for these accounts. For private sector UI accounts, data from the QCR are used.
The EDIC receives additional QCEW data from some federal agencies that previously provided
their data directly to the states via RFEW forms or on computer printouts. The EDIC currently
receives data from the Defense Manpower Data Center (DMDC) for civilian Department of
Defense), the National Finance Center (NFC) for Departments of Agriculture, Treasury,
Commerce, Justice, Labor, FBI, and Homeland Security, as well as many other smaller
independent agencies, General Services Administration (for itself and many smaller agencies),
the Interior Business Center of the Department of Interior (for Interior, Transportation, Social
Security Administration (SSA), and many smaller agencies), the Department of Energy, the
Environmental Protection Agency, the Navy Exchange, and the Army Non-Appropriated Fund
(NAF) activities. The EDIC expects to collect data centrally for additional federal agencies in
the future. Section 4.6 describes the central collection of federal data in more detail.

4.2 Data Processing at the EDI Center
The EDIC is responsible for editing, reviewing, and exporting data to the states.
The EDIC uses the system for processing large volume employment data (SLED) system to load
and process the reporter file (the file provided by the employer or payroll outsourcing firm). The
SLED system loads incoming data, performs edits, incorporates crosswalks, aggregates records
(when applicable), identifies missing records, identifies new (i.e., birth) records, and
builds/maintains historical files.

SLED System Processing
SLED first performs basic pre-edits to check for any problems or systematic discrepancies on the
firm's data. The system later performs more extensive (detail) editing on employment, wages,
and other fields of the firm’s file. The edits performed in SLED have the same requirements as
those edits performed in the national office and state QCEW processing systems. However, the
SLED edits can only use the data elements and records collected by the EDIC. For example,
SLED cannot compare Total Wages with Taxable Wages because the EDIC does not collect
Taxable Wages. SLED cannot perform balance (additivity) edits between worksite records and
their master record because the EDIC does not have access to master records. Also, SLED
processes and edits only one address block per record  the physical location address fields.
The EDIC staff can assign up to three comment codes and a narrative comment to help explain
questionable data. SLED also identifies and processes missing/potentially out-of-business
records (that is, those records provided by the firm in the previous quarter but not on their current
quarter file submittal). Missing/out-of-business records are identified by comment code 86
(establishment permanently out of business), or possibly by other appropriate “missing record”
comment codes such as 88 (establishment dissolution) or 18 (active employer reporting zero
employment and wages) or 93 (successor UI/Run).
SLED identifies and displays single unit records for private sector firms, although the EDIC does
not export the data for single unit accounts of private sector firms. These employment, total
wages, as well as taxable wages and contributions data are provided by the employer directly to
the state on the QCR report each quarter. Only data from federal agencies can have zero filled
RUNs and still be exported.
SLED performs inter-quarter edits on employment and wage fields. These edits check for
unusual fluctuations in the data. (Again, the EDIC staff may assign up to three comment codes
and a narrative comment to help explain questionable data.) The SLED system then identifies
and edits birth records, which are typically records that have not been previously provided by the
firm. The EDIC will provide the NAICS, County/Township, and Ownership codes on birth
records and assign comment code 85 (new establishment or worksite) or 90 (reporter changes
basis of reporting – greater detail) or 92/93 (successor record). States must still verify codes
applied are valid once they are in the State system.

Next, SLED performs non-wage/non-employment edit checks and identifies changes in fields
from the previous quarter, such as Reporting Unit Descriptions (RUDs), address fields,
Employer Identification Numbers (EINs), and name fields (Trade, Legal). SLED edits are
further described in Appendix O.
The EDIC will also enter predecessor/successor (P/S) UI and RUNs to report mergers, transfers,
acquisitions, closed/sold businesses, and other similar reporting changes. These are entered into
the SLED system (along with comment codes 92 or 93 as applicable on reporter records) prior to
exporting the data to states so that P/S information will be transmitted as needed. The P/S
information record(s) are provided immediately below the full detail 424-length reporter record
as applicable. Please note that not every detail record will have P/S records. Finally, SLED
exports the quarterly data to the states via EUSWeb and DMA.

Professional Employer Organizations (PEOs)
Input files provided by Professional Employer Organizations (PEOs) are processed identically to
other reporter input files. In addition, PEO input files also have any client-related data (Client UI
Account Number, Client EIN, Client SIC/NAICS code, Client Telephone Number, Client
Worksite Economic Activity, month/year became client of PEO, and month/year client left PEO)
copied to a separate system table which holds the data for later export to states. The client data
can also be updated by the EDIC during the course of processing the PEO reporter file through
the SLED system.

SLED Crosswalk Process
A number of companies that supply MWR data may not be able to, or refuse to, supply stateassigned UI Account Numbers and/or RUNs. This may occur because the UI Account Numbers
may not be configured as needed by the state, and the RUNs are not likely to be stored by the
employer. The crosswalk function within SLED is designed to accommodate this problem by
translating an employer's unique worksite identifiers into unique state FIPS Code-UI Account
Number-RUN combinations. The employer-specific crosswalk is set up in the employer's
transition to central reporting.
In performing a crosswalk, SLED attempts to match the crosswalk identifier (the employer's own
unique identifier) on the reporter file against the company identifier in their crosswalk
information. Should the crosswalk find a match, SLED copies the UI Account Number and
RUN (the ones that need to go to the state) from the reporter’s crosswalk information onto the
appropriate reporter file record. If the crosswalk does not find a match, SLED processing will
identify non-matches and require resolution of these before processing continues. To continue,
the staff at the EDIC perform the following tasks:
1. Update the reporter’s crosswalk information, or
2. Modify certain fields on the records that were not matched so that the records can be
matched with existing records on the reporter’s crosswalk information.
Data Distribution

The EDIC is responsible for processing and updating the data sent by firms and providing these
data to the states as clean as possible each quarter. The EDIC transmits the data to the states via
EUSWeb and DMA. It is possible for a state to receive more than one set of data per quarter
from the EDIC since they process and export data for multi-unit account firms and installations
that have locations in more than one state.
States use EUSWeb and DMA as needed to retrieve their data for incorporation into their files
after the EDIC notifies them (via email) that their quarterly data are available. The data includes
continuous (quarter-to-quarter) records, birth records, and missing/out-of-business records.
Continuous records should match one-to-one to records on State systems. The EDIC separately
identifies birth records to the states by assigning a comment code of 85 (new establishment or
worksite) or 90 (reporter changes basis of reporting – greater detail). Missing/out-of-business
records are identified by comment code 86 (establishment permanently out of business), or
possibly by other appropriate “missing record” comment codes such as 88 (establishment
dissolution) or 18 (active employer reporting zero employment and wages) or 83/99 (employee
leasing reporting change to or from a PEO).
To inactivate reporting units, state staff change the status code to 2 and assign an appropriate
End of Liability Date in the state system. If no better date is available, use the last date of the
last active quarter (for example, use March 31, 2020 if the last active quarter is the 2020 first
quarter).

4.3 Communications between the EDI Center and the States
Communication between the EDIC and the states usually pertains to one of the following four
topics:
1. Coordinating an employer's transition from reporting directly to the states to reporting to
the EDIC.
2. Transmitting data that pertains to new firms and/or firms that no longer report to the
EDIC.
3. Transmitting quarterly data.
4. Questions and/or clarifications on data.
In addition, the EDIC will request that states provide email addresses, mailing addresses, fax
numbers, etc. States should respond in a timely manner.
The EDIC does not provide support for EUSWeb or DMA. Email [email protected] for
questions or problems associated with EUSWeb. You can also call LAN support at (202) 6915950; be sure to identify yourself as a state user.

4.3.1 Coordinating the Employer's Transition to Central Reporting

A firm reporting to the EDIC requires a setup period and various coordinating activities. These
activities include the identification of correct UI/RUNs; appropriate transmission method of data
from the firm to the EDIC; establishment of contacts with the firm for resolving data problems;
and providing information to the states on the firm.
Generally, the EDIC will use the ES-202 Database (EDB) and Longitudinal Database (LDB) to
identify the correct UI/RUNs.
Before beginning live reporting of MWR data to the EDIC, an employer will send a test file.
The EDIC will review the test file’s format and content. This policy ensures the file is sent
correctly and appears usable. Additional test files may be needed before the EDIC approves the
reporting as acceptable. The length of the testing phase can vary significantly. During the test
phase, employers normally continue to send paper copies of the MWR directly to the appropriate
state agencies.
In nearly every state the UI Account Number assigned by the tax division within the state is not
in the same format or length as that used by the research division within the state. For this
reason, the UI Account Number configuration is reviewed. (The state research division is
responsible for the MWR.) For example, one format may contain leading zeros or a hyphen
followed by a suffix, while another format does not. Thus, there may be some variation in the
format of the UI numbers among the QCR, MWR, and the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) forms.
The use of the proper UI number is critical.
EDI has developed a process to ensure that states and the EDI Center are using the same
UI/RUN numbers. It is called the EDI New Firm RUN Matching Project. The process is
outlined below.
Process
1. Review the UINs/RUNs that were automatically assigned (matches were made based on EIN,
Trade Name, and Address). Make any needed corrections.
2. Fill in the blank UINs/RUNs. They will either be:
 Singles: Fill in the UINs and set RUNs = 00000. No other information needs to be filled.
 Existing Records: Fill in the UINs/RUNs that correspond with each record. No other
information needs to be filled.
 New Records for an Existing Multi: Fill in the UINs/RUNs that you would like EDI to
assign to each record. Fill in the NAICS, CTY, TWN, and CC (i.e. – 85) for the new
records in the appropriate NAICS, CTY, and CC fields.
 New Breakouts (State has the UIN as a single, but EDI received it broken-out): Fill in the
UINs/RUNs that you would like EDI to use this quarter. Fill in the NAICS, CTY, and CC
for the records in the appropriate NAICS, CTY, and CC fields. Note: If you wish to wait
until 1st quarter to break-out the records, set RUNs = 00000 and add “Breakout 1st
quarter” to the Comment fields.
 Predecessor/Successor: Fill in the UINs/RUNs that you would like EDI to assign to each
record. Fill in the NAICS, CTY, and CCs for the records in the appropriate NAICS, CTY,
and CC fields. For a link to be created, be sure to put the appropriate Pred/Succ info in the
Comments field.

3. Review the Addresses, Trade Names, and Legal Names and make any needed corrections in
the corresponding Address, Trade Name, or Legal Name fields. Make a note of the correction in
the Comments field (ex: “Zip Code has been corrected”).
4. If you want to collapse two lines into one RUN, assign the same UIN/RUN combination to
both records.
5. Do NOT change the WIC field (column E), as this field is crucial to EDI processing. Put all
codes (i.e. – CCs, NAICS, CTY) in the appropriate fields and put all notes for EDI in the
Comments field only.
6. As a reminder, if a record has no CC, EDI will assume the record already existed and it will
be exported with blank CTY and NAICS fields.
The EDIC staff will inform the states via email when a new reporter will transition to the EDIC.
States will need to know when an employer will begin reporting to the EDIC because the states
must make these processing changes:
1. Stop mailing the company a paper copy of the MWR form,
2. Stop sending the company reminder notices or calling the employer when the MWR is
not returned to the state, and
3. Stop contacting the employer with questions about the employer's data. Contact the
EDIC instead.

4.3.2 New and Discontinued Worksites
Birth File
The SLED system uses the files listed below to process birth records contained on the reporter
file:




Reporter File – File from the reporter (employer or payroll outsourcing firm) supplying
the data to be processed by the EDIC.
Historical Employment File – SLED compares the data on the reporter file with the data
on the Historical Employment File. No matches indicate a birth record.
Birth File – File that contains all birth records.

After SLED completes the inter-quarter edits, it determines the number of birth records
submitted on the reporter file. To accomplish this, SLED determines which records submitted on
the reporter file do not reside on the Historical Employment File. (The Historical Employment
File contains up to five quarters of data.) The Historical Employment File uses the following
three fields to uniquely identify a record:



State FIPS Code
UI Account Number



Reporting Unit Number

During birth record processing, EDIC staff must provide all birth records with a comment code
of 85 (new establishment or worksite) or 90 (reporter changes basis of reporting – greater detail),
and the correct NAICS, County/Township, and Ownership code on the record sent to the states.
(None of the elements may be blank, but the Township field will be zero filled for most states.)
SLED exports records of new (birth) establishments to the states via EUSWeb and DMA. SLED
differentiates these records from records of existing (continuous) establishments by including the
codes mentioned above and a comment code of 85 or 90. SLED maintains a separate file of birth
records, called a Birth File, although it does not use this file in the processing of data. Another
useful source that the EDIC employs for identifying birth records is through the SLED crosswalk
processing function.

Missing/Out-Of-Business Records
As mentioned earlier, the SLED system identifies records that are missing or potentially out-ofbusiness for review by the EDIC. Missing records are normally those that are not on the current
quarter reporter file but were provided by the reporter on their previous quarter file submittal.
Records identified as missing and truly out-of-business can be added back to the reporter file
with a comment code of 86 (establishment permanently out of business) for export to the states.
Other appropriate comment codes for additional “missing record” situations could include codes
such as 88 (establishment dissolution) or 18 (active employer reporting zero employment and
wages) or 93 (successor UI/Run). If the EDIC adds a missing record back to the reporter file as a
result of a predecessor/successor transaction, the EDIC will provide comment codes and
successor information in the narrative comment field on that record.

4.3.3 Data Transmission to the States
Two methods are used by the EDIC to transmit the data to the states. One is EUSWeb. The
other is via DMA for states who do their processing of QCEW data via DMA.
Quarterly data exported electronically to the states from the EDIC will be in the first export
layout shown in Appendix N. Additional predecessor and successor UI and RUNs are exported
within the 424 position export file as supplemental records below each “detail” 424 position
record as applicable. Please note that not every detail record will have supplemental
predecessor/successor records.
In addition to the exporting of quarterly data, the EDIC will use email to provide additional
information about the data that is not included on the data transmission. Additional information
may include the following:



Changes in processing procedures since the previous quarter
Closed/sold/merge information







New reporter announcements
Reporters who have left the EDIC
Problem firms, such as ones that did not report for a particular quarter
UI accounts for which no data are being transmitted because the UI accounts changed
from a multiple reporter to a single reporter and no longer qualify as a central reporter
List of known predecessor/successor information

Employers will be required to report their MWR data to the EDIC by the date that they are
currently required to report to the states, which is one month following the end of the reference
quarter. The EDIC will notify states via email whenever their quarterly data for a firm are
available using EUSWeb and DMA. If a firm is late transmitting their data so as to affect the
final transmission date of data for the current quarter, states will be notified via email about the
delay, its causes, and the anticipated receipt date.
Each state's quarterly data exported from SLED to EUSWeb has a filename consisting of the
state's abbreviation plus the current day’s date and time with a .DAT extension. For example,
“CT011620.t1602.dat” contains Connecticut's data for January 16, 2020 at 4:02pm. The “1602”
after the letter “t” is 4:02pm on the 24-Hour Clock. Please note that there may be more than one
file for a state for a given quarter. Also, the file size (byte) limit for transferring files via
EUSWeb is 10MB.
Each state’s quarterly data exported from SLED to DMA has a mainframe dataset name which
contains, as part of the dataset name, the word “CENCO”, the state’s abbreviation, and a date
and time of the dataset. For example, “YBU56X.A145.CENCO.WY072120.T1600” contains
Wyoming’s data for July 21, 2020, 4:00pm. As above, the “1600” after the letter “T” in dataset
name example is 4:00pm on the 24-Hour Clock. Again, please note that there may be more than
one dataset for a state for a given quarter.
NOTE: States must still review the data and confirm all comment codes applied are valid.

4.4 Communication with Central Reporters
All communication with employers that submit their data centrally to BLS must go through the
EDIC. Personnel in the EDIC will be responsible for contacting these employers. The EDIC
staff will develop company contacts that can answer questions not necessarily related to
employment and wages information. An additional contact person will be identified to answer
questions relating to opening of businesses. Other persons, if needed, will be identified to
contact concerning closings of establishment locations or to handle predecessor/successor
relationship issues. States should contact the EDIC (and not regional offices nor respondents)
via the EDI website with questions on data received from the EDIC. The EDIC will contact
states or go through the regional offices, depending on the issue and timing.
States must submit their questions or change requests via the EDI website only using the online
web-based form at http://199.221.111.170/edi/mwrquestion.asp. Questions on data should be
requested within four weeks of the availability of data and should include the following specific
information:







Firm name
UI Account Number
RUN
EIN
Sender’s name, work phone number, email address
Resolution sought

Staff at the EDIC will complete their part of the online web form and send a reply to the state.
The form will contain the name and phone number of the EDIC staff person that handled the
request. The email reply will be addressed to the person who sent the request. Should the state
have a question concerning the reply, a state staff person should contact that EDIC staff member
to resolve the issue. The EDI Question/Clarification Request Form contains a section to note the
final resolution of the issue and the date that the resolution was reached. This procedure will
allow the EDIC to maintain an electronic file of all inquiries and their responses. It will also
facilitate the ability to send a question/response raised by one state to all states, if applicable,
without having to re-write the message had the initial question been sent via fax. The requests to
change UI numbers or RUNs will be reflected in the next quarter’s data. The EDIC will respond
to all correspondence via email.
To improve the way the EDIC responds to questions (the timeliness of responses and the ability
of states to track their submitted questions/changes), two enhancements have been implemented.

Preliminary versus Final Responses
The EDIC now has the option of sending out preliminary responses or final responses to state
questions. Having this option now allows EDIC staff to provide partial information when
available, or to provide feedback indicating that EDIC has communicated with the company and
is awaiting a response. This way, state staff that send questions will be reassured that EDIC is
researching their answer. In the past, states would not have heard anything from EDIC until an
answer was complete. If only partial answers to state questions are available, EDIC will be able
to send such information to states.
The subject line of the email states receive from EDIC will say whether the reply is a preliminary
or final response. The questions will remain active in EDIC’s system until a final response goes
out. Once a final response goes out, the question will be archived.

Tracking of State Questions
State technicians may review a list of all unanswered and archived questions reported by their
state. From the home page of the EDI website, click on "STATE Login" to access state-specific
questions and change requests. Users must have a login id and password to access this option.
The EDIC will send out state login ID’s and passwords in separate emails. Regional office staff
may request login ID’s and passwords for their respective states to view each states’ questions
individually.
After logging in, a user can access either change requests or question requests. Both changes and
questions are organized by groups -- outstanding and answered (archived). The questions and
changes on the screen are specific to each state, so one state cannot view questions from other
states. The screen may be sorted by Date, Firm Name, Firm Code, Quarter and Year.
If there are any problems to report, the HELP section has a "Report Problems" feature that allows
a state to report a data or web problem directly to the EDIC programming staff. This is the
quickest, most efficient way to report any problems.
The toll-free telephone number of the EDIC is 1-800-861-3804. This number should be used in
rare cases. The preferred method of contact is via email to [email protected], unless
the reason has to do with a question/change on exported data. The mailing address for the EDIC
is below.
BLS/EDI Collection Center,
230 South Dearborn Street, 9th Floor
Chicago, IL 60604

States should send a copy (“cc”) of any email communication they may have with the EDIC to
their regional office. States should inform their regional office of any significant telephone
contact made with the EDIC. Likewise, states should send a copy (cc) of their request for
assistance or response to a request from the EDIC to their regional office. The EDIC will send a
copy (cc) of a response to a state to the appropriate regional office.
All requests by the EDIC for state information will be directed to the state with a copy to the
respective regional office. The states should send the requested information to the EDIC and cc:
the appropriate regional office noting its submittal. Should a reply not be provided in a timely
manner, the EDIC will send a follow-up request to the regional office which will be responsible
for ensuring a reply to the request. Each state will designate a contact person, plus a back-up
person, to handle EDIC requests.
Each quarter, the national office also sends three reminder emails each quarter to EDI reporters.
These reminder notices are sent out every other week by DBES, and the recipients are routinely
verified by EDI. Responses to these emails are collected and transmitted in the same way as
other EDI web collection. An example of a reminder email is given in EXHIBIT 4A.

EXHIBIT 4A Email to EDI Reporters
Dear XXXXX,
It's time to submit your company's employment and wage data for the BLS 3020 - Multiple
Worksite Report (MWR). The MWR for this quarter is due on 1/31/2018.
Please log on to our secure website to upload your report: https://idcf.bls.gov
USER ID: CSXXXXXXXX
If you have any questions, please contact us at [email protected].
Thank you,
U.S. Department of Labor
Bureau of Labor Statistics
EDI Center
The Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) is committed to the responsible treatment of confidential information and takes rigorous security measures
to protect confidential information in its possession. Per the Cybersecurity Enhancement Act of 2015, Federal information systems are protected
from malicious activities through cybersecurity screening of transmitted data. This email contains confidential information. If you believe you
are not the intended recipient of this message, please notify the sender and delete this email without disclosing, copying, or further disseminating
its contents.

4.5 Handling Special Situations
Special situations arise concerning data quality, aggregation, and employment and wage totals.

4.5.1 Data Quality
Two main issues affect data quality:
 Predecessor/successor information
 Inadequate physical location addresses
To collect employer/establishment predecessor/successor information, the EDIC staff research
large worksites using the LDB and other means. The EDIC communicates
predecessor/successor information to the states using the Supplemental P/S Record format. A
follow-up email may be necessary to inform the states of which reporters are involved by
specifying the predecessors and successors, whether or not the successor reports to the EDIC,
and if the states should contact the successor.
If a worksite's physical location address changes, and the company deems that the new unit is
different operationally, then the EDIC staff will assign a new RUN. In most cases if there is no
change in the operations of the unit, then the same RUN is used.
The EDIC works with firms to improve the quality of their Physical Location Addresses. The
EDIC staff has placed added emphasis on obtaining the physical location address of new
establishment locations. All establishments with employment greater than 25 (excluding federal
accounts) should have a physical location address provided by the EDIC during the first quarter
that employment is reported. Others, if not immediately available, will be obtained from the
employer on a lag quarter basis. Until a good physical location address is received for an
establishment, the EDIC will leave the street address, city, State, Zip Code, and Zip Extension
fields blank. If there is an out-of-state address or PO Box reported by the firm for an
establishment, the EDIC will also report blanks in these fields.

4.5.2 Employment and Wage Totals
The EDIC does not have the ability to compare MWR employment and wages totals to those on
the QCR. If there is a significant difference between the totals on the MWR (data summed from
worksite records) and those on the QCR (on the master record), states should contact the EDIC via
the EDI website using the online web-based form at http://199.221.111.170/edi/mwrquestion.asp.
Please ensure that the form contains complete information on the discrepancy between the MWR
and QCR data. The form must contain information on the employment for month 1, month 2, and
month 3 of the quarter and the total wages for both the QCR and the MWR totals. If the
difference is not significant (< 10%), states should use the numbers they think are correct and, if
necessary, adjust the other numbers.
The EDIC is responsible for contacting the employer about errors or questionable data that are
noted by the edits. In the case of errors affecting an entire file, the EDIC will obtain a new file
from the employer and re-edit it before sending these data to the states.
After the EDIC staff completes processing for an employer, states can retrieve their data via
EUSWeb and DMA and load them to their system. If the EDIC staff discovers problems with
the data for an individual reporting unit, the entire firm will be held back. The EDIC only

exports data for an entire firm. The EDIC will notify states via an email message regarding
reporters who do not provide useable data for a given UI, state or the entire country.
States should submit questions about data by email on the form in EXHIBIT 4A. Questions will
not be taken over the phone.

4.6 Central Reporting of Federal Data
BLS is endeavoring to centrally collect the RFEW data from all federal departments and
agencies. The EDIC currently receives data from the DMDC (for civilian Department of
Defense), the National Finance Center (for Departments of Agriculture, Treasury, Commerce,
Justice, Labor, FBI, and Homeland Security, as well as many other smaller independent
agencies), the General Services Administration (for itself and many smaller agencies), the
Interior Business Center of the Department of Interior (for Interior, Transportation, SSA, and
many smaller agencies), the Department of Energy, the Environmental Protection Agency,
Health and Human Service, U.S. Courts, the Navy Exchange, Air Force Services, and the Army
NAF activities. This section of the QCEW Operating Manual will be updated as additional
agencies begin to report centrally.
Once the EDIC has collected and processed federal data from these sources, it transmits the data
to the states in the same manner as data for private sector employers.
Department of Defense – Appropriated Fund Activities
Each month, the DMDC in Monterey, California, provides the EDIC with a file that contains
civilian Department of Defense (DoD) employment data. The monthly reporting of civilian
defense employment by the DMDC meets the requirements of the CES program as well as the
quarterly RFEW. The monthly file contains total worker employment and total women worker
employment for each installation. These employment counts represent the bi-weekly payroll
period that includes the 12th of the month. The submittal of quarterly payroll data on the third
month of a quarter could result in the delayed receipt of the monthly employment data for the
CES program. Therefore, the DMDC provides the quarterly payroll data with the submittal of
the employment data for the following month. That is, wage data for the first quarter are
provided on the file containing employment data for April, wage data for the second quarter are
provided with July employment, etc. The EDIC receives approximately 10,000 records from the
DMDC each month.
The EDIC processes the monthly file using a crosswalk and aggregation procedure. The EDIC
uses the crosswalk to assign a UI/RUN combination to each record reported by the DMDC.
Upon completion of the assignments, the UI and RUN fields summarize the data of each record.
This procedure is designed to minimize, to the extent possible, births and deaths of temporary
units with relatively small employment counts.
States assign UI/RUNs to each of these records during the development of the original
crosswalk. The EDIC maintains the crosswalk on an ongoing basis.

For the most part, installations are assigned a NAICS code 928110 (National Security). Only
selected activities are excluded from NAICS 928110. These are listed below:
NAICS Code
325998
332993
336411
336611
336992
445110
541330
541713-541715
611110
611310
621493
622110

Title
All Other Miscellaneous Chemical Product and Preparation
Manufacturing
Ammunition (except Small Arms) Manufacturing
Aircraft Manufacturing
Ship Building and Repairing
Military Armored Vehicle, Tank, and Tank Component
Manufacturing
Supermarkets and Other Grocery (except Convenience)
Stores
Engineering Services
Research and Development in the Physical, Engineering,
and Life Sciences
Elementary and Secondary Schools
Colleges, Universities, and Professional Schools
Freestanding Ambulatory Surgical and Emergency Centers
General Medical and Surgical Hospitals

Installations that include activities that fall in the above industries are separately identified. For
example, a hospital at an Army base is specifically identified in NAICS 622110.
No physical location address information is available. Employment and wage data provided by
the DMDC are by military service command (4-digit code). A nine-digit General Service
Administration (GSA) geographical location code identifies an installation's location. The GSA
location code consists of a 2-digit Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) state code, 3digit county code, and a 4-digit place code combination. Reporting units for RFEW purposes
are:
1. Military bases and other places with significant employment, and
2. County wide, or balance of county employment.
Generally, bases with more than 100 employees and "Other Defense" activities with large
employment located within cities are reported at the place (unit) level. Data for an installation,
such as an Army base, will have significant numbers of civilian Army personnel and can also
have some Navy personnel, Air Force personnel, and "Other Defense" civilians (all represented
by a variety of command codes). To reduce the total number of records that states need to
process, all of these personnel are aggregated into one record/report for that installation. In this
case, the name of the Army base will be the RUD for that record. These reporting units may
well contain personnel counts that include civilian personnel of the other Armed Services and
"Other Defense." Significant employment changes within a UI/RUN may be the result of
employment changes within the data itself (service command) and can be identified if needed.
In addition to the above, the headquarters of the Army and Air National Guard in each state, as
well as the Air National Guard bases, are reported as a separate installation. As stated before,

significant "Other Defense" activities will also be treated as an installation and reported
separately.
To summarize, some installations are reported separately for industry code purposes and others
for their significant employment (primarily military bases, Army, and Air National Guard
headquarters). All remaining installations are aggregated to the county level so that the QCEW
Program will reflect the employment and wages in the correct county. In counties that have no
installations reported, the county level's summary record uses a RUD of "(county name)
County." For those records that have an installation reported separately, the RUD is "Balance of
(county name) County."
The aggregation process results in approximately 3,100 DoD reporting units for QCEW
purposes. These levels of aggregation meet QCEW program reporting needs in an efficient
manner, minimizing the number of reports. These levels also effectively meet industry specific
and geographical needs.
The data furnished by the DMDC include civilian employment and wages for all branches
except for the Exchange Services of the Army/Air Force, Navy, Marine Corps and their other
non-appropriated fund activities. States should continue to solicit non-appropriated funded
employment data, if these activities are not reporting separately to the EDIC. This includes:




Army/Air Force Exchange Services (AAFES).
Air Force non-appropriated fund activities
Navy non-appropriated fund activities (Officer, NCO, and enlisted men’s clubs, bowling
alleys, golf courses, other morale/welfare/recreation activities, etc.).

Army Non-Appropriated Funds
Each month the Army Non-Appropriated Fund Central Payroll Services (NAFCPS) provides the
EDIC with employment data. The data contains total worker employment and total women
worker employment for each Army NAF activity. These employment counts represent the biweekly payroll period that includes the 12th of the month.
The following points describe the Army NAF activities employment and wages data:
1. Army NAF data includes activities related to Morale, Welfare, and Recreation activities
such as Officer, NCO, and enlisted men's clubs; child care, health, welfare, and recreation
activities; bowling alleys, golf courses; etc. There are approximately 100 different Army
NAF Programs for which NAF provides data.
2. Army NAF Programs and Army NAF Installations are identified by two different 2-digit
alphabetic codes.
3. Approximately 30 different industry classifications are assigned to the approximately 100
different Army NAF Programs.

4. Army NAF data are reported for each installation with Army NAF activities by the
associated Army NAF Program. Each activity is identified by a 6-digit code consisting of
the state FIPS code, the Army NAF Installation code, and the related Army NAF Program
code. Not all states have installations with Army NAF activities, and each installation
only has a small portion of the programs.
5. Monthly data include the total employment and the female employment counts.
6. Total quarterly wage data will normally be supplied with the reporting of the employment
data for the third month of the quarter.
7. No physical location address information is available for the installations with Army NAF
activities. GSA location codes consisting of a 2-digit FIPS state code, 3-digit county code,
and a 4-digit place code combination will be available in the near future.
EDIC uses a crosswalk to assign a UI-RUN combination to each combination of state, Army
installation, and industry code of the Army NAF records. New records for the quarter are
assigned a new UI-RUN combination; consequently, an on-going maintenance of the Army NAF
Crosswalk is required.
Upon completion of these UI-RUN assignments, the data are summarized for each unique UIRUN combination. This aggregation is done to minimize the number of births and deaths of
temporary units with relatively small employment counts and results in approximately 825
reporting units for CES and QCEW purposes.

National Finance Center
Each quarter, the NFC reports employment and wages information to the EDIC for the
Departments of Agriculture, Treasury, Commerce, Justice, Homeland Security, and Labor, as
well as many other smaller independent agencies. The EDI Center uses a crosswalk and
aggregation procedure to process NFC data. Industry codes are assigned to the individual
agencies within the Cabinet level Departments and to each of the other smaller agencies reported
by NFC. UI and RUN assignments, which control how employment and wages are aggregated,
are made for each Department/agency by industry code at the place or county/township level.
The purpose of this aggregation is to minimize the number of births and deaths of records with
relatively few employees.
The most detailed level of workplace identification (location) that NFC provides is by agency at
the GSA place (city) within a county and in a state. No physical location address information is
available from this payroll system. GSA location codes are nine-digit numeric codes. Digits 1-2
are the state code, digits 3-6 are the place (city) code, and digits 7-9 are the county code. In
addition to the nine-digit location codes, NFC provides two-digit codes (total 11-digit codes) that
identify the individual agencies within the Departments of Agriculture, Treasury, Commerce,
Justice, Homeland Security, Labor, and each of the smaller independent agencies. The two-digit
agency codes determine the industry classifications within the Departments and for each of the
independent agencies. To develop the crosswalk initially, each state assigned UI/RUNs to each
of the 11-digit codes for their respective state. The EDIC currently maintains the crosswalk.

Employment and wages of agencies within Agriculture, Treasury, Commerce, Justice, Homeland
Security, and Labor, are summarized by industry code at their Department level. For the other
smaller independent agencies, data are summarized at their respective agency levels. That is, no
further breakouts by industry code are provided. Depending upon the magnitude of employment,
RFEW data are provided to states for each Department and independent agency at either the
place (city) or county level. Approximately 24,000 records are received each quarter from the
NFC. The aggregation process results in approximately 17,000 agency/industry records for
QCEW purposes.

4.7 Employer Reporting of MWR Data Directly to States
Submittal of MWR Data Directly to States
Companies that report MWR data on transmittable media and that have multiple worksites
within only one state may report their data directly to their state agency.
As with central reporters, testing of tapes/diskettes/CDs/electronic file should be performed
before an employer is authorized to transmit MWR data via portable media on a regular basis.
State systems personnel should perform initial acceptance testing for the first quarter in which
the employer reports via portable media. The record format should be verified as one of the
input file formats in Appendix N and the data should be compared to the hard copy MWR
received concurrently. Thus, data should be dual reported during the testing phase. In addition,
the employer’s UI Account Number format on the test file should be verified.
For each quarter following the initial testing quarter, the state should send a notification
reminding the employer that the file is due. (See EXHIBIT 4B for a sample letter.) Note that the
letter should mention the next available RUN for the employer. This reminder notice will
replace the hard copy of the MWR, which is usually sent to multi-establishment employers each
quarter. For the first quarter of each year, an "informed consent" cover letter should be sent to
the employer. (See EXHIBIT 4C for a generic sample letter and EXHIBIT 4D for special
instructions concerning the generic letter.)
Therefore, the state should prevent the mailing of the MWR to those companies who report via
magnetic media.

State Processing of MWR Magnetic Media Data Submitted Directly
The standard state processing systems have the ability to suppress the mailing of printed MWR
forms for employers that have been authorized for magnetic media submittal. However, the
states should still send these employers reminder notices and follow-up notices for delinquent
files.
States should be able to determine if data for more than one state are present on the employer's
file. If this is the case, only that state's data should be loaded into the system.

Files should be checked immediately upon receipt. States should run timely micro edits on the
MWR data, as is done with data from the hard copy reports. If there are any obvious, serious
problems with the file, states should contact the employer immediately and ask for a revised file.

Assignment of RUNs
Normally, states accept MWR electronic/magnetic media data from those employers who store
and provide the state-assigned RUNs. (However, states may make exceptions to this by creating
crosswalks for certain employers.) In obtaining RUNs for new worksites, the employer is
permitted to assign what appears to be the next available RUN to a new worksite. Employers
should be instructed to assign the next available number (in sequence) and not to reuse RUNs.
States should check for new and invalid RUNs. States must start their initial assignment of
RUNs for a new MWR with 00001. In this manner, it is easier for employers to determine the
next RUN when a worksite opens within a state. Invalid RUNs include duplicate RUNs and
RUNs that were discontinued. If state personnel determine that an employer used an
inappropriate number, they should contact the employer and request the appropriate change.
One approach to ensure proper assignment of RUNs is to use the reminder letter or notice
mentioned above to identify the next available RUN to be assigned to a new worksite.

4.8 MWR Web Internet Data Collection
Data Collection by MWR Web
BLS also developed a central collection point for the MWR and RFEW on the Internet to provide
means for reporters to report their quarterly data. Each quarter, a computer-generated email
message is sent to each registered respondent reminding them it is time to report their data.
Follow-up reminders are sent throughout the collection quarter to respondents who have not yet
submitted data. Respondents initially access the BLS Internet Data Collection Facility with a
temporary account number and password, which is printed on the MWR paper form either by the
State or the Print Contractor. Once the respondent has registered their IDCF account, they are
given a permanent USER ID and are asked to set their password. A User ID is assigned to the
respondent by the IDCF to access all of the BLS surveys for which data are submitted. Once
respondents have navigated through the IDCF “gatekeeper,” they select the MWR survey and
click on the UI account to enter their data. Respondents who do not provide complete data for
two consecutive quarters are returned to paper reporting. The Division of Business
Establishment Systems (DBES) may notify states of a respondent’s failure to provide complete
data by an email message. States may also notify BLS if they wish to exclude an MWR Web
respondent from web reporting by sending email to [email protected].

Firm Solicitation
BLS staff solicits firms for web reporting who meet all of the following criteria:
1. Employer is not an EDI reporter, and
2. Employer is an active multiple location employer with at least one quarter of historical
data

3. The employer is not an excluded State or Local Government reporter. This exclusion is
determined by each State.
The Solicitation Process for States and BLS:
1. States generate the “List of Actives” file and upload it to DBES. This file identifies all
eligible MWR reporters in the State. DBES uses this file to produce the temporary
account number and password for all eligible MWR accounts that are not current MWR
Web reporters.
2. DBES sends a Solicitation Request File (SRF) to States. The SRF is important because it
contains the solicitation information that needs to be printed on the MWR forms so that
respondents can access the web system.
3. States produce the State Historical File (SHF) and send it to BLS by the established due
date in the MWR Web production calendar. It is vital that this file is uploaded to the web
system. Without the SHF data respondents will not be able to access the web system.
4. The SHF is audited by BLS to determine if any issues with the file exist. If so BLS asks
the states to provide explanations for any missing data, and/or upload a new SHF if
needed.
5. States and the MWR Print Contractor mail the solicited firms their paper MWR or RFEW
forms with a temporary User ID and password printed on it. Employers not wishing to
report on the web may fill out and return the forms to their respective states. States
should mail MWRs according to their normal processing times. However, states should
not mail forms to employer UI accounts that are being solicited for the MWR Web until
they are notified the MWR Web is ready to begin the collection process. This will
prevent employer frustration when they try to log on to the IDCF for the first time.

Registering
Respondents must first register with the IDCF Gatekeeper before entering data. Respondents are
provided with the URL on their MWR form IDCF home page (https://idcf.bls.gov/).
Respondents must then enter the temporary account number (User ID) and temporary password
provided on their paper MWR/RFEW. Respondents are prompted to update their contact
information to include their email address and create a permanent personal password. IDCF will
then generate a permanent IDCF account number to allow access to all of the BLS surveys
administered to the selected firm.
As a part of each week’s transmittal BLS sends a Confirmed Register File to the States. This file
contains a list of the accounts that have signed up for MWR Web during the course of the
collection cycle thus far.
NOTE: If a respondent has more than one MWR form to complete, they can add additional
MWR accounts to their IDCF login by selecting “add an additional account”. After entering the
temporary ID and password from the additional MWR forms, they will be able to access all of
their reports with a single ID and Password.

Entering Data

Once respondents select the MWR survey, they will be directed through the system as necessary.
The respondent will enter monthly employments and total quarterly wages for existing worksites
and add new worksites and corresponding employment and wages as necessary. They can also
indicate which worksites should be closed or sold. Respondents can indicate that a worksite
needs to be removed by clicking on the “remove” button. Respondents will then be directed to
select a reason they are removing the worksite which will correspond to the applicable comment
code. Finally the respondent is asked to report any employment or wages that the worksite had
during the quarter.
Before quarterly MWR data are submitted, a summary sheet appears asking the respondent to
verify that the employment and wages match their state QCR. In addition, the system also
allows the firm to notify their state of the following reporting situation(s):




If their company has been sold, merged, or reorganized, or
If their company has acquired another company, or
If their company has opened a new UI account

Respondents who fail to report for two consecutive quarters will revert back to paper reporting.
These accounts are recognized when the MWR Web system identifies that no data have been
reported a second time. Before doing so, an automated email will be sent to them reminding
them of their obligation to report, and inform them that failure to do so will result in paper
mailings.
Quarterly MWR/RFEW data that has been provided through the MWR Web is fed back to the
states through the Collected Data files. The Collected Data files are provided to states in weekly
transmittals during the quarterly collection cycle. States are able to access this data through
EUSWeb or DMA. State staff should use their state processing system to load their Collected
Data files directly to their QCEW micro database.
At the end of the Collected Data file, there is a field which will contain an indicator to continue
MWR Web reporting or to change back to paper reporting. This indicator acts as an on/off
switch for printing and mailing operations. This method is the only communication between
BLS and the states when a respondent is returned to paper reporting.
Additional information on the MWR Web data collection is available on the StateWeb.

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-1

Chapter 5 – Handling Changes in Reporting
Configuration
In FY 1995, Congress provided funding to BLS to begin creation of a database using QCEW
micro level data that would allow for the longitudinal analysis of business establishments. The
Longitudinal Database (LDB) tracks establishments over time and links them from quarter to
quarter. The resultant longitudinal establishment data allow for high-quality measures of job
creation, job destruction, and job reallocation within and between industry sectors, regions,
employment size classes, wage size classes, and establishment age classes. For policy makers
and business forecasters, who rely heavily on economic indicators, information regarding job
flows and the births and deaths of establishments (hereafter referred to as “births” and “deaths”)
is of great interest.
The quality of longitudinal data is dependent on accurately distinguishing between continuous
and discontinuous business establishments. Because of the importance of keeping establishment
information continuous, this chapter discusses what to do when an establishment's UI Account
Number and Reporting Unit Number – its reporting configuration – changes.
------------------------- Contents of Chapter 5 ------------------------5.1 Predecessor/Successor Relationships
5.2 One to Many or Many to One
5.3 Successors with Code Changes
5.4 Successors Reporting at a Different Level
5.5 Breaking Out (Disaggregating) New Multiple Worksite Reporters
5.6 Consolidating Multiple Worksite Reporters
5.7 Tracking Establishments that Change UI or Reporting Unit Numbers in the LDB
5.7.1 LDB Linkage Process
5.7.2 Updates and the Linking Process

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-2

5.1 Predecessor/Successor Relationships
The BLS uses the term Predecessor/Successor Relationship to describe situations where
employment or assets are transferred from one business establishment to another. The successor
(the new owner of an establishment) performs similar operations to the predecessor (the previous
owner of an establishment) using some or all of the predecessor’s employees. These operations
are frequently, but not necessarily, performed at the same location as the predecessor. In many
states, the QCEW definition of a predecessor/successor situation does not match the legal
Unemployment Insurance (UI) definition of an ownership transaction. State editors are
encouraged to research Predecessor/Successor laws in their states.
There are many cases where businesses are sold to existing accounts and the data are merged
together. In other cases, only part of the operation is sold, and a portion of the original business
continues to function. Do not assume that the successor account never existed before or that the
predecessor account ceases to operate. Editors should take care when determining if and when
data should move from one employer (one UI account) to another.
In cases where a new employer is located in the same site as an out-of-business account, it
should not be assumed that the new account is the successor. For example, it would be
inappropriate to assign this relationship for stores in shopping malls. As one retailer ceases
operations and the site is leased to another retailer, there is usually no relationship between the
old and new establishments.
Predecessor/successor information in the QCEW program is reported using the following fields:
•
•
•
•

Predecessor UI Number
Predecessor Reporting Unit Number
Successor UI Number
Successor Reporting Unit Number

Establishments are uniquely identified by their UI Account Number and Reporting Unit Number
(RUN) within a state. The UI Account Number is a 10-digit identifier assigned by the State
Workforce Agency (SWA) to identify employers covered under state UI laws. UI Account
Numbers are assigned to employers who have one or more establishments. The Reporting Unit
Number (RUN) is a 5-digit number used to uniquely distinguish worksites of a multi-unit UI
account. Establishments sometimes change UI/RUNs due to changes in ownership or changes in
reporting level. Changes in reporting level generally take two forms:
1. An employer previously reporting multiple locations as a single-unit account disaggregates
the consolidated unit and begins reporting those locations on a Multiple Worksite Report
(MWR).
2. An employer whom the state has set up as an MWR reporter (a multi-unit account) is no
longer willing to provide disaggregated data. The multi account must be consolidated into a
single.

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-3

These cases are referred to respectively as breakouts and collapses.
Records with a UI/RUN change appear to be births or deaths unless there is a
predecessor/successor relationship/link reported between the old and new UI/RUN. The basic
link used to identify a continuous unit is the Predecessor UI Account Number or the Successor
UI Account Number. Since many UI accounts are reported using multiple records (for their
multiple establishments or worksites), Predecessor or Successor RUNs are also needed to link at
the establishment level.
Some states have been very successful in identifying predecessor and successor relationships,
while other states have significantly less information available to make these determinations.
Predecessor and successor account information should be extracted from UI tax files where
available. If the state does not maintain worksite information and Reporting Unit Numbers on
the tax file, the predecessor and successor Reporting Unit Numbers should be zero-filled
initially, until state staff can follow up to verify or correct them. (Issues related to extracting
predecessor and successor information are also discussed in Section 7.3.)
When researching predecessor/successor links on the tax file, you may find non-extracted
information that would be useful when examining the data. This may include transfer codes,
transfer dates, merger information, successor suffix codes on the account number, etc. Wage
records are another possible source of predecessor/successor information. Stand-alone systems
exist such as the Wage File Creator for each state processing system that uses standard LEHD
formatted wage record data for two quarters at a time. These systems generates summary and
matched wage record data without any PII (Private individually identifiable) data that can be
used in the state systems to detect possible predecessor/successor linkages. See StateWeb for
more information on these stand-along systems and the LEHD format.

5.2 One to Many or Many to One
The purpose of Predecessor and Successor UI and RUN coding is to identify establishments as
continuous and minimize spurious establishment births and deaths. These cases are not limited
to units that have changed ownership or UI number, but may also include UI accounts that
change Reporting Unit Number configuration (i.e., the breakout or consolidation of units).
Whenever a one-to-one relationship is established, the Predecessor UI and RUN fields should be
coded with the UI and RUN numbers under which the unit was previously reported. Similarly,
the Successor UI and RUN fields of the Predecessor record should be coded with the UI and
RUN numbers under which the account is currently reported. For example, an establishment that
changes owners twice in simple one-to-one transactions could be reported as follows:

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-4

Predecessor
UI# 1234567890
RUN 00000

UI# 1234567890
RUN 00000

UI# 2222222222
RUN 00000

Predecessor
UI# 2222222222
RUN 00000

Successor
UI# 2222222222
RUN 00000

Successor
UI# 3333333333
RUN 00000

UI# 3333333333
RUN 00000

Whenever a many-to-one Predecessor/Successor relationship exists, all predecessor UI and
RUNs should be identified in the Successor account, and the Successor UI and RUN should be
assigned to each Predecessor UI and RUN.
Example 1: Many-to-One.
No Unique Predecessor to Put on Consolidated Unit

UI# 1234567890
RUN 00000
Successor
UI 2222222222
RUN 00000
UI# 4567891230
RUN 00000
Successor
UI 2222222222
RUN 00000
UI# 3124567890
RUN 00000
Successor
UI 2222222222
RUN 00000

Successor
UI# 2222222222
RUN 00000
Predecessor UI #(s):
1234567890
4567891230
3124567890

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-5

Similarly, whenever a one-to-many predecessor/successor relationship exists, it is possible to
identify all UI/RUN(s) as successors. Also, the UI and RUN of the consolidated unit are inserted
in the Predecessor UI and RUN fields of all the newly formed subunits.
Example 2: One-to-Many.
No Unique Successor for the Unit Being Split.

Predecessor
UI 1234567890
RUN 00000

UI#1234567890
RUN 00000
Successor UI #(s)
2222222222
RUN 00000
3333333333
RUN 00000
4444444444
RUN 00000

UI# 2222222222
RUN 00000
Predecessor
UI 1234567890
RUN 00000
UI# 3333333333
RUN 00000
Predecessor
UI 1234567890
RUN 00000
UI# 4444444444
RUN 00000

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-6

When data for a multi-unit employer are broken out for the first time, the unit for which data are
being broken out (i.e., the original, aggregated record) should contain the UI Account Number of
the new worksite records in its Successor UI field and the successor RUNs should be entered in
the successor RUN fields.
Example 3: Initial Break Out For A Multi-Unit Employer
UI# 1234567890
RUN 00001
UI# 1234567890
RUN 00000
Successor
UI #(s)
1234567890
RUN(s)
00001
00002

Predecessor
UI 1234567890
RUN 00000

UI# 1234567890
RUN 00002
Predecessor
UI 1234567890
RUN 00000

When a multi-unit employer is collapsed (e.g., because the employer refuses to report on the
MWR), the Successor UI/RUN fields of each predecessor worksite record would be coded with
the UI/RUN of the successor since there is only one UI Account/RUN to point to as the
successor.
For cases involving the merger of several UI accounts either in whole or in part, it is usually
possible to assign unique Predecessor UI/RUNs to each of the establishments being reported on
the MWR of the re-formed multi establishment reporter. In the case of multiple UI Accounts
contributing to a newly formed multi-establishment in which the employer refuses to report a
MWR, each establishment shifting into the collapsed unit must carry the UI and RUN of the
record from which they were shifted. In addition, the Predecessor UI Account Number and
RUNs should be included with the new reporting unit.

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-7

Example 4: Merger of Several UI Accounts.
Successor Not Willing To Report as an MWR.

UI# 1357900000
RUN 00001
UI# 1357900000
RUN 00002
UI# 2468000000
RUN 00013

Predecessor
UI# 1357900000
RUN 00001
RUN 00002
UI# 2468000000
RUN 00013
UI # 1234567890
RUN 00000

To consider this same example again, it would be better to report unique Successor UI/RUNs on
the records that contribute to the new record (that is, on the predecessors). This gives a more
accurate link:
Example 5: Merger of Several UI Accounts.
Each Predecessor Matched To the Successor.
UI# 1357900000
RUN 00001
Successor
UI 1234567890
RUN 00000
UI# 1357900000
RUN 00002
Successor
UI 1234567890
RUN 00000
UI# 2468000000
RUN 00013
Successor
UI 1234567890
RUN 00000

Predecessor
UI# 1357900000
RUN 00001
RUN 00002
UI# 2468000000
RUN 00013
UI # 1234567890
RUN 00000

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-8

Changes Within the Same UI Account
Records in UI accounts that change-reporting configuration (by breaking out or consolidating
reporting units) should also be assigned a Predecessor or Successor UI/RUN. When data for a
multi-unit employer are broken out for the first time, each newly disaggregated subunit should
repeat the UI Account Number and RUN of the previously aggregated unit in the Predecessor UI
Number and Predecessor RUN fields. When a multi-unit employer is collapsed (e.g., because
the employer refuses to submit the MWR), the subunits in the prior quarter must be assigned the
appropriate UI/RUN of the collapsed Successor in their successor code fields. In addition, the
newly combined record should include the UI Account Number of the previous multi-unit
account in its Predecessor UI Number field and the Predecessor Reporting Unit Number(s)
should be added to the collapsed successor’s Predecessor fields.
Summarized below are the principals involved in assigning predecessor and successor codes
when there is not a unique one-to-one relationship.
1. When there is more than one reporting unit to point to as the predecessor of the unit, the UI
and RUN of the successor should be inserted in the Successor UI/Successor RUN fields of
each of the multiple Predecessor Reporting Units (in one or more UI accounts). (See
Example 8.)
2. Similarly, when there is more than one reporting unit to point to as the Successor of a unit,
specific Successor RUNs should be assigned. (See Example 6.)
3. When there is more than one UI Account Number to point to as the Predecessor of a unit,
specific Predecessor UI Account Numbers should be assigned. (See Example 10.)
4. Similarly, when there is more than one UI Account Number to point to as the Successor of a
unit, specific Successor UI Account Numbers should be assigned. (See Example 2.)
5. The situations described in #1 and #3 above can be fully identified by assigning the Successor
UI and RUN to each of the multiple Predecessor reporting units (in one or more UI accounts).
Therefore, it is better to assign Successor UI/RUNs to provide a unique link.
6. The situations described in #2 and #4 above can be fully identified by assigning the
Predecessor UI and RUN to each of the multiple Successor reporting units (in one or more
UI accounts). Therefore, it is better to assign Predecessor UI and RUNs to provide a unique
link.
See the examples at the end of this section for specific cases of predecessor/successor coding.

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-9

Notes
Note A): Predecessor codes should still be assigned for reporting changes (such as a breakout or
collapse of worksites) within an existing UI account. The Predecessor UI number should be the
same as the UI Account Number field.
Note B): The availability of this information might not reflect the exact quarter the change
occurred. While BLS strongly prefers the timely reporting of these fields, the
Predecessor/Successor fields should be assigned when the information becomes available.
Note C): There may be cases where a new multi worksite is opened (a birth). In these instances,
the new record should not have a Predecessor UI/RUN. Creating a new record in this case
reflects an economic event rather than a reporting change. In the case where a single-unit UI
account becomes a multi-unit UI account because of the opening of a new location, predecessor
and successor codes should be assigned to the original location so that it remains a continuous
establishment despite its change of RUN.
Note D): Predecessor and Successor UI/RUNs are much more useful on single-unit or subunit
records (MEEI 1, 3, 4, 5, or 6) than on master records (MEEI 2). This is because a master record
never identifies a single establishment; it always represents several establishments (worksites)
within the UI account.
Predecessor/Successor Situations
[Note: Left side = prior quarter, right side = current quarter reporting]
Example 6: Further Breakout of Worksites in a Multi-unit Account
Predecessor UI# 1234567890
Predecessor RUN 00002
UI# 1234567890
RUN 00003
UI# 1234567890
RUN 00002
Successor UI# 1234567890
RUN 00003
RUN 00004

Predecessor UI# 1234567890
Predecessor RUN 00002
UI# 1234567890
RUN 00004

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-10

Example 7: Consolidated Predecessor/
Successor Provides Breakout

Predecessor UI# 1234567890
Predecessor RUN 00000
UI 1234567890
RUN 00000
Successor UI# 2987654321
Successor RUN 00001
00002

UI 2987654321
RUN 00001

Predecessor UI# 1234567890
Predecessor RUN 00000
UI 2987654321
RUN 00002

Example 8: Multi-Unit Predecessor/
Successor Does Not Provide Breakout
UI 5678901234
RUN 00001
Successor UI# 7890123456
Successor RUN 00000
Predecessor UI# 5678901234
Predecessor RUN 00001
00002
UI 7890123456
RUN 00000
UI 5678901234
RUN 00002
Successor UI# 7890123456
Successor RUN 00000

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-11

Example 9: Multi-Unit Predecessor Sells to Many Successors/
Each Successor Provides Breakouts
Predecessor UI# 1234567890
Predecessor RUN 00002
UI 1234567890
RUN 00002

UI 7890123456
RUN 00001

Successor UI# 7890123456
Successor RUN 00001
00002

Predecessor UI# 1234567890
Predecessor RUN 00002
UI 7890123456
RUN 00002

Predecessor UI# 1234567890
Predecessor RUN 00001

UI 1234567890
RUN 00001
Successor UI# 5678901234
Successor RUN 00001
00002

UI 5678901234
RUN 00001

Predecessor UI# 1234567890
Predecessor RUN 00001
UI 5678901234
RUN 00002

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-12

Example 10: Many Predecessors with Different UI Account Numbers
Collapsed into One Successor Account
UI 1234567890
RUN 00002
Successor UI# 3456789012
Successor RUN 00000

UI 5678901234
RUN 00000
Successor UI# 3456789012
Successor RUN 00000

Predecessor UI# 1234567890
Predecessor RUN 00002
Predecessor UI#5678901234
Predecessor RUN 00000
Predecessor UI# 9012345678
Predecessor RUN 00001
UI 3456789012
RUN 00000

UI 9012345678
RUN 00001
Successor UI# 3456789012
Successor RUN 00000

Example 11: Multi-Unit Establishment Collapses into One Unit
UI 1032547698
RUN 00000 (master record)
Successor UI# none
Successor RUN none
UI 1032547698
RUN 00001
Successor UI# 1032547698
Successor RUN 00000
UI 1032547698
RUN 00002
Successor UI# 1032547698
Successor RUN 00000

Predecessor UI# 1032547698
Predecessor RUN 00001
00002
UI 1032547698
RUN 00000

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-13

Example 12: Multi-Unit Establishment Breakout into Two Units

Predecessor UI# none
Predecessor RUN none
UI 1092547698
RUN 00000 (master record)
UI 1092547698
RUN 00000

Predecessor UI# 1092547698
Predecessor RUN 00000

Successor UI# 1092547698
Successor RUN 00001
00002

UI 1092547698
RUN 00001
Predecessor UI# 1092547698
Predecessor RUN 00000
UI 1092547698
RUN 00002

5.3 Successors with Code Changes
A substantial number of determinations are made each quarter for subject employers who are
successors to active accounts, and the majority of these determinations are for small units. When
new nature-of-business information is obtained for each of these employers, the codes are
determined accordingly. The problem arises as how best to handle those cases that involve
changes from the codes of the predecessors. This section discusses this problem under the
assumption that the level of reporting for the acquired unit(s) does not change.
If the unit had 25 or fewer workers in the last month before or the first month after the change of
ownership, assign the industry and geographic codes that correspond with the successor's
activity and location. This is effective with the date of the change of ownership or when
information of the change becomes available, whichever is later, regardless of whether the new
activity or location represents a change from the previous codes. No investigation is necessary to
determine if the prior codes were different, and no reporting of a noneconomic code change is
necessary. This should substantially reduce the workload of checking codes for these small
successors.
Codes for units with more than 25 workers in the last month before and the first month after the
change should be handled as follows:

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-14

(1) If the activity or location of the successor unit is the same as the predecessor's industry and
geographic (county or, for some states, township) codes, assign the same codes to the
successor, effective immediately. There will, of course, be no code change to report.
(2) If the activity or location of the successor is not the same as the predecessor's industry and
county (or county/township) codes, then:
a) If the successor unit uses the predecessor's facilities for a totally new business (as
determined by industry code) or moves to another county (county/township), and this
change takes place in an open review quarter, the change in code is an economic code
change. The new code or codes should be put into effect with the change in ownership,
assuming that this information is available in time to be included in the appropriate EQUI
file. Assign the Economic Code Change Indicator of the successor, using the value
corresponding to the code or codes that change. The Economic Code Change Indicator is
described in Appendix B.
b) If when processing the predecessor/successor transaction it is discovered that the
predecessor has changed their economic activity to that of the successor, then create a
breakout with the two establishments keeping the predecessor and successor in their
respective codes. In first quarter, add the code change of the predecessor to the CCS and
collapse the two worksites if the employer refuses to provide a MWR. See Section 11.5.3
for reference.
The following diagram gives an example of noneconomic code changes to industry and county
on the successor record, showing the correct assignment of the Old fields.
Previous Quarters

Current Quarter

Future Quarter

UI/RUN 1111111111/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Terminated (status 2)
001/5/335999

UI/RUN 1111111111/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Inactive (status 2)
001/5/335999
Doesn't belong on CCS

UI/RUN 2222222222/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Active (status 1)
001/5/335999

UI/RUN 2222222222/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6); Active (status 1)
013/5/336322
Belongs on CCS; needs
Old NAICS 335999
and Old County 001
(Old fields 001/5/335999)

UI/RUN 1111111111/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Active (status 1)
CNTY/OWN/NAICS 001/5/335999

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-15

c) If the predecessor had the same activity (industry) and location (county or
county/township) as the successor, but the industry or county code was in error when
previously assigned, the successor should be given the old (incorrect) codes until the
beginning of the next year. Then the change to the new codes should be handled as a
noneconomic code change. Use the procedures described in Section 11.5.3 so that the
successor is placed on the CCS.
However, if the change to the new UI account takes place during first quarter and the first
quarter EQUI has not yet been submitted, the predecessor's codes may be corrected back to
the beginning of the current year and the noneconomic code change reported accordingly.
The predecessor record in this case belongs on the CCS. In this situation, the predecessor
and successor are both active during first quarter. This can also occur during the first quarter
cleanup and the second quarter processing. Code changes after second quarter must be held
until the next first quarter since they cannot be included on the current year’s CCS. The
predecessor's End of Liability Date and the successor's Initial Liability Date both fall within
the quarter.
Prior Quarter

UI/RUN
1111111111/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Active (status 1)
001/5/335999

Current Quarter

Future Quarter

UI/RUN 1111111111/00000
MEEI 1, 4, or 6; Active (status 1)
End of Liability Date during 2015/1
013/5/336322
Belongs on CCS; needs Old
NAICS 335999 & Old County 001
(Old fields 001/5/335999)

UI/RUN 1111111111/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Terminated/inactive (status 2)

UI/RUN 2222222222/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6); Active (status 1)
Initial Liability Date during 2015/1
013/5/336322

UI/RUN 2222222222/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Active (status 1)
013/5/336322

Suppose the change to the new UI account took place with the beginning of first quarter and the
predecessor becomes inactive sometime during the preceding fourth quarter (or at the end of
fourth quarter). If the first quarter EQUI has not yet been submitted, the successor should be
assigned the appropriate data elements, including Old fields, so it will be included on the CCS.
This can also occur during the first quarter cleanup and the second quarter processing.

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Prior Year

Page 5-16

Current First Quarter
UI/RUN 1111111111/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Terminated/inactive (status 2)

UI/RUN 1111111111/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Active (status 1)
County/Own/NAICS 001/5/335999

UI/RUN 2222222222/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6); Active (status 1)
013/5/336322
Belongs on CCS; Needs
Old NAICS 335999 & Old County 001
(Old fields 001/5/335999)

Section 5.5 describes the procedures for handling industry or geographic code changes resulting
from new breakouts of multi-establishment employer reporting units. Although such breakouts
include reporting in predecessor and successor fields on the EQUI file to maintain continuity of
records over time, the procedures for industry and geographic code changes in successor
relationships described in this section do not apply to such breakouts.

5.4 Successors Reporting at a Different Level
Many predecessor/successor transitions involve multi-unit accounts. Either the predecessor UI
account, the successor account, or both may have multiple worksites in the state. Sometimes the
successor (the employer with the successor UI account) is not willing to continue reporting
disaggregated data on a MWR and the successor account must be collapsed. Sometimes the
successor is willing to begin MWR reporting, and can be handled as a new breakout. Sometimes
the successor continues as an MWR reporter, but will provide the data at a different level of
aggregation. The more frequently occurring scenarios are illustrated in this section.
1. A Successor That Becomes an MWR Reporter
In this hypothetical example, the business changes hands beginning in first quarter and the new
employer (under a new UI account number) agrees to report data separately for each worksite.
The Old fields on the subunit records of the successor account (UI Number 3333333333) should
match the fourth quarter codes of the predecessor (of UI/RUN 2222222222/00000). This
resembles the first example in Section 5.5, the simple breakout introduced in first quarter.

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Prior Year

Page 5-17

Current First Quarter

UI/RUN 2222222222/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Terminated/inactive (status 2)

UI/RUN 2222222222/00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Active (status 1)
Cnty/Own/NAICS 001/5/335999

UI/RUN 3333333333/00000
MEEI 2; Active (status 1)
900/5/335999
Doesn't belong on CCS
(master record)
UI/RUN 3333333333/00001
MEEI 3; Active (status 1)
001/5/335999
Doesn't belong on CCS
(no code change)
UI/RUN 3333333333/00002
MEEI 3; Active (status 1)
013/5/335999
Belongs on CCS
Needs Old County 001
(Old fields 001/5/335999)

2. A Successor That Discontinues MWR Reporting
In this example, the business changes hands beginning in first quarter and the new employer
(under a new UI account number) will not provide disaggregated data, this is, will report only on
the Quarterly Contribution Report (QCR). In other words, the successor collapses into a singleunit account. The records that belong on the CCS are the inactivated subunits of the predecessor,
but only those subunits that were formerly reported with different area or industry codes than the
successor.
This resembles the example in Section 5.6, the multi that collapses in first quarter. The Old
fields on the inactivated subunits are identical to their classification codes in fourth quarter,
while their first quarter classification codes must be the same as the codes on the active successor
record (the MEEI 4 record in the new UI account).

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Prior Year

UI/RUN 0404040404/00000
(MEEI 2)
Cnty/Own/NAICS 900/5/335999
Active (status 1)

Current First Quarter
UI/RUN 0000055555/00000
(MEEI 4)
001/5/335999
Active (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS
UI/RUN 0404040404/00000
(MEEI 2)
Terminated/inactive (status 2)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(master record)

UI/RUN 0404040404/00001
(MEEI 3)
001/5/335999
(status 1)

UI/RUN 0404040404/00001
001/5/335999
Terminated/inactive (status 2)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(no code change)

UI/RUN 0404040404/00002
(MEEI 3)
003/5/335999
(status 1)

UI/RUN 0404040404/00002
001/5/335999
Terminated/inactive (status 2)
Belongs on CCS
Needs Old County 003
(Old fields 003/5/335999)

UI/RUN 0404040404/00003
(MEEI 3)
003/5/336322
(status 1)

UI/RUN 0404040404/00003
001/5/335999
Terminated/inactive (status 2)
Belongs on CCS
Needs Old County 003
and Old NAICS 336322
(Old fields 003/5/336322)

Page 5-18

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-19

3. A Single Establishment Acquires More than One Single Establishment.
A single-unit account (UI 5555555555) stays in business but acquires other UI accounts
beginning with first quarter. This employer agrees to report worksite data separately on the
MWR, thus becoming a multi. The predecessors for the newly acquired worksites are: (1) a
multi that was reporting as a single (UI 6666666666), and (2) a single with an incorrect county
code (UI 7777777777). As with other cases considered in this section, the records that belong on
the CCS were not active in fourth quarter under the same UI/RUN. Their Old fields should
match the fourth quarter classification codes of their predecessors.
Prior Year

UI/RUN 5555555555/00000
(MEEI 1)
County/Own/NAICS 001/5/335999
Active (status 1)
(This single establishment
becomes a subunit,
with RUN 00001.)

UI/RUN 6666666666/00000
MEEI 4
003/5/335999
Active (status 1)
(Acquired by UI 5555555555,
which agrees to break out its
two worksites.)

UI/RUN 7777777777/00000
(MEEI 1)
005/5/335322; Active (status 1)
(A single acquired by UI
5555555555.
It becomes a subunit.)

Current First Quarter
UI/RUN 5555555555/00000
(MEEI 2 – a new master record)
900/5/335999; Active (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS (master record)
UI/RUN 5555555555/00001
(MEEI 3)
001/5/335999; Active (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS (no code change)
UI/RUN 6666666666/00000
003/5/335999
Terminated/inactive (status 2)
Doesn't belong on CCS (no code change)
UI/RUN 5555555555/00002
(MEEI 3)
003/5/335999; Active (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS (no code change)
UI/RUN 5555555555/00003
(MEEI 3)
005/5/336322 (status 1)
Belongs on CCS, needs Old County 003
and Old NAICS 335999
(Old fields 003/5/335999)
UI/RUN 7777777777/00000
005/5/335322
Terminated/inactive (status 2)
Doesn't belong on CCS (no code change)
UI/RUN 5555555555/00004
(MEEI 3)
007/5/335322 (status 1)
Belongs on CCS, needs Old County 005
(Old fields 005/5/335322)

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-20

4. Transferring Employment to a Professional Employer Organization
Arrangements between Professional Employer Organizations (PEOs) and their clients represent a
special case of successor reporting, usually at a different reporting level. Section 15.3 covers
Professional Employer Organizations (PEO, NAICS=561330) reporting. This list summarizes
key steps for establishments that transfer their employment to a PEO:
•

Set up the reporting unit as a new multi-establishment worksite in the PEO’s UI account.


Assign the UI Account Number and RUN under which the unit was formerly reported as
the Predecessor UI and RUN of the new worksite. If possible, assign the unit’s new UI
Account Number and RUN as the Successor UI and RUN on the old record.



Determine the correct industry and geographic codes for the unit, based on its own
location and activity rather than the PEO’s location and activity (for example, do not
assign NAICS 561330; assign the NAICS code representing the primary activity of the
reporting unit).



If the industry and location codes formerly assigned to the unit are not correct, handle the
correction as a noneconomic code change. Hold the code change until the next first
quarter, and assign the necessary data elements (ARS Response Code, ARS Refile Year,
and Old fields) that place the record on the CCS.
If the PEO-client relationship is terminated and the unit leaves (or moves to a different
PEO), assign Predecessor and Successor UI/RUNs to maintain the linkage over time.
Treat any code change that result from the reporting change as a noneconomic code
change.





Under normal circumstances, if a breakout occurs in a PEO in mid-year (i.e., other than
first quarter) and the breakout causes a change from one classified industry or area to
another classified industry and/or area due to non-economic events, the code change(s)
should be held by the state until the next first quarter and reported on the Code Change
Supplement. However, for larger PEOs, handling and reporting breakouts, births, deaths,
out-of-business units, or other reporting changes can become difficult and very time
consuming for state QCEW staff. Clients enter in and out of relationships with PEOs
regularly. It is advised in these particular cases that the state contact their appropriate
BLS regional office for guidance and/or assistance in handling these more difficult PEO
cases.

5.5 Breaking Out (Disaggregating) New Multiple Worksite
Reporters
Introducing Data from Initial Multiple Worksite Reports
1. Breakouts Held for the First Quarter Report

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-21

A breakout should be treated as a noneconomic code changes when a new Multiple Worksite
Report (MWR) is received and the new worksites have different industry or geographic codes
than the original single. In order to prevent midyear breaks in employment and wage data,
breakouts with code changes should be introduced during first quarter processing. Data from an
initial first quarter Multiple Worksite Report should be included in the EQUI File for that
quarter.
States should consider adding new multi-establishment employer breakouts during any quarter of
the year as long as the industry code, county, township, and ownership codes are maintained
(held the same as before the breakouts) until the next first quarter. This is explained in more
detail later in this section.
Changes in industry/ownership/area that result from information on the Multiple Worksite
Report or from other sources are noneconomic code changes that need to be treated as
noneconomic code changes so that the results are included on the Code Change Supplement
files. Use the procedures described in Section 11.5.1 so that worksite records with these
noneconomic code changes are placed on the CCS.
Each new sub-unit that has an industry or geographic code different than the previously
combined unit belongs on the CCS; however, the combined, or master, record does not belong on
the CCS. An example will further clarify this CCS reporting procedure. Assume the following
is a record for a multi-establishment unit employer before being broken out:
UI Number

1234567890

RUN

00000

MEEI

1

County

001

Own

5

NAICS

335999

Employment

350

After being identified as a multi-establishment employer, the record is broken out into three
subunit (worksite) records:
Establishment

UI Number

RUN

MEEI

Cnty

Own

NAICS

Emp

A
B
C

1234567890
1234567890
1234567890

00001
00002
00003

3
3
3

001
003
003

5
5
5

335999
335999
336322

250
50
50

Belongs
on CCS

No
Yes
Yes

Since establishment A has the identical classification codes as the previously combined unit, this
record should not be on the CCS. Establishment B has a county code (003) that is different from
the previously combined unit, while establishment C has different county and industry codes
(003 and 336322). Therefore, these two records should be included on the CCS with the
following Old and New fields:

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-22

CCS Record
RUN

MEEI

00002
00003

3
3

Old
County

001
001

Old
Own

5
5

Old
NAICS

335999
335999

New
County

003
003

New
Own

New
NAICS

336322

This is also illustrated in the following diagram:

Prior Year

Current First Quarter
RUN 00000
(MEEI 2 – a new master record)
900/5/335999
Doesn't belong on CCS (master record)

RUN 00000
(MEEI 1)
County/Own/NAICS 001/5/335999

RUN 00001
(MEEI 3)
001/5/335999
Doesn't belong on CCS (no code change)
RUN 00002
(MEEI 3)
003/5/335999
Belongs on CCS
needs Old County 001
(Old fields 001/5/335999)
RUN 00003
(MEEI 3)
003/5/336322
Belongs on CCS, Needs Old
County 001 and Old NAICS 335999
(Old fields 001/5/335999)

To be included on the CCS, RUNs 00002 and 00003 need the Old fields and first quarter codes
on the state system consistent with the codes in the diagram. Section 11.5.1 describes how the
Old fields, ARS Response Code, and other data elements are assigned that will put the record
onto the CCS file.
The record with RUN 00000 remains as an active record; however, its Multi-Establishment
Employer Indicator (MEEI) code should become 2. It does not belong on the CCS. Although it
continues to show employment and wage data (equal to the sum of the data on the subunits), its
MEEI code (2) will exclude it from the macro file and the CCS.

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-23

2. Breakouts Introduced in Pending Status before First Quarter
In the example above, the new subunit records do not exist before first quarter. The state could
also create the subunit records before first quarter and keep these records in pending status
(Status Code = 9). Code 9 prevents their economic data from being used on the macro file. The
new pending records can use the correct classification codes – the county, ownership, and
industry codes they will carry in first quarter. The RUN 00000 record continues to carry MEEI
1, 4, or 6 through fourth quarter, so its economic data continue to be used on the macro file.
Beginning in first quarter, the subunits become active (Status Code = 1) while the RUN 00000
record becomes a master with MEEI 2. As in the first example, RUNs 00002 and 00003 belong
on the CCS and should carry Old fields showing where the data were reported on the active
record in fourth quarter.

Prior Year, First & Second Quarters

RUN 00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Cnty/Own/NAICS 001/5/335999

Prior Year, Third & Fourth Quarters

Current First Quarter

RUN 00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
001/5/335999
Active (status 1)

RUN 00000
(MEEI 2)
900/5/335999; (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(master record)

RUN 00001
(MEEI 3 or 5)
001/5/335999
Pending (status 9)

RUN 00001
001/5/335999; (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(no code change)

RUN 00002
(MEEI 3 or 5)
003/5/335999
Pending (status 9)

RUN 00002
003/5/335999; (status 1)
Belongs on CCS
Needs Old County 001
(Old fields 001/5/335999)

RUN 00003
(MEEI 3 or 5)
003/5/336322
Pending (status 9)

RUN 00003
003/5/336322; (status 1)
Belongs on CCS; needs Old
Cnty 001 & Old NAICS 335999
(Old fields 001/5/335999)

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-24

3. Data Included in the Current Quarter
Under certain circumstances, data from initial Multiple Worksite Reports for multi-establishment
accounts should be used in preparing the EQUI File for the quarter for which they are received.
These situations are as follows:
a. An employer with an existing business opens a new worksite (a birth, not a successor).
Report the new operation in the month when it began, using its current industry and area
codes. Births do not belong on the CCS.
b. A Multiple Worksite Report is received for a multi-establishment account whose industry
and/or county was unclassified (i.e., NAICS 999999 or County 995-999, respectively) on the
previous quarter’s file. This is not a noneconomic code change, but a change from
unclassified. It does not belong on the CCS. (An exception to this rule occurs if the change
from unclassified is combined with a change from one specific county or industry code to
another. In that case, it is treated as a noneconomic code change.)
c. A Multiple Worksite Report is requested when a new UI account is established as a multiestablishment employer. If the new account is, in fact, a successor to an active account, the
guidelines regarding successors determine when the data should be reported. (Refer to
Section 5.3) For multi-establishment employers, the total account employment should be
used when applying those guidelines. In other words, it is not necessary to handle a code
change as noneconomic if total employment for the UI account is 25 or less in the last month
before or the first month after the change from the predecessor UI account.
d. New breakouts of multi-establishment employers with MEEI codes of 1, 4, or 6 can be broken
out to MEEI codes of 3 or 5 during any quarter of the year. However, the state must follow
these guidelines: the industry, county, townships, and ownership codes must be maintained
(held the same as before the breakouts) until the next first quarter. While the reporting unit
counts may potentially rise each quarter as a consequence, the employment and wages would
not be adversely affected.
Consider the following example in which a multi-establishment employer begins reporting in a
quarter other than the first quarter:
Old Record
UI Number

3456789012

RUN

00000

MEEI

4

County

005

NAICS

Employment

NAICS

Employment

452111

400

New Records (Master and Subunits)
UI Number

3456789012
3456789012
3456789012
3456789012

RUN

00000
00001
00002
00003

MEEI

2
3
3
3

County

005
005
005
005

452111
452111
452111
452111

400
150
130
120

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-25

There is no effect on the county or industry in the above case. No discontinuity in data for the
macro cell would appear, except in the number of reporting units. As a result, it is acceptable to
introduce the breakout when first reported.
Consider a second, slightly different example:
Old Record
UI#

3456789012

RUN

00000

MEEI

4

County

001

NAICS

Employment

NAICS

Employment

335999

400

New Records (Master and Subunits)
UI#

3456789012
3456789012
3456789012
3456789012

RUN

00000
00001
00002
00003

MEEI

2
3
3
3

County

900
001
003
003

335999
335999
335999
336322

400
250
80
70

Here the worksites with RUNs 00002 and 00003 are in a different county than the original
record, and RUN 00003 is also in a different industry. There is a greater effect than in the first
example. A shift of 150 employees would occur, plus their corresponding wages, from county
001 to county 003, while 70 of those employees shift from NAICS 335999 to 336322. Such a
noneconomic change within the year should be prevented. This breakout can be introduced
when first reported, however, provided the state meets one important requirement. The second
and third worksites (RUNs 00002 and 00003) must initially be coded in county 001 and NAICS
335999, where they were coded when grouped as part of the MEEI 4 record. The county and
industry changes must then be held until first quarter and included on the Code Change
Supplement. The other worksite should not be included on the CCS because it has no code
changes. Beginning with the first quarter, RUN 00002 should appear in the correct county
(county 003) while RUN 00003 should appear in county 003 and NAICS 336322.
The reporting principle is as follows: breakouts may be introduced in mid-year, if necessary, but
the industry and county code changes should be held through the end of the year and introduced
in the next first quarter. The key in all these situations is that industry and area codes should not
change in mid-year because of noneconomic reporting changes.
The example above is repeated in the following diagram, illustrating the use of the Old fields.
Note that in this case, the Old fields match the fourth quarter codes of each reporting unit (but
should not match the fourth quarter codes of RUN 00000).

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Prior Year, First & Second Quarters

Prior Year, Third & Fourth Quarters

Page 5-26

Current First Quarter

RUN 00000
(MEEI 2)
900/5/335999
Active (status 1)

RUN 00000
(MEEI 2)
900/5/335999; (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(master record)

RUN 00001
001/5/335999
Active (status 1)

RUN 00001
001/5/335999; (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(no code change)

RUN 00002
001/5/335999
Active (status 1)

RUN 00002
003/5/335999; (status 1)
Belongs on CCS
Needs Old County 001

RUN 00003
001/5/335999
Active (status 1)

RUN 00003
003/5/336322; (status 1)
Belongs on CCS, Needs
Old County 001
and Old NAICS 335999

RUN 00000
(MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
Cnty/Own/NAICS 001/5/335999

Introducing Data from Existing Multiple Worksite Reports
If a multi-establishment account consistently submits quarterly Multiple Worksite Reports as
requested, the data from the form will always be used in preparing the EQUI File for the quarter
for which they are received.
Establishments of multi-establishment employers should be treated in the same manner as single
establishments with regard to changes in product or activity, location, and, of course, births.
Thus, data from a Multiple Worksite Report received when a multi-establishment account adds
one or more establishments during any quarter would be used in preparing the EQUI File for the
quarter for which they are received. Such new establishments are births and do not belong on the
CCS.
Records with MEEI code 5 (comprised of more than one establishment or worksite) can be
broken out to become several records with an MEEI code of 3 (worksite or establishment level).
If this reporting change causes economic data to be reported with different industry or

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-27

county/town codes than before, the code change is noneconomic and belongs on the CCS. The
following diagram gives an example.
Prior Year

Current First Quarter

RUN 00000
(MEEI 2)
County/Own/NAICS 900/5/335999
Active (status 1)

RUN 00000
(MEEI 2)
900/5/335999; (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(master record)

RUN 00001
001/5/335999
Active (status 1)

RUN 00001
001/5/335999; (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(no code change)

RUN 00002
003/5/335999
Active (status 1)

RUN 00002
003/5/335999; (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(no code change)
RUN 00003
003/5/336322
Terminated; status = 2
Doesn't belong on CCS

RUN 00003
003/5/336322
Active (status 1)
Breaks out to RUNs 00004
& 00005

RUN 00004
003/5/336322; (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(no code change)
RUN 00005
007/5/335999; (status 1)
Belongs on CCS, needs Old
County 003 & Old NAICS 336322
(Old fields 003/5/336322)
RUN 00006
013/5/336322; (status 1)
New unit (birth). Doesn’t
belong on CCS

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-28

Note that in this previous case, there are several possible ways the configuration of active RUNs
in fourth quarter could map to the configuration in first quarter. For example, all three new
RUNs (00004 through 00006) could be interpreted as births, or all three could be considered
successors to RUN 00003. The proper assignment of Old fields (along with other data elements
such as ARS Response Code) will allow BLS and state systems to generate CCS records that
reflect the actual movement of employment and wages between macro cells. In addition, the
proper assignment of Predecessor UI/RUN fields will provide the linkage to map the new RUNs
to the fourth quarter RUNs.
Records with MEEI 5 can be broken out to become several records with an MEEI code of 3
during any quarter of the year within the following guidelines: the industry, area, and ownership
codes must be maintained (held the same as before the breakouts) until the next first quarter.
While the reporting unit counts may potentially rise each quarter as a consequence, the
employment and wages within a macro level cell would not be adversely affected. The
following shows an example:
2002/1 – 2002/3

2002/4

2003/1

UI/RUN 0011223344/00000
(MEEI 2)
Active (status 1)
Cnty/Own/NAICS 900/5/335999

UI/RUN 0011223344/00000
(MEEI 2)
Active (status 1)
900/5/335999

UI/RUN 0011223344/00000
(MEEI 2)
900/5/335999; Active (status 1)
Master; doesn't belong on CCS

UI/RUN 0011223344/00001
MEEI 3; Active (status 1)
Cnty/Own/NAICS 001/5/335999

UI/RUN 0011223344/00001
MEEI 3; Active (status 1)
001/5/335999

UI/RUN 0011223344/00001
MEEI 3; Active (status 1)
001/5/335999
Doesn't belong on CCS; no
code change

UI/RUN 0011223344/00002
(MEEI 5)
Terminated (status 2)

UI/RUN 0011223344/00002
(MEEI 5)
Inactive (status 2)
Doesn't belong on CCS; no
code change

UI/RUN 0011223344/00003
(MEEI 3)
Active (status 1)
003/5/335999

UI/RUN 0011223344/00003
(MEEI 3)
003/5/335999; Active (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS; no
code change

UI/RUN 0011223344/00004
(MEEI 3)
Active (status 1)
003/5/335999

UI/RUN 0011223344/00004
(MEEI 3)
003/5/336322; Active (status 1)
Belongs on CCS; needs
Old NAICS 335999
(Old fields 003/5/335999)

UI/RUN 0011223344/00002
(MEEI 5
Active (status 1)
003/5/335999
Breaks out to RUNs 00003
and 00004

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-29

5.6 Consolidating Multiple Worksite Reporters
One Remaining Worksite and other Multi-establishment Situations
Most states do not store individual multi-establishment worksites on the UI tax file. For those
that do, the Reporting Unit Number assignment on the tax file may not be the same as required
for the QCEW program. In these cases, where a multi-establishment employer sells or closes all
but one worksite, RUNs for the remaining worksites should be terminated (made inactive). The
data from the QCR should be reported as RUN 00000. Any single worksite where it is the one
and only remaining worksite with a RUN greater than zero will fail the micro edits.
There may be instances in which a multi-establishment employer who has been regularly
submitting quarterly Multiple Worksite Reports either refuses or becomes unable to provide an
establishment-level breakout on a quarterly basis. When this occurs, there are three main
concerns:
1. Can the state obtain other information (explained below) to prorate employment and wage
data from the QCR on an ongoing basis?
2. If the answer to the first question is no, and the employer discontinues reporting in the middle
of the year, how can the state avoid showing a discontinuity in data resulting from collapsed
reporting?
3. How should the collapse be represented on the Code Change Supplement?
After learning of the change in reporting, the state should initially try to negotiate with the
employer to obtain complete establishment breakout information for at least one quarter of the
following year. If the employer agrees to report for one quarter a year, the state should use the
data obtained from the reported quarter to estimate data for the remaining quarters. States may
also examine other available sources of information to estimate establishment breakouts,
including CES data and the employer's wage records. (See Section 3.5 for more detail.)
If the state is not able to obtain data for one quarter a year to prorate employment and wage data,
and the employer has discontinued reporting in the middle of the year, it is important for the state
to continue estimation of establishment-level data for the remainder of that calendar year. The
state should first attempt to use data captured for one of the earlier quarters to prorate data from
the QCR to the worksite level for the remaining quarter(s). Again, states may also be able to use
CES data and the employer's wage records to estimate data for the remainder of the year. The
state should choose whatever method it deems most reliable.
The state should estimate the employer's establishment-level data through the fourth quarter of
the year, prorating from available data. If the employer is still unwilling or unable to provide
establishment-level data at the end of the year, the state may then collapse all subunit (worksite)
records into the primary worksite for the following first quarter. To do this, inactivate the
subunit records in the first quarter and stop reporting employment, wage, and other economic
data on these records (the records with RUN greater than 00000). Change the MEEI code of the

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-30

record with RUN 00000 from 2 (master) to 4 (multi reporting as a single). Set the first quarter
codes of this record equal to the industry and geographic codes of the primary worksite (subunit).
If there is no primary county (i.e., no single county representing 50% or more of the employment
of the UI account), use county code 995. (See Section 3.5.)
The state should collapse establishments only at the end of the year, and only after all attempts to
persuade the employer to report have failed. If collapsing a large multi will move substantial
employment between industries or counties, the state should consider prorating for an additional
year while continuing to negotiate for disaggregated data.
Including Collapsed Worksites on the Code Change Supplement
To assist in explaining shifts in macro data, a Code Change Supplement record should be
generated for each subunit record that was in a county or industry different from the primary
establishment. Section 11.5.2 gives the procedures for this. Only subunits that had a county or
industry code different from the new consolidated record belong on the Code Change
Supplement. An example will further clarify this reporting procedure. Assume the following
records were part of a multi-establishment employer before the establishments had to be
collapsed:
Worksite

Master
A
B
C
D

UI Number

1032547698
1032547698
1032547698
1032547698
1032547698

RUN

00000
00001
00002
00003
00004

MEEI

2
3
3
3
3

NAICS

511110
511110
511110
451110
451120

County

900
001
003
001
015

Ownership

5
5
5
5
5

Employment

400
250
50
50
50

After the collapse, the employer should be reported in the first quarter as follows:
UI Number

1032547698

RUN

00000

MEEI

4

NAICS

511110

County

001

Ownership

5

Employment

400

Establishments B, C, and D are the only units from this account that should be included on the
CCS because they are the only units with changes to the industry code and/or county codes.
Establishment B (RUN 00002) had a county code different than the new aggregated record;
establishment C (RUN 00003) had an industry code different than the new aggregated record;
establishment D (RUN 00004) had both an industry code and a county code different than the
new aggregated record. Therefore, these three records should be included on the CCS report as
follows:
CCS Record
RUN

00002
00003
00004

Old
County

003
001
015

Old
Own

5
5
5

Old
NAICS

511110
451110
451120

New
County

001
001

New
Own

New
NAICS

511110
511110

Dec.
Emp

50
50
50

MEEI

3
3
3

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

August 2019

Page 5-31

The Old fields on the state system become the Old fields on the CCS. The first quarter codes on
the state system become the new fields on the CCS, even though the first quarter is inactive:
Prior Year

-Current First Quarter

RUN 00000
(MEEI 2)
Cnty/Own/NAICS
900/5/511110
Active (status 1)

RUN 00000
(MEEI 4)
001/5/511110
Active (status 1)
Doesn't belong on CCS

RUN 00001
(MEEI 3)
001/5/511110
(status 1)

RUN 00001
001/5/511110
Inactive (status 2)
Doesn't belong on CCS
(no code change)

RUN 00002
(MEEI 3)
003/5/511110
(status 1)

RUN 00002
001/5/511110
Inactive (status 2)
Belongs on CCS
Needs Old County 003
(Old fields 003/5/511110)

RUN 00003
(MEEI 3)
001/5/451110
(status 1)

RUN 00003
001/5/511110
Inactive (status 2)
Belongs on CCS, Needs
Old NAICS 451110
(Old fields 001/5/451110)

RUN 00004
(MEEI 3)
015/5/451120
(status 1)

RUN 00004
001/5/511110
Inactive (status 2)
Belongs on CCS, Needs Old
County 015 & Old NAICS 451120
(Old fields 015/5/451120)

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-32

Chapter 11, and in particular Section 11.5.2, explains how to assign Old fields as well as the
ARS Response Code and other data elements needed to include the subunit records with code
changes on the CCS.

5.7 Tracking Establishments that Change UI or Reporting
Unit Numbers in the LDB
This section describes the record linkage process used by the Longitudinal Database (LDB)
System. The record linkage system constructs longitudinal data by linking records over time.
The data proceed through a series of steps comparing establishments in the current quarter with
establishments in the prior quarter. The order of the steps involved in the record linkage process
is listed below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Identification of SESA ID Links
Removal of successors in fully-imputed, single unit SESA ID links
Identification of inter-quarter predecessor/successor code links
Identification of inter-quarter breakouts/consolidations
Identification of inter-quarter weighted matches
Identification of intra-quarter predecessor/successor links
Identification of intra-quarter breakouts/consolidations
Fully-imputed single unit links

For more detail about the data of the QCEW Program, see Chapter 1.

5.7.1 LDB Linkage Process
Step 1 - Identification of SESA ID Links
The files are first linked by the state FIPS code/UI/RUN combination, the “SESA ID.”
Approximately 95 to 97 percent of the current quarter’s records match by SESA ID, with the
percentage of SESA ID matches from first quarter to fourth quarter being at the lower end of that
range. Matches by SESA ID do not undergo any type of validation; it is assumed that they are
accurate. A SESA ID link takes precedence over any other type of link involving a particular
unit.
Step 2 - Removal of successors in fully imputed, single unit SESA ID links
Fully imputed subunits of multi-establishment employers (records with MEEI Codes of 3 or 5)
that match by SESA ID are assumed to be valid matches and are removed from the matching
process along with the SESA ID matches involving non-imputed records. SESA ID links

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-33

involving current quarter, fully imputed, single units (those with MEEI codes of 1, 4, or 6) are
not initially accepted.
Step 3 - Identification of inter-quarter predecessor/successor code links
The system next links records across quarters that match via state-assigned Predecessor or
Successor codes. To be considered, records cannot have been linked via SESA ID earlier in the
process (unless they are fully imputed single units). One-to-one predecessor/successor code
matches do not undergo any type of validation. The state-provided information is assumed
correct.
Step 4 - Identification of inter-quarter breakouts/consolidations
The system next attempts to identify cases of administrative reporting changes occurring
between quarters. The system looks for these changes both within and between UI accounts.
The system identifies as breakouts or consolidations those records within a quarter that have
repeated predecessor or successor UI/RUN combinations and the single units in the other quarter
that they point to. In addition, the system checks UI accounts that have changed between
quarters from a single unit reporter to a multi-establishment reporter and vice versa and that may
or may not have predecessor/successor information on them. In the situation when
predecessor/successor numbers are not present, if an UI account’s employment changes between
the third month of the prior quarter to the first month of the current quarter by 50 percent or less
(based on prior quarter employment), that UI account is also identified as a breakout or
consolidation.
This employment change edit is run on all potential inter-quarter breakouts and consolidations –
those with predecessor and/or successor information and those without it. When the employment
check is run on those situations identified by predecessor/successor information, the system will
not overturn the identification based on employment change, but adds a flag describing whether
the employment changed more or less than 50 percent. When the employment check is run on
potential breakouts and consolidations not identified by predecessor/successor information
(always within a UI account), a breakout or consolidation is identified only if the employment
difference between the two periods is within the range of 50 percent.
Step 5 - Identification of inter-quarter weighted matches
In 2015 QCEW implemented the Weighted Match replacement to the earlier probability-based
weighted match process. This replacement was motivated by several factors: a need to improve
weighted match record linkages; limited technical support from the vendor; and significant
annual cost savings for the QCEW program. The replacement Weighted Match system measures
the similarity of two records by calculating a weighted Euclidean distance between them. This is
a departure from the previous method of probabilistic record linkage.

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-34

Based on a relatively small number of QCEW variables, given in the table below, this distance is
scaled to the [0-1] range and is constructed such that higher numbers, or scores, represent greater
similarity between records. Thus, a score of one would constitute a perfect record match, while a
score of zero would suggest that there is no measurable similarity between the two records at all;
i.e. they are perfectly dissimilar in the context of the 2015 matching system. Unique variables,
including EIN, names, Reporting Unit Description, and address are given higher weights.
Conceptually, it is desirable that record pairs with high scores are flagged as links, while those
with low scores are discarded. Informed by empirical review, the value applied as a cutoff was
about 0.58, which was selected as a satisfactory compromise between missing too many good
links (by setting the cutoff too high) and flagging too many bad links (by setting the cutoff too
low). Additionally, a second criterion was implemented: if the record pair sufficiently matches
on a combination of critical variables, despite having a low score (typically due to missing data),
a link between the records is established.
New Weighted Match Components
Linkage Variable
Type
EIN
Categorical
County
Categorical
Phone Number
Categorical
NAICS
Categorical
Average Quarterly Employment
Numeric
Total Quarterly Employment
Numeric
Total Quarterly Wages
Text
Standardized Trade Name
Text
Standardized Legal Name
Text
Reporting Unit Description
Text
Physical Location Address
Text
City and Zip Code
Text
The new QCEW Weighted Match program was implemented with the fourth quarter 2014
linkage process, conducted in May 2015. These data were published July 29, 2015.
Step 6 - Identification of intra-quarter predecessor/successor links
Within the current quarter, records that link to each other via predecessor and/or successor
numbers are considered a valid match. All current quarter records are considered as potential
predecessors in the intra-quarter matching. The successor records involved in these matches,
however, are not allowed to match to the prior quarter. Records with a match to the prior quarter
that were identified before entering this component are not given the opportunity to be
successors in this step. Likewise, once a record is identified as a successor in an intra-quarter
match, it cannot match to the prior quarter in subsequent phases of the process.
The successor records identified in the weighted match, step five, subsequently are allowed to
match as either predecessors or successors in the intra-quarter matching. If one of these records

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-35

links as a successor in the intra-quarter matching, the weighted link to the prior quarter will be
broken and the intra-quarter link will be accepted.
The system can have only one record on the database representing each individual continuous
unit identified by a unique LDB number. To meet this requirement, the system merges the pair
of records linked within the current quarter. The merged record retains the administrative
information of the successor. The system determines which record’s employment to retain by
comparing the monthly employment values independently for each month. If the successor’s
employment is greater than zero, then its employment and associated flag are retained. If the
successor’s employment is zero and the predecessor’s employment is greater than zero, then the
predecessor’s employment and associated flag are retained. If both records have positive wages,
the wages are combined in the merged record.
Step 7 - Identification of intra-quarter breakouts/consolidations
When the system identifies new current quarter records with repeated predecessor or successor
UN/RUN combinations that point to a current quarter single unit, the involved units are
identified as intra-quarter breakouts or consolidations. Similar to the one-to-one intra-quarter
processing described above, the predecessor records involved in these situations are given the
opportunity to match in all other phases of the matching process while the successor records are
not allowed to match to the prior quarter – with one exception. The initial system will not allow
predecessors in an intra-quarter breakout and consolidations to have been involved in an interquarter breakout or consolidation. Thus, combinations of inter- and intra-quarter breakouts and
consolidations are not identified.
Similar to the way the system merges employment and wage data associated with one-to-one
intra-quarter matches; the system also merges records involved in many-to-one and one-to-many
intra-quarter matches. Similar logic is utilized to perform the merging but it is expanded to
handle these more complex cases. The administrative information of the successor records is
retained.
Step 8 - Fully imputed single unit links
A fully imputed establishment is one that has all three months of employment and quarterly
wages imputed. When there are fully imputed current quarter units with MEEI Codes of 1, 4, or
6 that have a SESA ID match to the prior quarter, the prior quarter records involved are returned
to the matching process after their identification (Step 2 of the Record Linkage process). These
prior quarter records are then eligible to match in all other components of the matching process.
Rather than assume that these units are delinquent, an attempt is made to identify the units that
actually may have been reported under new ownership. Following completion of the matching
process, if the prior quarter records were not linked to another current quarter record, they will be
rejoined with their fully imputed current quarter counterpart.

August 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Handling Changes in Reporting Configuration

Page 5-36

5.7.2 Updates and the Linking Process
Only the "current" quarter's records and the "previous" quarter's records are involved in the
linking process. Updates made to quarters that come before the "previous" quarter will not affect
how records are linked. To illustrate, suppose that the current quarter is 2019/2 and that a file
with a new SESA ID is submitted with no state assigned predecessor/successor numbers. The
linking process is then performed on the file and no match is found. This file is considered a
birth file. In the following quarter, 2019/3, a record for this file (same SESA ID) is submitted
with a set of predecessor/successor numbers. The newly submitted, updated record is still a part
of the linking process. The newly acquired predecessor/successor numbers allow the linking
process to correct the "birth" status initially conferred upon the file. Accurate linkage is
maintained on the LDB.
Now suppose a similar but different scenario. The current quarter is 2019/2 and a file with a new
SESA ID is submitted with no state assigned predecessor/successor numbers. The linking
process is performed on the file and no match is found. The file is then considered a birth file.
In the following quarter, 2019/3, a record for this file (same SESA ID) is again submitted
without a set of predecessor/successor numbers. This third quarter file is linked to the initial file
submitted in second quarter. In 2019/4, a record for this file (same SESA ID) is submitted with
predecessor/successor numbers. This fourth quarter file is correctly linked to the third quarter
file with the same SESA ID. However, the file associated with this specific SESA ID is not
linked to the predecessor/successor files as indicated by the predecessor/successor numbers
submitted in the 2019/4 file.

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

September 2019

Page 6-1

Chapter 6 – Annual Refiling Survey
The main purpose of the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) is to verify or correct the North
American Industry Classification System (NAICS) and the geographic codes such as county and
township (town, city, parish, or island in some states) assigned to establishments. Other
important purposes of the ARS are to verify or update establishments’ mailing and physical
location addresses. The ARS also asks employers to identify new locations in the state.
This chapter outlines the ARS processing cycle, including criteria used to select establishments
each year, response rate requirements, summary management reports, the categories of ARS data
collected via the web, the Central Review, the BLS-3023 NVS (Industry Verification – Single),
NVM (Industry Verification – Multi), and NCA (Non-Classified Account). NCAs are not
included on the ARS Control Files, but similar collection and processing methods are used, so
they are included in this section of the manual. This section also includes key portions of the
web screens, survey responses and the different methods of processing including a chart of
response codes associated with processing ARS Web responses. Also included is a section on
Professional Employer Organizations.
---------------Contents of Chapter 6---------6.1 Purpose of the ARS
6.2 ARS Processing Cycles and Selection Criteria
6.3 ARS Response Rate Requirements
6.4 ARS Web and NVM Web Collection Screens and Solicitation
6.4.1 Explanation of Key Areas of Online Collection Screens
6.4.2 ARS Web and NVM Web Solicitation
6.5 ARS and NCA Processing
6.5.1 ARS Response Codes
6.6 Collection Methods
6.6.1 ARS Web and NVM Web
6.6.2 BLS Central Review
6.7 Processing Professional Employer Organizations
6.8 Reports for BLS
6.9 Usable Response Rate and Total Response Rate
6.10 State ARS Responsibilities

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Page 6-2

6.1 Purpose of the ARS
The main purpose of the ARS is to verify or correct, if necessary, the NAICS code assigned to a
business or business’s subunit (in cases where a firm breaks out their UI account reporting into
multiple establishments in a state). The NAICS code reflects the main economic activity of the
business at that location, but may not reflect all activities conducted since only one code is
assigned per reporting unit. The current industry description is presented to respondents
reporting via the ARS Web System. If an employer disagrees with the presented (current)
NAICS code description or is not sure that the provided NAICS description best reflects their
operations, the ARS Web system requests that the employer provide additional details about the
business activities at the location in question. State coders will review the information provided
by the respondent and, if necessary, change the NAICS code assigned to the reporting unit.
Another important purpose of the ARS is to verify a business’s mailing and physical location
addresses. These addresses are stored in the Longitudinal Database (LDB). Several DOL
statistical programs use the LDB as their sample frame so it is crucial that these fields are as upto-date and accurate as possible. The physical location address (PLA) is where the employer
conducts business. Therefore, the physical location address cannot be a Post Office Box or rural
route number. Additionally, the physical location address must be accurate so that QCEW
microdata can be properly geocoded at sub-county levels. Data in the QCEW Program are
published by geographic location, so it is important to update location fields such as county,
town, city or parish, to reflect the most current location.
Finally, the ARS asks employers to report on newer physical locations (e.g. stores or offices)
operating in the state and the employment levels at these locations. State QCEW staff will use
this location and employment information to determine whether or not the employer meets the
criteria for solicitation as a multiple worksite reporter.
When there are changes to the NAICS, geographic codes, or ownership code, the state includes
this information in the Code Change Supplement (CCS), a component of the Enhanced Quarterly
Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file. States also send mailing and physical location address
changes to the national office in the EQUI every quarter. For more information on the timing
and reporting of code changes refer to Section 2.3.2 of this manual.

6.2 ARS Processing Cycles and Selection Criteria
Every year, the states contact a subset of employers (roughly a third of eligible establishments) to
obtain information that (a) confirms or corrects their accounts’ NAICS codes to reflect the main
business activity conducted at each location, and (b) confirms/updates each unit’s geographic
codes and addresses. This is called the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS).
Establishments in the survey are selected across industries using the seventh and eighth digits of
the Federal Employer Identification Number (EIN). In year one, units in the range 00-33 are

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

September 2019

Page 6-3

surveyed. In year two, units in the range 34-66 are surveyed. In year three, units in the range
67-99 are surveyed. The following table illustrates a three-year ARS cycle.
EIN Digits
7-8
7-8
7-8

EIN Range
00-33
34-66
67-99

Year
1
2
3

Fiscal Year
2020, 2023, etc.
2021, 2024, etc.
2022, 2025, etc.

This processing cycle repeats itself in succeeding years. All establishments missing EINs (blank
or zero-filled) are selected for the ARS based on the UI Account Number field. Two digits of
the 10-digit UI Account Number field should be used in the same manner as the seventh and
eight digits of the EIN. Most states use positions 9 and 8, respectively, of their UI Account
Number. There are exceptions, as listed in the table below.
State
UIN Digits

AL ME
6-7 5-6

MS
5-6

MT NE
9-10 6-7

NV
6-7

NY NC
9-10 9-10

VT
10-9

VI
10-9

WA
6-7

WY
5-6

ARS Selection Criteria Exclusions
The following establishments are excluded from the ARS.
1. Single-establishment UI accounts (MEEI = 1, 4, or 6) that were active during the selection
quarter (1st Quarter of the prior FY) but had an average employment of less than or equal to
three in the most recent 12 months, regardless of total wages, are excluded from the ARS.
Accounts that were active during the selection quarter but not yet for 12 months, are still
eligible for ARS selection; the calculation for average employment in these cases will use the
number of active months in the denominator rather than the default of 12.
2. A subset of UI accounts on the Control File will have NAICS codes that show low rate
change/correction into other main business activities (NAICS codes). With the lessened
likelihood of reporting changes that the ARS would capture, this subset of UI accounts are
solicited for ARS responses once every six years. This reduces respondent burden and
processing costs with minimal impact on the currency of QCEW NAICS codes.
The table below lists the EIN ranges for single-establishment UI accounts (MEEI = 1, 4,
or 6) on the List of Low Change NAICS Codes that are included and excluded from the
ARS over the next six ARS years.
EIN
Digits
7-8
7-8
7-8
7-8

EIN Range
Include
17-33
51-66
67-83
00-16

EIN
Range Exclude
00-16
34-50
84-99
17-33

Fiscal
Year
2018
2019
2020
2021

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

September 2019

7-8
7-8

34-50
84-99

51-66
67-83

Page 6-4

2022
2023

3. A number of private employers, identified by their EIN, are included in the ARS but
excluded from the ARS Print Files and email contact files. Instead of soliciting responses via
the web from these large private establishments with well-known business activities, BLS
reviews the NAICS codes of these companies in house. The states’ role on the handling of
these files and additional discussion on this topic is presented in Section 6.8.2.
4. Federal, state, and local government establishments are excluded from regular refiling.
These establishments in ownership codes 1, 2, or 3 will not be solicited for ARS responses.
5. Unclassified establishments; those coded NAICS 999999, are excluded from the ARS. State
QCEW staff work throughout the year to keep the number of unclassified accounts on their
files at or below the cooperative agreement maximum-allowed level. State staff will email,
call, conduct internet research, and mail information requests to employers to obtain enough
information about an unclassified unit’s operations to enable them to assign a NAICS code.
States can opt to have BLS send NCA Web Letters to their unclassified single accounts each
quarter.
6. Single establishments (MEEI = 1, 4, or 6) coded in NAICS 814110 (Private Households) are
excluded from the ARS. Establishments that are assigned this NAICS code are households
employing workers on or about the premises in activities primarily concerned with the
operations of the household. These private households may employ individuals such as
cooks, maids, nannies, butlers, and outside workers such as gardeners, caretakers, and other
maintenance workers. These establishments do not provide services to the public outside of
the household.
7. Multi-establishment UI accounts where the master RUN is coded in NAICS 561330
(Professional Employer Organizations) are excluded from the ARS.
8. Establishments in NAICS 491110 (Postal Service) are excluded from the ARS. Many of
these will be in government and would be excluded on that basis. There are some in
ownership 5 (private ownership) that are excluded based on their NAICS code.
The ARS Control File (CF)
At the beginning of each year, BLS creates a file for states called the ARS Control File, which
contains all of the records that are part of the current year’s ARS. The Data Collection Branch
provides this file to the states. The Control Files are created using data from the 1st quarter
EQUI deliverable received by BLS. This Control File creation marks the start of the ARS Year.
The Centralized ARS (CARS) Checklists are issued each year on StateWeb to provide states
with a step by step guide to ARS processing, including loading the latest Control File, CARS
Response files and ARS Web data.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Page 6-5

6.3 ARS Response Rate Requirements
The Cooperative Agreement between each state and the Bureau of Labor Statistics details the
required state-obtained, usable ARS response rate for units or employment. In addition to emails
and the initial web letter mailing, BLS sends at least one follow-up web letter during the ARS
Year as necessary for states to accomplish this goal. Some states will be afforded the mailing of
a second follow-up web letter if response rates are trailing (to single worksite units only). States
may also contact or research the business units to verify NAICS code and address in the absence
of reported information.

6.4 ARS Web and NVM Web Collection Screens and
Solicitation
States collect main-business-activity information for ARS purposes using online systems called
ARS Web for single unit accounts, and NVM Web for multiple reporting unit accounts. BLS uses
three online versions of forms to capture responses to the ARS. Originally these forms were
printed on paper and mailed to eligible firms. With collection of the ARS having completely
migrated to web-based collection, so have these forms; with the questions now asked on the ARS
Web and NVM Web collection systems. Non-Classified Accounts (NCAs) are not part of the
ARS but responses from these accounts are collected through ARS Web, so they are covered in
the ARS section of the manual. The three forms on the web are:
1. BLS 3023-NVS – NAICS Verification, Single Locations
Requests information from single-unit establishments (MEEI 1, 4, 6) within a state.
Respondents are asked to verify the industry description presented regarding the
establishment’s business activities and whether multiple locations exist within the state.
The respondent is also asked to verify or correct physical location, mailing address, and
county location, or to provide this information if any of these data elements are missing.
This form is presented online and not mailed en masse as in prior years.
2. BLS 3023-NVM – NAICS Verification, Multiple Locations
Requests information from employers that have multiple worksites within a state under
the same UI number reporting as sub-units (MEEI 3 and 5). Employers are asked to
review industry descriptions for all of their worksites/establishments associated with that
UI. If the description(s) is correct, the employer checks the "Correct" box for the
establishment. If the description is incorrect for one or more of the establishments, the
employer checks the “Incorrect” box and is then asked to provide an appropriate
description of the establishment(s’) actual main business activity. Respondents have the
option to choose “complete paper form” and are given the link to the blank form on the

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

September 2019

Page 6-6

public website. A respondent may fax or mail their completed form (from the public
website) to the state office. Like the NVS collection, no NVM paper collection forms are
mailed.
3. BLS 3023-NCA-Non-Classified Account, Information Request
Requests information from single-unit establishments (MEEI 1, 4, 6) within a state that
are currently “unclassified”, or have a NAICS code of 999999, unclassified.
Respondents are asked to provide that establishment’s business activities and whether
multiple locations exist within the state. The respondent is also asked to verify or correct
physical location, and mailing address information or to provide this information if any of
these data elements are missing.
For NCA collection, states can choose to have BLS email/mail solicitation letters,
(without paper forms), requesting they provide this information online.
Alternatively, states can choose to print and mail paper NCA forms. If states take this
approach, the respondents will not be able to respond via ARS Web. Instead,
respondents will return the completed form to the state’s LMI shop.

6.4.2 ARS Web and NVM Web Solicitation
Firms that are selected for the ARS are solicited via email or mailed web letters.
Solicitation of NVS-Single Accounts
Email Blast Solicitation
Email blasting is the process of BLS sending emails to all single accounts (MEEI 1, 4, or 6)
requesting their cooperation by logging into the Bureau’s ARS Web data collection system. There
are two main sources of respondent email addresses that are used for these email blasts:
1. ARS Web records: BLS has email addresses on file in its systems from prior ARS Web
collection. ARS Web collection began in FY 2012, so beginning with the 2015 ARS, email
addresses from prior ARS cycles became available to BLS.
2. UI Tax emails: Many states’ UI tax departments have made firms’ email addresses available
to BLS for the purpose of soliciting responses to the ARS via email. The Regional Office staff
work with their state partners to collect these addresses and make them available to the national
office. When states have access to the email addresses collected by their UI Tax departments
and are able to share them with BLS, they are asked to provide an extract in the following
format as a text file:
Position

Length

Data Element

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

September 2019
1-2
3-12
13-267

2
10
255

Page 6-7

State FIPS Code
Unemployment Insurance (UI Account Number)
UI Tax Business Email Address

Refer to Exhibit 6A for an ARS Email Template, which include the respondent’s web id(s).
See Exhibit 6B for an ARS Email Password Template, which is a second/separate email that
conveys the password(s); a separate email is used to ensure confidentiality. Respondents can
contact ARS Support Services through the ARS Respondents website or at
[email protected] and ask that their survey notice or password email be resent if
needed.
ARS Web Letter Solicitation
BLS solicits responses to the refiling survey using web letters for both single accounts and
multis. The web letter is a single page containing a Web ID and password along with the link for
reporting online. ARS first mailings, and subsequent follow-up mailings, will take place after
email blasts. BLS monitors response rates to the email blasts and the first and second web letter
mailings. A third mailing is offered to a subset of states where lower response rates are
observed.
Exhibit 6C depicts a sample NVS web letter for a mandatory state and Exhibit 6D shows the
NVS web letter that would be used in a voluntary state.
Solicitation of NVM-Multi-Establishment Accounts
NVM accounts that are already MWR Web respondents are asked to complete the Industry
Verification on-line after submitting their Multiple Worksite Report. Generally they are solicited
via MWR Web during 2nd quarter collection and non-respondents are asked again to complete
the NVM during 3rd quarter collection.
NVM eligible accounts that are not currently reporting multiple worksite reports through the
MWR Web system are mailed web letters with login credentials. With this information they can
report NVM data online without having to report MWR data. These respondents are typically
mailed the web letters during 3rd quarter collection and a follow-up letter is typically sent during
4th quarter collection in case of nonresponse. Exhibit 6E and Exhibit 6F show NVM web letters
for mandatory and voluntary states, respectively. The NVM letter is double-sided with the back
providing instructions to the respondent for logging into the IDCF and reporting. Exhibit 6G
shows the reverse of the NVM letter.
Both types of NVM respondents have the option to choose “complete paper form” and are given
the link to the blank form on the public website. No paper NVM forms are sent by BLS.

September 2019

Exhibit 6A ARS Email Template

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Page 6-8

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Exhibit 6B ARS Email Password Template

Page 6-9

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Exhibit 6C ARS NVS Web Letter – Mandatory State

Page 6-10

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Exhibit 6D ARS NVS Web Letter – Voluntary State

Page 6-11

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Exhibit 6E ARS NVM Web Letter – Mandatory State

Page 6-12

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Exhibit 6F ARS NVM Web Letter – Voluntary State

Page 6-13

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Exhibit 6G ARS NVM Web Letters – Reverse

Page 6-14

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Page 6-15

6.5 ARS and NCA Processing
When the states begin processing the new ARS, the first step is to load the Control File into the
state system. Once the Control File has been loaded, states can begin loading NVM Web
Responses. Since MWR Web respondents were given the opportunity to report their NVM
information with their 2nd quarter or 3rd quarter MWRs, these files will be available before the
Control File. States must wait and load their Control File before loading NVM Web responses.
On the NVM Web response file, the master unit and reporting units (RUNs) are coded either
response code 31 (pending) or response code 41 (no refiling change).
When the states were responsible for creating the mail files for the ARS mailings, all of the
accounts that had responded to the ARS prior to the creation of the next print file were excluded
from the file. Now that BLS creates the print files for the ARS, there is a need to account for
responses received directly to the state via any method (phone calls, email, fax etc.) other than
ARS Web or NVM Web. States can provide these “other than ARS Web/NVM Web response
UI’s” to their regional offices for exclusion. This process is covered in the CARS Checklists on
StateWeb.
The BLS provides states with a National Change of Address (NCOA) file which contains
mailing address updates from the USPS. These files can be used to update on-hand addresses in
the state systems. In addition, a portion of records contain a response code (RC) of 63 for
records with undeliverable mailing addresses. Loading the NCOA files will update the ARS
control file with a RC 63.
BLS provides states with a CARS Transmittal Schedule for NVS responses received in the ARS
year. NVS and NVM Web responses will be included in these transmittals.
Some states opt to have BLS mail web letters to their unclassified (NAICS 999999) accounts.
Respondents are provided with credentials to respond via ARS Web. Separate NCA response
files are provided to the states according to the CARS Transmittal Schedule.
The following files are provided to the states, all file formats are included in the CARS checklist:
1.

Loadable CARS NVS/NVM Response Files (.txt)
The Loadable CARS Response Files are text files that provide an ARS response code 31
(pending) or ARS response code 41 (no change) on each NVS and NVM record. When
loaded, the response code fields on the records get populated in the state systems. The
states must load the CARS Response Files.

2. Loadable ARS Web Data (.txt)
The Loadable ARS Web Data files are text files that include every element from the
respondent supplied corrections file. Users can select which blocks of data will be

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

September 2019

Page 6-16

automatically loaded, rather than needing to manually enter the data. States are not
required to load the ARS Web Data files.
3.

ARS Web Excel Files (.xls)
a. ARS Web Response Files
The ARS Web Response File contains the same information as the Loadable ARS Web
data file, but in a spreadsheet form for states to review and key in the data (if they do
not load it).
b.

Additional Worksite Files
The Additional Worksite File provides a listing of additional worksites that were
identified by ARS Web respondents; this includes both NVS and NCA respondents.
There is no automated feature to load additional worksites. States that have an
“Additional Worksite Spreadsheet” file need to review and process these records
manually.

4.

NVM Web Excel Files (.xls)
a.

NVM Web No Change Files
These files list worksites where respondents confirmed that their NAICS code is
correct.

b.

NVM Web Change Files
These files list worksites for which respondents indicated their current NAICS
code is incorrect.

c.

Address or County/Town Change
These files list UI accounts where respondents updated their addresses or
CTY/TOWN codes.

d.

New Worksites
These files list any additional worksites added by respondents.

5.

Non Classified (NCA) Response Files :
a.

ARS Web Response Files (.xlsx)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Page 6-17

The ARS Web Response File contains the same information as the Loadable ARS
Web data file, but in a spreadsheet form for states to review and key in the data (if
they do not load it).
b.

Loadable ARS Web Data (.txt)
The Loadable ARS Web Data files are three text files that include: address,
NAICS and Geographic area updates. Users can select which files to
automatically load rather than needing to manually enter the data.

Handling the ARS Web Response Excel Files (.xls)
These files mirror the loadable text files in their content but responses are made readable for state
review and subsequent manual entry into a state’s processing system, if they choose such an
approach.
1.

States can open these Excel files and review the responses for editing/keying into their
EXPO or WIN-202 processing system

2.

States have the option to use the PDF Generator; this is a Word® mail merge feature that
converts the response Excel file into a pdf file that displays each UI’s old and updated
data on one page/screen in a fashion reminiscent of the paper NVS forms that many staff
have used for years. Contact your regional office for assistance with the PDF Generator.

6.5.1 ARS Response Codes
Response files should be loaded throughout the ARS processing cycle. The loadable CARS files
are generally made available from the national office according to the annual CARS Schedule.
The ARS response codes are posted to StateWeb in the CARS section as Attachment 3 to the
CARS checklists and can be found in on the QCEW cheat sheet. A full listing of response codes
can be found in Appendix Q.
Below is a list of the most commonly used ARS Response codes:
41
Reviewed, no CCS changes (no changes to the NAICS code, geographic code, or
ownership code) on a single record or subunit record. This code also applies to master records
with useable ARS responses, with or without any code changes.
42

Employer misunderstood industry description but codes are correct.

46
Clean record with CCS updates from the ARS (changes to the NAICS code, geographic
code, ownership code, or any combination of these codes.)

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

September 2019

Page 6-18

The below response code (50) indicates a code change as a result of information from non-ARS
sources. These records may or may not have been in the current year’s ARS.
50
Code changes from non-ARS sources. Establishments not already on the ARS Control
File receive ARS Response Code of 50.

6.6 Collection Methods
6.6.1 ARS Web and NVM Web
BLS sends several email blasts followed by an initial web letter mailing and at least one followup mailing for the NVS. Some states are afforded the mailing of a second follow-up web letter if
response rates are trailing (to single worksite units only). BLS collects NVM responses via the
MWR Web. The ARS Web is also used to collect the responses for unclassified businesses
(NCA). Please see section 6.4.2 for details.

6.6.2 BLS Central Review
Every year, as part of the ARS, BLS national office staff review the industry classification of
selected large multi-unit firms rather than soliciting a response through NVM web. Private
sector establishments included in this review are chosen by the national office based on EIN,
relative homogeneity of industry codes, and size class by employment level. These EINs fall
within the regular ARS selection EIN range of the year that they are centrally reviewed.
A QCEW S-memorandum is issued part way through each ARS Year detailing the Central
Review procedures for that year, including information on the EINs covered in the Central
Review. Goals of the review include: improved NAICS code accuracy and consistency,
improved MWR information, reduction in respondent burden, and lastly, reduction in costs to the
government (measured in: time spent handling responses and postage costs of Web Letter
mailings.)
In recent years the Central Review process has expanded to include areas of review other than
NAICS. All of the following types of review are included in the Central Review process:
1. NAICS Code Review
BLS staff review the NAICS codes of establishments for each of the EINs using
information gathered from company websites, business directories, and U.S. Security
and Exchange Commission (SEC) filings along with the trade and legal names, addresses,
reporting unit descriptions, and employment size and wages
2. Physical Location Address (PLA) and County Code Alignment Review

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Page 6-19

BLS uses i/Lytics Post locate software to determine the county (CTY) code associated
with the PLAs of establishments included in the central review. BLS compares the
software-generated CTY code with the CTY codes on the EQUI files. (See Appendix V).
3. Establishment Breakout Review
BLS reviews the average employment for establishments by industry and asks states to
review establishments that are outliers as possible candidates for further breakouts or
NAICS code changes. For example, the company website may indicate 10 stores in a
state, but only one reporting unit, with high employment, is shown. Another example
would be high employment for one store location where it could be a candidate for a
breakout or for a NAICS change to a different industry, such as a managing office, where
that level of employment and wages would be more typically found.
4. Professional Employer Organization (PEO) Master Record Review
BLS identifies possible PEOs where the master record is not coded as a PEO (NAICS
561330).

6.7 Processing Professional Employer Organizations
It is important to clarify the treatment of establishments classified in NAICS 561330,
Professional Employer Organizations (PEOs). Unlike establishments classified in NAICS
561320 (Temporary Help Services), PEOs operate in a co-employment relationship with their
client companies. Some states require PEOs to report their client companies under their existing
UI number.
For those states where PEOs are not required to report client companies under their existing UI
the client companies of a PEO should be identified as separate establishments on the MWR and
assigned the industry code based on their own primary economic activity -- not activity of the
PEO. The same principle applies to the client’s geographic code. Only those employees
administering the core functions of the PEO are classified in NAICS 561330. Only if the state
agency is unable to identify the activities of the PEO’s clients for the MWR report should they
report the entire employment and payroll under NAICS 561330.

6.8 Reports for BLS
Summary Management Report (SMR)
The SMR is a valuable tool in assessing a state’s progress in meeting the necessary response
rates for the ARS. It includes counts of records by response status as well as response rate

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Page 6-20

percentages. States should refer to the SMR frequently during the ARS Year to assess their
progress.
The SMR can be produced in electronic format by the standard state processing system. This file
should be submitted to the BLS regional office by the 25th of the month. BLS regional offices
then review and transmit the file to the national office.
The SMR file that is generated by the state processing systems must follow the file naming
convention: "AAsmrMMYY.txt"
Where:
AA is the state alpha abbreviation
MM is the numeric month
YY is the numeric 2-digit year
Appendix R gives the SMR file format.

6.9 Usable Response Rate and Total Response Rate
The Usable and Total Response Rates measure a state's progress on the ARS. The state's
processing system calculates the two response rates using formulas based on Response Codes.
Appendix Q lists the valid response codes and Section 11.4 discusses their effect on the CCS.
The two response rates, expressed both for units and for employment, are noted at the bottom of
page 2 of the ARS and SMR reports. Separate Usable and Total Response Rates are shown for
singles, subunits, and for "all." All refers to all single-unit records as well as all subunit records,
since master records (MEEI 2) are always excluded from the response rate calculations. By
counting subunits instead of masters, the formulas give greater weight to multi-unit respondents.
The Usable Response Rate is the measure used to track a state’s compliance with the
Cooperative Agreement.
Usable Response Rate
The numerator includes records with the following Response Codes:
• Centrally Collected Data (32)
• Reviewed -- no CCS changes necessary (41)
• Code is correct; employer misunderstood the industry description (42)
• Clean records with CCS updates (46)
• Code change from other sources (50)
The denominator includes records with the following Response Codes:
• Included in the Refile (00)
• Updated, but has a CCS I-error (30)

September 2019

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Page 6-21

Not reviewed - Pending (31)
Centrally Collected Data (32)
Reviewed, no CCS changes (41)
Code is correct; employer misunderstood the industry description (42)
Clean record with CCS updates (46)
Code change from other sources (50)
Refusal (65)

Total Response Rate
In contrast to the Usable Response Rate, which represents the percentage of surveyed units with
usable responses, the Total Response Rate represents the percentage of surveyed solicited units
with responses, without consideration for usability or quality of the response.
The numerator includes all reporting units with these usable or unusable ARS Response Codes:
• Updated but has CCS I-error (30)
• Not reviewed - Pending (31)
• Centrally Collected Data (32)
• Reviewed, no CCS changes (41)
• Code is correct, employer misunderstood the industry description (42)
• Clean with CCS updates (46)
• Code change from other sources (50)
• Post Office Return (63)
• Out of Business (64)
• Refusal (65)
The denominator consists of all reporting units with the following ARS Response Codes:
• Included in the Refile (00)
• Accounts selected for QCEW Research Panel 1 (01)
• Accounts selected for QCEW Research Panel 2 (02)
• Accounts selected for QCEW Research Panel 3 (03)
• Accounts selected for QCEW Research Panel 4 (04)
• Updated, but has a CCS I-error (30)
• Not reviewed - Pending (31)
• Centrally Collected Data (32)
• Reviewed, no CCS changes (41)
• Code is correct, but employer misunderstood the industry description (42)
• Clean record with CCS updates (46)
• Code change from other sources (50)
• Post Office Return (63)
• Out of Business (64)
• Refusal (65)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Annual Refiling Survey

Page 6-22

6.10 State ARS Responsibilities
The states play an important role in the completion of the Annual Refiling Survey. States are
responsible for reviewing and loading the CARS and NVM files sent from the national office.
States should resolve possible code changes sent on the CARS and NVM files (establishments
with a response code 31). Address changes included with the CARS and NVM files should also
be reviewed and loaded or entered into the state system. State review of the CARS and NVM
files includes adding those new establishments submitted on the files to their state system. States
should monitor response rates and follow-up with non-respondents to confirm their information.
Finally, states should work with the regional office with the review of large establishments with
code changes.
From time to time states will be contacted by respondents to troubleshoot problems with the
ARS Web system. FAQs for the ARS Web system can be found on StateWeb. Sometimes states
will find the best solution is to take the ARS information directly from the respondent. Any
questions that they are unable to answer should be directed to [email protected].

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-1

Chapter 7 – Collecting and Loading the Quarterly
Data
State data come from employers primarily from the Quarterly Contributions Reports (QCR).
QCR data are placed on the Unemployment Insurance (UI) tax file, and are then extracted to the
state system. Other methods of QCEW data collection include Multiple Worksite Reports
(MWRs), which collect data from multi-establishment employers, and Reports of Federal
Employment and Wages (RFEWs), which collect data for Federal installations. Some data are
delinquent or missing initially, so States follow up to obtain as much of these data as possible
and then impute (estimate) the rest.
The overview of quarterly processing activities conducted by the state is covered in section 1.5
and the State options for the processing sequence is covered in Section 12.1. This chapter covers
the Quarterly Contributions Report data, extracting data from UI, and loading MWR and RFEW
data. Topics include the types of information that should be extracted, the number and timing of
extracts, and MWR issues.
------------------------- Contents of Chapter 7 ------------------------7.1 Data from the Quarterly Contributions Report
7.1.1 Missing Data and Delinquent Accounts
7.2 Extracting Data to Match QCEW Definitions
7.2.1 Timing and Frequency Issues
7.2.2 Activity and Coverage Information
7.2.3 Information for Inactive Employers
7.2.4 Classification Codes
7.2.5 Date Fields
7.2.6 Ownership Transactions: Predecessors, Successors, and Mergers
7.2.7 Orphans and other Multi-establishment Situations
7.3 Loading Data for Multi-unit Employers and Federal Installations
7.3.1 Edits for Multi-Unit Employers
7.3.2 Resolution of Discrepancies
7.3.3 Review of Federal Installation Reports

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-2

7.1 Data from the Quarterly Contributions Report
Quarterly Contributions Reports (QCRs) are due to state UI tax departments one month after the
end of the quarter. Employers submit these tax reports in various formats: electronic or on-line
reporting is available in all states and is mandatory in many states for large firms. UI tax
departments may also accept paper reports. Upon receipt in the UI Tax department, hardcopy
reports are keypunched or scanned into the tax system. The data is available on a flow basis to
the state QCEW unit which extracts the tax system information into their standard state QCEW
production system.
The UI Tax department does little or no editing of contributions report data before the state
QCEW unit extracts them. Employer reporting errors are present in the data extracted from the
UI tax system. The comprehensive edits in the standard QCEW state systems, perform a critical
function in identifying these errors for resolution by the state QCEW staff. Chapters 9 and 10
discuss editing in detail.

7.1.1 Missing Data and Delinquent Accounts
In addition to errors present in reported data, missing and delinquent data must also be addressed
by the state. An employer is referred to as delinquent when no report is received. An employer
has missing data when a report is received, but is missing critical data items, most commonly the
monthly employment figures. The standard state QCEW systems identify fields with missing
data, so state analysts are able to distinguish them from reported data fields.
Notices must be sent to delinquent and missing data employers. In most states, the UI Tax
department will automatically send follow-up notices to delinquent employers. However, some
UI tax departments are unlikely to follow up with those reporters who have missing data,
particularly when it is employment data that is missing. In these circumstances, the state QCEW
unit must follow up and generate the missing data notices. Delinquency and missing data notices
are sent to employers regardless of their size. Send the notices as soon as possible after the due
date or receipt of the incomplete report for the best chance for a timely response. Such follow up
is critical to the overall quality of the state’s QCEW data. Missing and delinquent data follow up
minimizes the number of imputations generated by the state system and included on the EQUI
deliverable.
All costs associated with the follow up of missing and delinquent data from quarterly
contributions reports are the responsibility of the UI Tax department. If the State QCEW unit
takes the responsibility for collecting missing data, they should make arrangements to be
reimbursed by the UI Tax department. Costs include staff time, printing and processing of
notices, and postage. Specific guidance may be found on StateWeb.
The QCEW program must assume the cost of following up for missing and delinquent data from
MWR and RFEW forms.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-3

7.2 Extracting Data to Match QCEW Definitions
Every state uses a standard QCEW state processing system and is expected to work from
standard data element definitions (see Appendix B). However, the UI tax file and other data
sources vary from state to state. Each state develops its own extract programs to provide the
input data for its QCEW system. See StateWeb for the latest guidance on writing a new UI
extract.
This section outlines the issues related to extracts. Consult your regional office if you have any
questions about changing or improving your state's extract programs.
A generic “tax file” is usually referred to as the primary source for the extract. When reviewing
UI data sources, states must identify specific files and options required to build the QCEW
extract. File formats must be obtained and reviewed, definitions assessed, and programs
rewritten to extract data for all required records and all required and optional fields, as
appropriate.
Most required data are on the tax file. In some states, however, quarterly contributions data are
separate from administrative or master file information. In these cases, information about
ownership transactions, addresses, contacts, and liability status are on a file apart from the
employment and wage data. In rare cases, employment is not added to the file with wages and
must be extracted separately. Thus, in some states, extracts will have to access multiple tax files
or databases to retrieve all required QCEW Data Elements.
If a state transaction file is used, identify which records/data elements are included. Consider the
following issues:
•
•

Is this a data entry file of new information and changes waiting to be loaded to the tax file
or is it similar to an audit trail of changes already made to the tax file?
Are multiple entries included for a single record?
o If so, can they be processed in sequence to ensure that more recent information is
not overlaid with older data?

In some cases, data are available from multiple sources. For instance, data may reside on a
transaction file until the data are loaded to the tax file, or remain on the transaction file even after
the data are loaded. Search the transaction file and verify that it contains the appropriate
information; otherwise search the tax file. Due to their size, tax files are usually more difficult to
search, but they often have more fields and more information than a transaction file. If the state
is considering extracting from transaction files, ensure that all appropriate transactions are
included. Transaction files may be more accessible but may not use any internal tax system edits
or processing that would benefit the QCEW staff.
Some states maintain files for selected types of records (e.g., pending legal action, set up but not
active, pending possible awarding of a business contract, receiverships to close out accounts).

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-4

Each of these types of records must be examined, based on state law, to determine if the records
should be extracted and included in the state system.

7.2.1 Timing and Frequency Issues
The cooperative agreement details minimum data extracts for each production quarter. States
must extract all current quarter data at least twice each quarter. Additionally, at least one
extract must include prior quarter data received since the previous extract. Note that the
prior quarter is defined as the quarter immediately preceding the current reference quarter.
These extracts include all data for the current quarter, including any non-quarterly or quarterly
fields that may have changed. Some states extract several times a quarter and for several
quarters at a time.
Each state should work with the regional office to optimize when these extracts are run. The
data source may influence the timing and the cost may influence the frequency.
If transaction files are used, it may be easier to manage the workload by loading and processing
the transaction files more frequently, resulting in several smaller listings. Many states may find
that an initial extract from the tax and other source files followed by succeeding extracts from
transaction files provides a more efficient approach; however, this also requires additional
programming.
Since current and prior data are extracted multiple times, reported data will replace estimates for
many active records. It is important to remember that system edits need to be re-run with every
subsequent extract.
A question to consider when programming extracts is whether previously extracted data can be
distinguished from data which have not been extracted or were not available at the time of the
last extract. Since at least three extracts are required for any given quarter, this means that at
least three passes will be made to search for delinquent data. A few States have a field on the tax
file to identify extracted data.
If the same data are extracted more than once, how are the data processed? For instance, if
corrections are included in a subsequent extract, the updated information should be loaded to the
state system and edited. On the other hand, if the data are re-extracted without change, these
data should not replace data already on the state system. In cases where state QCEW staff may
have already manually corrected the data, a new extract should not overlay the corrected data.
Complete Extracts – While covered records on state tax files are included in the extracts, some
non-covered records on the source files may also be included; these non-covered records should
be identified on the EQUI file. Activity Status and Type of Coverage are discussed further
below and in Appendix B, Data Element Definitions.
Other issues to consider when designing extracts are:

September 30, 2019

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-5

Which employers are covered?
Which record types are included?
Does the state system include all required records?
What record type may be missing?
How is an active account defined?
When is an account determined to be inactive?
How many consecutive quarters can a company have zero filled fields?
Does the state tax file include pending accounts?
How are pending accounts defined?
How is missing employment identified?
What are the procedures to solicit missing employment?
How are delinquent accounts identified?
What procedures are used to obtain information on delinquent accounts?
How are zero reporters distinguished from non-reporters on the tax file?
When and how are retroactive accounts added to the tax file?
How can replacement data be identified on the tax file?
When are replacement data extracted?
Does the tax system allow the employer to provide more than one report for the account that
must then be aggregated to generate a complete report? How are these augmented data
reports processed?
Does the state allow for multi-establishment identification, and if so, how?
When and how are predecessor and successor accounts identified on the state tax file?
How are mergers identified on the tax file?
How are partial transfers handled on the tax file?
Are there any imputed (non-reported) employment or wages on the tax file? How are these
identified?

Coverage –If state UI law considers an account covered, the record must be included on the state
extract. (For purposes of the QCEW program, “covered” refers to UI-covered or UCFEcovered.) Some states include non-covered data on the tax files. Each state has specific
coverage requirements, and some states allow businesses in non-covered industries to opt-in to
coverage. (See Type of Coverage in Appendix B, Data Elements.)
Only covered accounts are required in the QCEW program; however, states may opt to include
non-covered accounts as well. If they choose to include them, the non-covered record must be
clearly marked by using the appropriate Type of Coverage code.
Another important consideration related to coverage is the type of coverage and data maintained
on the source files. If the state uses the tax file or source files as a multi- purpose file where data
are maintained on UI taxes, personal income taxes, and other state taxes, it may be difficult to
distinguish which records are only covered and active under the unemployment compensation
laws.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-6

Record Types – States must identify the different types of record codes included on the tax file
or other source files to determine if a record should be extracted. These codes may include the
following: activity status, pending codes, liability codes, reporting codes, organization types,
transfer codes, data source codes, payment or billing codes, mail codes, forms codes, business
activity status, and receipt dates.
There are limitations to the codes that may result in omitting records that are needed, or
extracting records that should have been excluded. For instance, if a receipt date is used, only
records with reported data might be extracted (i.e. delinquent accounts which should have been
included would be excluded). In this case, delinquent reports would only be included if a QCR
was eventually received for at least one of the quarters extracted. If the account was never
received in time to include on an extract, it would never be imputed and never appear on the file.
The size of the unit would not matter. A large unit with several thousand employees could just
as easily be missed as a unit with only a few people.
Non-quarterly Data – Non-quarterly data fields are those fields that will only appear once on
the state system although they should be updated with changes each quarter, as appropriate.
Most of these fields are frequently referred to as administrative or address information. These
fields include UI Account Number, Reporting Unit Number, names, addresses, initial liability
date and other related date fields. The UI Account Number and Reporting Unit Number are the
SESA ID or record key and cannot be modified.
Quarterly data fields, on the other hand, are fields that are filled every quarter. They include not
only the economic data such as employment or total wages but also industry and geographic
codes, type of coverage and activity status (described below).

7.2.2 Activity and Coverage Information
The information obtained from the Status Code, Tax Rates, and Type of Coverage is required to
process each record.
Status Code – The status codes in the standard state QCEW systems are limited to three codes:
active (1), inactive (2), or pending (9). The BLS system also uses code 3 for a previously
submitted record that is no longer submitted and is presumed inactive.
It is possible that an “activity status” on UI files is used for a variety of situations, and a different
code actually identifies records that are active, inactive, or pending.
For example, some states use status codes for an employer that owes money for delinquent UI
taxes or one that has a legal action taken against it by the state. Several states use status codes to
distinguish types of reporting patterns (e.g., seasonal reporter, zero reporter, special contractor,
and special events). Others have an array of codes for types of inactivity or presumed inactivity.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-7

QCEW considers a unit inactive if the business no longer has employees or pays wages. Closely
examine each UI status code to determine if the record is to be included or excluded in the
extract. Use definitions in Appendix B to map the state-specific codes to the ones used in the
standard QCEW systems.
Type of Coverage and Tax Rates – Coverage and rating information are used in imputing,
prorating, editing, and data submittals. The Type of Coverage code was expanded to distinguish
between accounts with employee contributions and those with only employer payments. In
addition, Federal government has a unique code, thus eliminating the need to use either the
ownership code or combination of type of coverage and ownership to identify strictly Federal
government data or strictly contributory accounts. These codes may match the standard QCEW
system codes.
Some states maintain special records on separate files, such as phantom, suspense, or pending
accounts. Each state may define these same types of records with a different name. For
instance, a pending record in one state may be non-covered pending meeting a wage threshold.
A pending record in another state may be active, but one in which the state has taken legal action
for nonpayment of taxes that were assessed using the employer’s tax rate.
The tax rate is the rate assigned to the employer based on an industry, flat rate structure, new
employer designation, or experience-rating. This rate excludes any excise taxes, surcharge
levels, or other amounts resulting in taxes that are not added to the unemployment insurance trust
fund. Any employee tax rate must be added to the lookup file and will be submitted on the
EQUI header record (described in Appendix K). In states collecting employee contributions, a
single employee tax rate is used for all applicable accounts.

7.2.3 Information for Inactive Employers
The Employment and Training Administration (ETA) requires that a unit not currently reporting
employment or paying wages subject to the State’s unemployment compensation law, or paying
no wages during the eight calendar quarters immediately preceding the current quarter be
terminated, administratively inactivated, or granted permission to suspend filing Quarterly
Contributions Reports (excluding seasonal accounts).
For EQUI data processing purposes, active accounts carry employment and wages. Delinquent
accounts presumed still active can have the employment and wages imputed. However, UI may
retain the active status of many accounts where there is no real expectation of future Quarterly
Contribution Reports. In these cases, QCEW staffs should use system options to inactivate these
accounts and prevent eternal processing of accounts with no employment and wages.
Here are some examples where UI does not necessarily apply an End of Liability Date, but
QCEW staffs would be permitted to do so:
• Zero reporters that do not want to lose their account and tax rate because they may operate in
the state again.

September 30, 2019

•
•
•
•
•
•

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-8

Units that have stopped reporting but have not provided out-of-business dates or notifications
to UI.
Out-of-business accounts which still have financial debts or obligations to the state.
Employers that stopped reporting but have not been audited or investigated by UI.
Units that sold their operations but never notified UI.
Units that purchased new operations and obtained new account numbers without transferring
the previous owner’s history or activities.
Accounts that were inadvertently not processed according to the ETA requirements.

In these situations, use the date that the company ceased to have employment and wages as the
“End of Liability Date”.
If QCEW systems inactivate these accounts by applying End of Liability (EOL) dates, accounts
can be reactivated in future quarters if any other activity occurs on the account, such as revived
employment and wage reporting or the provision of an EOL date by UI. QCEW inactivation
prevents any erroneous employment or wages that may be estimated by the ongoing EQUI
processing of an account with no activity.
Accounts known to be inactive should only be extracted if new information is obtained (e.g., a
previously unknown end of liability date is added to the file). Delinquent records still considered
active on the tax file should be extracted; however, the features of the standard QCEW State
system must be used to process the record. States should use the EXPO/WIN features that will
inactivate a record on the micro file if it has not been reported or imputed for several quarters. In
these cases, the status code is changed to two (inactive), and even though the record continues to
be extracted from the tax file, it requires no processing by the State and is not submitted on the
EQUI.
If this option is not used, the system will assign unique employment and wage indicators of “N”
to the file to indicate that the record has not been reported or imputed for several quarters. These
records will be processed through the system and submitted to BLS-Washington.
If an inactive account in UI is extracted, there must be a corresponding inactivation in QCEW.
QCEW inactivates records by pulling the correct End of Liability date from the tax file. The tax
file has termination, end of liability, out-of-business, closing, closed, and inactive dates. If the
end of liability date on the tax file identifies when the account no longer sustained a legal or
financial obligation, then this date is not the actual end of liability date for purposes of the
QCEW program. For QCEW purposes, the correct End of Liability date is always the one that
matches the last date the account had employment and wages. Review each date in the tax file to
determine which most closely matches the required definition.
Other types of records, such as retroactive accounts, pending accounts, or delinquent accounts
must be reviewed to determine if they are active accounts. For instance, a retroactive account
may be set up for all quarters that it was active but could exclude data for quarters for which it
did not meet unemployment insurance definitions as a subject employer.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-9

7.2.4 Classification Codes
Classification codes are fields that describe the ownership, industry, or location of the record.
These codes are treated as quarterly records rather than administrative, and coding standards for
most of these are provided in Chapter 2. Many of these fields are initially extracted from the tax
or source files and subsequently maintained through the QCEW systems. Fields include:
•
•
•
•
•

NAICS Code
Ownership Code
County Code/Township Code
Township Extension (a.k.a. Zone Code)
Organization Type Indicator

Note: Many UI tax departments may change codes they deem incorrect. The QCEW program
does not allow for mid-year non-economic code changes. These changes must be held until first
quarter and assigned to the Code Change Supplement using the data elements discussed in
Chapter 11. State QCEW staff must review and validate any such changes prior to incorporating
them.
NAICS and Ownership Codes – QCEW staff assign or validate these codes when the account
is set up. This information can be extracted for new units or for reactivated units if available, but
must not overwrite information on existing QCEW state system accounts because these fields are
maintained independently as part of the QCEW program and Annual Refiling Survey (ARS)
processing requirements.
Almost all states have a process of providing a file with NAICS codes for all active accounts
back to UI on an annual basis.
Location Codes – County information is required for all states and corresponds to an employer’s
physical location address. When new accounts are initially set up on the tax file, county codes
are assigned as well as ownership and industry codes. The county code must be extracted and
updated as part of routine editing, refiling, and other processing functions.
Some states use township codes (and township extension/zone code, where applicable) or other
sub-county location designators on their tax files. If the data are maintained on the source file, it
may be useful to extract them. It might be helpful to ask how the sub-county data are updated.
If they are not maintained on the source file or in the state system, do not use them. New Jersey
and the New England states are required to maintain township codes.
Organization Type Code: Several state tax systems collect codes from the Status
Determination Forms of private sector establishments concerning their organizational structure.
This information is used for tax purposes. These codes identify different types of partnerships,
associations, non-profit organizations, trusts, estates, companies, corporations, sub-divisions, and
joint ventures.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-10

In some cases, the extract will convert the codes from UI Tax database to the standardized codes
listed below. Blank-fill for Federal, State, and Local government records (Ownership codes of 1,
2, and 3). In states where Organization Codes are not used, leave the field blank.
Valid Values:

I = Individual
P = Partnership
C = Corporation
O = Other

When assigning this indicator to a master record in a multi-unit account, the state system copies
the indicator from the master record to the subunit records in the same UI account.

7.2.5 Date Fields
The QCEW state system includes fields for five dates:
• Initial Date of Liability
• End of Liability Date
• Setup Date
• Reactivation Date
• Predecessor/Successor Transfer Date
The state must review all possible dates on the UI tax file or other source files to determine
which dates meet the QCEW definitions as described in Appendix B and simplified above.
There may be instances where additional dates have been added to the source files when that date
already existed under a different name.
When appropriate dates are not extracted, the standard state processing systems can be used to
assign them, or QCEW staff can manually assign them. Because subunits are rarely found on
state UI tax files, the dates for these accounts must be assigned by state staff, BLS electronic
MWR collection systems (the EDIC and MWR Web – both covered in Chapter 4), or state
processing systems.

7.2.6 Ownership Transactions: Predecessors, Successors, and
Mergers
In many states, the QCEW definition of a predecessor/successor situation does not match the
legal UI definition of an ownership transaction. The QCEW program defines a
predecessor/successor relationship as one where the successor performs similar operations to the
predecessor using some or all of the predecessor’s employees. These operations are frequently
but not necessarily performed at the same location as the predecessor.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-11

In some states, UI considers the buyer a successor account only if legal and financial liabilities
and status are transferred (i.e., debts, trust fund balances, and experience-rating). In other cases,
the account is transferred at the option of the buyer and seller.
Caution: While predecessor or successor UI account numbers are usually present on the UI tax
file (or other source files), the corresponding predecessor or successor reporting unit numbers are
typically not available. Whenever this occurs, the predecessor/successor RUNs must be set to
zero initially, during the extract. Later, after researching the transactions, QCEW staff can enter
specific predecessor or successor RUNs as needed. In some cases involving changes to the
reporting level, QCEW staff may set predecessor/successor RUNs to all nines (99999). There
are even situations in which staff may set Predecessor or Successor UI numbers to all nines.
This is discussed in detail in Section 5.2.

7.2.7 Orphans and other Multi-establishment Situations
Most States do not store individual multi-establishment worksites on the tax file. For those that
do, the RUN assignment may not be the same as required for the QCEW program. In these cases
where a multi-establishment employer sells or closes all but one worksite, the remaining UI
worksites must be dropped, and the data from the QCR must be reported using RUN “00000.”
Any orphaned or single worksites with the UI and a RUN greater than zero will fail the micro
edits because this does not follow QCEW reporting requirements.
Locking Fields to Prevent Changes
Each standard QCEW system has procedures for locking selected fields. State staff must lock
fields when the State UI tax system does not follow the same guidelines as those required by
BLS or when QCEW has the more current data. For example, states may lock updated physical
location addresses in order to prevent them from being overwritten. Each system also has a
mechanism to compare extracted data against locked data to manually determine if changes are
needed. Review the State system documentation for specific details.
Unlocked Quarters on State and BLS Files
For those quarters that are unlocked in the BLS national system, as described in Section 12.2.3,
all state system corrections impacting employment and wage data must be included on the EQUI
and submitted to BLS.
Prior and current quarters must be extracted from the tax file or other sources. Previous quarters
can be extracted, but this is rarely required by BLS. Data can be extracted from UI for any and
all quarters in history, but BLS will only accept and edit data for open quarters. New
information (information since the last extract) is accepted for active accounts, retroactive or
reactivated accounts, reported data for delinquent accounts, and corrections. These changes must

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-12

be made in the state QCEW system so they will be included on the EQUI file that is forwarded to
BLS.
Retention of Deleted Records
Deleted data are held in the system in case there is a need to restore the information at a later
date. These records are marked as deletes and their status codes are changed to “2” (inactive) for
any unlocked quarters.
The EXPO state system retains deleted records until each of the last six quarters and the current
quarter has a status code of “2”. Once this time period is met, the deleted records are rolled off
the file. The WIN State system will retain the record indefinitely or until older years are
removed.

7.3 Loading Data for Multi-unit Employers and Federal
Installations
State staff are responsible for entering data from MWRs, since this information is not normally
available on the UI tax file. As explained in Chapter 3, the MWR provides disaggregated data
for the individual worksites included in the total for the UI account (the total data for the
employer, as reported on the Quarterly Contributions Report).
Increasingly, MWR data are collected/processed by the EDIC and MWR Web and provided to
the states electronically, as described in Chapter 4. The standard state processing systems
provide the means to directly load MWR data files provided by the EDIC and MWR Web to the
state systems. When the MWR data files contain new reporting units (new worksites) for an
existing multi-unit account, the state processing systems will create the appropriate new records
on the state system, including new RUN number assignments.

7.3.1 Edits for Multi-Unit Employers
The standard state systems add the employment and wage data reported on the Multiple Worksite
Report, and compare the totals obtained to those on the contributions report. If there is a
discrepancy between these sets of data, the system assigns edit flags as described in Section 9.4.
The QCEW staff will determine whether the difference makes up a significant proportion of the
total for the employer or for any of the industry and county combinations where these data will
be reported. Other Level 8 edits verify the proper reporting configuration for multi-unit
employers, including Multi-Establishment Employer Indicator (MEEI) codes, Reporting Unit

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-13

Numbers, and so on (as described in Chapter 3). As mentioned in the previous section, single or
"orphaned" worksite records in a multi-unit account will fail these edits.

7.3.2 Resolution of Discrepancies
If further investigation is warranted, follow these procedures to resolve the discrepancy.
First, check to make sure that data for each establishment listed on the MWR have been included
on the state system and have been keypunched accurately. If the keypunching is verified as
complete and accurate, then consult other sources until the discrepancy is resolved.
One source of information is the employer. Sometimes different offices within the firm
complete the MWR and the QCR. Contacting these offices may resolve the discrepancy.
This does not apply to data received from the EDIC. Individual state offices must not contact
employers that report MWR data to the EDIC, but submit questions to the EDI Center instead.
Note that the prohibition on contacting EDIC MWR reporters covers only MWR-related
questions/issues, states can contact these employers for other reasons (to obtain correct NAICS
code information, for example).
Another source of information available in most states is the wage record for the employer. This
document or file lists the total wages for each person employed by the firm during the quarter.
The wage record is only useful for this purpose if the establishment where the employee works is
identified. In the event that the wage records can be used to derive establishment totals, compare
these totals with the data on the Multiple Worksite Report. One limitation of the wage record is
that it includes information for all employees of the firm for the quarter, not delineated by month,
and not just those employed during the pay period that includes the 12th of the month.
Other possible sources of information on multi-unit employers are reports describing work
stoppages or layoffs. Large company events tend to make the local news.
After discrepancies between the data reported on the Multiple Worksite Report and on the
contribution report have been resolved, taxable wages and contributions must then be imputed.
(See Chapter 8 for procedures for imputing taxable wages and contributions.)

7.3.3 Review of Federal Installation Reports
Employment and wage reports from Federal installations must be screened for completeness and
entered onto the state system for editing, similar to the same way UI data are edited. However,
Federal data are exempted from some edit conditions (for example, the checks for missing
physical location address). MWR and RFEW data received from Federal installations must be
processed in the same manner as other MWRs described at the beginning of this section. Note

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Collecting and Loading the Quarterly Data

Page 7-14

that some Federal data are provided electronically by the EDIC as described in Section 4.6.)
Reporting requirements for Federal installations are stated in Section 3.6.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

September 2019

Page 8-1

Chapter 8 – Imputation of Missing and
Delinquent Data
When employers do not provide complete and timely data, imputed (estimated) data are used
instead. This chapter describes in general terms how the standard state processing systems
(EXPO-202 and WIN-202) impute economic data that are missing or delinquent. The formulae
used by the state systems are described in detail in Appendix J. Not all formulae included in
Appendix J are used by both systems. Even though imputed data are computer-generated, state
staff should edit and review the imputations and revise them where appropriate. When reported
data become available, the state should replace the imputed data on their file.
------------- Contents of Chapter 8 ------------8.1 Overview of Data Imputations
8.1.1 Follow-ups of Incomplete and Delinquent Reports
8.1.2 Types of Imputations
8.2 Determining How Long to Impute Delinquent Records
8.3 Imputing Missing and Delinquent Data
8.3.1 Guidelines by Data Element
8.3.2 Multi Establishment Reporters
8.4 State System Options
8.5 Imputation Codes and Indicator Flags
8.6 Reviewing Imputations
8.7 Replacing Imputations with Live Data

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-2

8.1 Overview of Data Imputations
Within five days of the end of each quarter, employers or their reporting agents are contacted to
report Quarterly Contributions Reports (QCRs), Multiple Worksite Reports (MWRs), and
Reports of Federal Employment and Wages (RFEWs) data. For the purposes of this chapter, any
reference to MWR should include not only the collection form but also MWR Web collection,
MWR Print Contractor collection, and EDI collection. The completed reports are due 30 days
after the end of the quarter. Data from submitted QCRs are entered onto the Unemployment
Insurance (UI) tax file and subsequently extracted and loaded to the state system. Typically,
state staff loads or enters data from the MWR and RFEW forms directly to their state system.
Some multi-unit employers report their MWR data to the Electronic Data Interchange Center
(EDIC) rather than to the state, as described in Chapter 4 – Multiple Worksite Central Reporting.
The EDIC provides files of these MWR data to the states, and the files should be loaded directly
to state system.
Sometimes data are missing (the employer omitted some data elements) or delinquent (the form
is not received in time to use for file deliverables or to meet program needs). Missing and
delinquent data must be imputed. Imputation is a process that enables the states to use estimated
data when the actual data are unavailable. It is based on the assumption that historical trends are
still valid and can be used to effectively estimate current data.

8.1.1 Follow-ups of Incomplete and Delinquent Reports
After information from the submitted QCRs is entered, the accounts should be screened
mechanically for missing data. It is important that the UI tax file systems be able to distinguish
between zero-reported data and missing data. This may be accomplished by indicator codes,
date fields, or other mechanisms. If it is not possible to make this distinction, notices may be
sent to accounts that already reported zeroes, or data may be imputed for UI accounts that
correctly have zero-filled data fields.
Request notices for missing data should be computer-generated for all QCRs with missing data.
The state should send these requests to every employer who submitted an incomplete quarterly
report, regardless of size or the amount of reported wages. The state should send the requests as
soon as possible after receiving the incomplete reports. This allows the employer’s time to
submit amended data. Once the state receives the missing data, these data should be entered to
the UI tax file and extracted to the QCEW state system.
All costs associated with the collection of data missing from employers' Quarterly Contributions
Reports are the responsibility of the UI tax unit. If the research unit is responsible for collecting
these missing data, they should arrange to be reimbursed by the UI tax unit. Costs include staff
time, printing, processing of notices, and postage.
Most data for Federal government installations, as well as some reports for multi-establishments,
are collected through the EDIC. The EDIC will resolve any reporting problems with accounts
they handle, as described in Section 4.4. The state research unit is responsible for obtaining any

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-3

missing data from MWRs and RFEWs that are not collected by the EDIC. The research unit
must assume the cost of missing data follow-ups on incomplete MWRs, as well as those rare
cases of missing data follow-ups for RFEWs.
Both the EXPO and WIN-202 state systems use indicator flags to distinguish between reported
and missing data. The indicator flags are listed in the Indicator Flag table at the end of Appendix
J – Imputation Formulas.
About six weeks after the end of the quarter, the UI tax file should be scanned for delinquent
accounts. The UI tax unit is responsible for determining which UI accounts are active and
delinquent, while the QCEW unit is responsible for determining if MWRs and RFEWs are
delinquent. The UI tax unit should generate and mail delinquency notices for all delinquent
QCRs. The research unit is responsible for collecting data for delinquent MWRs and RFEWs.
The EDIC is responsible for obtaining delinquent reports from those accounts that it handles. A
second notice, if necessary, should be sent eight to ten weeks after the end of the quarter.
In addition, the research unit should monitor the delinquency of large QCR respondents. If the
UI tax unit does not successfully follow-up for missing data or missing QCRs on a consistent
basis, the research unit should initiate follow-up with the non-respondent. A telephone call can
determine if an employer is no longer an active business or has moved. For large employers who
are still active, the research unit can collect missing data by phone.
As with the collection of missing data, all costs associated with the follow-up for delinquent
employer Quarterly Contribution Reports are the responsibility of the UI tax unit. The research
unit must assume the cost of follow-up for delinquent Multiple Worksite Reports and delinquent
Reports of Federal Employment and Wages. Costs include staff time, printing, processing of
notices, and postage.

8.1.2 Types of Imputations
The standardized state systems generate micro level imputations for the following situations:
•

A delinquent account that last reported within a parameter-controlled number of quarters
(typically two).

•

A delinquent MWR (represented by the subunit records) when the account’s QCR
(represented by the master record) was reported.

•

A delinquent QCR and MWR when the account’s last reported QCR was within the last two
quarters.

•

A delinquent QCR when the account’s MWR was reported.

•

An MWR Web respondent starts the report but does not finish, leaving at least one worksite
blank.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-4

•

Missing current quarter employment when current quarter Total Wages were reported.

•

Missing at least one month of employment when at least one is reported.

•

Missing current quarter Taxable Wages or Contributions when current quarter Total Wages
were reported.

•

QCR and MWR data that were already imputed when new data were received that replaced
the missing data for one or the other

The systems will not impute for the current quarter in the following cases:
•

An inactive account.

•

An account that did not report for a parameter-controlled number of quarters (typically two).

•

An imputation that is not allowed by the program parameters.

•

An account that is fully reported.

•

A subunit that does not have a matching master record.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-5

8.2 Determining How Long to Impute Delinquent Records
If a report was not submitted for the two previous quarters and a report has not been received for
the current quarter, the state system does not automatically impute an account for the current
quarter. Instead, it flags this account for review by the research unit. UI accounts which are
delinquent for two or more quarters should be contacted by the UI tax unit, if necessary, to
determine if they are still active. Only if they are still active should the research unit prepare
imputations for these accounts.
The research unit should carefully monitor nonresponse and imputation for larger employers.
Missing data for large employers may cause inaccuracies or revisions in QCEW data -- both
employment and wage data and measures coming from the LDB.
An important goal is to minimize the number of accounts for which imputations have to be
made. A number of factors can influence the number of accounts to be imputed and how long
these accounts are imputed. While many factors influence nonresponse, some of these factors
are under control of the research unit, and some are not.
The states should regularly review their operations to consider the following factors:
•

State QCR Collection Method.

•

Increased use of electronic medium to collect data

•

Use of well-designed UI forms or internet/online reporting systems with clear instructions.

•

The proper use of scanning equipment to ensure accurate data entry files.

•

Timely identification and review of predecessor/successor ownership transactions and
linkages to prevent or reduce the number of inappropriate imputations for predecessor
accounts.

•

Use of reporting penalties to discourage delinquency.

•

Use of interest charges to encourage timely payment of contributions.

•

Adjustments to tax rates in response to late or problem reporting.

Also, please remember: imputations for delinquent accounts should not be made
automatically from previous imputations for an extended period. Such a practice
compounds errors from previous quarters. However, since it may be difficult for UI tax units to
resolve delinquency problems and determine if the account is still active (or has a successor), it
may take a couple of quarters of imputations before the reporting problems are addressed. It is
also acceptable to incorporate imputations for the current quarter of one data type (e.g., Total
Wages) in imputing another missing data type (e.g., Taxable Wages) for the sake of consistency
within the quarter.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-6

Meanwhile, if a reporter submits an incomplete report, it is acceptable to impute the missing data
item(s) for that record even if the data field was not reported for the two prior quarters. Since
some data are reported, it is likely that the employer is still active. Unfortunately, some
employers tend not to report employment even though they do report wages.
Imputations should be replaced on the state system when actual data are received and edited. At
first glance, real data that are several quarters old may seem to be of limited value. However,
reported data are critical to longitudinal studies, and data replacement can be useful for future
imputations, particularly if an employer often reports on a lagged basis.
States need not extract actual data from accounts older than the BLS’s correction policy. See
Section 12.2.3 for more details on the correction policy.
When the state research unit has confirmed that an employer is still operating, an imputation is
required for inclusion in the state system and subsequent EQUI submittal, even when the
employer’s data are more than 12 weeks delinquent. Every effort should be made to collect
current QCR data from these employers if their employment level exceeds 100. After addressing
the largest delinquencies, state staff should follow up on other critical reports.
Imputation Exceptions
Exceptions are allowed in several states for domestic employers (NAICS 814110) and for some
small units where legislative changes provide for annual reporting. For employers falling under
these exceptions, state systems allow data to be imputed for three continuous quarters instead of
just two.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-7

8.3 Imputing Missing and Delinquent Data
Imputation formulae used by the standard state systems are listed in Appendix J along with
examples for each formula. For most data fields, multiple formulae exist that may be used based
on the availability of historical data or related data.
The imputations calculated from the formulae are usually reasonable, but there are numerous
situations that cannot possibly be anticipated in the mechanical imputation process. Hence, an
analyst's knowledge of the limitations of the formulae in various situations becomes essential in
reviewing the validity of the mechanically-generated data.
Large imputed records that turn out to have been reported under a different UI account
(predecessor-successor linkages) or reported for a firm that has actually gone out of business can
cause substantial inaccuracies in QCEW data. Subsequent corrections could result in significant
revisions and may also affect data coming from the Longitudinal Database. In addition,
inaccurate imputations affect other economic data series, such as the state’s CES and LAUS
benchmarking processes. To reduce the impact of erroneous imputations, states should review
all records with imputed employment levels of 100 or more. If corrections are necessary,
they should be made prior to the EQUI submittal.

8.3.1 Guidelines by Data Element
The standard formulae used by the state systems will yield inaccurate imputations when the past
employment and wage data used in the calculations represent economic aberrations. In these
cases, the standard formulae's chief assumption – that previous patterns will recur – does not
apply. Similarly, the standard formulae may miss critical current economic changes that differ
from historical patterns in the data. In still other cases, it is possible that there is not enough
historical data to use the formulae. Alternate formulae are listed in Appendix J to compensate
for inadequate historical data.
The standard formulae are based on the assumptions and explanations mentioned above. This
section includes suggestions and exceptions that analysts should consider when reviewing the
imputed data for monthly employment, Total Wages, Taxable Wages, and Contributions Due.
Guidelines for Monthly Employment
1. The formulae in Appendix J are most effective for large accounts (for example, accounts
with Average Monthly Employment, or AME, of 50 or more) with five quarters of previous
data.
The over-the-year change formulae are clearly inappropriate if five quarters of data are not
present. For these cases, copy the third month of the previous quarter to all three months of
the current quarter. If any month of the current quarter is reported, review the record to
determine if the remaining months should be zero-filled or imputed.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-8

2. In cases where some but not all months are reported, imputations should be calculated from
the most recently reported month. For instance, if the first month employment for the current
quarter (M1c) is three times the third month employment of the prior quarter (M3p), and the
data for M2c and M3c are missing, then the report may have been filled out incorrectly by
the employer. It is quite possible that the respondent took the total of all three months in a
quarter and placed the sum in M1c. An analyst should not automatically impute M2c and
M3c from M1c in this case because the initial error will be compounded. The analyst should
use both judgment and alternative sources of information to assess the validity of the reported
value of M1c. However, if M1c is the only data item in the current quarter and it appears
reasonable in light of past trends, then it may be reasonable to project M1c for the second and
third months as well. On the other hand, it may be reasonable to leave the last two months
zero-filled if it appears the unit is being inactivated. Since the EXPO and WIN systems will
attempt to impute these data, those imputations that flag on edit output should be reviewed
for their reasonableness and consistency with historical data or other data within the countyownership-industry macro cell.
3. Aberrations in monthly employment could stem from a variety of unusual economic factors
(e.g., supply bottlenecks, seasonal demand, strikes, etc.). States may want to consult
comments from prior quarters to help explain current employment patterns. Phenomena such
as adverse weather conditions or fire damage could explain the existence of incomplete and
delinquent reports.
4. Delinquent accounts that are known to be both active and seasonal should be imputed using
seasonal formulae. If these do not work, then it is possible that the historical data no longer
represent the current seasonal patterns of other units within the same cell.
5. When Total Wages are reported and employment levels are missing, an analyst can use the
reported Total Wages data to assess the reasonableness of the employment imputation(s).
6. Review employment imputations for large employers carefully. Verify that the employer is
still operating and attempt to collect the data by phone. Validate that the account is not part
of an undetected predecessor/successor ownership transfer.
Guidelines for Total Wages
1. In the absence of five quarters of back data, copy the previous quarter Total Wages to the
current quarter.
If the prior quarter of an active non-seasonal account has been imputed, and if efforts have
been made to contact the firm for Total Wage information for current and previous quarters
without success, then repeat the most recent reported Total Wage value for current Total
Wages.
2. Skewed historical Total Wages can result in distorted imputations. Relevant examples
include changes in labor costs (e.g., a negotiated wage increase) that took place in a prior

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-9

quarter or year, but are not scheduled for the current quarter. Unscheduled bonuses or raises
could also distort a Total Wage imputation.
3. In reviewing Total Wage imputations when current quarter employment data exist, evaluate
the validity of the imputation by comparing the relationship between Total Wages and
reported current employment levels. If a consistent relationship between Total Wages and
employment levels has been established in previous quarters, then this relationship should be
maintained by imputations for the current quarter.
4. Imputed Total Wages for large employers should be carefully reviewed.
Guidelines for Taxable Wages
1. The ratio between Taxable and Total Wages in the current quarter will presumably equal the
ratio of the same quarter one year before. However, many factors affect Taxable Wages such
as changes in taxable wage basis, tax law changes, and employment changes. Therefore,
review Taxable Wage imputations carefully.
2. If employment and Total Wages are reported for an account while Contributions and Taxable
Wages are missing in contrast to previous quarters, then investigate the possibility that the
account has switched from non-reimbursing to reimbursing.
3. With an uncharacteristic hiring of large numbers of employees late in a prior year (e.g., the
third or fourth quarter), the Taxable Wage to Total Wage (TAXW/TOTW) ratio becomes
higher than usual. This distorts the imputation of the TAXW/TOTW ratio for the current
quarter and year. Taxable Wages will be higher than normal because the paid annual income
of the new employees will not have exceeded the taxable wage base.
4. The imputation for Taxable Wages should generally not exceed the Taxable Wage base times
the Average Monthly Employment for the current quarter (AMEc).
5. Taxable Wages should never exceed Total Wages in any quarter.
6. If a state changes the Taxable Wage base, the effectiveness of Taxable to Total Wage ratios
will diminish between these years. Hence, analysts may make adjustments in the
TAXW/TOTW ratios when Taxable Wage bases are different between years and manual
imputations are needed.
Guidelines for Contributions Due
Compute contributions by multiplying the Taxable Wages, whether reported or imputed, by the
account’s Tax Rate. If the account is a multi-establishment reporter, use the same Tax Rate for
all units of the account when generating contributions.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-10

8.3.2 Multi Establishment Reporters
Two reports are received each quarter for multi-establishment reporters: a QCR and an MWR
(multi worksite report). When either report is delinquent or incomplete, imputations or
prorations may be required.
The QCR (the master or “parent” summary) provides the sum of employment and wage data for
all related worksites. When the QCR is delinquent but current worksite data are available from
an MWR, MWR web, MWR Print Contract, or the EDI Center, QCR data can be derived by
simply summarizing worksite data.
Prorations
Alternatively, a current QCR may be available when the MWR, MWR web, MWR Print
Contract, or the EDI Center data are delinquent or missing critical data. In this case, the state
can derive worksite data by applying previously derived ratios to current QCR data. These
derived data are referred to as prorations.
When a QCR for a multi-unit account has been received, but the corresponding MWR, MWR
web, MWR Print Contract, or the EDI Center data are incomplete or delinquent, the state should
first contact the employer and attempt to obtain the current worksite (subunit) information. If the
data are not available for the missing worksites, the formulae provided in Appendix J are
performed by the EXPO and WIN systems to prorate detailed employment and wage data.
When part of the MWR data are reported but the rest of the rows are missing, the state systems’
attempt to apply the unaccounted balance of the master to the remainder of worksites. For
example, a multi account has five worksites but only three are reported. The sum of the three
reported worksites are summed for each employment and wage field. That sum is subtracted
from the reported or imputed master. If the remainder is still positive, the remaining two
worksites are distributed from it.
Proration Problems
When the employment and wage ratios of individual units to the master account are stable from
quarter to quarter, the proration procedure is quite reliable and MWR data can be prorated from
reported QCRs indefinitely; however, the longer these prorations continue, the less reliable the
data become.
For example, when worksites open or close, the number of units comprising the multi-unit
account will change. The distribution of employment and wages across the new firm structure
may change as well. In this case, prorations become less reliable. Particularly for large master
accounts, states should contact the respondent and obtain current subunit data when they become
aware of a significant worksite opening or closing. The state reviewer should examine subunit
prorations and attempt to obtain reported MWR data on at least an annual basis.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-11

The prorations may also become unreliable when seasonal or economic trends differ across the
subunits. In addition, seasonal industries present a special problem since the unit-to-account
ratios may be subject to seasonal change as well. EXPO allows its users to seasonally prorate
online. These prorations use the ratios of year-ago data for each worksite over the sum of all
active year-ago worksites applied to the current data to seasonally distribute the master data.
It is imperative that the state thoroughly evaluate questionable prorations and, where appropriate,
modify the results prior to EQUI transmittal.
Taxable Wages and Contributions
Taxable Wages and Contributions are not collected at the worksite level on the MWR, but
instead are derived using current data from the QCR. Similarly, the Contributions are also
distributed based on current quarter Taxable Wage ratios.
Federal Reporters
Typically, imputations for missing data from an incomplete or delinquent RFEW use the same
methodology as those used for private sector multi-establishment accounts. Since Federal
government data are not reported on QCRs, the missing master record data are imputed using the
single-establishment methodology. These imputed master record data are then distributed
amongst the multi-establishment subunits. Taxable Wages and Contributions Due for Federal
government accounts are always equal to zero.
Prorations
If both the QCR and MWR are delinquent, impute the QCR using the single unit methodology
and then prorate the data for the multi-establishment subunits. Because the prorated data are
based on an imputation, the derived worksite data are also considered imputations.
Taxable Wages and Contributions are not collected at the worksite level on the MWR, but
instead are derived using current data from the QCR. This means that when the QCR is
delinquent or does not include data for Taxable Wages and Contributions, the worksite detail
must be prorated from an imputation. The state must first impute Taxable Wages and
Contributions for the master record using the single-establishment formula. Then the state can
prorate the imputation to derive worksite imputations. Similarly, contributions can be imputed
for each unit by multiplying its Taxable Wages by the account’s tax rate.
Multi-establishment subunits whose data are generated from a reported QCR are treated
differently than those whose data are generated from an imputed QCR. Those from reported
QCRs are referred to as prorated and are not considered imputed since they are derived from
current quarter, reported data. Prorations based on imputed QCRs, however, are considered
imputations.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-12

8.4 State System Options
The EXPO User and Technical Documentation or the WIN-202 Documentation should be
referenced for details on system options for each imputation processing. Several possible
options exist when running these jobs. Depending on which system is used in the state, it may be
possible to run the following:
•

Separate jobs to sort imputed records by size and type of imputation (using indicator flags).

•

Separate jobs for multi-establishment prorations from single account imputations.

•

Separate jobs for missing employment from delinquent accounts.

•

Separate jobs for each of missing employment, multi-establishment prorations, and
delinquent accounts.

•

Separate jobs for imputations from edits or combinations of edits and imputations.

•

Online, individual record or multi-establishment family imputation.

•

Separate jobs or queries to identify imputed large establishments for detailed review.
Reviewing edit 099, Questionable Large Imputation, will also identify the large imputations
without having to run an additional query.

Imputations can be run at any time in the processing cycle once the quarters are rolled and the
reference quarter is the system’s current quarter. The earlier in the cycle that imputations are
generated, the more imputations will be generated for the state system. Since states should be
attempting to obtain missing and delinquent data, it is possible that some of the imputations will
be reviewed by analysts and later replaced with live data.
Running imputations late in the cycle allows additional time for data collection of previously
missing or delinquent accounts. Running them too late in the cycle, however, may not allow
adequate time for their proper review. States should run imputations early enough to allow
adequate review time for large employer imputations.
Imputations can also be rerun if the analyst feels that partial data may have been received that
would affect the quality of the imputations. Keep in mind that if the imputations are rerun, they
should be reviewed or checked afterwards for any significant problems or fluctuations.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-13

8.5 Imputation Codes and Indicator Flags
Each standard state system assigns an Indicator Flag to all employment and wage data items to
indicate their source. An additional code is generated and displayed for state review when
imputation or proration is attempted for a missing data field.
Imputation Report Codes
Imputation Report Codes describe either the formulae used for successful imputation, or the type
of failure the system encountered during imputation. These Imputation Report Codes are not
stored, but are displayed on the imputation reports as a useful tool for state review.
When an imputation is successfully generated, the Imputation Report Code is a three-letter alpha
abbreviation of the field (e.g., EMP for employment, TOT for Total Wages, TAX for Taxable
Wages, and CTB for Contributions) followed by a number designating the formula that was
used. For example, TOT4 is the code for Total Wages that were successfully imputed using the
fourth formula for Total Wages, TotW(cq) = TotW(pq). These codes are listed and defined at
the end of Appendix J in the table entitled Imputation Report Codes: Successful Imputation
Codes.
If the system could not generate the data, the three-position abbreviation of the data field is
followed by one alpha character indicating the last formula attempted. For example, TOTD
means that Total Wages were not imputed because of an imputation error for the master account.
The full list of these codes and their definitions appears in the table entitled Imputation Report
Codes: Imputation Failure Codes, also in Appendix J.
Imputation codes are not stored in the state system. They are only displayed for reference on the
successful imputation and failed imputation reports generated as part of the imputation runs.
Indicator Flags
In contrast to Imputation Report Codes, Indicator Flags are stored for each Monthly
Employment, Total Wage, Taxable Wage, and Contributions data field on the state system.
These indicator flags are also submitted to BLS on the EQUI file. The indicator flags are listed
and identified in the Indicator Flag table at the end of Appendix J.
As the state initializes a new quarter in their processing system, the Indicator Flag for all
collectable data fields on the state system is set to “M” (missing). As actual data arrives and are
entered via online entry, Input Micro Transaction (IMT) files, EDI load programs, or other batch
routines, the indicator flag changes from an “M” to an “R” (reported). The indicator flag can be
used to identify late reports (“L”) or data collected in response to missing data notices (“D”) if
manually entered. The IMT extract is the only extract where the extract can be designed to set
the indicators to L or D if they are known to be from late respondents or missing data notices but
this is not typically done. Note that if a particular data element was never reported, imputed,

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-14

prorated, or changed, its indicator flag will remain M – whether or not the entire account (the
QCR) is delinquent.
Indicator Flag values also indicate when data are imputed or derived through proration. These
flags are useful to monitor workload associated with nonresponse and imputation. Indicator
flags are also useful for state data collection management. They can also be used to assess data
quality -- how much of employment is reported versus imputed -- or possible areas of
improvement. For example, if the state is finding it necessary to override system-generated
imputations with manual corrections, the imputation formulae may need review and
improvement. Other codes, such as those used to identify data obtained as a result of sending
missing data notices or delinquency notices, are useful for evaluating the workload associated
with collecting late data. This may indicate that forms changes are needed, that better public
relations and education about the value of the data may be needed, or that the requirements may
need to be modified.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-15

8.6 Reviewing Imputations
Failed imputations (when the system could not successfully generate an imputation from the
programmed formulae) should be reviewed for employers of all sizes. If live data cannot be
collected and the record must be imputed, the state may have to manually create the imputation
in lieu of a system imputation.
System-generated and manually-produced imputations should be processed through micro edits
and integrated (macro) edits. This ensures that the data are reasonable and consistent with
historical data and with the data of other employers within the cell.
The state should review all records with imputed employment levels of 100 or more prior to
EQUI submittal. If corrections are necessary, they should be made prior to submitting the
EQUI. See additional information on large employers below.
During the review process, analysts should draw upon additional resources to assess the quality
of imputations. Industry patterns across the state, or more current industry data from the Current
Employment Statistics program, can be used to review the reasonableness of imputations. At the
employer/worksite level, the analyst’s familiarity with the particular account is an important
input to evaluation. Using outside sources of information -- other local indicators and media -may be helpful in arriving at more meaningful estimates.
When actual data are received, they should be reviewed and replace the mechanically-generated
estimates.
Problem Areas
Several problems can occur when imputing data. These issues are discussed below for large
employers, new units, predecessor/successor units, discontinued units, prior data with an unusual
trend or atypical seasonality, and partial imputations. Large employers are also mentioned in the
other subtopics as helpful.
Large Employers
Large employers (with employment of 100 or more) merit additional attention and scrutiny since
these imputations can create critical errors in the QCEW data. Subsequent corrections could
result in significant revisions and may also affect data coming from the Longitudinal Database.
In addition, inaccurate imputations affect other economic data series, including the state’s own
CES benchmarking process.
When missing or delinquent data are imputed for these employers, the state should carefully
review the employer’s status to verify that the business is still operating and that a change in
ownership has not resulted in accidental double counting. If an imputation is required for a large

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-16

nonrespondent, the state should give the imputations careful review in light of current economic
trends and seasonal fluctuations.
New Units
Most imputation procedures rely on historical information; therefore, it is very difficult to impute
data for new units with no reporting history. When reviewing imputed data for new accounts,
always consider the following:
• Check the Initial Date of Liability to ensure that data are not being imputed for a time period
when the account is not yet active.
• Check the status determination form for information on anticipated employment.
• Check wage records reported separately.
• Contact the employer for information, particularly if the new unit is expected to employ a
large number of people.
• Check the Internet and other media sources.
• Consider using industry averages derived from similarly classified units.
• Determine if the unit is a successor and use information from the predecessor unit.
Predecessor/Successor Units
It is important that the UI tax unit or the research staff identify units that were sold. If the unit
was sold, imputation for the predecessor would create an employment over count because the
imputed data on the predecessor duplicates the employment and wages paid on the report of the
successor. Predecessor/successor edits may identify this error, or the error may be reflected in
integrated macro edits when it causes an abnormal significant increase.
It is critical that either the predecessor’s or the successor’s data be on the file. If neither the
predecessor nor the successor reports, and data are not imputed, then an employment and wage
undercount will result.
Predecessor/successor transactions involving large employers require thorough investigation to
reduce possible over counts or undercounts.
Discontinued Units
It is important that the UI tax unit or the research staff identify units that no longer report or are
out of business.
Unfortunately, it may take the UI tax or audit units a couple of quarters to identify these closures.
For this reason, the imputation formulae usually allow two quarters of delinquency for nonreporting. This should allow enough time for the UI tax or audit staffs to contact the employer
and determine its reporting status. If a record was imputed but should have been inactivated, a
retroactive inactivation in the appropriate quarter(s) or setting the End of Liability Date to the

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-17

appropriate time period will change the Status Code. This, in turn, causes the system to ignore
the imputed data during aggregation, in the integrated (macro) edit, and for other uses.
Note that if a unit is discontinued or an employer was delinquent and imputed for two
consecutive quarters, QCEW program policy recommends that data for the third quarter not be
automatically imputed by the system. (This can be controlled, to some extent, by settings in the
state system.) Instead, the system may be used to list these accounts so that state staff may
attempt to verify that the unit or account is still active. If it is active, then they should make a
manual imputation.
The following actions should be considered in the review of delinquent accounts:
• Check the End of Liability Date or the Status Code to ensure that data are not being imputed
for a time period when the account is no longer active.
• Check for a successor account.
• Contact the employer for information.
• Check the Internet.
If a subunit of a multi-establishment account is closed at the end of the prior quarter and not
prorated in the current quarter, the employment and wages of the sub-unit in the prior quarter are
excluded from the prior to current ratio computations so that it does not impact the remaining
active subunit prorations.
Meanwhile, several State legislative changes now allow domestic employers (NAICS = 814110)
to report once a year instead of each quarter. State systems allow three continuous quarters of
imputation for these units.
Prior Data with an Unusual Trend or Atypical Seasonality
If the historical data of the unit are atypical, the analyst may need to manually override the
imputation to compensate for the anomaly. Similarly, historical data may not accurately reflect
atypical economic or seasonal changes in the current period. Additional information can be
obtained from the following actions to help modify the imputation:
•
•
•

Check wage records.
Contact the employer for information.
Check for an upcoming or future quarter.

Partial Imputations
The imputation formulae typically treat each data element independent of the other elements.
There are a few cases where one data field is used in the formula to impute another data field
(e.g., Total Wages are used in some of the employment formula). There are only a few situations
where the absence of one data field will cause another data field to fail to be imputed. As a
result, there are several instances where part of the record may be imputed but the other data
field(s) are not. These failed imputation cases should be reviewed. Partial imputations will

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-18

result in missing employment or wages, create skewed average wages, and affect the quality of
the data. These errors can be particularly critical when they involve large reporters.
Information Sources
Possible sources of useful information in the states include the following:
1. Comments – Analysts should examine narrative or coded comments for previous quarters to
ensure that the previous data follow a typical trend. The appropriateness of seasonal
formulae can be more accurately judged if the quarters or months from which the data items
will be projected are not deviations from the normal trend. If an aberration occurred in the
past, the imputation for the current quarter should not be calculated simply by using the
general formulae. Finally, comments may point to other information sources that may help
in the imputation process.
2. Upcoming Quarter Data – It may be possible to review a QCR or MWR for the next quarter.
These data could then be used in conjunction with the prior quarter data to establish a range
for imputing missing items in the current quarter.
3. Information Generated from Imputation Procedures – Imputation procedures should produce
the following information to assist an analyst in reviewing the imputation:
a. A list of all accounts that are delinquent and their imputation data.
b. A list of each account which either:
•
Reported zero-data last quarter and did not report this quarter, or
•
Did not report last quarter and did not report this quarter.
c. For all large (100 or more employees) delinquent and missing data accounts, a list of the
imputations and the previous five quarters of data.
4.

Employee Wage Records – The tally of all employees listed should equal or exceed monthly
estimates, depending on turnover, seasonality, etc.

5.

Layoff Reports – Reports showing the time period including the reference week may be used
to revise estimates of employment and should provide an idea of why wage levels fluctuated
since last quarter.

6.

Predecessor/Successor Codes – A transfer in ownership may be a clue to finding a
delinquent or missing report.

7.

Status Codes – By determining whether a firm is active or inactive for UI purposes, it is
possible to tell whether the report is delinquent or whether the firm is actually out of
business.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-19

8.

Initial Date of Liability and End of Liability Date – These dates are useful when determining
if the account was active for all months of the quarter, was not active at the beginning of the
quarter, or was closed before the end of the quarter. Both standard state systems use these
dates to adjust the Status Code for the record.

9.

Local News Media – The local news media is an important source for information on local
establishments, particularly the closing of large businesses.

10. Local Office Information – Analysts or other staff in the local offices should keep abreast of
community happenings that impact their labor market, particularly business closings.
11. Industry Averages – As an additional tool for certain estimation procedures, quarterly
industry averages of employment and wages for each industry would be useful. To impute
current quarter data for a new account for which only the prior quarter's data are available, a
ratio of change for the industry as a whole from prior-quarter-a-year-ago to current-quartera-year-ago can be applied to the previous quarter's data for the account. In addition, industry
averages can be used to calculate industry trends that can then be compared to imputed
quarterly changes for individual accounts.
12. Employer – The employer is generally the best source of information. The analyst can often
call the employer to verify unusual fluctuations or to obtain missing information. The
employer will sometimes be the only source for resolving a data problem, such as erroneous
employment reporting. However, some employers will not always be cooperative.
13. Analyst Judgment - The QCEW analyst's knowledge of the state economy, especially in
their immediate area, is invaluable. A senior analyst may have information regarding a data
situation that occurred in the past or general information about a local company or industry
that will help resolve a flagged record or failed imputation. Analyst knowledge and
background information also play an important part in making judgment calls about whether
a flagged record is suspicious or not.
14. Internet - The Internet can be a useful tool to obtain additional information about the
reporter. Possible information may include:
•
Subunit locations
•
New locations
•
Employment levels
•
Predecessor/successor transactions
•
Mergers
General Suggestions and Considerations
Large employer imputations should always be carefully reviewed by appropriate state specialists.
Consider the size of the employer when reviewing imputation formulae and alternative methods.
State analysts should keep abreast of legislative changes. They may affect UI taxes.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation of Missing and Delinquent Data

Page 8-20

8.7 Replacing Imputations with Live Data
When missing data or delinquent accounts are finally reported by the employer, state staff should
replace imputations with the actual data on the state system. The state system will then generate
an Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) record for BLS. The EQUI update
will replace the earlier imputations sent to BLS with the reported data, provided that the change
occurs within the time frame permitted by the BLS correction policy described in Section 12.2.3.
The replacement data should also be edited to ensure continued data quality.

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

September 30, 2019

Page 9-1

Chapter 9 – Editing Micro Data in the States
This chapter and the next discuss using the edits in the standard state systems, reviewing edit
results, and making corrections. The edits are automated: a computer processes the data, assigns
edit flags according to certain conditions, and identifies flagged records. State staff then use the
edit results to review, research, correct, and explain suspect data. Editing in the standard state
processing systems, EXPO-202 and WIN-202, follows the national office requirements
explained in detail in Appendix F (Edit Conditions and Formulas).
When state staff conscientiously review edit results, data quality improves in several ways:
 Erroneous data are corrected.
 Unusual data changes are verified and explained by a comment code or narrative.
 Reporting problems are identified and resolved.
 Data from Quarterly Contribution Reports (QCRs) and Multiple Worksite Reports
(MWRs) are consistent.
 Imputations are adjusted, where necessary, to reasonably predict missing data.
While correcting erroneous data dominates the quarterly effort, verifying and documenting
questionable data helps data users understand economic events and prepares for the review of
future data.
------------- Contents of Chapter 9 ------------9.1 Edit Types and Edit Levels
9.2 Editing for Reasonable Employment and Wage Levels
9.2.1 Edits for Monthly and Average Employment
9.2.2 Edits for Total and Average Wages
9.3 Address Editing: At Least One Clean Address
9.4 Multi-Establishment Editing
9.5 Using Wage Records in Editing
9.6 Using BLS Comment Codes
9.7 Setting the Parameters
9.8 Determining the Research Needed
9.9 Resources for Researching Suspect Data
9.10 Resolution of Suspect Records
9.11 Improving Data Quality

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-2

9.1 Edit Types and Edit Levels
The standard edits consist of several types:
 Micro edits – identify invalid or questionable data associated with individual
establishments (individual reporting units).
 Macro edits – identify questionable data that have been summed to a macro cell level.
Macro cells are typically the aggregation of individual reporting units in a detailed level
industry, ownership, and area.
 Integrated edits – state systems and the national office process macro edits in
combination with comparable micro edits. In this way, the individual reporting units that
cause or contribute to the macro flag can be identified and corrected (or explained).
Macro editing and the integrated edit are discussed in Chapter 10 – Macro File and the
Integrated Edit.
 Predecessor/Successor edits – examine the relationship between previous and current
business owners to ensure that consistent classification codes are used and to prevent data
overlaps or gaps.
 Multi edits – ensure consistency within multi-establishment Unemployment Insurance
(UI) accounts, including between QCR data (reported on the master record) and MWR or
EDI Center or MWR Web data (reported on the subunit or worksite records).
 Wage record edits – use data from wage records as a tool to determine whether
employment and wage levels are reasonable. They are performed in the state systems, if
the wage records are available.
The edits are grouped into nine levels, based on the type, purpose, and severity of the error or
flag. The first six edit levels are routine micro/macro edits and are ranked in ascending order
according to their seriousness. In general, edit Level 1 flags are the most serious and edit Level
6 flags are the least serious. Detailed information about priorities for edit review and cleanup
appears in Section 13.3.3. Edit Levels 7 through 9 are special purpose edit levels that focus on
specific issues.
Individual edits are grouped within edit levels and have a unique, three-digit code assigned to
them. For a small number of data elements, there is no edit code, and the edit will force invalid
data to the default value without manual intervention.
I-errors indicate invalid data and must be corrected. Warning edits (W-flags) indicate a record
has failed an edit because of questionable data and that the data should be reviewed for possible
errors. All error flags occurring in edit Levels 1-4 are I-errors. All flags in edit Levels 5, 6, 7,
and 9 are W-flags. Both I-errors and W-flags occur in edit Level 8.
For more detail concerning edit flags, see Appendix F.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-3

The Nine Edit Levels
Level 1 – Pre-edit I-errors (edits 001-006)
Pre-Edits ensure that each record’s identifying information is properly formatted as numeric or
alpha-numeric, has the expected values, and can be loaded to the national office. These errors
rarely if ever occur in state systems since the data elements are usually system-controlled. These
edits are important in the national office to ensure that the correct state’s data are loaded to the
database for the correct year and quarter and are processed as instructed by the state.
Level 2 – Key Field I-errors (010-016)
Key fields (industry, ownership, and county) are essential classification fields which are most
used for aggregation, sampling, and other data uses. Errors in these fields render a record
fundamentally unusable.
Level 3 – Date and Status Code I-errors (021-025)
The date and status code edits ensure that the record has adequate information to properly
determine its status (active, inactive, or pending). The status code and the date fields (such as
initial liability, end-of-liability, and reactivation dates) are used to determine whether or not the
record should be edited, refiled, aggregated, and provided to various state and BLS users.
Level 4 – Remaining I-errors (031-080)
Level 4 edits review the data elements for the following:
 Valid numeric or alpha conditions
 Valid responses from a limited set of expected values
 Valid relationships between two or three data elements
In almost all cases, these edit flags must be corrected. There are a few situations where the state
systems will override an invalid response with a blank, or will zero fill.
Level 5 – Large Record Employment and Wage Edits (085-086, 091-099)
Several of the employment and wage edits are divided into significant changes (Level 5) and
important but not as large changes (Level 6). This was done to help reviewers focus first on
those changes that have the greatest impact on the data. Most of these edits are performed at
both the micro and macro level. The micro and macro versions of the same edit share the same
three digit code.
Level 5 edits identify:
 Significant fluctuations over time in employment or wages
 Significantly large new, discontinued, or imputed records
 Records with high wages but no employment
 Records with high employment but no wages
 Records with wages that are equal to the sum of the three months employment, if
employment is large

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-4

The parameter/tolerance values used in Level 5 are greater than those used in Level 6. Because
of this, records flagged during a Level 5 edit indicate a more significant employment or wage
fluctuation than their comparable counterparts in edit Level 6. Though similar, Level 5 edits
have different three-digit codes than their equivalent edits in Level 6.
Most of these records warrant further review, possible corrections, and usually some explanation
if not corrected. Problems can be researched:
 Using wage records
 Using UI correspondences or supplemental information
 Using similar units of a multi-establishment employer, similar employers in the cell
 By contacting the employer
Level 6 – Warning (W) and Other Summed Level Edits (088 and 101-146)
The same type of edits performed in Level 5 are performed in Level 6 but with a different,
smaller set of parameters. Level 6 edits identify fluctuations in the economic data (on both
micro and macro records) that are smaller than at Level 5, but still significant. For example, an
employment change of 50 people from one month to the next might flag at Level 6 but pass at
Level 5.
Edits in this level also include most other W (Warning) edits that flag questionable data of other
types (such as address fields, missing physical location addresses on large records, telephone and
fax numbers, tax rate, Employer Identification Number (EIN), missing taxable wages (on
experience-rated accounts), relationships between classification codes, code changes, and records
that have an unclassified industry code with higher employment). While the flagged data may be
accurate, they are sufficiently unusual that data users would look for an explanation.
Records flagged by these edits should be reviewed and corrected (where necessary) or explained
with an appropriate comment code.
Level 7 – Predecessor/Successor edits (156-164)
Predecessor/Successor edits are designed to identify potential relationship problems between
predecessor and successor units. In these cases, either the predecessor of a new or merged unit is
identified and/or the successor of a partially or completely discontinued unit is identified.
Level 7 edits identify two general types of errors, code discrepancies and suspect economic data.
First, a comparison of the predecessor’s and successor's data fields may show unexpected
differences in one of the following codes:





NAICS
County
Township (for certain states)
Ownership

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-5

Usually, the codes of the predecessor and successor are the same unless the successor had an
immediate economic code change at the time of the ownership transfer. If there was a noneconomic code change (e.g., the predecessor was incorrectly coded and the successor is assigned
the correct code), the change should be held until first quarter. There are two exceptions to this
rule:



The employment is 25 or less in the months immediately before and after the change of
ownership, or
The change is from an unclassified to a classified industry or geographic code.

The parameters used in these edits should exclude these smaller units. If the code change should
be held until the next first quarter, follow instructions in Chapter 5.
The second type of error is an overlap or gap in reporting economic data. When both the
predecessor and successor – or neither the predecessor nor the successor – reported during the
reference period, there is either an overlap or a gap in reporting.
For QCEW purposes, when the predecessor and successor both have employment and wages,
one of the following has generally occurred:
1. One of the units was imputed, and the imputed record should have been inactivated, or
2. Both the predecessor and successor reported, and only one should have.
To correct these:
 The predecessor should have employment and wages changed to zero, or
 The predecessor should be inactivated for the reference period, or
 The successor should have its employment and wages changed to zero and the record
coded as pending until the appropriate quarter when it would be activated.
3. The transfer of ownership occurred in the middle of the reference period and the information
should be handled in either one of two ways:
 Merged under one unit, or
 Properly explained using numeric or narrative comments.
If neither the predecessor nor the successor reported during the reference period, the following
should be determined:
 If the business’s employees continued to work during the reference period.
 And if so, who paid their wages?
The appropriate record’s data should be either reported or imputed based on the data of the
predecessor’s last report.
Level 8 – Multi-establishment edits (171-185)
These edits review the relationships among records within a UI account, or compare the total
employment or wages of the sub-unit records with the master (parent) record. These edits ensure
the following:

October 2018





QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-6

That the sum of the economic data from sub-units is relatively close to the amount
reported for the master record.
That each multi-establishment account (family) has a master record with at least two subunits (worksites).
That all members of the family have the same Ownership Code and EIN. Also, for
Indian Tribal Councils, all members of those families should have the same Special
Indicator value of T.

Level 9 – Wage record edits (not performed in the national office) (191-198)
These edits are a tool which can be used in conjunction with the employment and wage edits to
help determine if the employment or wage change is supported by data changes in wage record
data. These edits should only be run if the state can obtain and load automated files of wage
record data.
Note: States using these editing tools should ensure that data for their wage records include all
UI-covered employees and that wage data on wage records include adequate dollar field length
for the total wage amount.

The Wage File Creator, found on StateWeb can be used to load LEHD data and obtain summary
data and match pair data into EXPO and QUEST. The Win Wage Record Tool, also found on
StateWeb also loads LEHD data and generates a similar file for WIN.

9.2 Editing for Reasonable Employment and Wage Levels
The data on each micro record can mostly be classified into two types: quarterly and nonquarterly or administrative data. Non-quarterly data elements include the micro file key fields
(UI/RUN), predecessor and successor IDs, address-related fields, date fields, Annual Refiling
Survey (ARS) fields, EIN, and other special codes and indicators. These are data elements that
rarely change, or whose current value is the only one used. Quarterly data, on the other hand,
include the economic data fields (employment, total wages, taxable wages, and contributions),
the classification codes, Status Code, Type of Coverage, and other data elements used to
generate current and historical aggregations of the economic data. The two sections that follow
discuss the quarterly edits for the essential economic data: monthly employment and total wages.

Editing Effects of Shifts Between Reporting Units
At most edit levels, the standard BLS editing is applied to individual reporting units (individual
UI/RUNs). The exceptions are:
 Macro edits that apply to county-ownership-industry aggregations.
 Predecessor/successor (Level 7) edits that connect reporting units using predecessor or
successor IDs. The use of predecessor and successor IDs is described at length in
Chapter 5.

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

October 2018



Page 9-7

Multi-establishment (Level 8) edits that compare reporting units within the same UI
account.

One example of a major data event that is not the result of error is the shifting of employees from
one reporting unit or UI account to another. Some of these employment shifts will cause the
state to consider whether to change an account from a single to a multi-unit account, a process
described in Chapter 3 – Special Processing for Multi-unit Employers. The shifting of
employees to and from professional employer organizations (PEOs) will also cause employment
fluctuations. In the case of a PEO, the state should make every attempt to have the employment
reported in the correct industry code. This situation is described in detail in Section 15.3.
Inter-quarter fluctuations may be caused by a restructuring, a change in ownership, or the
breakout of a multi reporter. Indication of the latter two situations may occur in the state UI
system. A distinct possibility is that the data for either the current or prior quarter are incorrect.
These data must be examined and corrected based on the procedures described in this chapter.

Significant Employment and Wage Situations
Employment and wage edits are divided among two edit levels: edit Level 5 and edit Level 6.
Level 5 edits flag records that have excessively large fluctuations of employment or wage levels.
Because the records flagged by Level 6 edits do not have the large data fluctuations as those
records flagged by Level 5 edits, they have less of an impact on the macro level data. Five edits
selected for special consideration are given in the following table.
Table 9.1 - Codes and Descriptions for Edit Levels 5 and 6
Level 5 Edit
Code
091
092
093
094
095

Level 6 Edit
Code
126
127
130
131
132

Edit Description
Monthly Employment Change Check
AQW Change Check
Employment Without Wages Check
Wages Without Employment Check
Wages/Employment Sum Check

The employment edits are performed on any month of employment loaded to the file or corrected
on the file. If multiple quarters of data are loaded or edited at one time, then all applicable
quarters need to be edited. In the state system, this may require special runs of the micro edits
for quarters other than the current and immediately prior quarter.

Editing Previous Quarters
The correction policy (described in Section 12.2.3), which is subject to change, includes
updating older data for at least the prior quarter to improve the quality of data and to obtain

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-8

better longitudinal information. Editing and updates to previous quarter data should be made
when:
 Late-reported data are extracted from the UI tax or other source files;
 Reported data replace imputations (estimates);
 Additional predecessor/successor relationships are identified;
 Retroactive records (those that were set up for the older reference period after the fact)
are identified and added to the file;
 Records known to be out-of-business during earlier quarters are inactivated;
 Older data determined to be in error are corrected.
The standard state systems will accept newly extracted or updated data for up to four quarters
earlier than the current processing quarter, although BLS recommends focusing on the current
and immediately prior quarter. This is subject to change with changes to the BLS correction
policy. This policy, described in Section 12.2.3, determines which corrected or updated data will
be submitted to the national office.

9.2.1 Edits for Monthly and Average Employment
The primary monthly employment edit is edit code 091 at Level 5 and code 126 at Level 6.
(WIN-202 uses other codes: 089-091 for each month at Level 5, and 136-138 for each month at
Level 6.) This edit consists of six different tests plus an additional step (step 7) for first month
processing. (Appendix F provides a detailed description, including examples.) The state and the
national office systems perform this edit on each month’s employment. The edit flags a monthly
employment value only if the employment value fails all six tests. Whenever one of the tests
cannot be performed due to insufficient data, that test is bypassed and the next test in the
sequence is performed.
The edit applies six tests (one test at a time) to each month of the quarter. At the first occurrence
of a successful test (provided it is one of the first five tests), the month passes the employment
edit.
Beyond the first five tests, however, month 1 is edited slightly differently than months 2 and 3.
If employment data for months 2 or 3 pass the 6th test, those months will pass the edit. On the
other hand, if data for month 1 employment passes (or bypasses) the 6th test, then a 7th test is
performed. (The edit does not apply the 7th test to employment data in months 2 and 3.) If data
for month 1 employment passes the 7th test, then month 1 employment passes the edit.
Otherwise, month 1 employment fails the edit.
In summary, if the monthly employment values for months 1, 2, or 3 pass any of the first five
tests, then employment values for that month pass the edit and the sixth test is not performed. If
a 6th test is necessary, employment values for months 2 and 3 can pass the edit if they pass the 6th
test. This is not so with month 1 employment. If the employment value for month 1 passes (or
bypasses) the 6th test, it must also pass the 7th test to pass the edit.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-9

The seven tests consist of the following comparisons
1. Current month to preceding month absolute fluctuation
2. Current month to preceding month percent fluctuation
3. Current month to preceding month t-test (outlier test)
4. Current month to year-ago same month absolute fluctuation
5. Current month to year-ago same month percent fluctuation (seasonality test)
6. Current month to year-ago same month t-test, and
7. Current first month to third month prior quarter (applicable only to month one).
Monthly employment values from the four previous quarters for the same record are not used for
comparison if either of the following occurs:


Employment indicator value of M (missing data), N (zero-filled pending resolution of longterm delinquent reporter), or X (non-numeric employment zero-filled pending further action)
in the employment indicator codes, OR



Status Code of 2 (inactive), 3 (not submitted on the EQUI file for the reference quarter (used
in the BLS system only)), or 9 (pending).

For the t-test, the editing of updates to previous quarters may involve using data from any of the
historical quarters on the file. The most important consideration when determining which
quarters’ data to use for the t-test is to make sure that 12 months of data are used.
In addition, edits 093 (Employment Without Wages Check) and 095 (Wages/Employment Sum
Check) flag records that have large employment and no wages and records where the sum of the
employment is equal to the total wages.

Editing Data Changes to Earlier Quarters
To perform the full edit, the system requires that four consecutive quarters of data (consecutive
to the quarter being edited) must reside on the state system. If this requirement is not met, the ttest is not performed. The most important consideration when determining which quarters’ data
the system will use for the t-test is that 12 consecutive months of data are available. The
following table summarizes the comparison scheme used in the t-test.

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

October 2018

Page 9-10

Table 9.2 - Quarters Used for the T-test
Quarters Used
for Comparison
(X)
Current Qtr.
Hist. Qtr. – 1
Hist. Qtr. – 2
Hist. Qtr. – 3
Hist. Qtr. - 4
Hist. Qtr. – 5

Quarter Being Updated and Edited (E)
Hist. Qtr.- 1 Hist. Qtr.- 2 Hist. Qtr.- 3 Hist. Qtr.- 4 Hist. Qtr.- 5

E
X
X
X
X

X
X
E
X
X

X
X
X
E
X

X
X
X
X
E

X
X
X
X
E

Seasonality Test
The updated employment data (the data being edited) must be compared to data from the same
month of the quarter, either four quarters before or four quarters after. This means that the
seasonality test cannot be performed on all quarters in the historical file. The seasonality is
limited to the current and prior quarters and their respective year ago quarters. (For example, if
the current quarter was 2017/1 and an update was made to 2016/3, the t-test would use data from
2016/1, 2016/2, 2016/4, and 2017/1 to edit the updated record.). The following table
summarizes the comparison scheme used in the seasonality test.
Table 9.3 - Quarter to Use for the Seasonality Test
Quarters
Used for
Comparison
(X)
Current Qtr.
Hist. Qtr.- 1
Hist. Qtr.- 2
Hist. Qtr.- 3
Hist. Qtr.- 4
Hist. Qtr.- 5

Quarter Being Updated and Edited (E) (P-Prior, C-Current)
Hist. Qtr.Hist. Qtr.Hist. Qtr.Hist. Qtr.Hist. Qtr.1
2
3
4
5
E-C
E-P

X-C
X- P

Reviewing Employment Fluctuations
Monthly Employment problems can be broken down into two situations:
 Within-quarter fluctuations
 Between-quarter fluctuations.

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

October 2018

Page 9-11

Table 9.4 – Example of a Within-Quarter Employment Fluctuation
1st Quarter
Employment

January
152

February
153

March
49

2nd Quarter
Employment

April
151

May
135

June
145

Table 9.5 - Example of a Between-Quarter Employment Fluctuation
1st Quarter
Employment

January
152

February
153

March
150

2nd Quarter
Employment

April
16

May
17

June
12

In both situations, the analyst would take the following actions:
1. Eliminate the possibility that the data have been entered onto the UI file or other source file
incorrectly. UI or source files, and QCR or MWR forms, should be reviewed to see if
keypunch errors have occurred. If data were keyed in error, correct the QCEW state system.
2. If the data are correct as reported, then the investigation proceeds to determining a cause for
the fluctuation. (The investigation of data fluctuations would include previously-assigned
comment codes, reporting patterns, EDI Center contacts, news articles, or other resources
discussed in Section 9.9.)
a. In the case of a within quarter fluctuation, it may be an event-driven fluctuation. A brief
layoff, or a seasonal slowdown may be the cause.
b. It may also be an error on the part of the reporter.
3. If a cause cannot be discerned with available resources and an employer contact is initiated,
a. Approach the respondent seeking a cause for the fluctuation, although it is very possible
that whoever completed the form made an error.
b. Seek to verify the reported data if the respondent indicates that there was no event to cause
a fluctuation.
c. Request verification that the data are correct as reported, if the employer cannot or does
not wish to reveal the cause of the employment fluctuation.
d. If necessary due to the significance of the respondent and lack of useful information from
the respondent, the data may be adjusted with a hand estimate, taking all available
employment and wage data into account.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-12

Seasonal Data
For the seasonality test portion of the employment edit, the updated employment data must be
compared to data from the same month in the previous year. For updates to the fourth and fifth
quarters prior to the current quarter, the comparison will be to the quarter that is four quarters
later (to the current quarter or to the quarter immediately preceding it). For the quarter that
immediately precedes the current quarter, the comparison will be data for the previous year. The
micro edit calculates a seasonal tolerance that helps prevent seasonality from being flagged.
However, this component is based on only two observations, the prior year’s employment and
the current year's employment. Often a seasonal fluctuation will cause the record to be flagged
for review. Experience will help an analyst discern seasonality in data.
Example: Each third quarter a strawberry crop is manually harvested and a temporary
employment increase occurs in only a few counties. Weather conditions and crop yield causes
this seasonal event to fluctuate in size, commencement, and duration. Seasonal data are the
hardest to predict and the edit tolerances cannot possibly manage seasonal activity based on the
limited number of observations. This event will be flagged for review on the third quarter edit
and each year the analyst will bypass these same units with minimal investigation because the
same units are likely demonstrating movements similar to the prior third quarter. Another factor
that makes seasonal data easier to research is the amount of documentation available. An
exceptional strawberry harvest or a crop failure may be noted in the area newspaper. The
QCEW program enjoys the advantage of analyzing economic events that are far enough past to
be somewhat defined and final yet also be recent enough to be common knowledge.

Wage Record Reporting, Constant Data, and Other Misunderstandings
Wage record reporting is one type of improper employment reporting in which employers simply
count the number of people on their wage record report, and include all persons who received
any pay during the quarter. Counting checks is another reporting error that can lead to an
overestimate of employment if employees receive multiple checks for the reference period. If
these mistakes are made consistently, they may never be detected. This condition can be
detected when other programs gather similar data and notice inconsistencies between their
reports and the QCEW. Conversely, some reporters will not report employees whose wages
exceed the taxable limit. When contacting a company, be prepared to answer questions about the
Quarterly Contributions Report form and the uses of the data.
Another suspect data situation (sometimes difficult to detect) is the reporting of data as a
constant. While some industries are not as prone to turnover as others are, a large reporter
should generally show some fluctuation. A small reporter may show a constant level (e.g., 12
employees) and could very likely be correct. However, the following data situation should be
investigated:

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

October 2018

Page 9-13

Table 9.6 - Constant Employment/Varying Wages
Quarter
Year 1/1
Year 1/2
Year 1/3
Year 1/4
Year 2/1

M1
1524
1524
1524
1524
1524

M2
1524
1524
1524
1524
1524

M3
1524
1524
1524
1524
1524

Total Wages
11,689,200
9,562,112
14,002,619
17,205,632
16,199,865

A large reporter that does not experience fluctuations should seem very suspicious to an analyst.
Notice that the total wages do fluctuate. While it may be possible to discover the approximate
employment for this unit through other sources, which would be helpful information, an
employer contact will most likely be needed. The respondent probably has some confusion
about how to complete the employment section of the form. The current edits flag these
situations for review. A similar situation that would not be flagged would be a large reporter
with very small or occasional fluctuations. These situations would only be noticed during the
investigation of other flagged elements. In these types of situations, the analyst should pursue
the investigation until they are satisfied with all the reported data.
These reporting errors, and several others, are explored at length in Chapter 15 – Recurring
Coverage and Reporting Problems.

9.2.2 Edits for Total and Average Wages
The total wage edit (edit code 092 at Level 5 and code 127 at Level 6) consists of a large record
edit, two stages, a supplemental edit, and an edit level check. These are preceded by various
QCEW Operating Manual December 2004 Editing Micro Data in the States Page 9-14
“condition” checks (a pre-edit, small record bypass check, and a check for newly reported
records). Appendix F provides a detailed description with an example.
In the large record stage of the edit, the Total Wages and Average Quarterly Wages (AQW) of
the current (edited) and previous quarter are compared to various parameters. In stage one of the
edit, the AQW for the current (edited) quarter and previous quarter are compared to another
parameter. In stage two, a statistical test is used to compare the current (edited) AQW to the four
prior AQWs.
The supplemental edit looks for a significant difference between AQW in the current (edited)
and prior quarter, when employment is at a significant level. The edit level check looks for a
significant difference between AQW in the current (edited) quarter and previous quarter greater
than a calculated parameter.
This edit flags the following types of records:
 Records that fail the large record stage

October 2018





QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-14

Records that fail both stage 1 and stage 2
Records that fail stage 1 and that do not have enough historical data to perform stage 2 or
the supplemental edit.
Records that fail stage 1, pass stage 2, and fail the supplemental edit.

Previous Quarters
States may sometimes extract or update data up to four quarters earlier than the current
processing quarter in accordance with the BLS corrections policy). However, only five quarters
of historical data will be available on the database. Since all updates should be edited, even four
quarters back, the normal micro edits described earlier (see Section 9.2.1) will not have enough
historical data available to perform all the tests. Since fewer tests can be performed, a record has
fewer opportunities to pass the edits. This would make updates to the earliest quarters more
likely to flag. Therefore, the system does not restrict the data used to edit back quarters to data
from quarters preceding the quarter being edited. As with the interquarter employment edit
091/126, the interquarter wage edit 092/127 may also compare the quarter being edited to
quarters that are more recent.
.

Other Wage Edits
In addition, the state and the national office systems perform edits 094 (Wages Without
Employment Check) and 095 (Wages/Employment Sum Check) as described in Appendix F.
These edits flag records that have large wages and no employment and records where the sum of
the employment is equal to the total wages.

Reviewing Wage Fluctuations
Since respondents may face legal penalties for incorrectly reporting wages, wage data are less
likely to be incorrect than employment. However, wage data on the tax file may have been
estimated for tax purposes or be incorrect due to human error. Wage data may also include large
bonuses paid to individuals. While not errors, such changes, without comment codes or narrative
to explain the fluctuation, can cause concern for users of the wage information.
Taxable wages and contributions may be derived using available numbers and usually do not
require investigation. In the third and fourth quarters, contributions may decline because the
maximum taxable level has been reached by a majority of employees. Taxable wages and
contributions may be reported incorrectly by employers due to confusion about the maximum
taxable level. Overall, wage data changes usually reflect employment data changes. If the level
of employees increases, the wages should also increase, usually at a lower rate as new hires are
often at a lower wage scale. A decrease in employment should also result in a decrease in
wages; however, severance and vacation pay may distort this relationship by causing an increase
in wages.

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

October 2018

Page 9-15

The relationship between monthly employment and the quarterly wages is very elastic.
Employment is measured as those who worked or received pay for the pay period that includes
the 12th of the month. The key thing to note is pay period. Pay periods can be weekly, biweekly, and monthly and that timing can exert a lot of influence on the way the data looks when
it is submitted to the state. Using the within-quarter data from Table 9.4 (Within Quarter
Employment Fluctuation) the following two examples show how pay periods can affect
employment and wage data.
Assuming a bi-weekly pay period, suppose a period of low employment in March began
February 13 and ended April 12, resulting in a period of low employment spanning nine weeks.
Because the employment was normal on the 12th of February and the 13th of April, only March
would reflect the low employment level. Compare this event to a period of low employment
from March 1 to 15, a two-week period. Both situations would result in the same employment
data but with very different wage data.
To further illustrate:

2017

Sample Monthly Activity of a Reporter for the First Quarter

S
1
8
15
22
29

M
2
9
16
23
30

January
T W T
3 4 5
10 11 12
17 18 19
24 25 26
31

F
6
13
20
27

S
7
14
21
28

February
S M T W T
1 2
5 6 7 8 9
12 13 14 15 16
19 20 21 22 23
26 27 28

F
3
10
17
24

S
4
11
18
25

March
S M T W T
1 2
5 6 7 8 9
12 13 14 15 16
19 20 21 22 23
26 27 28 29 30

F
3
10
17
24
31

S
4
11
18
25

Under normal conditions the employer has 100 employees and pays each exactly $100 dollars
per day. The normal Quarterly Contributions Report, QCR, for 1st quarter would state:
M1
100

M2
100

M3
100

Total Wages
$650,000 (65 work days (Mon-Fri), 100 employees, $100 per day)

Sample Monthly Activity: Situation 1
A layoff occurs on the 10th of January and lasts until the 6 of February the QCR would state:
M1
100

M2
100

M3
100

Total Wages
$450,000 (45 work days, 100 employees, $100 per day)

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

October 2018

Page 9-16

The four-week layoff would not be reflected in the employment level because the definition of
employment includes all employees who worked or received pay during the pay period that
includes the 12th of the month, and we assumed a bi-weekly pay period. The level of pay is
the only indication of an economic event.
A more extreme example would be a layoff that began the 10th of January and ended the 16th of
February. The QCR would state:
M1
100

M2
100

M3
100

Total Wages
$280,000 (28 work days, 100 employees, $100 per day)

Sample Monthly Activity: Situation 2
Due to a scheduled retooling of production machinery, a temporary partial shutdown during
which only ten maintenance employees worked occurs from February 2ndt to the 17th. In
anticipation of the shutdown, the employer scheduled additional 8-hour shifts of ½ the workforce
for January, paying overtime to employees. No new employees were hired. In addition, a
$10,000 bonus was paid to the plant manager. The QCR would state:
M1
100

M2
10

M3
100

Total Wages
$708,000 (52 work days, 100 employees, $100 per day + 22 work
days, 50 employees, $150 per day + manager’s bonus + 13
work days, 10 employees, $100 per day)

As illustrated earlier, the within quarter employment fluctuation would look very much like a
keypunch error. The point this example should illustrate is that wages may not follow
employment trends, but the normal behavior of employment rising and wages following or
employment falling and wages decreasing is more likely to be observed.

Other Simple Observations about Employment and Wage Patterns
New hires are usually paid less and are the first to be let go.
This is why employment’s decrease can be more severe than the wages.
New employees may start employment on any day of the quarter.
If an employee was hired on the last day of the pay period including the 12th, the employee
would be included in the employment total for that month and all wages earned until the end of
the quarter would be included in Total Wages. While a single employee would not make much
difference, this kind of situation can have a cumulative effect on the data.
Bonuses are a very common occurrence in all industries.
These events may or may not follow a seasonal pattern, and may or may not recur. They are
very disruptive of data patterns and can be difficult to research. A review of the wage record of a
reporter, if the research unit has access to this information, can help determine if bonuses were

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-17

paid. Wage information is usually considered privileged and the employer may not wish to
discuss it over the telephone. It is important to remember when contacting a company that there
is no way for them to know that you are actually a state employee performing statistical
verification and not another party using deception to gather personal information.

9.3 Address Editing: At Least One Clean Address
Problems in Non-Quarterly Data
Non-quarterly data problems are less complex in nature, but may have a direct and immediate
impact on in-house data users. Consequently, these data users are more likely to ask questions
and offer information. Unfortunately, the contact person for one program may not be supplying
the same information as the contact for the QCEW program. For this reason, some solutions to
non-quarterly data problems may not be usable or may not even be valid.
During the micro edit, the analyst will find situations where units have been incorrectly coded or
addressed. While the correction of industry codes follow specific guidelines (see Chapter 2 Assigning and Updating the Classification Codes), address corrections should be made
immediately.

Address Edits (070)
The edit reviews up to three address blocks per record. These address blocks are field specific
on the micro and EQUI files.
1. Physical Location Address
2. Mailing/Other Address
3. UI Address
The edit requires only one to be usable. Each address field is examined separately, then blocked
together as an individual address, and then compared to determine if any meets all editing
requirements. An address block is defined by the following six components:
 Street Address Line - 1,
 Street Address Line - 2,
 City, State, Zip Code, and Zip Code Extension.
If at least one address block passes the edits, then all flags are counted but only a limited number
of fields will be listed for review (only where appropriate). If none of the address blocks pass
the edits, then the system assigns I-error 070 and lists all three addresses. This allows all address
information to be available for review so that the address problems can be resolved for that
record. The address data elements do not affect macro edits or the various uses of economic
data.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-18

All of the address fields are edited separately, and fields, other than zip code fields, that contain
all zeroes are blanked out. (The address zip code and the address zip code extension are blanked
out only if all other address fields are blank.) For the record to pass the address block edit, just
one address block has to pass the edits. An address block will pass the edit only if all of the
fields in the address block pass the edit. This will ensure at least one usable address.
Information about addresses that do not pass the edits will be given in the counts/listings. For
multi-unit accounts, the master address should be copied to subunits that do not have useable
addresses.
Federal addresses are not edited, therefore the system first determines if the ownership is Federal
government (Ownership code of 1).

Large Record Without Usable PLA Check (Edit 088)
To pass this edit, records must contain a full Physical Location address that can be geocoded. To
test for usability and the ability to geocode the Physical Location Address, the system examines
each address field separately, then blocks the fields together as an individual address, and then
compares the blocked address to determine if it meets all editing requirements.
This edit will flag a record with significant employment if either of the following conditions is
met.
 All of the PLA fields are blank or missing.
 The record’s PLA is flagged for any other PLA edit (edit 102, 103, 104, or 114).
Further details on edit 088 can be found in Appendix F.

9.4 Multi-Establishment Editing
Employers with multiple locations should report data using the Multiple Worksite Report
(MWR), or report their MWR data centrally to the EDI Center (their MWR data are transmitted
quarterly to the state by the EDI Center) or quarterly via MWR Web. The Level 8 multiestablishment edits screen reporters who have multiple establishments (multiple reporting units
with the same UI Account Number). The system first identifies the reporter as a multiestablishment via the Multi Establishment Employer Indicator (MEEI) Code. MWR reporting
units appear in the micro edits in the same manner as individual reporters, and are generally
edited in the same manner in the other edit levels.
The MWR data from the current quarter can be easily compared with the data from the previous
quarter. In this manner, sites that have “disappeared” or have relocated can be identified. The
discontinued locations may have been sold to another employer (another UI account), who either
does not break out data in the same manner or may be reporting them incorrectly. Once a multiestablishment account is identified, there arises the need to differentiate each individual unit. To
accomplish this, each individual unit carries a unique identifier, the Reporting Unit Number

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-19

(RUN). Several of the multi-establishment edits use RUNs in combination with the MEEI Code
to verify that multi-unit accounts are properly configured: the account should contain one master
record representing the account as a whole, and at least two subunit (worksite) records.

Multi Establishment Employer Indicator
The MEEI is a required, quarterly code that distinguishes between records for single units, multiunit master records, and subunits of a multi-establishment employer. State QCEW staff assigns
this code. There is no state default value.
The MEEI code has six valid values:
1 = Single establishment unit (not a multi)
2 = Multi-unit master record
3 = Subunit establishment level record for a multi-unit employer
4 = Multi-establishment employer reporting as a single unit due to unavailability
of data, including refusals
5 = A subunit record on the state's file that actually represents a combination
of two or more establishments Finer level breakouts not yet available.
6 = Known multi-establishment employer reporting as a single unit and not
solicited for disaggregation because of small employment (< 10) in all secondary
establishments combined

Reporting Unit Number
The Reporting Unit Number (RUN) is a 5-digit number used to uniquely distinguish worksites of
a multi-unit account, and is a key (identifying) field for every reporting unit. The RUN is
required but non-quarterly. State staff assigns the RUN for new worksites with multi-unit
accounts. Single and master records are assigned zeros (00000) as part of the extract process.
Most state UI tax files do not include a reporting unit number field, as defined by BLS. In these
cases, the Reporting Unit Number should be zero filled when extracting single and master
accounts from the tax files.
The valid RUN values for single and master units are 00000. Subunits (worksites) must have
RUN values greater than 00000. RUNs for subunits of the same UI Number must be assigned
sequentially and not reused. When a multi-unit account is set up for the first time, the first
subunit must have a RUN of 00001, and the number for each additional subunit must increase by
1. For example, a UI account with three subunits will have them numbered 00001, 00002, and
00003. Gaps in the numbering system may occur over time due to closed or sold units.
The Level 8 edits require the RUN of each record to be consistent with the MEEI. Records with
MEEI of 1 (single), 2 (master), 4, (multi reporting as single), or 6 (multi not solicited) should
have a Reporting Unit Number of 00000. Records with MEEI of 3 (subunit) or 5 (combined
subunit) should have a Reporting Unit Number greater than 00000.
If an “orphan” occurs (where a multi-establishment account or family terminates all units but
one, leaving a single, surviving worksite), use RUN 00000 for the remaining unit. Assign the

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-20

correct MEEI Code (typically MEEI 1). Since the account should already have a master record
whose RUN is 00000, the record for the orphaned subunit (whose RUN is greater than 00000)
should be inactivated, and its data should be assigned to the RUN 00000 record for the current
quarter. The MEEI code of the RUN 00000 record should be changed from 2 to 1 in the current
quarter. To assist in longitudinal record linkage, the RUN 00000 record (which now represents
the surviving worksite) should have a predecessor UI Number and RUN pointing to the
inactivated record that used to carry its data. In addition, the inactivated orphan may be assigned
a successor UI Number and RUN pointing to the RUN 00000 record.

Consistent EINs and Ownership Codes
The Federal Employer Identification Number (EIN) is assigned by the IRS to each employer
(corresponding to each UI account). All units in the account should therefore carry the same
EIN. The Ownership Code indicates the legal proprietorship of the enterprise (the UI account),
and therefore all units in the account must carry the same Ownership Code. These relationships
are enforced by Level 8 I-error edits.

Indian Tribal Councils
For those accounts that are recognized Indian Tribal Councils, all units in the account should
have a Special Indicator value of T. This relationship is also enforced by Level 8 I-error edits.

Additivity
In multi-unit accounts, the master record (with MEEI 2 and RUN 00000) corresponds to the
Quarterly Contribution Report (QCR) – it represents the UI account as a whole, as the employer
reports data to the state UI program. The subunits, taken as a whole, represent the UI account as
the employer reports to the QCEW program on the MWR or to the EDI Center or via MWR
Web. The economic data on the QCR should equal the economic data on the MWR, and the
combined data of the subunits should equal the data on the master record. The
Additivity/Balance Edits (171-176) of Level 8 ensure this relationship. The combined data of
the subunits for employment, total wages, taxable wages, and contributions should equal the
master record data.
When the data are out of balance by more than a small tolerance, the UI account will fail the
additivity edits. Subunits (worksites) may be missing from the MWR or may be duplicated.
There may be keypunch errors on the MWR or the QCR form. When additivity flags occur, take
appropriate measures (similar to those discussed in Section 9.2.1 for reviewing employment
fluctuations), such as the following:
 Verify keypunching.
 Review resources (see Section 9.9).
 Contact the EDI Center, if they provided the data.

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

October 2018



Page 9-21

Contact the employer.

9.5 Using Wage Records in Editing
Wage record edits should be run in the state and BLS if the data are accessible. They should be
run either with the other edits, on a lagged basis when most of the information is available, or
periodically to capture potential reporting problems. These edits help to identify reporting
problems that are frequently missed by other edits when the data normally do not fluctuate from
month to month or over time.
Wage records are individual records of employees who have worked for an employer during a
business quarter. Employers are required by law to report wage records to the respective state UI
program for all UI-covered employees. Because wage records account for all employees paid
during a business quarter, they may or may not reflect the number of employees an employer has
during the pay period that includes the 12th of the month. Due to the potential of wage records to
exceed the employment during that pay period, they are only used for hand imputations and for
comparison of data.
Wage records may be used to hand impute data for the following items:
 First Month Employment
 Second Month Employment
 Third Month Employment
 Total Wages
All seven wage record edits issue W-flags. These Level 9 edits are fully described in Appendix
F. Each wage record edit will be bypassed if any of these conditions are met:
 The wage record count or wage record wage is zero or invalid
 MEEI = 3 or 5 (the record is a subunit)
 Type of Coverage = 1, 3, 8, or 9 (the account is reimbursable or is not UI covered)
 Ownership = 1 (Federal)
 The wage records are not available.
Table 9.7 - Wage Record Edits
Edit Code
191
192
193
194
195
196
197

Edit Message
Questionable Wage Record Count
Questionable Wage Record Wages
First Month EMPL > Wage Record Count
Second Month EMPL > Wage Record Count
Third Month EMPL > Wage Record Count
All Months Employment = Wage Record Count
Total Wages Vary From Wage Records

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-22

9.6 Using BLS Comment Codes
The QCEW standard comment codes and their meanings are fully listed in Appendix I.
Assigning QCEW comment codes simplifies the review of edit listings by the state and BLS.
Comment codes should explain fluctuations or changes in the data that cause current quarter
records to be flagged as questionable. After the state EQUI files are submitted to BLS, BLS
provides the comment codes to the Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), along with QCEW
macro data, to assist in the preparation of BEA’s personal income estimates. Comment codes
can also be an important reference by BLS survey users seeking to understand a data fluctuation
or abnormality.
The standard BLS QCEW comment codes can only be applied to micro records. Assign the
comment code(s) which best explains the reason or cause of the fluctuation/change in the
specific data element(s) or record. Comment codes should not be used in lieu of addressing
issues regarding the proper and accurate reporting of data.
States have the option of using up to three standard comment codes on a micro record. A 57position narrative comment field is also available for each micro record for use when the
standard comment codes are not applicable or sufficient. A narrative can be used to provide
specific supporting or supplemental information about flagged reporting units that have
significant employment, or data changes that are especially significant or unusual. At least one
numerical comment code should accompany a narrative comment. A numerical comment of 99
should be used along with the narrative if no other numerical codes are assigned.
Comment codes are grouped and based on the data elements most affected by the change. States
should, however, use the comment code(s) which best explains the data fluctuation regardless of
its grouping. Comment codes are grouped according to the following list:
 Employment shifts
 Pay shifts
 Hours, time and vacation issues
 External factors
 Secondary effects
 Environmental legislation
 Defense-related codes
 Temporary codes
 State specific CES codes
 Tax and coverage changes
 Coding and classification changes
 Reporting issues
 Data verification
Using standard comment codes to explain reporting issues (comment codes 82-93) does not
preclude the proper coding and processing of accurately reported data. Comment codes are

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-23

helpful in clarifying or highlighting particular reporting issue changes (e.g., mergers,
predecessor/successor transactions, or changes in the basis of reporting) for those accessing the
data or researching the relationship between worksites. Appendix I includes a number of
comment codes relating to business and reporting issues. Comment code 98, Data
Verified/Accepted by EDIC, must not be assigned by states. This code is reserved for use by the
EDI Center, for use on reporting units of centrally collected employers. When the EDI Center
has assigned comment code 98, States that properly load the MWR files provided by the EDI
Center will have this code on their state system, and the EQUI file will provide this code to the
national office.
BLS strongly recommends that states send supplemental narrative material to their regional
office if significant data shifts affect numerous records. For example, state unemployment
insurance coverage changes affecting the definition of covered wages or employees can result in
notable data shifts affecting large numbers of macro cells. A specific example of this would be a
change to exclude from wages employer contributions to certain types of pension plans, which
had previously been considered covered wages, resulting in a broad decrease in wage levels. A
change in unemployment insurance coverage or a new interpretation of existing laws for classes
of employees such as parochial school employees, poll workers, or the status of religious
institution workers, are also examples when such documentation would be beneficial.

Comment Code Examples
Some examples of comment code usage are listed below. This is not a complete and exhaustive
list.
Comment
Situation
Code
If a new unit that did not exist before begins operations, code the unit...

85

If a multi-establishment account sells or closes all but one of its sub-units (the
master record becomes a single), code the single…

00

If a single or multi reporter begins reporting data after an extensive period of
imputed, prorated or inaccurate data, and the employment and wages are
noticeably different, code the single or master and sub-units ….

48

If a unit that previously reported in a different state, begins newly reporting in
state, code the unit…

17

If a record that previously reported aggregated data begins reporting sub-unit or
disaggregated data, AND
a. if disaggregation causes a change in industry code or county code, code
the master record...

90

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Situation

Page 9-24

Comment
Code

b. code the disaggregated sub-units that do not experience a change in the
industry or county code...

90

c. code the disaggregated sub-units that will change industry or county
codes in the first quarter...

90

If a new unit of a multi-establishment reporter
a. begins operations that did not exist before AND
b. has not previously reported its employment and wages data as part of
another unit of the multi, then code the new unit...

85

If a unit of a multi-establishment reporter
a. begins reporting separately AND
b. previously reported its employment and wages data as part of another
unit of the multi, then code the unit...

90

(Separately reported units should not experience any non-economic code
changes as a result of this reporting change until first quarter.)
If a unit no longer provides disaggregated sub-unit data,
a. AND if aggregation or collapse of the multi-establishment breakout
causes a change in industry code or county code for any sub-unit portion
of the multi-establishment, then code the sub-unit record (if available)...
b. code the collapsed MEEI 4 record...
(Multis should not be collapsed outside of the first quarter if data will
change industry or county codes. Data should be prorated until first
quarter.)
If a single unit is bought by a new owner who did not previously operate in the
state, code the new unit...

91
91

93

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Situation

Page 9-25

Comment
Code

If a single unit is bought by a new owner who already had existing operations
in the state,
a. code the master record of the purchasing account (successor) as an
establishment merger...

93, 89

b. code the selling account (predecessor)…

93

c. code each sub-unit (only if employment level for the sum of the
secondary subunits is 10 or more)…

93

i. set up a multi-establishment breakout effective with the quarter of the
purchase if the purchasing account (successor) was previously a
single unit.
OR
ii. add the purchased unit to the multiple worksite report (MWR)
effective with the quarter of the purchase, if the purchasing account
(successor) was previously a multi-establishment reporter.
(Purchased units should not experience any noneconomic code changes as
a result of the purchase until first quarter.)
If a new owner who did not previously operate in the state purchases a multiestablishment account, code the master and each sub-unit of the successor and
predecessor…
(The successor should continue to report the breakout and the purchased
multi-establishment account should not experience any noneconomic code
changes as a result of the purchase.)
If a new owner who already had existing operations in the state purchases a
multi-establishment account, code the purchasing account (successor) as an
establishment merger...
Code each sub-unit and the successor's pre-existing unit (that should now
be set up as a sub-unit)…
i. Set up a multi-establishment breakout effective with the quarter of the
purchase if the purchasing account (successor) was previously a
single unit.

93

93, 89

93

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Situation

Page 9-26

Comment
Code

OR
ii. Add the purchased sub-units to the successor's MWR effective with
the quarter of the purchase if the purchasing account (successor) was
previously a multi-establishment reporter.
(The sub-units previously owned by the purchaser should not be assigned
reporting issue comment codes relating to the merger. Purchased units
should not experience any noneconomic code changes as a result of the
purchase.)
If employment changes within an individual unit or sub-unit resulting from an
internal reorganization,
a. code a resulting increases in employment...

13

b. code a resulting decrease in employment...

12

If a multi-establishment account sells one or more (but not all) sub-units, code
the master record of the predecessor...

92

a. code the sold sub-unit(s) of the predecessor...

93

b. code the purchased sub-unit(s) [can be either a newly set up sub-unit(s)
or a predecessor/successor transaction]…

93

(The sold sub-units should not experience any noneconomic code changes
as a result of the sale.)
If a single unit or a sub-unit sells a portion of its operations or business to a new
account,
a. code the predecessor unit (depending on the circumstances involved in
the reporting change) as a dissolution…

88, 92

b. code the purchasing unit as a merger...

89, 92

c. code new sub-units as breakouts...
If an account shifts employment from one unit to another within the same
account,

93

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Situation

Page 9-27

Comment
Code

a. AND if the sub-unit(s) involved existed before, and there was no
significant change in scope, code the respective intra-account (firm)
transfers as...

15

b. if a sub-unit is eliminated as a result of the intra-account (firm) transfer,
code both the unit absorbing the employment and/or operations and the
eliminated unit(s)…

15

c. if sub-unit(s) are added as a result of the intra-account (firm) transfer,
code both the new unit(s) and the unit(s) losing employment as an intraaccount (firm) transfer...

15

If an employer eliminates a large percentage of jobs, laying off many people
while downsizing operations, code the record...

12

If most employees of a unit go on strike against the employer, code the record
as a strike...

08

If most employees of a unit go on strike and the employer hires replacement
workers at lower pay, code the record as having an increased percentage of
lower-paid workers...

08, 22

If an employer moves an established business into the state from another state,
code the record as moved into state...

17

If an employer moves an established business into the state from another
country, code the record as new business...

85

If an employer lays off employees
a. because it is the end of a seasonal operation, code the record as a
seasonal decrease...

02

b. while retooling the assembly line, code the record as a conversion or
retooling...

10

c. during a shutdown while remodeling, code the record as conversion or
remodeling...

10

d. when the operations failed a health and safety inspection, code the
record as a temporary shutdown...

09

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Situation

Page 9-28

Comment
Code

c. because of less demand for goods or services, code the record as less
business...

04

f. without notice but the impact of the layoff can be verified by reports in
the local news media, even when no reason is given, code the record as
a layoff...

07

If an employer lays off the employees as the firm enters bankruptcy, code the
record as bankrupt...
If an employer resumes operations after being inactivated or coded out of
business and the employer is reassigned the old account, code the record as
reactivated...

12

87

If an employer ceases to report the majority of the employment, turning over
that responsibility to an employee leasing firm/Professional Employer
Organization (PEO), code the original firm and the new unit as switched to
employee leasing...

83

If an increase in Total Wages for an account is reflected in data on the wage
records, code the record as showing a general pay increase...

97

If employment and wages increase significantly for units of an employer in a
volatile industry, and that employer reports through the EDI Center, the EDI
Center will assign the code...
(Note: ONLY the EDI Center may assign comment code 98.)

98

9.7 Setting the Parameters
Many of the micro and macro level specifications include parameters (parms) and tolerances. To
determine reasonableness, most data elements are compared to other data elements or to the
same data element over time. Tolerances are used to allow a reasonable amount of leeway
between the "expected" value for a data element and the value actually reported or imputed.
Data elements that have a limited, known set of values (e.g., Ownership Code) are edited to
check for exact matches. Other data elements, such a Trade Name, are alpha-numeric and can
contain any value. Parameters are also included in the edits to ensure efficient use of state
resources without a negative impact on data quality.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-29

State Integrated Edit vs. the national office Integrated Edit
All edits run by the national office are expected to have been run by states. The editing of
summed micro data is based on a number of constants and tolerances. State systems allow users
to tighten these tolerances beyond the national office default levels to suit the needs of the state.
EQUI files sent to the national office always include a header record that gives the editing
parameter and tolerance values used by the state. The rate used to compute the amount of
employee contributions collected is also provided as a parameter on the EQUI header record.
Although states can modify their parameters and tolerances each quarter, only the parameters and
tolerances used for their most recent processing are submitted on the header record. The state
systems only maintain the most current parameters, and they are applied to all data processed
until they are changed. Any revisions to the parameters and tolerances should continue to
respect the need for data quality.
The national office parameters and tolerances are never tighter than those of the state, unless the
state has set theirs above acceptable levels (above the default values shown in Appendix H). The
national office parameters are higher than or equal to state default values, since this allows the
national office edit listings (described in Section 13.2.3) to identify the most serious data
conditions (conditions most in need of correction or explanation).

Recommendations
States should consider these points when setting their editing parameters and tolerances:
1. Set edit parameters based on data quality standards.
The distribution of work, the number of staff to review the material, and the tools available to
facilitate the review all impact the editing results. Setting parameters/tolerances to smaller
values may cause more records to flag than can be effectively reviewed; this can lead to
significant errors being overlooked.
2. Set employment and wage edit parameters to identify potential problems for micro records
with significant employment and wage levels. In addition, set these edits to capture problems
in the published macro levels.
Micro level data are frequently used for sampling and solicitation by other BLS programs.
These data are also used to compare reporting practices between CES respondents and the
QCR or MWR reports to resolve reporting problems. Macro level data are published and
released by BLS to various users at levels as detailed as industry, county, ownership, and
occasionally size class.
3. Prioritize review of critical non-quarterly data based on the needs of data users.
Some non-quarterly fields are of greater importance than others. For instance if one useable
address already exists on most records but the identification of EINs is below acceptable

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-30

levels, it is more important to strive for better EIN information than to seek out supplemental
address information. By setting small parameter/tolerance values for EIN edits, the states
can focus on this important data element. See Section 13.3.2 for more detail on edit
priorities.

9.8 Determining the Research Needed
The goal of editing QCEW is to produce the best quality data in the relatively short time allowed.
The record flags produced by the edits help analysts prioritize data for investigation. Analysts
should verify the data in the flagged records as correct or replace with corrected data. Due to
time constraints, analysts should prioritize records flagged with lower edit codes. Editing
individual records can become time consuming, so individual analysts should be mindful of their
timeframe when making the decision to terminate or continue their investigation into individual
records. In short, analysts should organize their work to get “the most bang for their buck”.
The first extract will usually include the most records with incorrect data. The optimum goal of
the review is to investigate each flagged record and either verify the data as correct or to replace
it with correct data. Due to time constraints, this level of investigation may not be achievable.
Analysts must apportion their time to the records that are most significant and most likely
incorrect. As the analyst progresses through the edit, they will constantly have to reassess
progress and target completion date. Investigation of records may proceed faster or slower than
initially expected and the analyst will adjust the effort expended per record accordingly. The
decision to terminate or continue investigation is necessary because of the time frame within
which the analyst must work. Analysts have to maximize the effect of their review by using
judgment in deciding which records to investigate and to what degree this investigation
progresses.

Suspect Data Situations: Missing Data or Missing Reports
The first extract will contain the most records with missing data items or missing reports. The
majority of these will be received and processed sometime within the quarter or additional data
will be received as a result of the mailout of missing data notices. Machine-generated estimates
of delinquent accounts may be made at a later stage of QCEW processing as discussed in
Chapter 8. The analyst must review these machine estimates and determine whether to use the
machine estimate or replace with a hand (manual) estimate. The system will not estimate
missing data indefinitely, and significant reporters who are missing for extended periods, but still
in operation, may have to be manually estimated until a report is received or contact is made with
the company.
Estimates should always be replaced with employer-supplied data when it becomes available.
This does not lessen the importance of editing the estimated data because the units may be
undergoing transition, or the employers may not understand how to complete the quarterly

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-31

report. To put it simply, a report missing data obviously has problems and identifying which
reports have problems is the purpose of the edit.

More Suspect Data Situations: Data do not Correspond with Prior Reports
If the current quarter’s data are incorrect, it can be corrected during the quarter. However, if the
prior quarter’s data are incorrect, then back quarters must be addressed. Significant back quarter
corrections will impact other programs, especially CES. These users must be made aware of
these back quarter corrections.
Although it should be the goal of each state to deliver the most accurate data possible on the
quarterly deliverable EQUI, the need to make corrections to back quarter data will always exist
to some extent given the volume of data records being processed. Generally there are two causes
for back quarter corrections:


The record did not flag on the past quarter’s edit but did flag on the current quarter’s edit.
The current quarter’s data are actually correct, but it is discovered that the prior quarter’s
data are not.



The record may have been flagged for review on the prior quarter’s edit and may have
resulted in an employer contact. The employer’s response may have not been received
until after that quarter’s cleanup date.

Some amounts and types of back quarter corrections are a normal part of the quarterly edit and
do not negatively reflect on the research efforts of the analyst.

9.9 Resources for Researching Suspect Data
Each state has its own methods and resources for researching data events. Variations in UI laws,
computer systems, communications between programs and agencies, and even the physical
characteristics of the state are reflected in these review procedures. There are some common
resources and methods. This chapter can serve to guide the state analyst by describing, in
general terms, the procedures to follow while investigating suspect data.
Examples of resources and their format:
Quarterly Contributions Report

Electronic or paper

Multiple Worksite Report

Electronic or paper

Annual Refiling Survey

Electronic

QCEW state system

Electronic record of establishment history

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-32

UI database

The state agency’s repository of UI-related data

Tax documents and systems

Forms used to create new accounts, transfer
accounts, or change existing accounts (part sales,
additional business etc.); online systems

Wage Record Database

The state agency’s repository of wage record
data

EDI Center

Email, for centrally collected employers

Internet

Search engines by name, product, or service
(See Appendix T – Useful Links and References)

Telephone contact

Employer or local Unemployment Insurance
office

Other research programs

Be aware of special projects or program
developments that may supply data or insight
into industries

Newspaper articles, Company
websites, Trade Association websites

Internet or paper

With experience, the analyst will develop a methodical routine for researching different data
situations. The first step is to verify the data from the source document and the final step should
be contacting the employer directly.

Other BLS/State Programs
The employer's contact person for one program may not be supplying the same information as
the contact person for the QCEW program.
This can create conflict between QCEW and other programs. Some conflicts between programs
are due to differences in program definitions and concepts. Analysts should be aware of these
differences and accommodate them to the best of their ability while adhering to QCEW program
concepts. Direct conflict between employer-supplied information when there is no conflict in
program definitions should be investigated and resolved in the state agency. This requires
cooperation between program analysts and a willingness to accept information from other
programs.

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

October 2018

Page 9-33

Employer Contact
This is by far the most difficult part of the analyst’s job. Although a phone number and the name
of a contact person are available, that person may not be able to answer your questions. It is not
unusual to talk to several different people before a data question can be resolved. This can be
very frustrating and time-consuming. When contacting an employer, the analyst must remember
that they are representing not just their agency, but the entire state government. If an analyst
encounters resistance to their inquiries, the fault could lie with an unfavorable impression formed
during an earlier contact – an impression that can be overcome or improved by acting in a
courteous and professional manner. Although an occasional negative experience can be
expected, it is more normal that the employer will answer your questions, and will have a
positive opinion of the experience.

9.10 Resolution of Suspect Records
The investigation of suspect data will be an ongoing process from the first micro edit until the
submission of the quarterly file. When making a correction, it is important to only replace
suspect reported data with data from a verifiable source. Again, the analyst’s judgment plays a
large part in this decision. These decisions may have to be reviewed throughout the edit. To
facilitate this effort, good documentation procedures should be developed.

Documentation
During the edit process, meticulous care must be given to documenting the research performed
on a file and to the corrections made on the file. This will save time when you have to answer
inquiries from other analysts and in working future quarters. The documentation may consist of
only the name of a company or contact, date, address, or brief remarks but should be made in a
consistent, legible manner so that a data situation can be explained without too much personal
recall. There is not enough time to document every detail of a data event the analyst researches,
so document enough to backtrack the editing steps which will support the data. Using comment
codes as a shorthand facilitates this well.
Additional documentation may be recorded in the Narrative Comment field, where the
information would be useful to BLS reviewers or other data users. The standard state systems
also include note fields, which are not copied to the EQUI file. Use a note field for helpful
information that does not address data issues (for example, specific information about the
employer contact).

An example using the previous data:
UI 123456789

Cty 123

Own 5

NAICS 316210

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

October 2018

M1
100

M2
10

M3
100

Total Wages Taxable Wages
$687,500
$450,000

Page 9-34

Contribution
$25,000

Called 05/10, Talked to Rita Book, Chf Acct (909)999-9999, OT in Jan, Feb
Layoff for retooling, 1 employee Bonus = $10,000
or 05/10, Rita Book, Chf Acct (909)999-9999 cc 27-M1, cc 10-M2, & cc
31-10k
This notation would be adequate for an event of normal significance. For larger or more unusual
events, more detail should be included. In the example, comment codes were preceded by a “cc”
to distinguish them from other numerical details.
Other examples of annotation for normal data events:
Closed 7/10
or cc 86 7/10

Business was closed on July 10th.

Prior qtr data in
error, rptd cor.

Data reported incorrectly for prior quarters; it is
now being reported correctly. Back quarter
corrections may or may not be available.

OOB Q3
or cc 86 Q3

Unit was Out of Business in the 3rd Quarter.

Correction:
Emp M1 and T.Wages
Emp cont: Ida Nough 6/8

Notation of a correction and source.

cc 31, 7/10
Higher than normal
bonuses paid

Total wages verified, including substantially
higher bonuses paid.

cc 03, 7/12
Added another
shift of workers

Employment increase due to more business and
added another shift.

cc 99, 7/15
Privatizing parts
of govt operations

Employment decrease due to privatizing
(contracting out) half of employment operations
(mailroom and billing).

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Editing Micro Data in the States

Page 9-35

While it is up to the analyst to be able to decipher their own notes, some effort should be made
so that all analysts are able to retrace the others' steps. Common methods would also aid in
training new analysts.

Closing a File
Normally the investigation of records results in either a correction or documentation of
anomalous data. At the time of the submittal of the quarterly EQUI file, it is expected that all
data are clean – corrected or updated with comments. Remaining questionable data will be
identified by the BLS edit and are to be corrected or commented on during the cleanup period.
However, it is possible that some questions are not resolved by that time. An accurate correction
may not be possible until the following quarter, or later. This can be frustrating to an analyst
who wishes to “finish” a quarter and submit a “clean” file. The analyst must understand that
they are seeking to achieve the highest level of quality in the allotted time using every means
available.

9.11 Improving Data Quality
Although the edit review process will continuously undergo refinement and improvement, it will
always require the analyst’s judgment. Throughout the micro edit, the analyst will use his/her
own discretion, based on past experience in reviewing the industry or individual account, to
decide if the suspect record warrants further investigation or can be bypassed.
These are examples of the kinds of familiarity an analyst gains through editing:











Seasonal events such as harvests, tourism, holidays, hunting seasons, and layoffs
Industry employment and wage patterns
Industry locations
General growth or decline of industries
Emerging industries
Related industries, and the nature of their relationship
Opening or closings of specific sites
Past telephone contacts
Experiences with other reporters in the same industry
General economic conditions

By working the quarterly files, in conjunction with the annual refiling, an analyst is exposed to
nearly every facet of the state’s economy. With each quarter’s edit, the analyst will accumulate
background knowledge that contributes greatly to the overall quality of the data.

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

May 2019

Page 10-1

Chapter 10 – Macro File and the Integrated Edit
The standard state systems (EXPO-202 and WIN-202) and the national office system all generate
macro files from their micro data. The integrated edit screens basic macro file cells for
reasonable levels of aggregated economic data, while applying similar editing to the micro
records that make up the cells. Since the macro file depends on the micro data, the integrated
edit promotes the resolution of questionable data encountered on the macro records by
associating the flagged macro data with specific micro records. Macro records cannot be
corrected independently but must be corrected by making adjustments to the micro records.
Where the suspect data are verified as accurate, they should be explained by assigning comment
codes (and sometimes narrative comments) to applicable micro records.
The states also generate macro data summary files and send copies to their regional office. The
states, the national office, and the regional offices review these data files to find questionable
large data fluctuations at the statewide level by various industry aggregates for all ownership
codes.
------------------------- Contents of Chapter 10 ------------------------ 

10.1 Aggregating Reporting Units by County, Ownership, and Industry Codes
10.2 Macro Level of the Integrated Edit
10.3 Code Changes and Macro Data
10.3.1 Code Change Integration for Noneconomic Code Changes
10.3.2 Other Code Changes
10.4 Macro Data Review

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-2

10.1 Aggregating Reporting Units by County, Ownership,
and Industry Codes
Micro data in the QCEW program are reported at the establishment level. Each record – each
reporting unit – on the state micro database typically represents one establishment. Reporting
Unit Numbers (RUNs) are assigned to each micro record, and RUNs must be unique within each
Unemployment Insurance (UI) account. Every record on a state's system must have a unique UI
Account Number/RUN combination because these two fields in combination are its identifying
or "key" fields.
The micro data are aggregated to higher levels at several points in the quarterly processing cycle.
The basic aggregation used in the QCEW program is the county-ownership-six digit NAICS cell.
One "macro" record is created for each basic cell, showing the combined employment and wage
data of all reporting units (all micro records) that have the same unique combination of county
code, ownership code, and 6-digit industry code. These three codes in combination are the
identifying or key fields of the macro record.
Each quarter, the micro data elements that are aggregated on the macro file in the integrated edit
include:






Number of Establishments
First Month Employment
Second Month Employment
Third Month Employment
Total Quarterly Wages

At least eight quarters of macro data are available. Information about macro files and processing
in the QCEW processing systems appears in the user documentation for these systems.
Additional data elements may be aggregated for other purposes. Higher levels of aggregation are
generated for publication (see Appendix U).
The state systems and the national office system generate macro files based on the NAICS
industry code. Information about NAICS coding appears in Section 2.1.5.
Some micro records are excluded from all aggregations, so they are never represented on macro
records. The following exclusions apply:


Master (MEEI 2) records are excluded because they do not represent individual
establishments. Instead, master records represent the combined state total of all worksites
(establishments) in a multi-establishment UI account. The economic data of a master record
duplicates the combined data of its subunit (worksite) records. The data from the subunits
(and not the master) are used on the macro file because the subunit records carry the accurate
county and industry codes for each establishment.

May 2019



QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-3

Records that are inactive or pending (records with Status Code 2, 3, or 9) are also excluded
from the macro file. Establishments that are inactive should not contain economic data since
they are not operating in the reference quarter. Establishments in pending status are
generally set up in advance to provide greater detail of economic data in a future quarter.
The inclusion of inactive or pending records might duplicate the employment and wage data
on active records. (See appendix B for Status code definitions.)

In the national office system, micro records are excluded if the Type of Coverage Code is 8 (not
UI- or UCFE-covered). Additional exclusions include records with County, Ownership, or
NAICS fields with all zeroes or non-numeric data.
States send only micro data to the national office on the Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment
Insurance (EQUI) files. In both the national office and the states, the macro data are generated
from the micro data. No changes or corrections are made to macro data directly. Instead, all
corrections are made at the micro level, after which the macro data can be re-aggregated when
needed.
As Section 10.4 describes, the states also generate macro data summary files at several points in
the quarterly processing cycle and send them via e-mail to their regional office. These files are
generated at higher levels of aggregation than the macro cells described above (the macro file
used by the integrated edit). The macro data summary files are used for data review purposes
only and are not used for publication or provided to data users.

10.2 Macro Level of the Integrated Edit
The integrated edit screens basic cell macro data and micro data in combination, applying similar
editing at both levels. This approach is intended to flag suspect data that are significant at the
macro level but that can be identified and corrected at the micro level. The macro edits are not
applied above the basic macro cell level. For example, it is possible to create Metropolitan
Statistical Area and statewide macro data cells from the micro data, but these cells are neither
created nor edited. Macro cells above the six-digit NAICS level are also not generated for the
integrated edits. This practice saves computer time by not running higher level macro data
through edits. However, higher level macro data are shown on the edit output and should guide a
top down review and prioritization of edit flags. A top down review of macro data is essential
for state and BLS publications. Flagged micro records appear on EQUI edit output Tables 9A
and 13B. Aid in prioritization can be found in the discussion of Table 2A (state totals) in Section
13.2.2.
The following are the macro edits. Appendix F (Edit Conditions and Formulas) explains in
detail how they operate.
Level 5 -- Significant Employment & Wage Macro Edits

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

May 2019

Edit Code
089-W
090-W
091-W
092-W
093-W
094-W

Page 10-4

Edit Message
WIN-202 Only: Month 1 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test
Parameters
WIN-202 Only: Month 2 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test
Parameters
EXPO & BLS only: Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
WIN-202 Only: Month 3 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test
Parameters
AQW Change is Significantly > Parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile
AQW Range
Average Employment is Significantly > Parameter, but Total Wages = 0
Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages Is Significantly > Parameter

Level 6 – Warning Macro Edits
Edit Code
126-W
127-W
130-W
131-W
134-W
135-W
136-W
137-W
138-W

Edit Message
EXPO & BLS only: Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change > Parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW Range
Average Employment > Parameter, but Total Wages = 0
Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages > Parameter
Number of Establishments out of Range
New or Discontinued Macro Record
WIN-202 Only: Month 1 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test
Parameters
WIN-202 Only: Month 2 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test
Parameters
WIN-202 Only: Month 3 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test
Parameters

All the macro edits are Priority "A" edits as described in Section 13.3.3 or Appendix F. This
means that macro flags should receive the highest priority for data review and cleanup. Before
the deliverable EQUI file is transmitted each quarter, these flags should be corrected (by
correcting data on the micro records) or explained (by assigning comment codes or narrative
comments to micro records). For most of the edits listed, the micro and macro records are edited
using identical or very similar formulas. This methodology results in consistent micro and
macro edits. States cannot correct macro records directly, but must correct the micro record(s)
that have caused the macro record to flag.
The first six edits listed, 089 through 094, are Level 5 edits (Significant Employment and Wage
edits), while the rest are at edit Level 6 (Warning Edits). For each macro edit that screens
employment or wage levels, there is a corresponding micro edit that uses the same edit code and
message to flag establishments. Edits 134 and 135, which focus on the number of reporting units
in a county-ownership-industry cell, are performed only at the macro level. Edit 134 flags a
significant change in the number of reporting units (micro records) in the cell from one quarter to

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-5

the next. Edit 135 flags whole macro cells that never existed before or that cease to exist. Edit
135 is related to micro edits 096-W and 139-W that flag new micro records as well as to edit
140-W that flags discontinued micro records.
As with the micro edits discussed in Section 9.2, several of the Level 6 macro edits are the same
as Level 5 edits, but performed with smaller [lesser value] parameters or tolerances:
Significant
Level 5 Edit Code
091
092
093
094

Warning
Level 6 Edit Code
126
127
130
131

Edit Description
Monthly Employment Change
AQW Change
Employment Without Wages
Wages Without Employment

The difference between a Level 5 edit and its equivalent Level 6 edit is typically based on a
multiplier parameter. A crucial parameter or tolerance in the Level 6 edit is multiplied by the
corresponding multiplier parameter. If the appropriate data condition exceeds the
parameter/tolerance times the multiplier, the system assigns the Level 5 flag. If the data
condition exceeds the parameter/tolerance but does not exceed the parameter/tolerance times the
multiplier, the system assigns the Level 6 flag. This means that Level 5 flags identify data that
are questionable at a greater order of magnitude than Level 6 flags. Therefore, Level 5 flags
require more attentive review and, if the state verifies the data as accurate, a clear explanation via
comment codes or narrative comments.
As an example of the difference between edit levels, edits 094 and 131 flag cells with zero
employment in all three months and with significant wages. This pair of edits uses a wage
parameter whose default is $25,000, and a multiplier parameter whose default is 3. In the current
quarter, a hypothetical macro cell has zero employment but has Total Wages of $50,000. The
$50,000 wages on the macro record exceed the wage parameter and therefore the cell is flagged
by the edit. However, the wages do not exceed $75,000 (the wage parameter times the multiplier
parameter). Therefore, the integrated edit assigns the Level 6 flag 131-W rather than the more
serious Level 5 flag 094-W.
Options: Micro Edits Only, or the Full Integrated Edit
The standard state processing systems give states the option of editing current quarter data either
at the micro level only or at both micro and macro levels together (the integrated edit). Early in
the quarter, there are advantages to editing at only the micro level, since the current quarter's data
may not be reported or may not be available for a significant portion of the state's reporting units.
This allows the state staff to edit, correct, and assign comments before processing and reviewing
the macro data. The integrated edit requires that both reported and imputed data (where
necessary) are present. The macro portion of the integrated edit will not give accurate results if it
is run so early that numerous reporting units have missing data and cannot be aggregated to the
macro level. Imputation must be run for the units with missing data (as described in Chapter 8)
before running the full integrated edit.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-6

On the other hand, there are advantages to running the integrated edit fairly early in the cycle.
State staff will find it easier to evaluate the impact of micro edit flags on the macro data, easier to
monitor industry patterns, and easier to review all edit flags before the EQUI deliverable is due.
There are several processing options, described in Section 12.1 and Appendix E, which allow the
state to make the most advantageous tradeoffs.
Situations That Cause Macro Flags
Employment or wage changes should be reviewed in the state systems prior to EQUI submittal
using the macro edits, macro screens and edit output. Macro records are impacted by micro
records and can flag for a variety of reasons, including:
1. Employment or wages change significantly on one or more of the micro records that
comprise a significant portion of the macro cell. This is the situation the integrated edit
normally identifies.
2. One or more micro records shifts from one cell to another cell, causing a large change in the
macro cell’s employment and/or wage levels, as discussed in Section 10.3. Micro records
(establishments) shift cells whenever a change occurs in their county, ownership, or industry
codes from one quarter to the next, thus impacting the macro data. This shift will impact two
macro records (the one gaining employment and wages and the one losing employment and
wages). The proper occasions and timing for changes to these classification codes are
described in Section 2.3.
3. Micro records in the cell begin operations (births), cease operations (deaths), or otherwise
change in ways that include or exclude them from the macro cell. For example, a record may
change its Status Code from 9 (pending) to 1 (active) and thus enter the cell. When these
types of micro record changes are large enough they will cause the macro cell to flag in the
integrated edit.
4. Multi-establishment breakouts and collapses. For example, a record with Reporting Unit
Number 00000 may change its Multi Establishment Indicator (MEEI) Code from 1 (single
unit account) to 2 (master record) and the new subunits under the master record may, in
effect, leave the cell. When these types of micro record changes are large enough they will
cause the macro cell to flag in the integrated edit. Employment and wage changes in macro
records due to changes in reporting by multi-establishments are generally considered
noneconomic code changes. Follow the procedures described in Chapter 11.
5. Predecessor and successor changes. For example, if an establishment is sold and moves in its
entirety from one UI account to another, the predecessor record must be inactivated (with
Status Code 2 and an End of Liability Date) and the successor must become active (with
Status Code 1 and a Date of Initial Liability) at the proper time. Inaccurate timing may
create an overlap or gap in the reporting of the establishment’s data for specific quarter(s),
causing the macro data for the quarter(s) in question to incorrectly appear high or low.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-7

Employment and wage changes in macro records due to predecessor and successor micro
record changes are generally considered noneconomic code changes. Follow the procedures
described in Chapter 11.
6. A significant portion of employment or wage data in the macro cell are imputed rather than
reported. This can occur in the early stages of quarterly processing. The imputed data may
vary significantly from the actual, reported data. Replacing the imputed data with reported
data may increase or reduce the fluctuation in the cell and may therefore cause different edit
outcomes.
7. Employment or wage data in the micro records that make up the macro cell are missing. This
can happen when partial updates to micro records zero out the values not updated, or records
that have been estimated for two quarters are not estimated for a third quarter.

10.3 Code Changes and Macro Data
The classification codes that identify and define the macro cell are the county, ownership, and
industry codes. If one or more of these codes on a micro record is changed from one quarter to
the next, then that reporting unit moves from one macro cell to another. This movement changes
the economic data in both cells, and may affect editing in both cells when the edit compares data
between quarters.
The Sstate may change classification codes for various reasons. Code changes fall into three
basic types, as discussed in Section 2.3 and summarized below. The timing for implementing
these code changes differs, as explained in Section 2.3.2.
1. Changes from Unclassified to Classified Codes – These changes typically occur when a
reporting unit is originally established on the state system using unclassified industry or
county codes (for example, County 999). When adequate information is obtained to assign a
specific valid code, the state should introduce the code change onto to the file immediately,
in any quarter.
2. Economic Code Changes – The state makes these changes at the time of a true economic
event or by the end of the thirty-day clean up period of the quarter in which the event
occurred. The time of the code change must be identifiable and not a gradual shift. For
example, if a retail sales operation relocates to another county, and the state learns of the
move in time to include the new county code in the data for the quarter when the move
occurred, the change is considered economic. These changes should also be implemented
immediately, in any quarter. Please note that corrections to coding are not economic code
changes.
3. Noneconomic Code Changes – Noneconomic code changes include code changes for which
it cannot be determined whether the previous code was incorrectly assigned, or when a
change occurred between accurately assigned codes but was not reflected in the EQUI file for

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-8

the quarter in which it occurred. Most noneconomic code changes are identified during the
Annual Refiling Survey (ARS). These code changes must be reflected in the first quarter
only. The next section describes how the macro edit uses a special process to accommodate
code changes that are properly identified and processed as noneconomic.

10.3.1 Code Change Integration for Noneconomic Code Changes
When the change in a reporting unit's classification codes is noneconomic, the state should
follow the procedures in Chapter 11 to place that unit onto the Code Change Supplement (CCS)
file. The state and the national office systems will then reflect that code change on the Summary
of Differences file. The Summary of Differences file is described in Section 11.6 and its file
layout appears in Appendix M.
The macro portion of the integrated edit uses the Summary of Differences file when editing first
quarter, in a process called code change integration. Summary of Differences data are used to
minimize the effect of the code changes by making a temporary adjustment to the following data
elements on the macro record:






Number of Establishments in first quarter
January Employment (Month 1 employment in first quarter)
February Employment (Month 2 employment in first quarter)
March Employment (Month 3 employment in first quarter)
Total Quarterly Wages in first quarter

Code change integration in the editing process compensates for the data fluctuations caused by
the movement of units in and out of macro cells from fourth quarter to first quarter, provided that
this movement (these code changes) appear on the CCS. Therefore, this temporary adjustment to
first quarter data sharply reduces the effects of noneconomic code changes in certain macro edits.
Each noneconomic code change identified on a CCS record (and a micro file record) affects two
macro cells: the cell from which the data leave, and the cell into which the data enter. More than
one CCS record enter or leave the same cell; on occasion, some records are entering the same
cell that other records are leaving. The net change on the cell may be positive, negative, or zero.
This net change is applied during the temporary macro editing adjustment.
For purposes of code change integration, the Summary of Differences information shows net
changes at the cell level for January, February, and March employment; for first quarter wages;
and for the number of reporting units. The Current Employment Statistics (CES) program and
other data users need CCS and Summary of Differences files showing December Employment
and Fourth Quarter Wages. The CCS and Summary of Difference files include December
through March employment as well as Total Quarterly Wages for fourth and first quarter.
The state and the national office systems use non-adjusted data for comparison when editing
second, third, and fourth quarter data. The systems use adjusted data for comparison when

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-9

editing first quarter data. Though CCS adjustments are temporarily applied to first quarter data
when first quarter is being edited, only non-adjusted data are maintained on the macro and micro
files, including the macro and micro files for the first quarter. Also, keep in mind that prior
quarter data may be edited along with current quarter data during current quarter processing. For
example, first quarter data may be edited during second quarter processing. During that second
quarter processing, the first quarter data are temporarily adjusted when the first quarter is the
quarter being edited. If second quarter is the quarter being edited, data for first and second
quarter are left unadjusted, and second quarter is edited as described in Appendix F.
Code change integration works each time first quarter data are processed through the integrated
edit as either the current or prior quarter. The requirement that noneconomic code changes be
properly identified and held for first quarter activation ensures that all users benefit from the
special features applied to first quarter editing. These features are not available when second,
third, and fourth quarter data are edited.
The following macro edits for employment, wages, and number of reporting units are adjusted by
code change integration in first quarter:
Edit Code
091-W
092-W
126-W
127-W
134-W

Edit Message
Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change is Significantly > Parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile
AQW Range
Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change > Parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW Range
Number of Establishments out of Range

Code change integration is only performed for the most recent first quarter on the file. For
example, when the current processing quarter on the state system is the 2018/1, the system will
use Summary of Differences information to temporarily adjust 2018/1 data when that quarter is
processed through the integrated edit.
When first quarter is processed through the integrated edit, macro edits 091-W and 126-W
compare each month of employment to the previous month, and then to the same month a year
ago. January is compared to December and to last January; February is compared to January and
to last February; March is compared to February and to last March. Edits 092-W and 127-W
compare first quarter wages to fourth quarter wages and then to year-ago first quarter wages.
Therefore, the net change due to noneconomic code changes is calculated for the employment of
each month (January, February, and March) and for first quarter wages. The number of
establishments entering and leaving the cell is also calculated. The net changes are subtracted
from January, February, and March employment, from first quarter wages, and from the first
quarter number of establishments. Then those fields are edited using the normal macro edit
formulas. By making these adjustments for movement due to noneconomic code changes, first
quarter data can usually pass the edits that compare them to the period immediately prior.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-10

States may find it necessary to run the integrated edit (including the code change integration
routine) more than once when processing first quarter, since the first quarter cleanup process
may include additional industry, county, or ownership code changes on micro records. Once
corrections are made, corrected summary of differences data can be generated and used in a final
integrated edit before the state generates the first quarter deliverable. The national office re-runs
the data through the full integrated edit (both micro and macro editing) whenever a state provides
updates.
Another aspect of code change integration is the display of Summary of Differences data on edit
listings. Sometimes the edit adjustment does not remove all macro edit flags. When a macro
cell is flagged for any reason and is displayed on edit listings, any Summary of Differences data
for that cell are displayed with the macro data. In Section 13.3, EXHIBIT 13P (EQUI Table
9A), Summary of Differences data are displayed just below the flagged macro data.

10.3.2 Other Code Changes
Code change integration controls the effects of noneconomic code changes on the first quarter
macro edit; however, various situations can lead to other types of code changes. Since code
changes move micro data from one macro cell to another, they can cause one or more macro
flags. Where the code changes are inappropriate (or are introduced at the wrong time), the state
should make the necessary correction to the classification code. This normally requires (1)
recoding the establishment to its former classification, (2) waiting until the first quarter of the
following year to make the code change, and (3) including the record on the CCS. Where the
code change is proper (or are economic in nature), the states should assign the appropriate
comment code to the micro record that changes. Where the impact of the code change is
significant, also adding an appropriate narrative comment can help data users interpret the
situation more accurately and may preclude follow-up questions from the national office and
BEA. Comment codes and narrative comments are discussed in Appendix I and in Section 9.6.
Changes from Unclassified County or Industry Codes
When a reporting unit with the unclassified industry code (NAICS 999999) can be assigned a
specific, valid code, the code change should be made immediately, in the current quarter.
Similarly, when a unit that carries any of the county equivalent codes (County 995-999) can be
changed to a specific code, the change should occur immediately. Code changes of this type
improve the accuracy of the data, but may cause macro edit flags as the units shift between cells.
Assign comment code 80 (change in unclassified to classified) to the affected micro records.
Changes from classified to unclassified must follow the rules of normal noneconomic code
changes.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-11

Economic Code Changes
Economic code changes are changes from one specific, accurately assigned industry, county, or
ownership code to another. This type of change must be implemented in time to reflect the
actual economic event (typically a change in business activity or a relocation). It should be
reflected in QCEW data in the same quarter which is affected by the economic event. Refer to
Section 12.2.3 for additional information on the QCEW Corrections Policy.
Corrections to coding (such as errors) are never economic and must be introduced in first quarter
data. As an example, if a state is working on their second quarter data and identify a coding
error that occurred in first quarter, the state can go back to first quarter and make that correction,
rather than holding the correction until next year’s first quarter. See Section 2.3.2 for additional
information concerning timing and reporting of code changes.
As with other types of code changes, economic code changes may cause the unit's present or
former macro cell to flag. The state and the national office systems use a data element to
identify these changes, called the Economic Code Change Indicator (discussed in Appendix B).
Predecessor/Successor Transitions
When an establishment changes owners and is transferred to a new UI/RUN account, new
information on the business activity or geographic location may become available that requires a
change to the industry, county, or ownership codes. (Procedures are described in Section 5.3.) If
the unit has significant employment, the code change should be treated as noneconomic.
For smaller units (with 25 or fewer workers in the last month before or the first month after the
change of ownership), the state may assign the correct codes in any quarter. This policy is
spelled out in Section 5.3.
Code changes of this sort can cause a macro edit flag where the macro cell is small, or if several
of these code changes occur for the same cell. Assign comment code 93 (full
predecessor/successor transfer) to the micro records in question, and provide the appropriate
Predecessor or Successor UI/RUNs as described in Section 5.1.
Breakouts and Consolidations of Multi-unit UI Accounts
When a UI account reporting as a single unit begins to report as a multi, some of the new subunit
records may belong in a different county or industry than the former single unit. Similarly, if an
account will no longer report as a multi but will be consolidated to report as a single-unit
account, classification coding may change. Some subunits may be inactivated whose county or
industry codes differ from the codes on the collapsed single.
These changes in reporting level can move employment and wage data between macro cells,
even though no economic event caused the movement. Code changes of this sort are
noneconomic code changes. They must be held until the following first quarter and assigned

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-12

the necessary coding to include them on the CCS and Summary of Differences. Code changes of
this type are explained in Sections 5.5 (for breakouts) and 5.6 (for consolidations).

10.4 Macro Data Review
The states and regional offices are required to review high level macro data in addition to
reviewing output from the integrated edit after the EQUI has been submitted. Reviewing
aggregated data for consistency as well as irregularities can be a powerful supplement to the
standard set of edits.
As explained further below, states generate and send a macro data summary file at specified
times in the production cycle to their regional office. Regional offices and states review the data
using the CES/QCEW Macro Roll-Up Spreadsheet and correct the data as necessary. This
spreadsheet is generated using the macro data summary file as well as CES data. The
spreadsheet provides graphical and tabular representations of aggregated QCEW data. States
should aggregate the data in the spreadsheet to statewide.
The CES/QCEW Macro Roll-Up Spreadsheet was developed and is maintained in the regional
offices. It is used to compare the state QCEW employment data against state CES data and to
compare current year QCEW trends against prior year QCEW patterns in both employment and
wages.
This review will alert staff at all levels to reporting problems in either of the programs, as well as
to any large data discrepancy. This review should uncover any large data errors before the initial
EQUI and subsequent update files are submitted to the national office. It also reduces the time
spent uncovering and tracking large data and production problems in both the regional office and
the national office.
Before the state generates and sends the initial quarterly EQUI file to the national office, the
regional office reviews the macro data using this tool. The regional office reviews each update
file in the same way. State QCEW staff must use the same tool, or similar approaches, to
examine their own data to identify potential problems. The regional office sends the latest
spreadsheet as a zipped Excel file via e-mail using a specific naming convention to the national
office (see Appendix S), where it is used to supplement the data review described in Section
13.3.1.
This macro data summary file is created by the state systems both as a separate job and as a part
of the job that creates the EQUI file.
The national office compares the spreadsheets against EQUI edit listings as well as the listing of
state ownership totals (BLS Table 2A). The national office will alert the regional office (and
system developers, if appropriate) to potential errors or significant data discrepancies. The
regional office will research the problem, contact the state if needed, and report their findings to
the national office.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-13

Processing Sequence
Each state is required to generate a macro data summary (using the appropriate features of their
standard state processing system) at the following points in the quarterly processing cycle, and to
send the file to the regional office.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Two weeks before generating the initial EQUI file
The day the initial EQUI is generated
Two to five days before generating an EQUI update file (optional, recommended)
The day each EQUI update file is generated (optional, recommended)
The day each EQUI subset file is generated (after rebuilding the macro)

At points 2 and 4 (generating a macro data summary file on the same day as an initial EQUI file
or EQUI update file), the macro data summary and the EQUI file should be fully consistent, with
no intervening updates to the micro data. States should limit the number of update files to no
more than one per quarter. If serious problems are identified, a subset file may be submitted
from the state only upon receiving the national office approval. States should strive to send in an
EQUI file that does not require an update file. If the quality of the state’s EQUI file requires an
EQUI update file, it must be transmitted to the national office in time to meet the cleanup
deadline. Regional offices work with their states to ensure that the updated data are edited and
reviewed prior to submission of the update transactions to the national office. State processing
schedules may need to be adjusted to allow for this editing and review. States and regional
offices also need to allow time for the updates to be received and processed by the national
office.
Steps for Macro Data Review
The state and regional office follow these steps each time a macro data summary is required.
1. The state generates the macro data summary and sends it to the regional office as a plain
text file, using a standard naming convention. The files must follow the following
naming convention:
MacroYYQSTVn.txt
YY = Two-digit year
Q = Quarter
ST = Two-character state abbreviation
V = File version: Use I for initial files. Use U for update files.
n = File number: Use 1 if it is the first initial file or first update file.
Use 2 for the second version of either file.
2. For example, a macro data summary file corresponding to an initial EQUI file from
Delaware, containing 2017, first quarter data would be named Macro171DEI1. The
regional office reviews the data using the CES/QCEW Roll-Up Spreadsheet. If any large
data errors are found, the regional office notifies state QCEW staff immediately. When

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Macro File and the Integrated Edit

Page 10-14

the macro data summary is generated at the same time as an EQUI file, the regional
office also notifies the national office of any large data errors.
3. The state reviews the macro data summary using the CES/QCEW Roll-Up Spreadsheet.
When the macro data summary is generated at the same time as an EQUI file, the state
conducts this review before transmitting the file.
4. The state researches and corrects (if necessary) any data discrepancies or errors.
5. The state QCEW staff alerts state CES staff of any large data errors.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-1

Chapter 11 – Code Change Data: Concepts,
Rules, and BLS Processing
The Code Change Supplement (CCS) is a file of reporting units with a noneconomic change to
one or more of the essential classification codes – industry, ownership, county, or (for certain
States) township. Both the state and the national office systems generate the CCS and its more
aggregated equivalent, the Summary of Differences file, using data from their state systems.
Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file transactions keep state and the
national office versions of these files essentially consistent.
This chapter describes how the CCS and Summary of Differences files are generated and
processed in the national office. Processing in the standard state systems (EXPO and WIN) is
somewhat similar. The user documentation for EXPO and WIN provide detailed instructions
about performing essential tasks for CCS processing.
------------------------- Contents of Chapter 11 ------------------------11.1 Overview of CCS Processing
11.2 Micro File Data Elements for the CCS
11.3 Generating the CCS File
11.4 Micro Edits and EQUI Updates for the CCS
11.4.1 Micro Edits That Affect the CCS
11.4.2 Updating Response Codes, Old Fields, and Other Data
11.4.3 The National Office System Reassigns Some ARS Response Codes
11.5 Code Changes for Special Cases
11.5.1 Multi-unit Breakouts with Code Changes
11.5.2 Multi-unit Collapses with Code Changes
11.5.3 Predecessors and Successors with Code Changes
11.5.4 How the System Handles Missing Employment or Wages
11.5.5 When Out-of-Business Units Have No Successor
11.6 Generating the Summary of Differences File for the Integrated Edit
11.7 Printed Output from CCS Processing
11.7.1 CCS Table 1: Response Code Change
11.7.2 CCS Tables 1A and 1B: Code Changes for Large Records
11.7.3 CCS Table 2: CCS Creation Counts Report
11.7.4 Missing Code Changes, Problem Response Codes, and Other Reports
11.7.5 Summary of Differences Reports
11.8 Additional National Office Processing of Code Change Data
11.9 Cleaning CCS Data

11.1 Overview of CCS Processing
The national office system generates the CCS directly from its micro file (the QCEW database of
micro level reporting units) by examining and comparing certain relevant fields. The CCS is
primarily used for first quarter processing. For each affected reporting unit, the CCS file shows
noneconomic changes made to industry, area, or ownership codes. Noneconomic code changes
are held until first quarter, so code changes on the CCS represent changes made in the State
system from fourth quarter to first quarter.
State staff are responsible for identifying the reporting units that belong on the CCS, including
those introduced by EDI Center records, and for making the necessary updates in their State
processing system that will place these units on the CCS. Noneconomic code changes that are
properly entered on the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) Control file are automatically included on
the CCS file, both in the States and in the national office. If State staff do not enter the code
changes on the ARS Control file, they must enter them directly to their State system and include
the necessary data elements (described in Section 11.2).
On the CCS file, the essential data elements include the Old and New fields. The Old fields (Old
NAICS, Old Ownership, Old County, and Old Township) are similar in purpose to the Old fields
on the EQUI and the State system. They show where the employment and wage data for that
unit were reported in fourth quarter. The New fields (New NAICS, New Ownership, New
County, and New Township) show where the data have moved in first quarter, whenever the first
quarter code is different from the fourth quarter code. The CCS record also includes some of the
employment and wage data fields for fourth and first quarters to show the magnitude of the
change.
EQUI corrections and updates can change the micro file in ways that affect the CCS, so the
national office system regenerates the CCS each time an EQUI file is processed. This begins
with the quarterly deliverable for first quarter and continues through the second quarter EQUI
clean-up period. The State systems translate changes into EQUI transaction records for the
national office, and the national office system uses the EQUI records to update its own micro
file. This keeps the national office micro file consistent with the State’s file, at least for active,
covered reporting units in recent quarters. BLS provided its CCS software to the developers of
the State systems so that all the systems can use the same logic for generating the CCS and
Summary of Differences files (and for other CCS-related processing). This means that the CCS
and Summary of Differences in the States can remain largely consistent with the files generated
by the national office.
The Summary of Differences gives CCS information aggregated to a macro level. For a
county/ownership/industry cell affected by a CCS record (or records), the Summary of
Differences reports the employment, wages, and number of units entering or leaving that cell.
The national office system regenerates the Summary of Differences file each time it processes an
EQUI file and generates the CCS. Therefore the Summary of Differences corresponds exactly to
the CCS – that is, all changes to the CCS are reflected in the Summary of Differences.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-3

For purposes of the CCS, a noneconomic change to "area" normally consists of a change to the
FIPS county code. However, for States that are required to report township codes on the EQUI,
a change to the township code may also be noneconomic, even if this change occurs within the
same county. In other words, for certain States (the New England States and New Jersey) a CCS
record may report a change only to the township code. For all States, the aggregated Summary
of Differences file (in contrast to the base CCS itself) reflects noneconomic code changes only to
county, ownership, and industry code, not to township.
As with the macro file, the system excludes master records (records with Multi Establishment
Employer Indicator (MEEI) of 2) from the CCS and Summary of Differences files. Unlike the
macro file, the system can include inactive records on the CCS and Summary of Differences.
This is because inactive records may provide some of the essential code change information for
special cases such as predecessors with code changes and multi-unit collapses. This is explained
in Section 11.5, and in Sections 5.3 and 5.6.
The CCS and Summary of Differences only apply for the most recent first quarter. For example,
suppose the current processing quarter is the 2020 first quarter (2020/1). State and the national
office micro files will contain data for both 2020/1 and 2019/4. Under the BLS correction policy
described in Section 12.2.3, both 2020/1 and 2019/4 will be unlocked and available for updating.
Nonetheless, the system will generate a CCS and Summary of Differences only for the most
recent year (in this example, 2020). Code change data for earlier years would have little if any
value for data users.

11.2 Micro File Data Elements for the CCS
Beginning with the first quarter EQUI deliverable and continuing through second quarter, the
national office system will use the following non-quarterly fields when generating and then regenerating the CCS:
•
•
•
•
•
•

ARS Response Code
ARS Refile Year
Old NAICS
Old Ownership
Old County
Old Township

These fields must be correct on the State and the national office micro files for the CCS records
to be correctly produced.
The national office system (and the State systems as well) use the ARS Response Code and ARS
Refile Year to recognize records that are intended for the CCS. The system also compares first
quarter classification codes (NAICS code, ownership, county, and sometimes township) to the
“Old” fields to determine whether a true code change is present. The system uses the MEEI code
to exclude master records. It uses the Status Code to exclude records that are not active in either

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-4

first or fourth quarter. ARS Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and the Old fields are nonquarterly fields (occurring only once on the micro file) while the other fields mentioned are
quarterly.
Once the system chooses a record for the CCS, it copies a number of data elements from the
micro file to the CCS. The complete list of CCS data elements is given in Section 11.3.
ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year
The ARS Response Codes that signal the presence of a noneconomic code change are these:
46 – Clean record with CCS updates
50 – Code change from non-ARS sources
The ARS Response Code may be very recent, or it may have been updated in earlier years.
Therefore the system also uses the ARS Refile Year field in choosing records for the CCS. If the
ARS Response Code is 46 or 50, and if the ARS Refile Year is current, then the record is
included (although there must also be a true CCS code change, as discussed below). “Current”
in this case means that the ARS Refile Year is the same as the year of the most recent first
quarter.
The following examples illustrate how these two fields are used. For all three cases, assume that
the national office has begun processing first quarter data, so 2020/1 is the micro file’s current
quarter.
1. A record that was surveyed in the FY 2020 ARS includes a code change that the state entered
onto its ARS Control file. The record has an ARS Response Code of 46. When the state
processing system passed FY 2020 ARS data to the micro file, it assigned an ARS Refile Year of
2020. Therefore this reporting unit carries ARS Response Code 46 and ARS Refile Year 2020
on the EQUI and the national office micro file. If all other necessary conditions are met, this
record will be included on the CCS.
2. A micro file record has an ARS Response Code of 46 and ARS Refile Year of 2019. This
indicates that it had a noneconomic code change in the previous year’s ARS (and was included
on the 2019 CCS.) The record will not be included on the CCS now because the ARS Refile
Year field is not current. That is, 2019/1 is not the most recent first quarter on the micro file.
3. A micro file record has ARS Refile Year 2020 and ARS Response Code 41 (meaning:
Reviewed, no CCS code changes). Even though the ARS Refile Year is current, the system will
not put the record onto the CCS because the ARS Response Code is not 46 or 50. Even if one or
more of the classification codes changed from 2019/4 to 2020/1 on this micro file record (for
example, a code change discovered and applied after the ARS), ARS Response Code 41 will
exclude the record from the CCS file in the national office. It will be excluded in the state
version of the CCS as well. Section 11.4.3 describes the reassignment of ARS Response Codes
by the national office system.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-5

“Old” Fields and CCS Code Changes
The following are the relevant “Old” fields on the micro file for CCS code change purposes:
•
•
•
•

Old NAICS
Old Ownership
Old County
Old Township

The system compares the Old fields with the corresponding first quarter codes (typically the
NAICS code, ownership, and county) to determine whether a true CCS code change is present.
A code change occurs when an Old field is not blank, and it differs from the first quarter code.
Remember that the CCS shows changes from fourth quarter to first quarter, so a non-blank Old
field should normally be the same as the corresponding fourth quarter classification code.
There can be special circumstances (described further in Section 11.5 and in Chapter 5) in which
the fourth quarter classification code fields cannot be used to hold the code change aside through
fourth quarter. The Old fields serve this purpose instead, and may differ from the fourth quarter
codes in those unusual circumstances.
A record has a true CCS code change if it contains at least one of the following:
•
•
•
•

An ownership code change, or
A NAICS code change other than a change from the unclassified code (from 999999), or
A county code change other than a change from a county equivalent code (from 900, 995,
996, 998, or 999), or
For New England States and New Jersey only, a township code change other than a
change from a township equivalent code (from 900, 995, 996, 998, or 999).

The county equivalent codes are defined as follows:
900 = master record
995 = Statewide, locations in more than one county, or no primary county
996 = foreign locations
998 = Out-of-State locations
999 = unknown locations
The township equivalent codes have essentially the same definitions. An area change from any
of these equivalent codes, as well as a NAICS change from 999999, is considered as a "change
from unclassified" rather than as a specific, noneconomic code change.

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-6

Consider the following examples:
Case #

Old
NAICS

First
Quarter
NAICS

Old
County

First
Quarter
County

Old Own

First
Quarter
Own

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

327215
541990
999999
721214
812332
999999
221111
562920
211112

327215
561599
322220
721214
812332
523110
221113
221320
211112

035
013
999
995
999
013
999
023
329

035
013
999
111
995
035
023
023
329

5
5
5
3
5
5
5
3
2

5
5
5
3
5
5
5
5
5

CCS
Code
Change
record?
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

1. In case 1, no Old fields differ from the corresponding first quarter code. The system will not
put this record on the CCS.
2. The record in case 2 has an industry code change from one specific, valid code to another.
Therefore if the other conditions (ARS Refile Year, ARS Response Code, and MEEI) are
met, this record will appear on the CCS.
3. Case 3's only change from Old fields to first quarter codes is an industry code change from
999999. As described in Section 2.3.2, this is a change from unclassified rather than a
noneconomic code change. It does not belong on the CCS, so ARS Response Codes 46 or 50
are not correct for this situation. If the record carries an ARS Response Code, it should be 41
(Reviewed, no CCS change).
4. Case 4 is also treated as a change from unclassified because its only code change is a county
change from one of the county equivalent codes. It will not be placed on the CCS.
5. The county code change in case 5 is like case 4. Because it is not a change from one specific
county to another, it will not appear on the CCS.
6. Even though case 6 has an industry code change from the unclassified code 999999, it also
has a legitimate, specific county code change. Therefore the system will include this record
on the CCS.
7. Case 7 also combines a change from unclassified (for county) with a legitimate, specific
noneconomic code change (for industry code). It will therefore appear on the CCS.
8. Case 8 has a code change between ownerships and industry code. Either one is sufficient to
qualify the record for the CCS. This record will appear on the CCS.
9. Case 9 has a code change from State ownership to private ownership. This record will also
appear on the CCS.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-7

For most States, the system will not consider the Old Township field when creating records for
the CCS. Township codes are required and edited only for New Jersey and the New England
States; therefore a change only to township code may be treated as noneconomic only for these
States. For example, if a record on the New Hampshire file has a township code change while
it’s county, ownership, and industry code remain the same that record will qualify for the CCS.
An identical record on the Texas file will not.
MEEI and Status Codes
Master records do not belong on the CCS and Summary of Differences files since they represent
an aggregated duplication of the real reporting units. Including master records would exaggerate
the movement of reporting units, employment, and wages between macro cells. The system
checks the MEEI code in first quarter and the preceding fourth quarter. If a record has an MEEI
of 2 (master record) in either quarter, it will not be included on the CCS.
Some records (some UI/RUNs) change from masters to single-unit records or from single-unit
records to masters when multi-unit reporters break out or collapse. These changes often occur
from fourth to first quarter. Sections 11.5.1 and 11.5.2 cover this in some detail. It is also
discussed in Chapter 5.
Breakouts and collapses of multi-unit accounts often involve subunit records that report a
noneconomic code change and that are active in only one of the two affected quarters. The
national office system checks Status Codes on records marked for the CCS to ensure that either
first quarter, fourth quarter, or both are active (Status Code = 1). If neither quarter is active, the
system excludes the record from the CCS and Summary of Differences files.

11.3 Generating the CCS File
The national office system generates the CCS file (file format shown in Appendix L) primarily
by copying data elements from qualifying records on the micro file, although it uses parameters
as well. The previous section (Section 11.2) explains how records qualify for the CCS, based on
ARS Refile Year, ARS Response Code, MEEI, Status Code, and the presence of a true CCS code
change. The essential first quarter classification codes (for most States, the county, ownership,
and industry codes) must all be present on the record. At least one Old field must be present that
differs from the equivalent first quarter code. The system will also verify that the necessary
employment and wage fields are present.
Sources for the CCS Data Elements
The national office system assigns CCS data elements as follows:
From parameters:

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-8

• State FIPS Code
• ARS Refile Year
(The documentation for your state system explains the assignment and use of parms.)
Copied from non-quarterly fields on the micro file record:
•
•
•
•

UI Account Number
Reporting Unit Number (RUN)
Employer Identification Number (EIN)
Name (Trade Name if present, otherwise the Legal Name)

Copied from the most recent first quarter on the micro file record:
•
•
•
•
•

MEEI code
January Employment – from Month 1
February Employment – from Month 2
March Employment – from Month 3
First Quarter Total Wages

Copied from the fourth quarter immediately preceding the most recent first quarter on the micro
file record:
•
•

December Employment – from Month 3
Fourth Quarter Total Wages

Copied from Old Fields and first quarter classification codes on the micro file record:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Old NAICS code
Old Ownership code
Old County code
Old Township code
New NAICS code
New Ownership code
New County code
New Township code

Fourth Quarter Fields, First Quarter Fields, Old Fields, and New Fields
The national office system copies the Old fields from the micro file record (Old NAICS, Old
Ownership, Old County, and Old Township) to the Old fields in the CCS record. The system
copies the first quarter classification code to the New field of the CCS record where it differs
from the corresponding CCS Old field.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-9

Unlike the standard state systems, the national office system can generate a CCS record if one or
more of the essential Old fields (Old NAICS, Old Ownership, or Old County) is blank. If there
are Old fields without data (that is, blank), then the national office system copies the value from
the corresponding first quarter code into the Old field of the CCS record. For example, if Old
NAICS is blank, the first quarter NAICS code from the micro file record is copied to Old NAICS
code on the CCS record.
Here are several examples. Townships are not shown because for most states, township codes
are not required and do not affect their CCS files.
Codes

Micro File
Old Field

NAICS
Ownership
County

811213
(blank)
(blank)

NAICS
Ownership
County

811211
5
005

NAICS
Ownership
County

(blank)
(blank)
013

Micro File 4th
Micro File 1st
Quarter Field
Quarter Field
Example 1
811213
811211
5
5
033
033
Example 2
811211
811211
5
5
005
033
Example 3
221113
221113
5
5
025
025

CCS Old
Field

CCS New
Field

811213
5
033

811211
(blank)
(blank)

811211
5
005

(blank)
(blank)
033

221113
5
013

(blank)
(blank)
025

Notice that all Old fields are assigned on the CCS, even when the Old field is blank on the micro
file. Meanwhile the CCS New fields are only assigned when the code changes. Where the CCS
New fields are present, they are consistent with the first quarter fields. Where the CCS New
fields are blank, the fourth quarter and first quarter fields are the same – the code did not change.
In the first two examples, the Old fields on the micro file, when present, are identical to the
fourth quarter fields. This will be the typical situation. However in Example 3, the micro file
Old fields are not consistent with the fourth quarter fields. Old County is 013 while the fourth
quarter county is 025. The system copies 013 to the Old County field on the CCS and ignores
the fourth quarter county code. There are special circumstances (discussed in Section 11.5 and
in Chapter 5) in which the fourth quarter is inactive or pending (Status Code = 2 or 9) and the
Old fields may differ from the fourth quarter fields. Example 3 could be one such case – a newly
broken out multi worksite record, with pending status in fourth quarter and active status (Status
Code = 1) in first quarter.
However in the normal case, in which the fourth quarter of the record are active, the Old fields
should be identical to the fourth quarter classification codes. The standard state systems will set
the Old fields equal to the fourth quarter codes in that case. If for some reason they differ on the
EQUI (and the national office micro file), the micro edit in the national office will assign a W
(Warning) flag, as discussed in the next section.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-10

The national office system will not create a CCS record if any of the required first quarter codes
are missing (blank). In other words, the first quarter industry, ownership, and county codes (plus
the township code for New England states and New Jersey) must all be present on the micro file.
This becomes significant when the first quarter of the record is inactive or pending, because a
blank code (for example, a blank NAICS code) is normally harmless when the quarter is not
active.

11.4 Micro Edits and EQUI Updates for the CCS
The national office system does not directly edit either the CCS or Summary of Difference files.
Instead it edits the relevant data elements, and key relationships between them, on the micro file.
Correcting these errors on their respective state system allows both the state and the national
office to generate more complete and accurate CCS files.
For some edits discussed in Section 11.4.1, an edit failure (a flag) causes the national office
system to change the ARS Response Code on its micro file. This, in turn, excludes the record
from the CCS. When the state corrects the error, the national office system changes the ARS
Response Code again in a way that allows the record to be included on the CCS. Most micro
edits do not affect the ARS Response Code and therefore do not exclude the record; however,
correcting the micro file record results in a more accurate CCS record. In the national office
system, all of the I-errors and W flags discussed in the following section will appear on Table
9B, the Micro Edits Only listing.
Section 11.4.2 explains how the content of the CCS can be changed when certain fields on the
micro file are changed (via the EQUI), especially the ARS Response Code and the Old fields.
Section 11.4.3 explains how the national office system changes ARS Response Codes.

11.4.1 Micro Edits That Affect the CCS
Some edits have no effect on the CCS (for example, edits for taxable wages, contributions, or
address fields). However, a number of micro edits related to the quality of the data copied to the
CCS, and some edit flags prevent records from being included on the CCS file in the national
office (and possibly in the states as well). To generate an accurate CCS file for their own use
and in BLS, states should update their state system with corrections to the I-errors described in
this section. They should also correct the W-flags that identify inaccurate codes or other data.
I-errors that Prevent Records from Being Included on the CCS
As discussed in Section 11.2, the national office system uses the ARS Response Code on the
micro file as a primary criterion to include records on the CCS. If ARS Response Code is not 46
or 50, then the record will not be chosen. However, the system may change the ARS Response
Code on the state system, based on what happens in micro editing. In particular, certain I-errors

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-11

cause the system to change the ARS Response Code in a way that excludes invalid data from the
CCS. When EQUI transactions correct the errors on the national office micro file, the system
changes the ARS Response Code in a way that allows the record to be selected again. This is
explained in more detail below, in Section 11.4.3.
The I-errors in question follow. The last column in this table shows which quarter's data applies.
"First" and "fourth" refer to the most recent first and fourth quarters. For example when 2020/1
is the current quarter, the national office will be creating the 2020 CCS. Invalid NAICS codes in
2019/1 through 2019/3 would require correction but would not affect the ARS Response Code –
or the CCS.
Edit
Code
010
012
013
016
031
032
033
034
065
074
075
076
078

Edit Message

Edit Quarter

Invalid NAICS Code
Invalid Ownership Code
Invalid County Code
NAICS & Ownership Inconsistent
Invalid First Month Employment
Invalid Second Month Employment
Invalid Third Month Employment
Invalid Total Wages
Inconsistent County/Township Combination
Invalid Old Ownership
Invalid Old County
Invalid Old County/Old Township Combination
Invalid Old NAICS Code

first
first
first
first
first
first
fourth and/or first
fourth and/or first
first
non-quarterly edit
non-quarterly edit
non-quarterly edit
non-quarterly edit

Edits 074, 075, 076, and 078 are performed only when the ARS Refile Year and ARS Response
Code indicate that the record is intended for this year's CCS. These edits require that the Old
fields, if not blank, contain valid codes. For example, edit 078 flags the Old NAICS code if it is
not a valid code, while edit 075 flags the Old County if it is not a valid FIPS county code for the
state or a valid county equivalent code.
Note that code 900 will flag as invalid in the Old County (and Old Township) fields. This is
because code 900 is a county (and township) equivalent code that may only be used on master
records. The CCS Old fields should identify the county-ownership-industry code macro cell
where the economic data were reported in fourth quarter. Master records are always excluded
from the macro file as well as the CCS, so the Old fields should never correspond to a master
record. As Section 11.5.2 describes, multi-unit UI accounts that collapse into a single-unit
account should never use the former master record as the source of any Old fields for the CCS.
Other CCS-related Edits

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-12

When you address Warning (W) flags for any of the employment and wage fields that will later
be copied to the CCS, you can improve the CCS data. Beyond this, there are edits that were
specifically implemented to promote a more accurate and complete CCS file.
1. Invalid ARS Response Code/Year (Edit 046-I) – If the record belongs on the CCS but its
ARS Response Code or ARS Refile Year field are invalid, it will not be included. Assigning
ARS Response Code 46 or 50 is not sufficient; a record intended for the CCS must also have
a current ARS Refile Year. If the ARS Response Code was assigned in the current ARS or in
a subsequent update to the state system, the ARS Refile Year should equal the current
processing year.
2. Expected Code Change not Made (Edit 123-W) – This edit flags records whose ARS Refile
Year and ARS Response Code signal that the record is intended for the CCS; however, the
relationship between Old fields and first quarter codes does not indicate a true CCS code
change. (A true noneconomic code change for the CCS is defined in Section 11.2). Check
the Old codes and the ARS Response Code to see which field or fields should change.
3. Code Change Back to a Recent Code (Edit 121-W) – This edit identifies records whose codes
have changed twice within the past year. Such frequent code changes are rarely appropriate,
and should be researched thoroughly. Some records with this flag may have appeared on last
year’s CCS and also qualify for this year’s CCS. The national office may require an
explanation for these units.
4. Possible Noneconomic Code Change (Edit 120-W) – This edit flags records with code
changes occurring in second, third, or fourth quarter. Such code changes should be checked
to verify that they are truly economic in nature. If the code change is noneconomic, it should
be held until first quarter and reported on the CCS, using the procedures described in the next
section. In first quarter, this edit flags records with code changes that do not carry an ARS
Response Code and ARS Refile Year for inclusion on the CCS.
5. Old Codes Are Inconsistent with 4th Quarter Codes (Edit 146-W) – This edit flags records
whose Old fields, if present, do not match the corresponding fourth quarter classification code
(for example, the Old NAICS and the fourth quarter NAICS fields contain different codes).
The edit is only performed when the ARS Refile Year and ARS Response Code indicate that
the record is intended for this year's CCS, when the record is active in fourth quarter (Status
Code = 1) and edit flags 074, 075, 076, and 078 have not been assigned.
Edit 146 reflects two characteristics of noneconomic code changes reported on the CCS:
•
•

The code change must be held until first quarter and not implemented earlier; and
CCS records report changes only from fourth quarter to first quarter, not from (for
example) third quarter to the following first quarter.

On occasion, a record in the state may carry a different classification code on the ARS
Control file than on the fourth quarter of the state system. Since the Old fields are typically
passed from the ARS Control file to the state system, a difference between the Old fields and

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-13

fourth quarter codes can occur. For example, the county code present on the FY 2020 ARS
Control file may be the one used in the 2019 first quarter. If the county code on the state
system record had an economic code change between 2019/1 and 2019/4, the Old County
field passed from the ARS Control file to the state system will differ. To accommodate these
situations, the state systems will set the Old fields on their micro files equal to the
corresponding fourth quarter classification codes, when fourth quarter was active. This
action by the state systems should prevent or minimize the instances of edit flag 146-W in the
national office.
Some records with an inactive or pending fourth quarter may belong on the CCS and should
contain Old fields; however, their Old fields might differ from their fourth quarter
classification codes. Subunit records created for a new Multiple Worksite Report (MWR)
breakout are an example. (See Section 11.5.1 and Section 5.5.) Edit 146-W will not be
performed for these records because their fourth quarter is not active. However, their first
quarter must be active to be included on the CCS.

11.4.2 Updating Response Codes, Old Fields, and Other Data
State staff can update the national office micro file by changing the same data elements on their
own state system. Their state systems generate EQUI files that apply these same changes in the
national office. State staff should make these data changes not only to correct errors, but also to
make appropriate adjustments to the content of the CCS and Summary of Differences files in the
national office (as well as the states). For example, correcting employment or wage data on the
state system and the EQUI for certain time periods also corrects the comparable data on the CCS.
As mentioned before, the state controls what records appear on the CCS file primarily by
updating the ARS Response Code. The ARS Refile Year must also be current, and Old fields
must be present that show where the economic data were reported in fourth quarter.
ARS Response Code
On the state's ARS Control file, a record’s ARS Response Code reflects its progress through the
survey, whether a response has been received and whether its final response has been recorded.
This data element is central to the calculation of usable and total response rates.
On state and the national office micro files, the ARS Response Code has more limited purposes.
The ARS Response Code here is not used to calculate response rates. It has two uses, listed in
order of precedence:
1. CCS Selection – The ARS Response Code is the primary indicator used to determine if a
record does or does not belong on the CCS – but only when the ARS Refile Year is
current.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-14

2. ARS Status – The ARS Response Code shows what progress the record made through the
refiling survey, as of the time this data element was transferred from the ARS Control file
to the State system. Preferably it records a usable employer response. Meanwhile the
ARS Refile Year field shows whether the code reflects the most recently completed
survey, or an earlier ARS.
These purposes may occasionally conflict, in which case the first purpose (CCS) takes
precedence. For example during the most recent ARS, the state may have assigned ARS
Response Code 41 to the subunit records (worksites) of a multi-unit UI account. Code 41
indicates that the existing industry code, county, and ownership codes are accurate. Meanwhile
the employer stopped providing separate, disaggregated data for this account. The subunits of
this multi have to be consolidated or collapsed so the account can be reported as though it were a
single unit. If this consolidation involves code changes, then one or more subunits may belong
on the CCS and therefore require a CCS-type ARS Response Code. In this case, State staff
should update the ARS Response Code field to replace code 41 with code 46. State staff should
also make sure the ARS Refile Year is current, and assign Old fields to express the code change.
Section 11.5.2 and Section 5.6 explain in detail how to handle an MWR collapse.
In this situation and others, the ARS Response Code that the national office receives on the
EQUI file will no longer show what happened in the ARS, but will reflect information gathered
from a source other than the ARS. However, generating an accurate and complete CCS is more
important, so it takes precedence over the ARS status.
Sometimes the ARS Response Code that came from the ARS indicates that further follow-up is
still needed. For example, ARS Response Code 30 (CCS I-error) might remain on several
records when the codes are transferred from the ARS Control file to the state system, and to the
national office. The national office system will list micro records that have ARS Response Code
30 as well as several other ARS Response codes – codes assigned only in the national office.
The national office system will list records with these codes, as described in Section 11.7.4. You
should review these records to identify any that may belong on the CCS; then update ARS
Response Code and other fields on the state system as needed.
Old fields
Sections 11.2 and 11.3 explain in detail how the Old fields identify code changes. When
accurate Old fields are not already present on a record that belongs on the CCS, state staff should
update the record to assign them. In particular, if a record was not included in the ARS then its
Old fields are likely to be all blank on the state system. If a noneconomic code change is then
identified for the record and it belongs on the CCS, the Old fields must be entered. Except for
special cases described in Section 11.5 and Chapter 5 (certain MWR breakouts and
predecessor/successor situations), the Old fields should be identical to the corresponding
classification codes that the record carries in the fourth quarter.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-15

11.4.3 The National Office System Reassigns Some ARS Response
Codes
The national office system will reassign ARS Response Codes on its micro file in certain
circumstances. The national office system assigns three ARS Response Codes that appear in
BLS only, and are never used in state systems. Records receiving these codes will appear on a
CCS table (described in Section 11.7.4) and should be reviewed by state staff:
33 – The national office assigned, submitted as 46/50 but has CCS I-error on the national
office micro file
34 – The national office assigned, submitted as 46/50 but does not have a true CCS code
change on the national office micro file
35 – The national office assigned, submitted with Comment Code 81 and a true code change
but not with ARS Response Code 30/46/50.
The national office system also assigns two ARS Response Codes that do appear in state
systems. Records receiving these codes are not listed, and no further action is needed:
41 – Reviewed, no CCS changes
46 – Clean record with CCS updates.
Every change the system makes to an ARS Response Code will be listed on CCS Table 1, the
Response Code Change report. This report is described in Section 11.7.1.
Following are more detailed explanations of each of these ARS Response Code reassignments.
ARS Response Code 33 – When micro editing assigns one or more of the CCS-related I-errors to
a record, the national office system will change the ARS Response Code to 33. The CCS Ierrors are shown in the table in Section 11.4.1. ARS Response Code 33 is similar to code 30
(CCS I-error) in the states. It is assigned only in the national office system and only when the
record carried ARS Response Code 46 or 50 and a current ARS Refile Year on the EQUI. Since
its ARS Response Code is no longer 46 or 50, the flagged record is excluded from the CCS file
in the national office, although it may have been included in the state version.
ARS Response Code 34 – The BLS system will assign ARS Response Code 34 to records that
carried ARS Response Code 46 or 50 and a current ARS Refile Year on the EQUI, and that do
not have a true CCS code change (as defined in Section 11.2). Code 34 is not assigned if any of
the CCS I-errors shown in Section 11.4.1 are present.
As an example, a record may have a code change only from the unclassified industry code
999999, or a change only from a county equivalent code (995-999). If the record carries ARS
Response Code 46 or 50 on the state system and the EQUI, the national office system will assign
ARS Response Code 34. The record will be listed on the Response Code Change report (shown
in Section 11.7.1) and on one of the CCS Tables shown in Section 11.7.4. If the Old fields and
first quarter codes are accurate, state staff should change the ARS Response Code on the state
system. Usually code 41 will be appropriate.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-16

ARS Response Code 35 – The national office system will assign ARS Response Code 35 to
records that do not carry an ARS Response Code for the CCS (46 or 50), but apparently should.
The system assigns this code when the record does have a true CCS code change, the ARS Refile
Year is current, the comment code for a noneconomic code change (code 81) is present for first
or fourth quarter, and an appropriate ARS Response Code is not present. The appropriate ARS
Response Codes are 30, 46 or 50. State staff should review any record with ARS Response Code
35 and assign code 46 or 50, if it belongs on the CCS.
ARS Response Code 41 – When an EQUI correction removes any CCS I-errors from a record
that previously carried ARS Response Code 30 or 33 and the current ARS Refile Year, the
national office system will make an appropriate adjustment. The system determines whether a
true CCS code change is present. If there is not, the system assigns code 41. No further action is
needed for BLS purposes; however, state staff should review the ARS Response Code on their
own state system. To be accurate and consistent, the record should not carry ARS Response
Code 46 or 50 on the state file if it does not have a true CCS code change (as defined in Section
11.2). The record should carry ARS Response Code 41 instead.
As an example, a record on the 2020/1 deliverable EQUI may have ARS Response Code 30 and
an invalid county code. It may have an industry code change from 999999, or no code change at
all. If a 2020/1 EQUI correction fixes the I-error, the national office system will change the code
from 30 to 41 on the national office micro file. State staff should assign ARS Response Code 41
on their state system, if it is not already present.
ARS Response Code 46 – As with ARS Response Code 41, the national office system assigns
this code when an EQUI correction removes CCS I-errors. When a record with ARS Response
Code 30 or 33 and the current ARS Refile Year has a true CCS code change – and has no CCS Ierrors – the system assigns code 46. By doing so, the national office system restores the
corrected record to the CCS. No further action is needed for the national office files; however,
the record also belongs on the state's version of the CCS. State staff should assign ARS
Response Code 46 or 50 to the record, if the record does not carry 46 or 50 already.

11.5 Code Changes for Special Cases
Some noneconomic code changes coincide with changes in reporting configuration. In other
words, they occur along with a change in the UI Account Number and Reporting Unit Number
(UI/RUN) under which an existing establishment is reported.
New breakouts of MWR subunits are one example of reporting changes resulting in
noneconomic code changes. A given subunit (worksite) may have been reported as part of a
combined reporting unit (typically a record carrying RUN 00000 and MEEI code 4). When the
employer agrees to report data separately for each worksite on the MWR, some of the new
worksite reporting units (the newly broken out records) may carry different industry codes or
area codes than previously reported on the combined RUN 00000. The movement of their data
into the correct county/ownership/industry cell should be treated as a noneconomic code change

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-17

and reported on the CCS, as described in Section 5.5. For the states that are required to report
township codes, the movement of worksite data between townships is also noneconomic and
belongs on the CCS.
The collapse of MWR reporters into a single, combined record (with RUN 00000 and MEEI 4 or
6) may also involve the movement of employment and wages between cells. Such movement is
also considered a noneconomic code change and belongs on the CCS, as described in Section
5.6. When an establishment changes from one UI account to another, that is, changes from a
predecessor to a successor, there also may be code changes that should be treated as
noneconomic and that belong on the CCS. These circumstances are described in Section 5.3.
In all these special circumstances, the national office system will create CCS records when it
finds the necessary ARS Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and Old fields. If state staff entered
the information properly on the ARS Control file, then the state system will pass the necessary
data elements to the micro file and no further action is needed. As an alternative, if state staff
make appropriate changes to their state system, the EQUI will deliver the proper Old fields, ARS
Response Code, and ARS Refile Year to the national office.
In most of these special circumstances, the record that should carry the Response Code and other
CCS-related fields will be active in first quarter but not fourth, or will be active in fourth quarter
but not first. However, the record must be active in at least one of these two quarters. The
national office system will exclude from the CCS any record that is not active (Status Code = 1)
in either fourth or first quarter.

11.5.1 Multi-unit Breakouts with Code Changes
The standard systems allow states to handle breakouts and collapses of multi-unit accounts in
various ways. However in every case, there should be a record on both state and the national
office micro files for every reporting unit (every worksite) that is, will become, or has been
active within recent quarters. Some of these worksite records (records with RUN > 00000) may
belong on the CCS, as they report the noneconomic movement of their employment and wages
between cells.
State staff should first determine which subunits (worksites) have a noneconomic code change.
In other words, identify the subunits that will be active in the first quarter and that will report
their employment with different industry codes or area codes than were used for those workers in
fourth quarter.
Next, use the features of your standard state system (see the system's user documentation) to
apply the necessary data elements to your micro file and the EQUI:
1. Assign the fourth quarter values of the earlier record’s industry code, county and (for
specified states) township to the Old fields of the subunit, where they differ from the new
codes. This is also clarified in the examples.

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-18

2. Assign the new, correct values of the industry code, county and (for specified states) township
to the appropriate first quarter fields of the subunit.
3. Assign an ARS Response Code of 46 or 50 to the subunit, if 46 or 50 is not already present
(that is, if 46 or 50 was not already transferred from the ARS Control file).
4. Assign the current ARS Refile Year, if it is not already present on the record.
Several examples follow that explain this further.
Example 1: New MWR Breakout. Consider the case of a multi-unit employer being broken
out for the first time in first quarter. All the fourth quarter employment was reported on a record
with RUN 00000. Now for the first quarter, the RUN 00000 record becomes a master record
(MEEI = 2) while several subunit records become active for the first time. In this example, some
of these carry a different county code or industry code (or both) than the RUN 00000 record.
The fourth quarter (2019/4) of the UI account on the state system might appear as below. The
employment shown in parentheses would be the actual employment at each of those worksites;
however, since the records are not active in fourth quarter, all the employment, wages, and other
data are reported and used only on the RUN 00000 record (the only active record).
In this and other examples that follow, the employment is provided to show the relative size of
the subunits. For simplicity’s sake, the employment appears as completely stable from month to
month. The fluctuations that occur in real data would not affect what these examples are
intended to show – how the Old fields, ARS Response Code, and ARS Refile Year should be
properly constructed to include the records on the CCS.
2019 Fourth Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

00000
00001
00002
00003
00004

4
3
3
3
5

Status
Code
1
2 (or 9)
2 (or 9)
2 (or 9)
2 (or 9)

County

NAICS

Employment

013
013
009
009
011

336211
336211
336211
336211
336350

500
0 (or 300)
0 (or 100)
0 (or 50)
0 (or 50)

Note that this account is being reported as a single, since none of the subunit records are active
yet. When they become active in the first quarter, records 00002, 00003, and 00004 will report
their employment and other data in a different industry code or county than in fourth quarter, that
is, they have a different industry code or county code than the previously combined RUN 00000
record. Therefore records 00002, 00003, and 00004 belong on the CCS.

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-19

2020 First Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

Status
Code

00000
00001
00002
00003
00004

2
3
3
3
5

1
1
1
1
1

ARS
Resp
Code
41
41
50
50
50

ARS
Refile
Year
2020
2020
2020
2020
2020

Old
Cnty

Qtr 1
Cnty

013
013
013

900
013
009
009
011

Old
NAICS

Qtr 1
NAICS

Emp

336211

336211
336211
336211
336211
336350

500
300
100
50
50

In the first quarter, this same UI account is reported with all the subunits as active. The RUN
00000 record is now a master record with MEEI = 2 and county equivalent code = 900 (master).
The employment and other data for the macro file (and for most other purposes) will no longer
come from the RUN 00000 record because it is a master. The data will now come from the
subunit records instead.
The last three records, the records shown in italics, belong on the CCS file. They need ARS
Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and Old fields as shown. The national office system will then
copy the three records to the CCS.
Note in particular how the Old fields and first quarter codes should be assigned. Record 00002
has a different county code than record 00000, so its correct county code (code 009) is reported
in the first quarter county field while the county code under which it was previously reported
(code 013) is reported in the Old County field. Record 00004 has different codes both for county
and for industry; the first quarter fields carry the correct codes while Old County and Old NAICS
carry the previous codes of the account when it was reported as a single.
Record 00003 is handled the same as 00002 where the county code change qualifies both records
for the CCS.
In this and all the examples that follow, the code changes shown are from one specific industry
code or county code to another. However, there may be cases when the code change is only
from an "unclassified" code. Codes changes only from unclassified codes do not belong on the
CCS. Suppose, in the example above, the MEEI 4 record (RUN 00000) did not carry county
code 013 in fourth quarter, but instead had county 999 (unknown) or 995 (statewide). In that
case, subunit records 00002 and 00003 would not belong on the CCS because their only code
change is the county code change from 999 to 009. This is a change from unclassified, not a
noneconomic code change; therefore, ARS Response Code 50 would be incorrect. The national
office system would reassign the ARS Response Code to exclude these two records from the
CCS. Record 00004 should still carry ARS Response Code 50 and would still belong on the
CCS because it also has an industry code change from one specific code to another.
This discussion focused on the data elements needed for including new subunit records on the
CCS. When breaking out subunit records or when making any change in the UI/RUN reporting
configuration of existing establishments, state staff should also assign the predecessor or
successor ID fields (Predecessor UI Number/Predecessor RUN, or Successor UI

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-20

Number/Successor RUN). In the example shown above, all four of the new records should
report the Predecessor ID on the first quarter EQUI. The Predecessor UI number will be the
same as the regular UI Account Number because all the reporting units remain in the same UI
account as before. The Predecessor RUN on all four new records will be 00000, because all the
worksites were reported under that RUN in the prior quarter.
Example 2: Further Breakout of a Combined Subunit. Consider the case of a combined
subunit (several worksites reported as a combined MEEI 5 record). If the employer will now
report the data separately, and if one or more of the new worksites has a different industry code
or county than the MEEI 5 record, then it belongs on the CCS.
In this example, assume that this is the same UI account a year later. The employer has offered
to report the data separately for the combined subunit record 00004, so this record is being
further broken out into new subunit records 00005 and 00006 beginning in the 2021 first quarter.
In 2020/4, the new records are not yet active. In 2021/1, record 00004 will become inactive as
its employment and other data move to the new records, one of which is in a different county.
2020 Fourth Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006

2
3
3
3
5
3
3

Status
Code
1
1
1
1
1
2 (or 9)
2 (or 9)

County

NAICS

Employment

900
013
009
009
011
025
011

336211
336211
336211
336211
336350
336350
336350

500
300
100
50
50
0 (or 20)
0 (or 30)

Record 00005 belongs on the 2021 CCS file because of the change in its county code. Its
employment and other data will move from county 011 (the code of the MEEI 5 record from
which 00005 breaks out) to county 025. When first quarter becomes the current quarter, this UI
account should appear on the EQUI with the necessary data:
First Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

Status
Code

00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006

2
3
3
3
5
3
3

1
1
1
1
2
1
1

ARS
Resp
Code
41
41
46
46
46
50

ARS
Refile
Year
2020
2020
2020
2020
2020
2021

Old
Cnty

011

Qtr 1
Cnty

Old
NAICS

900
013
009
009
011
025
011

The national office system will copy record 00005 to the CCS because it has:

Qtr 1
NAICS

Emp

336211
336211
336211
336211
336350
336350
336350

500
300
100
50
0
20
30

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

•
•
•

Page 11-11-21

A true CCS code change in the relationship between the Old fields and the 2021/1 codes,
A current ARS Refile Year (in this case, 2021), and
A CCS ARS Response Code (code 50 in this example, although a code 46 has the same
effect and would be appropriate if the information came from the ARS).

Note that last year’s ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year remain on other records;
however, this does not affect this year’s CCS.
In addition to the data elements needed for CCS purposes, state staff should assign Predecessor
ID fields (including Predecessor RUN 00004) to the new subunit records. This will link them to
the record from which they are breaking out.
Example 3: Breakouts Made in Mid-year. States have the option to break out new subunit
records as soon as the employer begins reporting disaggregated data, provided that any code
changes are held until first quarter and are included on the CCS. This is described in Section 5.5.
For example, an MEEI 4 reporting unit may represent two worksites in different counties. The
employer begins providing separate data in second quarter. The combined record (RUN 00000)
carried the county code of the primary county. Now that it becomes a master record in second
quarter, its county code typically should change to 900, although it may continue to use the same
code as before. Meanwhile, both of the new subunit records must remain in the same county
(and industry code) in second, third, and fourth quarters as was used for the combined record in
first quarter. In this example, the smaller subunit record (RUN 00002) is reported in county 005
even though the worksite is really located in county 007.
2019 First Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

00000

4

Status
Code
1

County

NAICS

Emp

005

452319

100

County

NAICS

Emp

900
005
005

452319
452319
452319

100
65
35

2019 Second, Third, and Fourth Quarters:
RUN

MEEI

00000
00001
00002

2
3
3

Status
Code
1
1
1

The county code for RUN 00002 should be corrected beginning in first quarter, and it belongs on
the CCS. When first quarter becomes the current quarter, the UI account should be updated to
carry the necessary data on the EQUI file:

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-22

2020 First Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

Status
Code

00000
00001
00002

2
3
3

1
1
1

ARS
Resp
Code

ARS
Refile
Year

Old
Cnty

Qtr 1
Cnty

50

2020

005

900
005
007

Old
NAICS

Qtr 1
NAICS

Emp

452319
452319
452319

100
65
35

As in earlier examples, the choice of ARS Response Code (46 or 50) should be based on the
source of the information. If the information for the code change originated in the refiling
survey, assign 46; otherwise assign 50. As before, the records that do not belong on the CCS
may or may not already carry an ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year.
Also as in the earlier examples, the state should include predecessor information when the new
records are broken out. In this case, the predecessor fields (including Predecessor RUN 00000)
should appear on the new records in 2019/2, since that is the quarter during which they become
active. While BLS requires that noneconomic code changes be held until first quarter, the
predecessor or successor fields should be provided right away. They should appear on the EQUI
file for the quarter when the reporting change takes place.
Example 4: Professional Employer Organization (PEO) Breakouts in Mid-year. As
mentioned in Section 15.3, many businesses, small businesses in particular, enter into a coemployer relationship with PEOs. In most cases, only a small portion of the client business staff
(typically executives and managers) will remain on the payroll of the original (client) firm. The
workers are normally transferred to the PEO. Client businesses find it financially advantageous
to transfer their workers to PEOs since this arrangement can relieve the clients of human
resource and administrative work.
Under normal circumstances, if a breakout occurs in a PEO in mid-year (i.e., other than first
quarter) and the breakout causes a change from one classified industry or area to another
classified industry and/or area due to non-economic events, the code change(s) should be held by
the state until the next first quarter and reported on the Code Change Supplement.
However, for larger PEOs, handling and reporting breakouts, births, deaths, out-of-business
units, or other reporting changes can become difficult and very time consuming for state QCEW
staff. Clients enter into and out of relationships with PEOs regularly. It is advised that, in these
particular cases the state contact their appropriate regional office for guidance and/or assistance
in handling these more difficult PEO cases.

11.5.2 Multi-unit Collapses with Code Changes
State staff should first determine which subunits (worksites) have a noneconomic code change.
In other words, identify the old subunits that will become inactive in the first quarter and whose

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-23

employment will now be reported in a different industry code or county than was used for those
workers in fourth quarter.
Next, use the features of your standard state system (see documentation for your state) to apply
the necessary changes to your micro file and the EQUI:
1. Allow the record for the old subunit to remain on the state system, even though it becomes
inactive. Do not mark it for deletion since that effectively removes all quarters of data
(including active quarters) from the state and the national office micro files and prevents the
record from being copied to the CCS. The record must remain until all CCS processing for
the year is completed, and so its historical data will be included in subsequent aggregations.
2. Assign the new values of the industry code, ownership, county, and (where appropriate)
township to the inactive first quarter of the old subunit record. Make sure that all the first
quarter codes are present, whether or not they differ from the fourth quarter.
3. Assign the old values of industry code, county or (where appropriate) township to the Old
fields of the subunit record, where they differ from the first quarter values.
4. Assign an ARS Response Code of 46 or 50 to the subunit, if 46 or 50 is not already present
(that is, if 46 or 50 was not already transferred from the ARS Control file).
5. Assign the current ARS Refile Year, if it is not already present on the record.
Examples follow that will explain this further.
Example 1: Collapse of an MWR Reporter to a Single. Consider the case of a multi-unit
employer being collapsed into a single-unit record beginning with first quarter. The new single,
the record with RUN 00000, was formerly a master record with MEEI = 2. Now its MEEI will
typically change to 4 or 6, and it will begin to carry all the employment and wage data. The
industry code and county codes should be assigned as described in Section 5.6. Any of the
subunits whose industry code or county codes were different than the new MEEI 4 or 6 record
belongs on the CCS.
The fourth quarter (2019/4) of the UI account on the State system might appear as follows.
2019 Fourth Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

00000
00001
00002
00003

2
3
3
3

Status
Code
1
1
1
1

County

NAICS

Own

Employment

900
013
007
009

561599
561599
561599
541990

5
5
5
5

150
85
40
25

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-24

This fourth quarter multi has more than one county and more than one industry code. Collapsing
it into a first quarter single unit means in this case that the county and industry codes of the
largest former subunit become the codes of the RUN 00000 record (whose MEEI code changes
from 2 to 4). The employment of the two smaller subunits will change county, industry code, or
both; therefore they belong on the CCS. On the first quarter EQUI, the account should be
reported as follows:
2020 First Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

Status
Code

00000
00001
00002
00003

4
3
3
3

1
2
2
2

ARS
Resp
Code
41
41
46
46

ARS
Refile
Year
2020
2020
2020
2020

Old
Cnty

Qtr 1
Cnty

007
009

013
013
013
013

Old
NAICS

Qtr 1
NAICS

541990

561599
561599
561599
561599

Old
Own

Qtr 1
Own

Emp

5
5
5
5

150
0
0
0

Even though RUNs 00002 and 00003 are inactive (Status Code = 2), they will be placed on the
CCS because of their ARS Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and Old fields, and because their
fourth quarter was active (Status Code = 1).
The ARS Response Codes shown here are 46 for the units belonging on the CCS, and 41 for the
others. In this example, ARS Response Codes are assigned as though information came from the
FY 2020 ARS. (In fact all of the information shown might have been passed from the ARS
Control file to the state system).
If the information came from sources other than the ARS, ARS Response Code 50 (code change
from non-ARS source) would be more appropriate for RUNs 00002 and 00003. Meanwhile state
staff would not assign an ARS Response Code or an ARS Refile Year to RUNs 00000 and
00001, but instead leave those fields blank.
As in the earlier examples, the state should provide predecessor or successor information, even
though it does not directly affect CCS processing. In this case, BLS will receive the most
beneficial linking information if all the collapsing subunits (including 00001) contain Successor
ID fields (including Successor RUN 00000) on the 2019/4 EQUI.
Example 2: Collapse of Several Worksites into a Combined Worksite. There may be
occasions when an employer will no longer report the data for some of the worksites separately,
so some records should be collapsed by terminating (inactivating) them and creating a new,
combined record with MEEI 5. This collapse may cause some employment to be reported in a
different industry or county, so the inactive subunit(s) in question belong on the CCS. Consider
the following example.
The fourth quarter (2019/4) of the UI account on the state system might appear as follows.

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-25

2019 Fourth Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

00000
00001
00002
00003

2
3
3
3

Status
Code
1
1
1
1

County

Own

NAICS

Emp

900
015
015
009

5
5
5
5

562920
562920
221320
562920

90
35
25
30

Suppose records 00001 and 00002 can no longer be reported separately. A new record should be
created in 2020/1 with the next available RUN (00004) and with MEEI 5. In this case it will
carry the industry code and county of the larger inactivated subunit – NAICS 562920 and county
015. The smaller inactivated subunit, 00002, belongs on the CCS because its employment will
now be reported in a different industry code. The record should be reported as follows on the
state system and the EQUI file in first quarter:
2020 First Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

Status
Code

00000
00001
00002
00003
00004

2
3
3
3
5

1
2
2
1
1

ARS
Resp
Code

ARS
Refile
Year

50

2020

Old
Cnty

Qtr 1
Cnty
900
015
015
009
015

Old
NAICS

Qtr 1
NAICS

221320

562920
562920
562920
562920
562920

Old
Own

Qtr 1
Own

Emp

5
5
5
5
5

90
0
0
30
60

As in the previous example, RUN 00002 will be placed on the CCS even though it is inactive in
first quarter.
As in all the earlier examples, BLS needs predecessor or successor information. This will
identify the establishments as continuous, in spite of the change to their UI/RUN reporting
configuration. In this case the linkage will be clear if you assign the Successor ID (including
Successor RUN 00004) to both collapsing records (records 00001 and 00002) in time for the
2019/4 EQUI.

11.5.3 Predecessors and Successors with Code Changes
Section 5.3 describes the successor situations that should be reflected on the CCS. Use the
following procedures to place successors with noneconomic code changes on the CCS:
State staff should first identify the record that will report the noneconomic code change. This is
discussed further below. Then use the features of your standard state system to apply the
necessary data elements to your state system and the EQUI file:

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-26

1. Assign the new, correct values of the industry code, ownership, county and (for specified
states) township to the first quarter fields of the record that will report the code change
(typically the successor).
2. Assign the fourth quarter values of the industry code, ownership, county and (for specified
states) township to the Old fields of the record, where they differ from the first quarter codes.
3. Assign an ARS Response Code of 46 or 50 to the record, if 46 or 50 is not already present
(that is, if 46 or 50 was not already transferred from the ARS Control file).
4. Assign the current ARS Refile Year, if it is not already present on the record.
In addition to assigning the CCS-related data elements listed above, state staff should also update
the records in question with the predecessor or successor ID fields. (The successor record should
carry the Predecessor UI Account Number and Predecessor RUN; or the predecessor record
should carry the Successor UI Account Number and Successor RUN.) The proper use of these
fields is explained in Chapter 5 and Appendix B.
Example 1: A single unit that changes UI accounts. Suppose a store was sold to a new owner
in June 2019, and it begins operating under a new UI Account Number. An ARS response
shows that the establishment is not a warehouse club and supercenter (NAICS 452311) as it has
been coded for several years, but a department store (NAICS 452210). If the employment is
sufficiently large (greater than 25 in the months preceding and following the change) then the
industry code change should be applied to the successor record, but not until the following first
quarter. The successor record belongs on the CCS. Update the record if necessary so it will
appear as follows on the state system and the EQUI file in first quarter:
2020 First Quarter:
RUN

MEEI

Status
Code

00000

1

1

ARS
Resp
Code
46

ARS
Refile
Year
2020

Old
NAICS

Qtr 1
NAICS

452311

452210

As with any continuous record, assigning the ARS Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and
appropriate Old field(s) is sufficient to place the record on the CCS in the national office. The
procedure would be the same if the store in question is a subunit (worksite) of a multi-unit
account, or if it were formerly a single unit and became a subunit record within a different UI
account. Section 5.4 describes this further.
Suppose the transfer of ownership (and the transition to a new UI Account Number) had
happened at the end of December 2019 or during the first quarter of 2020. The successor record
would not exist as an active record until first quarter. Nevertheless, updating the successor with
an appropriate ARS Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and Old field(s) would place the
successor record onto the CCS.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-27

As explained in the next section, the employment and wage data on the CCS might then be
incomplete, since part of these data would come from the successor and be included on the CCS,
while part would reside on the predecessor and be omitted. In other words, the four months of
employment (December through March) and both quarters of total wages (fourth and first
quarter) would be split between the predecessor and successor records. If the employment in
question is sufficiently large and depending on when the transfer occurred, the state can take the
necessary steps to put the predecessor record onto the CCS rather than the successor. You may
also put both the predecessor and successor records onto the CCS.
To put a predecessor record onto the CCS, assign the same ARS Response Code, ARS Refile
Year, Old fields, and first quarter codes as you would use for the successor record. As in the
case of a collapsed subunit with code changes, the first quarter codes on a predecessor should
show where the employment is being reported in first quarter. The Old fields show where the
employment was reported in fourth quarter. In addition, the record must be active during at least
one of the quarters in question (first or fourth quarter).
Note that partial successor situations, in which part of one establishment's employment transfers
to another establishment, are not normally treated as noneconomic code changes. They do not
belong on the CCS. This is addressed in Section 2.3.2.

11.5.4 How the System Handles Missing Employment or Wages
The CCS and Summary of Differences files include employment data for four months:
December (month 3 of the fourth quarter) plus all three months of first quarter. They also
include total wages for both fourth and first quarter. In some of the circumstances covered in the
preceding sections, the four months of employment and two quarters of wages do not reside
entirely on one record (one UI/RUN). Yet in nearly all cases, only one record will be copied to
the CCS. Therefore part of the data for the establishment may be omitted from the CCS.
This section describes how the system treats missing employment and wage data on records that
otherwise qualify for the CCS. In brief, if all other conditions are met but economic data fields
are missing, then the system will still create the CCS record. If economic data are missing in a
configuration consistent with a breakout, the national office system copies first quarter data to
the fourth quarter on the CCS record. For a probable collapse, the system copies fourth quarter
data to the CCS first quarter. For other situations including a probable predecessor or successor,
the system zero-fills the missing data fields.
This process may sometimes assign imprecise or inaccurate data to the CCS and Summary of
Differences. However, the remedies for this are very limited. Employment and wage data on the
CCS and Summary of Differences are copied from the state system and the systems (in the
national office and the states) do not offer any capability to change CCS data separately from the
corresponding data fields on the state system. These economic data fields on the state system
must be as accurate as possible because they appear (in aggregated form) on the macro file and
in various other uses.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-28

Probable Breakouts
December employment and fourth quarter wages cannot be copied to the CCS record when they
are not present on the state system record. When a CCS record is created for a subunit that has
been broken out for the first time in first quarter, the real December employment and fourth
quarter wages may reside only on a different record, and only as part of an aggregation. In other
words, the fourth quarter data may exist only as some portion of the data on the RUN 00000
record, which was reported as a single (typically with MEEI 4). The national office system will
attempt to estimate (copy) data between quarters so the CCS will not understate the movement of
fourth quarter data.
The national office system will estimate CCS data for a probable breakout situation when all
these conditions occur:
1. The RUN of the record that qualifies for the CCS is greater than 00000,
2. The fourth quarter total wages and December employment of the record are missing (data = 0
and indicators = M), and
3. For the three months of first quarter employment and for first quarter total wages, none of the
fields are missing.
When these conditions occur, the system creates a CCS record with estimated December
employment and fourth quarter wages. The estimation simply consists of copying January
(month 1) employment to December employment, and copying first quarter wages to fourth
quarter wages.
Probable Collapses
The national office system will estimate CCS data for a probable collapse when all these
conditions occur:
1. The RUN of the record that qualifies for the CCS is greater than 00000,
2. The first quarter total wages and all three months of first quarter employment of the record
are missing (data = 0 and indicators = M), and
3. Neither December employment nor fourth quarter wages are missing.
When these conditions occur, the system creates a CCS record with estimated January, February,
and March employment as well as estimated first quarter wages. The estimation consists of
copying December employment to January, February, and March; and copying fourth quarter
wages to first quarter wages.

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006

Page 11-11-29

As in the case of a new breakout, subunit records that are collapsed in first quarter typically do
not carry their real first quarter data – these data are now part of the aggregation on an MEEI 4
record. The system therefore estimates (copies) data on the CCS record from the fourth quarter
to the first quarter.
Probable Successors or Predecessors and Other Cases
The national office system will zero-fill missing data on the CCS record when missing data on
the state system are present in any configuration other than the ones described above – for a
probable breakout or a probable collapse.
The following configurations suggest a probable predecessor or successor:
Case #

RUN

1
2
3
4
5
6

00000
00000
(any)
(any)
(any)
(any)

Dec Emp
Missing?

Q4 Wages
Missing?

yes
yes
yes

yes
yes
yes

Jan
Emp
Missing?
yes
yes
yes

Feb Emp
Missing?

Mar Emp
Missing?

Q1 Wages
Missing?

yes

yes

yes

yes
yes

yes
yes

Cases 1 and 2 are identical to the conditions for probable breakout subunits and probable
collapse subunits, respectively, except that the RUN is zero-filled. Subunits cannot have RUN
00000. Therefore cases 1 and 2 are more consistent with a single-unit successor and
predecessor, respectively. Case 1 might be a predecessor that terminates in December, while
case 2 might be a successor that begins operations in January.
Cases 3 and 4 are consistent with successor records. The case 3 record apparently starts up in
February, while case 4 seems to start in March. Cases 5 and 6 are consistent with predecessors
that terminate after January and February, respectively.
There are many possible configurations of missing employment and wage fields other than the
six described above for probable breakouts, collapses, successors, and predecessors. These other
configurations seem questionable, but suggest unsuccessful data imputation (estimation) in the
state rather than situations that affect the CCS. For example, fourth quarter wages may be
missing (Total Wage Indicator = M) because insufficient wage data were present in earlier
quarters for the state system to impute fourth quarter. (Successful imputation would change the
indicator from M to another value, typically E.)
These are just a few examples of questionable situations:

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

April 2006
Case #

RUN

1
2
3
4
5

(any)
(any)
(any)
(any)
(any)

Dec Emp
Missing?

Q4 Wages
Missing?
yes
yes

Jan Emp
Missing?

Feb Emp
Missing?

Page 11-11-30
Mar Emp
Missing?

Q1 Wages
Missing?

yes
yes

yes
yes

yes

When any of these questionable cases occur, the national office system will zero-fill the data
field on the CCS and list the record for review on a report. This report (CCS Table 8) is titled
CCS Records with Questionable Missing Employment/Wages and is shown in Section 11.7.4.

11.5.5 When Out-of-Business Units Have No Successor
The sections above describe special cases that belong on the CCS when there is not a stable,
active record present in both fourth quarter and first quarter. In these cases (breakouts,
collapsed, and successors) a noneconomic code change occurs when there is an active,
continuous establishment in some sense, even though the data are not continuously reported
under the same UI Account Number and RUN.
For some records a noneconomic code change is identified, but the establishment does not
remain active because the unit goes out of business. The ARS (or some other source) may
identify a correction to an establishment’s industry, area, or ownership codes; however, before
the correct code can be implemented in first quarter, the establishment permanently ceases
operations. Such records do not belong on the Code Change Supplement. The CCS should
not be used to retroactively identify and correct inaccurate codes for business “deaths” that occur
before the first quarter.
If a reporting unit goes out of business permanently and without a successor, the state should not
assign the ARS Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and Old fields that would put it onto the CCS.
ARS Response Code 64 (Out of business) is appropriate for such cases; codes 46 and 50 are not.
In addition, for these cases, state staff should verify that the reporting unit has been terminated,
or take the necessary actions to do so. An End of Liability Date should be assigned to the state
system (and EQUI) record, with the Status Code changing to 2 (inactive) for the quarter
following the last quarter with reported employment.

11.6 Generating the Summary of Differences File for the
Integrated Edit
The Summary of Differences file provides the CCS employment and wage data at an aggregated
level. For all affected county/ownership/industry cells, this file shows how much data enter and
leave due to CCS code changes. The Summary of Differences file contains one record for each
county/ownership/industry cell.

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-31

The data fields are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

December Employment
Fourth Quarter Wages
January Employment
February Employment
March Employment
First Quarter Wages
Number of Records (reporting units)

The national office system generates the Summary of Differences file from the CCS file, so they
are consistent and use the same data. The only exception occurs for states that are required to
use township codes (New Jersey and the New England states). If the CCS file for one of these
states includes records with a change only to the township code (i.e., no changes to county,
ownership, or industry), such records are excluded from the Summary of Differences. The
Summary of Differences shows changes only to county, ownership, or industry.
The national office system uses two important steps when generating the Summary of
Differences file:
1. CCS records are sorted by the Old fields (Old County, Old Ownership, and Old NAICS).
Then the data elements listed above are summed for each county/ownership/industry cell.
This becomes the data “from” each cell, that is, the data that are leaving the cell due to
noneconomic code changes.
2. CCS records are then sorted by current fields (Current County, Current Ownership, and
Current NAICS), and then the data elements listed above are summed for each cell. A
“current” field is the New field if present; otherwise it is the Old field. For example, if a
record has New NAICS as its only New field, then the current fields consist of Old County,
Old Ownership, and New NAICS. Note that the current fields on a CCS record match the
first quarter codes on the corresponding record. This data becomes the data “to” each cell,
that is, the data that are entering the cell due to noneconomic code changes.
The national office system also generates a Summary of Differences report, shown in Section
11.7.5. For each cell, the report shows the data leaving (“from”), the data entering (“to”), and
the net change (calculated as data “from” minus data “to”). The net change is used in the macro
portion of the integrated edit, in a process called code change integration.
Code change integration uses Summary of Differences data in a temporary editing adjustment to
the macro data. Its purpose is to prevent macro flags that would occur due to noneconomic code
changes. Code change integration temporarily restores data that enter or leave macro cells as a
result of noneconomic code changes reported on the CCS. Code change integration is used in
the following macro edits:

April 2006
Edit Code
091
092
126
127
134

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-32

Edit Message
Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change is Significantly > Parm and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW Range
Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change > Parm and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW Range
Number of Establishments out of Range

In the national office system, if Summary of Differences data exist for a macro cell but that cell
still fails one of the macro edits, then the edit listing displays the Summary of Differences data.
This appears on Table 9A, the Integrated Macro Edit listing. Code change integration is more
fully explained in Section 10.3.1.
The Summary of Differences file includes December employment and fourth quarter wages even
though these data are not used for code change integration. This is because CES and other data
users still need December employment and fourth quarter wages for noneconomic code changes,
aggregated to the macro cell level.

11.7 Printed Output from CCS Processing
The national office system generates the following listings during normal EQUI processing,
beginning in first quarter and continuing through the end of second quarter. These reports are
described in the sections immediately following.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

CCS Table 1: Response Code Change
CCS Table 1A: Selected Records with Sector Level Code Change
CCS Table 1B: Selected Records with Code Changes Within the Sector or/and Locality
Change or/and Ownership Change
CCS Table 2: CCS Creation Counts Report
CCS Table 3: Records Excluded Due to Nonnumeric Employment/Wages or Missing
Classification Codes
CCS Table 5: Records with Response Code 30, 33, 34, or 35
CCS Table 6: Records Excluded Due to Missing Code Change
CCS Table 7: ES-202 Code Change Summary of Differences
CCS Table 7A: Changes in Code Change Summary of Differences

The national office system can also generate three additional reports upon request. The first
report is described in Section 11.8:
• CCS Master List
• CCS Table 4 – CCS Zero Employment and Wages Reported
• CCS Table 8 – CCS Records with Questionable Missing Employment/Wages

April 2006

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-11-33

11.7.1 CCS Table 1: Response Code Change
The listing of (ARS) Response Code changes displays the identifying fields of EQUI records
whose (ARS) Response Codes were changed by the national office system in the current edit job.
The listing also shows the codes for each record, before and after they changed. It concludes
with a count for the number of records whose codes were changed (and listed). ARS Response
Code reassignment is described in Section 11.4.3. A sample page appears as EXHIBIT 11A.

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

October 2018

Page 11-34

EXHIBIT 11A Response Code Change Report
DATE: 07/25/2005
INITIAL RUN 2005/1

TIME:

06:07:08 PM

UI NUMBER

RUN

0000400403
0000400403
0000400403
5000400404
5000400404
2000300313
2000300313
2000100118
6000300314
6000400416
6000400416
7000500518
0000300328
5000504568
4000604658
7000804857
7000404459
9000904964
6000604666
6000604666
9000404466
1000604661
9000604661

00030
00031
00036
00035
00074
00002
00003
00000
00000
00011
00018
00006
00003
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00004
00005
00000
00000
00000

(STATE)
RESPONSE CODE CHANGE (CCS TABLE – 1)
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING
STATE ASSIGNED RESPONSE CODE
50
50
50
50
50
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
50
46
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

PAGE
**CONFIDENTIAL

BLS ASSIGNED RESPONSE CODE
34
34
34
34
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
33
34
34
34
35
35
33
34
34

1
DATA**

11.7.2 CCS Tables 1A and 1B: Code Changes for Large Records
The Selected Records with Sector Level Code Change report (CCS Table 1A) lists CCS records
with employment above a parameter and with an industry code change between industry sectors.
The system compares December employment to the parm unless December employment is zero.
In that case, the system compares January employment to the parm.
Selected Records with Code Changes within the Sector (CCS Table 1B) lists CCS records with
employment above a parameter and with a code change within an industry sector. This type of
code change can include a change between industry codes in the same sector. It can also include
changes to ownership, county, or township. As long as the CCS record does not change industry
codes between sectors, it will appear on 1B rather than 1A. As with CCS Table 1A, the system
compares December employment to the parm unless December employment is zero. In that
case, the system compares January employment to the parm.
These two listings should be used to verify and correct, if necessary, the code changes. The
national office may follow up with specific questions concerning records listed on these reports.
The parms for these two reports, which determine the employment size of the records to be
listed, are included on the EQUI header record. This gives the national office the opportunity to
generate the reports using the same employment thresholds used by the state. BLS’s default
values for these parameters are provided in EXHIBIT 11B. Samples of CCS Tables 1A and 1B
are provided as EXHIBITS 11C and 11D, respectively.

EXHIBIT 11B Parameters for CCS Edit Tables 1A and 1B
The following are the State-specific parameter defaults the national office uses to generate CCS
Tables 1A and 1B.
State

Sector

Within

Level
(1A)

State

Sector

Within

Sector

Level

(1B)

(1A)

Boston/New York region

Sector

Within

Sector

Level

Sector

(1B)

(1A)

(1B)

Atlanta region

State

Dallas/Kansas City region

CT

225

400

AL

175

275

AR

100

200

ME

90

175

FL

500

950

CO

225

375

MA

475

875

GA

300

475

KS

150

225

NH

90

175

KY

200

350

LA

200

325

NY

500

1,000

MS

90

175

MO

250

450

PR

50

50

NC

250

425

MT

50

90

RI

90

175

SC

175

250

NM

90

175

VT

50

90

TN

225

425

OK

175

250

VI

50

50

TX

500

1,000

Philadelphia region

Chicago region
IL

500

1,000

UT

100

200

WY

50

50

DE

60

125

IN

225

375

DC

200

350

IA

175

225

MD

350

600

MI

450

800

AK

50

60

NJ

450

900

MN

250

450

AZ

225

425

PA

500

1,000

NE

125

200

CA

500

1,000

VA

375

600

ND

50

90

HI

100

225

WV

80

150

OH

500

950

ID

50

80

SD

50

90

NV

175

450

WI

250

475

OR

175

250

WA

225

375

San Francisco region

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

October 2018

Page 11-37

EXHIBIT 11C Listing 1A
DATE: 07/25/2005
TIME:
INITIAL RUN 2005/1

06:07:08 PM

(STATE)
PAGE
SELECTED RECORDS WITH SECTOR LEVEL CODE CHANGE (CCS TABLE-1A)
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING
_________________________________________________________________________________

PARAMETERS:
MIN-EMP-TO-LIST-CCS-RECORD-WITH-SEC-CHANGE =

UI ACCOUNT
__________

0000034650
0000232431
0000264458
0000423341
0000425731
0000536576
0000616575
0000666078
0000666078
0000786052
0000789051
0000883076
0000883076
0000883076
0000883076

500

RUN EI NUMBER TRADE/LEGAL NAME
________________________________________

00000
00012
00076
00000
00002
00004
00006
00002
00005
00000
00000
00001
00002
00007
00008

541830748
412300010
545500000
769915696
871745273
760053657
468600020
873252522
873252522
873842488
876946096
874252522
874252522
874252522
874252522

*** CONFIDENTIAL DATA ***

MOONS TAVERN
PINPOINT BALLOONS INC
STARES & BARES
FOOD FOR THAT
SERENITY MARKERS
FORMANS COUNTRY FOUNDATI
BABAR SQUIRE CONSTRUCTIO
NATIONAL PRONOUNCEMENT
NATIONAL PRONOUNCEMENT
ASSOCIATED SOULS & GHOUL
PUN SERVICE EVENTS INC
ODD SERVICES
ODD SERVICES
ODD SERVICES
ODD SERVICES

1

A
U
OLD OLD OLD OLD
NEW NEW
X NAICS OWN CTY TWN NAICS OWN
_ ______ ___ ___ ___ _____ ___

5
0
5
5
0
5
5
1
5
5
5
1
1
1
1

565412
445947
515211
715411
445099
567389
496512
445812
445812
455357
475947
784141
784141
784141
784141

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

047
083
085
085
075
037
037
065
065
065
065
065
065
065
065

000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000

701112
411915
729914
738978
571915
386174
593202
799995
799995
782242
735935
593274
593245
593296
593214

085
037
081
073

4TH QTR
NEW NEW DEC
WAGES
JAN
CTY TWN EMPL ($1000S)
EMPL
___ ___ _____ __________ ____

73
103
54
55
126
96
248
115
61
116
55
83
292
0
0

1709878
3711214
925445
724524
893245
1922343
2852665
1913840
758429
392385
925450
1499482
5454933
0
0

73
98
48
55
129
86
209
0
0
113
44
78
0
103
185

1ST QTR
WAGES
ADM
($1000S) VER
_________ ___

1669823
4276897
829254
648754
932458
2124386
2266586
276
1669
498188
718193
901275
138
2303105
2709828

FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY, DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.

511
511
511
511
511
511
511
511
511
511
511
511
511
511
511

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

October 2018

Page 11-38

EXHIBIT 11D Listing 1B
DATE: 07/25/2005
TIME:
INITIAL RUN 2005/1

06:07:08 PM

(STATE)
SELECTED RECORDS WITH CODE CHANGE WITHIN THE SECTOR OR/AND
LOCALITY CHANGE OR/AND OWNERSHIP CHANGE (CCS TABLE-1B)
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING
_______________________________________________________________________

PAGE
1
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**

PARAMETERS:
MIN-EMP-TO-LIST-CCS-RECORD-FOR-REPORT 1B = 1000

UI ACCOUNT

RUN

EI NUMBER TRADE/LEGAL NAME

A
U
X

__________ _____ _________ __________________________

0000100432
0000200243
0000213227
0000300434
0000500473
0000508566
0000509556
0000600065
0000604574
0000630054
0000660657
0000663245
0000700534
0000700567

00000
00012
00044
00000
00006
00000
00002
00000
00000
00000
00006
00016
00000
00003

410389000
410230000
420105000
893656570
416824450
451603540
745656744
420066557
987766447
895765435
749686099
450455000
410078556
893122430

*** CONFIDENTIAL DATA

TWEEDLEDUM LANE MARKET
WATTERFORD AND LESTER
STARKEY INC
L & L LANDSCAPE
MOLE & SON LANDSCAPERS
FAMISHED SHOE WARHOUSE
BOBS BAR & GRILL
MICKEYS TAVERN
MIRAKLE MARKETS
HOSS SHOES
BAB SQUARE CONSTRUCTION
GOSTARE
FASHION STOREY MARKETING
INFORMANTS COUNTRY FOUND

OLD OLD OLD OLD
NAICS OWN CTY TWN
_____

0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
0
0

209911
367922
421066
509953
509978
514954
541198
581232
602145
621148
651296
651212
738936
738984

NEW NEW NEW NEW
NAICS OWN CTY TWN

___ ___ ___ _____

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

057
083
037
085
075
081
037
047
059
037
037
085
037
037

220632
423165
508732
503378
544115
581389
602265
622132
653114
651320

___ ___ ___

085
037
081
037
071

073
073

DEC
EMPL
____

4TH QTR
WAGES
($1000S)
_________

104 2112305
223 33711214
212 2276859
144 2324524
226 5593245
124 3289072
119 1796786
573 1709878
199 2724597
151 4183490
308 1452665
138 6925445
286 9223283
116 1922343

1ST QTR
JAN
WAGES ADM
EMPL ($1000S) VER
____ ___________

101 2012371 511
280 24676897 511
210 2127598 511
154 2394527 511
226
593245 511
133 2928907 511
117 1742389 511
573 1627822 511
187 2324091 511
166 4834904 511
302 1465745 511
130 6255483 511
280 9323269 511
131 2122337 511

*** FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY, DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-39

11.7.3 CCS Table 2: CCS Creation Counts Report
This report is generated each time the CCS file is created. A downloadable file is also produced
for interna national office use that is utilized in generating edit counts. The report may be
especially helpful in identifying the level of records excluded from the CCS file due to problems,
such as containing a CCS-related I-error or not having the expected code change. It displays the
following counts:
NUMBER
NUMBER
NUMBER
NUMBER
NUMBER

OF
OF
OF
OF
OF

RECORDS ON THE MICRO FILE
CURRENT REFILE RECORDS ON THE MICRO FILE
RECORDS PUT ONTO THE CCS FILE
CCS RECORDS WITH ZERO EMPLOYMENT/WAGES
CCS RECORDS WITH QUESTIONABLE MISSING EMPLOYMENT/WAGES

NUMBER OF MICRO FILE RECORDS EXCLUDED FROM THE CCS FILE:
- WITH RESPONSE CODE 46/50 AND NO CCS CODE CHANGE
- WITH NON-NUMERIC EMPLOYMENT/WAGES OR MISSING CODES
- WITH RESPONSE CODES FOR I-ERRORS (30 & 33) OR OTHER
PROBLEMS (34 & 35)

Additional counts include:
TOTAL NUMBER OF CCS RECORDS WITH:
NEW NAICS
NEW OWNERSHIP
NEW COUNTIESNAICS CHANGES ONLY
OWNERSHIP CHANGES ONLY
LOCATION CHANGES ONLY
NAICS AND OWNERSHIP CHANGES
NAICS AND LOCATION CHANGES
OWNERSHIP AND LOCATION CHANGES
NAICS, OWNERSHIP AND LOCATION CHANGES

The second count, number of current refile records on the state system, is a count of records with
the current year in the ARS Refile Year field. The fourth count, CCS records with zero
employment and wages, refers to the records listed on the CCS Zero Employment and Wages
Report. This report is described in the next section. The fifth count, CCS records with
questionable missing employment/wages, refers to the records listed on CCS Table 8 and is
described in the next section as well as Section 11.5.4.
The sixth, seventh, and eighth counts refer to records that were excluded from the CCS;
however, their ARS Response Code or other conditions suggest that these records were intended
for the CCS and should be reviewed. The records counted here are displayed on CCS Tables 6,
3, and 5, respectively. They are also described in the next section.
The final ten counts show the types of code changes present on the CCS file. The first group
shows how many code changes altogether are present for that type of code change. For example,
the total number of CCS records with a New NAICS shows the number of CCS records with any
NAICS industry code change. For New England states and New Jersey only, a count of records
with a township code change is listed. The second group shows more specifically how many
industry code changes (for example) occur by themselves and how many occur in the various
combinations with other types of code changes.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-40

11.7.4 Missing Code Changes, Problem Response Codes, and Other
Reports
The national office system generates five reports using similar formats:
• CCS Table 3: Records Excluded Due to Nonnumeric Employment/Wages or Missing
Classification Codes
• CCS Table 4: CCS Zero Employment and Wages Report (generated on request only)
• CCS Table 5: Records with Response Code 30, 33, 34, or 35
• CCS Table 6: Records Excluded Due to Missing Code Change
• CCS Table 8: CCS Records with Questionable Missing Employment/Wages (generated
on request only)
CCS Tables 4 and 8 (generated on request only) list records that are included on the CCS file but
have characteristics calling for review. The other three tables list records from the national
office micro file that may belong on the CCS but were excluded. Table 5, the report of Records
with Response Code 30, 33, 34, or 35, is provided as EXHIBIT 11E to illustrate the format
shared by this group of reports.
CCS Table 3: Records Excluded Due to Nonnumeric Employment/Wages or
Missing Classification Codes
This listing, CCS Table 3, shows records that otherwise qualified for the CCS but were excluded
for certain reasons. Specifically, these are records with a missing (blank) first quarter
classification code (industry code, ownership, county, or (for New England states and New
Jersey) township). This report also shows records excluded due to nonnumeric entries in one of
the four monthly employment fields (December through March) or the two total wages fields
(fourth quarter or first quarter). State staff should review records listed on this report to identify
and correct the missing or nonnumeric data elements on the state system. In addition, any
records on this report should be reviewed to see whether they belong on the CCS. If so, the
appropriate correction should be made.
CCS Table 4: CCS Zero Employment and Wages Report
This listing, generated on request, shows CCS records with zero data in either the fourth quarter,
the first quarter, or both. A CCS record will be listed if any of these conditions occurs:
1. Both December employment and fourth quarter wages are zero.
2. All three months of first quarter employment as well as first quarter wages are zero.
3. All four months of employment (December through March) and both quarters of wages
(fourth and first) are zero.
The records are listed for reference. These situations may be legitimate, and usually do not
require correction.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-41

CCS Table 5: Records with Response Code 30, 33, 34, or 35
This listing, CCS Table 5, shows records that have a current ARS Refile Year and that have one
of the following ARS Response Codes:
30 – CCS I-error
33 – The national office assigned, submitted as 46/50 but has CCS I-error on the national
office micro file
34 – The national office assigned, submitted as 46/50 but doesn’t have a true CCS code
change on the national office micro file
35 – The national office assigned, submitted with Comment code 81 and a true code change
but not with an ARS Response Code of 30/46/50
Records with any of these codes should be reviewed by state staff and corrected if they belong
on the CCS. Records with ARS Response Codes 33, 34, and 35 may also appear on CCS Table
1 since the national office system will assign these. (The records will appear on CCS Table 1 if
the codes are assigned in the same edit run.) ARS Response Code 30 will only be assigned in the
states, typically in the state ARS system. However, a CCS I-error flag would also be assigned to
any ARS Response Code 30 record by the national office edit; otherwise, the system would have
changed the ARS Response Code from 30 to 41 or 46. Records with ARS Response Codes 30 or
33 that have I-errors and require correction will also appear on Table 9B. (Response Code
reassignment is described in Section 11.4.3.)
CCS Table 6: Records Excluded Due to Missing Code Changes
This listing, CCS Table 6, displays records on the national office micro file that have a current
ARS Refile Year and an ARS Response Code 46 or 50, but do not have a true CCS code change
as defined in Section 11.2. State staff should review these records to determine whether their
Old fields and first quarter codes are accurate. If the record does not belong on the CCS, remove
the ARS Response Code or assign some other, more appropriate code such as 41 (Reviewed, no
CCS code change). Correcting the ARS Response Code on the state system will likely remove
inappropriate records from the state CCS file.
CCS Table 8: CCS Records with Questionable Missing Employment/Wages
CCS Table 8, generated on request, displays records that are included on the CCS but have a
questionable configuration of "missing" employment or wage data. That is, the records have
indicator M for one or more of the economic data fields used on the CCS, where the
configuration of missing data fields indicates a possible problem or failure with estimating data.
This is explained in the latter part of Section 11.5.4.

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

October 2018

Page 11-42

EXHIBIT 11E CCS Table 5: Records with Response Code 30, 33, 34, or 35
DATE: 07/25/2005
INITIAL RUN 2005/1

UI ACCT.
---------0102002323
0304001243
0600088307
0600088307
0801031714
0801031714
0801031714
0801031714
0800033003
0801031614

RUN
----00000
00002
00007
00008
00000
00003
00006
00013
00000
00000

TIME: 09:42:41 PM
(STATE)
RECORDS EXCLUDED DUE TO RESPONSE CODE 30, 33, 34, OR 35 (CCS TABLE-5)
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING

EI NUMBER
--------410200103
410300198
874252522
874252522
420100250
420100250
420100250
420100250
000000000
424344450

TRADE/LEGAL NAME
---------------BARBS TAVERN
S & P
ODD SERVICES
ODD SERVICES
JLM&N SQUARE CONS
JLM&N SQUARE CONS
JLM&N SQUARE CONS
JLM&N SQUARE CONS
SOLDER OF FORTUNE
HEIGHO MINING SER

A
U
X
0
0
1
1
0
5
0
0
0
0

PAGE
1
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**

4TH QTR
1ST QTR
OLD
OLD OLD OLD Q-1
Q-1 Q-1 Q-1 RS
DEC
WAGES
JAN
FEB
MAR
WAGES
EMP
EMP
EMP ($000S)
NAICS OWN CTY TWN NAICS OWN CTY TWN CD
EMP ($000S)
------ --- --- --- ------ --- --- --- -- ------ ------- ------ ------ ------ ------336414 5 999 000 336414 5 085 000 34
0
0
0
80
83
676
445110 5 057 000 445110 5 057 000 34
13
102
26
44
42
92
721214 5 065 000 721214 5 065 000 34
113
3655
103
96
88
2303
999999 5 065 000 711320 5 065 000 34
0
0
185
166
113
2710
541330 5 900 000 541330 5 073 000 33
165
4055
136
128
130
3688
238990 5 037 000 238990 5 037 000 34
25
96
20
20
23
83
6
13
5
2
0
11
322121 5 025 000 322121 5 025 000 34
522292 5 075 000 532412 5 075 000 35
10
42
0
6
6
32
331494 5 081 000 331494 5 081 000 34
4
11
0
0
0
0
212399 5 037 000 212399 5 037 000 34
9
28
13
10
16
33

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-43

11.7.5 Summary of Differences Reports
CCS Table 7
The Summary of Differences Report generated by the national office system (CCS Table 7) is a
formatted listing of the Summary of Differences file described in Section 11.6. For each record
on the file (each county/ownership/industry cell affected by the CCS), the report shows data
leaving, data entering, and the net change. Data leaving are labeled “from,” while data entering
are labeled “to.”
There are two differences to note between the file and the report.
1. The report itself shows only two months of employment for each cell: December and
January. However, the Summary of Differences file includes fields for all four months
represented on the CCS: December, January, February, and March. The file has two fields
for each month; one shows the employment entering and the other shows employment
leaving.
2. While the report shows the net change to employment and wages, there are no net change
fields present on the file. The net change is calculated when the report is generated, as well
as when the Summary of Differences file is used by the macro edit for code change
integration.
A sample of the Summary of Differences Report appears as EXHIBIT 11G.
CCS Table 7A
The Changes in the CCS Summary of Differences Report (CCS Table 7A) displays Summary of
Differences records/cells that are changed as a result of an EQUI update. It shows, in a format
similar to CCS Table 7, the Summary of Differences data from the previous run and from the
current run, with a third line showing the amount of change. Table 7A gives analysts the
capability to identify large changes in the Summary of Differences caused by EQUI data
changes, beginning with first quarter EQUI update/subset runs and continuing through second
quarter processing. Due to system limitations, the sort sequence is approximate; it is based on
the net change to first quarter (January) employment.
EXHIBIT 11H shows a sample of the Changes in the CCS Summary of Differences Report.

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

October 2018

Page 11-44

EXHIBIT 11G Summary of Differences Report (CCS Table 7)
DATE: 07/25/2005
INITIAL RUN 2005/1
CELL
____________
CNTY/OWN/NAI
___

_

001

5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST
5
4TH
1ST

001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001

____

06:07:08 PM
(STATE)
PAGE
1
CODE CHANGE SUMMARY OF DIFFERENCES FOR 4TH QTR AND 1ST QTR (CCS TABLE-7)
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
FROM (-)
TO (+)
NET CHANGE (+/-)
_____________________________________ _____________________________________
_______________________________________
# OF CCS
DEC/JAN
TOTAL # OF CCS
DEC/JAN
TOTAL
# OF CCS
DEC/JAN
TOTAL
RECORDS EMPLOYMENT
WAGES RECORDS EMPLOYMENT
WAGES
RECORDS
EMPLOYMENT
WAGES
________ __________ _________________ ________ __________ _________________
________ __________ __________________

236115
QTR
QTR
236118
QTR
QTR
238122
QTR
QTR
238131
QTR
QTR
238171
QTR
QTR
238211
QTR
QTR
238221
QTR
QTR
238292
QTR
QTR
238321
QTR
QTR
423220
QTR
QTR
423450
QTR
QTR
423830
QTR
QTR
425120
QTR
QTR
441110
QTR
QTR
441120
QTR
QTR

TIME:

2
2

7
8

28,704
28,337

0
0

0
0

0
0

-2
-2

-7
-8

-28,704
-28,337

0
0

0
0

0
0

1
1

1
1

5,350
4,100

+1
+1

+1
+1

+5,350
+4,100

1
1

6
3

24,545
18,049

0
0

0
0

0
0

-1
-1

-6
-3

-24,545
-18,049

0
0

0
0

0
0

1
1

3
3

8,016
14,450

+1
+1

+3
+3

+8,016
+14,450

1
1

1
1

5,350
4,100

0
0

0
0

0
0

-1
-1

-1
-1

-5,350
-4,100

1
1

8
0

42,944
44,487

1
1

10
9

43,161
41,293

+0
+0

+2
+9

+217
-3,194

0
0

0
0

0
0

1
1

8
0

42,944
44,487

+1
+1

+8
+0

+42,944
+44,487

0
0

0
0

0
0

1
1

0
0

1,350
1,080

+1
+1

+0
+0

+1,350
+1,080

0
0

0
0

0
0

1
1

2
2

3,900
3,900

+1
+1

+2
+2

+3,900
+3,900

1
1

9
9

53,884
38,657

0
0

0
0

0
0

-1
-1

-9
-9

-53,884
-38,657

0
0

0
0

0
0

1
1

9
9

53,884
38,657

+1
+1

+9
+9

+53,884
+38,657

0
0

0
0

0
0

1
1

8
8

69,106
55,326

+1
+1

+8
+8

+69,106
+55,326

1
1

3
4

69,861
98,777

0
0

0
0

0
0

-1
-1

-3
-4

-69,861
-98,777

1
1

1
1

3,000
3,000

0
0

0
0

0
0

-1
-1

-1
-1

-3,000
-3,000

0
0

0
0

0
0

1
1

1
1

3,000
3,000

+1
+1

+1
+1

+3,000
+3,000

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

October 2018

Page 11-45

EXHIBIT 11H Changes in the CCS Summary of Differences report (CCS Table 7A)
DATE: 10/25/2005
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
2005/2

02:25:38 PM
(STATE)
CHANGES IN CCS SOD FOR 4TH QUARTER 2004 AND 1ST QUARTER 2005 - CCS TABLE 7A
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

CELL
-----------CNTY/OWN/NAI

FROM(-)
----------------------------------# OF CCS DEC/JAN
TOTAL
RECORDS
EMPLOYMENT
WAGES
---- - ------ ----------------------------------086

TO(+)
----------------------------------# OF CCS DEC/JAN
TOTAL
RECORDS
EMPLOYMENT
WAGES
-----------------------------------

PAGE
1
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**

NET CHANGE (+/-)
---------------------------------# OF CCS DEC/JAN
TOTAL
RECORDS
EMPLOYMENT
WAGES
----------------------------------

5 336411

1ST OLD
1ST NEW
NET

0
1
1

0
0
0

0
0
0

3
3
0

33
33
0

551,289
551,289
0

3
2
-1

33
33
0

551,289
551,289
0

4TH OLD
4TH NEW
NET

0
1
1

0
374
374

0
2,794,276
2,794,276

3
3
0

33
33
0

556,614
556,614
0

3
2
-1

33
-341
-374

556,614
-2,237,662
-2,794,276

1ST OLD
1ST NEW
NET

5
5
0

17
17
0

196,176
196,176
0

3
4
1

15
15
0

173,171
173,171
0

-2
-1
1

-2
-2
0

-23,005
-23,005
0

4TH OLD
4TH NEW
NET

5
5
0

17
17
0

185,595
185,595
0

3
4
1

17
391
374

242,815
3,037,091
2,794,276

-2
-1
1

0
374
374

57,220
2,851,496
2,794,276

086

5 611610

****END OF SUMMARY OF DIFFERENCE CHANGE REPORT*****

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-46

11.8 Additional National Office Processing of Code Change
Data
The national office system also performs additional functions. In particular, it generates files and
listings for data users, and it can generate an additional report on request: the CCS Master List.
Important users of the data are the Current Employment Statistics (CES) program, which uses
CCS data in conjunction with employment benchmarking activities; and the Bureau of Economic
Analysis (BEA), which uses CCS data to track data movement between fourth and first quarter
macro data.
CES receives a National Summary of Differences file, which summarizes CCS data for all States
to show data entering and leaving each affected ownership/6-digit industry code, as well as the
net changes.
For non-signatory states, BEA receives a Macro CCS file aggregated by ownership/6-digit
industry code/county code. For signatory states, BEA receives a CCS micro file.
The national office system can generate, on request, CCS Master Lists of state CCS files. A
sample page of the CCS Master List is provided as EXHIBIT 11I. The master list is a report
showing every record on the CCS file, displayed in similar format as the four reports covered in
the previous section. Master Lists are sorted by Old Ownership/Old NAICS/UI Account
Number/Reporting Unit Number, in ascending order.
The CCR Micro 1 Review File lists all of a State’s CCS records and is an alternative to the CCS
Master List. More information about the CCR Micro 1 Review File can be found in Chapter 13.

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

October 2018

Page 11-47

EXHIBIT 11I CCS Master List
DATE:

08/08/2005
TIME:
RUN
2005/1

02:36:26 PM

(STATE)
CCS MASTER LIST
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE
1
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**

UI ACCOUNT RUN EI NUMBER TRADE/LEGAL NAME
__________ _____ _________ ________________

A
4TH QTR
1ST QTR
U
OLD OLD OLD OLD
NEW NEW NEW NEW RS DEC
WAGES
JAN
FEB
MAR
WAGES
X NAICS OWN CTY TWN NAICS OWN CTY TWN CD EMPL ($1000S) EMPL EMPL EMPL($1000S)
_ ______ ___ ___ ___ ______ ___ ___ ___ __ _____ ________ _____ _____ _____ _______

0230343120
0460716048
0560086052
0720532079
0310601035
0570357053
0570357053
0670067062
0750315077
0790669075
0810341084
0650675062
0800650289
0870657081
0610451060
0890319084
0610291060
0760006078
0760006078
0760006078
0730183076
0730183076
0730183076
0730183076
0730183076
0730183076
0730183076
0730183076
0530833054
0780438076
0860266086
0840944081
0660716062
0590789051

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

00008
00000
00000
00000
00002
00004
00005
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00002
00013
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00001
00003
00004
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00000
00000
00000
00012
00000
00000

769915696
871745273
873842488
959986398
911323439
872848484
872848484
872637167
872257423
873355231
877452141
870053100
872457448
871456142
878150419
877454148
227883488
873252522
873252522
873252522
874252522
874252522
874252522
874252522
874252522
874252522
874252522
874252522
877943691
874353535
930114519
417096207
878155414
876946096

PHLEMCORP
RANT AMERICA
ASSOCIATED SOULS & GH
DR OPTIMIST LENS CO
EGAD DISCOUNT LIVEWAR
PC INTROSPECTION COMP
PC INTROSPECTION COMP
WHIZCO SALES CORP
ABC PRIZE INC
PINPOINT BALLOONS INC
MAC'S MICROCOMPUTER
US CONCOCT SALES CO
WINFIELD LODGE & STOR
BONGERS
RAT RACK BREWING COMP
CARVING ENTERPRISES I
BAGGETTS BODY SHOP IN
NATIONAL PRONOUNCEMEN
NATIONAL PRONOUNCEMEN
NATIONAL PRONOUNCEMEN
ODD SERVICES
ODD SERVICES
ODD SERVICES
ODD SERVICES
ODD SERVICES
ODD SERVICES INC
ODD SERVICES INC
ODD SERVICES INC
FRONTAGE THRIFT INC
FATNESS FIRST INC
PAMPAS RETAIL OUTLETS
G DOLTEN COMIX
GRANT SLAP SPORTS
PUN SERVICE EVENTS IN

541820
515112
443112
443112
443120
443120
443120
443120
443120
443120
443120
451220
711110
711110
722410
722410
446110
446110
446110
446110
446110
446110
446110
446110
446110
446110
446110
446110
522298
451110
451110
451211
451120
453220

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

062
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066
066

000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000

515111
512120
443120

421440
443120
443120
443120
711110
624410
446199
454390
454390
454390
454390
454390
454390
454390
454390
454390
454390
454390
421910
448210
446199
532299

056

048
048
086

048
070
086

086
086

50
46
46
46
50
50
50
46
46
46
50
46
46
50
46
50
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
50
50
50
46
46
46
50
46
46

0
5
116
2
12
0
0
1
7
2
14
30
20
32
4
11
23
9
115
4
83
103
48
232
185
0
0
0
32
5
13
0
2
25

0
25
392
37
33
0
0
6
20
13
98
321
24
52
24
12
57
1317
1913
193
1499
1103
531
2454
2509
0
0
0
80
51
27
0
4
25

8
5
113
2
11
5
5
1
5
2
12
31
15
29
4
9
20
0
0
0
78
251
0
261
0
179
8
0
32
5
11
3
2
14

7
5
116
2
11
5
5
1
5
0
12
33
20
31
4
10
18
0
0
0
78
254
0
266
0
182
8
1
32
5
9
3
2
14

7
5
115
2
11
5
5
1
3
0
11
37
20
31
4
11
18
0
0
0
80
269
0
261
0
176
8
1
32
5
9
3
2
14

*** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **** FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY, DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.

30
24
498
38
40
28
28
3
22
4
38
356
16
49
24
13
50
0
0
0
901
3644
0
3052
0
3383
120
28
76
36
24
10
4
18

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Data: Concepts, Rules, and BLS Processing

Page 11-48

11.9 Cleaning CCS Data
States should perform their review and clean-up of CCS data in coordination with the general
cleaning of first quarter data for other purposes. The EQUI correction files should address CCS
issues as well as I-errors, macro flags, multi-unit discrepancies and so on. CCS issues include
addressing edit flags on the Micro Edits Only listing (Table 9B) as well as reviewing CCS output
tables. In first quarter, the regular 30-day clean-up schedule applies to the CCS as well as the
normal data problems that can occur in any quarter.
Meanwhile, the national office will follow up with the state where necessary regarding records
with code changes and large employment (on CCS Tables 1A and 1B) or possibly other records
listed on reports described in Section 11.7. Some issues of concern to BLS may not be resolved
within the 30-day clean-up period, and may continue into second quarter processing. Meanwhile
data changes and corrections that states make for other purposes can continue to change CCS
files in the national office, as long as the national office system is used to regenerate those files.
Although the national office does not close out CCS processing and generate final versions of the
files until all related issues are solved in every state, a complete and accurate National Summary
of Differences must be generated in a timely manner.
In brief, CCS processing in the national office is performed in the first and second quarters.
Afterwards, CCS processing in the national office is discontinued for the remainder of the year.

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

February 14, 2020

Page 12-1

Chapter 12 – Preparing and Transmitting the
EQUI
The state systems generate files of EQUI records with the specified layout, including the
required data elements, from the state system databases. By using standardized processes to
update and edit data and then generate an EQUI file, the state provides BLS with all its micro
level employment and wage data, pertinent administrative data and corrections to these data
fields for all unlocked quarters. This ensures substantial consistency between state and BLS
data.
-------------------- Contents of Chapter 12 -------------------12.1 State Processing to Generate a Clean Deliverable
12.2 Creating the Deliverable EQUI File
12.2.1 EQUI Records and Transaction Types
12.2.2 Changes to Records
12.2.3 Special Measures to Maintain Consistency between Files
12.2.4 Corrections and Updates for Earlier Quarters
12.3 Transmitting the File
12.3.1 Transmittal Options
12.3.2 Using the QCEW Program Data Transmittal Form
12.4 Sending Test Files When Making System Changes
12.5 File Retention

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-2

12.1 State Processing to Generate a Clean Deliverable
Each state varies in size, UI system, organization, etc. The state QCEW systems offer states the
flexibility to choose processing and editing options that work best in their environment. States
have some leeway in selecting processing jobs and their timing in order to create an ideal
schedule for delivering clean, comprehensive employment and wage data to BLS on a quarterly
basis. Appendix E contains a suggested quarterly processing sequence.
States have several processing options within each standardized system:
• OPTION 1: Edit micro data on an on-going basis and then run the integrated edit during the
last few weeks of processing.
•

OPTION 2: Impute all missing or delinquent data when the first extract is loaded. Then edit
all data through the integrated (micro and macro level) edits throughout the production cycle.

•

OPTION 3: Edit micro data on an on-going basis. At a selected cut-off, impute all missing
or delinquent data. After that, include in the integrated edit all previously edited micro
records as well as all new micro records not previously edited. The integrated edit output
will list flagged new micro records, previously flagged records with remaining invalid errors,
and all flagged macro records.

States also choose between two editing and processing systems: WIN and EXPO. Though
managed separately, these two systems share similar characteristics. Both systems provide a
series of partial or specialized edits that flag such characteristics as unbalanced multi-accounts,
gross errors, and incorrect ARS responses. These edits, which can be routinely run throughout
the quarter, flag micro data that exceed certain parameters, are erroneous or are missing
processing codes.
Both systems also provide comprehensive integrated edits that screen micro and macro data for
outliers and identify missing data. Though integrated edits can be run at any time during the
quarter after imputation, they must be run and reviewed near the end of the processing cycle -after all new UI or MWR/EDI files have been loaded and just before EQUI submittal. Once an
integrated edit is run for a current quarter, however, the State should not switch back to editing
micro records only but should continue editing in an integrated edit mode.
In addition to pre-programmed edits, both systems provide state the flexibility to write
customized queries (Progress queries for WIN and 40D for EXPO) to root out data issues not
captured by typical routines. For systems’ manuals and examples of state processing schedules,
visit StateWeb.
Each State should work with their regional office to ensure that their processing schedule will
produce clean, timely data.

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-3

Options
Option 1: Running the Micro Edit Before Running the Full Integrated Edit
Advantages:
• Reported micro data can be edited early in the production cycle. (Initial review of first
micro extract.)
• Allows the user to edit, update, and assign comments to micro data prior to processing
macro data.
• Allows states to more frequently extract data and spread out review and correction work
across more work weeks.
Disadvantages:
• Does not prioritize effort toward finding issues creating the largest distortions in local and
state macro data.
• Less efficient than concurrently resolving micro problems and viewing impact on macro
data.
• Does not utilize other data in the cell to assist in the micro data review.
Option 2: Running the Full Integrated Edit
Advantages:
• Prioritizes effort toward finding issues creating the largest distortions in local and state
macro data.
• Easier to monitor industry patterns and other economic occurrences in your state.
• Ability to more quickly see large economic changes in your state. Useful during recessions
and recoveries, and after natural disasters.
• Easier to determine the impact of the micro records on the macro data, if data are
simultaneously processed at both the micro and macro levels.
• More efficient to resolve all questions associated with a micro record at one time, including
both micro issues and their impact on the macro level.
• Greater assurance that all edit flags are addressed.
Disadvantages:
• You will review an imputed version and a reported version of the same micro record within
a few weeks’ time when employers send late data.
Option 3: Combination of Approaches
Edit earlier extracts with the microdata editing processes; switch to integrated edits for later
extracts. For example, if only two current quarter UI Tax File extracts are run, edit the first
extract using the micro edit programs. Use the integrated edit for the second round of extracted
micro data. The integrated edit should also be used to continue editing any unresolved micro
errors/failures and imputed missing or delinquent micro data. If more than two extracts are run,

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-4

this approach should be modified based on the timing of the extracts and when the imputations
are generated.
Advantages:
• Reported micro data can be edited early in the production cycle. (Initial review of first
micro extract.)
• Comments can be assigned and problems corrected closer to the time the reports are actually
received from the respondent.
• Once the integrated edit is run, all associated flagged micro records are listed with the macro
cell. Your review of the previously processed micro records may identify an economic
condition or pattern within the macro cell. It may take fewer resources to review the
remainder of the records with similar data movement.
• You have an opportunity to easily determine the quality of the imputations on both the micro
and macro data and address problems.
• More time to resolve issues creating the largest distortions in the local and state economic
story.
Disadvantages:
• Records previously addressed reappear each time you review the record
Tax System Cutoffs
State staff should work with the regional office to establish a cut-off date, after which the state
will not import any new data from the tax system. This cut-off date needs to allow state staff
enough time to complete edits and ensure a clean EQUI file. Late data that does not make the
cut-off can always be extracted, edited, corrected, and transmitted as prior quarter data in the
next EQUI submittal.

12.2 Creating the Deliverable EQUI File
The state systems generate a file of EQUI records with the required data elements in the
specified layout. When the state systems generate standardized EQUI files, they include:
• Non-quarterly (administrative) fields
• Multiple quarters of data
• New reporting units (new UI/RUNs) not previously reported
• New quarterly data for UI/RUNs reported previously
• Data changes for UI/RUNs reported previously in the current or earlier quarters
State systems do not generate EQUI records for establishments with a Type of Coverage code of
8 (not covered). However, they do generate records for units with a Status Code of 2 (inactive) if
additional information is available after the inactive status was first assigned. All remaining

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

February 14, 2020

Page 12-5

records are included on the EQUI, including master records with an MEEI code of 2. The same
file may also contain back quarter records, also in the EQUI format.
All records must include the appropriate Transaction Code, state FIPS Code, Year, Quarter, UI
Account Number, and Reporting Unit Number to be loaded to BLS files. The format used for all
data records is detailed in Appendix K.
The update process allows states to submit the current quarter data to BLS along with
corrections/updates for up to four previous quarters. The Cooperative Agreement requires at
least one extraction and review of late and retroactive prior quarter data for every new processing
quarter, so each EQUI deliverable file will contain data for at least two quarters. States may
continue to correct the current and previous quarters on a flow basis during the BLS review
period.
Normally, all EQUI data available for the current quarter or any back quarter unlocked in BLS
are submitted together. Once received in the national office, the data are loaded together and all
quarters of data for a given record are processed and edited together. Once the current quarter
file is submitted, corrections to it and/or other back quarters should be submitted in compliance
with the correction policy.

12.2.1 EQUI Records and Transaction Types
The standardized systems create the following types of record entries:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Header record
Trailer record
Initial current quarter active records
Updates to current quarter micro data
Updates to prior quarter micro data
Initial records for one or more back quarters of micro data
Deleted records
Inactivated records
Reactivated records
Updates to administrative or non-quarterly data
Predecessor/Successor Linkages

Five transaction codes, corresponding to transaction types, are used in the first position of each
EQUI record.
Transaction Type
Header record
Trailer record

TRANSACTION TYPES AND CODES
Transaction Code
H
T

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Deleted record
Full data record (all fields provided)
Predecessor-Successor Supplement

Page 12-6

D
F
P

The format of each record type is provided in Appendix K.
Header Records (H):
The header record contains detailed control information about the file submitted (e.g., volume
serial number, record length, block size, creation due date and time); information identifying the
processing State, year, and quarter; and information about the State editing parameters and
tolerances.
Trailer Records (T):
The trailer record provides summary information on the number of records in the transmission,
as well as establishment counts and employment and wage totals by year, quarter, and
ownership. BLS-Washington compares the trailer record with EQUI micro data to ensure that
BLS was able to read all of the data included on the file.

Delete Records (D):
A “delete” or D record has the effect of removing all data on the file for that unit, regardless of
how many quarters are on the file. States should delete erroneous UI Account Number and
Reporting Unit Number combinations that never belonged on the state system. These are
actually removed in EXPO while WIN inactivates all quarters and hides the data. “Delete”
records should not be confused with “inactivate” records (units that are out of business, were
sold, or subunits which ceased to be reported separately). A change in the Status Code to a “2”
inactivates the record, but its historical data are retained on the file.
The standardized system will generate “delete” records with the following fields:
"DELETE" RECORD FIELDS
Positions Length Data Element
1
1
Transaction Code = “D”
2-3
2
State FIPS Code
4-7
4
Year
8
1
Quarter
9-18
10
UI Account Number
19-23
5
Reporting Unit Number

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-7

To delete an entire multi-establishment family, a "D" record must be sent for each subunit as
well as the master record.
If the user designates a record for deletion, the system will automatically change the status code
for the record to “inactive” for all open quarters. Deletions should be rare, since all quarters of
data will effectively be removed. The user should be very cautious when deleting data. Only
those records that were written to the state system in error should be deleted.
If, however, only the current quarter micro data should be deleted or a particular segment of the
file, the fields should be zero- or blank-filled on quarterly occurrence fields, as appropriate.
Inactive records should be assigned an end of liability date and an inactive status (Status Code 2)
on the state system to avoid imputing for missing data.
The state should maintain a transaction file or audit trail and back up files in case large segments
of the file are incorrectly deleted. If a few records are incorrectly deleted, the state should add
the data for all appropriate quarters.
Full Data Records (F):
These update records provide normal data using every field. Every EQUI data element that is
present on the state system for the specified year/quarter is included on these records, whether or
not they were transmitted to BLS already. The state systems generate these records in the EQUI
format with the following fields:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Transaction Code of "F" in the first position of the EQUI record
State FIPS code
Year
Quarter
UI Account Number
Reporting Unit Number
All other EQUI data elements as they exist on the state system

During an update, if a matching BLS record exists, Transaction Code F tells the BLS system to
overlay all relevant data elements on the BLS micro file with the contents of the EQUI record.
For example, an EQUI update record with Transaction Code F may have a blank Trade Name
field. This indicates that no Trade Name is present on the state system; therefore, the Trade
Name will become blank on the BLS file as well (whether or not it was blank before).
Predecessor/Successor Supplemental Records
Predecessor/Successor supplemental records provide detailed information about the relationship
between a predecessor and its successor. A pred/succ supplemental record is generated for each
EQUI data record with a comment code of 85, 86, 87, 92, or 93. This means that for each
identified pred/succ relationship (or pair), two pred/succ records are generated: one for the
predecessor and one for the successor.

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

February 14, 2020

Page 12-8

12.2.2 Changes to Records
Changes to Numeric Data
If you change a numeric field (such as employment, wages, or contributions) to zero on the state
system, the same occurs on the EQUI. If you change an alpha-numeric field to blank on the state
system, the system will blank out that field on the EQUI. This in turn converts the field on the
BLS file to blanks.
Quarter
2019/1
2019/2
2019/3

An example of reporting alpha-numeric field changes

Submitted
August
November
February

Change to second line of street address…
Includes "Suite 7431"
Is blank
Is reported as blank

In the third quarter of this example, the field is reported as blank because it was already blanked
out on both the state and BLS systems in the prior quarter.
Changes to Inactive Records:
If a record is inactivated for a quarter and the EQUI submittal is the first submittal for that record
for that quarter, then all fields are submitted. This includes zeroes in the employment and wages
and "M" (missing) in the employment and wage indicator fields. A "2" (inactive) appears in the
Status Code field.
For records becoming inactive, the state systems send a full EQUI record only for the first
inactive quarter. The state systems are not required to send EQUI records for subsequent
quarters unless there is a change to at least one field on the EQUI (e.g., successor UI/RUN, end
of liability date, quarterly data, etc.). If a record is already inactive and you are updating other
data fields (e.g., end of liability date), the system will still send a full record.
If data were reported or imputed during the time that a record is inactive, the employment and
wage data will remain on the file unless the state physically alters the data to zero. Altering is
not required since the Status Code is searched in all aggregation programs, and output programs
bypass all inactive records. For example, inactive records are always excluded from the macro
file.
Any new information added to inactive records for any unlocked quarter maintained on the state
system is sent to BLS for use in longitudinal research (see Appendix W).
Changes to Non-quarterly or Administrative Records
Administrative or non-quarterly fields can be changed in any quarter consistent with the
correction policy. Non-quarterly fields are updated on the BLS file regardless of the year/quarter
as long as the year/quarter combination of the EQUI record is unlocked on BLS files. If the
reference period is locked, the BLS system will not update the record.

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-9

If multiple quarters are submitted on the same EQUI, all the data will first be loaded to the BLS
micro file and then edited. For example, if three quarters are submitted for the first time for a
record, and all data are reported each time, the non-quarterly data will only be edited once.
Administrative
Data / NonQuarterly Data

When to Include Administrative Data
Data Fields Submitted
Included with These Records
•

Active accounts

Any data for active accounts.

Inactive accounts

Missing Dates
• End of Liability
• Input (Setup)
• Reactivation
• Initial Liability
UI#/RU#
• Predecessor
• Successor
Status Code
ARS
• Response Code,
• Refile Year,
• Old Fields, etc.

•

All active single, sub-unit, or
master UI- or UCFE-covered
records on state system.
Records reporting retroactively,
also include quarterly occurrence
for the reference and prior quarter.

Any inactive single, sub-unit, or master
UI- or UCFE-covered record on state
system that has not been archived off
the file.

Note: Each time a record is submitted for one or more back quarters of data, it includes all data
fields in the EQUI format. This includes current administrative or non-quarterly information,
because only the most current administrative data is maintained for each record. For example, if
a unit was not on the state system for an earlier quarter, but research indicates the physical
location differed during that time period, enter the most recent information on the state system to
be updated on the EQUI file. If both the current and prior quarter are submitted on the same file
for a specific UI/RUN, both records would contain the same administrative information since
both would be full records.
Reactivated Records:
If a record is reactivated, it is submitted on the EQUI with a "1" (active) in the Status Code field.
The Status Code field is a quarterly field which is populated in state systems based on dates, in
this case, by the reactivation date.

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-10

12.2.3 Special Measures to Maintain Consistency between Files
The state systems can generate special EQUI files that provide full data for one quarter only, or
that provide data only for specified reporting units. Processing problems may sometimes occur
that cause significant inconsistencies between data on the state system and data on the BLS
micro file. Following consultation with their regional office, states can generate one of these
special files to bring state and BLS data back in sync.
A one-quarter EQUI file provides an EQUI record for every status 1 (active) and status 2
(inactive) record on the state system for the specified quarter. This file replaces all data on the
BLS micro file for the matching UI/RUNs for the specified quarter.
States can also submit a subset EQUI file. A subset is a special file that provides data for
specified reporting units and can be used to fix serious errors and restore consistency just prior to
BLS publication. Subsets create additional review work at BLS when time is very limited.
Almost all publication issues are resolvable using corrections made at BLS. When BLS needs a
subset for publication purposes, BLS national office staff will typically share information
regarding the specific records desired for inclusion on the subset. This information is sent to the
regional office for transmission to the state. BLS publication closeout is most efficient when only
the requested records are included in the subset. The state systems generate the subset EQUI file
using, as input, a file of identifying information. The input file contains the state FIPS code,
Year, Quarter, UI Account Number, and RUN for each record needed. The state system finds
the matching record and creates the corresponding EQUI records. These are full EQUI records
containing all available data for the specified quarter, plus all available non-quarterly data.
EQUI subset file records have a status of either 1 (active), 2 (inactive), or 9 (pending).

12.2.4 Corrections and Updates for Earlier Quarters
Consistency between state and BLS data is generally maintained by updating the state system
and providing BLS with all micro level corrections made to the state system for all unlocked
quarters. EQUI files, correction files, update files and subset files all transmit updated data from
state systems to BLS. BLS staff can also make changes to microdata in the BLS processing
system in order to reduce the need for a subset file.
Extract Requirements
All states follow the same minimum requirements for collecting employer data. States must
extract all current quarter data at least twice per quarter and prior quarter data at least once per
quarter. Extracts pick up all new and changed account information occurring since the previous
extract. Note that the prior quarter is defined as the quarter immediately preceding the current
reference quarter (e.g., if the current reference quarter is 2019/4, then the prior quarter is 2019/3).
Initial extracts for the quarter include all data for the current quarter, including any non-quarterly
or prior quarter fields that may have changed. Most states run two or three extracts each quarter

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-11

while a few run them weekly or daily. Because the state UI tax agencies do not follow the same
data review guidelines as those required by BLS, state processing systems have procedures for
locking selected fields. These can be locked to protect data that have already been reviewed, so
they are not replaced by data of lesser quality coming in with consecutive extracts. Each state
system also has a mechanism to compare extracted data against locked data to manually
determine if changes are needed.
Prior quarter data extracts, as well as multiple extracts for the current quarter, are run to obtain
later arriving data from UI and information on retroactive accounts set up since the last extract.
Late data are loaded to the files to replace imputations. Current imputation procedures only
allow one to two quarters of imputation before the data are zero-filled. BLS places tolerances on
the amount of imputed data permissible, both over time and as a percent of the total file; the
ability to capture actual reported data from nearly all American businesses is a hallmark of the
QCEW program’s data quality and utility. By replacing estimates with late data, the state can
reduce the amount of imputed data on file, and also reduce the number of consecutively imputed
quarters for some records, thus preventing active accounts from being dropped.
Any QCEW program information added to the UI tax file or other source files relating to inactive
accounts that still reside on the state system is also extracted. Information from inactive
accounts may include more accurate end of liability dates as well as information on their possible
successors.
For example, an account reports on the Quarterly Contributions Report (QCR) through 2016/2, is
imputed for 2016/3 and 2016/4, and zero-filled for 2017/1. Staff manually inactivates the record
after 2016/2 by providing an end of liability date of July 1, 2016. During the 2017/3 extract, the
End of Liability Date and a Successor UI Account Number are also extracted for the record. The
inactive record on the state system is updated with this information so the correction will be
provided to BLS. These data fields provide greater detail on deaths on the file, and
predecessor/successor information, both of which will be used extensively for longitudinal
research purposes as discussed in Chapter 5.
Most states use a copy of the state system micro file to compare extracted data against previously
received data to determine if changes are needed. Options for identifying what to include on the
extract are:
•
•
•
•

Compare a version of the state system micro file to what is on the UI tax system for the
fields on the system. These frequently use EXPO and WIN output files referred to as the
76 jobs to use in the comparison.
Compare the last extract to the tax system to identify anything new or different
Compile transactions to the tax system that occurred to fields on the state system since
the last extract
Dump of the tax file fields used in the state system and loading only those data elements
that are new or different from what is already on the file.

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-12

Key Features of the Correction Policy
•

Automated Transfer of Corrections to BLS Files
The state systems generate EQUI correction records that are submitted to BLS. This
approach ensures substantial consistency between the files and minimizes errors. The
EQUI file generation process creates a file of every changed record since the last EQUI
file output. The “last EQUI file” can be an initial file, an update file, and in some cases, a
subset file.

•

Automated Correction of Macro Files from Micro Files
All corrections impacting employment and wage data made to the state systems are
applied to the macro file when it is re-aggregated. These include changes to employment,
total wages, county code, NAICS, ownership, MEEI, and status. No corrections are
directly made to the macro data, either in the states or BLS.

The correction policy is summarized on the chart that follows. Specific points are listed below.
QCEW CORRECTION POLICY
Any correction/update made in the state to quarters that are unlocked in BLS is
transmitted to BLS to maintain consistency in the files.
Current

(reference)

Example

Quarter

(Quarterly
Occurrence
Data)

Extract from UI
tax and other
information
sources

Example

Quarters which can be
corrected/updated on
BLS files

Example for
BLS files

Fourth of prior
year and first
of reference
year

2019/4,
2020/1

Must update fourth
quarter of the prior year
and the reference
quarter; may update
first, second, and third
quarters of the prior year

2019/4 and
2020/1
required; may
update 2019/1,
2020/2, and
2020/3

(required for
quarters noted)

First

2020/1

Second

2020/2

First and
second of
reference year

2020/1,
2020/2

Must update only first
and second quarters of
the reference year

2020/1 and
2020/2
required

Third

2020/3

Second and
third of
reference year

2020/2,
2020/3

Must update second and
third quarters of the
reference year, may
update first quarter of
the reference year

2020/2 and
2020/3
required; may
update 2020/1

February 14, 2020

Fourth

2020/4

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Third and
fourth of
reference year

2020/3,
2020/4

Must update third and
fourth quarters of the
reference year, may
update first and second
quarters of the reference
year

Page 12-13

2020/3 and
2020/4
required; may
update 2020/1
and 2020/2

Unlocked Quarters on state and BLS Files:
For those quarters that are unlocked on BLS files, all corrections made to the state files are
submitted to BLS.
For the prior and current quarters, extract data from the tax file or other sources for all new
information available since the last extract. This includes:
•
•
•
•

Active accounts
Retroactive or reactivated accounts
Reported data for delinquent accounts
Other corrections

These changes must be made to the state micro database so the state can transmit them to BLS on
the EQUI. Any current and prior quarter corrections that impact earlier unlocked quarters are
then made to both state and BLS files. State systems permit extracting UI data back for many
prior quarters, but BLS only requires the extract of the immediate prior quarter.
Updates to Macro Data
All macro file data are derived from the micro database file, in both the states and BLS. Once
the state system is updated, the macro file is recreated using the updated micro file. Many data
elements submitted on the EQUI will not affect macro data. Some of these include addresses,
names, telephone numbers, and EINs. Other elements like industry, county, and ownership
codes, monthly employment, and total wages do affect the macro records. (Macro data
processing is discussed in more detail in Chapter 10 – Macro File and the Integrated Edit.)
Some changes to micro data may result in two macro cells being changed. For instance, if a
private sector restaurant is updated and re-coded from county code “031” to “059,” both macro
cells 722110/5/031 and 722110/5/059 will be updated and edited.

12.3 Transmitting the File
There are two common methods for transmitting EQUI data to the national office. EQUI data
files must not be sent to the national office via e-mail under any circumstances due to BLS data
security provisions. The approved methods are:

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-14

1. Submitting as a Service Center State
2. Submitting files using EUSWeb

The following criteria should be used in determining the appropriate method.
•

If a state is using the Service Center for processing, they also use the Service Center for
submission of the EQUI.

•

Non-Service Center States, WIN States and Service Center states alike can use EUS
Web for submittals.

•

FTP transfer is also a possibility as a backup, but this must be coordinated and tested in
advance on a case by case basis, and so it is not described in detail here.

12.3.1 Transmittal Options
1. Submitting as a Service Center State
For Service Center States, the creation of EQUI deliverables is done at the Service Center.
Though all handling is done on-site, information regarding the exchange and processing of data
must still be communicated.
a) Service Center States creating their deliverable at DMA use the following naming
conventions which must be maintained for processing:
The initial quarterly (primary) submittal and EQUI correction (or secondary or update)
files, use the following naming convention:
DSN = ACTINT.ACCT.EQUI.DATA.STYRQ
Where:
ACTINT = the state's account and initial assigned at DMA
(example = YBU10W for Delaware's)
ACCT = the account at DMA (example = A145 which is Delaware's)
ST = State postal abbreviation (example = DE for Delaware)
YRQ = the most recent processing year and quarter contained on the file
(example = 204 for the 2020 fourth quarter)
A complete example would be DSN = YBU10W.A145.EQUI.DATA.DE204 for the
2020/4 file from Delaware.

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-15

One-quarter EQUI files and EQUI subset files (described in Section 12.2.3) use the
following naming convention:
DSN = ACTINT.ACCT.EQUI.FED.STYRQ
Where:
ACTINT = the State's account and initial assigned at DMA
(example = YBU10W for Delaware's)
ACCT = the account at DMA (example = A145 which is Delaware's)
ST = State postal abbreviation (example = DE for Delaware)
YRQ = the most recent processing year and quarter contained on the file
(example = 204 for the 2020 fourth quarter)

A complete example would be DSN = YBU10W.A145.EQUI.FED.DE204 for the 2020/4
file from Delaware.
b) After file creation, the state should catalog their dataset and send DBES a completed
QCEW data transmittal form. Send the transmittal form via e-mail to the group name
“EQUI_Submittals” with a copy to the regional office. This will get the form directly to
a group of people responsible for EQUI processing or interested in file receipts. Follow
the directions in Appendix S when completing the email subject line.

2. Submitting Files Using EUSWeb
EUSWeb is another method for transmitting the EQUI and update transaction files. The
procedures for using EUSWeb are documented in the EUSWEB User's Guide that can be
accessed at http://199.221.111.170/content/EUSWEB.doc. States must conform to the proper
format, naming conventions, and compression conventions given below.
•

http://199.221.111.136/default.aspx

•

For format, files must be saved in ASCII (text) format.

For the file name, state must use the following standard naming convention. This step is
necessary for correct routing of the files. States should put their initial (primary) EQUI files in
the MCR directory and put update (secondary, correction, subset) files in the CRX directory.

February 14, 2020

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-16

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-17

For a primary EQUI submittal:
File Name = STMCRYQN.txt
Where:
ST = the State postal abbreviation (example = DE for Delaware)
MCR = the constant portion of the EQUI file name that is used for pollster routing
Y = the last digit of the most recent year
Q = most recent quarter
N = an incremental field in case a state has more than one file to transmit for the same
year/quarter
A complete example would be file name = DEMCR741.TXT for Delaware’s initial submittal
of their EQUI in 2027/4.
For a secondary/correction/subset file:
File Name = STCRXYQN.txt
Where:
ST = the State postal abbreviation (example = DE for Delaware)
CRX = the constant portion of the correction file name that is used for pollster routing
Y = the last digit of the most recent year
Q = most recent quarter
N = an incremental field in case a state has more than one file to transmit for the same
year/quarter
A complete example would be file name = DECRX742.TXT for Delaware’s second update
transaction file in 2027/4.
Files over 1MB in size must be transmitted in zipped format; while files of any size can be
transmitted in this format. States may use a standard product such as PKZIP or WinZip. When
zipping files, states should put each text file in a .zip file with the same naming convention
(except for the extension). For example, the zipped version of DECRX832.TXT would be called
DECRX832.ZIP.
Once the file has been posted to EUSWeb, the completed transmittal form should be sent via email to DBES at the group name “EQUI_Submittals” with a copy to the regional office.
Follow the directions in Appendix S when completing the email subject line. This will get
the form directly to a group of people responsible for EQUI processing, or interested in file
receipts.

12.3.2 Using the QCEW Program Data Transmittal Form
The QCEW Program Data Transmittal Form (EXHIBIT 12A) was designed to be stored and
filled out electronically in Microsoft Word.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-18

DBES compares the record counts on the transmittal sheet to the file sent by the state. DBES
reaches out to the state via the regional office regarding any discrepancies. If the counts don’t
match, DBES will not process the file until the two are reconciled.
The following procedures give some general guidelines for using the form.
Acquiring the Transmittal Form
The EQUI data transmittal form is available via the StateWeb server on the QCEW program
page under QCEW Quick Links. Right click that link and select “Save target as…” to save a
copy of the form to your computer.
http://199.221.111.170/Programs/QCEW/quick_links/2019_EQUI_Transmittal.docx
Completing the Transmittal Form
When filling out the form, make sure that only one box is checked in items with multiple check
boxes. If you check the “Other” box, be sure to include the appropriate information in the space
provided. Finally, if additional information is helpful for any specific item or the file in general,
provide the information in the “Remarks” section of the form. (For example, if the file is a test
file.)
Saving the Transmittal Form
The state should save a copy of the completed form. Use a file naming convention that identifies
the year, quarter, and number of submittals within the quarter (1st tape, revised tape, etc.). For
example, the State of Virginia may save its first EQUI transmittal form for 2020/4 as
EQUI2020-4VA1.doc, where "…VA1" would indicate Virginia's first submittal. Subsequent
submittals would be labeled "…VA2", "…VA3", etc.
Sending the Form
E-mail the form to "EQUI_Submittals" and copy your regional office. Follow the directions in
Appendix S when completing the email subject line.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

EXHIBIT 12A QCEW Program Data Transmittal Form

Page 12-19

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Preparing and Transmitting the EQUI

Page 12-20

12.4 Sending Test Files When Making System Changes
The national office strongly recommends that test EQUI files be submitted to the national office
several weeks in advance of the deliverable whenever a state implements a new processing
system or makes a major change to an existing processing system. (Making a normal version
change, such as changing EXPO or WIN, would not be considered a major change and would not
require a test tape.) A major change to the state’s UI Extract process or a major change to the UI
Tax system such as from a UI Modernization would warrant test files.
The reason for the submittal of the test file is to determine if the new or changed processing
system adversely affects the deliverable so that any identified problems can be corrected before
the deliverable is submitted. Early identification of problems will make it more likely that
corrective action can be taken before the actual QCEW data are needed for tabulation. The test
files will not be stored on the databases at the national office, and corrections will not be
processed against the test files.
The test file must contain all regular data elements so that it may be properly screened by the
BLS EQUI processing system.
The regional office should notify the national office of any changes in the state's processing that
might require the submittal of a test file and of the date and method of transmittal of this file.

12.5 File Retention
State systems provide the means for states to easily archive and retain EQUI files as well as other
files, including the oldest quarters of data that "roll off" the Micro file and the Macro file.
It is essential that states keep a copy of every EQUI file sent to BLS, whether it is the quarterly
deliverable or a correction file. This is because EQUI files can be lost or damaged in
transmission and may need to be replaced. State systems will generate correction records by
identifying all changes made to the data since the last EQUI file was generated. However, this
tracking of data changes can be thrown off if the previous file was lost and needs to be replaced.
Therefore, lost files should be replaced from backup copies, so state systems are not called upon
to generate EQUI records a second time for data that were only changed once.
Current: BLS requires the following retention of files by the states:
• EQUI: retain in machine-readable form for a minimum of three years.
• ARS Control file: retained until after completion of the next cycle for the same portion
of the universe. Presently, this is five years.
• Micro Files: retain in machine-readable form for a minimum of 3 years after submittal
of data to BLS. It is recommended that states retain this indefinitely.
• QCEW macro data: retain indefinitely (publications)
BLS continues to retain data indefinitely.

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

September 30, 2019

Page 13-1

Chapter 13 – BLS Processing of the EQUI Data
The Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file is the primary quarterly
deliverable states send to BLS. It is the source of all data the QCEW program publishes and
provides to data users. This chapter describes how BLS processes EQUI files, and gives
particular emphasis to printed output. Also covered are correction procedures and BLS data
estimation for late files.
----------- Contents of Chapter 13 ----------13.1 Overview of BLS Processing
13.1.1 BLS Micro File
13.1.2 Normal BLS Processing of EQUI Files
13.1.3 Macro Data for Key Users and Publication
13.1.4 Locking Out Data Changes for Older Quarters
13.1.5 Special Processing to Ensure Consistent, Accurate Data
13.2 Output from BLS Processing
13.2.1 BLS Pre-edits the Data
13.2.2 EQUI Counts and Information
13.2.3 EQUI Edit Listings
13.2.4 EQUI Management Information Spreadsheets
13.3 BLS Review and State Correction Procedures
13.3.1 BLS Review Activity
13.3.2 State Correction Activity
13.3.3 Edit Priorities
13.3.4 Subset File
13.3.5 Clean Declaration/Quarterly Signoff
13.4 BLS Estimates for Late Files

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-2

13.1 Overview of BLS Processing
Under policies in place since the EQUI file became the standard deliverable, all data entry,
updates, and corrections occur only at the micro level and usually only in the states. All data for
any BLS-open quarter that are loaded or entered onto the state micro file through a standard state
system (EXPO or WIN-202) are provided to BLS on EQUI files. The BLS micro file database,
built from the EQUI files, should have the same or virtually the same data as the states, at least
for recent unlocked quarters.
The following sections outline the national office’s role in the QCEW program. The full
processing flow of the program is diagrammed and described in Section 1.5, Overview of
Quarterly and Annual Processing. The latter part of the flow chart in Section 1.5.1 illustrates the
processing described in this chapter.

13.1.1 BLS Micro File
The BLS system, similar to the standard state systems, uses a database called the micro file. All
data on the BLS micro file are loaded from EQUI files and all EQUI data elements are present on
the BLS micro file. The micro file contains a number of non-quarterly data elements that occur
only once, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Key fields (State FIPS Code, Unemployment Insurance (UI) Account Number, and
Reporting Unit Number (RUN))
Predecessor and successor UI Account Numbers and RUNs
Name and address fields
Employer Identification Number (EIN)
Date fields (Initial Liability, End of Liability, Setup, and Reactivation dates)
Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) related fields such as Response Code, ARS Year, and
Old Code fields
Geocoding fields such as latitude and longitude
Facts of discrepancy fields such as fact of discrepancy NAICS
Other codes and indicators such as organization type, data source, and version fields
(administrative, quarterly)

The BLS micro file contains seven identically structured blocks of quarterly data elements,
beginning with the current processing quarter and extending six quarters back. BLS does not use
a future quarter. Quarterly data elements include:
•
•
•
•
•

Economic data (monthly employment, total wages, taxable wages, contributions)
Indicator flags (imputation flags) for each of the economic data elements
Classification codes (including NAICS, ownership, county, township)
Status code
Multi Establishment Employer Indicator (MEEI) Code

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

October 2018

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Page 13-3

Comment codes and the narrative comment field
Census fields (such as Census ID)
Class code
Data source
Delete identifier
Place (city) code
Type of coverage
Year

The BLS database contains data for all 53 states. It actually consists of 53 mainframe computer
datasets, allowing each state’s data to be processed separately; however, the data are also
aggregated on a national level for various purposes mentioned in Section 13.1.3. Altogether, the
BLS micro file database has more than ten million records.

13.1.2 Normal BLS Processing of EQUI Files
The BLS system loads EQUI files to its micro file in a sequence of steps that generate various
files as well as the listings described in Section 13.2. The output files are given to established
data users (as the next section describes), loaded to the BLS Longitudinal Database (LDB), and
used for publication and data dissemination. DBES provides a copy of the BLS QCEW state
system for use by authorized BLS customers. Called the 7 quarter file, this resource is always
synchronized to the production version of the BLS QCEW micro file.
EQUI files are processed either as primary files for the quarter or as secondary/subset files. For
primary EQUI files for the quarter, the quarterly blocks of data on the micro file for that state are
“rolled” before EQUI processing begins. This means that the oldest quarter is removed and
archived, while each of the other quarters is shifted. The current quarter’s data are moved to the
block for the prior quarter, the prior quarter’s data are moved to become two quarters old, and so
on. A new current quarter is initialized (set to initial values) before the EQUI is loaded.
File types in chronological order:
Primary – The first EQUI file sent from the states to BLS. Primary quarterly files provide a
current quarter record for every active, UI- or UCFE-covered reporting unit on the state system.
Inactive and pending reporting units may be included as well. EQUI records from earlier
unlocked quarters are included on the deliverable file, if the State changed the unit’s data for that
quarter.
Secondary – An update to the primary file. The update automatically brings in all changes made
to records in the states’ systems since the primary file was submitted. This file was developed
during testing of one-week acceleration testing. It will be maintained as an option in
WIN/EXPO for use as needed.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-4

BLS Correction – Prior to the advent of the BLS Correction System (BCS), the subset file was
the primary method for making corrections to records in error in the BLS version of QCEW after
the deliverable was submitted. As of April 2017, the BCS provides BLS staff with almost all the
capacity to change records that states have had since the beginning of Mic/Mac processing, one
exception is the capacity to create new records or assigning predecessor/successor codes
(predecessor/successor capacity is in development). BLS corrections are created in the national
office by the CDA and LDB groups, as well as by regional office analysts.
Subset – Subset files include records for accounts that have been marked by state staff for
inclusion in the subset. The subset had been the primary way to correct records after the
deliverable had been submitted and reviewed by BLS. With the implementation of the BLS
Corrections System, subsets are no longer a necessity for many states. Subsets may be requested
by the CDA or LDB groups, or the regional offices. They may also be submitted by the states as
they see fit.
On the BLS micro file, the initial values for the economic data fields are zero, the employment
and Total Wage indicator flags are “M” (Missing), while most other quarterly data elements are
set to blank. The initial values of the classification codes (primarily the industry, ownership, and
county codes) are blanks, not values copied from the prior quarter. The initial values for the
Status Code and the Taxable Wage indicator flag are “3” and “B,” respectively. These are
special values used only in BLS.
While each micro file record contains fields for seven quarters, each EQUI record contains data
for only one quarter. When an EQUI record is loaded to the BLS micro file, data from the nonquarterly EQUI fields replace the contents of the equivalent micro file fields. Data from the
quarterly EQUI fields replace corresponding data in the micro file fields for the designated
quarter. If the initial quarterly file does not include an EQUI record for every reporting unit
(every UI/RUN) on the BLS micro file, the unmatched UI/RUNs retain their initial values on the
micro file for the new quarter. If an EQUI record introduces a UI/RUN that is not already
present on the micro file, a new micro file record is generated with the full set of seven quarters;
however, earlier quarters will retain the initial values. When a UI/RUN associated with an edit
flag is new or discontinued, these BLS initial values (including Activity Status 3) can appear on
edit listings such as the Integrated Macro Edit (Table 9A).
For an EQUI correction file, the corresponding quarter of data will already be present on the
BLS micro file. Note: EQUI correction files refers to any type of file subsequent to the primary
file including update, BLS Correction and subset files. When the EQUI record matches a record
on the micro file, the EQUI data will replace the micro file data. Both primary EQUI files and
correction files normally include records for more than one quarter. The BLS system separates
the EQUI records by quarter so records for the prior quarter are treated like correction/update
records.
Every EQUI file is processed through the pre-edit (described in Section 13.2.1) to verify that the
data meet minimum standards. If the number of pre-edit errors is not excessive, the EQUI data
are loaded to the BLS micro file. Micro file records are then edited. The full, integrated edit,
including both micro and macro edits, is always performed whenever any EQUI file is loaded.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-5

This means that the BLS macro file (discussed in Chapter 10) is regenerated each time. Editing
is always performed as a batch job.
States can run all edits run by BLS. Only one set of edit parameters and tolerances is maintained
in the standard state systems. This set is used to edit all historical quarter changes, current
quarter data, and subsequent quarters of data until such time as the state modifies the parameter
and tolerance values and settings. The current set of parameters/tolerances is copied to the
header record each time the state system generates an EQUI file.
The BLS system uses its own set of parameters and tolerances when editing. The BLS
parameters are never tighter than those of the state unless the state has set theirs to levels looser
than the default values (that is, above levels acceptable to BLS). BLS parameters are always
looser than or equal to default parameters. BLS parameters are set in line with how the data are
used and released as well as to resolve problems before questions are received from other users
(for example, Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA)). Appendix H provides a summary of the
edit parameters and tolerances.
The BLS micro file includes an edit indicator for each micro edit that shows whether the record
passed or failed. This means that the results of the most recent edit run are stored on the micro
file. As with the other data elements, edit indicators are either administrative (occurring only
once on the file) or quarterly (occurring seven times, once in each quarterly block). When the
primary quarterly EQUI file is processed, the entire micro file is edited. For correction files,
however, the system only edits micro records that are updated. The quarterly micro edits are
only performed on the quarters of those records that are updated. Meanwhile, the macro edits are
always performed on the entire file for all quarters. Additional information about editing appears
in Section 13.2.3.
The LDB is loaded with current quarter and back quarter data from the QCEW micro file after
EQUI review signoff by BLS. The LDB uses the BLS QCEW production micro file for new
records created for non-current quarters.

13.1.3 Macro Data for Key Users and Publication
BLS provides files of aggregated economic data to established users as soon as state files and
BLS corrections are processed by BLS QCEW systems. In some cases, the data levels are
consistent with the BLS macro file although some users require different levels of aggregation or
additional data elements.
Essential data users include the following:
• The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) of the Department of Commerce. BEA
receives macro data for each state at the county-ownership-industry level and state data
totals by ownership. BEA also receives information about comment codes,
noneconomic code changes, and significant data changes occurring during the cleanup

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-6

period. If a state does not agree to share microdata with BEA, BEA receives comment
code and noneconomic code change information for that state in aggregate rather than
microdata form. States may choose to provide BEA with no microdata, limited
microdata relating to comment codes and noneconomic changes, or the full microdata
file.
• The Current Employment Statistics (CES) program in the national office. CES
receives aggregate employment and wage data at both state and national levels.
Benchmark files include employment by industry by size class. CES also receives
national Summary of Differences data showing noneconomic code changes by industry
and ownership. CES has access to all live QCEW microdata via the 7quarter micro
file.
• The Employment and Training Administration (ETA) of the Department of Labor.
ETA receives state and national data including Taxable Wages and Contributions,
broken out based on type of coverage (taxable, reimbursable, and Federal). Due to
earlier submittal by states and faster BLS publication processing, ETA receives these
files on BLS QCEW release day each quarter. ETA has no microdata access.
Shortly after the national review signoff, the QCEW program releases data to the public. This
publication deadline limits the amount of time available for review of the quarterly deliverable.
For that reason, states must deliver a quarterly deliverable that is of good quality. Refer to
Appendix T for a hyperlink to the QCEW homepage, which contains more information on data
releases.

13.1.4 Locking Out Data Changes for Older Quarters
The correction policy described in Section 12.2.3 describes when specific quarters of data will
normally be unlocked. The BLS system, however, is able to unlock individual quarters and/or
state files when there is a specific need.
The correction policy is intended to ensure that state and BLS files match for unlocked quarters.
States should extract data for both the current and prior quarter data as well as any changes to
non-quarterly (administrative) fields. BLS places greater emphasis on the quality of these
quarters’ data than on older quarters. However, BLS makes some effort to ensure that data are
accurate and consistent for a full calendar year. For example, a record exists with a significant
change between third quarter and fourth quarter. If the third quarter is corrected and this causes
a significant difference between second and third quarter, second quarter data may need
correction as well. First quarter may also need correction, since it can affect publication.
Changes to the correction policy may change the quarters to be extracted.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-7

13.1.5 Special Processing to Ensure Consistent, Accurate Data
For the most part, the features of the state systems that create normal EQUI files keep state and
BLS data consistent. However, the state systems are also able to generate a special EQUI file for
BLS that does not depend on changing data in the state. In very rare cases this file is used to
give BLS a copy of the most current state data. This brings BLS data in line with state data
immediately, without waiting for the normal deliverable or subset file. The file is a single
quarter file that contains an EQUI record for every active and inactive record on the state system
for a specified quarter. A single quarter file is typically used to replace a full quarter of data.
The previous version of the data is typically removed from the BLS database and then the new
version of the data is loaded.
BLS has found it efficient to directly enter corrections to issues arising from BLS review. Direct
corrections are preferable to making these corrections via the processing of a subset from the
state. BLS review staff make these changes to the BLS copy of the QCEW file using the BLS
Correction System or BCS. These corrections are usually based on information received from
the states during the review process. On occasion, data must be corrected on the BLS micro file
immediately, without waiting for an answer from the state. BLS provides notice to the state
regarding the content of BLS corrections. Meanwhile, the state should also enter the correction
on its own state system, otherwise the inaccurate data may be reported to BLS again on a
subsequent EQUI submittal.
Subsets are almost always not needed to complete BLS correction processing. They can be
submitted by states if desired.
Regarding consistency, it is worth noting that there is no QCEW program requirement that BLS
and state files and outputs be identical. For example, states can keep working on quarters that are
locked at BLS. BLS creates measures of change adjusted for breakouts and code changes. These
are not available from Win and Expo. States publish township-based totals in New England,
while BLS publishes by county in all states. States can create special industry or area groupings
not used at BLS. Even with these differences, both versions are usually telling the same
economic story.

13.2 Output from BLS Processing
The EQUI format is used to send all appropriate micro level data from the state system to the
national office, including initially submitted current quarter data, retroactive back quarter data,
corrections or other updates, deletion records, and certain inactive records. When a normal
EQUI data record is submitted for a given quarter, all data elements – quarterly and
administrative – are included. (Appendix K shows the EQUI formats.) When the national office
processes EQUI files, it generates data files for established users. It also generates extensive
listing output including data element counts, edit listings, edit counts, and data summaries. Some
version of the listing output is generated upon the processing of primary or secondary EQUI
files, subset files and BLS Correction files. Some information listed on the EQUI output tables

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-8

is confidential, therefore wording in the header is provided on the necessary listings to indicate
the confidential nature of the data.
The national office will notify the state and regional offices via Email when output is available to
view and/or print in their office. The email notifications include links to a pdf document that
contains the entire edit output report. Also included are links to rtf files for each individual table.
It is important to use links when sending the listings to the regions and the states to prevent the
unauthorized disclosure of confidential data.

13.2.1 BLS Pre-edits the Data
Once a state’s EQUI file is received and ready to process by BLS, the records are sorted. The
header record is read to identify the state's edit parameters. The trailer record is read to identify
data totals included on the submittal. The trailer record totals (generated by the state processing
system as it created the file) are compared to load totals (generated by the BLS system as it reads
the file) to ensure that the files remain consistent. This comparison helps identify whether some
records may not have been read, or were dropped.
The states are to submit a transmittal sheet via email to EQUI_Submittals once they submit the
EQUI file (see Chapter 12). DBES compares the record counts on the transmittal sheet to the file
sent by the state. DBES reaches out to the state via the regional office regarding any
discrepancies. If the counts don’t match, DBES will not process the file until the two are
reconciled.
The EQUI data records for all quarters on the file are processed through a pre-edit. The pre-edit
identifies serious errors prior to running the full edits. If the number of pre-edit failures is not
unreasonable, the EQUI data are loaded to the BLS micro file. Then full editing and other
processing continues, as described in the following two sections.
The following tables are printed in these early stages of BLS processing on both primary and
correction runs.
Table 1A - Comparison of EQUI Totals to Data Reported on the Trailer Record
This listing compares the record counts, economic data, and delete totals reported on the trailer
record to those calculated by the BLS system. If data differences appear for the counts of the
entire file (all quarters), this may indicate that BLS was not able to read all the records that
should be present. See EXHIBIT 13A at the end of this chapter for an example of the report.
Table 1B – EQUI Pre-Edit Error Summary Counts
This report shows the number of records flagged on the EQUI Pre-Edit Listing. If the number of
records with pre-edit errors exceeds a parameter (typically 1,000), processing will stop and the
data will not be loaded to the BLS micro file. The national office will then contact the regional
office about how to proceed. See EXHIBIT 13B at the end of this chapter for a sample page of
the report.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-9

Table 1C – EQUI Pre-Edit Listing
This listing displays the records that fail the following edit conditions as well as for non-numeric
employment or wages. The edit conditions include all of the Level 1 edits, plus selected edits
from Levels 2-4 that identify critical errors affecting data aggregation and key data users such as
CES and BEA. See EXHIBIT 13C at the end of this chapter for a sample page of the report.
Level 1 – Pre-edits
001-I
Invalid Transaction Code
002-I
Invalid UI Account Number
003-I
Invalid Reporting Unit Number
004-I
Invalid Reference Year
005-I
Invalid Reference Quarter
006-I
Invalid State Code
Level 2 – Key Field edits
010-I
Invalid NAICS Code
012-I
Invalid Ownership Code
013-I
Invalid County Code
Level 3 – Date and Status Code Edits
025-I
Invalid Status Code
Level 4 – Remaining Invalid Error Edits
040-I
Invalid MEEI Code
The pre-edit output should be the primary vehicle for identifying the rare case of non-numeric
employment or wages, as they might not be displayed on Table 9B. Records with non-numeric
employment and wages will be loaded to the database with the non-numeric fields zero-filled.
Typically, states must submit an update transaction for every record on Table 1C. However,
states may choose to focus on edit codes 001-006 when reviewing this pre-edit listing, since the
other edit codes (010-013, 025, and 040) will also appear on the Micro Edits Only listing (Table
9B). Level 1 errors (001-006) are not displayed on Table 9B. All of the edit conditions,
including those above, are described in detail in Appendix F.

13.2.2 EQUI Counts and Information
BLS generates numerous counts that provide significant information about individual data
elements or combinations of elements. These counts are also included in the EQUI edit output as
Table 3 and Table 8 counts, parameters, and other information are also written to files in national
office and used in various spreadsheets.
The following informational tables print on the EQUI edit output. Some of these listings will
only be generated when a full (primary or secondary) EQUI is run; others will be generated for
initial, update, BLS Correction and subset runs. The table is printed on all versions of EQUI edit
output unless otherwise noted in parentheses next to the table names. Not discussed here are the

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-10

CCS Tables generated during first and second quarter processing. Those listings appear in
Section 11.7.
Table 2A - State Totals
This report provides state ownership totals by quarter for average monthly employment, average
weekly wages, the number of establishments (reporting units), monthly employment, total
wages, taxable wages, and contributions for the current and seven previous quarters.
This report excludes data from master records (records with MEEI 2 or County 900), inactive or
pending records (Status Code not 1), non-covered records (Type of Coverage Code 8), and
records without a valid Ownership (Code is not 1, 2, 3, or 5). The Over-the-Quarter (OTQ) and
Over-the-Year (OTY) percent changes are included as analytical tools to facilitate data review.
This high level summary can be used to quickly identify significant changes in state total data
from one quarter to the next, or in the current quarter compared with the same quarter of the
previous year. See EXHIBIT 13D at the end of this chapter for a sample page.
Table 2B - County Summary
Table 2B focuses on OTY data comparisons and has three sections. A summary of the table
appears first. This summary lists the percentage changes in third month employment and
average weekly wages by county. Columns marked as "T Adj" contain adjusted totals, which
exclude data from records with publication error flags. Columns marked with "T" contain the
unadjusted totals. See the discussion on Table 9X for a complete list of the publication edits.
The summary section is followed by a section of detailed employment and wage data for each
county broken out by ownership. Over-the-year changes are given as a percent and as a level for
third month employment, average weekly wage, total wages, and average monthly employment.
Also provided are the average annual employment and the average annual wage, compared to a 4quarter moving average for the current year-to-date. This is shown in the upper left hand corner of
each county ownership breakout.
A final section provides statewide totals broken out by ownership.
The purpose of this table is to identify and review large fluctuations within a county that may
impact publication. Annual averages and comparisons can provide early warning of these
fluctuations, which might otherwise go undetected from the macro cell-level review and the industrybased editing and data review tools. Analysts can target problem counties for more detailed
review.
Table 2B can also provide warning of systematic problems. It should be used to identify very
large and suspicious data movements in the primary run and to review changes to county-level
employment and wages in update and other submittals, as needed. Very large movements in the
current quarter's data that are not explained by seasonality or code changes should be investigated
further. The listing may also be used to monitor the annual data and, during first quarter processing, to
identify unexpected changes between the preliminary and final publication data for the previous year.
Review Table 2B generated from secondary runs only to the extent that large changes to the data are
made, which are listed in Table 13A. See EXHIBIT 13E at the end of this chapter for a sample of
Table 2B.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-11

Table 3 – EQUI Data Counts
This report is used to review the reporting level of many data elements, such as employment and
wages indicator flags, address information, and various codes. Along with the number of edit
flags (see Table 8), these data element counts are also indicators of data quality. The counts are
for active non-master records, except where footnotes indicate otherwise. See EXHIBIT 13F at
the end of this chapter for a sample.
Based on these counts, the national office provides feedback through the regional offices about
each state's deliverable. This feedback points out increased data quality (such as a decline in the
use of NAICS 999999 or an increase in the proportion of employment data that are reported and
not imputed). Also emphasized are unusual data patterns or areas needing improvement (for
example, a significant percentage of continuous units having county code 999, or physical
location addresses that appear on the file at a level well below the national average).
Record counts for each data element are displayed in Table 3 as follows:
•
•
•
•

Current quarter totals
Percent of current quarter total records
Previous quarter totals
Percent change between the previous and current quarters

A corresponding total of third month employment is also displayed for most data elements.
Total wages is substituted for third month employment for select data elements. Similar to the
record counts, third month employment totals for each data element are displayed as follows:
•
•
•
•

Current quarter totals
Percent of current quarter total records
Previous quarter totals
Percent change between the previous and current quarters

Section 1 displays characteristics by MEEI code; including counts of continuous units, dropped
records, and new records. Continuous units are records reported and active under the same UI
account number and reporting unit number (RUN) in both the current quarter and the prior
quarter. Dropped records are UI/RUNs that were present and active in the prior quarter but not
the current quarter. New records are UI/RUNs that are present and active this quarter but not in
the prior quarter.
Section 2 displays the following identification information and characteristics:
Predecessor/Successor
Dates
NAICS
ARS Year and Response Codes
SIC
CES Indicator
Data Source (EDI Center)
Comments
Location
Special Indicator
Ownership
Agent Code

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-12

Employer Identification Number (EIN)
Note that SIC 4-Digit Coding Exceptions, Auxiliary, and Reporting Change Indicator
identification characteristics are no longer displayed as headings in Table 3. EXHIBIT 13F still
includes these. This may be corrected in a future exhibit.
a) Industry Codes (Includes NAICS and SIC) – Shows a count and percentage of records
carrying NAICS and SIC industry codes (SIC codes are no longer used or updated, these counts
should not be used for any purpose.) The various record counts are grouped by industry code.
Some of the groupings common across the industry codes are listed below:
• Records with valid/specific codes (excluding 999999)
• Records with 999999
• Month 3 employment
b) Location Codes – Shows a count and percentage (with month three employment) of records
having valid, specific County codes. There are separate counts and percentages for each of the
county equivalent codes:
•
•
•
•
•
•

995/999 (combined)
995 (statewide/multi-county)
996 (foreign)
998 (out of state)
999 (unknown)
900 (master records)

c) Date Fields – Shows counts and percentages of records reporting each of the EQUI dates:
•
•
•
•

Set-up Date
Initial Liability Date
End of Liability Date
Reactivation Date.

The Date portion of Section 2 also shows a count and percentage of records having both an End
of Liability Date and a Reactivation date, with (1) the Reactivation Date later than the End of
Liability Date and (2) with the End of Liability Date later than the Reactivation Date.
d) ARS Information – Shows a count and percentage of records with a non-blank ARS Year and
numeric response code.
It also shows a count and percentage for selected values of the ARS Response Code: 41, 42, 46,
50, 63, 64, 65, and 98.
e) Comment Codes – This part of Section 2 lists separate counts and percentages of records with
one, two, and three numeric comment codes. Also, there is a count and percentage of records
with non-blank narrative comments.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-13

f) Agent Codes – Shows counts and percentages for records with a non-blank value in the Agent
Code field. It also includes month 3 employment totals.
Section 3 displays employment and wage information including summaries of month three
employment and total wages reported, imputed, missing, and prorated. It provides detailed
record counts, employment and wage indicator counts, and employment for each value of the
employment indicator flag, broken out by ownership and by month. Detailed record counts and
total wages are provided for each value of the total wages indicator flag. Employment and total
wage indicator flags are identified and discussed in Appendix J.
Section 4 displays information about addresses and related fields. Separate counts and
percentages are given of records with Physical Location (PL) address fields, non-blank UI
address fields, and non-blank Mailing/Other address fields. Record counts by MEEI groupings
appear under the reporting unit description heading.
The count for # RECS WITH MEEI 3 OR 5 WITH BLANK RUD & a BLANK PL ADDRESS
includes records that have a blank city field or a PLA edit flag (i.e., edit 102, 103, 104, or 114).
The system checks for records that have a blank city field since an existing PLA must have a city
while a single line for the street address sometimes appears on line 2 rather than on line 1.
Furthermore, even if a PLA does exist on a record, the system also checks whether the PLA is
valid by checking for edits 102, 103, 104, or 114.
Section 5 displays summary counts of continuous units, with detail about records that changed
MEEI, NAICS, SIC, County, or other codes. Under the county code heading the "valid county"
appearing on the count for # RECS CHGD FROM VALID COUNTY TO ANOTHER VALID
COUNTY, does not include county 99x codes.
Section 6 provides record counts by third month employment broken out by size class for private
continuous records, excluding masters for the following categories:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

All private continuous records
All private continuous subunits
NAICS 999999
SIC 9999
County Code 999
Zero-filled EIN
Valid Physical Location Address (PLA)
Subunits (MEEI 3 or 5) with Reporting Unit Description (RUD)
Subunits (MEEI 3 or 5) with no RUD nor valid PLA

Most of the percentages listed in Section 6 are based on the respective size class for total private
continuous records as opposed to the total for each category. In addition, employment totals for
each address data element and counts for valid address blocks are included in the listing. (Valid
address blocks are defined as records with non-blank addresses that do not have any of the
address-related edit flags.)

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-14

Section 6 of Table 3 is used in the generation of the QCEW Quality and Performance Measures
report ("Flash Report"). The "Flash Report" is a report generated by the national office and
posted on the StateWeb that provides various quarterly performance measures.
Section 7 displays summary counts of new units, giving some characteristics about MEEI,
NAICS, County Code, and EIN.
Section 8 reflects the geocodes (based on PLAs) supplied through the previous quarter, assigned
in the national office, loaded to state files, and provided back to the national office in the current
quarter's EQUI files. These counts do not reflect any improvements the state may have made to
the PLAs in the current quarter. Those changes will be reflected on the following quarter’s
EQUI after new geocode files have been provided by the national office and loaded to the state
systems.
Table 4A - EIN Matrix Map
This listing specifies the number of times that a given character is used in each position of the
EIN field for all active, covered records including masters. See EXHIBIT 13G at the end of this
chapter or a sample.
Table 4B - UI Number Matrix Map
This listing specifies the number of times that a given character is used in each position of the UI
Account Number field for all active, covered records including masters. See EXHIBIT 13H at
the end of this chapter or a sample.
Table 4C - RUN Matrix Map
This listing specifies the number of times that a given character is used in each position of the
Reporting Unit Number field for all active, covered records including masters. See EXHIBIT
13I at the end of this chapter for a sample.
Table 6 - Record Counts by Valid County/Township Codes
This table lists counts of the number of records reported in each valid county (and township for
states required to use them) for active, non-master records. See EXHIBIT 13M at the end of this
chapter for a sample page.
Table 15 - Comment Codes and Narrative Comments
This listing provides detailed information on comment code usage, including counts for each
code used as well as various percentages. See EXHIBIT 13Z at the end of this chapter for a
sample.
Table 16 - EQUI Sample Records (primary only)
This listing provides a sample of approximately 300 records from the state's EQUI file in a threerecords-per-page format (so they are a sampling of the whole file from beginning to end). A
review of this listing can sometimes uncover systematic data problems. Particular attention
should be given to the area of physical location addresses because of the growing importance of

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-15

geocoding. If there are high levels of edit 114 (physical address error), the sample listing could
be used to provide examples. See EXHIBIT 13AA at the end of this chapter for a sample page.

13.2.3 EQUI Edit Listings
BLS generates several tables to identify flagged records and summarize edit results. Like the
EQUI Counts listings described in 13.2.2 some listings will only be generated when a full
(initial) EQUI deliverable is run; others will be generated for all runs. Listings are provided for
all edit run unless otherwise noted in parentheses next to the table names. See Appendix F to
view the edit specifications for all the required edits used in the standard state QCEW processing
systems and in the BLS system.
Table 7 - Edit Parameter and Tolerance Listing
This listing provides the edit parameters and tolerances used by the state (as provided on the
EQUI header record) and those used by BLS. The "State Parameter Values" column reflects
values included on the EQUI header record. If a particular value does not exist on the header
record, the corresponding field on the report will be blank. The "BLS Parameter Values" in the
last column show the actual values used to edit the data and generate Tables 8-10. At the end,
Table 7 displays the BLS print cutoff parameters used for generating Table 9B. See EXHIBIT
13N at the end of this chapter for a sample page of Table 7.
Table 8 - Edit Code Summary
This report lists multi-unit discrepancy counts and the number of records that failed each edit
(both micro and macro) for the current quarter, the prior quarter, and all other back quarters.
Each edit run generates a set of counts that identifies how many times an edit condition occurred
along with the edit code and the edit message. See EXHIBIT 13O at the end of this chapter for a
sample.
The counts on this table may not always be consistent with the records printed on Tables 9A and
9B. For example, some employment and wage W-flags on micro records that do not cause a
macro record to flag will not be printed. W-flags in this category that are not significant enough
to cause the macro cell to flag on Table 9A will not print on Table 9A, and they will not print on
Table 9B. In addition, records exceeding the Table 9B print cutoff will continue to be flagged
and counted on Table 8, but they will not be printed on Table 9B.
Table 9A – Integrated Macro Edit
The purpose of this table is to review macro cells with significant current quarter changes in
employment or wages. Regional offices should review this listing to identify significant or
suspicious macro employment and wage data changes so the state can explain or provide microlevel corrections if necessary. The Over the Quarter (OTQ) and Over the Year (OTY) percent
changes for the macro cells and level changes for the micro records are included as analytical
tools to help determine if there is an issue with the record listed on the tables. It is essential that
Table 9A be reviewed in its entirety from the deliverable run so that all current quarter macro
edit failures are examined at least once. In particular, macro records flagged with edit codes

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-16

091-094 and 135 should be reviewed carefully. This listing shows all macro record edit failures
for the current quarter - that is, the flags assigned to County/Ownership/NAICS macro cells.
There may be some instances where there are no associated micro record edit flags, so only the
macro record will appear. For current quarter failed records, Table 9A along with Table 13B
could be used to review the entire macro record and any accompanying micro records that might
explain the data. See EXHIBIT 13P at the end of this chapter for a sample page.
A print cutoff was incorporated for Table 9A that is designed to prevent the printing of
immensely large listings caused by large numbers of micro records printing for macro cells. The
number of micro records being printed for a particular macro cell will be limited to a specified
parameter. A message will print at the end of the cell if the parameter is exceeded.
The macro records are sorted by County, Ownership, and industry code. Below each macro
record, are the associated micro records that have the corresponding edit flags, with supporting
data including the micro comments. Economic data for the macro record are shown for the
current quarter and the seven previous quarters. The micro data appear for the current quarter
and six previous quarters. Included are the economic data, classification codes, and other
essential quarterly data elements such as Activity Status (ST), MEEI (ME), and Ownership
(OW). Over-the-quarter (OTQ) and over-the-year (OTY) changes in average monthly
employment and average weekly wages are included in the state systems. The employment and
wage numbers on the micro data records are followed immediately by the employment or wage
indicator flags, to show whether the data were reported, imputed, prorated, and so on.
Records with more serious macro employment and wage flags are the following Level 5 edits:
091-W
092-W
093-W
094-W

Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change Is Significantly > Parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW
Range
Average Employment Is Significantly > parameter, but Total Wages = 0
Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages Is Significantly > Parameter

The other edit flags that may appear on this listing are these Level 6 edits:
126-W
127-W
130-W
131-W
134-W
135-W

Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change > parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW Range
Average Employment > parameter, but Total Wages = 0
Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages > parameter
Number of Establishments Out Of Range
New or Discontinued Record

Table 9A focuses on fluctuations in current quarter economic data; however, edit messages for
other flags may also appear – provided that the macro cell for the current quarter is flagged.
Specifically, Table 9A may show edit messages:
• For the same set of flags if they occur in back quarters
• For other micro edit flags in Levels 2-6. These will also appear on Table 9B.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-17

During first and second quarter processing, Table 9A reflects an editing adjustment based on
noneconomic code changes. This process, called code change integration, uses data from the
Summary of Differences file to temporarily adjust macro data (monthly employment, total
wages, and number of units) as they are edited. (See Section 11.6 for more information.) If
Summary of Differences data account for any data fluctuations, the macro cell does not flag and
is not listed on Table 9A. If Summary of Differences data exist for the cell but do not prevent
edit flags, these data appear on Table 9A below the macro edit codes/messages. All data shown
on the listing for the macro cell (and for associated micro records) are the actual, unadjusted data
existing on BLS files.
Table 9A-D is a subset of Table 9A. If Table 9A is reviewed, then Table 9A-D need not be
reviewed. The criteria for macro cells printed on Table 9A-D is as follows:
•
•
•
•

For all small (non-publication) counties, only print macro cells involving a change of 900
or more employees and/or $9 million in wages.
For large (publication) counties with average annual employment levels 500,000 and
above, only print macro cells involving a change of 450 or more employees and/or $5
million in wages.
For large (publication) counties with average annual employment levels between 170,000
and 499,999, only print macro cells involving a change of 250 or more employees and/or
$4 million in wages.
For large (publication) counties with average annual employment levels of 169,999 or
less, only print macro cells involving a change of 200 or more employees and/or $3
million in wages.

Table 9B - Micro Edits Only
All current quarter I-errors (except for edit codes 001-006) not displayed on Table 9X will
appear on this listing. This means that any I-errors displayed on the Integrated Macro Edit
listing (Table 9A) will also be displayed on Table 9B. Table 9B and Table 9X should be the
primary tool for identifying and correcting I-errors (010-080). Warning flags are also included
on this listing for review and correction or verification as needed. Similar to I-errors, these may
not appear on Table 9B if the record has large employment and a publication edit flag. They will
be displayed on Table 9X instead. These records will be sorted primarily in ascending order by
edit code (putting I-errors at the top for multiple flags) with a secondary sort by ascending
UI/RUN. See EXHIBIT 13Q at the end of this chapter for a sample page of Table 9B.
This listing is formatted like the bottom (micro) portion of Table 9A. It shows economic data,
classification codes, and other codes for the current quarter and the five previous quarters. It also
shows name and address fields and most other non-quarterly data.
A print cutoff prevents the printing of extremely large listings in cases where there are
widespread errors. When the number of records being printed for a particular edit flag reaches a
specified parameter, additional records with that edit flag will generally not be printed on Table

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-18

9B. (An exception occurs if a record is flagged for more than one edit code and if one of the edit
codes has not yet been printed above the parameter – in that case the record will still print on
Table 9B.) Parameter values can be set for each edit level (2-6).
Table 9D – Micro Deletes Only
Table 9D should be reviewed to ensure that micro records with employment greater than 100 that
were intended as a "delete" were correctly marked for deletion and are now appropriately
inactivated (e.g., a duplicate account). Records on this table are sorted by prior quarter month 3
employment in descending order for all open quarters. See EXHIBIT 13R at the end of this
chapter for a sample page of the report.
Table 9G- Unusable Physical Location Addresses
Table 9G displays records flagged for edit 088 (Large Record without Usable PLA); it also
displays any other PLA edit messages for these records. In addition to displaying the address
information, various identifier and contact information is provided. The records are sorted by
UI/RUN in ascending order. This listing is only included with primary edit output. Addressing
the records on this table should help states meet the geocoding PLA requirements in the LMI
Cooperative Agreement. See EXHIBIT 13S at the end of this chapter for a sample page of the
report. See Appendix V for the current geocoding requirements.
Table 9M-EMP – Large Master Record Edit
This listing contains large master records failing employment edits (91, 94, 96, and 97) that may
not be listed on Table 10 or Table 9A. The purpose of this table is to allow for the review of
large master records that may be in balance with the subunits but have significant fluctuations in
employment where employment is spread out among many industries and counties. The table is
sorted by the largest AME in descending order for all open quarters and one quarter back from
the earliest open quarter. Economic data for the micro record are shown for the current quarter
and the six previous quarters. Included are the economic data, classification codes, and other
essential quarterly data elements such as Activity Status (ST), MEEI (ME), and Ownership
(OW) codes. The listing also includes over the year (OTY) changes and over the quarter (OTQ)
changes in AME and AWW; unit tallies (UT) – the number of active worksites; and EDI tallies
(ET) -- the number of EDI reports (records with Data Source = C or E). Records showing
significant changes in employment should be researched further. Quick resolution of these
problems is necessary to meet quarterly publication deadlines. See EXHIBIT 13T at the end
of this chapter for an example of this table.
Table 9P - Predecessor/Successor Edit Listing
Table 9P identifies those records with employment greater than 250 failing the
predecessor/successor edits (edit codes 156, 157, 159, 160, 161, and 164). Current and prior
quarter employment/wages information along with applicable administrative data are shown for
the predecessor and successor records. The listing is sorted by the successor ownership, NAICS,
and county codes as well as the successor UI number in ascending order. Discrepancies shown
on this listing should be reviewed and corrected where necessary. Corrections may include
changing administrative codes (NAICS, ownership, county, or township), economic data, or the
predecessor/successor links themselves. See EXHIBIT 13U at the end of this chapter for an
example of this table.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-19

Table 9X – Records Failing NAICS Publication Standards Table 9X is used to identify
records failing the NAICS publication edits as well as to address any non-publication edit flags
on records also having a publication edit flag. In other words, these are records that will be
entirely excluded from publications unless their data are fixed. Economic data for the micro
record are shown for the current quarter and five previous quarters. Records with significant
employment or wages should be marked for correction. Records failing special conditions are
listed first, followed by those failing publication edits. This listing only prints records having
large employment, and the entire listing should be reviewed, as some records with smaller third
month employment in the most recent quarter might have larger employment and wages with
errors in previous quarters. Quick resolution of these problems is necessary to meet
quarterly publication deadlines. See EXHIBIT 13V at the end of this chapter for a sample
page of the report.
NAICS Publication Edits
Edit Code Edit Name
010
NAICS Code Check
012
Ownership (OWN) Code Check
013
County (CNTY) Code Check
016
Ownership/NAICS Conflict
025
Status Code Check
031
First Month Employment (M1) Check
032
Second Month Employment (M2) Check
033
Third Month Employment (M3) Check
034
Total Wages (TW) Check
035
Taxable Wages (TAXW) Check
036
Contributions (CTB) Check
039
Type of Coverage Check
040
MEEI Code Check
056
Federal/Type of Coverage Check
057
Federal/Taxable Wage Check
058
Federal/Contributions Check
059
Coverage/Taxable Wage Check
060
Coverage/Contributions Check
Table 10 - Multi-Establishment Edit Listing)
The purpose of this table is to identify and correct multi-establishment accounts that fail Level 8
edits (edit codes 171-185). This table is an essential editing tool that can expedite finding the
source of large employment and wage errors due to erroneous MEEI and/or status codes. These
erroneous MEEI and/or status codes cause employment and wage data to either be double
counted or eliminated from the macro aggregation. Please note that if the total wages are in
error, taxable wages and/or contributions may also need to be corrected even though they do not
appear on the edit output. Also displayed on this listing are other multi-establishment account
edit failures (Level 8) such as the additivity balance checks (employment or wages differ

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-20

between the master and the subunits). These edit flags will not appear on the other edit listings.
See EXHIBIT 13W at the end of this chapter for a sample page.
Multi-unit accounts will be printed if a multi edit flag exists in either the current quarter, prior
quarter, or both quarters. When the number of subunits being printed for a particular multi
account reaches a specified parameter, additional subunits for that account will not be printed. A
message will be displayed indicating the parameter has been reached. The sum of the worksites
and the net difference lines for both quarters will be printed for all edits except edit code 179
(worksites without master account check).
The master unit's predecessor/successor UI account number is located on the top line. If the
master's predecessor and successor information exist, only the successor UI will print. An "S" or
"P" will appear at the end of the “PRED/SUCC:” field to indicate whether it is the successor or
predecessor UI account number. The multi-establishment edit counts appear on Table 8 (Edit
Code Summary).
Table 13A – Macro Revisions
The purpose of this listing is to review any significant employment and wage changes that have
been made to a macro cell. This table is the primary editing tool for identifying and validating
current and back quarter updates to macro data resulting from micro-level corrections. Table
13A should be used to identify the macro records that failed the edits. The primary run of Table
13A includes only back quarter data that must be reviewed. It should be used to verify that
questionable data left over from the previous quarter have been addressed and that no new back
quarter macro errors have been introduced with the primary file. The correction runs may
include current quarter records that changed in addition to the back quarter records. It is
essential for regional offices to review this listing for all edit runs to identify significant or
suspicious macro employment and wage data changes and for the states to explain or provide
micro-level corrections. Suspicious records must be researched using Table 9A, the ES-202
Database (EDB, a client server system containing QCEW micro data from the EQUI) or
EXPO/WIN. See EXHIBIT 13X at the end of this chapter for an example of this table.
Table 13A shows the macro-level impact of micro updates applied to the file. The table shows
an "old" value, a "new" value, and a net difference for establishments, monthly employment, and
total wages. The table is sorted by County, Ownership, and industry code. The information is
displayed in year/quarter pairs or groupings in ascending order, from left to right and top to
bottom. This design eliminates the printing of duplicate records on Table 13A and requires that
the analyst review the table from left to right, top to bottom to find significant changes.
All current quarter records are excluded from listing on the primary run of Table 13A. However,
updates to prior quarter records (such updates are included on the current quarter file) that
change their employment value by more than 100 or the total wages by more than $1 million are
displayed in Table 13A.
Table 13A also displays any macro edit codes still remaining on the macro record under the
footnote "EDIT CODES - REMAINING MACRO CODES AND ERROR LEVEL STATUS".

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-21

Macro level codes are displayed under “EDIT CODES." Information about the edits flagging the
micro records (the micro records that comprise the macro record) appear under "ERROR LEVEL
STATUS." An “Lx” (where “x” equals the level number) indicates that one or more micro
records have been flagged by an edit in that level. For example, "L5 L6" indicates that one or
more micro records were flagged by at least one edit in Level 5 and one edit in Level 6.
A macro level code can be displayed by itself with no accompanying error level status code and
vice versa. However, if there are no macro or micro errors in either that quarter or its previous
quarter, only the footnote will be displayed. The footnote indicates there are large differences
between quarters, but they are not flagging as errors.
Table 13B - Macro Revisions Failing Edits
This table lists the macro cells that have had large employment or wage updates and currently
have a macro edit flag for any of the updated quarters. Table 13B focuses on large changes to
the data that failed the macro edits. This listing is a hybrid report that essentially outputs
selected records from the Table 13A but with the existing Table 9A format. The report is a
listing of all macro records that appear in Table 13A and have a macro edit flag for any of the
updated quarters. The output looks like Table 9A, with the macro data listed first and the
associated micro records printed below the macro data. The Over the Quarter (OTQ) and Over
the Year (OTY) percent changes for the macro cells and level changes for the micro records are
included as analytical tools. This report should be reviewed in the same manner as Table 13A
and for all edit runs. Since all of the records have been flagged from the macro edits, all records
in this listing should be reviewed. See EXHIBIT 13Y at the end of this chapter for a sample
page of the report.

13.2.4 EQUI Management Information Spreadsheets
BLS and state users should make use of the EQUI management information spreadsheets, which
can be accessed via the StateWeb intranet. These spreadsheets provide a wealth of useful
information about state processing and can help identify possible systemic problems or issues
with the state data. Counts are available from the deliverable files, as well as from the final
counts reflecting the end of the BLS review and correction period.
Deliverable Counts
The first version of the data element counts spreadsheets represents the current quarter’s data
once the deliverable is processed. This version takes into account both the primary and
secondary files submitted by states. Normally, this processing includes the initial edit of the
quarterly deliverable. Once the national office determines that a state’s deliverable file is
acceptable (no single quarter or revised file will be requested), then the counts from that edit are
downloaded and used for calculations. The spreadsheets are produced after the primary and
secondary files for every state have been processed.
Final Counts
Data element counts are also generated from subset files. If a state doesn’t submit a subset, the
counts are generated from the BLS correction files. These counts are downloaded and used to

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-22

produce an updated data element counts spreadsheet, which compiles the data counts from the
BLS micro file at the end of the BLS review and correction period, after all subset files and BLS
correction files have been processed.
Historical Counts
Record counts and associated percentages across multiple quarters for selected EQUI data
elements are displayed on the historical EQUI data counts spreadsheet. Graphing ability is
included. This spreadsheet offers a broad perspective that a reviewer might miss from looking at
the quarterly counts alone. The historical counts are compiled from the deliverable and final
EQUI data element counts spreadsheets that are prepared each quarter.
The various counts spreadsheets should be used to monitor problem areas in each state's
processing of data and improve data quality.

13.3 BLS Review and State Correction Procedures
The national office works with State and regional office staff to review, verify, and publish local
economic data. Quality input data are essential for the timely publication of accurate
employment and wages.
BLS conducts a review and correction procedure prior to the release of QCEW publications.
This process includes researching possible large errors in employment and wages that may affect
the quality of the reported data. Possible large errors are researched immediately in the national
office and submitted to the region for clarification and correction. Large over-the-year changes
appearing in the news release are verified through the use of publication questions.
Potential errors identified by national office staff are shared with the regional offices in the form
of national Office Questions (NOQs). The regional offices send NOQs to the respective state, in
addition to any regional office Questions (ROQs) they may have from their own review of the
file. The state responds to the NOQs and ROQs via the regional office. If a NOQ or ROQ
results in a correction, the national office or the regional office may make a correction using the
BLS Corrections System. Nearly all cases of errors meeting BLS criteria for a correction can be
made using the BCS. One exception is correcting complicated predecessor/successor linkages.
BLS-open quarter corrections made in the state will automatically be included in the next
quarter’s primary file.
In cases where a BLS Correction cannot be made, BLS staff may request a subset for correction
of specific errors. States may also include corrections on the subset file that they feel to be
significant, even if they were not requested by BLS. The national office processes BLS
corrections and the subset and generates edit output and review tables. The national office then
reviews, researches, and validates the revised data. Additional questions may be developed as
part of this review.
Working within the processing schedule, the national office will accept the changes to the file
and sign off on the economic validity of the open quarters. Regional office staff sign off on the

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-23

quality of microdata by declaring the state to be “clean.” Occasionally, the national office will
make a second set of BLS Corrections to establishment records to meet deadline and quality
constraints.
Processing deadlines, procedures, and criteria referenced in this section are subject to change.
Please refer to the current quarterly EQUI File Processing memo (circulated via Email at the start
of each quarter) for the latest information.

13.3.1 BLS Review Activity
The review of QCEW data in the national office is conducted by several different groups. The
Current Data Analysis Branch (CDA) reviews employment and wage totals each quarter in
support of QCEW publication activities. The Longitudinal Database micro review group (LDB
group) conducts a quarterly establishment-level review. The regional offices review the mic/mac
edits each quarter. BEA also submits questions to CDA during the review.
CDA Review
CDA conducts a review of employment and wages prior to the QCEW data release by BLS.
This review results in NOQs that are transmitted to the states via the regional office. CDA's
questions for the states are submitted at the level of the basic county-ownership-industry macro
cell. These NOQs are developed when employment and/or total wages differ substantially from
the expected level or do not follow historical employment and wage trends. Regional offices are
expected to immediately share NOQs with the appropriate State.
CDA sends out NOQs for over-the-year changes in employment and wages using criteria which
vary by state size. See the “CDA Review Criteria” table below for details. Each quarter's initial
round of NOQs is sent to the regional office within ten working days after receiving the edit
output. Subset NOQs are sent within one working day of receiving the subset edit output.
CDA staff works with review files built by DBES. These files are primarily built using
microdata from the EQUI and are meant to serve a similar purpose to many of the BLS edit
listings while more closely adhering to the review criteria established by CDA. They also use
the Macro Analysis Tool (MAT), Enhanced Database (EDB), Pub-Files, and special publication
review tools.
The MAT is a tool used by CDA that includes several years of employment and wage history. It
helps analysts examine counties and industries with questionable economic behavior. CDA
analysts then use the EDB to identify the establishments that are creating the questionable
behavior.
DBES review files used heavily in CDA review consist of Macro Data Review (MDR), Macro
Data Updates (MDU), High Level Macro Data, Multi-Edit File (MEF), MIC/MAC Analyzer,
and Code Change Review (CCR). A NOQ may be developed by CDA when changes exceed the

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-24

criteria mentioned in the table below. Changes within these ranges that fit prevailing patterns or
that match known special economic events (such as strikes) usually do not result in NOQs.
MDR files are a primary tool for CDA to review large changes in employment and wage data at
the county level. The file aggregates employment and wages for each macro cell in the state and
presents those cells with over-the-year changes that exceed CDA review criteria and must be
evaluated. Analysts can then review micro records within the cell for unusual over-the-year
changes and create NOQs if necessary.
MEF errors and significant imbalances must be corrected.
MDU files show changes (at the macro level) to any BLS-open quarter as compared to the
previous version of the file at BLS. MDU files are the primary editing tool for identifying and
validating current and back quarter updates to macro data resulting from micro-level corrections.
The initial run of MDU includes only back quarter data that must be reviewed. The MDU listing
for subsequent runs may include current quarter records that changed in addition to the back
quarter records. Significant unexpected changes may lead to NOQs. CDA staff considers the
size of the cell, the industry, cell history, and seasonal trends when determining if a change
shown on MDU will result in a question. A change meeting the large/small state criteria may be
seen on MDU but not result in a NOQ. If the change appears to be in keeping with historical
reporting, the CDA analyst may deem it to be acceptable.
CCR files are used by CDA to identify large shifts in data caused by a code change to a micro
records. Analysts check to see if the change is economic or non-economic and if the code
change was added during the appropriate quarter. An NOQ is often required to verify such a
change.
MIC/MAC publication files are generated in the CDA Branch for researching publication
counties with unusual over the year change(s) in employment and/or wages. The publication
files serve many different functions in the review process. The publication review supplements
the traditional review of listings by checking for large counties with large over the year changes
in employment or wages, adjusted for non-economic changes in the data. This review also
results in NOQs, some of which come after the conclusion of the regular quarterly review.
BEA, an established user of QCEW data, sends questions to CDA throughout each processing
quarter. While most BEA questions can be explained by researching the data in Washington,
some cannot. These questions are also referred to the state via the regional offices.
CDA Review for Publication Adjustment
Adjusting for non-economic code changes allows the QCEW program to publish county data that
mostly reflects real economic growth. Without adjusting for non-economic change, published
data would contain more distortion due to reporting changes. The publication adjustment
process modifies year-ago county, ownership, and/or industry codes inside the adjustment
system. Examples include establishments included on the CCS, establishments previously
having unclassified county or NAICS codes receiving a specific county or industry designation,

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-25

or breakouts of single employers to multi-establishment accounts. On occasion, especially in
first quarter when non-economic code changes are supposed to be brought in, states will receive
NOQs regarding the validity of economic/non-economic changes. Actual micro records are not
modified. Macro adjusted data is an aggregation of adjusted microdata.
Effective with 2014/3 review, CDA implemented Automatic Proration Adjustment (APA).
Multi-establishment accounts with comment code 48, 90, and/or 91 on any unit are automatically
prorated to create year-ago matching subunits with distributions of data matching that of current
quarter subunits. This adjustment can be applied to a single-to-multi breakout or to a multi with
better reporting. It must be a multi in the current quarter and have a CC 48, 90, or 91 in at least
one subunit. These codes were chosen because they indicate the recognition of a change in the
quality and accuracy of reporting. It implies that no economic events have occurred, rather that
the firm or state has a better idea of the data quality. States should be aware of the consequence
of adding these codes because of the automatic nature of the process for CDA. The proration
does not need to be approved, though if it causes a large shift in employment or wages between
macro cells, it may result in an NOQ. The criteria for excluding some accounts with the
appropriate comment codes from this adjustment process is shown below.

CDA Review Criteria
Edit Output

Category

Employment

Wages

≥ 5,000

≥ $20 million

≥ 500

≥ $5 million

Gross Keypunch Report
KP (KeyPunch) File

High Level Data Viewer
EQUI Data Counts Imputation

EDI Summary Review File
Macro Data Review Tool

Largest Employer File with
9M records

Small Pub CNTY1

1

≥ 300

≥ $3 million

Large Pub CNTY2

2

≥ 500

≥ $5 million

Non-Pub CNTY3

3

≥ 1,000

≥ $10 million

≥ 1,000

≥ $10 million

Focus
Unusually large data problems,
often due to keypunch errors.
Enter Key Punch Error on
Gross Key Punch Report
Immediately.
Any record on the file meets
review criteria.
Graphs not following trends or
reflecting expected changes due
to declines/upswings in the
economy at ownership and
supersector totals
Significant change in
imputation and missing data for
employment and wages
Review UI_Run level records
that flag for ABS employment
OTY change of 500 or more, or
$5 million for wages.
OTY change for current quarter
1. Review records with change
in status to N (new) or R
(removed).
2. Review 9M records: current
quarter month-to-month
change, and total wage change
not within historical range. Do
not research Pred/Succ issues
here.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Small State

Page 13-26
Filter the national Publication
Edit Failire (PEF) file by state
FIPS, then filter the type field
by "ST" (state aggregate of
PEF records) and "MIC" (PEF
micro records). If the state
aggregate meets the small or
large state criteria, include a
question on the NOQ Form.
Put the associated "MIC"
records in a separate file on
qcom in the same folder as the
NOQs. Put a link in the PEF
NOQ to the file of PEF records
on qcom.
For any UI accounts that are out
of balance by 500 or more in
employment, and/or $5 million
or more in wages, use the Error
Check App (ECA) tool on the
CDA Menu to see if there is a
macro data impact that meets
the criteria for small, large, and
non-pub counties to the left.
1) Change in macro cell levels
that meets this criteria
2) Change that does not make
macro cell levels fit historical
data better after factoring in
Summary of Difference (SOD)
data from CCR Macro.
1) Records with IV* (Inclusion
Version) = Current QVER
2) MEEI not = 2
3) Employment and total wages
indicators = E

≥ 500

≥ $5 million

≥ 1,000

≥ $10 million

Small Pub CNTY

≥ 300

≥ $3 million

Large Pub CNTY

≥ 500

≥ $5 million

Non-Pub CNTY

≥ 1,000

≥ $10 million

Small Pub CNTY

≥ 300

≥ $3 million

Large Pub CNTY

≥ 500

≥ $5 million

Non-Pub CNTY

≥ 1,000

≥ $10 million

Small State

≥ 500

≥ $15 million

Large State

≥ 1,000

≥ $25 million

Code Change Review File:
Macro

≥ 1,000

≥ $25 million

Large changes in the Summary
of Difference for a macro cell.

Code Change Review File:
Micro 3 (Non-CCS County
Changes)

≥ 500

≥ $10 million

Reporting units with data levels
that meet this criteria

Pubfail
Large State4

4

Multi-Edit File

Macro Data Change Viewer

Estimated Records File

Small Pub CNTY

≥ 300

≥ $3 million

Large Pub CNTY

≥ 500

≥ $5 million

Pub County Research in
Mic/Mac Analyzer
("Highlighted Counties only")

1) For counties in the News
Release (NR) rankings for
employment change, focus on
OTY change in M3 for
supersectors and 6-digits
contributing to the county's
employment growth (e.g., if
county growth rates is positive,
focus on positive growth). See
#3 for counties with growth
rates ranging from -1.0% to
1.0%.
2) For counties in the NR
rankings for AWW change,
focus on AWW Impact
contributing to the county's
AWW growth (e.g., if county

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-27
growth rate is positive, focus on
negative AWW impacts).
Research supersectors and
industries with +/- 0.3
percentage point impacts. Also
research other large TW or
AME changes. See #3 for
counties with growth rates
ranging from -1.0% to 1.0%.

10 Largest CNTY

3) If a county is ranked and has
a growth rate ranging from 1.0% to 1.0% (inclusive, i.e., 1.0% <= county growth rate <=
1.0%), review both contributing
and offsetting changes that
meet criteria. The write-up tool
will include up to 3 offsetting
supersectors and industries for a
county with a growth rate that
falls within this range near zero.
3) For 10 largest counties,
complete review of all private
supersectors and combined
government. Cover increases
and decreases in M3
employment, and positive and
negative AWW impacts. Use
the following as a guideline:
3.1) M3 employment review
3.1.1) Within all private
supersectors and combined
government, review all 6-digit
level changes ≥ 1,000. If there
are less than three changes ≥
1,000, review smaller changes
to reach a total of three
reviewed industries for
employment increase.
3.1.2) Repeat this review for
employment decreases. Within
all private supersectors and
combined government, review
all 6-digit level changes ≤ 1,000. If there are less than
three changes ≤ -1,000, review
smaller changes to reach a total
of three reviewed industries for
employment decrease.
3.2) AWW review
3.2.1) Within all private
supersectors and combined
government, review all 6-digit
industries with an AWW
impact of +/- 0.2 percent.
3.2.2) Review any industries
with an absolute change of $25
million in total wages where the
change is an outlier based on
analyst knowledge/experience.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-28
Note: If a county is ranked and
has a growth rate ranging from
-1.0% to 1.0% (inclusive, i.e., 1.0% <= county growth rate <=
1.0%), the write-up tool will
include up to 3 offsetting
supersectors and industries.

BEA Questions

≥ 300

≥ $3 million

Footnotes:

Only respond to BEA questions
or forward the questions to the
states if they involve changes
of 300 or more workers or $3
million or more in wages.
Updated: March 27, 2017

1) Small Publication County: Annual average employment ≥ 75,000 but ≤ 100,000
2) Large Publication County: Annual average employment ≥ 100,000
3) Non-publication County: Annual average employment < 75,000 or County FIPS = 99X
4) Large State: California, Florida, Georgia, Illinois, Michigan, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Texas
*Inclusion Version (IV) indicates the year/quarter when the record was first included on the state system.

LDB Review
The LDB micro group conducts a quarterly micro-level review. Using the EQUI files and the
LDB, the staff examine micro level records with a) large unexplained over the quarter
employment changes including openings, closings, expansions, and contractions; b) unclear
predecessor / successor relationships; and c) predecessor / successor or MEEI double counting.
Records questioned are identified through a program run by the national office based in part on
edit flags 91, 96, 126, 139, 140, 160, 161, 178, and 179. These records may not appear on the
national office-generated edit output available to the regional offices.
After signoff LDB analysts complete the large unmatched unit review. States are processed on a
flow basis after a “preliminarily signoff” declaration from the Current Data Analysis (CDA)
branch is received. DBES then runs the Continuous Unit (CU) processing methodology, which
links about 99% of the records on the EQUI file. The remaining unlinked records are reviewed
by analysts. Manual links are placed on the Forced Match File. The file is then provided to

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-29

DBES when the state review is complete. The LDB is loaded and state submitted back quarter
corrections are applied. In first quarter, Annual Manual Corrections (AMCs), a supplemental set
of corrections, are loaded to the LDB.
RO Review
Regional office review starts with the review of the QCEW/CES spreadsheets. One week prior
to the EQUI official deliverable file due date each quarter the states submit QCEW macro data to
their regional office. The regional offices take the QCEW macro data and CES data for the same
time period and load it into the QCEW/CES spreadsheet for each state. Statewide graphs are
created by three and six digit NAICS for each ownership type. The regions review the graphs in
the spreadsheets in various ways. The regional offices send early macro questions based on their
review to the states in time to be addressed before the official deliverable EQUI files are
submitted to BLS one week later.
Regional office staff works with the national office and state staff to resolve NOQs. All NOQs
go through the regional office before being sent to the states. The regional offices review the
NOQs prior to sending them to the states. The regional offices also review the states’ responses
to the NOQs before returning them to the national office. They seek clarification from the
national office or the states when necessary.
The regions develop ROQs based on their independent review of BLS edit listings. ROQs are
shared with the national office, as are the states' responses. Regional office staff works with the
states to ensure that I-errors and W-flags appearing on Table 9B (the Micro Edits Only Listing)
are corrected or explained, based on edit priority. Regional staff also review publication edit
failures and work with states to resolve these issues.
The regional offices work closely with the states in a variety of ways to monitor data quality in
the states, both before the submission of the quarterly deliverable and during the cleanup period.
Regional offices work with state-supplied macro data at several points in the quarterly
processing cycle to generate and review the macro roll-up spreadsheets and to follow up where
necessary. Regional offices receive and review the listings described in the previous sections,
working with the states to identify problems and focus cleanup efforts. Regional offices also
monitor state procedures to verify their effectiveness and efficiency.

13.3.2 State Correction Activity
State responses to BLS review questions are essential to the data quality of the QCEW program.
Each state sends an EQUI to BLS that contains current quarter data as well as corrections to
BLS-open quarters. (Some states may have open quarters that differ from BLS practice.)
During the review period, each state responds to the NOQs and ROQs. The state responds with
explanations and/or corrections. States are required to address all data issues on the NOQ form
including micro records involving EDI reporters. The EDI Center should provide answers to the
states for questions on EDI-provided data and should also provide answers to the email group

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-30

QCEWNOQ on all questions. The state should provide additional feedback on responses
provided by EDI when necessary. Corrections resulting from NOQs and ROQs are either made
through the BLS Corrections system or sent via a subset file. Late or minor corrections are
usually held for transmission with next quarter’s EQUI.
States should submit responses to NOQs within five working days after the questions are received
by the regional office. States should submit responses to subset questions as soon as possible
after the questions are sent out. States should work with their RO to provide timely and complete
responses to the NOQs using the standardized form. The regions should send responses to NOQs
to QCEWNOQ and EDIBLSStaff.
If requested by the national office, states should submit a subset file containing the largest
corrections within seven working days of the EQUI due date. This file is rarely requested, but is
sometimes needed to provide BEA and CES with data corrected for very large errors.
All priority A or B warning (W) flags printed on the BLS listings should be reviewed and the
necessary corrections made. For W-flags, a correction consists of either a change to the data that
removes the flag or (where the data are verified as accurate) an update with an appropriate
comment code. If the data are unusual or large, or if the data change substantially, a narrative
comment is very helpful for reviewers and data users and should be included.

13.3.3 Edit Priorities
BLS has established three levels of edit priority for data review and cleanup:
Priority A (first priority)
This group of edit flags primarily affects aggregated economic data. They affect key current
QCEW data products for customers, and in particular, users such as the Current Employment
Statistics (CES), BEA, and others listed in Section 13.4.1 who need the data soon after the
deliverable is due. This group of edit flags also includes errors that affect the ability of the
system to provide a company name and at least one usable address to BLS survey users.
The priority A edits include all the macro edits:
Level 5 – Significant Employment and Wage Macro Edits
091-W Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
092-W AQW Change is significantly > Parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW
Range
093-W Average Employment is significantly > Parameter, but Total Wages = 0
094-W Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages is significantly > Parameter
Level 6 – Warning Macro Edits
126-W Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
127-W AQW Change > Parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW Range
130-W Average Employment > Parameter, but Total Wages = 0

October 2018

131-W
134-W
135-W

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages > Parameter
Number of Establishments out of Range
New or Discontinued Macro Record

Priority A also includes the following micro edits:
Level 1 – Pre-edits
002-I
Invalid UI Account Number
003-I
Invalid Reporting Unit Number
004-I
Invalid Reference Year
005-I
Invalid Reference Quarter
006-I
Invalid State Code
Level 2 – Key Field edits
010-I
Invalid NAICS Code
012-I
Invalid Ownership Code
013-I
Invalid County Code
016-I
NAICS & Ownership Inconsistent
Level 3 – Date and Status Code Edits
025-I
Invalid Status Code
Level 4 – Remaining Invalid Error Edits
031-I Invalid First Month Employment
032-I Invalid Second Month Employment
033-I Invalid Third Month Employment
034-I Invalid Total Wages
035-I Invalid Taxable Wages
036-I Invalid Contributions
039-I Invalid Type of Coverage
040-I Invalid MEEI Code
045-I
Invalid Federal EI Number
056-I Inconsistent Ownership/Type of Coverage
057-I Taxable Wages on Federal Record
058-I Contributions on Federal Record
059-I Taxable Wages > 0 for Non-experience-rated Record
060-I Contributions > 0 for Non-experience-rated Record
062-I Taxable Wages > Total Wages
063-I Contributions > Taxable Wages
064-I MEEI/RUN Inconsistent
065-I Inconsistent County/Township Combination
070-I No Usable Address
072-I Both Trade Name and Legal Name are Blank
080-I Indian Tribal Indicator Inconsistent with NAICS or OWN

Page 13-31

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-32

Level 5 – Significant Employment and Wage Micro Edits
085-W Potential Predecessor (UI #) found based on Wage Records
086-W Potential Successor (UI #) found based on Wage Records
089-W WIN-202 Only: Month 1 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
090-W WIN-202 Only: Month 2 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
091-W EXPO and BLS: Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
WIN-202: Month 3 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
092-W AQW Change is significantly > Parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW
Range
093-W Average Employment is significantly > Parameter, but Total Wages = 0
094-W Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages is significantly > Parameter
095-W Total Wages = Sum of Employment +/- Parameter if AME is Large
096-W Unusually Large New Record on File
097-W Unusually Large Discontinued Record Inactivated
099-W Questionable Large Imputation
Level 6 – Warning Micro Edits
116-W EIN missing for More Than Parameter Months
126-W EXPO and BLS Only: Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
(edits 136, 137, and 138 in WIN-202)
127-W AQW Change > Parameter and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW Range
130-W Average Employment > Parameter, but Total Wages = 0
131-W Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages > Parameter
132-W Total Wages = Sum of Employment +/- Parameter
133-W Unclassified Industry Employment > Parameter
136-W WIN-202 Only: Month 1 Employment Change Exceeds Test (edit 126 in EXPO
and BLS)
137-W WIN-202 Only: Month 2 Employment Change Exceeds Test (edit 126 in EXPO
and BLS)
138-W WIN-202 Only: Month 3 Employment Change Exceeds Test (edit 126 in EXPO
and BLS)
139-W New Record?
140-W Discontinued Record?
Level 8 – Multi-establishment Edits
171-W First Month Employment Not in Balance
172-W Second Month Employment Not in Balance
173-W Third Month Employment Not in Balance
174-W Total Wages Not in Balance
175-W Taxable Wages Not in Balance
176-W Contributions Not in Balance
178-I Master Without Multiple Worksites
179-I Worksite Missing Master
180-I Single Account/Active Worksites
181-I Worksite Ownership Code Differs from Master

October 2018

182-I
185-I

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-33

Worksite EIN Differs from Master
Inconsistent Indian Tribal Codes within the Multi Account

Priority B (second priority)
This group includes micro edit flags with smaller economic impact as well as flags for ARS data,
and longitudinal (predecessor/successor) information:
Level 4 – Remaining Invalid Error Edits
043-I
044-I
046-I
066-I
067-I
074-I
075-I
076-I
078-I

Invalid Predecessor SESA ID
Invalid Successor SESA ID
Invalid ARS Response Code/Year
Invalid Format in Predecessor Account
Invalid Format in Successor Account
Invalid Old Ownership
Invalid Old County
Invalid Old County/Old Township Combination
Invalid Old NAICS Code

Level 6 – Warning Edits
088-W Large Record without Usable PLA
120-W Possible Non-Economic Code Change
121-W Code Change Back to a Recent Code
123-W Expected Code Change Not Made
146-W Old Codes Are Inconsistent with 4th Quarter Codes
Level 7 – Predecessor/Successor Edits
156-W Predecessor/Successor County Code Change Conflict
157-W Predecessor/Successor Ownership Change Conflict
159-W Predecessor/Successor Township Code Change Conflict
160-W Both Predecessor and Successor Reported
161-W Neither Predecessor nor Successor Reported
164-W Predecessor/Successor NAICS Code Change Conflict
Priority C (third priority)
The remaining edit flags are concerned with miscellaneous address and administrative
information. After the first two priorities are addressed, states should attend to the remainder of
the edit flags.
Level 1 – Pre-edits
001-I
Invalid Transaction Code
Level 3 – Date and Status Code Edits
021-I
Invalid Initial Liability Date Format
022-I
Invalid EOL Date Format
023-I
Invalid Setup Date Format

October 2018

024-I

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-34

Reactivation Date Invalid or Earlier than Liability Date

Level 4 – Remaining Invalid Error Edits
047-I
Invalid Tax Rate - Beyond Minimum/Maximum Range
048-I
Invalid Comment Code
049-I
Invalid First Month Employment Indicator
050-I
Invalid Second Month Employment Indicator
051-I
Invalid Third Month Employment Indicator
052-I
Invalid Total Wages Indicator
053-I
Invalid Taxable Wages Indicator
054-I
Invalid Contributions Due Indicator
Level 6 –Warning Edits
101-W Unusable Address Type Code
102-W Blank Physical Location City; Other PLA Fields Present
103-W Unusable Physical Location State Abbreviation
104-W Unusable Physical Location Zip Code Format
105-W Unusable Telephone Format
106-W Blank UI City; Other UI Address Fields Present
107-W Unusable UI State Abbreviation
108-W Unusable UI Zip Code Format
109-W Blank Mailing/Other City, Other M/O Address Fields Present
110-W Unusable Mailing/Other State Abbreviation
111-W Unusable Mailing/Other Zip Code Format
112-W Questionable Fax Number Format
114-W P.O. Box, Blank Street. Or Out-of-State in PLA Block
118-W Computed Tax Rate> TOL % from Reported, and Computed Tax TOL from
Reported
119-W First QTR Taxable Wages Missing for Experience-Rated Account
124-W Inactive Record with Reported Employment/Wage Data
125-W Data Reported Prior to Liability Date
128-W Identical Monthly Employment >Parameter
129-W Taxable/Total Wage Ratio > Prior Year Ratio by Parameter %
Level 9 –Warning Edits
191-W Questionable Wage Record Count
192-W Questionable Wage Record Wages
193-W First Month Employment > Wage Record Count
194-W Second Month Employment > Wage Record Count
195-W Third Month Employment > Wage Record Count
196-W All Months Employment = Wage Record Count
197-W Total Wages Vary from Wage Records
198-W Divergent Employment Trends

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-35

13.3.4 Subset File
The EQUI deliverable files are due once a quarter on the dates given in Appendix D. The subset
deadline falls approximately four weeks after the EQUI files are due; these dates also appear in
Appendix D. Increasingly, subsets are becoming unnecessary for BLS review and correction. In
some cases, significant issues can be corrected only via subsets. However, BLS now has the
capacity to make almost all changes in the version of the file located at BLS. Changes made in
the state after the deliverable are automatically included in the next primary file.
If generated, the subset file should include corrections resulting from the national office and
regional office questions, if a subset is required by either group. It should not be generated
before the state has processed the NOQs and ROQs. If a subset is not required by the national
office or the regional office, the state can still send one. The state can choose the records to be
included on the subset. State data submittals, other than the EQUI or the scheduled subset file,
must be approved by CDA before they are generated. This includes any files the State may want
to submit after the four-week deadline has passed.
If the state (or BLS review staff) wishes to submit a subset file, that file must be transmitted to
BLS in time to meet the subset deadline. Regional offices should work with their states to ensure
that the data are edited and reviewed prior to submission of the subset to BLS. State processing
schedules may need to be adjusted to allow for this editing and review. States and regional
offices also need to allow time for the corrections to be received and processed by BLS. Except
in extraordinary cases, subsets which miss the deadline will be held for processing with the next
quarterly deliverable.
The edit output tables from the subset file processing are produced in the national office
immediately after the subset file due date. Subsets accepted by CDA earlier than the due date are
processed immediately upon acceptance. The national office then has one working day to get
questions out to the regional offices. The regional offices are to confer with the states on getting
responses back to the national office as soon as possible. This allows the regional offices to
certify the files clean by the deadline. If errors are found during the review of the state's
correction file, the regional offices and the national office consult to determine the best course of
action. Usually, corrections are held for submission with the next quarter's EQUI deliverable. If
the error is large, a BLS correction will be made to close out the BLS review and correction
process.

13.3.5 Clean Declaration/Quarterly Signoff
For a State’s QCEW data to be considered clean, the state must do the following:
•
•

Correct all invalid errors listed in the Priority A and Priority B groups and printed in Table
9B.
Answer all NOQs and correct the data if needed.

October 2018

•

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

Page 13-36

Resolve all ROQs and correct the data if needed.

In addition, all invalid errors should be corrected, and all warnings in those groups that are
printed on the national office listings should be reviewed and the necessary corrections made in
the states’ systems. Corrections not specifically requested by the national office may be held for
the next quarterly deliverable rather than sent in a subset.
If no further corrections to a file are necessary, the state notifies the regional office that the data
file is clean. The regional and national offices use a tracking tool called the Signoff and Subset
Log to track whether a subset is required from a state and to track preliminary and final quarterly
signoff. Once the appropriate entries are made in the signoff log, the tool generates emails to the
national and regional office. Emails are generated with three signoff log entries; one for regional
office signoff, one for CDA preliminary signoff and one for CDA final signoff. Regional offices
forward CDA final signoff notification to the states. If a State's data do not meet the standard
clean definition, even after updates, the national office will consult with the regional office to
determine the best course of action. Clean designation does not influence BLS publication
processing, which is driven by the resolution of CDA and LDB review questions.

13.4 BLS Estimates for Late Files
If a state is unable to submit a quarterly deliverable, the national office will create a replacement
file for use in creating national totals. The replacement file will consist of a copy of the last
quarterly deliverable received from the state. All data for the late state will be suppressed by
BLS. This happened once during the first 20 years of mic/mac processing.
When production is resumed, the replacement will be removed and real data will be added back
to the BLS system as time and resources permit.

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

October 2018

Page 13-37

EXHIBIT 13A
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME: 07:07:00 AM
(STATE NAME)
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q
COMPARISON OF EQUI TOTALS TO DATA REPORTED ON THE TRAILER RECORD – TABLE 1A
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
YEAR/QTR.
2005/1
2004/4
2004/3
N/A
N/A

TOTAL RECORDS ON TRAILER.
8,904
2,350
1,253
0
0

TOTAL RECORDS ON EQUI.
8,904
2,350
1,253
0
0

NET DIFFERENCE.
0
0
0
0
0

TRAILER DELETED RECORDS.
43

EQUI DELETED RECORDS.
43

NET DIFFERENCE.
0

PAGE
1
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **

ALL QUARTERS ON TRAILER RECORD:

ALL RECORDS
TRAILER
EQUI
DIFF.

NO. ESTABL.
12,507
12,507
0

MONTH 1 EMPL.
202,119
202,119
0

MONTH 2 EMPL.
201,888
201,888
0

MONTH 3 EMPL.
204,566
204,566
0

TOTAL WAGES.
1,781,531,266
1,781,531,266
0

TAXABLE WAGES.
640,537,198
640,537,198
0

CONTRIBUTIONS.
11,572,977
11,572,977
0

CURRENT QUARTER COUNTS-2005/1
TOTAL
TRAILER
EQUI
DIFF.

NO. ESTABL.
8,904
8,904
0

MONTH 1 EMPL.
178,816
178,816
0

MONTH 2 EMPL.
178,237
178,237
0

MONTH 3 EMPL.
180,477
180,477
0

TOTAL WAGES.
1,617,456,564
1,617,456,564
0

TAXABLE WAGES.
518,127,311
518,127,311
0

CONTRIBUTIONS.
9,270,354
9,270,354
0

FEDERAL OWN.
TRAILER
EQUI
DIFF.

NO. ESTABL.
2,350
3
2,347

MONTH 1 EMPL.
15,865
731
15,134

MONTH 2 EMPL.
16,145
732
15,413

MONTH 3 EMPL.
16,601
731
15,870

TOTAL WAGES.
99,853,224
10,407,582
89,445,642

TAXABLE WAGES.
72,023,894
0
72,023,894

CONTRIBUTIONS.
1,369,444
0
1,369,444

STATE
OWN.
TRAILER
EQUI
DIFF.

NO. ESTABL.
1,253
47
1,206

MONTH 1 EMPL.
7,438
12,726
-5,288

MONTH 2 EMPL.
7,506
12,561
-5,055

MONTH 3 EMPL.
7,488
13,156
-5,668

TOTAL WAGES.
64,221,478
119,401,159
-55,179,681

TAXABLE WAGES.
50,385,993
0
50,385,993

CONTRIBUTIONS.
933,179
0
933,179

LOCAL
OWN.
TRAILER
EQUI
DIFF.

NO. ESTABL.
0
49
-49

MONTH 1 EMPL.
0
31,514
-31,514

MONTH 2 EMPL.
0
30,734
-30,734

MONTH 3 EMPL.
0
33,325
-33,325

TOTAL WAGES.
0
283,331,485
-283,331,485

TAXABLE WAGES.
0
4,300,635
-4,300,635

CONTRIBUTIONS.
0
68,180
-68,180

PRIVATE OWN.
TRAILER
EQUI
DIFF.

NO. ESTABL.
0
8,805
-8,805

MONTH 1 EMPL.
0
133,845
-133,845

MONTH 2 EMPL.
0
134,210
-134,210

MONTH 3 EMPL.
0
133,265
-133,265

TOTAL WAGES.
0
1,204,316,338
-1,204,316,338

TAXABLE WAGES.
0
513,826,676
-513,826,676

CONTRIBUTIONS.
0
9,202,174
-9,202,174

END OF THE COMPARISON OF EQUI TOTALS TO DATA REPORTED LISTING.

EXHIBIT 13B
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:21:06 AM

(STATE)
PRE-EDIT ERROR SUMMARY COUNTS - TABLE 1B
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING

RECORDS READ
RECORDS WITH NO PRE-EDIT ERRORS
RECORDS WITH NO PRE-EDIT ERRORS(EDIT CODES 001-006)
RECORDS WITH ONE OR MORE EDIT FIELDS WITH EDIT FLAGS (EDIT CODES 001-006)
FIELDS FLAGGED (EDIT CODES 001-006)
RECORDS SUBMITTED FOR LOCKED YEAR/QUARTERS
EDIT FLAGS

DESCRIPTION
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
TOTAL

TRANSACTION CODE
UI ACCOUNT NUMBER
REPORTING UNIT NUMBER
REFERENCE YEAR
REFERENCE QUARTER
STATE CODE

EDIT CODE
001
002
003
004
005
006

2005/1

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

PAGE

181,834
181,447
181,834
0
0
0
0

2004/4

ALL OTHER QUARTERS

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1

EXHIBIT 13C
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

07:07:00 AM

(STATE NAME)
PRE-EDIT LISTING – TABLE 1C
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

TRAN
CD ST YEAR/Q
UI ACCT NO RUN STAT
NAME
EI NUMBER EDI NAICS
--------- --- ------ -- --------------- --- ------A
66 2005/1
0000065432 00000 1
LACKLUSTER VIDEOS INC
000000000
SETUP DATE: 1989/11/28 INITIAL LIAB DATE: 1989/11/28 END OF LIAB DATE:
/
13-I INVALID COUNTY CODE

PAGE
CONFIDENTIAL DATA

MEEI
OWN CTY CD
--- --- -532230
5
/
REACT DATE:

M1
-000

EMPLOYMENT
M2
M3
--1
/ /

A
66 2005/1
0000065434 00000 1
NEEDLESS MARKUP DEPARTMEN
SETUP DATE:
/ /
INITIAL LIAB DATE: 1999/10/01 END OF LIAB DATE:
12-I INVALID OWNERSHIP CODE
13-I INVALID COUNTY CODE

029876543
000000
0
1998/12/31 REACT DATE:

000

1

A
66 2005/1
0000065436 00000 1
CUTTLEVISION MFR, INC
000067
SETUP DATE: 1998/01/01 INITIAL LIAB DATE: 1999/10/01 END OF LIAB DATE:
13-I INVALID COUNTY CODE

119876543

000

1

A
66 2005/1
0000065440 00000 1
A D D CO SUSHI-CO RESTAUR
SETUP DATE: 1982/10/01 INITIAL LIAB DATE: 1982/10/01 END OF LIAB DATE:
13-I INVALID COUNTY CODE

29876543

A
66 2005/1
0000065444 00000 1
BUB FOLDING BOOKS CO INC
SETUP DATE:
/ /
INITIAL LIAB DATE: 2000/10/01 END OF LIAB DATE:
12-I INVALID OWNERSHIP CODE
13-I INVALID COUNTY CODE

049876543

A
66 2005/1
0000065450 00000 1
000005
SETUP DATE:
/ /
INITIAL LIAB DATE: 2000/10/01 END OF LIAB DATE:
12-I INVALID OWNERSHIP CODE
13-I INVALID COUNTY CODE

229876789

***

END OF PREEDIT

515210

5

/

000068

/

/

REACT DATE:

/

/

999999
5
REACT DATE:

000

1

/

/

000000
0
REACT DATE:

000

1

000001
/ /

000000

000

1

000005

0

1997/12/31 REACT DATE:

***

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

000060

000005

1

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Processing of the EQUI Data

October 2018

EXHIBIT 13D
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:07:08 PM

(STATE)
PAGE
1
STATE TOTALS - TABLE 2A
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
STATE TOTAL
|
|
|
|
|
AME
OTQ
OTY |
AWW
OTQ
OTY |
NUM EST |
M1
M2
M3 |
TOT W
TAX W
CONT
YEAR/Q | (000S)
PCT
PCT |
PCT
PCT |
(000S) | (000S)
(000S)
(000S) |
(IN B)
(IN B)
(IN M)
2003/2 |
1,782
2
0 |
577
-1
2 |
123.37 |
1,774
1,785
1,786 |
13.37
2.22
44.9
2003/3 |
1,764
-1
0 |
580
0
2 |
106.86 |
1,747
1,772
1,774 |
13.30
1.33
27.6
2003/4 |
1,773
0
0 |
624
8
3 |
106.41 |
1,772
1,771
1,775 |
14.38
1.12
23.9
2004/1 |
1,753
-1
0 |
596
-4
2 |
109.65 |
1,738
1,748
1,774 |
13.58
6.86
149.5
2004/2 |
1,803
3
1 |
595
0
3 |
111.54 |
1,793
1,805
1,811 |
13.94
2.31
52.4
2004/3 |
1,793
-1
2 |
603
1
4 |
113.05 |
1,775
1,800
1,803 |
14.05
1.43
33.1
2004/4 |
1,809
1
2 |
655
9
5 |
114.52 |
1,806
1,809
1,811 |
15.41
1.20
28.3
2005/1 |
1,788
-1
2 |
611
-7
3 |
116.07 |
1,774
1,788
1,800 |
14.20
7.03
153.5
|
|
|
|
|
_______|________________________|_______________________|____________|____________________________|_______________________________
|
|
|
|
PRIVATE SECTOR
|
|
|
|
|
AME
OTQ
OTY |
AWW
OTQ
OTY |
NUM EST |
M1
M2
M3 |
TOT W
TAX W
CONT
YEAR/Q | (000S)
PCT
PCT |
PCT
PCT |
(000S) | (000S)
(000S)
(000S) |
(IN B)
(IN B)
(IN M)
2003/2 |
1,466
2
0 |
564
-2
2 |
120.12 |
1,455
1,467
1,476 |
10.75
2.20
44.7
2003/3 |
1,465
0
0 |
566
0
2 |
103.68 |
1,468
1,469
1,459 |
10.79
1.33
27.5
2003/4 |
1,455
-1
0 |
621
10
4 |
103.23 |
1,456
1,453
1,455 |
11.75
1.12
23.8
2004/1 |
1,437
-1
0 |
586
-6
2 |
106.43 |
1,424
1,432
1,456 |
10.94
6.81
148.6
2004/2 |
1,487
3
1 |
582
-1
3 |
108.27 |
1,476
1,487
1,500 |
11.26
2.29
52.1
2004/3 |
1,493
0
2 |
588
1
4 |
109.78 |
1,498
1,495
1,487 |
11.42
1.42
33.0
2004/4 |
1,489
0
2 |
651
11
5 |
111.24 |
1,487
1,489
1,490 |
12.61
1.20
28.2
2005/1 |
1,467
-1
2 |
604
-7
3 |
112.79 |
1,457
1,467
1,478 |
11.52
6.98
152.7
|
|
|
|
|
_______|________________________|_______________________|____________|____________________________|_______________________________
|
|
|
|
FEDERAL GOVERNMENT
|
|
|
|
|
AME
OTQ
OTY |
AWW
OTQ
OTY |
NUM EST |
M1
M2
M3 |
TOT W
YEAR/Q | (000S)
PCT
PCT |
PCT
PCT |
(000S) | (000S)
(000S)
(000S) |
(IN B)
2003/2 |
28
-1
0 |
898
-4
2 |
0.61 |
28
28
28 |
0.33
2003/3 |
28
0
0 |
955
6
4 |
0.60 |
28
28
28 |
0.35
-2 |
921
-4
2 |
0.60 |
28
28
28 |
0.34
2003/4 |
28
0
2004/1 |
28
-1
-2 |
994
8
7 |
0.64 |
28
28
28 |
0.36
2004/2 |
28
1
0 |
938
-6
4 |
0.64 |
28
28
28 |
0.34
2004/3 |
28
1
1 | 1,019
9
7 |
0.65 |
29
28
28 |
0.38
2004/4 |
28
-1
0 |
982
-4
7 |
0.65 |
28
28
28 |
0.36
2005/1 |
28
1
2 |
993
1
0 |
0.65 |
28
28
28 |
0.37
|
|
|
|
|
_______|________________________|_______________________|____________|____________________________|_______________________________
|
|
|
|
STATE GOVERNMENT
|
|
|
|
|
AME
OTQ
OTY |
AWW
OTQ
OTY |
NUM EST |
M1
M2
M3 |
TOT W
TAX W
CONT
YEAR/Q | (000S)
PCT
PCT |
PCT
PCT |
(000S) | (000S)
(000S)
(000S) |
(IN B)
(IN B)
(IN M)
2003/2 |
88
-1
-1 |
654
2
2 |
0.80 |
90
89
86 |
0.75
0.00
0.0
-3
-2 |
661
1
2 |
0.80 |
84
84
88 |
0.73
0.00
0.0
2003/3 |
85
2003/4 |
89
4
-2 |
649
-2
1 |
0.80 |
88
89
89 |
0.75
0.00
0.0
2004/1 |
88
-1
-2 |
659
2
2 |
0.80 |
86
88
88 |
0.75
0.00
0.1
2004/2 |
88
0
0 |
638
-3
-2 |
0.85 |
89
88
86 |
0.73
0.00
0.1
2004/3 |
86
-2
1 |
679
7
3 |
0.84 |
85
85
88 |
0.76
0.00
0.0
2004/4 |
89
4
1 |
676
-1
4 |
0.85 |
89
89
89 |
0.78
0.00
0.0
2005/1 |
88
-1
1 |
676
0
3 |
0.85 |
86
89
89 |
0.77
0.00
0.1
|
|
|
|
|
_______|________________________|_______________________|____________|____________________________|_______________________________

Page 13-40

EXHIBIT 13E
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

(STATE)

TOTAL

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
COUNTY SUMMARY- TABLE 2B SUMMARY PAGE
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
--M3 EMPLOYMENT--||-------AWW-----|
T ADJ
T ||
T ADJ
T |
OTY
OTY ||
OTY
OTY |
%CHG
%CHG ||
%CHG
%CHG |
+1.5

+1.5 ||

+2.5

001 ABBEY

+2.9

+3.2 ||

-0.6

003
005
007
009
011
013

-0.2
-5.0
+0.0
+0.5
-0.4
+2.8

-0.3
-5.2
+0.2
+0.7
-0.3
+3.1

-0.8
+7.5
+1.3
+1.6
+0.4
+2.2

PAGE
1
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **
--M3 EMPLOYMENT--||-------AWW-----|
T ADJ
T ||
T ADJ
T |
OTY
OTY ||
OTY
OTY |
%CHG
%CHG ||
%CHG
%CHG |

+2.5 |

-1.0 | 057 HURRY
+4.6
+2.8 ||
+0.4
-1.2 |
_________________________________________________________________
-0.8 | 059 JASH
+10.1 +12.3 ||
+3.6
+3.4 |
+7.5 | 061 KEYSHONE
+1.6
-0.7 ||
+5.9
+4.4 |
+1.3 | 063 LANCASTER
-1.4
-0.6 ||
+9.8 +10.0 |
+1.6 | 065 LAURAYS
+4.0
+5.4 ||
+4.9
+4.5 |
-2.0
-2.1 ||
+2.9
+0.2 | 067 LIE
+2.9 |
+2.1 | 069 LEX_LUTHER
+5.3
+2.7 ||
+4.8
+3.8 |
_________________________________________________________________
015 BRINKLY
+0.3
+3.8 ||
+0.6
+0.9 | 071 MCCORMICK
+0.9
+0.3 ||
+0.6
+0.6 |
017 CALLOWAY
+0.5
+5.0 ||
-4.6
-4.1 | 073 MARTIAL
-4.9
-6.2 ||
+2.6
+2.4 |
019 CHARLES
+2.7
+2.5 ||
+3.3
+3.5 | 075 MARLBORO
+0.3
+0.2 ||
+2.4
+2.4 |
________________________________________________________________
025 CHERRY
-5.1
-5.2 ||
+1.0
+1.0 | 077 NEWSBORO
+3.5
+3.0 ||
+2.9
+3.1 |
027 CHESS_MASTER
+4.5
+5.0 ||
+4.0
+4.0 | 079 OCCOCHOBEE
-1.4
-1.0 ||
-0.2
-0.3 |
-0.1
+0.3 ||
+1.9
+1.5 |
029 CHESTERFIELD
-0.4
-1.2 ||
+0.6
+1.2 | 083 ORANGE
+0.9
+1.1 ||
-0.4
031 CLAIRE
+0.2
+0.0 ||
+0.9
+0.7 | 085 PIGSKIN
-0.2 |
035 COLLECTION
-1.4
-1.5 ||
+2.1
+1.8 | 087 RICHERTHAN
+3.0
+0.5 ||
+2.2
+1.6 |
_________________________________________________________________
037 DARLING
-0.1
-0.4 ||
+7.5
+7.3 | 089 SALADA
-1.1
+2.0 ||
+4.8
+3.6 |
039 DILLSOWER
+0.4
+6.0 ||
-1.4
+1.6 | 091 SPRINGMOUNT
+0.7
+0.2 ||
+3.2
+3.3 |
_________________________________________________________________
-0.8
041 DORCA
+2.9
+2.2 ||
+1.1
+0.6 | 093 SUMMER
+0.9
+0.9 ||
-0.8 |
043 EDGEFIELD
-3.2
-3.5 ||
+1.0
+1.0 | 095 UNICORN
+0.0
-1.0 ||
+4.2
+3.9 |
045 FAIRFAZ
+3.9
+3.8 ||
-3.1
-2.8 | 097 WILLIAMS
+1.2
+3.6 ||
+6.2
+5.8 |
047 FLOE
-1.0 | 101 YORKSHIRE
+1.5
+1.5 ||
+3.5
+3.3 |
-2.1
-7.4 ||
+1.4
-7.7 -25.5 |
049 GEORGET
+7.0
+8.5 ||
+7.7
+7.3 | 995 STATEWIDE,LOCS IN MORE THAN
+5.3 +319.8 ||
051 GREENWHICH
+1.5
+1.2 ||
+0.6
+0.6 | 996 FOREIGN LOCATIONS
-22.7 -22.7 || +48.8 +48.8 |
________________________________________________________________
-1.2
-0.9 | 998 OUT OF STATE
-33.3 -33.3 || +226.5 +226.5 |
053 GREENWOOD
+0.5
-0.5 ||
-6.0
-7.4 || +22.5 +22.2 |
055 HAMPTON
+0.3
+0.8 ||
+3.5
+4.0 | 999 UNKNOWN LOCATIONS
ACH
ALLENTOWN
ANDYTAYLOR
BAMBI
BARNSNOBLE
BUFORD

||
||
||
||
||
||

END OF THE COUNTY SUMMARY 2B LISTING

EXHIBIT 13E (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
COUNTY SUMMARY - TABLE 2B
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE
1
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **

***********************************************************************************************************************************
ANNUAL 2004: AE
6,739 %CHG
+1.8
COUNTY: 001
ABBEY
AAW $
27,138 %CHG
+3.6
-------------M3 EMPLOYMENT----------------||---------AWW----------||-------TW------||-------------------AME-------------------OTY OTY LEVEL||
OTY||
OTY LEVEL||
OTY
OTY LEVEL
OWN
2004/1
2005/1
%CHG
CHANGE || 2004/1 2005/1
%CHG||
CHANGE ||
2004/1
2005/1
%CHG
CHANGE
1
43
42
-2.3
-1||
813
791
-2.7||
-16,117||
45
44
-2.2
-1
2
231
232
+0.4
+1||
556
559
+0.5||
+16,625||
232
233
+0.4
+1
3
1,225
1,237
+1.0
+12||
515
521
+1.2||
+218,594||
1,208
1,226
+1.5
+18
5
5,238
5,440
+3.9
+202||
496
488
-1.6||
+670,017||
5,178
5,368
+3.7
+190
T
6,737
6,951
+3.2
+214||
-1.0||
+889,119||
6,663
6,872
+3.1
+209
504
499
||
||
||
-0.6||
+874,397||
TW LEVEL 2005/1
44,533,392
T ADJ
6,758
6,951
+2.9
+193||
502
499
||
||
QAF
+21
||TW 2004/1
+14,722||
***********************************************************************************************************************************
ANNUAL 2004: AE
57,013 %CHG
+1.1
COUNTY: 003
ACH
AAW $
38,458 %CHG
+1.2
-------------M3 EMPLOYMENT----------------||---------AWW----------||-------TW------||-------------------AME-------------------OTY OTY LEVEL||
OTY||
OTY LEVEL||
OTY
OTY LEVEL
OWN
2004/1
2005/1
%CHG
CHANGE || 2004/1 2005/1
%CHG||
CHANGE ||
2004/1
2005/1
%CHG
CHANGE
1
820
770
-6.1
-50|| 1,060
1,041
-1.8||
-952,589||
825
769
-6.8
-56
2
1,676
1,681
+0.3
+5||
594
627
+5.6||
+603,606||
1,662
1,648
-0.8
-14
3
4,927
5,468 +11.0
+541||
634
592
-6.6||
+847,858||
4,876
5,335
+9.4
+459
5
49,083
48,400
-1.4
-683||
750
748
-0.3||
-7,380,951||
48,908
48,225
-1.4
-683
T
56,506
56,319
-0.3
-187||
740
734
-0.8||
-6,882,076||
56,271
55,977
-0.5
-294
||
||
||
T ADJ
56,441
56,319
-122||
740
734
-0.8||
-6,516,199||
TW LEVEL 2005/1
534,109,841
-0.2
||
||
QAF
-65
||TW 2004/1
-365,877||
***********************************************************************************************************************************
ANNUAL 2004: AE
3,337 %CHG
-4.4
COUNTY: 005
ALLENTOWN
AAW $
30,219 %CHG
+6.8
-------------M3 EMPLOYMENT----------------||---------AWW----------||-------TW------||-------------------AME-------------------OTY OTY LEVEL||
OTY||
OTY LEVEL||
OTY
OTY LEVEL
OWN
2004/1
2005/1
%CHG
CHANGE || 2004/1 2005/1
%CHG||
CHANGE ||
2004/1
2005/1
%CHG
CHANGE
1
29
27
-6.9
-2||
583
624
+7.0||
+7,424||
29
28
-3.4
-1
2
447
444
-1.3
-0.7
-3||
568
594
+4.6||
+102,101||
447
441
-6
3
916
859
-6.2
-57||
457
439
-3.9||
-540,703||
872
813
-6.8
-59
5
2,050
1,933
-5.7
-117||
582
649 +11.5||
+1,235,987||
2,035
1,971
-3.1
-64
T
3,442
3,263
-5.2
-179||
548
589
+7.5||
+804,809||
3,382
3,252
-3.8
-130
||
||
||
T ADJ
3,433
3,263
24,899,491
-5.0
-170||
548
589
+7.5||
+851,824||
TW LEVEL 2005/1
||
||
QAF
-9
||TW 2004/1
-47,015||

EXHIBIT 13E (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
PAGE
28
COUNTY SUMMARY - TABLE 2B
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
***********************************************************************************************************************************
COUNTY: 999
UNKNOWN LOCATIONS
-------------M3 EMPLOYMENT----------------||---------AWW----------||-------TW------||-------------------AME-------------------OTY OTY LEVEL||
OTY||
OTY LEVEL||
OTY
OTY LEVEL
OWN
2004/2
2005/2
%CHG
CHANGE || 2004/2 2005/2
%CHG||
CHANGE ||
2004/2
2005/2
%CHG
CHANGE
1
0
0
+0.0
+0||
0
0
+0.0||
+0||
0
0
+0.0
+0
2
0
0
+0.0
+0||
0
0
+0.0||
+0||
0
0
+0.0
+0
3
0
0
+0.0
+0||
0
0
+0.0||
+0||
0
0
+0.0
+0
5
127
106 -16.5
-21||
671
738 +10.0||
-31,844||
117
103 -12.0
-14
T
127
106 -16.5
-21||
671
738 +10.0||
-31,844||
117
103 -12.0
-14
||
||
||
T ADJ
127
106 -16.5
-21||
671
738 +10.0||
-31,844||
TW LEVEL 2005/2
985,388
***********************************************************************************************************************************
STATE TOTAL
-------------M3 EMPLOYMENT----------------||---------AWW----------||-------TW------||-------------------AME-------------------OTY OTY LEVEL||
OTY||
OTY LEVEL||
OTY
OTY LEVEL
OWN
2004/2
2005/2
%CHG
CHANGE || 2004/2 2005/2
%CHG||
CHANGE ||
2004/2
2005/2
%CHG
CHANGE
-0.9
1
46,492
45,911
-1.2
-581|| 1,002
1,013
+1.1||
+795,687||
46,310
45,896
-414
2
74,898
77,585
+3.6
+2,687||
573
595
+3.8||
+40,274,904||
80,133
82,359
+2.8
+2,226
3
169,130
179,053
+5.9
+9,923||
582
585
+0.5||
+85,075,376||
173,172
183,439
+5.9
+10,267
5
1,136,851 1,162,469
+2.3
+25,618||
560
580
+3.6||
+483,128,457|| 1,131,967 1,157,095
+2.2
+25,128
+609,219,192|| 1,431,591 1,468,789
+2.6
+37,198
T
1,427,380 1,465,018
+2.6
+37,638||
578
595
+2.9||
||
||
||
T ADJ
1,427,284 1,464,966
+2.6
+37,682||
578
595
+2.9||
+609,318,687||
TW LEVEL 2005/2
11,359,290,829
||
||
EXCLUD
-96
-52
||TW 2004/2
-546,374|| TW 2005/2
-446,879

EXHIBIT 13F

DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

TOTAL NUMBER OF ACTIVE, COVERED RECORDS EXCLUDE DELETES
TOTAL NUMBER OF INACTIVE, PENDING, OR NON-COVERED RECORDS
TOTAL NUMBER OF ACTIVE, COVERED RECORDS EXCLUDING MASTERS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# ACTIVE COVERED RECORDS WITH REPORTING UNIT NUMBER > 0
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

PAGE

1

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------117,401 |
100.00 |
115,734 |
1.44
|
4,500 |
|
3,562 |
|
116,069 |
98.86 |
114,404 |
1.45
|
1,800,327 |
100.00 | 1,811,033 |
-0.59
|
17,125 |
14.58 |
17,020 |
0.61
|
588,669 |
32.69 |
607,443 |
-3.09
|

SECTION 1 - CHARACTERISTICS BY MEEI CODE
MULTI-ESTABLISHMENT EMPLOYER INDICATOR
-------------------------------------# RECORDS WITH MEEI 1 - SINGLE UNITS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MEEI 2 - MULTI-UNIT MASTER RECORDS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MEEI 3 - SUB-UNIT RECORDS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECS WITH MEEI 4 - MULTI-ESTAB EMPL REPORTING AS A SINGLE
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECS WITH MEEI 5 - COMBINATION OF ESTAB AS ONE SUB-UNIT
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECS WITH MEEI 6 - MULTI RPTING AS SNGL (BELOW EMPL LEVEL)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

98,811
1,179,145
1,332
588,250
17,124
587,388
71
29,171
1
1,281
62
3,342

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

84.16
65.49
1.13
32.67
14.58
32.62
0.06
1.62
0.00
0.07
0.05
0.18

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

97,265
1,181,126
1,330
607,441
17,019
606,121
57
19,116
1
1,322
62
3,348

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1.58
-0.16
0.15
-3.15
0.61
-3.09
24.56
52.59
0.00
-3.10
0.00
-0.17

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

CONTINUOUS UNIT RECORDS, BY MEEI CODE
------------------------------------# CONTINUOUS RECS WITH MEEI 1 - SINGLE UNITS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# CONTINUOUS RECS WITH MEEI 2 - MULTI-UNIT MASTER RECORDS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# CONTINUOUS RECS WITH MEEI 3 - SUB-UNIT
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# CONTINUOUS RECS WITH MEEI 4 - MULTI REPORTING AS A SINGLE
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# CONTINUOUS RECS WITH MEEI 5 - COMBINATION AS ONE SUB-UNIT
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# CONTINUOUS RECS WITH MEEI 6 - MULTI RPTG AS SNGL (LOW EMPL)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# CONTINUOUS RECS EXCLUDING MEEI 2 (MASTER RECORDS)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

94,887
1,154,020
1,316
583,597
16,663
575,196
70
28,897
1
1,281
61
3,331
111,682
1,762,725

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

80.82
64.10
1.12
32.41
14.19
31.94
0.05
1.60
0.00
0.07
0.05
0.18
95.12
97.91

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

94,464
1,166,356
1,326
606,691
16,707
597,022
55
18,926
1
1,322
61
3,344
111,288
1,786,970

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.44
-1.05
-0.75
-3.80
-0.26
-3.65
27.27
52.68
0.00
-3.10
0.00
-0.38
0.35
-1.35

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)

DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

RECORDS DROPPED, BY MEEI CODE
----------------------------# RECORDS DROPPED WITH MEEI 1 SINGLE UNITS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS DROPPED WITH MEEI 2 MULTI-UNIT MASTER RECS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS DROPPED WITH MEEI 3 SUB-UNIT
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS DROPPED WITH MEEI 4 MULTI REPORTING AS SINGLE
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS DROPPED W/MEEI 5 COMBINATION AS ONE SUB-UNIT
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECS DROPPED W/MEEI 6 MULTI REPORTING AS SINGLE(LOW EMPL)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS DROPPED EXCLUDING MEEI 2 (MASTER RECORDS)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS DROPPED WITH ALL MEEI CODES
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
NEW RECORDS, BY MEEI CODE
------------------------# NEW RECORDS WITH MEEI 1 - SINGLE UNITS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# NEW RECORDS WITH MEEI 2 - MULTI-UNIT MASTER RECORDS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# NEW RECORDS WITH MEEI 3 - SUB-UNIT
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# NEW RECORDS WITH MEEI 4 - MULTI REPORTING AS A SINGLE
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# NEW RECORDS WITH MEEI 5 - COMBINATION AS ONE SUB-UNIT
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# NEW RECS WITH MEEI 6 - MULTI REPORTING AS SINGLE (LOW EMPL)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# NEW RECORDS EXCLUDING MEEI 2 (MASTER RECORDS)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

PAGE

2

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------2,539
13,545
18
2,892
299
18,466
1
1,845
0
0
2
29
2,841
33,885
2,859
36,777

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

2.16
0.75
0.01
0.16
0.25
1.02
0.00
0.10
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.41
1.88
2.43
2.04

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1,563
6,407
10
947
191
6,153
0
0
0
0
1
0
1,755
12,560
1,765
13,507

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

62.44
111.40
80.00
205.38
56.54
200.11

3,924
25,125
16
4,653
461
12,192
1
274
0
0
1
11
4,387
37,602

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

3.34
1.39
0.01
0.25
0.39
0.67
0.00
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
3.73
2.08

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

2,801
14,770
4
750
312
9,099
2
190
0
0
1
4
3,116
24,063

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

40.09
70.10
300.00
520.40
47.75
33.99
-50.00
44.21

100.00
61.88
169.78
61.98
172.28

0.00
175.00
40.78
56.26

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

SECTION 2 - OTHER IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION AND CHARACERISTICS

PAGE

3

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
------------------------------------------------------

PREDECESSOR / SUCCESSOR
----------------------# RECORDS WITH VALID PREDECESSOR UI ACCOUNT# AND RUN
# RECORDS WITH PREDECESSOR UI ACCOUNT# AND RUN ALL 9
# RECORDS WITH VALID PREDECESSOR UI ACCOUNT#
AND WITH PREDECESSOR RUN = 99999
# RECORDS WITH VALID SUCCESSOR UI ACCOUNT# AND RUN
# RECORDS WITH SUCCESSOR UI ACCOUNT# AND RUN ALL 9
# RECORDS WITH VALID SUCCESSOR UI ACCOUNT#
#
AND WITH SUCCESSOR RUN = 99999

31,648 |
1 |

26.95 |
0.00 |

31,023 |
1 |

2.01
0.00

|
|

5 |

0.00 |

4 |

25.00

|

1,583 |
2 |

1.34 |
0.00 |

1,733 |
2 |

-8.65
0.00

|
|

7 |

0.00 |

4 |

75.00

|

NAICS
-------**
# RECS WITH VALID NAICS CODES (EXCL 999999)
**
# RECORDS WITH NAICS 999999
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH NAICS 999999 & COUNTY 999
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

112,333
3,736
9,338
910
1,784

|
|
|
|
|

96.78
3.21
0.51
0.78
0.09

|
|
|
|
|

110,341
4,063
10,203
1,043
2,176

|
|
|
|
|

1.80
-8.04
-8.47
-12.75
-18.01

|
|
|
|
|

SIC
--**
**
**
***

78,912
32,498
237,822
1,087

|
|
|
|

67.98
27.99
13.20
81.60

|
|
|
|

80,527
29,176
211,404
1,104

|
|
|
|

-2.00
11.38
12.49
-1.53

|
|
|
|

228
609
3,822
4,659

|
|
|
|

0.19
0.52
3.29
4.01

|
|
|
|

232
619
3,850
4,701

|
|
|
|

-1.72
-1.61
-0.72
-0.89

|
|
|
|

# RECS WITH SPECIFIC SIC CODES (EXCLUDING 9999 & EXCEPTIONS)
# RECORDS WITH SIC 9999
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# MASTER RECORDS WITH SPECIFIC SIC CODES

SIC 4-DIGIT CODING EXCEPTIONS
----------------------------**
SIC 0740
**
SIC 0780
**
SIC 5810
**
# RECORDS WITH SIC CODING EXCEPTIONS
--------------** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
*** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE MASTER RECORDS ONLY
OTHER COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE ALL ACTIVE CURRENT QUARTER RECORDS

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

4

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
------------------------------------------------------

LOCATION
-------**
#
**
**
#
**
**
#
**
**
#
**
**
#
**
**
#
**
#

RECORDS WITH VALID COUNTY CODES (EXCL 000, 900, 995-999)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
RECORDS WITH COUNTY CODE 995/999 COMBINED
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
RECORDS WITH COUNTY CODE 995 (STATEWIDE/MULTI-COUNTY)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
RECORDS WITH COUNTY CODE 996 (FOREIGN)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
RECRDS WITH COUNTY CODE 998 (OUT OF STATE)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
RECORDS WITH COUNTY CODE 999 (UNKNOWN)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
RECORDS WITH MEEI 2 AND COUNTY CODE 900 (MASTER)

105,184
1,732,751
10,881
67,557
546
17,210
1
17
3
2
10,335
50,347
329

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

90.62
96.24
9.37
3.75
0.47
0.95
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
8.90
2.79
0.28

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

103,870
1,749,863
10,531
61,150
512
10,423
1
18
2
2
10,019
50,727
310

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1.26
-0.97
3.32
10.47
6.64
65.11
0.00
-5.55
50.00
0.00
3.15
-0.74
6.12

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

OWNERSHIP
--------**
#
**
**
#
**
**
#
**
**
#
**

RECORDS WITH OWNERSHIP
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
RECORDS WITH OWNERSHIP
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
RECORDS WITH OWNERSHIP
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
RECORDS WITH OWNERSHIP
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

654
28,350
850
89,338
1,775
204,856
112,790
1,477,783

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.56
1.57
0.73
4.96
1.52
11.37
97.17
82.08

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

646
28,200
850
89,338
1,784
203,681
111,124
1,489,814

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1.23
0.53
0.00
0.00
-0.50
0.57
1.49
-0.80

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

116,819
0
582
685
0
874
2
1,850
8
113,410
572
1
1

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

99.50
0.00
0.49
100.00
0.00
99.77
0.22
99.56
0.43
99.49
0.50
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

115,173
0
561
676
0
874
2
1,860
8
111,763
551
4
3

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1.42

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1 (FEDERAL GOVERNMENT)
2 (STATE GOVERNMENT)
3 (LOCAL GOVERNMENT)
5 (PRIVATE INDUSTRY)

EI ACCOUNT NUMBER
----------------# RECORDS WITH USABLE EIN
# RECORDS WITH UNUSABLE EIN
# RECORDS WITH ZERO-FILLED (UNKNOWN) EIN
*
# FEDERAL GOVT (OWNERSHIP 1) RECS WITH USABLE EIN
*
# FEDERAL GOVT RECS WITH ZERO-FILLED EIN
*
# STATE GOVT (OWN 2) RECS WITH USABLE EIN
*
# STATE GOVT RECS WITH ZERO-FILLED EIN
*
# LOCAL GOVT (OWN 3) RECS WITH USABLE EIN
*
# LOCAL GOVT RECS WITH ZERO-FILLED EIN
*
# PRIVATE (OWN 5) RECS WITH USABLE EIN
*
# PRIVATE RECS WITH ZERO-FILLED EIN
*
# PRIVATE RECS WITH ZERO-FILLED EIN AND MONTH 3 EMP 25 TO 50
*
# PRIVATE RECS WITH ZERO-FILLED EIN AND MONTH 3 EMP > 50
--------------* PERCENTAGES ARE BASED ON TOTAL FOR RESPECTIVE OWNERSHIPS
** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
OTHER COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE ALL ACTIVE CURRENT QUARTER RECORDS

3.74
1.33
0.00
0.00
-0.53
0.00
1.47
3.81
-75.00
-66.66

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

AUXILIARY
--------**
# RECORDS WITH AUXILIARY CODE 0 (UNKNOWN)
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH AUX CODE 5 (NOT AN AUXILIARY UNIT)
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH AUX CODE 8 (AUXILIARY UNIT)
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
DATES
-----

#
#
#
#
#
#

RECORDS
RECORDS
RECORDS
RECORDS
RECORDS
RECORDS

WITH
WITH
WITH
WITH
WITH
WITH

VALID SETUP DATE
VALID INITIAL LIABILITY DATE
VALID END OF LIABILITY (EOL) DATE
VALID REACTIVATION DATE
REACTIVATION DATE LATER THAN EOL DATE
EOL DATE LATER THAN REACTIVATION DATE

ARS YEAR 2005 AND RESPONSE CODES
-------------------------------# RECS WITH CURRENT ARS YEAR = 2005 & NUMERIC RESPONSE CODE
# RECS WITH RC 41 (NO CCS CHANGES)
# RECS WITH RC 42 (INCORRECT/CORRECT)
# RECS WITH RC 46 (ARS CCS CHANGE)
# RECS WITH RC 50 (NON-ARS CCS CHANGE)
# RECS WITH RC 63 (PO RETURN)
# RECS WITH RC 64 (OUT OF BUSINESS)
# RECS WITH RC 65 (REFUSAL)
# RECS WITH RC 76 (CCS, NSTA SYSTEM-ASSIGNED)
# RECS WITH RC 77 (NSTA SYSTEM-ASSIGNED)
# RECS WITH RC 98 (CARRYOVER OOB)
CES INDICATOR
------------**
# RECORDS WITH CES INDICATOR C (ON CES REGISTRY)
# RECS WITH CES INDICATOR INVALID (RESET TO BLANK)
--------------** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
OTHER COUNT AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE ALL ACTIVE CURRENT QUARTER RECORDS

PAGE

5

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------1
121
115,777
1,785,718
291
14,488

|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
99.74
99.18
0.25
0.80

|
|
|
|
|
|

0
0
114,151
1,797,307
253
13,726

|
|
|
|
|
|

1.42
-0.64
15.01
5.55

|
|
|
|
|
|

108,323
117,401
4,531
9,009
3,659
60

|
|
|
|
|
|

92.26
100.00
3.85
7.67
3.11
0.05

|
|
|
|
|
|

106,455
115,734
4,938
8,842
3,423
122

|
|
|
|
|
|

1.75
1.44
-8.24
1.88
6.89
-50.81

|
|
|
|
|
|

33,242
21,986
468
2,351
427
286
159
373
0
0
2,014

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

28.31
18.72
0.39
2.00
0.36
0.24
0.13
0.31
0.00
0.00
1.71

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

33,598
22,227
445
2,961
302
348
159
423
0
0
3,229

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-1.05
-1.08
5.16
-20.60
41.39
-17.81
0.00
-11.82
0.00
0.00
-37.62

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

6,401 |
0 |

-1.35

|
|

6,314 |
0 |

5.43 |
0.00 |

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

DATA SOURCE
----------**
# RECORDS WITH DATA SOURCE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH DATA SOURCE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH DATA SOURCE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH DATA SOURCE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH DATA SOURCE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH DATA SOURCE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH DATA SOURCE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH DATA SOURCE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

= C (LOADED USING EDI JOB)
= E (NORMALLY COLLECTED BY EDI CTR)
= Q (STATE QCR WEB COLLECTION)
= R (REGISTERED TO REPORT VIA MWR WEB)
= S (STATE MAGNETIC MEDIA)
= W (MWR WEB COLLECTION)
= X (FUTURE USE)
= BLANK (OTHER)

REPORTING CHANGE INDICATOR
-------------------------****
# RECORDS WITH RCI = 1 (CHANGE IN REPORTING)
****
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
****
# RECORDS WITH RCI = 0 (UNKNOWN, OR NO CHANGE)
****
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH RCI INVALID (WILL SET TO 0)

RECORDS
RECORDS
RECORDS
RECORDS

WITH
WITH
WITH
WITH

6

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------2,765
79,059
335
4,528
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
112,969
1,716,740

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

2.38
4.39
0.28
0.25
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
97.32
95.35

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

2,610
74,582
293
4,901
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
111,501
1,731,550

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

5.93
6.00
14.33
-7.61

2
40
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|

2
31
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|

0.00
29.03

0
0
100,276
1,799,908
0

|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
100.00
100.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|

0
0
98,714
1,811,031
0

|
|
|
|
|

721
123
8
123

|
|
|
|

0.61
0.10
0.00
0.10

|
|
|
|

719
48
2
38

|
|
|
|

SPECIAL INDICATOR
----------------**
# RECORDS WITH INDICATOR = T (TRIBAL COUNCIL)
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECORDS WITH INDICATOR = L (STAFF IS LEASED)
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH INDICATOR INVALID (WILL BE SET TO BLANK)

COMMENTS
-------#
#
#
#

PAGE

ONE COMMENT CODE ONLY
TWO COMMENT CODES ONLY
THREE COMMENT CODES ONLY
NARRATIVE COMMENT & COMMENT CODE(S)

AGENT CODE
---------****
# RECORDS WITH NON-BLANK AGENT CODES
****
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
--------------**
COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
**** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE SINGLES AND MASTERS ONLY (MEEI = 1, 2, 4, & 6)
OTHER COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE ALL ACTIVE CURRENT QUARTER RECORDS

0 |
0 |

0.00 |
0.00 |

0 |
0 |

1.31
-0.85

1.58
-0.61

0.27
156.25
300.00
223.68

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|

|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

WITH
WITH
WITH
WITH

ZERO
ZERO
ZERO
ZERO

EMPLOYMENT
EMPLOYMENT
EMPLOYMENT
EMPLOYMENT

ALL 3
- 1ST
- 2ND
- 3RD

7

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
------------------------------------------------------

SECTION 3 - EMPLOYMENT AND WAGE INFORMATION
RECORDS
RECORDS
RECORDS
RECORDS

PAGE

**
**
**
**

#
#
#
#

MONTHS
MONTH
MONTH
MONTH

13,252
16,147
15,751
16,113

**
**

# RECORDS WITH ZERO WAGES
# RECS WITH ZERO WAGES AND ZERO EMPLOYMENT ALL 3 MONTH

|
|
|
|

11.41
13.91
13.57
13.88

12,156 |
11,964 |

|
|
|
|

10.47 |
10.30 |

11,820
14,329
14,477
14,233

|
|
|
|

12.11
12.68
8.80
13.20

|
|
|
|

10,730 |
10,534 |

13.28
13.57

|
|

SUMMARY OF THE EMPLOYMENT AND WAGES INDICATORS
---------------------------------------------EMPLOYMENT INDICATORS
--------------------**
# RECS WITH REPORTED DATA - R OR BLANK,C,D,L
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH IMPUTED DATA - A,E,H,W
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH MISSING DATA - M,N
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH PRORATED DATA - P
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
WAGES INDICATORS
---------------**
# RECS WITH
**
TOTAL
**
# RECS WITH
**
TOTAL
**
# RECS WITH
**
TOTAL
**
# RECS WITH
**
TOTAL

REPORTED DATA - R OR BLANK,C,L
WAGES
IMPUTED DATA - E,H,W
WAGES
MISSING DATA - M,N
WAGES
PRORATED DATA - P
WAGES

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

79.61
88.03
7.69
1.88
9.07
0.00
3.61
10.08

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

93,972
1,595,592
6,586
32,841
9,525
0
4,321
182,600

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-1.66
-0.67
35.57
3.19
10.62
0.00
-2.91
-0.56

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

93,648
12,448,145,927
7,501
171,944,671
10,448
0
4,472
1,580,693,720

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

80.68
87.65
6.46
1.21
9.00
0.00
3.85
11.13

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

94,718
13,571,827,171
5,562
137,985,437
9,406
0
4,718
1,685,382,592

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-1.12
-8.27
34.86
24.61
11.07
0.00
-5.21
-6.21

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
------------------------------------------------------

EMPLOYMENT INDICATORS - ALL OWNERSHIPS:
--------------------------------------1ST MONTH:
**
# RECS WITH R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH A - DATA ESTIMATED FROM ACES
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
--------------** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI

92,408
1,584,864
8,929
33,889
10,537
0
4,195
181,574

90,454
1,545,168
2
1,043
1,903
38,433
= 2)

|
|
|
|
|
|

77.93
85.82
0.00
0.05
1.63
2.13

|
|
|
|
|
|

91,896
1,554,312
2
1,161
2,068
40,747

|
|
|
|
|
|

-1.56
-0.58
0.00
-10.16
-7.97
-5.67

|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
***
***
**
**
**
**

# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH

D
3
E
3
H
3
L
3
M
3
N
3
P
3
S
3
W
3
X
3

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

- DATA REPORTED FROM MISSING DATA NOTICE
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA HAND-IMPUTED
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA REPORTED LATE
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA MISSING
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
EMPLOYMENT

PAGE

8

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
8,935 |
7.69 |
6,587 |
35.64
|
33,040 |
1.83 |
31,747 |
4.07
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
10,571 |
9.10 |
9,528 |
10.94
|
1,043 |
0.05 |
498 |
109.43
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
4,204 |
3.62 |
4,323 |
-2.75
|
181,600 |
10.08 |
182,568 |
-0.53
|
1 |
0.07 |
0 |
|
953 |
0.16 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|

2ND MONTH:
**
# RECS WITH R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH A - DATA ESTIMATED FROM ACES
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH D - DATA REPORTED FROM MISSING DATA NOTICE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH H - DATA HAND-IMPUTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH L - DATA REPORTED LATE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH M - DATA MISSING
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH N - DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH P - DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECS WITH S - DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH W - DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
--------------** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
OTHER COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE ALL ACTIVE CURRENT QUARTER RECORDS
*** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE MASTER RECORDS ONLY

90,467
1,554,119
2
1,043
1,932
30,499
0
0
8,934
33,028
0
0
0
0
10,534
64
0
0
4,200
181,574
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

77.94
86.32
0.00
0.05
1.66
1.69
0.00
0.00
7.69
1.83
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
9.07
0.00
0.00
0.00
3.61
10.08
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

91,917
1,553,335
2
1,161
2,055
41,910
0
0
6,584
31,672
0
0
0
0
9,522
387
0
0
4,324
182,568
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-1.57
0.05
0.00
-10.16
-5.98
-27.22
35.69
4.28

10.62
-83.46
-2.86
-0.54

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

**
**

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

# RECS WITH X - DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

3RD MONTH:
**
# RECS WITH R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH A - DATA ESTIMATED FROM ACES
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH D - DATA REPORTED FROM MISSING DATA NOTICE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH H - DATA HAND-IMPUTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH L - DATA REPORTED LATE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH M - DATA MISSING
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH N - DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH P - DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECS WITH S - DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
**
**
**

# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH

W
3
X
3

- DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
EMPLOYMENT

PAGE

9

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
90,389
1,546,929
2
1,043
2,019
37,935
0
0
8,927
32,846
0
0
0
0
10,537
0
0
0
4,195
181,574
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

77.87
85.92
0.00
0.05
1.73
2.10
0.00
0.00
7.69
1.82
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
9.07
0.00
0.00
0.00
3.61
10.08
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

91,880
1,553,499
2
1,161
2,092
42,093
0
0
6,584
31,680
0
0
0
0
9,525
0
0
0
4,321
182,600
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|

0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|

512
26,501
0
0
0
0
0
0
4

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

78.28
93.47
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.61

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

501
26,518
0
0
1
379
0
0
15

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-1.62
-0.42
0.00
-10.16
-3.48
-9.87
35.58
3.68

10.62

-2.91
-0.56

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

* EMPLOYMENT INDICATORS - FEDERAL OWNERSHIP (OWN 1)
------------------------------------------------3RD MONTH:
**
# RECS WITH R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH A - DATA ESTIMATED FROM ACES
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH D - DATA REPORTED FROM MISSING DATA NOTICE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
---------------* PERCENTAGES IN SECTION 3 ARE BASED ON TOTAL FOR RESPECTIVE OWNERSHIPS
** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
*** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE MASTER RECORDS ONLY

2.19
-0.06
-100.00
-100.00
-73.33

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
***
***
**
**
**
**

MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH

3
H
3
L
3
M
3
N
3
P
3
S
3
W
3
X
3

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

EMPLOYMENT
- DATA HAND-IMPUTED
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA REPORTED LATE
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA MISSING
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
EMPLOYMENT

PAGE

10

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------1,813 |
6.39 |
1,303 |
39.14
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
128 |
19.57 |
129 |
-0.77
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
10 |
1.52 |
0 |
|
36 |
0.12 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|

* EMPLOYMENT INDICATORS - STATE GOVERNMENT OWNERSHIP (OWN 2)
---------------------------------------------------------3RD MONTH:
**
# RECS WITH R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH A - DATA ESTIMATED FROM ACES
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH D - DATA REPORTED FROM MISSING DATA NOTICE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH H - DATA HAND-IMPUTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH L - DATA REPORTED LATE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH M - DATA MISSING
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH N - DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH P - DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECS WITH S - DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH W - DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
---------------* PERCENTAGES IN SECTION 3 ARE BASED ON TOTAL FOR RESPECTIVE OWNERSHIPS
** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
*** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE MASTER RECS ONLY

182
39,760
0
0
3
1,224
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
663
48,354
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

21.41
44.50
0.00
0.00
0.35
1.37
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.23
0.00
0.00
0.00
78.00
54.12
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

258
53,130
0
0
12
4,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
578
32,208
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-29.45
-25.16
-75.00
-69.40

0.00

14.70
50.13

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

**
**
**

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECS WITH X - DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

PAGE

11

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|

* EMPLOYMENT INDICATORS - LOCAL GOVERNMENT OWNERSHIP (OWN 3)
--------------------------------------------------------3RD MONTH:
**
# RECS WITH R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH A - DATA ESTIMATED FROM ACES
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH D - DATA REPORTED FROM MISSING DATA NOTICE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH H - DATA HAND-IMPUTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH L - DATA REPORTED LATE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH M - DATA MISSING
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH N - DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH P - DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECS WITH S - DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH W - DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH X - DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

1,532
181,084
0
0
15
2,278
0
0
12
1,586
0
0
0
0
11
0
0
0
205
19,908
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

86.30
88.39
0.00
0.00
0.84
1.11
0.00
0.00
0.67
0.77
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.61
0.00
0.00
0.00
11.54
9.71
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1,624
175,236
0
0
20
6,122
0
0
5
2,984
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
0
120
19,339
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

88,163
1,299,584
2
1,043
2,001
34,433
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

78.16
87.94
0.00
0.07
1.77
2.33
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

89,497
1,298,615
2
1,161
2,059
31,592
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-5.66
3.33
-25.00
-62.78
140.00
-46.84

-26.66

70.83
2.94

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

* EMPLOYMENT INDICATORS - PRIVATE OWNERSHIP (OWN 5)
------------------------------------------------3RD MONTH:
**
# RECS WITH R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH A - DATA ESTIMATED FROM ACES
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH D - DATA REPORTED FROM MISSING DATA NOTICE
---------------* PERCENTAGES IN SECTION 3 ARE BASED ON TOTAL FOR RESPECTIVE OWNERSHIPS
** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
*** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE MASTER RECORDS ONLY

-1.49
0.07
0.00
-10.16
-2.81
8.99

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
***
***
**
**
**
**

MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH

3
E
3
H
3
L
3
M
3
N
3
P
3
S
3
W
3
X
3

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

EMPLOYMENT
- DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA HAND-IMPUTED
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA REPORTED LATE
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA MISSING
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
EMPLOYMENT
- DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
EMPLOYMENT

TOTAL WAGES INDICATORS - ALL OWNERSHIP
--------------------------------------**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
***
***
**
**
**
**

# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL

R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
WAGES
C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
WAGES
E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
WAGES
H - DATA HAND-IMPUTED
WAGES
L - DATA REPORTED LATE
WAGES
M - DATA MISSING
WAGES
N - DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
WAGES
P - DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
WAGES
S - DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
WAGES
W - DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
WAGES
X - DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
WAGES

---------------** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
*** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE MASTER RECORDS ONLY

PAGE

12

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
8,911 |
7.90 |
6,564 |
35.75
|
29,447 |
1.99 |
27,393 |
7.49
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
10,396 |
9.21 |
9,379 |
10.84
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
3,317 |
2.94 |
3,623 |
-8.44
|
113,276 |
7.66 |
131,053 |
-13.56
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
CURRENT |%OF CURR|
PREV.QTR
|
|
QTR TOT |QTR TOT |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
------------------------------------------------------

93,442
12,406,502,555
206
41,643,372
7,501
171,944,671
0
0
0
0
10,447
0
1
0
4,472
1,580,693,720
1
219,620
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

80.50
87.36
0.17
0.29
6.46
1.21
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
9.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
3.85
11.13
0.07
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

94,360
13,467,151,762
358
104,675,409
5,562
137,985,437
0
0
0
0
9,406
0
0
0
4,718
1,685,382,592
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-0.97
-7.87
-42.45
-60.21
34.86
24.61

11.06

-5.21
-6.21

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

* TOTAL WAGES INDICATORS - FEDERAL OWNERSHIPS (OWN 1)
------------------------------------------------------**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
***
***
**
**
**
**

# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL

R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
WAGES
C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
WAGES
E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
WAGES
H - DATA HAND-IMPUTED
WAGES
L - DATA REPORTED LATE
WAGES
M - DATA MISSING
WAGES
N - DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
WAGES
P - DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
WAGES
S - DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
WAGES
W - DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
WAGES
X - DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
WAGES

PAGE

13

CURRENT |%OF CURR|
PREV.QTR
|
|
QTR TOT |QTR TOT |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
------------------------------------------------------

512
334,019,818
0
0
4
31,826,786
0
0
0
0
128
0
0
0
10
499,071
1
219,620
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

78.28
91.17
0.00
0.00
0.61
8.68
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
19.57
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.52
0.13
3.22
0.07
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

501
340,521,849
0
0
16
17,083,304
0
0
0
0
129
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

185
367,863,577
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
663
406,505,324
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

21.76
47.50
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.23
0.00
0.00
0.00
78.00
52.49
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

259
501,214,072
11
27,824,682
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
578
253,960,496
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

2.19
-1.90
-75.00
86.30

-0.77

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

* TOTAL WAGES INDICATORS - STATE GOVERNMENT OWNERSHIP
(OWN 2)
----------------------------------------------------------**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
***
***

# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL

R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
WAGES
C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
WAGES
E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
WAGES
H - DATA HAND-IMPUTED
WAGES
L - DATA REPORTED LATE
WAGES
M - DATA MISSING
WAGES
N - DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
WAGES
P - DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
WAGES
S - DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
WAGES

---------------* PERCENTAGES IN SECTION 3 ARE BASED ON TOTAL FOR RESPECTIVE OWNERSHIPS
** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
*** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE MASTER RECORDS ONLY

-28.57
-26.60
-100.00
-100.00

0.00

14.70
60.06

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

**
**
**
**

# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

14

CURRENT |%OF CURR|
PREV.QTR
|
|
QTR TOT |QTR TOT |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|

W - DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
WAGES
X - DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
WAGES

* TOTAL WAGES INDICATORS - LOCAL GOVERNMENT OWNERSHIP
(OWN 3)
----------------------------------------------------------**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
***
***
**
**
**
**

# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL

R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
WAGES
C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
WAGES
E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
WAGES
H - DATA HAND-IMPUTED
WAGES
L - DATA REPORTED LATE
WAGES
M - DATA MISSING
WAGES
N - DATA ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
WAGES
P - DATA PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
WAGES
S - DATA FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
WAGES
W - DATA IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
WAGES
X - DATA SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION
WAGES

1,550
1,356,341,647
0
0
10
16,607,514
0
0
0
0
10
0
0
0
205
165,748,000
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

87.32
88.14
0.00
0.00
0.56
1.07
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.56
0.00
0.00
0.00
11.54
10.77
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1,646
1,462,077,234
0
0
5
21,398,998
0
0
0
0
14
0
0
0
119
177,111,500
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

91,195
10,348,277,513
206
41,643,372
7,487
123,510,371
0
0
0
0
10,307
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

80.85
89.81
0.18
0.36
6.63
1.07
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
9.13
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

91,954
11,163,338,607
347
76,850,727
5,541
99,503,135
0
0
0
0
9,261
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-5.83
-7.23
100.00
-22.39

-28.57

72.26
-6.41

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

* TOTAL WAGES INDICATORS - PRIVATE OWNERSHIP (OWN 5)
-----------------------------------------------------**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**

# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL

R OR BLANK - DATA REPORTED
WAGES
C - DATA CHANGED / RE-REPORTED
WAGES
E - DATA IMPUTED/PRORATED FR IMPUTED MASTER
WAGES
H - DATA HAND-IMPUTED
WAGES
L - DATA REPORTED LATE
WAGES
M - DATA MISSING
WAGES

---------------* PERCENTAGES IN SECTION 3 ARE BASED ON TOTAL FOR RESPECTIVE OWNERSHIPS
** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
*** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE MASTER RECORDS ONLY

-0.82
-7.30
-40.63
-45.81
35.12
24.12

11.29

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

**
**
**
**
***
***
**
**
**
**

# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL
# RECS WITH
TOTAL

06:06:06 PM

N - DATA
WAGES
P - DATA
WAGES
S - DATA
WAGES
W - DATA
WAGES
X - DATA
WAGES

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

ZERO PENDING RESOLUTION OF DELINQUENT
PRORATED FROM REPORTED MASTER
FOR MASTER SUMMED FROM WORKSITES
IMPUTED FROM WAGE RECORDS
SET TO 0 PENDING FURTHER ACTION

**
**

# RECS WITH ALL 3 MOS EMPL IMP/MISS/PRO BUT WAGES REP
# RECS WITH ALL 3 MOS EMPL IMP/MISS/PRO AND WAGES IMP/MISS/PRO

**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**

#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#

**
**
**
**

# RECS WITH EMPL/WAGES EQUAL/UNCHANGED FOR 7 QTRS
#
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECS WITH EMPL/WAGES IMPUTED, NEW BIRTHS
#
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

RECS WITH
MONTH
RECS WITH
MONTH
RECS WITH
MONTH
RECS WITH
MONTH

EMPL/WAGES IMPUTED
3 EMPLOYMENT
EMPL/WAGES IMPUTED
3 EMPLOYMENT
EMPL/WAGES IMPUTED
3 EMPLOYMENT
EMPL/WAGES IMPUTED
3 EMPLOYMENT

FOR LAST 4 QTRS
FOR LAST 5 QTRS
FOR LAST 6 QTRS
FOR LAST 7 QTRS

SECTION 4 - ADDRESSES AND RELATED FIELDS

COUNTS OF NON-BLANK ADDRESS LINES:
---------------------------------TRADE NAME ONLY
LEGAL NAME ONLY
BOTH TRADE AND LEGAL NAMES
# RECS WITH NON-BLANK, NON-ZERO TELEPHONE NUMBERS
**
# RECS WITH NON-BLANK, NON-ZERO FAX NUMBERS

PAGE

15

CURRENT |%OF CURR|
PREV.QTR
|
|
QTR TOT |QTR TOT |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------1 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
3,594 |
3.18 |
4,021 |
-10.61 |
1,007,941,325 |
8.74 |
1,254,310,596 |
-19.64 |
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
0 |
0.00 |
0 |
|
1,638 |
22,014 |

1.41 |
18.96 |

1,227 |
19,188 |

33.49
14.72

|
|

2
322
2
322
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.01
0.00
0.01
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

2
284
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
13.38
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

5,074
2,128
0
0

|
|
|
|

4.37
0.11
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|

4,610
2,338
0
0

|
|
|
|

10.06
-8.98
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
|

0.01
3.95
96.03
93.71
21.43

|
|
|
|
|

5
4,772
110,957
108,376
22,482

|
|
|
|
|

140.00
-2.78
1.61
1.51
10.67

|
|
|
|
|

# RECS WITH VALID PHYSICAL LOCATION BLOCK
80,755 |
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
1,556,122 |
# RECS WITH VALID UI ADDRESS BLOCK
101,320 |
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
1,263,960 |
# RECS WITH VALID MAILING/OTHER BLOCK
19,627 |
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
471,645 |
--------------** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECS: MEEI=2
*** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE MASTER RECORDS ONLY
OTHER COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE ALL ACTIVE CURRRENT QUARTER RECORDS

69.57
86.43
86.30
70.20
16.71
26.19

|
|
|
|
|
|

81,008
1,573,169
99,758
1,256,681
19,357
465,682

|
|
|
|
|
|

-0.31
-1.08
1.56
0.57
1.39
1.28

|
|
|
|
|
|

**
**

12
4,639
112,750
110,022
24,883

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

16

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------PHYSICAL LOCATION ADDRESS:
-------------------------**
STREET ADDRESS LINE 1
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
STREET ADDRESS LINE 2
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
CITY
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
STATE ABBREVIATION
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

81,053
1,559,120
5,385
88,174
80,826
1,557,779
80,787
1,557,628

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

69.83
86.60
4.63
4.89
69.63
86.52
69.60
86.51

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

81,324
1,576,429
5,037
88,279
81,082
1,574,870
81,043
1,574,728

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-0.33
-1.09
6.90
-0.11
-0.31
-1.08
-0.31
-1.08

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

80,955
1,558,302
2,059
65,736

|
|
|
|

69.74
86.55
1.77
3.65

|
|
|
|

81,216
1,575,533
1,854
65,100

|
|
|
|

-0.32
-1.09
11.05
0.97

|
|
|
|

0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

UI ADDRESS:
----------STREET ADDRESS LINE 1
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
STREET ADDRESS LINE 2
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

101,352
1,263,549
9
325

|
|
|
|

86.32
70.18
0.00
0.01

|
|
|
|

99,793
1,256,293
9
352

CITY
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
STATE ABBREVIATION
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

101,329
1,264,304
101,296
1,263,935

|
|
|
|

86.31
70.22
86.28
70.20

|
|
|
|

ZIP CODE (NUMERIC AND > 0)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
ZIP CODE EXPANSION (NUMERIC AND > 0)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

101,296
1,263,935
6
164

|
|
|
|

86.28
70.20
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|

**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**

ZIP CODE (NUMERIC AND > 0)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
ZIP CODE EXPANSION (NUMERIC AND > 0)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH
# RECS WITH
MONTH

PL STATE ABBREVIATION "ZZ" (OUT OF COUNTRY)
3 EMPLOYMENT
PL STATE ABBREVIATION "CN" (CANADA)
3 EMPLOYMENT
PL STATE ABBREV "AE","AA" OR "AP" (MILITARY P.O.)
3 EMPLOYMENT

--------------** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEE= 2)
OTHER COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE ALL ACTIVE CUENT QUARTER RECORDS

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)

0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|

1.56
0.57
0.00
-7.67

|
|
|
|

99,767
1,257,020
99,734
1,256,655

|
|
|
|

1.56
0.57
1.56
0.57

|
|
|
|

99,734
1,256,655
6
166

|
|
|
|

1.56
0.57
0.00
-1.20

|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00

DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

17

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------MAILING/OTHER ADDRESS:
---------------------STREET ADDRESS LINE 1
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
STREET ADDRESS LINE 2
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
CITY
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
STATE ABBREVIATION
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
ZIP CODE (NUMERIC AND > 0)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
ZIP CODE EXPANSION (NUMERIC AND > 0)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

19,664
472,324
1,974
30,231
19,640
471,995
19,617
471,637
19,628
471,898
3,511
95,931

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

16.74
26.23
1.68
1.67
16.72
26.21
16.70
26.19
16.71
26.21
2.99
5.32

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

19,396
466,374
1,842
27,874
19,369
466,045
19,347
465,673
19,359
465,987
3,333
92,502

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

ADDRESS TYPE:
------------UI ADDRESS TYPE:
1 - PHYSICAL LOCATION
2 - MAILING ADDRESS
3 - CORPORATE HQ OR CENTRAL OFFICE
9 - UNKNOWN

0
0
0
113,818

|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
96.94

|
|
|
|

0
0
0
112,487

3,357
18
1
14,699

|
|
|
|

2.85
0.01
0.00
12.52

|
|
|
|

3,202
17
1
14,586

MAILING/OTHER
1 2 3 9 -

ADDRESS TYPE:
PHYSICAL LOCATION
MAILING ADDRESS
CORPORATE HQ OR CENTRAL OFFICE
UI TAX ADDRESS OR UNKNOWN

# RECS WITH PL ADDRESS IDENTICAL TO UI OR M/O ADDRESS
REPORTING UNIT DESCRIPTION
-------------------------# RECS WITH REPORTING UNIT DESCRIPTION NOT ALL BLANKS
***** # RECS WITH RUD AND MEEI 1
***** # RECS WITH RUD AND MEEI 2
***** # RECS WITH RUD AND MEEI 4 OR 6
***** # RECS WITH RUD AND MEEI 3 OR 5
***** # RECS WITH MEEI 3 OR 5 WITH BLANK RUD & A BLANK PL ADDRESS
# RECS WITH RUD ZEROES (WILL BE SET TO BLANK)
--------------***** PERCENTAGES ARE BASED ON TOTAL FOR RESPECTIVE MEEI CODE
OTHER COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES INCLUDE ALL ACTIVE CURRENT QUARTER RECORDS

1.38
1.27
7.16
8.45
1.39
1.27
1.39
1.28
1.38
1.26
5.34
3.70

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|

1.18

|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|

4.84
5.88
0.00
0.77

|
|
|
|

20,371 |

17.35 |

20,557 |

-0.90

|

14,004
113
35
1
13,855
192
0

11.92
0.11
2.62
0.75
80.90
1.12
0.00

13,947
114
35
1
13,797
188
0

0.40
-0.87
0.00
0.00
0.42
2.12

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

SECTION 5 - SUMMARY COUNTS OF CONTINUING UNITS
****
****

# TOTAL CONTINUOUS UNIT RECORDS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

MEEI CHANGES
-----------# RECORDS CHANGING MEEI CODE FROM PREV QTR
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS CHANGING FROM MEEI 1, 4 OR 6 TO 2
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS CHANGING FROM MEEI 2 TO 1, 4 OR 6
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS CHANGING FROM MEEI 3 TO 5
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS CHANGING FROM MEEI 5 TO 3
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# MASTER RECORDS WITH REPORTING CHANGE INDICATOR = 1
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# NON-MASTER RECORDS WITH REPORTING CHANGE INDICATOR = 1
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

PAGE

18

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------112,998 |
1,762,725 |

96.24 |
97.91 |

112,614 |
1,786,970 |

0.34
-1.35

|
|

41
16,353
15
2,278
17
12,761
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.03
0.92
0.01
0.12
0.01
0.72
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

19
6,908
7
1,864
8
782
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

115.78
136.72
114.28
22.21
112.50
1531.84

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

2,035
54
0
2,304
3

|
|
|
|
|

1.82
0.04
0.00
2.06
0.00

|
|
|
|
|

2
4
2
3,167
2

|
|
|
|
|

1650.00
1250.00
-100.00
-27.24
50.00

|
|
|
|
|

0
0
97
28,321
1,101

|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.08
25.35
0.98

|
|
|
|
|

0
0
4
26,355
1,058

|
|
|
|
|

2325.00
7.45
4.06

|
|
|
|
|

NAICS
-------**
**
**
**
**

#
#
#
#
#

RECS
RECS
RECS
RECS
RECS

CHGD
CHGD
CHGD
WITH
WITH

BTWN VALID NAICS CODES (EXCL 999999)
FROM NAICS 999999 TO A VALID NAICS
BTWN VALID NAICS TO NAICS 999999
NAICS 999999 FOR CURRENT & PREV QTS
NAICS 999999 FOR CUR & PREV QTR, EMPL > 25

SIC
--**
**
**
**
**

#
#
#
#
#

RECS
RECS
RECS
RECS
RECS

CHGD
CHGD
CHGD
WITH
WITH

FROM VALID SIC TO ANOTHER VALID SIC (EXCL 9999)
FROM SIC 9999 TO A VALID SIC
FROM VALID SIC TO SIC 9999
SIC 9999 FOR CURRENT & PREV QTR
SIC 9999 FOR CURRENT & PREV QTR, EMPL > 25

--------------OTHER PERCENTAGES IN SECTION 5 BASED ON CONTINUOUS RECORDS
**
COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
**** PERCENTAGES BASED ON ALL ACTIVE CURRENT QUARTER RECORDS

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

19

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
------------------------------------------------------

COUNTY CODE
----------**
# RECS
**
# RECS
**
# RECS
**
# RECS
**
# RECS
**
# RECS
**
# RECS

CHGD
CHGD
CHGD
CHGD
CHGD
WITH
WITH

FROM VALID COUNTY TO ANOTHER VALID COUNTY
FROM A VALID CODE TO 999
FROM 999 TO A VALID CODE
FROM VALID COUNTY TO 995, 996 OR 998
FROM 995, 996 OR 998 TO VALID COUNTY
COUNTY 999 FOR CURRENT & PREV QTR
COUNTY 999 FOR CURRENT & PREV QTR, EMP > 25

AUXILIARY CODE
-------------**
# RECS
**
# RECS
**
# RECS
**
# RECS
**
# RECS
**
# RECS

CHGD
CHGD
CHGD
CHGD
CHGD
CHGD

FROM
FROM
FROM
FROM
FROM
FROM

AUXILIARY CODE 0 TO AUX CODE 5
AUX CODE 0 TO VALID AUX CODE 8
AUX CODE 5 TO AUX CODE 0
AUX CODE 5 TO VALID AUX CODE 8
AUX CODE 8 TO AUX CODE 0
AUX CODE 8 TO AUX CODE 5

CODE CHANGES (INCLUDING ECONOMIC CODE CHANGES)
---------------------------------------------**
# RECS WITH NAICS CHANGE ONLY (FROM PREVIOUS QUARTER)
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH LOCATION CHANGE ONLY
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH OWNERSHIP CHANGE ONLY
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH NAICS & LOCATION CHANGE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH NAICS & OWNERSHIP CHANGE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH LOCATION & OWNERSHIP CHANGE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# RECS WITH NAICS, LOCATION & OWNERSHIP CHANGE
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
----------------** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
OTHER PERCENTAGES IN SECTION 5 BASED ON CONTINUOUS RECORDS

822
22
74
22
3
9,550
308

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.73
0.01
0.06
0.01
0.00
8.55
0.27

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

51
34
7
0
0
9,165
306

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0
0
1
32
0
3

|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.02
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

1,906
38,349
785
19,754
0
0
181
3,044
1
24
0
0
1
33

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1.70
2.17
0.70
1.12
0.00
0.00
0.16
0.17
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

6
38
107
504
0
0
2
144
0
0
0
0
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1511.76
-35.29
957.14
4.20
0.65

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|
|

1666.66
818.42
633.64
3819.44
8950.00
2013.88

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

20

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------SECTION 6 - SUMMARY OF PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS BY SIZE CLASS, EXCLUDING MASTERS
ALL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS
-----------------------------*
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
*
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
*
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
*
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
*
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
*
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
**

# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

1000 OR MORE
500-999
250-499
100-249
50-99
20-49
10-19
5-9
1-4
0

# TOTAL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

ALL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS SUBUNIT
-----------------------------# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

1000 OR MORE
500-999
250-499
100-249
50-99

63
116,631
141
94,085
459
160,011
1,520
228,272
2,910
198,816

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.05
8.09
0.13
6.53
0.42
11.10
1.40
15.84
2.68
13.80

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

67
117,970
145
97,441
471
163,304
1,580
237,133
2,896
197,859

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-5.97
-1.13
-2.75
-3.44
-2.54
-2.01
-3.79
-3.73
0.48
0.48

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

8,379
252,794
12,250
165,529
19,172
126,960
48,319
97,408
15,193
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

7.72
17.54
11.30
11.49
17.68
8.81
44.57
6.76
14.01
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

8,599
261,079
12,477
168,203
19,323
127,807
48,913
98,685
13,565
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-2.55
-3.17
-1.81
-1.58
-0.78
-0.66
-1.21
-1.29
12.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

108,036 |
1,469,481 |

0.34
-1.97

|
|

-12.90
-15.60
-5.35
-5.38
-0.64
-0.90
-8.87
-9.70
1.00
0.92

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

108,406 |
1,440,506 |

27
42,967
53
36,315
154
55,243
503
74,060
1,005
68,718

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

96.11 |
97.47 |

42.85
36.84
37.58
38.59
33.55
34.52
33.09
32.44
34.53
34.56

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

--------------* PERCENTAGES BASED ON TOTAL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT
** PERCENTAGES BASED ON TOTAL PRIVATE RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT
OTHER PERCENTAGES BASED ON RESPECTIVE SIZE CLASS FOR ALL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT

31
50,911
56
38,382
155
55,750
552
82,024
995
68,089

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

21

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
*

10-19
5-9
1-4
0

# TOTAL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

NAICS 999999
--------------# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
*

20-49

1000 OR MORE
500-999
250-499
100-249
50-99
20-49
10-19
5-9
1-4
0

# TOTAL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

2,278
68,738
2,724
37,374
3,731
25,055
2,827
7,723
829
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

14,131 |
416,193 |

27.18
27.19
22.23
22.57
19.46
19.73
5.85
7.92
5.45
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

13.03 |
28.89 |

2,420
73,942
2,778
37,878
3,632
24,446
2,774
7,577
806
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-5.86
-7.03
-1.94
-1.33
2.72
2.49
1.91
1.92
2.85
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

14,199 |
438,999 |

-0.47
-5.19

|
|

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
64

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.03
0.03

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
117

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-50.00
-45.29

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

21
508
81
1,029
203
1,330
1,225
2,034
773
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.25
0.20
0.66
0.62
1.05
1.04
2.53
2.08
5.08
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

33
850
134
1,725
300
1,931
1,909
3,191
791
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-36.36
-40.23
-39.55
-40.34
-32.33
-31.12
-35.83
-36.25
-2.27
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

3,169 |
7,814 |

-27.29
-36.46

|
|

2,304 |
4,965 |

2.12 |
0.34 |

--------------* PERCENTAGES BASED ON TOTAL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT
OTHER PERCENTAGES BASED ON RESPECTIVE SIZE CLASS FOR ALL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

22

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------SIC 9999
-------# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
*

1000 OR MORE
500-999
250-499
100-249
50-99
20-49
10-19
5-9
1-4
0

# TOTAL RECS WITH SIC 9999
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

COUNTY 999
---------# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

1000 OR MORE
500-999
250-499
100-249
50-99

9
14,381
13
8,132
37
12,838
155
23,154
313
21,067

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

14.28
12.33
9.21
8.64
8.06
8.02
10.19
10.14
10.75
10.59

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

9
12,833
13
8,402
32
10,795
144
21,314
327
22,537

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
12.06
0.00
-3.21
15.62
18.92
7.63
8.63
-4.28
-6.52

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1,165
35,015
1,932
25,993
3,955
26,059
15,413
27,891
5,234
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

13.90
13.85
15.77
15.70
20.62
20.52
31.89
28.63
34.45
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1,081
32,179
1,862
24,759
3,699
24,251
14,699
26,658
4,316
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

7.77
8.81
3.75
4.98
6.92
7.45
4.85
4.62
21.26
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

7.80
5.87

|
|

0.00
-4.52
-50.00
-61.82
22.22
14.25
-10.63
-8.84
-3.00
-2.54

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

28,226 |
194,530 |

26.03 |
13.50 |

26,182 |
183,728 |

1
1,476
1
510
11
3,824
42
6,175
97
6,596

1.58
1.26
0.70
0.54
2.39
2.38
2.76
2.70
3.33
3.31

1
1,546
2
1,336
9
3,347
47
6,774
100
6,768

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

--------------* PERCENTAGES BASED ON TOTAL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT
OTHER PERCENTAGES BASED ON RESPECTIVE SIZE CLASS FOR ALL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

23

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
*

10-19
5-9
1-4
0

# TOTAL RECS WITH COUNTY 999
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

ZERO-FILLED EIN
--------------# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
*

20-49

1000 OR MORE
500-999
250-499
100-249
50-99

20-49
10-19
5-9
1-4
0

# TOTAL RECS WITH ZERO-FILLED EIN
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

333
9,959
489
6,665
731
4,772
5,013
7,770
2,851
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

9,569 |
47,747 |

3.97
3.93
3.99
4.02
3.81
3.75
10.37
7.97
18.76
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

8.82 |
3.31 |

334
10,004
453
6,136
676
4,455
4,976
7,726
2,612
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-0.29
-0.44
7.94
8.62
8.13
7.11
0.74
0.56
9.15
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

9,210 |
48,092 |

3.89
-0.71

|
|

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
86

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.03
0.04

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
102
2
143

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-100.00
-100.00
-50.00
-39.86

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

3
69
10
138
52
323
185
335
243
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.03
0.02
0.08
0.08
0.27
0.25
0.38
0.34
1.59
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

5
142
16
235
45
297
202
365
228
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-40.00
-51.40
-37.50
-41.27
15.55
8.75
-8.41
-8.21
6.57
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

499 |
1,284 |

-1.00
-25.93

|
|

494 |
951 |

0.45 |
0.06 |

--------------* PERCENTAGES BASED ON TOTAL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT
OTHER PERCENTAGES BASED ON RESPECTIVE SIZE CLASS FOR ALL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

24

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------VALID PHYSICAL LOCATION ADDRESS
------------------------------# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
*
*

1000 OR MORE
500-999
250-499
100-249
50-99
20-49
10-19
5-9
1-4
0

# TOTAL RECS WITH A VALID PL ADDRESS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

SUBUNITS (MEEI 3 OR 5) WITH REPORTING UNIT DESCRIPTIONS
------------------------------------------------------***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 1000 OR MORE
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 500-999
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 250-499
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 100-249
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 50-99
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

61
113,806
139
92,955
438
152,272
1,431
215,689
2,577
176,894

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

96.82
97.57
98.58
98.79
95.42
95.16
94.14
94.48
88.55
88.97

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

65
115,258
141
95,080
453
156,763
1,493
224,582
2,559
175,095

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-6.15
-1.25
-1.41
-2.23
-3.31
-2.86
-4.15
-3.95
0.70
1.02

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

7,194
217,071
10,142
137,279
15,332
101,791
32,581
69,016
8,238
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

85.85
85.86
82.79
82.93
79.97
80.17
67.42
70.85
54.22
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

7,381
224,801
10,386
140,422
15,469
102,574
33,112
70,263
7,354
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-2.53
-3.43
-2.34
-2.23
-0.88
-0.76
-1.60
-1.77
12.02
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

78,413 |
1,304,838 |

-0.35
-2.15

|
|

-9.52
-11.14
-11.11
-9.64
-0.85
-1.33
-11.03
-12.57
-1.38
-1.43

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

78,133 |
1,276,773 |

19
31,437
40
27,940
116
42,916
379
55,365
785
53,880

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

72.07 |
88.63 |

70.37
73.16
75.47
76.93
75.32
77.68
75.34
74.75
78.10
78.40

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

--------------* PERCENTAGES BASED ON TOTAL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT
*** PERCENTAGES BASED ON RESPECTIVE SIZE CLASS FOR PRIVATE CONTINUOUS SUBUNITS AND EMPLOYMENT
OTHER PERCENTAGES BASED ON RESPECTIVE SIZE CLASS FOR ALL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS RECORDS AND EMPLOYMENT

21
35,381
45
30,924
117
43,496
426
63,329
796
54,662

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

25

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
****
****

# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

20-49
10-19
5-9
1-4
0

# TOTAL SUBUNITS WITH RU DESCRIPTIONS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

SUBUNITS (MEEI 3 OR 5) WITH NO RUD NOR VALID PL ADDRESS
------------------------------------------------------***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 1000 OR MORE
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 500-999
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 250-499
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 100-249
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL 50-99
***
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
****
****

# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# RECORDS WITH MONTH 3 EMPL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

20-49
10-19
5-9
1-4
0

# TOTAL SUBUNITS WITH NO RUD NOR VALID PL ADDRESS
#
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

1,732
52,362
2,161
29,612
3,034
20,382
2,298
6,280
707
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

11,271 |
320,174 |

76.03
76.17
79.33
79.23
81.31
81.34
81.28
81.31
85.28
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

79.76 |
76.92 |

1,854
56,430
2,223
30,137
2,960
19,909
2,220
6,049
679
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-6.58
-7.20
-2.78
-1.74
2.50
2.37
3.51
3.81
4.12
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

11,341 |
340,317 |

-0.61
-5.91

|
|

0
0
0
0
2
726
2
338
14
955

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.29
1.31
0.39
0.45
1.39
1.38

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0
0
0
0
1
386
5
721
10
718

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
100.00
88.08
-60.00
-53.12
40.00
33.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

12
355
8
106
32
209
26
56
23
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

0.52
0.51
0.29
0.28
0.85
0.83
0.91
0.72
2.77
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

14
467
14
195
27
170
26
64
23
0

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

-14.28
-23.98
-42.85
-45.64
18.51
22.94
0.00
-12.50
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

120 |
2,721 |

-0.83
0.88

|
|

119 |
2,745 |

---------------*** PERCENTAGES BASED ON RESPECTIVE SIZE CLASS FOR PRIVATE CONTINUOUS SUBUNITS AND EMPLOYMENT
**** PERCENTAGES BASED ON TOTAL PRIVATE CONTINUOUS SUBSUNITS AND EMPLOYMENT

0.84 |
0.65 |

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

26

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
-----------------------------------------------------SECTION 7 - SUMMARY COUNTS OF NEW UNITS (NEW UI/RUNS)
****
****

# TOTAL NEW RECORDS
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

MULTI-ESTABLISHMENT EMPLOYER INDICATOR
-------------------------------------1 - NEW SINGLE UNITS
2 - NEW MULTI-UNIT MASTER RECORDS
3 - NEW SUB-UNIT RECORDS
4 - NEW MULTI-ESTAB EMPLOYER REPORTING AS A SINGLE UNIT
5 - NEW SUB-UNIT REPRESENTING A COMBINATION OF ESTABL
6 - NEW MULTIS REPORTING AS SINGLE UNIT (BELOW EMPL LEVEL)
NAICS
-------**
# NEW RECS WITH VALID NAICS (EXCLUDING 999999)
**
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
**
# NEW RECS WITH NAICS 999999

4,403 |
37,602 |

3,924
16
461
1
0
1

|
|
|
|
|
|

3.75 |
2.08 |

89.12
0.36
10.47
0.02
0.00
0.02

|
|
|
|
|
|

3,120 |
24,063 |

41.12
56.26

|
|

2,801
4
312
2
0
1

|
|
|
|
|
|

40.09
300.00
47.75
-50.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

2,955 |
33,229 |
1,432 |

67.35 |
88.37 |
32.64 |

2,222 |
21,674 |
894 |

32.98
53.31
60.17

|
|
|

# NEW RECS WITH VALID SICS (EXCLUDING 9999)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# NEW RECS WITH SIC 9999

307 |
6,137 |
4,080 |

6.99 |
16.32 |
93.00 |

299 |
8,083 |
2,817 |

2.67
-24.07
44.83

|
|
|

COUNTY CODE
----------**
# NEW RECS WITH VALID COUNTY CODES (EXCL 995 - 999)
**
# NEW RECS WITH COUNTY CODE 995, 996 OR 998
**
# NEW RECS WITH COUNTY CODE 999

3,611 |
15 |
761 |

82.31 |
0.34 |
17.34 |

2,297 |
15 |
804 |

57.20
0.00
-5.34

|
|
|

EI ACCOUNT NUMBER
----------------# NEW RECS WITH USABLE EIN
*
# NEW PRIVATE RECS WITH USABLE EIN
*
# NEW PRIVATE RECS WITH UNKNOWN EIN
*
# NEW PRIVATE RECS WITH UNUSABLE EIN

4,325
4,322
78
0

98.22
0.00
0.00
0.00

3,068
3,040
52
0

40.97
42.17
50.00

|
|
|
|

SIC
--**
**
**

---------------* PERCENTAGES ARE BASED ON TOTAL NEW PRIVATE RECORDS (OWN = 5)
** COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MASTER RECORDS (MEEI = 2)
**** PERCENTAGES ARE BASED ON ALL ACTIVE CURRENT QUARTER RECORDS
OTHER PERCENTAGES IN SECTION 6 BASED ON NEW RECS

|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|

EXHIBIT 13F (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EQUI DATA COUNTS - TABLE 3
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

SECTION 8 - GEOCODING COUNTS

PAGE

27

CURRENT | % OF CURR | PREV.QTR |
|
QTR TOT | TOTAL RECS |
TOTAL
|
% CHG
|
------------------------------------------------------

LOCATION CODE
------------# PRIVATE RECS WITH 100 OR MORE EMP, TOTAL
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

2,135 |
576,013 |

2.09 |
41.20 |

2,175 |
590,293 |

-1.83
-2.41

|
|

**
**
**
**

# PRIVATE RECS WITH 100 OR MORE EMP, LOC CODE = A OR Z
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# PRIVATE RECS WITH 100 OR MORE EMP, LOC CODE NOT A OR Z
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

1,936
535,634
199
40,379

|
|
|
|

90.67
92.98
9.32
7.01

|
|
|
|

2,017
551,064
158
39,229

|
|
|
|

-4.01
-2.80
25.94
2.93

|
|
|
|

**
**
**
**

# PRIVATE RECS WITH 100 OR MORE EMP, LOC CODE = A
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# PRIVATE RECS WITH 100 OR MORE EMP, LOC CODE = Z
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

1,601
431,995
335
103,639

|
|
|
|

74.98
74.99
15.69
17.99

|
|
|
|

1,658
445,392
359
105,672

|
|
|
|

-3.43
-3.00
-6.68
-1.92

|
|
|
|

# PRIVATE (OWN=5) RECS WITH LOC CODE = A (ROOFTOP)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# PRIVATE (OWN=5) RECS WITH LOC CODE = Z (ZIP CENTROID)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# PRIVATE (OWN=5) RECS WITH LOC CODE = A99 (STATE-DERIVED)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

65,731
1,016,460
9,062
192,293
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

64.52
72.71
8.89
13.75
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

64,566
1,026,295
8,935
194,438
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

1.80
-0.95
1.42
-1.10
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

# FEDERAL (OWN=1) RECS WITH LOC CODE = A (ROOFTOP)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# FEDERAL (OWN=1) RECS WITH LOC CODE = Z (ZIP CENTROID)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# FEDERAL (OWN=1) RECS WITH LOC CODE = A99 (STATE-DERIVED)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

82
4,461
40
358
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

12.59
15.73
6.14
1.26
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

83
4,536
38
349
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

-1.20
-1.65
5.26
2.57
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

# STATE GOVT (OWN=2) RECS WITH LOC CODE = A (ROOFTOP)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# STATE GOVT (OWN=2) RECS WITH LOC CODE = Z (ZIP CENTROID)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# STATE GOVT (OWN=2) RECS WITH LOC CODE = A99 (STATE-DERIVED)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

389
53,398
66
19,339
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

45.81
59.77
7.77
21.64
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

370
50,196
65
18,477
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

5.13
6.37
1.53
4.66
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

# LOCAL GOVT (OWN=3) RECS WITH LOC CODE = A (ROOFTOP)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# LOCAL GOVT (OWN=3) RECS WITH LOC CODE = Z (ZIP CENTROID)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
# LOCAL GOVT (OWN=3) RECS WITH LOC CODE = A99 (STATE-DERIVED)
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT

1,064
144,762
373
31,745
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

60.01
71.87
21.03
15.76
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

1,074
148,301
372
30,886
0
0

|
|
|
|
|
|

-0.93
-2.38
0.26
2.78
0.00
0.00

|
|
|
|
|
|

--------------COUNTS AND PERCENTAGES EXCLUDE MEEI = 2,4,5 AND COUNTY = 995,996,998,999
PERCENTAGES ARE BASED ON RESPECTIVE OWNERSHIPS
**
PERCENTAGES ARE BASED ON TOTAL PRIVATE RECS WITH 100 OR MORE EMP

EXHIBIT 13G
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN: YYYY/Q

06:06:00 AM

(STATE)
EIN MATRIX MAP - - TABLE 4A
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

1

FIELD POSITION
1

CHARACTER = 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ALPHABETIC
BLANK
OTHER

2

TOTAL NUMBER OF
TOTAL NUMBER OF
NUMBER OF
NUMBER OF
NUMBER OF
***

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

___________________________________________________________________________________________
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5,380 |
4,537 | 45,536 | 17,745 | 15,642 | 15,231 | 15,844 | 15,270 | 17,165 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,306 | 10,009 | 59,843 | 16,073 | 11,937 | 11,280 | 11,179 | 11,514 | 11,227 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,359 |
2,586 |
3,779 | 22,880 | 10,282 | 10,958 | 10,945 | 10,803 | 10,739 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,376 | 85,164 |
2,852 | 10,341 | 10,359 | 11,150 | 11,131 | 11,898 | 11,221 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,758 |
4,449 |
1,050 |
4,569 | 10,549 | 11,874 | 10,949 | 11,101 | 11,011 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,237 |
2,810 |
116 |
6,844 | 10,545 | 11,011 | 10,863 | 10,758 | 10,927 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
878 |
2,198 |
1,552 |
7,939 | 11,234 | 10,824 | 11,088 | 11,497 | 10,696 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,328 |
1,454 |
318 | 10,172 | 11,166 | 11,152 | 10,867 | 10,786 | 10,773 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,664 |
1,747 |
83 |
9,756 | 11,398 | 10,780 | 11,683 | 10,975 | 10,901 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 94,237 |
569 |
394 |
9,204 | 12,411 | 11,263 | 10,974 | 10,921 | 10,863 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |

END OF EIN MATRIX LISTING

***

RECORDS ON THE MICRO FILE
INACTIVE RECORDS
RECORDS WITH VALID EIN NUMBERS (EXCLUDING ZERO-FILLED)
RECORDS WITH ZERO-FILLED EIN NUMBERS
RECORDS WITH INVALID EIN NUMBERS (NON-NUMRIC OR NINE-FILLED)

190,577
75,054
111,830
3,691
2

EXHIBIT 13H
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN: YYYY/Q

06:06:00 AM

(STATE)
UI NUMBER MATRIX MAP - - TABLE 4B
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

1

FIELD POSITION
1

CHARACTER = 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ALPHABETIC
BLANK
OTHER

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

____________________________________________________________________________________________________
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 115,523 | 115,523 | 115,523 | 81,039 | 23,688 | 17,548 | 12,894 | 12,368 | 12,197 | 12,072 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 | 34,484 | 18,203 | 17,386 | 12,501 | 11,811 | 11,586 | 12,124 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
8,186 | 13,498 | 12,485 | 11,501 | 12,195 | 11,605 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 | 13,007 |
6,990 | 11,706 | 11,191 | 11,449 | 11,045 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
4,916 |
5,634 | 12,343 | 11,465 | 11,277 | 11,049 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
4,954 |
9,102 | 13,144 | 11,404 | 11,727 | 11,431 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 | 14,362 |
9,716 | 10,523 | 11,270 | 11,274 | 11,565 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
662 | 13,082 |
9,939 | 12,104 | 11,007 | 11,581 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 | 15,857 | 11,288 |
9,408 | 11,082 | 11,536 | 11,633 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 | 11,688 | 11,279 | 10,580 | 11,327 | 11,275 | 11,418 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |

TOTAL NUMBER OF
TOTAL NUMBER OF
NUMBER OF
NUMBER OF
NUMBER OF

***

3

END OF UI NUMBER MATRIX LISTING

RECORDS ON THE MICRO FILE
INACTIVE RECORDS
RECORDS WITH VALID UI NUMBERS (EXCLUDING ZERO-FILLED)
RECORDS WITH ZERO-FILLED UI NUMBERS
RECORDS WITH INVALID UI NUMBERS (NON-NUMERIC OR NINE-FILLED)

****

190,577
75,054
115,523
0
0

EXHIBIT 13I
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN: YYYY/Q

06:06:00 AM

(STATE)
RUN MATRIX MAP - - TABLE 4C
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

FIELD POSITION
1

CHARACTER = 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ALPHABETIC
BLANK
OTHER

2

3

4

5

__________________________________________________
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 115,523 | 115,468 | 114,087 | 107,621 | 101,120 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
55 |
823 |
2,987 |
2,242 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
327 |
1,642 |
2,110 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
107 |
965 |
1,903 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
60 |
627 |
1,700 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
50 |
493 |
1,533 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
13 |
399 |
1,420 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
13 |
328 |
1,282 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
22 |
244 |
1,152 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
21 |
217 |
1,061 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |

TOTAL NUMBER OF RECORDS ON THE MICRO FILE
TOTAL NUMBER OF INACTIVE RECORDS
NUMBER OF RECORDS WITH VALID RUN NUMBERS (EXCLUDING ZERO-FILLED)
NUMBER OF RECORDS WITH ZERO-FILLED RUN NUMBERS
NUMBER OF RECORDS WITH INVALID RUN NUMBERS (NON-NUMERIC OR NINE-FILLED)
***

END OF RUN NUMBER MATRIX LISTING

****

190,577
75,054
15,458
100,065
0

1

EXHIBIT 13M
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN: YYYY/Q

06:06:00 AM

(STATE)
RECORD COUNTS BY VALID COUNTY/TOWNSHIP CODES – TABLE 6
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

1

COUNTY CODE
TOWNSHIP CODE
COUNTY NAME
TOWNSHIP NAME
NUMBER OF RECORDS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------001
000
BAKER
699
003
000
BENTON
579
005
000
CLACKAMAS
1,096
007
000
CLATSOP
3,183
009
000
COLUMBIA
986
011
000
COOS
334
013
000
CROOK
151
015
000
CURRY
780
017
000
DESCHUTES
362
019
000
DOUGLAS
609
021
000
GILLIAM
482
023
000
GRANT
586
025
000
HARNEY
123
027
000
HOOD RIVER
736
029
000
JACKSON
444
031
000
JEFFERSON
2,399
033
000
JOSEPHINE
1,011
035
000
KLAMATH
1,171
037
000
LAKE
451
039
000
LANE
304
041
000
LINCOLN
464
043
000
LINN
509
045
000
MALHEUR
1,623
047
000
MARION
320
049
000
MORROW
204
051
000
MULTNOMAH
2,688
053
000
POLK
289
055
000
SHERMAN
802
057
000
TILLAMOOK
525
593
059
000
UMATILLA
061
000
UNION
369
063
000
WALLOWA
872
065
000
WASCO
260
067
000
WASHINGTON
562
069
000
WHEELER
1,842
071
000
YAMHILL
432
900
000
MASTER RECORD
182
995
000
STATEWIDE,LOCS IN MORE THAN 1 CNTY
466
998
000
OUT OF STATE
228
999
000
UNKNOWN LOCATIONS
202
STATE TOTAL
29,918
***

END OF VALID COUNTY/TOWNSHIPS CODES

***

EXHIBIT 13N
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

EDIT
CODE

EDIT CHECKS

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EDIT PARAMETER AND TOLERANCE LISTING - TABLE 7
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
PARAMETER/TOLERANCE NAME

EXPO
PK#

WIN
PK#

PAGE

1

PROD
STATE
BLS
PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER
VALUES
VALUES
VALUES
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
045
EIN EDIT
AME FOR EIN EDIT
070
000250
000005
000005
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
047
TAX RATE RANGE
MAXIMUM TAX RATE
001
001
015000
015000
015000
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
047
TAX RATE RANGE
MINIMUM TAX RATE
002
002
000000
000000
000000
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
048
COMMENT ERROR
COMMENT ERROR AME
056
063
000010
000000
000010
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
063
CONTRIBUTIONS > TAXABLE WAGES
EMPLOYEE TAX RATE
051
003
000000
000000
003000
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
066
PREDECESSOR ACCOUNT FORMAT
PREDECESSOR AND SUCCESSOR AME CUTOFF
006
004
000000
000000
000000
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
067
SUCCESSOR ACCOUNT FORMAT
PREDECESSOR AND SUCCESSOR AME CUTOFF
006
004
0000000000
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
070
ADDRESS EDIT
ADDRESS AME ADDRESS EDIT CUTOFF
--000005
000005
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
088
PLA ADDRESS EDIT
PLA ADDRESS PARM
000100
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
072
TRADE AND LEGAL NAME EDIT
CUTOFF PARM FOR TRADE/LEGAL NAME
--000003
000003
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 MONTHLY EMPLOYMENT CHANGE
SPLIT LEVEL FOR EMPLOYMENT DIFFERENCE
010
005
20
20
20
(MICRO/MACRO)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 MONTHLY EMPLOYMENT CHANGE
LOW EMPLOYMENT MAX EMPLOYMENT DIFFERENCE
011
006
10
10
15
(MICRO/MACRO)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 MONTHLY EMPLOYMENT CHANGE
HIGH EMPLOYMENT MAX EMPLOYMENT DIFFERENCE
012
007
30
30
40
(MICRO/MACRO)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 MONTHLY EMPLOYMENT CHANGE
HIGH REPORTING PERCENT CHANGE
013
008
10
10
15
(MICRO/MACRO)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 MONTHLY EMPLOYMENT CHANGE
REPORTING PERCENT CHANGE
014
009
30
30
30
(MICRO/MACRO)
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 MONTHLY EMPLOYMENT CHANGE
EMPLOYMENT CHECK MULTILPIER
053
010
10
10
10
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 SMALL RECORD BYPASS
SMALL RECORD BYPASS
000015
000025
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 SMALL MACRO RECORD BYPASS
SMALL MACRO RECORD BYPASS
000000040
000000100
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 ESTABLISHMENT LIMIT
NUMER OF ESTABLISHMENTS LIMIT
000100
000100
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
091/126 NON ZERO EMPLOYMENT CUTOFF
NON ZERO EMPLOYMENT CUTOFF
000050
000050
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXHIBIT 13O
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
INITIAL RUN YYYY/Q

TIME:

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EDIT CODE SUMMARY - TABLE 8
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

1

------------TOTAL FLAGGED------------

-------FLAGGED AND PRINTED------

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

TOTAL MICRO RECORDS READ
ACTIVE MICRO RECORDS READ

:
:

152,712
117,401

115,857

554,159

NUMBER OF MACRO CELLS
MACRO CELLS WITH NO MACRO FLAGS
MACRO CELLS WITH MACRO FLAGS
TOTAL NUMBER OF MACRO FLAGS

:
:
:
:

19,243
19,134
109
116

19,173
70
73

95,765
450
464

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

MICRO RECORDS WITH NO MICRO FLAGS
(001-164)
MICRO RECORDS WITH MICRO FLAGS (001-164)
TOTAL NUMBER OF MICRO FLAGS (001-164)

:
:
:

150,147
2,565
2,938

152,026
686
698

760,500
3,060
3,086

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

RECORDS WITH MICRO I ERRORS (001-080)
TOTAL NUMBER OF MICRO I ERRORS (001-080)

:
:

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

RECORDS WITH MICRO W FLAGS (088-164)
TOTAL NUMBER OF MICRO W FLAGS (088-164)

:
:

2,565
2,938

686
698

3,060
3,086

0
0

0
0

0
0

NUMBER OF ACTIVE MULTI ACCOUNTS
MULTI ACCOUNTS WITH NO FLAGS (171-185)
MULTI ACCOUNTS WITH FLAGS (171-185)
NUMBER OF MULTI FLAGS COUNTED BY UI
ACCOUNT (171-185)
TOTAL NUMBER OF WORKSITES IN ACCOUNTS
WITH MULTI FLAGS (171-185)

:
:
:

1,333
1,332
1

1,336
1,336
0

6,644
6,643
1

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

:

2

0

1

0

0

0

:

2

0

0

0

0

0

MACRO CELLS WITH A-LIST FLAGS
TOTAL NUMBER OF MACRO A-LIST FLAGS

:
:

109
116

70
73

450
464

0
0

0
0

0
0

MICRO RECORDS WITH A-LIST FLAGS
TOTAL NUMBER OF MICRO A-LIST FLAGS

:
:

726
753

686
698

3,058
3,084

0
0

0
0

0
0

MULTI ACCOUNTS WITH A-LIST FLAGS
TOTAL NUMBER OF MULTI ACCOUNT A-LIST FLAGS

:
:

1
2

0
0

1
1

0
0

0
0

0
0

MICRO RECORDS WITH B-LIST FLAGS
TOTAL NUMBER OF MICRO B-LIST FLAGS

:
:

38
38

0
0

1
1

0
0

0
0

0
0

MICRO RECORDS WITH C-LIST FLAGS
TOTAL NUMBER OF MICRO C-LIST FLAGS

:
:

1,822
2,147

0
0

1
1

0
0

0
0

0
0

**

**

A-LIST: MICRO EDIT CODES: 002-006,010,012,013,016,025,031-036,039,040,045,056-060,062-065,070,072,080,091-097,116,126,127,
130-133,139,140,160,161
MACRO EDIT CODES: 091-094,126,127,130,131,134,135; MULTI ACCOUNT EDIT CODES: 171-174,178-185
B-LIST: MICRO EDIT CODES: 041,043,044,046,066,067,074-076,078,088,120,121,123,142,146,156,157,159,162,164
C-LIST: MICRO EDIT CODES: 001,021-024,048-052,101-112,114,118,119,124,125,128,129

EXHIBIT 13O (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
INITIAL RUN YYYY/Q

**

TIME:

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EDIT CODE SUMMARY - TABLE 8
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

2

------------TOTAL FLAGGED------------

-------FLAGGED AND PRINTED------

CURRENT
QUARTER

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

RECORDS WITH PUBLICATION EDIT FLAGS

0

0

0

0

0

0

TOTAL NUMBER OF PUBLICATION EDIT FLAGS

0

0

0

0

0

0

------------------EMPLOYMENT-------------------

MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT FOR RECORDS WITH PUBLICATION EDIT FLAGS

0

0

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS
0
-------FLAGGED AND PRINTED------

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

116

73

464

0

0

0

091

9

6

62

0

0

0

092

36

23

87

0

0

0

093

0

0

0

0

0

0

094
126

0
29

0
18

0
182

0
0

0
0

0
0

127

17

13

26

0

0

0

130

0

0

0

0

0

0

131
134
135

0
23
2

0
13
0

0
107
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

EDIT
CODE

EMPLOYMENT CHANGE GREATLY EXCEEDS
TEST PARAMATERS
AQW CHANGE IS SIGNIFIANTLY > $PARM AND
EXCEEDS TWICE THE QUARTILE AQW RANGE
AVERAGE EMPLOYMENT IS SIGNIFICANTLY > $PARM,
BUT TOTAL WAGES = $0
AVERAGE EMPLOYMENT = 0, BUT TOTAL WAGES
IS SIGNIFICANTLY > $PARM
EMPLOYMENT CHANGE EXCEEDS TEST PARAMETERS
AQW CHANGE > $PARM AND EXCEEDS TWICE THE
QUARTILE AQW RANGE
AVERAGE EMPLOYMENT > $PARM, BUT TOTAL
TOTAL WAGES = $0
AVERAGE EMPLOYMENT = 0, BUT TOTAL
WAGES > $PARM
NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTS OUT OF RANGE
NEW OR DISCONTINUED MACRO RECORD

PRIOR
QUARTER

------------TOTAL FLAGGED------------

EDIT MESSAGES

MACRO EDIT FLAGS (CODES 091-135)

:

CURRENT
QUARTER

TOTAL

** PUBLICATION EDITS: MICRO EDIT CODES: 010,012,013,016,025,031-036,039,040,056-060,062,063
ANY RECORDS CARRYING THESE ERRORS WILL BE EXCLUDED FROM BLS DATA EXTRACTS FOR NONDISCLOSURE PROCESSING.

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

EXHIBIT 13O (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
INITIAL RUN YYYY/Q

TIME:

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EDIT CODE SUMMARY - TABLE 8
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

EDIT MESSAGES
EDIT
CODE

PAGE

3

------------TOTAL FLAGGED------------

-------FLAGGED AND PRINTED------

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

MICRO EDIT FLAGS (LEVELS 1-7, CODES 001-164)

TOTAL

2,938

698

3,086

0

0

0

PRE-EDIT-FLAGS (LEVEL ONE, CODES 001-006)

TOTAL

0

0

0

0

0

0

001
002
003
004
005
006

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

TOTAL

0

0

0

0

0

0

021
022
023

0
0
0

024
025

0
0

0

0

0
0

0

0

TOTAL

0

0

0

0

0

0

031
032
033
034
035
036

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID

TRANSACTION CODE
UI ACCOUNT NUMBER
REPORTING UNIT NUMBER
REFERENCE YEAR
REFERENCE QUARTER
STATE CODE

KEY FIELD EDIT FLAGS (LEVEL TWO, CODES 010-016) TOTAL
INVALID NAICS CODE
INVALID OWNERSHIP CODE
INVALID COUNTY CODE
NAICS AND OWNERSHIP INCONSISTENT
DATES AND STATUS CODE CHECKS
(LEVEL THREE, CODES 021-025)
INVALID LIABILITY DATE FORMAT
INVALID EOL DATE FORMAT
INVALID SETUP DATE FORMAT
REACTIVATION DATE FORMAT INVALID
OR EARLIER THAN LIABILITY DATE
INVALID STATUS CODE
REMAINING INVALID ERRORS
(LEVEL FOUR FOUR CODES, 031-080)
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID

FIRST MONTH EMPLOYMENT
SECOND MONTH EMPLOYMENT
THIRD MONTH EMPLOYMENT
TOTAL WAGES
TAXABLE WAGES
CONTRIBUTIONS

010
012
013
016

0
0
0

PRE-EDIT FLAG TOTALS ARE NOT CURRENTLY INCLUDED. THEY WILL BE INCLUDED IN FUTURE VERSIONS.
PRIOR QUARTER AND OTHER BACK QUARTER TOTALS MAY INCLUDE EDITS THAT HAVE BEEN DISCONTINUED.

SEE TABLE 1B FOR PRE-EDIT FLAGS.

EXHIBIT 13O (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
INITIAL RUN YYYY/Q

TIME:

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EDIT CODE SUMMARY - TABLE 8
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

TYPE OF COVERAGE
MEEI CODE
AUXILARY CODE
PREDECESSOR SESA ID
SUCCESSOR SESA ID
FEDERAL EI NUMBER

INVALID ARS RESPONSE CODE/YEAR
INVALID COMMENT CODE
INVALID FIRST MONTH EMPLOYMENT INDICATOR
INVALID SECOND MONTH EMPLOYMENT INDICATOR
INVALID THIRD MONTH EMPLOYMENT INDICATOR
INVALID TOTAL WAGES INDICATOR
INCONSISTENT OWNERSHIP/TYPE OF COVERAGE
TAXABLE WAGES ON FEDERAL RECORD
CONTRIBUTIONS ON FEDERAL RECORD
TAXABLE WAGES > 0 FOR NONEXPERIENCE-RATED
RECORD
CONTRIBUTIONS > 0 FOR NONEXPERIENCE
RATED RECORD
TAXABLE WAGES > TOTAL WAGES
CONTRIBUTIONS > TAXABLE WAGES
MEEI/REPORTING UNIT # INCONSISTENT
INCONSISTENT COUNTY/TOWNSHIP COMBINATION
INVALID FORMAT IN PREDECESSOR ACCOUNT
INVALID FORMAT IN SUCCESSOR ACCOUNT
NO USABLE ADDRESS
BOTH TRADE AND LEGAL NAME ARE BLANK
INVALID OLD OWNERSHIP
INVALID OLD COUNTY
INVALID OLD COUNTY/TOWNSHIP COMBINATION
INVALID OLD NAICS CODE
INDIAN TRIBAL INDICATOR INCONSISTENT
WITH NAICS OR OWN

4

------------TOTAL FLAGGED------------

-------FLAGGED AND PRINTED------

EDIT
CODE

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

039
040
041
043
044
045

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

046
048
049
050
051
052
056
057
058

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

059

0

0

0

0

0

0

060
062
063
064
065
066
067
070
072
074
075
076
078

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

080

0

0

0

0

0

0

EDIT MESSAGES

INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID

PAGE

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

EXHIBIT 13O (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
INITIAL RUN YYYY/Q

TIME:

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EDIT CODE SUMMARY - TABLE 8
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

EDIT MESSAGES
EDIT
CODE
SIGNIFICANT EMPLOYMENT AND WAGE FLAGS
(LEVEL FIVE, CODES 091-097)

TOTAL

EMPLOYMENT CHANGE GREATLY EXCEEDS TEST
PARAMETERS
AQW CHANGE IS SIGNIFICANTLY > $PARM AND
EXCEEDS TWICE THE QUARTILE AQW RANGE
AVERAGE EMPLOYMENT IS SIGNIFICANTLY > $PARM,
BUT TOTAL WAGES = $0
AVERAGE EMPLOYMENT = 0, BUT TOTAL WAGES
IS SIGNIFICANTLY > $PARM
TOTAL WAGES = SUM OF EMPLOYMENT +/- $PARM
IF AME IS LARGE
UNUSUALLY LARGE NEW RECORD ON FILE
UNUSUALLY LARGE DISCONTINUED RECORD
INACTIVATED
** WARNING EDIT FLAGS (LEVEL SIX, CODES 088 AND
101-146)

5

------------TOTAL FLAGGED------------

-------FLAGGED AND PRINTED------

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

195

189

672

0

0

0

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

091

43

37

220

0

0

0

092

146

152

450

0

0

0

093

0

0

0

0

0

0

094

0

0

1

0

0

0

095
096

0
2

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

097

4

0

1

0

0

0

2,738

509

2,414

0

0

0

TOTAL

LARGE RECORD WITHOUT USABLE PLA
UNUSABLE MOA ADDRESS TYPE CODE
BLANK PHYSICAL LOCATION CITY, OTHER PLA
FIELDS PRESENT
UNUSABLE PHYSICAL LOCATION STATE ABBREVIATION
UNUSABLE PHYSICAL LOCATION ZIP CODE FORMAT
UNUSABLE TELEPHONE FORMAT
BLANK UI CITY, OTHER UI ADDRESS FIELDS PRESENT
UNUSABLE UI STATE ABBREVIATION
UNUSABLE UI ZIP CODE FORMAT
BLANK MAILING/OTHER CITY, OTHER M/O ADDRESS
FIELDS PRESENT
UNUSABLE MAILING/OTHER STATE ABBREVIATION
UNUSABLE MAILING/OTHER ZIP CODE FORMAT
QUESTIONABLE FAX NUMBER FORMAT
PHYSICAL ADDRESS ERROR--P O BOX, BLANK STREET
OR OUT-OF-STATE IN PHYSICAL ADDRESS BLOCK
EIN MISSING FOR MORE THAN $PARM MONTHS
COMPUTED TAX RATE > $TOL% FROM REPORTED, AND
COMPUTED TAX > $TOL FROM REPORTED

PAGE

088
101

32
1,624

0
0

102
103
104
105
106
107
108

93
114
58
0
5
14
14

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

109
110
111
112

20
32
9
0

0
0
0
0

114
116

163
1

0
0

118

0

0

0

0

** ADDRESS FLAGS 101-114 WILL NOT APPEAR ON TABLE 9B UNLESS THE RECORDS FAILS EDIT CODE 70 (NO USEABLE ADDRESS).

EXHIBIT 13O (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
INITIAL RUN YYYY/Q

TIME:

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EDIT CODE SUMMARY - TABLE 8
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

TOTAL WAGES = SUM OF EMPLOYMENT +/- $PARM
UNCLASSIFIED INDUSTRY, EMPLOYMENT > PARM
NEW RECORD?
DISCONTINUED RECORD?
INCONSISTENT AUXILIARY/NAICS COMBINATION
OLD CODES ARE NOT CONSISTENT WITH 4TH QTR
CODES
PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSOR EDIT FLAGS
(LEVEL 7, CODES 151-164)
PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSOR ACCOUNT DISCREPANCY
PREDECESSOR END OF LIABILITY DATE ERROR
SUCCESSOR REPORTED PRIOR TO LIABILITY DATE
SUCCESSOR REPORTED LATER THAN LIABILITY DATE
DATA REPORTED FOR RECORD CODED
OUT-OF-BUSINESS
PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSOR COUNTY CODE
CHANGE CONFLICT
PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSOR OWNERSHIP CODE CHANGE
CONFLICT

6

------------TOTAL FLAGGED------------

-------FLAGGED AND PRINTED------

EDIT
CODE

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

CURRENT
QUARTER

PRIOR
QUARTER

119
120
121
123

0
1
1
4

0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0

124
125

1
0

126

418

297

2,052

0

0

0

127
128

108
0

212
0

354
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

129

0

0

1

0

0

0

130

0

0

0

0

0

0

131

0

0

2

0

0

0

132
133
139
140
142

0
2
19
5
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
4
1

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

146

0

0

TOTAL

5

0

151
152
153
154

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

EDIT MESSAGES

FIRST QUARTER TAXABLE WAGES MISSING FOR AN
EXPERIENCE-RATED ACCOUNT
POSSIBLE NONECONOMIC CODE CHANGE
CODE CHANGE BACK TO A RECENT CODE
EXPECTED CODE CHANGE NOT MADE
INACTIVE RECORD WITH REPORTED
EMPLOYMENT/WAGE DATA
DATA REPORTED PRIOR TO LIABILITY DATA
EMPLOYMENT CHANGE EXCEEDS TEST
PARAMETERS
AQW CHANGE > $PARM AND EXCEEDS TWICE THE
QUARTILE AQW RANGE
IDENTICAL MONTHLY EMPLOYMENT > $PARM
TAXABLE/TOTAL WAGE RATIO EXCEEDS PRIOR YEAR
RATIO BY $PARM%
AVERAGE EMPLOYMENT > $PARM, BUT TOTAL
WAGES = $0
AVERAGE EMPLOYMENT = 0, BUT TOTAL
WAGES > $PARM

PAGE

155

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

0
0

0

156

0

0

157

0

0

EXHIBIT 13O (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
INITIAL RUN YYYY/Q

TIME:

06:06:06 PM

(STATE)
EDIT CODE SUMMARY - TABLE 8
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

EDIT MESSAGES

PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSOR TOWNSHIP CODE CHANGE
CONFLICT
BOTH PREDECESSOR AND SUCCESSOR REPORTED
NEITHER PREDECESSOR NOR SUCCESSOR REPORTED
QUESTIONABLE INCONSISTENCIES RESULT
IN PRED/SUCC RELATIONSHIP
PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSOR NAICS CODE
CHANGE CONFLICT
MULTI FLAGS COUNTED BY UI ACCOUNT
(LEVEL 8, CODES 171-185)

-------FLAGGED AND PRINTED------

EDIT
CODE

CURRENT
QUARTER

CURRENT
QUARTER

159
160
161

0
4
1

0
0
0

162

0

0

164

0

0

TOTAL

2

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

WORKSITES IN ACCOUNTS WITH
OUT OF BALANCE FLAGS (171-174)
171
172
173
174

OTHER MULTI FLAGS COUNTED BY UI
ACCOUNT (178-185)
WORKSITES IN ACCOUNTS WITH OTHER MULTI
FLAGS (178-185)
MASTER WITHOUT MULTIPLE WORKSITES
WORKSITE MISSING MASTER
SINGLE ACCOUNT/ACTIVE WORKSITES
WORKSITE OWNERSHIP CODE DIFFERS FROM MASTER
WORKSITE EIN DIFFERS FROM MASTER
INCONSISTENT INDIAN TRIBAL CODES
WITHIN THE MULTI ACCOUNT

EXHIBIT 13P

7

------------TOTAL FLAGGED------------

MULTI OUT OF BALANCE FLAGS
COUNTED BY UI ACCOUNT (171-174)

FIRST MONTH EMPLOYMENT NOT IN BALANCE
SECOND MONTH EMPLOYMENT NOT IN BALANCE
THIRD MONTH EMPLOYMENT NOT IN BALANCE
TOTAL WAGES NOT IN BALANCE

PAGE

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

PRIOR
QUARTER

OTHER BACK
QUARTERS

0

0

0

0

0

0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

2

0

1

0

0

0

2

0

0

0

0

0

178
179
180
181
182

0
1
1
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

1
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

185

0

0

0

0

0

0

DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:07:08 PM

(STATE)
PAGE
1
INTEGRATED MACRO EDIT - TABLE 9A
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
NAICS:
561599 All other travel arrangement services
OTQ
OTY |
NO. |
|
PCT
PCT | ESTABL |
M1
M2
M3 |
TOTAL WAGES
|
|
|
-5
-30 |
1 |
473
491
631 |
2,322,630
-45
-19 |
1 |
394
393
397 |
1,815,463
57
84 |
1 |
458
446
429 |
3,708,337
-15
3 |
1 |
352
354
371 |
1,912,535
11
9 |
1 |
341
351
358 |
2,196,153
25
6 |
1 |
345
350
355 |
1,981,702
-12
-18 |
1 |
640
403
408 |
2,192,860
-11
-5 |
1 |
364
368
353 |
1,872,464

OWNERSHIP: 3
COUNTY: 018 DUCHMASTER
|
AME
OTQ
OTY |
AWW
YEAR/Q |
PCT
PCT |
|
|
2005/2 |
532
35
52 |
336
2005/1 |
395
-11
13 |
354
2004/4 |
444
24
-8 |
642
2004/3 |
359
3
-1 |
410
2004/2 |
350
0
-10 |
483
2004/1 |
350
-28
-2 |
436
2003/4 |
484
34
18 |
349
2003/3 |
362
-7
-22 |
398
2005/2 MACRO EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
126-W EMPLOYMENT CHANGE EXCEEDS TEST PARAMETERS
2004/4 MACRO EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
092-W AQW CHANGE IS SIGNIFICANTLY > PARM AND EXCEEDS TWICE THE QUARTILE AQW RANGE
************************************************************************************************************************************
UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 0011223344 00000
TRADE: CITY OF USA
PRED: 0099887766 00000
SETUP: 1980/01/01 AVER
EIN: 987321654
LEGAL:
SUCC:
REACT:
/ /
521
LIAB: 1980/01/01
EOL:
/ /
S M O
|------AME------|
|------AWW------|
YEAR/Q T E W EDI NAICS CNT
LEV
OTQ
OTY
LEV
OTQ
OTY
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES CC CC CC
QVER
2005/2 1 3 3
561599 109
532
137
182
336
-18
-147
473R
491R
631R
2,322,630P 03 35
521
2005/1 1 3 3
561599 109
395
-49
45
354
-288
-82
394R
393R
397R
1,815,463R 04 35
521
2004/4 1 3 3
561599 109
444
85
-40
642
232
293
458R
446R
429R
3,708,337H 05 31
511
2004/3 1 3 3
561599 109
359
9
-3
410
-73
12
352P
354P
371P
1,912,535P
431
2004/2 1 3 3
561599 109
350
0
-39
483
47
38
341P
351P
358P
2,196,153P
421
2004/1 1 3 3
561599 109
350
-134
-7
436
87
24
345R
350R
355R
1,981,702R
411
2003/4 1 3 3
561599 109
484
122
73
349
-49
-79
640R
403R
408R
2,192,860R 05 06
411
ARS RESPONSE CODE: 41
ARS REFILE YEAR: 2003 OLD COUNTY: 109 OLD NAICS: 561599 OLD OWN: 3
OLD TOWN: 000
2005/2 EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
126-W EMPLOYMENT CHANGE EXCEEDS TEST PARAMETERS
1 OF
1 ASSOCIATED MICRO RECORDS WERE PRINTED FOR ESTBL <= PARM
____________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXHIBIT 13Q
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:07:08 PM

(STATE)
MICRO EDITS ONLY - - TABLE 9B
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
CITY OF BUBBLE SPRINGS
LEGAL: CITY OF BUBBLE SPRINGS
/ /
SETUP: 2004/05/12 REACT:
/ /
RCI: 0
SPEC:
ECCI: 00

PAGE
1
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **

UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 4567890123 00044
TRADE:
EIN: 567890123
LIAB: 2005/01/01 EOL:
CES:
ORG:
PRED:
SUCC:
S M C O
A
AGENT EDI
YEAR/Q T E V W NAICS SIC X NSTA
CTY TWN
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES
AWW TAX. WAGES
CTB
CC CC CC CODE
2005/1 1 1 9 1 926110 9999 5
019 000
314
319
320
4,809,618
1163
0
0 99
0
0
0
0
2004/4 3
0
0
0
2004/3 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2004/2 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2004/1 9 1 0 5 926110 9999 5
019 000
220
222
225
3,281,636
1137
0
0
2003/4 3
0M
0M
0M
0M
0
0
0
CURRENT QTR NARRATIVE: First time reporting in over a year
ARS RESPONSE CODE:
REFILE YEAR:
OLD CODES:
CNTY:
OWN:
NAICS:
TOWN: 000
--------PHYSICAL LOCATION-------------------------UI ADDRESS--------------------------MAILING/OTHER------------STREET ADDRESS-1 | 20 MILKY WAY
|
|1234 MAIN ST
|
STREET ADDRESS-2 |
|
|ROOM 58
|
CITY
| BUBBLE SPRINGS
|
|ANYWHERE
|
STATE ZIP
| UA 23456|
|ST 23456|
|UI ADDRESS TYPE:
|MAILING/OTHER ADDRESS TYPE: 9
|
RPRTG UNIT DESC:
PHONE: 123-456-7890 EXT. 00000 FAX: 123-456-7891
2005/1 EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
096-W UNUSUALLY LARGE NEW RECORD ON FILE
**********************************************************************************************************************************
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA ** FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY. DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.

EXHIBIT 13R
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:07:08 PM

(STATE)
PAGE
1
MICRO DELETES ONLY - - TABLE 9D
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 0123456789 00044
TRADE: BACON AND EGGS
LEGAL:
EIN: 123456789
LIAB: 2005/01/01 EOL:
/ /
SETUP: 2005/05/31 REACT:
/ /
RCI:
CES:
ORG:
PRED:
SUCC:
SPEC:
S M C O
A DELETE
AGENT EDI
YEAR/Q T E V W NAICS SIC X FLAG
CTY TWN
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES
AWW TAX. WAGES
CTB
CC CC CC CODE
2005/2 2
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2005/1 2 3 0 5 424810 5181 5
D
001 000
147
146
151
1,677,529
872
1,465,626
20,518 91
2004/4 3
0M
0M
0M
0M
0
0
0
2004/3 3
0M
0M
0M
0M
0
0
0
2004/2 3
0M
0M
0M
0M
0
0
0
2004/1 3
0M
0M
0M
0M
0
0
0
CURRENT QTR NARRATIVE:
ARS RESPONSE CODE:
REFILE YEAR:
OLD CODES:
CNTY:
OWN:
NAICS:
TOWN: 000
--------PHYSICAL LOCATION-------------------------UI ADDRESS--------------------------MAILING/OTHER------------STREET ADDRESS-1 | 3 MAIN STREET
|789 BOARDWALK RD
|
|
STREET ADDRESS-2 |
|
|
|
CITY
| ANYWHERE
|ANYPLACE
|
|
STATE ZIP
| UA 12345|UA 98765-0000
|
|
ADDRESS TYPE:
PHONE:
123-456-7890
REPORTING UNIT DESCRIPTION:
**********************************************************************************************************************************
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA ** FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY. DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.
***
END OF MICRO DELETES LISTING ****

EXHIBIT 13S
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:07:08 PM

(STATE)
PAGE
1
UNUSABLE PHYSICAL LOCATION ADDRESSES - - TABLE 9G
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 1234567890 00044
TRADE:
LEGAL:LEGAL NAME
EIN: 012345678
LIAB: 1936/11/01 EOL:
/ /
REACT:
/ /
PRED: 0000012223 00010 SUCC: 0000388888 00007 SPEC:
AVER: 511
CONTACT:
WEB:
TITLE:
E-MAIL:
YEAR/Q ST MEEI OWN NAICS CTY TWN LOC GS MATCH
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE PLACE
CENSUS BLOCK
AS
AME AGENT EDI QVER
2005/1 1 3
5 221112 029 000
104
511
OLD ARS CODE: RESP: 41 REFILE YEAR: 2004 CNTY:
CMI: 00 | | FUTURE ARS CODES: RESP:
REFILE YEAR:
CNTY:
CMI:
--------PHYSICAL LOCATION-------------------------UI ADDRESS--------------------------MAILING/OTHER------------STREET ADDRESS-1 |
|092 PENGUINS R US ROAD
|
|
STREET ADDRESS-2 |
|
|
|
CITY
|
|ANYWHERE
|
|
|
STATE ZIP
|
|UA 12345|
PLA CHANGED DATE:
/ /
|UI ADDRESS TYPE: 9
|MAILING/OTHER ADDRESS TYPE:
|
PHONE:
00 EXT. 00000 FAX:
RPRTG UNIT DESC:
COLLETON COUNTY
2005/1 EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
088-W LARGE RECORD WITHOUT USABLE PLA
************************************************************************************************************************************
UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 1234567890 00044
TRADE:
LEGAL:OFFICE INC.
EIN: 987654321
LIAB: 1966/06/01 EOL:
/ /
REACT:
/ /
PRED:
SUCC:
SPEC:
AVER: 511
CONTACT:
WEB:
TITLE:
E-MAIL:
YEAR/Q ST MEEI OWN NAICS CTY TWN LOC GS MATCH
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE PLACE
CENSUS BLOCK
AS
AME AGENT EDI QVER
2005/1 1 3
5 236220 045 000
201
511
OLD ARS CODE: RESP: 41 REFILE YEAR: 2003 CNTY:
CMI: 00 | | FUTURE ARS CODES: RESP:
REFILE YEAR:
CNTY:
CMI:
--------PHYSICAL LOCATION-------------------------UI ADDRESS--------------------------MAILING/OTHER------------STREET ADDRESS-1 |
|P O BOX 1
|
|
STREET ADDRESS-2 |
|
|
|
CITY
|
|ANYWHERE
|
|
STATE ZIP
|
|UA 12345|
|
PLA CHANGED DATE:
/ /
|UI ADDRESS TYPE: 9
|MAILING/OTHER ADDRESS TYPE:
|
PHONE:
00 EXT. 00000 FAX:
RPRTG UNIT DESC:
OFFICEVILLE
2005/1 EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
088-W LARGE RECORD WITHOUT USABLE PLA

EXHIBIT 13T
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

12:20:28 PM

STATE
LARGE MASTER RECORD EDIT - - TABLE 9M-EMP
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS – EQUI PROCESSING

UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 0123456789 98765
TRADE: MEATBALL INC.
EIN:
830589112
LEGAL: SPAGHETTI NOODLES
NAICS: “Offices of physicians, except mental health”
YEAR/Q
2005/1
2004/4
2004/3
2004/2
2004/1
2003/4
2003/3

S
T
1
1
1
1
2
2
2

M
E
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2002/2

O
W
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

NAICS
621111
621111
621111
621111
621111
621111
621111

CTY
049
049
049
049
049
049
049

|-----AME(000s)-----|
LEVEL
OTQ
OTY
1.5
.2
1.5
1.3
0
1.3
1.3
0
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

|-----AWW(000S)-----|
LEVEL
OTQ
OTY
.5
0
.5
.5
0
.5
.5
0
.5
.5
.5
.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

PRED:
SUCC:

UT
100
95
95
95
0
0
0

ET
100
95
95
95
0
0
0

M1
1,000
2,000
800
800
0
0
0

PAGE
1
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **

LIAB: 2001/06/15 AVER: 511
SETUP: 2001/06/15

M2
1,500
1,000
1,000
1,000
0
0
0

M3
2,000
800
800
800
0
0
0

TOT W
(000,000S)
10.0
8.0
8.8
8.8
0
0
0

CC CC CC QVER
03 01
511
441
03
441
85
431
412
341
331

EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
091-W EMPLOYMENT CHANGE GREATLY EXCEEDS TEST PARAMETERS

****************************************************************************************************************************************
UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 0123456789 98765
TRADE:
EIN:
814071669
LEGAL: NEW MARKETS CONSULTING
NAICS: “Offices of physicians, except mental health”
YEAR/Q
2005/1
2004/4
2004/3
2004/2
2004/1
2003/4
2003/3

S
T
1
1
1
1
2
2
2

M
E
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2002/2

O
W
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

NAICS
621111
621111
621111
621111
621111
621111
621111

CTY
049
049
049
049
049
049
049

|-----AME(000S)-----|
LEVEL
OTQ
OTY
1.5
1.5
.2
1.3
0
1.3
1.3
0
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

|-----AWW(000S)-----|
LEVEL
OTQ
OTY
.5
0
.5
.5
0
.5
.5
0
.5
.5
.5
.5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

PRED:
SUCC:

UT
100
95
95
95
0
0
0

ET
100
95
95
95
0
0
0

M1
1,000
2,000
800
800
0
0
0

LIAB: 2001/06/15 AVER: 511
SETUP: 2001/06/15

M2
1,500
1,000
1,000
1,000
0
0
0

M3
2,000
800
800
800
0
0
0

TOT W
(000,000S)
10.0
8.0
8.8
8.8
0
0
0

CC CC CC QVER
03 01
511
511
03
431
85
431
411
341
331

EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
091-W EMPLOYMENT CHANGE GREATLY EXCEEDS TEST PARAMETERS

****************************************************************************************************************************************
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA ** FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY. DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.

EXHIBIT 13U

DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

(STATE)
PAGE
1
PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSOR EDIT LISTING - TABLE 9P
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
PREDECESSOR
|
SUCCESSOR
UI/RUN:
1234567890/00044
| 0003456789/00045
EIN:
987654321
| 412412412
LEGAL NAME:
COMPANY CORPORATION
| ACE INCORPORATED
TRADE NAME:
THE COMPANY
| AZTEC MERCHANDISE
NAICS:
336330 Motor vehicle steering and suspension pa
| 336330 Motor vehicle steering and suspension pa
DATES:
LIAB: 1994/04/01
EOL:
/ /
REACT:
/ /
| LIAB: 2005/01/01
EOL:
/ /
REACT:
/ /
CURRENT CC:
92
| 92
CURRENT NAR:
|
PRIOR CC:
|
PRIOR NAR:
|
ARS:
RESPONSE CODE: 98
REFILE YEAR: 2005 AVER: 511
| RESPONSE CODE: 41
REFILE YEAR: 2005 AVER: 512
OLD CODES:
CTY:
OWN:
NAICS:
| CTY:
OWN:
NAICS:
|---------------------------2004/4----------------------------|---------------------------2005/1----------------------------|
| S M O
| S M O
|
| T E W NAICS CTY TWN
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES QVER | T E W NAICS CTY TWN
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES QVER |
PRED | 1 1 5 336330 083 000
501R
499R
499R
5,906,511R 511 | 1 1 5 336330 083 000
357R
361R
358R
3,728,152R 511 |
SUCC | 3
0M
0M
0M
0M 000 | 1 1 5 336330 083 000
141R
139R
142R
1,434,158R 512 |
2005/1 EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
160-W BOTH PREDECESSOR AND SUCCESSOR REPORTED
**********************************************************************************************************************************
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA ** FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY. DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.

EXHIBIT 13V

06:07:08 PM

DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:07:08 PM
(STATE)
RECORDS FAILING NAICS PUBLICATION STANDARDS
- TABLE 9X
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE
1
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **

CURRENT
|
PRIOR
|
QTR 3
|
QTR 4
|
QTR 5
|
QTR TOT
|
QTR TOT
|
TOT
|
TOT
|
TOT
|
________________________________________________________________________________
TOTAL RECORDS FAILING SPECIAL CONDITIONS
63|
66|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
12,548|
13,559|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
97,878,412|
110,351,287|
0|
0|
0|
LARGE RECORDS WITH CNTY 999
63|
66|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
12,548|
13,559|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
97,878,412|
110,351,287|
0|
0|
0|
LARGE RECORDS WITH NAICS 999999
1|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
108|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
286,865|
0|
0|
0|
0|
LARGE RECORDS WITH CNTY 995
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECORDS IN DC WITH SECTOR 11
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECORDS IN DC WITH COUNTY 995/999
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
EDIT |
CURRENT
|
PRIOR
|
QTR 3
|
QTR 4
|
QTR 5
|
CODE |
QTR TOT
|
QTR TOT
|
TOT
|
TOT
|
TOT
|
______________________________________________________________________________________
TOTAL RECORDS FAILING NAICS PUBLICATION EDITS
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID NAICS CODE
010 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID OWNERSHIP CODE
012 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID COUNTY CODE
013 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ NAICS & OWNERSHIP INCONSISTENT
016 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID STATUS CODE
025 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID M1 EMPLOYMENT
031 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
**********************************************************************************************************************************
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA ** FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY. DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.

EXHIBIT 13V (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:07:08 PM
(STATE)
RECORDS FAILING NAICS PUBLICATION STANDARDS
- TABLE 9X
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE
2
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **

EDIT |
CURRENT
|
PRIOR
|
QTR 3
|
QTR 4
|
QTR 5
|
CODE |
QTR TOT
|
QTR TOT
|
TOT
|
TOT
|
TOT
|
______________________________________________________________________________________
RECS W/ INVALID M2 EMPLOYMENT
032 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID M3 EMPLOYMENT
033 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID TOTAL WAGES
034 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID TAXABLE WAGES
035 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID CONTRIBUTIONS
036 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID TYPE OF COVERAGE
039 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ INVALID MEEI
040 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/INCONSISTENT OWNERSHIP/TYPE OF COVERAGE 056 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ TAXABLE WAGES ON FEDERAL RECORD
057 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ CONTRIBUTIONS ON FEDERAL RECORD
058 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ CONTRIB>0 FOR NON-EXP RATED RECORD
060 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ TAXABLE WAGES > TOTAL WAGES
062 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
RECS W/ CONTRIBUTIONS > TAXABLE WAGES
063 |
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
MONTH 3 EMPLOYMENT
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
TOTAL WAGES
|
0|
0|
0|
0|
0|
**********************************************************************************************************************************
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA ** FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY. DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.

EXHIBIT 13V (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

06:07:08 PM
(STATE)
RECORDS FAILING NAICS PUBLICATION STANDARDS
- TABLE 9X
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE
3
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA **

UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 1234567890 00044
TRADE: TRAIN FOREST
LEGAL: TRAIN FOREST UNLIMITED
EIN: 123456789
LIAB: 2000/07/01 EOL:
/ /
SETUP: 2000/10/01 REACT:
/ /
ORG:
AVER: 511
PRED: 987654321 00000 SUCC:
S M C O
A
YEAR/Q T E V W NAICS X CTY TWN
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES
AWW TAX. WAGES
CTB
CC CC CC EDI QVER
2005/1 1 4 0 5 561320 5 999 000 1,447
1,500
1,476
5,744,647
300
5,666,466
228,925
511
2004/4 1 4 0 5 561320 5 999 000 1,837
1,703
1,546
6,755,537
307
4,684,745
156,470 05
441
2004/3 1 4 0 5 561320 5 999 000 1,415
1,515
1,593
6,750,921
344
4,973,060
166,100
431
2004/2 1 4 0 5 561320 5 999 000 1,316
1,344
1,469
5,524,118
309
4,786,614
159,873
421
2004/1 1 4 0 5 561320 5 999 000 1,186E 1,423E 1,565E
4,578,579
253
4,497,271
150,209
411
2003/4 1 4 0 5 561320 5 999 000 1,238
1,276
1,223
5,088,836
314
3,364,789
105,654
341
ARS RESPONSE CODE: 41 REFILE YEAR: 2004 OLD CODES:
CNTY:
OWN:
NAICS:
TOWN: 000
**********************************************************************************************************************************
** CONFIDENTIAL DATA ** FOR STATISTICAL USE BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY. DESTROY ACCORDING TO RECORDS RETENTION SCHEDULE.

EXHIBIT 13W
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q
UI ACCT: 0987654321
RUN

(STATE)
MULTI-ESTABLISHMENT EDIT LISTING - TABLE 10
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

HARBORS TROLLING INC

EIN: 737373737

OWN: 5

P/S:

PAGE
1
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**
SPEC:

AGENT:

EDI:

AVER: 512

|------------------------2004/4---------------------------|-------------------------2005/1-----------------------|
S M CTY NAICS
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES QVER | S M CTY NAICS
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES QVER

NAME

00000
00001
00002

06:33:21 PM

HARBORS
HARBORS

3
3
3

0
0
0

0M
0M
0M

0M
0M
0M

0M
0M
0M

|
|
0M 000 | 1 1 995 561320
0M 000 | 1 3 016 561320
0M 000 | 1 3 026 621610

0

0

0

0

0M
0C
0M

0M
95C
112C

0M
96C
111C

0M 512
437,571C 511
510,901C 511

0

207

207

948,472

NO MASTER RECORD
SUM OF WORKSITES
2005/1

***

TALLY:

0

EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:

179

WORKSITE MISSING MASTER

180

SINGLE ACCOUNT/ACTIVE WORKSITES

END OF MULTI ESTABLISHMENT EDIT LISTING

****

TALLY:

2

EXHIBIT 13X
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q
CNTY: 015

OWN: 2

07:07:00 AM

(STATE)
MACRO REVISIONS
TABLE 13A
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE
1
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**

INDUSTRY CODE: 311330

2004/3
|
2004/4
NO. OF
EMPLOYMENT
|
NO. OF
EMPLOYMENT
DATA
ESTABL
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES|
ESTABL
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------OLD:
4
4752
4758
4766
48,368,553|
4
4723
4729
4737
48,078,342
NEW:
4
4752
4758
4766
48,368,553|
4
4454
4490
4746
46,980,716
NET
|
DIFF:
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0|
+0
-269
-239
+9
-1,097,626
____________________________________________________________________|________________________________________________________________
CNTY: 017

OWN: 5

INDUSTRY CODE: 334119

2004/3
|
2004/4
NO. OF
EMPLOYMENT
|
NO. OF
EMPLOYMENT
DATA
ESTABL
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES|
ESTABL
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------OLD:
26
77
78
79
696,890|
28
136
140
144
9,409,838
NEW:
26
77
78
79
696,890|
27
76
80
81
696,927
NET
|
-8,712,911
DIFF:
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0|
-1
-60
-60
-63
| EDIT CODES - REMAINING MACRO CODES AND ERROR LEVEL STATUS:
EDIT CODES - REMAINING MACRO CODES AND ERROR LEVEL STATUS:
____________________________________________________________________|_______________________________________________________________
CNTY: 019

OWN: 5

INDUSTRY CODE: 522210

2004/3
|
2004/4
NO. OF
EMPLOYMENT
|
NO. OF
EMPLOYMENT
DATA
ESTABL
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES|
ESTABL
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------OLD:
12
1397
1413
1407
15,424,274|
13
1548
1547
1546
15,717,833
NEW:
12
1397
1413
1407
15,424,274|
12
1407
1403
1406
13,883,917
NET
|
DIFF:
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0|
-1
-141
-144
-140
-1,833,916
EDIT CODES - REMAINING MACRO CODES AND ERROR LEVEL STATUS:
| EDIT CODES - REMAINING MACRO CODES AND ERROR LEVEL STATUS:
|
L6
____________________________________________________________________|________________________________________________________________

EXHIBIT 13Y
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q
OWNERSHIP:
YEAR/Q
2005/1
2004/4
2004/3
2004/2
2004/1
2003/4
2003/3
2003/2

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

5

COUNTY:

08:08:08 AM

020

AME

OTQ
PCT

777
899
902
944
875
932
1,784
1,605

-14
0
-4
8
-6
-48
11
34

(STATE NAME)
MACRO REVISIONS FAILING EDITS - TABLE 13B
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

ANCHORAGE
OTY |
PCT |
|
-11 |
-4 |
-49 |
-41 |
43 |
13 |
1 |
-17 |

NAICS: 611310

AWW

OTQ
PCT

753
875
857
957
777
912
2,482
3,183

-14
2
-10
23
-15
-63
-22
47

OTY |
NO.
PCT | ESTABL
|
-3 |
4
-4 |
4
-65 |
4
-70 |
5
-2 |
4
-2 |
4
13 |
8
4 |
8

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

PAGE
1
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**

Colleges and universities

M1

M2

888
910
966
978
916
918
1,762
1,589

887
709
958
955
883
932
1,779
1,605

|
M3 |
|
855 |
889 |
902 |
899 |
825 |
945 |
1,810 |
1,622 |

TOTAL WAGES
25,464,866
15,140,125
15,274,259
11,739,554
8,834,340
11,040,406
57,553,640
66,430,607

2005/1 MACRO EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
126-W EMPLOYMENT CHANGE EXCEEDS TEST PARAMETERS
2004/2 MACRO EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
126-W EMPLOYMENT CHANGE EXCEEDS TEST PARAMETERS
SUMMARY OF DIFFERENCES
DEC. EMPL.
CHANGE TO:
407
CHANGE FROM:
0
NET DIFFERENCE:
407

2004/4

TOTAL WAGES
5,822,537
0
5,822,537

NO. ESTAB.
1
0
1

2005/1
JAN EMPL.
FEB EMPL.
288
326
0
0
288
326

MAR EMPL.
339
0
339

TOTAL WAGES
6,900,763
0
6,900,763

************************************************************************************************************************************
QVER: 511
DIFFERENCE
2004/1

NO. OF
EMPLOYMENT
ESTABL
M1
M2
M3
TOTAL WAGES|
---------------------------------------------------------------+0
-116
-127
-36
-3,447,234

************************************************************************************************************************************
UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 5567890123 00044
YEAR/Q
2005/1
2004/4
2004/3
2004/2
2004/1

S
T
1
1
1
1
1

M
E
3
3
3
3
3

O
W EDI NAICS CTY
5
611310 020
5
611310 020
5
611310 020
5
611310 020
5
611310 020

TRADE: HELIOBACTOR PILORI

|------AME------|
LEV
OTQ
OTY
8
3
2
5
1
-1
4
-1
-1
5
-1
5
6
0
6

|------AWW------|
LEV
OTQ
OTY
460
-70
-194
530
90
146
440
-19
102
459
-195
459
654
270
654

PRED:
M1
7R
3R
5R
5D
6E

SUCC:
M2
9R
5R
4R
5D
6E

M3
9R
6R
3R
5D
6E

TOTAL WAGES
49,805R
32,168R
22,871R
29,853R
51,008R

CC CC CC

EXHIBIT 13Y (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

08:08:08 AM

(STATE NAME)
MACRO REVISIONS FAILING EDITS - TABLE 13B
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE
2
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**

************************************************************************************************************************************
UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 4567890123 00044
YEAR/Q
2005/1
2004/4
2004/3
2004/2
2004/1

S
T
1
1
1
1
1

M
E
3
3
3
3
3

O
W EDI NAICS CTY
5
611310 020
5
611310 020
5
611310 020
5
611310 020
5
611310 020

TRADE:

PRED:

|------AME------|
LEV
OTQ
OTY
877
5
5
836
-11
-7
942
4
82
909
8
-484
839
-6
-446

|------AWW------|
LEV
OTQ
OTY
2,234
60
186
-55
1,393
12
1,247
29
39
966
24 -4304
782
-15 -2585

M1
888
910E
966
943
880

M2
887
709E
958
920
845

SUCC: 1970/01/06
M3
855
889E
902
863
791

TOTAL WAGES
25,464,866
15,140,125E
15,274,259
11,407,193
8,521,631

CC CC CC
31
05 31

2005/1 EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
092-W AQW CHANGE IS SIGNIFICANTLY > PARM AND EXCEEDS TWICE THE QUARTILE AQW RANGE
************************************************************************************************************************************
UI ACCOUNT/RUN: 0123456789 00022
YEAR/Q
2005/1
2004/4
2004/3
2004/2
2004/1

S
T
1
1
1
1
1

M
E
3
3
3
3
3

O
W EDI NAICS CTY
5
611310 020
5
611310 020
5
611310 020
5
611310 020
5
611310 020

TRADE:

PRED:

|------AME------|
LEV
OTQ
OTY
877
5
5
836
-11
-7
942
4
82
909
8
-484
839
-6
-446

|------AWW------|
LEV
OTQ
OTY
2,234
60
186
1,393
12
-55
1,247
29
39
966
24 -4304
782
-15 -2585

M1
888
910E
966
943
880

M2
887
709E
958
920
845

SUCC: 1970/01/06
M3
855
889E
902
863
791

TOTAL WAGES
25,464,866
15,140,125E
15,274,259
11,407,193
8,521,631

2005/1 EDIT CODES/MESSAGES:
092-W AQW CHANGE IS SIGNIFICANTLY > PARM AND EXCEEDS TWICE THE QUARTILE AQW RANGE
******** END OF MACRO REVISIONS FAILING EDITS REPORT **************

CC CC CC
31
05 31

EXHIBIT 13Z
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q
COUNT

CODE

06:07:08 PM
DESCRIPTION.

(STATE)
COMMENT CODES AND NARRATIVE COMMENTS - TABLE 15
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

1

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
0
00
MULTIPLE WORKSITES TO SINGLE (QCEW).
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1,899
01-19 EMPLOYMENT SHIFTS.
22
01
SEASONAL INCREASE.
65
02
SEASONAL DECREASE.
236
03
MORE BUSINESS (EXPANSION).
231
04
LESS BUSINESS (CONTRACTION).
45
05
SHORT-TERM/SPECIFIC BUSINESS PROJECT STARTING OR CONTINUING.
30
06
SHORT-TERM/SPECIFIC BUSINESS PROJECT COMPLETED OR APPROACHING COMPLETION.
6
07
LAYOFF, NOT ELSEWHERE CLASSIFIED.
29
09
TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN
3
10
CONVERSION OR REMODEL OF FACILITIES, RETOOLING, OR REPAIR & MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT RESULTING IN EMPL. DECREASE.
1
11
CONVERSION OR REMODEL OF FACILITIES, RETOOLING, OR REPAIR & MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT RESULTING IN EMPL. INCREASE.
48
12
INTERNAL REORGANIZATION, DOWNSIZING OR BANKRUPTCY RESULTING IN AN EMPLOYMENT DECREASE.
12
13
INTERNAL REORGANIZATION, DOWNSIZING OR BANKRUPTCY RESULTING IN AN EMPLOYMENT INCREASE.
1
14
NONSTANDARD WORK SCHEDULE.
43
15
INTRA-ACCOUNT (FIRM) TRANSFERS.
1,100
18
ACTIVE EMPLOYER REPORTING ZERO EMPLOYMENT AND WAGES.
27
19
EMPLOYMENT RETURNS OR RETURNING TO NORMAL OR A NEWNORMAL AFTER CODED 07-18.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
919
20-36 PAY SHIFTS.
13
20
WAGE RATE DECREASE.
8
21
WAGE RATE INCREASE (INCLUDING COLAS).
97
22
INCREASE IN PERCENTAGE OF LOWER-PAID EMPLOYEES.
24
23
INCREASE IN PERCENTAGE OF HIGHER-PAID EMPLOYEES.
2
24
LOWER HOURLY EARNINGS OR WAGES BECAUSE OF PIECEWORK OR LOWER INCENTIVE PAY.
13
29
SEVERENCE PAY DISTRIBUTED.
5
30
WAGES PAID TO EMPLOYEES WORKING IN PAY PERIODS NOT INCLUDING THE 12 OF THE MONTH AND NOT SHOWN IN EMPLOYMENT.
370
31
BONUSES, EXECUTIVE PAY, PROFITS DISTRIBUTED LUMP-SUM PAYMENTS.
1
32
CHANGE IN COMMISSIONS.
1
34
CHANGE IN HOURLY EARNINGS OR PAY DUE TO CHANGE IN AMOUNT OF SHIFT WORK WITH PAY DIFFERENTIAL.
4
35
CHANGES IN HOURS, EARNINGS, OR WAGES DUE TO LEGISLATION/ADMINISTRATIVE REGULATIONS.
381
36
PAY RETURNS OR RETURNING TO NORMAL OR A NEW NORMAL AFTER CODED 29-35.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
39
LABOR SHORTAGE.
1
39
DECREASE IN EMPLOYMENT RESULTING FROM A LABOR SORTAGE.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5
40-47, 49 HOURS, TIME AND VACATION.
1
40
SHORTER SCHEDULED WORKWEEK; FEWER HOURS WORKED; NUMBER OF PAY PERIODS LESS THAN USUAL.
4
43
INCREASE IN PART-TIME WORKERS.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3
48
IMPROVED REPORTING (QCEW).
3
48
IMPROVED REPORTING (QCEW).
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXHIBIT 13Z (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q
COUNT

CODE

06:07:08 PM
DESCRIPTION.

(STATE)
COMMENT CODES AND NARRATIVE COMMENTS - TABLE 15
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE

2

0
50-55 EXTERNAL FACTORS.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
0
58
ENVIRONMENTAL LEGISLATION.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
0
59-60 DEFENSE-RELATED CODES.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
0
61-64 TEMPORARY USE CODES (CES/QCEW).
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
0
65-74 STATE-SPECIFIC CODES (CES USE ONLY).
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
0
75-79 TAX OR COVERAGE CHANGES (QCEW USE ONLY).
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
484
80-82 CODING AND CLASSIFICATION CHANGES.
478
81
NONECONOMIC CODE CHANGE.
6
82
ECONOMIC CODE CHANGE.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2,978
83-93 REPORTING ISSUES.
185
83
EMPLOYEE LEASING REPORTING CHANGE.
588
85
NEW ESTABLISHMENT OR WORKSITE.
297
86
ESTABLISHMENT PERMANENTLY OUT OF BUSINESS.
46
87
REACTIVATED UI ACCOUNT OR WORKSITE (QCEW).
1
88
ESTABLISHMENT DISSOLUTION.
9
89
ESTABLISHMENT MERGER.
737
90
CHANGED BASIS OF, REPORTING WITH MORE DETAIL.
19
91
CHANGED BASIS OF REPORTING WITH LESS DETAIL.
90
92
PARTIAL PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSOR TRANSACTION (QCEW) /CES CANCELLATION (CES).
1,006
93
FULL PREDECESSOR/SUCCESSOR TRANSFER (QCEW).
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
76
94-99 VERIFICATION.
4
98
DATA VERIFIED BY EDIC(QCEW)./DATA VERIFIED BY REGIONAL OFFICE(CES).
72
99
DATA VERIFIED--SEE NARRATIVE.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
96
-NARRATIVE COMMENTS.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXHIBIT 13Z (continued)
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q
COUNT

PERCENT*

06:49:22 PM

(STATE)
COMMENT CODES AND NARRATIVE COMMENTS - TABLE 15
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING
RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.

PAGE

3

6,365
6.76%
TOTAL COMMENTS, IN ALL RECORDS.
5,049
5.36%
TOTAL RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
4,005
4.25%
RECORDS WITH EXACTLY ONE COMMENT CODE.
772
0.82%
RECORDS WITH EXACTLY TWO COMMENT CODES.
272
0.28%
RECORDS WITH EXACTLY THREE COMMENT CODES.
96
0.10%
RECORDS WITH NARRATIVE COMMENT AND AT LEAST ONE COMMENT CODE.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
COUNT PERCENT**
COMMENTS WITHIN EACH OWNERSHIP.
39
0.77%
FEDERAL GOVERNMENT RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
18
0.35%
STATE
GOVERNMENT RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
159
3.14%
LOCAL
GOVERNMENT RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
4,833
95.72%
PRIVATE SECTOR
RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
COUNT PERCENT**
RECORDS WITH COMMENTS AND EDIT FLAGS.
371
7.34%
RECORDS WITH LEVELS 5-8 EDIT FLAGS WITH COMMENTS.
79
1.56%
RECORDS WITH LEVEL 5
EDIT FLAGS WITH COMMENTS.
280
5.54%
RECORDS WITH LEVEL 6
EDIT FLAGS WITH COMMENTS.
0
0.00%
RECORDS WITH LEVEL 7
EDIT FLAGS WITH COMMENTS.
18
0.35%
RECORDS WITH LEVEL 8
EDIT FLAGS WITH COMMENTS.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
COUNT PERCENT**
COMMENTS WITHIN EACH MEEI CODE.
2,487
49.25%
MEEI = 1 RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
2,527
50.04%
MEEI = 3 RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
29
0.57%
MEEI = 4 RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
2
0.03%
MEEI = 5 RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
4
0.07%
MEEI = 6 RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
COUNT PERCENT**
COMMENTS WITHIN EACH DATA SOURCE.
249
4.93%
EDI RECORDS WITH COMMENTS.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
* PERCENTAGES ARE BASED ON THE TOTAL NUMBER OF ACTIVE RECORDS (EXCLUDING MASTERS).
** PERCENTAGES ARE BASED ON THE NUMBER OF ACTIVE RECORDS WITH AT LEAST ONE COMMENT CODE (EXCLUDING MASTERS).
THE END OF THE COMMENT CODES AND NARRATIVE COMMENTS LISTING.

EXHIBIT 13AA
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME:
INITIAL RUN
YYYY/Q

07:07:00 AM

(STATE)
EQUI SAMPLE RECORDS – TABLE 16
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS - EQUI PROCESSING

PAGE
1
**CONFIDENTIAL DATA**

************************************************************************************************************************************
YEAR/Q ST
UI ACCOUNT
RUN
EI NO.
STAT MEEI COV EDI CES SP AGENT RCI OWN ORG CNTY TOWN NAICS AUX SIC
NSTA
2005/1 66
4567890123 00044 567890123
1
1
0
C
0
5
C
009
000
424450 5 5145
REFILING YEAR:
2001 RESP CODE: 41
OLD CODE:5
009
000
422450
5145
M1 EMPL: 00000325R M2 EMPL: 00000327R M3 EMPL: 00000324R TW: 000000000172411R TAXW:00000000122411 CONTR: 00000000979
COMMENTS:
NARRATIVE:
TRADE NAME
CITY OF BUBBLE SPRINGS
LEGAL NAME
PHONE NUMBER
444-555-3333
---------- PHYSICAL ------------------------------------ UI ------------------------------- MAILING/OTHER -------------ADDRESS
| 20 MILKY WAY
|
20 MILKY WAY
|
|
ADDRESS2
|
|
|
|
CITY
| BUBBLE SPRINGS
|
BUBBLE SPRINGS
|
|
|
|
STATE ZIP
| UA
23456|
UA 23456-0000
RU DESCR
ADDRESS TYPE
PREDECESSOR UI#/RUN:
INITIAL LIABILITY DATE: 1950/04/01
REACT DATE:
/ /
SUCCESSOR UI#/RUN:
SETUP DATE:
1950/04/01
END OF LIAB DATE:
/ /
REC#
29
************************************************************************************************************************************
YEAR/Q ST
UI ACCOUNT
RUN
EI NO.
STAT MEEI COV EDI CES SP AGENT RCI OWN ORG CNTY TOWN NAICS AUX SIC
NSTA
2005/1 66
1234567890 00005 345678901
1
1
0
C
0
5
C
011
000
323110 5 2752
REFILING YEAR:
1999 RESP CODE: 46
OLD CODE:5
011
000
2759
M1 EMPL: 00000036R M2 EMPL: 00000046R M3 EMPL: 00000055R TW: 000000000048120R TAXW:00000000033120 CONTR: 00000000861
COMMENTS:
NARRATIVE:
TRADE NAME
OLD HOUSE REALTY CORP
LEGAL NAME
OLD HOUSE REALTY CORP
PHONE NUMBER
987-654-3210
---------- PHYSICAL ------------------------------------ UI ------------------------------- MAILING/OTHER -------------|
ADDRESS
| 721 W. QUENSTON HIGHWAY
|
P O BOX 582
|
ADDRESS2
|
|
|
|
CITY
| GOULD
|
GOULD
|
|
STATE ZIP
| UA
77333
|
UA
77333 0000
|
|
RU DESCR
ADDRESS TYPE
PREDECESSOR UI#/RUN:
INITIAL LIABILITY DATE: 1953/10/01
REACT DATE:
/ /
SUCCESSOR UI#/RUN:
SETUP DATE:
1953/10/01
END OF LIAB DATE:
/ /
REC#
58
************************************************************************************************************************************
YEAR/Q ST
UI ACCOUNT
RUN
EI NO.
STAT MEEI COV EDI CES SP AGENT RCI OWN ORG CNTY TOWN NAICS AUX SIC
NSTA
2005/1 66
7890123456 00018 123456789
1
1
0
0
5
C
011
000
425120 5 5192
REFILING YEAR:
2001 RESP CODE: 41
OLD CODE:5
011
000
422920
5192
M1 EMPL: 00000011R M2 EMPL: 00000011R M3 EMPL: 00000011R TW: 000000000038451R TAXW:00000000010096 CONTR: 00000000071
COMMENTS:
NARRATIVE:
TRADE NAME
PAYMORE FOR LESS INC
PHONE NUMBER
123-456-7890
LEGAL NAME
PAYMORE FOR LESS INC
---------- PHYSICAL ------------------------------------ UI ------------------------------- MAILING/OTHER -------------ADDRESS
|
|
1776 BROADWAY
|
|
ADDRESS2
|
|
|
|
CITY
|
|
EL WACKO
|
|
STATE ZIP
|
|
UA
12345
|
|
RU DESCR
ADDRESS TYPE
PREDECESSOR UI#/RUN:
INITIAL LIABILITY DATE: 1955/01/01
REACT DATE:
/ /
SUCCESSOR UI#/RUN:
SETUP DATE:
1955/01/01
END OF LIAB DATE:
/ /
REC#
87

September 30, 2019

MEEI
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
2

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page 14-1

Valid County/Valid Township Combination
999/999
995/995
996/996
998/998
any county code including 900, 995, 996, 998; and township 900
or 999

Chapter 14 – Documenting and Validating State
Operations
BLS routinely monitors state performance and develops plans to share best practices, promote
improvements, and address deficiencies with the ultimate goal of assessing and improving
QCEW program data quality. This chapter outlines the formal aspects of this monitoring and
explains the tools used for review and documentation purposes. The BLS Large Multi-Unit ARS
Review, also known as the “central review” is discussed in Chapter 6, Annual Refile Survey.
In addition to internal BLS validation, feedback and information requests are also provided to
states stemming from BLS’ relationships with other federal statistical agencies or private
partnerships provided under memorandum of understanding (MOU). The process and details of
what information may be shared and how this may impact the data is specified in those MOU’s.
------------------------- Contents of Chapter 14 ------------------------14.1 Quarterly Monitoring
14.2 Annual Report
14.3 State Operations Review
14.4 NAICS Quality Review
14.5 Large Code Change Review

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page 14-2

14.1 Quarterly Monitoring
Each quarter regional office staff monitor state processing schedules prior to the EQUI submittal
due date and conduct a review of summary processing statistics to identify and resolve
systematic data quality problems prior to submittal of the initial file.
It is a best practice for states to provide to their regional office with detailed processing
schedules. If done, it should be provided at least once a year. The processing schedules provide
detailed information on the timing of each task related to creating the EQUI deliverable.
Regional offices can review the processing schedules to ensure that identified best practices are
followed in the states. Best practice processing schedules will include detailed plans including
the timing of each task related to EQUI submittal, which jobs are run, timing and number of UI
extracts, and any other pertinent details. Appendix E provides an example processing schedule.
State systems have two reports that can be generated on demand by states to provide useful
information to both state QCEW supervisors and regional office staff. One is called the
QCEW/CES Comparison Sheet and the other is called the Flash Report in Expo(DCount Report
in Win.) The QCEW/CES Comparison Sheet is required in the cooperative agreement. Sharing
the Flash/Dcount Report with BLS is not required by the cooperative agreement but is a best
practice.
States and regions can compare summary counts against similar data from previous EQUI
reports to highlight areas that need to be reviewed. It is recommended that states send a Flash/
Dcount Report and QCEW/CES Comparison Sheet to the regional office 2 weeks prior to the
creation of the EQUI file. These reports contain summaries only, they have no confidential data,
and so can be e-mailed by states to regional office staff.

Flash Report/ DCount Report
a. State Flash report mechanics: For EXPO States, States submit Job 29D. For ease
in reading this document, use the Excel spreadsheet created to load in this job and
compare its output to previous submittals.
b. State DCount report mechanics: For WIN States, States email two files: Dcounts
and Summary. Both of these can be loaded similarly to different spreadsheets for
comparison purposes. Dcounts counts certain data elements (similar to EXPO’s 29D)
and Summary provides the number of errors by error codes.
Why the report matters: The flash report can provide clues to potential major data issues such
as the amount of imputed and estimated data, large shifts in employment and wage data
compared to earlier quarters, and I errors. It is also possible to identify the number of firms with
an MEEI 4 to potentially break out, the number of unclassified records with NAICS 999999,
County Code 995 and 999 for checking unclassified levels, and the number of new records. This

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page 14-3

is a best practice because it has repeatedly led to the discovery and correction of systematic
errors before submittal of the primary deliverable.

QCEW/CES Comparison Sheet
a. QCEW/CES report mechanics: documentation on the CES/QCEW roll-up
spreadsheet is available on StateWeb
http://199.221.111.170/program/ES202/GeneralProgramInfo.htm
b. Why the report matters: The CES/QCEW graphs can be used to compare data at
various levels from 3-digit to 6-digit NAICS. They are helpful in spotting data
fluctuations that could indicate important issues with EQUI data before the
deliverable is submitted. There are also graphs comparing QCEW data to prior year
QCEW data, total wages, average weekly wages, and percentage changes in Average
Monthly Employment, Total Wages, and Average Weekly Wages. In other words,
these spreadsheets detail the data flow between different ownership/NAICS
combinations, and compare the data flow from the current year with the data flow
from last year. All data are at the State-wide level.

Editing State Data
The QCEW/CES Comparison Sheet compares QCEW and CES trends. Usually these trends are
broadly in agreement. When there are large differences in trends, it can be evidence of an
upcoming significant state CES benchmark revision. It can also guide QCEW reviewers to
substantial errors in QCEW microdata. If QCEW looks reasonable, let CES staff know that they
may need to prepare for a substantial revision.
NOTE: CES data should not be used in place of QCEW data, nor should it be used to wedge or
otherwise modify QCEW microdata. Validation of QCEW data should be done independently.

14.2 Annual Report
Each year, regional office staff members prepare and submit a report summarizing the state of
program operations for each state in their region. The report is typically due to the national
office by the end of October, and it includes a systematic annual review of QCEW management
information that is presented by category. The report may include information on the state
QCEW staffing patterns, any processing or data problems the state is experiencing and the plans
for correcting them, a link to a document outlining future system changes planned, and a number
of data quality indicators. A full listing of the items to be included in the Annual Report can be
found in R-memorandum 19-01.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page 14-4

These performance indicators are updated twice each quarter and available for states and regions
to review anytime on StateWeb within the QCEW Program Management Information section.
The Historical Data Counts section contains graphs and tables for easy data viewing. The yearly
Cooperative Agreement sets the acceptable threshold for employment percentages of NAICS
999999 and county 995/999. A copy of the most recent agreement is available on StateWeb in
the LMI section.

14.3 State Operations Review
Purpose
The purpose of an SOR is the following:







Identify “best practices” that may benefit other States and/or BLS.
Provide State and BLS staff with a comprehensive summary of State UI Tax Unit
practices which impact QCEW.
Provide State and BLS staff with a comprehensive summary of State QCEW operations
and procedures.
Assist States in determining the staffing needed to support QCEW activities.
Serve as a record of State operations.
Help new State and BLS staff become familiar with individual State operations.

Description of the State Operations Review Questionnaire
The SOR consists of a detailed questionnaire administered by the regional office to each state.
The SOR is comprised of two parts, called modules. Module 1, UI Tax Database and
Procedures, and Module 2, QCEW state operations. Module 1 documents the data types
collected by state UI tax departments. The module also documents the lifecycle of UI accounts;
the creation of a new establishment, changes in status and ownership, delinquency, closures,
reactivation, and quarterly wage and employment reporting. In addition, information on the UI
Department leadership roles and responsibilities is documented.
Module 2 provides a picture of LMI/QCEW operations in each State including the extract logic,
data elements, and procedures. Procedures for processing non-UI tax data such as multiple
worksite reports and the annual refiling survey are also included in the document. Staffing
patterns and roles and responsibilities of the QCEW unit are documented.

14.4 NAICS Quality Review

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page 14-5

A NAICS quality review is conducted for each state approximately every five years. Regional
office staff review a sample of assigned NAICS codes. These reviews are typically conducted
after a state has completed the SOR, but the review can also be conducted whenever there is a
need. Ideal times within the year for a NAICS quality review are following an EQUI clean-up
period such as in late February/March, late May/June, or late August/ September. This is a
recommended practice.
Purpose
The purpose of a NAICS quality review is to assess the quality of the NAICS codes assigned by
States during the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) as well as from new employer accounts from
the State Status Determination Forms (SDFs).
Review Structure and Design
Reviews may be conducted during an on-site visit, but they are often conducted remotely with
teleconference capabilities employed to facilitate discussion. Typically the reviews include one
regional office staff member from the host region, one regional office staff member from another
region, and one national office coder. The reviewers discuss their findings with state staff.
Codes are reviewed by each coder independently, and codes are adjudicated among the team.
This review emphasizes the detection of broad problem areas, rather than error rates for each
state or individuals within the state. The spirit of this activity is educational, not disciplinary.
The NAICS Quality Assurance review is also an opportunity to provide training to BLS and state
staff on NAICS coding procedures. Regional staff identify and note “best practices” so that they
can be shared with all states and regions.

14.5 Large Code Change Review
The Large Code Change Review assesses the quality of changes made by states to NAICS and
county/township codes of large reporting units during the Annual Refiling Survey. The Large
Code Change Review typically begins in April or May and lasts through the first quarter EQUI
submittal. Regional offices typically use the CCS edit tables 1a and 1b to identify those
establishments that meet the threshold for review.
Results of the Large Code Change Review are included on the Annual Report and document
information on the number of cases reviewed, the number of changes recommended and whether
or not those recommendations were incorporated by the state. In addition, any trends or
consistent coding discrepancies, and recommendations for state NAICS training or other
improvement plans are included on the Annual Report.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-1

Chapter 15 – Recurring Coverage and Reporting
Problems
The sections in this chapter outline general procedures for identifying and resolving questionable
employment counts or total wages reflected in the state system and the EQUI. These guidelines
should be followed when a state does not have a relevant UI law.
The following definitions give the basic guidelines for reporting employment and wage data in
the QCEW program. This chapter covers reporting practices and special situations that challenge
these guidelines; however, basic guidelines should still be applied to the extent possible.
Monthly employment is the total count of all covered full- and part-time employees who
worked during, or received pay for, the pay period that includes the 12th day of the month. The
count should be unduplicated, so that for the reference period in any month, an employee should
be counted only once. Covered employees are those workers who are subject to state
Unemployment Insurance (UI) laws or the Unemployment Compensation for Federal Employee
(UCFE) program. For additional details on who is a covered employee and who is not, please
see Chapter 1, section 8 (1.8) of this manual.
For employers providing Multiple Worksite Report (MWR) data, the employee should be
counted at only one worksite during each referenced payroll period. Employees that work at
more than one site during a referenced payroll period should be reported where they worked the
most during that payroll period. Since some payroll systems do not store employment counts for
each pay period during the quarter, state QCEW staff should use their judgment as to where the
employee may be reported working at the end of the quarter. This assumes that the employee is
still working in that state and under the same Unemployment Insurance Account Number.
Total Quarterly Wages (sometimes called “gross wages” or simply “wages”) are the amount of
wages paid or payable (depending on the state law) to covered workers for services performed,
on all the payrolls of whatever type, during the quarter. Bonuses paid are included in the payroll
figures. Also included, when furnished with the job, is the cash value of such items as meals,
lodging, tips, and other gratuities, to the extent that state laws and regulations provide. Total
wages include both taxable wages and nontaxable wages and are reported by both taxable and
reimbursing subject employers.
------------------------- Contents of Chapter 15 ------------------------15.1 Common Employment Reporting Errors
15.2 Atypical Payments to Employees
15.3 Problem Industries
15.4 Related S-Memos

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-2

15.1 Common Employment Reporting Errors
End-of Quarter Count
Some employers may mistakenly provide a count of employment as of the time the Quarterly
Contribution Report (QCR) is received – possibly the payroll period at the end of the third month
of the quarter or the beginning of the following month. This is not generally the proper reference
period and, as a result, the employment level reported for that month is somewhat inaccurate.
Even more serious, employment for the first two months may be reported as the same figure or
even "guesstimated." Thus, data for the first two months of the quarter may be even more
inaccurate. This reporting situation may be the most difficult to identify. Identical monthly
employment counts and knowledge of the industry by state staff may be the best means of
determining that a problem exists.
While identical monthly employment may be accurate for establishments with a small
workforce, it is suspect when employment is large. Edit 128-W assigns a warning flag to records
with identical monthly employment when the employment exceeds a parameter.
Wage Record Count
The wage record count may be a more common problem, probably because this count is also
required by many states to be reported on the QCR. In what are called "wage reporting" states,
employers are required to report "wage items" or "wage records." This report is a listing by
Social Security Number of all persons receiving pay during the quarter along with their total
wages. Typically, the data are reported along with a count of the number of records (persons).
Some employers mistakenly believe that this wage record count is also the employment count
requested for the payroll period including the twelfth. They then report that same value for each
month on the QCR.
Only in an extreme case where the employment level is absolutely constant for the entire quarter
is the wage record count equal to the employment count for each of the three reference periods.
If there is any turnover or change in staffing, the wage record count will overstate the true
employment level for each reference period. The greater the degree of turnover or staffing
changes, the larger the overstatement. Again, knowledge of the industry by State staff may be
the best means of determining whether a problem exists.
Count of Checks (Payments) Issued
Some employers measure and report employment by counting the number of checks written
within the payroll system for a particular period. This approach provides an accurate
employment count only if the payroll system limits a person to one check per payroll period for

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-3

all types of wage payments combined. Otherwise, the employment count is overstated to the
degree that employees receive more than one check during the reference period. Possible types
of additional payments include bonuses, commissions, overtime pay, vacation pay, sick pay,
holiday pay, moving expenses, severance pay, and contributions to an employee savings plan
(e.g., 401(k)). Ensuring that a Social Security Number is counted no more than one time for the
appropriate reference period may facilitate generating a proper count.
It should also be noted that using the check date does not guarantee reporting for the proper
reference period. The reference payroll period is the payroll period for which – not in which –
the employee is being paid. If an employer pays with a time lag, a check for work in the
reference period will typically be dated in a later payroll period.
Cumulative Employment Counts
Some employers mistakenly provide cumulative counts of everyone who has worked for them
since the beginning of some time period. That period might be a calendar quarter, calendar year,
tax year, fiscal year, or another time frame. The resulting pattern of data reported shows
employment for each month at or above the level of the preceding month. When the employer's
file is purged, as it is periodically, a precipitous decline in reported employment results. Thus,
employment is overstated by an amount that grows each month until the overstatement becomes
substantial (again, the degree depends on worker turnover). Then a sizable drop in reported
employment appears, but it is due to an administrative practice, rather than any economic
phenomenon.
One practice that causes this type of overstatement of employment to occur is when an employer
reports the number of "active employees" each month. Again, if the employer's active file is not
updated every pay period to reflect turnover, an overstatement of monthly employment will
result until the file is subsequently purged. Frequently this purge will occur at the start of every
quarter, so while it is NOT always the case, one will usually find M1 employment to be much
smaller than it is for M3 in the current quarter as well as M3 in prior quarters as well. A pattern
of M1 perpetually being smaller than M2 and M3, both current and in prior quarters, may also be
evident.
Count of Available Employees
This count is provided typically by employers who maintain a file or list of employees who may
be called upon to work. The count reported is the number of people on that list, rather than
those who actually worked. Employment is overstated because the count adds those who were
potentially available but did not actually work during the relevant period to those who did work.
This situation is most likely to occur in industries such as education, retail sales, and temporary
help. In these industries, employers frequently maintain lists of certified substitute teachers,
contingent sales staff, and available temporaries.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-4

Non-covered Employment
Workers not covered under State UI and UCFE laws should not be counted in QCEW monthly
employment or total wage figures. The employment counts and wages reported on the States'
Quarterly Contribution Reports should include only those employees who are covered by UI and
UCFE. With relatively few exceptions, which may vary from state to state, UI coverage is
comprehensive throughout the United States. For more detailed information regarding each
state's UI coverage, refer to Comparison of State Unemployment Insurance Laws, published by
the Employment and Training Administration (ETA).
The following are notable limitations and exclusions of UI and UCFE coverage:
• Railroad workers covered by the Railroad Unemployment Insurance Act
• State and local government elected officials
• College and university students, spouses of students, student nurses, and interns who work
for the institution that they, or their spouse, attend. NOTE: This case is if they are paid
through nonmonetary compensation (such as tuition waivers or free room and board or the
work is part of a curricular requirement) OR they are NOT paid a wage above UI thresholds.)
• Nonprofit organizations with fewer than 4 employees
• Insurance and real estate agents compensated only by commissions
Handling Reporting Errors
If the state staff determine that the employer is providing incorrect employment counts (for
example, those described earlier in this section or some other problem not mentioned), the state
staff should ask the employer for additional information under certain conditions. If the
incorrect employment level provided by the employer was greater than 50 (note that this is the
level reported, not the magnitude of the error), then the state staff should follow the procedures
listed below.
1) Ask the employer if they use the services of a payroll service bureau, Certified Public
Accountant (CPA), bookkeeper, or some other agent, to prepare their QCR. If no, skip to
step 2 below. If yes, please obtain the name of the firm, address, phone number, and the
name of a contact at that firm from the employer. Also obtain from the employer, the
specific year and quarter that the firm started providing this service. The next step would be
to contact the firm providing the QCR preparation service and ask how the employment
counts are developed. Next, skip to step 4 for more instructions.
2) Ask the employer if the employment counts from the QCR are derived from reports prepared
by their own staff using payroll/tax filing software that was developed by their own staff
(a.k.a. as an in-house payroll/tax system). If no, skip to line 3 below. If yes, ask the
employer when (year and quarter) the system was first used and then determine how the
employment counts are developed. Then skip to step 4 for more instructions.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-5

3) Ask the employer if their software was purchased from a software vendor for use on a
personal computer, mainframe computer, client server, or some other computer system.
Assuming that the answer to the question is yes, please obtain the name of the firm, address,
phone number, and the name of a contact at that firm from the employer. Also determine
when (year and quarter) the employer began using that software and how the employment
counts are derived. If the employer answered no to this question, please repeat the questions
in steps 1 and 2 again as one of these three situations should be applicable.
4) With the information that was collected in either steps 1, 2, or 3, the state staff needs to
assess the impact of this problem on data for this employer and possibly other employers and
states as well. Please contact the appropriate regional office for assistance in resolving this
issue if any of the following apply: 1) the employer is large and the difference between the
reported values and the correct values are significant, 2) the reported/correct value
differences extend over more than two quarters, or 3) the software that was used to produce
the employment counts was also used by other employers (either from a service bureau or
similar type agent or was purchased from a vendor). If none of the factors just cited were
applicable, then correct the current quarter’s employment counts. When in doubt, the state
staff should consult the appropriate regional office for assistance.
When dealing with this type of problem, it is important to remember that the implementation of a
change in the method to compute the employment counts needs to be fully documented. The
differences in the method of reporting need to be distinguished from real changes in
employment. In the event that a service bureau or software vendor needs to change their method
to compute the employment counts, the national office would request that the employment
counts be prepared for a minimum of one quarter (preferably two quarters) under both methods
to quantify the differences in the counts. In addition, the new methodology would not be
introduced in the first or second quarters of the year as these changes would adversely impact the
development of the annual employment benchmarks for the Current Employment Statistics
program.

15.2 Atypical Payments to Employees
These guidelines should be followed when a state does not have a relevant UI law to address the
situation.
Back Wages
Occasionally a firm will pay employees or former employees’ back wages, usually as a result of
litigation that requires the employer to compensate an employee or group of employees. The
back wages awarded may sometimes be for pay periods many years in the past.
Back wage payments should be included in the total wages reported for the reference quarter in
which the back wage payment was made. Recipients of the back wages should be included in

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-6

the employment figures only if they were actively employed during the reference pay periods of
the quarter. If they receive both regular and back pay they should still be counted only one time.
For example, several former employees win a lawsuit in the 4th quarter stipulating that their
employer pay them back wages for services rendered during the 1st quarter. During the 4th
quarter (the quarter in which the back wages are paid), the former employees would not be
counted as employed (performed no work during the 4th quarter) but the wages would be
included in the total wages figure for the 4th quarter.
Although back wages are included in the total wage figure, any additional payments unrelated to
the previous employment (for example, punitive damages) should not be included in total wages.
Early Retirement Payments
Often, large corporations offer their employees an “early retirement incentive” or “early buyout”
to leave their positions before the standard retirement age. In many cases, employees will have a
choice of taking a lump sum payment or receiving a salary continuation for a fixed period of
time after they stop working.
If an individual receives a lump sum early retirement payment, the payment should be included
in the total wages in the quarter it was paid. The individual should not be counted as employed
in any 12th of the month reference pay period of the quarter following the individuals’ departure.
In the event that the individual is receiving a salary continuation, the regular payment should be
included in total wages for each quarter in which the payments were made. The employee
should be included in the monthly employment counts for each month payment was made.
Severance Pay
When a firm permanently lays off members of its workforce, the former employees will often be
compensated in the form of severance payments. Severance payments are typically made in
lump sum, but some employers may choose to distribute the payment in installments.
If a lump sum severance payment is made, the employer should report the payment in total
wages during the quarter that the payment was made. An individual receiving a lump sum
severance payment should not be counted as employed during payroll periods including the 12th
of the month following their departure. A layoff with lump sum severance payments typically
results in a lower employment count relative to the total wages figure (that is, higher average
wages).
If the permanently laid-off employee is receiving severance pay in installments, the person is
considered to be on paid administrative leave. Because a regular check is being received, the
individual should be included in the monthly employment counts during which payments are
received, and the severance payments should be included with total quarterly wages. This

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-7

scenario is distinct from employees that, after having been laid off, are receiving both UI benefits
and supplemental pay from their former employer. (See “Supplemental Pay During Layoff
Status” later in this section.)
Sick or Disability Payments by Third Party Insurance Companies
Many employees on extended sick or disability leave continue to receive pay from their
employers. In some cases, the employer has taken out insurance to cover these situations and a
third party insurance company instead of the employer makes sick or disability payments. Third
party insurance company payments deserve special attention because of the way they are treated
under state UI laws and the potential for the employer to report these employees and payments
inaccurately.
Sick or disability pay, paid by either the employer or a third party insurance company, but not
paid under Worker’s Compensation, is taxed as wages for the first six months under UI laws in
all states. Individuals receiving such pay should be counted as employed and the pay should be
included in total wages. Worker’s Compensation payments are never taxed as wages for UI or
included in total wages. Persons receiving Worker’s Compensation should not be counted as
employed.
If sick or disability pay from the employer and/or third party insurance company continues after
six months, it is taxed as wages for UI and included in total wages only in the following states:
Arkansas
Montana
Nebraska
New Hampshire

New Mexico
North Carolina
Puerto Rico
South Dakota

When third party sick and disability payments are taxed for UI, associated employees should not
be counted as employed twice in the event that the employer pays part of the salary during the
illness and the third party insurance company makes up the difference. That is, if the associated
employee is given two separate checks, the employee must only be counted as employed once.
It is also important that the employment and wages be reported for the correct reference period.
Insurance companies do not have to report to the employer the sick or disability payments they
make until the 15th of the following month. This time lag may cause an employer to report
employment and pay in the wrong month or quarter. Employment and wages should be included
in the state system and the EQUI for the reference period in which the payment was actually
made by the insurance company.
To ensure that the data are reported correctly, state QCEW staff should evaluate each case
individually and question the employer about the following factors:
1. The employer’s policy with an insurance company.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-8

2. Whether the employer also makes payment to the employee along with the insurance
company.
3. How the employer’s payroll system is programmed to pick up these payments for UI/QCEW
purposes (does it check for duplicate payments, ignore the payments, or report the employees
and payments for the wrong reference period).
4. If the employer uses a payroll service bureau, how the payroll service bureau’s tax system is
programmed to pick up these payments.
5. How long a time period the payments have been made to determine whether they are still
taxable under the state’s UI law and should be reported.
Stock Options
Many professionals and executives receive company stock options from their employers as part
of their compensation, often as a form of bonus or incentive pay. Both federal and state
unemployment insurance laws have defined covered wages to include remuneration other than
cash. Therefore, unless stock options are specifically excluded from the definition of wages by a
State’s unemployment insurance laws, they should be reported as wages for QCEW purposes. If
state QCEW staff has any concerns about stock options reported by employers, they should
contact their UI tax unit for a ruling on their state’s law.
Supplemental Pay During Layoff Status
If an employee of a firm is placed on a temporary or permanent layoff, an employer may choose
to supplement, with a regular check, the unemployment insurance benefits being received by the
former employer. Often, the supplement pay will make up the difference between the
employee’s unemployment insurance check and regular pay, or some percentage of that
difference. Employees who receive UI payments that are supplemented by company checks,
even if they are distributed regularly through payroll, should not be counted as employed. The
supplemental pay should not be included in total wages.
Note that a firm may have different procedures for handling temporary or permanent layoffs
depending on the specific company contract. The special procedures can potentially impact
whether employment, wages, or both are included in the state system and the EQUI. Questions
should be directed to the appropriate regional office.
Vacation Funds
Establishments that manage vacation funds for employee groups are classified in NAICS
525120, "Health and Welfare Funds.” These types of establishments invest employeecontributed funds on their behalf and then distribute the moneys to the participants once a year.
When vacation moneys are distributed, these establishments may incorrectly report a count of the
checks issued to participants as employment. While the moneys paid out to participants should
be reported as wages during the reference period in which the payments are made, the recipients

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-9

should not be counted in employment. Only those persons employed in managing the funds
should be counted in employment. Large once-a-year increases in employment in NAICS
525120 should be investigated even if the increases are reflected in historical data. All of the
large increase in NAICS 525 should be reviewed.
NAICS 525 - Funds, Trusts, and Other Financial Vehicles is a NAICS Subsector that was created
during the conversion from SIC to NAICS. According to the NAICS manual, this subsector is
comprised of “legal entities” that have “little or no employment and no revenue from the sale of
services.” The manual directs that establishments that are engaged in managing funds, trust, and
other financial vehicles be classified in NAICS 5239 – Portfolio Management. For more
information, see QCEW S-13-03 and S-19-04.

Workers Paid During a Strike
If employees are on strike but are still collecting pay from their employer for personal leave
(annual or sick), the individuals should continue to be counted as employed, and their pay
included in total wages.

15.3 Problem Industries
Professional Employer Organizations (PEOs)
NAICS 561330, “Professional Employer Organizations," includes employee-leasing companies,
which lease employees to client firms on a contractual basis. Many businesses, small businesses
in particular, have found it financially advantageous to transfer their workers to employee leasing
companies because the arrangement relieves the businesses of human resource and
administrative work. It also allows more time to be devoted to the actual business and offers
their workers access to potentially better benefits that otherwise would not be affordable. The
advantages gained by using a leasing company have led many employers to enter into this
arrangement. A key aspect of the leasing firm/client relationship is that the employees of the
client that are subsequently leased from the leasing firm are now considered to be employees of
the leasing firm. This leads to the erroneous reporting of leased employees in NAICS 561330,
when in reality they are working in other industries.
To obtain accurate data from employee leasing companies and their clients, the state should treat
establishments taken over by a leasing firm as sub-units of the leasing firm. Employment and
wage data for a sub-unit should be classified using the industry code that correctly identifies the
primary industrial activity of the sub-unit and in the geographic location (state and county) in
which the sub-unit is physically located, not the state and county of the leasing firm. Only the
staff in the leasing company’s administrative offices should be coded in NAICS 561330 and the

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-10

geographical code of the leasing company. To obtain this information, states will need to request
that all leasing companies file a Multiple Worksite Report listing all of their clients’ worksites.
In most cases, only a small portion (executives & managers) or none of the client’s staff will
remain on the payroll of the original firm. The workers normally are transferred to the leasing
company. If the executives and management staff do not move to the leasing company, the
client firm’s account would remain active in the UI system and the state system. The remaining
employees would still be reported under the old UI account. QCEW staff should ask the
appropriate UI staff in their State for assistance to determine exactly how leasing firms are
administered in their State.
When a leasing firm initially breaks out their clients by worksite, they should provide the clients’
trade names, former UI account numbers (predecessors), physical location addresses, and a
description of their client’s economic activities. If their client’s industry code is unknown, the
state staff should collect this information as well. Predecessor UI numbers and successor UI
numbers need to be assigned to each worksite. They allow for longitudinal tracking of an
establishment. See Section 5.1 for more information on assigning predecessor/successor
UI/RUNs. With the UI account number, states have the ability to locate a client’s previous
record on their state system. From this previous record, industry and geographic codes can be
determined and applied to the new record reported by the leasing company. The address and
industry description information reported by the leasing company for the client should be used to
ensure that the present industry and geographic codes are correct. If the existing codes do not
compare with the information reported by the leasing company, the state should call the leasing
company to ensure that the correct codes are assigned. If a client is found to have incorrect
industry and/or geographic codes, the correct codes should be assigned both to the client's record
reported by the leasing company and to the client's original record. These changes, however,
should be held until the following first quarter, as described below.
States should include on the Code Change Supplement any shifts in employment and wages from
the NAICS code and geographic area of leasing companies to the NAICS code and area of
clients and vice versa. The procedures for doing so appear in Chapter 11. When an employee
leasing company that previously did not break out their clients' worksites begins reporting by
worksite, the clients' employment and wages that were being reported in NAICS 561330 and in
the geographic area of the leasing company need to be placed into their proper industries and
areas, as described above. This action is considered to be a non-economic code change and
should be made effective as of the beginning of the calendar year.
For example, a leasing company using the MWR for the first time in the second quarter reports a
restaurant with 50 employees. In this case, a code change has to be made to show 50 employees
moving from NAICS 561330 to NAICS 722511 and from the geographic area of the leasing
company to the area of the restaurant, if necessary, as of the subsequent first quarter. The MWR
for the second, third, and fourth quarter will still be collected, but the employment and wages of
the client will remain in NAICS 561330 and the geographic code of the leasing company until
the following first quarter. The same process would be followed if the restaurant had previously
been miscoded in NAICS 722410. The restaurant's original record would remain coded in
722410 until the following first quarter when it would be changed to 722511. The restaurant's

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-11

record reported by the leasing company will have NAICS 722410 until 2020/1quarter, when it
also will change to 722511.
When an employee-leasing firm completes the MWR on a regular basis and reports a client for
the first time, the state should immediately assign the previous industry and geographic code of
the client to the new record. This assumes the client is a single location employer. The state
should obtain the client's UI account number from the leasing company and use it to locate the
client's previous record. Once it is located and verified, use it to assign the client record’s
Predecessor UI and Reporting Unit Numbers.
If the client operates multiple worksites, the state should check that the client also filed an MWR.
If the client did provide an MWR, then the industry and geographic codes of the worksites
should be assigned to the corresponding worksites reported by the leasing company. If the client
did not provide an MWR, then all of the client's worksites should be assigned the present
industry and geographic code of the client. These code changes should once again be held until
the following first quarter. The state should also compare the client's worksites as reported by
the leasing company to the worksites reported by the client to ensure that duplicate reporting
does not occur or that a month or more of reporting is not mistakenly skipped. If the state
encounters any problems during this process, they should contact their regional offices for
assistance.
States should investigate large, sudden growth in employment in NAICS 561330 to ensure that it
is not due to inaccurate reporting by leasing companies. If multi-state employee leasing
companies are found to be reporting incorrectly, states should refer these to their regional office
for forwarding to the national office for further follow-up and evaluation.
Education Industry
Some employees in the education industry may be paid less frequently than once a month. For
example, adjunct professors may receive remuneration once or twice while teaching during an
entire semester (which typically lasts four months). Some school bus drivers may be paid every
six weeks. This would erroneously reduce the employment count whenever a non-payment
month occurred. The state should advise the employer to include these individuals in the
employment counts each month. To accomplish this goal may entail manual adjustment of each
month’s employment count by a fixed amount.
Also in the education industry, many college professors are paid to teach a fixed number of
courses. If they teach more than that number, they may receive additional compensation in the
form of more than one check. In this case, the individual should only be included in the
employment count once. See Count of Checks (Payments) Issued.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

Page 15-12

University/Teaching Hospitals
Many state universities and larger private universities operate hospitals from which medical
schools are based. Others have affiliations with a public or private hospital from which they
conduct their medical school programs. The university units and hospital units should be
reported separately in NAICS 611310 and NAICS 622110, respectively. However, there may be
a tendency by some institutions to count workers in both the university and hospital reporting
units. Employment may also shift back and forth between the units. Data inconsistencies
should be checked with the employer to ensure that there is no double count.
Television and Film Industry
Payroll practices in the Television and Film Industry often cause confusion. There are two
distinct situations that occur in the industry, one of which is reported, the other excluded.
An actor under contract for a television series typically shoots a season’s worth of episodes in a
two-to-three month period. The actor is not actually working on the series during the rest of the
year, but is paid throughout the season contract period. Since such actors are under contract,
they are still considered as employed and are ineligible for UI benefits during that period.
Therefore, their employment and wages should be reported on the state system and the EQUI
throughout the contract period even though they are not technically at work.
An actor, no longer under contract for specific advertising commercial or television series work,
receives “residual” payments for that work when it is re-broadcast. Residual payments are often
made many years after the actual work is performed. These actors should not be counted as
employed nor should the residual payments be included in total wages. Furthermore,
unemployed actors receiving residual payments are eligible for UI benefits, albeit reduced. It
would be contradictory to count a person eligible for or receiving UI benefits as employed on the
state system and the EQUI.

15.4 Related S-Memos
Some S-memorandums clarify handling of coverage and reporting problems. See below for a
list.
S-13-02

01/23/13

Assigning NAICS and CTY Codes to Telework Establishments

S-13-03
525

04/11/13

NAICS Coding Review for establishments classified in NAICS

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Recurring Coverage and Reporting Problems

S-18-01

01/18/18

Assigning Industry Classification for Temporary Help Agencies

S-18-02
(Revised)

01/18/18

Assigning Industry Classification for Online Retail Enterprises

Page 15-13

S-18-03
01/18/18
Assigning Industry Classification for Wholesale Trade
Representatives and Offices (Revised)
S-18-09
Firm (LOR)

04/04/18

Multi Breakout and Proration Guidance for Large Online Retail

S-19-03
01/23/19
Treatment of North American Industry Classification System
(NAICS) 551114 - Corporate, Subsidiary, and Regional Managing Offices in Quarterly Census
of Employment and Wages (QCEW)
S-19-04
01/23/19
Update to North American Industry Classification System
(NAICS) Guidance for Qualified Settlement Funds (QSFs)
S-19-05
01/28/19
Treatment of Factoryless Good Producers (FGPs) in the Quarterly
Census of Employment and Wages (QCEW)

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Appendix A – Flowcharts
---------- Contents of Appendix A ---------A.1 Main Processing Flow
A.2 Annual Refiling Survey: Web & State Collection
A.3 Centrally Collected MWR and Federal Data from EDIC
A.4 MWR Data Collected in State
A.5 Processing existing multi-establishment employers

Page A-1

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page A-2

A.1 Main Processing Flow
1 | State, UI Tax Depts.
Receive and process QCRs
and Initial Status Forms

2 | State Systems Developers
Prepare and issue State
computer system upgrades
(as needed)

3 | State LMI Units
Install computer system
upgrades

A

ARS Web &
State collected

D

Federal & RFEW
State collected

E

Geocode Files

4 | State LMI Units
Extract quarterly data from
UI tax files, BLS files, and
employer reports to LMI.

5 | State LMI Units
Place data into State QCEW
micro database

6 | State LMI Units
Implement industry,
geographic, and other
miscellaneous non-economic
and economic changes

7 | State LMI Units
Perform micro edits

8 | State LMI Units
Clean and explain data

MWR/RFEW EDI
central reporting

B

MWR
State collected

C

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page A-3

Main Processing Flow (continued)
9 | State LMI Units
Extract quarterly data from
UI tax files for second time
(step may repeat)

10 | State LMI Units
Impute for missing data

11 | State LMI Units
Edit, clean, and explain new
and imputed data

12 | State LMI Units
Aggregate micro data

13 | State LMI Units
Perform integrated macro
and micro edits

14 | State LMI Units
Clean and explain data

15 | State LMI Units
& R.O.’s
Report status
information
(ongoing)

16 | OFO – N
Compile and
disseminate status
information
(ongoing)

19 | State LMI Units
Produce full EQUI data
deliverable for BLS

17 | State LMI Units
Provide macro
summary data to
regional offices

18 | R.O.’s
Review macro data

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Main Processing Flow (continued)
20 | State LMI Units
Submit EQUI data deliverable
and transmittal form

21 | DBES
Generate macro level
estimates for missing or
unusable State files

Data files/reports to
BEA & CES

F

22 | DBES
Process states’ data through
BLS EQUI edit system

23 | DBES
Provide data to DASLT

24 | DASLT, DBES, R.O.’s, and
State LMI units
Review edit outputs

26 | R.O.s
Coordinate with states to
clean and explain data further
as needed

27 | State LMI Units
Clean and explain data in
response to BLS edits and
questions

25 | DASLT, DBES
Assess data for production of
deliverables

Page A-4

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page A-5

Main Processing Flow (continued)

28 | DASLT, R.O.s, & State LMI
Units
Correct the Official EQUI file

29 | DBES
Process BLS Corrections and
States’ EQUI update
transactions

Data files/reports to
BEA & CES

G

30 | DASLT, DBES, R.O.’s, and
State LMI units
Review edit/correction
outputs

31 | DASLT & R.O.s
Sign off on review/Certify
data as clean

32 | State LMI Units
Produce State
Publications

33 | DBES
Pass micro data to
LDB as each state is
signed off by CDA
Business
Employment
Dynamics

I

Deliverable to BEA,
CES, & ETA/LAUS

34 | DBES
Produce CCS data
deliverables (Q1
and Q2 cycles only)

35 | DBES
Extract files for
publication, press
releases, and data
releases

36 | DASLT, DBES
Perform nondisclosure
screening

37 | DASLT, DBES
Create & validate publication,
press and data releases

38 | DASLT, DBES
Publish

H

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page A-6

A.2 Annual Refiling Survey: Web & State Collection
1 | DASLT, DBES
Create and send states ARS
control file & National Change
of Address update
2 | State LMI Units
Load ARS control file &
National Change of Address
update into State system

3 | DASLT
Email blasts

3 | DASLT, DBES, CARS
ARS Web and NVM Web
Solicitation

7 | State LMI Units
Perform micro edits

C
Potential
New MWR
reporters

4 | CARS/State LMI Units
Receive, review, and enter
ARS responses states load
ARS & NVM Web Responses
into the State system

4 | State LMI Units, R.O.s
Generate and submit SMR
reports (monthly)

5 | CARS/State LMI Units
Conduct follow-up as needed

5 | R.O.s, DASLT
Receive SMR reports and
monitor states’ progress

6 | State LMI Units
Closeout ARS

ARS data to
State system

A

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page A-7

A.3 Centrally Collected MWR and Federal Data from EDIC
1 | EDIC, DASLT
Solicit reporting of
MWR/RFEW data centrally
via EDI (new EDI reporters)

2 | EDIC
Evaluate test submittals of
MWR/RFEW EDI data

3 | EDIC
Set up new MWR/RFEW EDI
reporters for production
reporting

6 | EDIC
Prepare & Send New,
Problem, Delinquent EIN-UI
report to N.O., R.O., & State

4 | EDIC
Receive, review, edit, &
process quarterly
MWR/RFEW EDI data (new
and existing reporters)

B.2 | EDIC
Works with respondent to
verify or revise data and
responds to data followup/question

5 | EDIC
Distribute centrally collected
MWR/RFEW data to states

B.1 | State LMI, R.O., N.O
Data follow-up / questions
sent to EDIC

Load into
State system
See A.5

B

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

Page A-8

A.4 MWR* Data Collected in State

1 | State LMI Units
Set up or discontinue in State
MWR reporters in the State
system

2 | State LMI Units, MWR
Print Contractor
Solicit reporting of MWR data
(newly disaggregated multis)

2.1|MWR Print Contractor
Send respondent load file
to states to load in their
State system

3 | State LMI Units
Receive, review, and enter
data submitted by respondent
or load and review data from
MWR print contractor

4 | State LMI Units, MWR
Print Contractor
Conduct follow-up as needed

C|D

* This process may also apply to RFEW data collection

See A.5

QCEW Operating Manual
Documenting and Validating State Operations

September 30, 2019

Page A-9

A.5 Processing existing multi-establishment employers
Returned MWR

Paper MWR

MWR print

MWR Web

EDI

[email protected]

[email protected]

https://199.221.111.47/login.aspx

Transcribe revisions and
update quarterly
employment and wage
data

Load Transmittal

Review, examine for:
 Changes
 Comments
 Large changes in employment and wage data
 Multi Balance edit failures

Change to Existing
Runs

Deaths: Economic
change. Unit
closed/out of
business in this
quarter. CC: 86

County | Ownership
| NAICS: Determine
if economic or noneconomic and apply
change accordingly

New RUNs added

Transfers. Pred/succ
CC: 92/93. Link &
verify county, own,
NAICS, & flow of
E&W

Improved Reporting.
Previous distribution
incorrect. CC: 48

Questions: States may contact the respondent
and/or MWR print, MWR Web, or the EDI
center depending on collection methodology.

Add comment codes and narrative to help explain the data

Births: Economic
change. New unit
opening in this
quarter. CC: 85

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

May 2019

Page B-1

Appendix B – Data Element Definitions
The following are data elements used in the QCEW program. Nearly all of these elements are
included on the QCEW micro file database or in supplemental files in the state and national
office systems, while most are also on the Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI)
file (shown in Appendix K). The following descriptive information is provided for some or all
of the data elements:
Descriptive Information

Explanation

Requirement level

Shows whether the data element is required, optional,
required when available, and so on.

EQUI:

Identifies if the data field is included, if available, on the
EQUI record or supplemental EQUI predecessor/successor
(P/S) record
“Include, P/S Record” identifies that the field is included on
the supplemental EQUI with additional predecessor/
successor information.

Positions:

Positions where the field is found on the regular EQUI
record or on the supplemental separate EQUI
predecessor/successor record, if applicable

Frequency:

Non-quarterly (most administrative and address data
appearing on the micro file once) or quarterly (most
economic and code data appearing on the micro file for each
quarter)

Field Length:

Number of positions allowed for the data element on each
record

Type:

Description of the field as numeric or alphanumeric

Default Value:

Known default values (e.g., if unknown, zero-fill)

Alternate Name:

Frequently used abbreviation or alternate names used for the
field (e.g., OWN for ownership code)

Format:

Description of special formatting required (e.g., date fields
are: four positions for year, two for month, and two for day
or YYYYMMDD)

Source:

Data source for states to obtain this information (e.g., state
Unemployment Insurance (UI) system, system-assigned,
assigned by QCEW staff)

Definition:

Precise definition of the data element

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-2

Descriptive Information
Valid Values:

Explanation
Valid values associated with the field if valid values must be
used (e.g., Multi-establishment Employer Indicator (MEEI)
codes must equal 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6). In some cases, the
appropriate appendix reference is cited instead of repeating a
long list.

System Action or Notes:

Special notes related to a particular data element

Example

Examples used to clarify the proper definition or to
demonstrate specific cases or scenarios

Caution

Special instructions and warnings related to the proper use of
the data element

Rounding Criteria:

Procedures for rounding certain numeric fields such as Total
and Taxable Wages

Data elements are typically listed in alphabetic order. In some cases, (e.g., monthly
employment) data are clustered together.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-3

A
Action Code (Predecessor/Successor)
(Required)
EQUI:
Include, P/S record
Positions:
20
Frequency:
Transaction
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
PS-Action
Source:
System-assigned
Definition: Identifies the situation on the EQUI where the predecessor/successor transaction
should be added or deleted from BLS files. The UI account/Reporting Unit Number (RUN),
format type, and predecessor or successor UI account/RUN combine to identify a unique linkage.
Changes to other fields on the supplemental EQUI P/S record such as source codes and comment
information update the existing linkage information.
Valid Values:
D = Delete the transaction information
Blank = Add/update the transaction information
Address/Contact Source
(Optional)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Position:
798
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
Address Source, Contact
Source, PL-SO, addr-source
Source:
State UI system (if available), Web collection, outside sources such as
InfoUSA or Dunn and Bradstreet
Definition: Identifies if the physical location address was obtained through a traditional QCEW
source or a more non-traditional source.
Valid Values:
R = Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) refiling
A* = Current Employment Statistics (CES) Program
E = Employer Contact
F* = Occupational Employment Statistics (OES) Federal/State Program
W = Web
S = Status Determination Form
I = InfoUSA
T = UI Tax system
O = Other
*Note: The use of codes A and F is no longer acceptable since information from the CES and
OES programs cannot be used in the QCEW microdata.
Agent Code
(Required if available and maintained by UI and/or obtained from agent submittal tapes)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
577-580
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 4
Type:
Alphanumeric

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

May 2019

Default Value:

Blank

Page B-4

Third Party Agent, PPF,
AGENT, agent_cd
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric, left justified if alphanumeric
Source:
State UI system; Payroll provider or tax filer code if obtained and maintained
directly from agent reported files listing each client for the reference quarter.
Definition: Identifies the source of the reported data. This code should be used only if it is
updated on a regular basis by UI or the agent and readily available. The Agent Code will be used
to identify companies, such as payroll providing firms and tax filing firms, who file UI reports
for other establishments. This identifier information will be very useful in conducting research
on reporting procedures.
Special Criteria: A master list of each state’s codes (if used) must be submitted to national
office. The list would normally include national payroll providers and national tax filers. An
updated list must be provided each year by those states using/providing this information.
Special Processing: A mechanism is required to ensure that this field is properly maintained. If
an employer ceases to use the services of a particular agent, the agent code should not be used
after the quarter for which the agent reported data.
Caution: Do not use this field if it is not readily available and maintained by UI or information
provided by the agent. Although this field will not be edited, it will be used for research
purposes. Standardized codes for commonly used agents may be established in the future.
Note: The “QCEW System Developers Guide for Standardized UI Extract”, which can be found
on Stateweb, calls for this field to be extracted using a field length of 10. When loaded to EXPO
or WIN, these are truncated to the first four positions.
ARS Response Code
(Required if ever refiled)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-Quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Alternate Names:

Positions:
546-547
Field Length: 2
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Refile Code, ARS Code, RC,
response-cd
Source:
ARS Control File (as provided by BLS and loaded by states into their standard
state QCEW system); QCEW staff (user updates to the micro file); Centralized
Annual Refiling Survey (CARS) system.
Definition: On the ARS Refiling Control File, this code gives the processing status of a record
included in the refiling survey. On the state and national office micro files, this code shows the
status of a record when it was last refiled or when it was subsequently updated for purposes of
generating the CCS, as described in Chapter 11. This information is maintained until the next
refiling or noneconomic change to the NAICS, county, township (New England and New Jersey)
or ownership codes. For example, if the record was refiled in 2014, the ARS Response Code for
that refiling record would be retained through the 2016/4 data on the EQUI submittal. It would
change if refiled in 2017/1 or if one of the codes were changed earlier.
Valid Values: The valid ARS Response Code values and definitions are provided in Appendix
Q.
Caution: These data are not available from UI tax files. This information is loaded to the control
file from BLS-created ARS control files, batch updates, CARS, scanning, system action, or
manually. The control file is used to update the micro files in EXPO. The micro file can also be
updated manually on a limited basis or for late ARS updates made after the control file was

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

May 2019

Page B-5

copied to the microdata file for the last time . In the WIN system, the NAICS, ownership, and
area codes are maintained in the micro file while the control file information maintains the ARS
Refile Year and ARS Response Code.
ARS Refile Year
(Required if refiled)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
548-551
Field Length: 4
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
ARS Year, Response Year,
REFYR, refile-yr
Format:
YYYY (four-digit year, e.g., "2017")
Source:
ARS Control File (system transferred as discussed below); QCEW staff (user
updates to the micro file).
Definition: Fiscal year in which the record was last included in the ARS, or was last included on
the CCS, or the reference year that reflected the noneconomic code change.
Valid Values: Year greater than 1996
Sources of ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year:
The state QCEW systems transfer several data elements from their ARS refiling systems to their
QCEW micro file database, preferably during first quarter processing. Data elements that are
transferred include ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year. These two fields are used to
generate the Code Change Supplement (CCS) file, and to show when the reporting unit was last
surveyed and what response was recorded or when the reporting unit had its latest noneconomic
code change.
Example: BLS and states begin refiling activity in summer 2016 and conclude it in late spring or
early summer of 2017, so the ARS Refile Year is 2017 (both the fiscal year of the ARS and the
reference year when the ARS codes would be made effective). The ARS Refile Year as well as
the ARS Response Code would be passed from the refiling system to the micro file for first
quarter 2017 processing. If the survey identified a noneconomic code change, that change would
be implemented in the 2017 first quarter. The ARS Refile Year and ARS Response Code on the
micro file work together in the state and national office systems to place the reporting unit on the
2017 CCS file.
Note: Some noneconomic code changes are identified from sources other than the ARS,
including multi-unit breakouts and consolidations; in addition, some code changes are identified
too late to be entered through the refiling system. Therefore, QCEW staff may need to update
ARS Refile Year, ARS Response Code, and other fields directly on the micro file and/or Control
File.
Caution: This information is not extracted from the UI tax file. Reference EXPO or WIN
documentation for system-specific details.
ARS Verification Year
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank
Format:

Positions:
556-559
Field Length: 4
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
ARS Year, ARS Verification
Year, Verify Year, VFYYR
YYYY (four-digit year, e.g., "2017")

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-6

Source:
System assigned. This field will be system generated in the state systems.
Definition: Fiscal year in which the reporting unit last received a usable ARS response. When
the ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year are copied from the ARS system to the micro file,
the system copies the ARS Refile Year to this field if the ARS Response Code is one of the
following:
41
Reviewed, no refiling changes (no NAICS, county, township (New England or New Jersey
only) or ownership change) on a single or subunit record. Response Code 41 is also assigned to
a reviewed master record (MEEI =2) with or without any code changes. This code is also used
for refiling records that changed from unclassified to classified area where the NAICS is
unchanged.
42
Employer misunderstood industry description but codes are correct.
46
Clean record with CCS updates from the ARS refiling. Noneconomic code change made to
NAICS, county, township (New England and New Jersey only) or ownership.
50
Code changes from non-refiling sources. Noneconomic code change made to NAICS, county,
township (New England and New Jersey only) or ownership but not from the ARS refiling.
57*
Code changes from non-refiling sources. Noneconomic code change made to the 2002 NAICS
resulting in a 2007 NAICS code as well.
76*
Code change to industry code, county, township (New England and New Jersey only) or
ownership also results in a NAICS 2007 code assignment.
77*
2007 NAICS code assigned during refiling but with no correction to the 2002-based NAICS
code. (Employer may or may not have misunderstood the industry description but the 2002based NAICS code was correct.) There were no changes to the county, township (New
England and New Jersey only) or ownership codes. Response code 77 will also be systemassigned to those industries that directly map from a specific 2002-based code to one 2007based code where no other noneconomic code change is made.
*Note: ARS Response Codes 57, 76, and 77 were used for processing and monitoring the 2007
NAICS revision. They are no longer used.
This data element will allow users in the state and in BLS to tell how recently the existing
industry code and other codes were assigned or verified. It is system-assigned based on the ARS
Response Code and ARS Refile Year.
Valid Values: Year later than 1996
Caution: This field is derived from the ARS Refile Year and ARS Response Code.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-1

B
Business Transfer Company
(Optional for state systems, not reported on the EQUI)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 50 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
None
Source:
MWR Web collection system
Definition: Name of the other company involved in the business transfer event based on
information from the respondent and not from the successor account. This information is sent to
the state on the MWR Web Collected Data File and is accompanied by a Business Transfer
Event Type.
Valid Values for Business Transfer Event Types:
1 = Acquired another company
2 = Been sold to another company
3 = Been in a merger
4 = Reorganized
5 = Opened a new UI account

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-1

C
Census ID
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
779-793
Field Length: 15 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
census-id, BLOCK, BL-ST,
BLCTY, BLBLK, BLTRA
Source:
BLS-supplied from Global Innovative Systems software
Definition: Census ID is a 15 digit field that is actually comprised of
• 2 digit state FIPS code
• 3 digit county code assigned by the geocoding software
• 6 digit tract code
• 1 digit block code
• 3 digit detailed block classification (this may or may not be assigned to a record based on the
Physical Location Address (PLA))
Caution: Portions of this field may be blank. The county code generated by the geocoding
software may differ from the quarterly county code. When reconciling these differences between
the geocoded county and the one on the file, any change to the quarterly county code would be
treated as a noneconomic code change and should be processed appropriately. Also note that if
the physical location address changes or the latitude and longitude change, the census ID may
also change.
Check Digit
(Optional for state systems)
EQUI:
Exclude
Position:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Zero or blank
Alternate Names:
Ck Digit; chkdig, CKD
Source:
System generated
Definition: The UI Account Number check digit. It may or may not be used in a state. It is
optional, for use only on state files. Check digits are used in some state tax systems and QCEW
systems to ensure that new data and data changes are applied to the proper record and not
accidentally to the wrong record.
Valid Values: 0 through 9, if this element is used.
Example: Some states copy UI tax file check digits to the state system when the check digit is
needed in conjunction with the UI Account number to access information from the tax file.
Note: Some states include the check digit of the account number in EXPO or WIN as part of the
ten digit UI account number, typically appended to the right of the UI account number.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-2

Class Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
777-778
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Class, City Class , city-id,
Format:
First position is a letter and the second position is either blank or a number
Source:
BLS-assigned and forwarded to states in conjunction with place codes.
Definition: Class code identifier that explains the Place/City code field. If no place/city code is
assigned, then no class code will be assigned either.
Valid Values:
Class C1-C9: Incorporated Places
Class U1-U9: Populated (Community) Places (Except Those Associated with Facilities)
Class D1-D9: American Indian Areas
Class E1-E7: Alaska Native Areas
Class H1-H6: Counties and County Equivalents
Class T1-T5: Active Minor Civil Divisions
Class Z1-Z8: Inactive or Nonfunctioning Primary County Divisions
Class G: Nongovernment Facilities
Class M1-M9: Federal Facilities
Class N1-N9: State, Local, and International Government Facilities
Class A1-A5: Airports
Class B:
Post Offices Not Corresponding to Other Locational Entities
Class S:
Surface Transportation Facilities
Class X1-X6: Obsolete or Incorrect Names or Entities
Note: For more detailed information, use the following website:
https://www.census.gov/geo/reference/class.html
Special Handling: If the place/city code is blank, blank out class codes as well. If the place/city
code is assigned, also include the class code. If deleting an incorrect place/city code, also
remove the class code.
Collection Mode Indicator (CMI)
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
725-726
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
CMI
Source:
System-assigned in some cases by the state systems, ARS Control File, CARS
Definition:
This code identifies records with ARS responses collected by the ARS Web
system.
Valid Values:
The valid Collection Mode indicator values and definitions are provided in
Appendix Q.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-3

Collection Status ID
(Provided from web collection systems)
EQUI:
Exclude
Position:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
None
Source:
Web collection systems
Definition: Information from the web collection systems regarding the collection status of the
Multiple Worksite Report (MWR) information sent to the states on the MWR Web Collected
Data File.
Valid Values:
1 = No action required
2 = Change mail indicator to Y and resume sending MWR forms to the respondent
3 = Employer is now a single worksite account. State action is required. This
information will be printed out in EXPO and WIN so that the state QCEW analyst
knows that an action is needed.
4 = UI account is no longer active. This information will be printed out in EXPO and
WIN so that the state QCEW analyst knows that a potential action is needed.
5 = No action required
6 = No action required
Comment Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
662-663, 664-665, 666-667
Field Length: 2
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
CC, CMNT, CMT1, CMT2,
CMT3, com_1, com_2, com_3
Source:
QCEW Staff; Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) Center (for worksites of
centrally collected employers), MWR, MWR Web collection system
Definition: Code used to explain fluctuations or changes in the data, especially changes which
cause current records to be flagged as questionable. Only standard QCEW comment codes may
be used. These are defined in Appendix I. Additional information on using comment codes can
be found in Section 9.6 of the manual.
Note: Three comment code fields, each with a field length of 2, are available in state systems
and on the EQUI. When only one comment code is assigned to a record, place it in the first
comment code field. When two codes are assigned, place them in the first and second comment
code fields.
Valid Values: Comment codes 37, 38, 62-74, and 94 are invalid for the QCEW program.
Comment code 99 should only be used if a narrative comment is also provided.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-4

(QCEW) Contact Name (Attention Line)
(Required if available for multi master records, optional for singles, not required for subunits)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
850-884
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Contact Name, Attention Line,
Name, contact, CO-NM
Format:
Left justified
Source:
State UI system (if available); ARS or MWR forms (optional entry), CARS,
MWR Web collection systems.
Definition: Name of a specific person or department (e.g. Payroll Office) to whom the LMI
forms or questions are directed. According to U.S. Post Office standards, the contact name or
attention line is an optional line for additional address information to facilitate delivery. For
those records and information collected via the web, this is the web respondent.
Note: State staffs are not required to manually enter this field.
Caution: If both a UI contact and a MWR contact exist and are different, then enter the MWR
contact. Other contact information (e.g., contact title) should match with the contact name.
Contact name and contact title should be entered, changed or deleted together. When a name
changed, the title may likely change as well.
(QCEW) Contact Title
(Required if available for multi master records, optional for singles, not required for subunits)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
885-919
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Contact Title, Title, contacttitle, CO-TI
Format:
Left justified
Source:
State UI system (if available); ARS or MWR forms (optional entry), CARS,
MWR Web collection systems.
Definition: The title of the contact name provided on the ARS or MWR forms or through the
Web collection systems. For example, titles may include: vice president, CEO, accountant, etc.
Note: State staffs are not required to manually enter this field.
Caution: If both a UI contact and a MWR contact exist and are different, then enter the MWR
contact title. Other contact information (e.g., contact name) should match with the contact title.
Contact name and contact title should be entered, changed or deleted together. When a name
changed, the title may likely change as well.

May 2019

Contributions (Due)
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: None

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-5

Positions:
650-658
Field Length: 9
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Contributions, CTB, Insurance
Taxes, Taxes, Subject Taxes,
contrib, CTRB
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros
Source:
State UI system; system imputations (worksites); QCEW staff (corrections,
other); system-calculated
Definition: Amount of money due to the state for the Unemployment Insurance benefit program
for the reference quarter, on all the payrolls during the reference quarter. Currently these data
are submitted several ways:
Reported contributions extracted from state UI system
Contributions due extracted from state UI system
Contributions due calculated based on the tax rate
Contributions due prorated for non-reimbursable worksites
Contributions due prorated for reimbursable worksites (Pennsylvania and Alaska)
Total of employer and employee contributions due (Pennsylvania and Alaska)
Contributions paid (California)
Exclusions: Not included in the definition of employer contributions are:
Any tax, surcharge, etc. that is used to pay off the interest on a loan from the federal government
to the state trust fund and is required by federal law to be deposited outside the unemployment
trust fund
Any temporary excise tax or permanent surcharge tax
The administrative financing excise tax paid to the federal government by all employers of one
or more workers in 20 weeks during a calendar year in covered industries
Payments in lieu of contributions by certain nonprofit organizations and state and local
government instrumentalities which finance benefit costs on a reimbursing basis
Voluntary contributions (paid by employers in some states to be credited to their experiencerating accounts to obtain more favorable rates for future periods)
Employee contributions: Employee contributions are the unemployment insurance taxes
required by some state unemployment compensation laws to be deducted from an employee’s
pay by the employer and included with the employer’s contribution to the state agency.
Note: Total contributions, therefore, are a composite of the employer’s contribution and, where
applicable, the employees’ contributions. states collecting employee contributions use special
Type of Coverage Codes.
Special: All federal accounts must be zero-filled.
Rounding Criteria: To the nearest whole dollar amount. For example, if contributions are
$2,465.49, then 000002465, and not 000246549, appears in this field. If contributions are
$2,465.50, then the data are rounded up so that 000002466 appears in this field.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-6

Contributions (Due) Indicator Flag
(Required in state systems)
EQUI:
Exclude
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: M

Position:
N/A
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
Contributions Due Imputation
Flag, Contributions Flag,
Contrib-Ind, Contrib_Ind,
CTRBI
Source:
1) System generated for all data entered via extract or batch.
2) Assigned when data imputed or prorated.
3) QCEW staff (manual override).
Definition: Indicator showing the source of the Contributions Due.
Valid Values:
Blank or R = reported data
C = changed (re-reported)
E = imputed
H = hand-imputed (not system generated)
K = special system-generated imputation to reflect data impacted by a catastrophe
L = late reported (overrides prior imputation)
M = missing data
N = zero-filled pending resolution of long-term delinquent reporter
P = imputed from prorated taxable wages
X = non-numeric contributions zero-filled pending further action
Caution: Data imputed (estimated) by UI are not to be copied from the tax files to QCEW files.
These UI estimates frequently overstate total and taxable wages to inflate estimated contributions
due.
County Code
(Required)
EQUI:
Frequency:
Default Value:
Source:

Include
Positions:
599-601
Quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Numeric
999 if MEEI = 1, 3-6; Alternate Names:
Cnty, Cty, FIPS, Location
900 if MEEI = 2.
Code, Area, county_cd,
State UI system; QCEW staff (staff research); copied from previous quarter if
unchanged on state systems; system-transferred from the ARS Control File in
first quarter; EDI Center (for birth records of centrally collected employers),
new units collected via the MWR web system, geocoding software based on
physical location address information; based on township code/county code
crosswalk in New England states and New Jersey

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-7

Definition: Three-digit numeric Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) code used to
identify each reporting unit’s location or place of business. Use the code for the county where
the reporting unit is located or the county that has the greatest percentage of total employment
for the reporting unit, provided 50% or more of the reporting unit’s employment is in that
county. For mobile and physically dispersed businesses, refer to the county coding standards in
Section 2.1.2. If the physical location(s) is located in more than one county, overseas, out-of
state, unknown, or if the employer refuses to provide it, use whichever of the following QCEW
equivalent codes is appropriate: 995, 996, 998, or 999. Use of 900 on master records is optional
and is not required. For access to complete and current FIPS county codes for all states and
territories, visit the web site https://www.census.gov/geo/reference/codes/cou.html.
Valid Values: Valid FIPS County codes for the state plus the county equivalent codes. (For a
full description of the county equivalent codes, see Section 2.1.2.)
900 = Master record
995 = Statewide with no primary county
996 = Foreign locations
998 = Out-of-state locations
999 = Unknown locations.
Note: The county equivalent codes 900 and 995 first became valid with third quarter 1997 data.
County code 994 was only valid from 1997 through 2000.
Current Employment Statistics (CES) Indicator
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
545
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
CES Ind, ces-ind, CES
Source:
System generated by loading CES registry information to QCEW micro files
Definition: A CES Indicator Code was assigned to a record to identify that a record also existed
on the state CES registry and that the firm also participated in the CES program. This code was
normally system assigned by the CES/QCEW crosswalk program or other system-specific tools
to indicate if a CES/QCEW match occurred. This code was used to assist in data review. It
allowed the editor to check CES files for selected employment data for establishments in the
CES survey.* This information was also be useful to CES staffs to identify non-sample records,
and to assist in reconciling reporting differences.
*Note: The Confidential Information Protection and Statistical Efficiency Act (CIPSEA)
prohibits using CES-sourced information in QCEW microdata. The analyst should not review
CES respondent information to correct, impute, or validate QCEW data.
Valid Values:
C = CES reporter
blank = not found on the CES file
Caution: This information was updated periodically but may be out-of-date. The CES indicator
is not related to the reference date of the QCEW data. Also note, this information is not
extracted from UI tax files but from CES files.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-1

D
Data Source
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
575
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Source, EDI indicator, DATSO
Source:
QCEW staff; EDI Center (for worksites of centrally collected employers);
MWR Print contractor; tax Web collection; MWR Web collection system
Definition: Code used to provide information on the source of the data. Until recently this code
was only used to identify multi-unit UI accounts whose MWR data are provided by the EDI
Center and are not provided directly to the state by employers (or their agents).
Valid Values:
E = EDI record collected by EDIC
C = EDI sent and loaded from EDIC
P = MWR Print contractor collected
S = State-collected magnetic media
Q = Quarterly Contribution Report (QCR) web collected
W = MWR Web collected
X = Other Data Collection
blank (default value) = All other sources
Note: Masters and subunits may have different codes; for example, the master’s data are
reported on UI (with Source of Data = blank) while the worksite information is received from the
EDI Center (with Source of Data = C) or have the same source code, using the code used on the
worksites.
Date PLA Changed (YYYYMMDD)
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
730-737
Field Length: 8
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
PLA Changed Date, place-dte,
PL-DT

Format:
YYYYMMDD
Source:
State system assigned
Definition: Indicates when the physical location address was last changed (YYYYMMDD).
This field would be system assigned when either of the two street address lines, city, state, or 5digit ZIP changes.
Note: A change from a blank zip extension to a zero-filled extension or vice versa does not
constitute a change.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-2

Delete Identifier
(This or a comparable mechanism in state systems, delete identifier on national office system)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
1
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alpha
st
Default Value: None
Alternate Names:
1 County Result
Source:
State QCEW staff
Definition: A designation in the system to identify that the state analyst believes that the record
should be removed from the file but which will suppress the data where it can be retained and
reactivated for the entire period of time or a portion of time it existed as needed.
Caution: Records that were active for a period of time should never be deleted. Only those
records that were truly set up in error or which were set up and duplicate an existing record
should ever be deleted.
Valid Values: The designation in the state systems can be determined by the developers. BLS
uses a “D” in the Transaction File on the EQUI file to identify a record that should be deleted
from its files based on state-supplied information.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-3

E
Economic Code Change Indicator (ECCI)
(Required if applicable)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
727-728
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: 00
Alternate Names:
ECCI, ecci_cd
Source:
QCEW staff; system generated by summing for combination changes using 01,
02, 04, and 08 for single changes
Definition: Code assigned to a micro level data record to indicate an economic change in
NAICS, County or Township area, or Ownership codes.
Valid Values: 00 through 15
00 = No change
01 = Economic Township code change
02 = Economic NAICS change
03 = Economic Township and NAICS code changes
04 = Economic Ownership change
05 = Economic Township and Ownership code changes
06 = Economic NAICS and Ownership code changes
07 = Economic Township, NAICS, and Ownership code changes
08 = Economic County code change
09 = Economic Township and County code changes
10 = Economic NAICS and County code changes
11 = Economic Township, NAICS, and County code changes
12 = Economic Ownership and County code changes
13 = Economic Township, Ownership, and County code changes
14 = Economic NAICS, Ownership, and County code changes
15 = Economic Township, NAICS, Ownership, and County code changes
Summations of these values indicate more than one type of change. For example, an economic
change to NAICS (02) plus an economic change to Ownership (04) is indicated by 06 (02 + 04 =
06), a summation of the values. Whereas an economic change to Township (01), NAICS (02),
Ownership (04), and County (08) is indicated by a summation of 15 (01 + 02 + 04 + 08 = 15). In
EXPO, the economic code change indicators are displayed with a “Y” next to the field with the
economic change.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-4

(QCEW Contact) Email Address
(Include if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
920-979
Field Length: 60 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
URL, electronic mail,
computer address, email,
EMAIL
Format:
Left justified; include all fields including prefixes and suffixes
Source:
ARS, ARS Web, and MWR Web collection, state UI system (if available),
state QCEW Staff
Definition: The employer or respondent’s e-mail address where the respondent can be contacted
directly via email over the internet. This should not be confused with a generic company web
site.
Note: Ideally this information will be obtained from other sources and states may opt to
manually enter this information if they have it easily available and choose to do so.
Caution: Great care must be taken when using e-mail addresses. Confidential data must not be
sent via email to the respondent at any time. The respondent may provide e-mail information to
the state if the respondent is informed of the potential risks to confidentiality that may exist.
Employer Identification Number (EIN)
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
24-32
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 9
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Zero-filled
Alternate Names:
EIN, FEIN, EI Number,
Federal Number, IRS Number,
Federal Tax Number
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff (for federal reports); EDI Center (for worksites
of centrally collected employers)
Definition: A nine-digit Federal Identification number devised by the Internal Revenue Service
(IRS) to identify legal entities. The IRS assigns it to corporations or other firms (partnerships or
proprietorships). The EIN field should not be used to report the Social Security Number of the
individual who owns the firm. QCEW staff tries to obtain the EI Number if it is not available.
In virtually all cases, the master and its subunits should share the same EIN and ownership code.
Valid Values: Cannot start with 07, 08, 09, 17, 18, 19, 28, 29, 49, 78, 79, or 89. Cannot be all
ones (111111111), all twos, all threes, all fours, all fives, all sixes, all sevens, all eights, or all
nines.
Notes: The EI Number is critical in developing firm linkages on the national office Longitudinal
Database (LDB) to identify corporate ownership and relationships within an enterprise. In
addition, EI Numbers will be important in potential projects that involve data sharing with other
Federal statistical agencies, as the EI Numbers are the common identifier on different agencies’
files.
System Action: When the EIN is assigned to a master record in a multi-unit account, the state
system copies the EIN from the master record to the subunit records in the same UI account.
Caution: Some state UI tax files may include Social Security Numbers for EINs. These are
edited on a limited basis by checking the first two digits for valid values. Also, note that units
with several quarters of zero-filled EINs will be flagged.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-5

End of Liability Date
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
528-535
Field Length: 8
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
EOL Date, EOL,
end_liab_date
Format:
YYYYMMDD – four positions for year, two for month, and two for day (e.g.,
"20170331" for March 31, 2017)
Source:
State UI system; assigned by QCEW staff for federal reports; system or
QCEW staff assigned for worksites (see definition below for a detailed
description of how to select the appropriate date). This date would be obtained
by extracting the appropriate date from the UI system in most cases. The
appropriate date to extract will be determined individually for each state and
will depend on the available UI dates. The dates assigned for the MWR
reporting units are assigned as of the date the RUN is no longer reported on the
MWR, imputed, prorated, or is no longer broken out.
Definition: The date that the business ceases operations or no longer has employees or pays
wages. The date applies to singles and master records and is assigned by UI. The date for
worksites reported on the MWR reflects the date the establishment actually closed or the closest
approximation to that date. Once assigned, this date would not be changed. When a business
(UI account) ceases operations and no longer has employees and pays wages, the state UI section
assigns a date to the account that represents the date that the unit closed its doors and is no longer
required to file quarterly Contribution Reports. In the case of UI accounts, the date assigned
would be the UI section assigned date.
In the case of establishments reported on an MWR, if the establishment is closed, the date
assigned would be the date the establishment was actually closed or the closest approximation to
that date. This date should not be confused by situations where businesses still owe back taxes
but are no longer operating and accumulating UI taxes. The date required is the date at which a
business no longer has employees and pays no wages. The business may or may not owe taxes
for wages paid during an earlier period of time. This information may be used by the state
systems to impute delinquent data for the unit's last quarter of activity. For instance, if an
employer's End of Liability date is February 27th, but no data were reported for first quarter,
March employment would be imputed as zero and the wages would be cut by approximately a
third. This date will be used to track units on the LDB.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-6

Caution: Some states’ UI systems have several dates and status codes that identify different
types of “no operations” in the state. These may include when the employer ceases to employ
workers or pay wages, when the employer pays off all debts to the employment security agency,
when the employer temporarily ceases operations during non-peak (non-seasonal times), etc.
This field includes the date when the employer ceases to have employees or wages and does not
anticipate reopening within the year. Do not use the later date of “inactive dates” or “end of
liability dates.” Use the date that identifies when the unit ceased to be active.
Note: If the unit's End of Liability date occurred during or after the reference quarter, the status
code for the quarter would be active; if the End of Liability date were prior to the reference
quarter, the status code would be inactive. If the End of Liability Date is the first day of the
quarter but there is no employment or wages in the quarter, set the Status Code to inactive.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-1

F
Fact of Discrepancy Information
(Required)
Fact of Discrepancy information are provided from BLS to the states identifying where there are
discrepancies between comparable data fields of a record from what is on the state/BLS files and
the information available from Census or other sources. The resulting information identifies how
the state reviewed the problem and the outcome.
Fact of Discrepancy Year
(Required if any Fact of Discrepancies on the record is reported)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1113-1116
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 4
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
FoD Year
Source:
BLS or state QCEW staff
Definition: Reference year in which BLS notified the state to resolve a Fact of Discrepancy or
the year that the state made their determination about the record.
Note: If no action requested, the field is left blank.
Caution: To date, the Fact of Discrepancy Year has not been coded or maintained.
Fact of Discrepancy Month
(Required if any Fact of Discrepancies on the record is reported)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1117-1118
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
FoD Month
Source:
BLS or state QCEW staff
Definition: Reference month in which BLS notified the state to resolve a Fact of Discrepancy or
the month that the state made their determination about the record.
Note: If no action requested, the field is left blank.
Caution: To date, the Fact of Discrepancy Month has not been coded or maintained.
Fact of Discrepancy Control/Action Code
(Required if any Fact of Discrepancies on the record is reported)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1119-1120
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
FoD Action
Source:
BLS or QCEW state staff
Definition: Control code from BLS explaining the type of discrepancy or the action code taken
by the state to decide what the correct code was and if a change was or was not needed.
Note: If no action requested, the field is left blank.
Valid Values: TBD
Caution: To date, the Fact of Discrepancy Control/Action Code has not been coded or
maintained.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-2

Fact of Discrepancy NAICS
(Required if any Fact of Discrepancies on the record is reported)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1121-1126
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
FoD NAICS
Source:
QCEW state staff
Definition: If a Fact of Discrepancy regarding the NAICS code existed between the state and
alternate source, this field would include the NAICS code that the state determined was correct.
Note: If no action requested, the field is left blank.
Caution: To date, the Fact of Discrepancy NAICS has not been coded or maintained.
Fact of Discrepancy County
(Required if any Fact of Discrepancies on the record is reported)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1127-1129
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
FoD County
Source:
State QCEW staff
Definition: If a Fact of Discrepancy regarding the county code existed between the state and
alternate source, this field would include the county code that the state determined was correct.
Note: If no action requested, the field is left blank.
Caution: To date, the Fact of Discrepancy County has not been coded or maintained.
Fact of Discrepancy Explanation
(Required if any Fact of Discrepancies on the record is reported)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1130-1186
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 57 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
FoD Comment
Source:
State QCEW staff
Definition: Narrative comment or explanation from the state clarifying their decision and actions
regarding the discrepancy.
Note: If no action requested, the field is left blank.
Caution: To date, the Fact of Discrepancy Explanation has not been coded or maintained. Some
states, however, with converted UI Account Numbers, retain the old UI numbers in the nonquarterly state use filed in their state system. These are transmitted to BLS in positions 11301165 of the EQUI file.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-3

(QCEW Contact) Fax Number
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
980-989
Field Length: 10 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
Fax_area_cd, fax_phone, FXAR, FAX
Format:
Ten digits comprised of 3-digit area code, 3-digit prefix, and 4-digit suffix
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff (entered from MWR or ARS forms or from staff
research), EDI, MWR Web, CARS
Definition: The fax telephone number for the employer. Preferably this is the fax number of the
actual employer (not an agent), and it corresponds to the physical location of the establishment.
The master record fax phone number should not be copied to subunits. Do not enter a 3-digit
area code only, without the corresponding 7-digit number. Do not enter directory assistance
number, (xxx) 555-1212. If the physical location fax telephone number is not available, a fax
telephone number for another location or section of that employer would be preferable, e.g. the
number of the corporate headquarters or central office, as opposed to the number for an outside
payroll preparer or accounting firm.
Note: States are not required to enter this information.
Field Lock Position
(Optional in state systems)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Field Lock
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: Locking option to be used on the micro file to lock out updates/corrections to
selected fields.
Valid Entries:
00 = No fields locked to update
01 = Physical Location Address locked
02 = Mailing/Other Address locked
04 = Legal Name locked
08 = Trade Name/DBA locked
16 = Telephone number locked
32 = Attention name locked
“01” and “02” will lock all fields of the physical location and mailing/other addresses.
Summations of these values indicate more than one type of change. For example, 03 means that
both the Physical Location Address and Mailing Address are locked.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-4

Caution: Note that while the Physical Location and Mailing/Other address fields can be locked,
the UI address cannot be locked. All changes to the UI address are reported each quarter,
preferably via an extract. If, however, the UI address is incorrect, the corrections are made to the
UI tax file or source file and then sent to the micro file via an extract. If the UI address cannot
be corrected via the tax file and it represents a more current and accurate address than the record
has in its Mailing/Other address block, then the UI address is manually copied to the
Mailing/Other address and corrected there. Alternatively, update the existing Mailing/Other
address if the Mailing/Other address is not locked and if the mailing/other type code is 9
(unknown or other).
Example: If the UI address is extracted with no city, and if the UI tax file cannot be updated to
add the city (e.g., Chicago), and the Mailing/Other address fields are blank, then enter the UI
address with the correct city (Chicago) to the Mailing/Other address block. Determine if the UI
address is a mailing address, corporate headquarters, or physical location and assign the
appropriate Mailing/Other Address Type code. If the Address Type in unknown, code as “9.”
Format Type (Predecessor/Successor)
(Required)
EQUI:
Include, PS record
Position:
19
Frequency:
Transaction
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
PS-Format
Source:
System-assigned, QCEW state staff
Definition: Identifies if the UI Account/Reporting Unit Number is linked to a predecessor or a
successor.
Valid Values:
P = Predecessor
S = Successor
Future ARS Refile Year
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
808-811
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 4
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Next First Quarter ARS Year
Source:
ARS Control File
Definition: Refile year of the next refiling cycle if included in the current cycle. For instance, a
record last refiled in 2015 may also be refiled in 2018. This field is blank on the EQUI if the
record is not being refiled during the current fiscal year. The future ARS Refile Year does not
exist in the EXPO or WIN micro files. This information is only on the control file in the state
systems.

May 2019

Future ARS Response Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-5

Positions:
812-813
Field Length: 2
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Next First Quarter ARS
Response Code

Source:
ARS Control File
Definition: The information contained in this field is the ARS Response Code for the next first
quarter EQUI file submittal if that record is included in the current refiling survey. For instance,
a record is selected for inclusion in the FY 2018 ARS, and, based upon employer responses, is
assigned an ARS Response Code of 41. If this same record was included three years earlier in
the FY 2015 ARS and was assigned an ARS Response Code of 46 at that time, the “regular”
ARS Response Code would be 46 (the response code from three years ago) through the 2017/4
EQUI file while the Future ARS Refile Year would be 2018 and the Future ARS Response Code
would be 41. The ARS Response Code that would be used for this record during 2018/1 EQUI
processing in national office would be 41 received as a result of the FY 2018 ARS. Response
code 41 would now be the regular ARS Response Code on the record from the 2018/1 EQUI file
through the 2020/4 file (assuming no changes occur and assuming the UI is refiled every three
years).
Note: This field is blank on the EQUI if the record is not being refiled during the current fiscal
year. The future ARS Refile Year does not exist in the EXPO or WIN micro files. This
information is only on the control file in the state systems.
Future ARS NAICS Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
814-819
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Next First Quarter NAICS
Source:
ARS Control File or the next first quarter micro file
Definition: Updated NAICS code expected for the next first quarter resulting from the current
refiling survey. If the ARS Response Code is less than 41, leave the code blank. If the ARS
Response Code is 41 or 42 set the Future ARS NAICS to the current quarter’s NAICS code. If
the ARS Response Code is 46 or 50, include the Future ARS NAICS code of the pending code
change that would be reflected in the first quarter data.
Note: This field is blank on the EQUI if the record is not being refiled during the current fiscal
year. The Future ARS NAICS Code does not exist in the EXPO or WIN micro files. This
information is only on the control file in the state systems.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-6

Future ARS County Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
820-822
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Next First Quarter County
Source:
ARS Control File or the next first quarter micro file
Definition: Updated county code expected for the next first quarter resulting from the current
refiling survey. If the ARS Response Code is less than 41, leave the code blank. If the ARS
Response Code is 41 or 42, set the Future ARS County Code to the current quarter’s county
code. If the ARS Response Code is 46 or 50, include the Future ARS County Code of the
pending code change that would be reflected in the first quarter data.
Note: This field is blank on the EQUI if the record is not being refiled during the current fiscal
year. The Future ARS County Code does not exist in the EXPO or WIN micro files. This
information is only on the control file in the state systems.
Future ARS Township Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
823-825
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Next First Quarter Town
Source:
ARS Control File or the next first quarter micro file
Definition: Updated township code expected for the next first quarter resulting from the current
refiling survey. If the ARS Response Code is less than 41, leave the code blank. If the ARS
Response Code is 41 or 42, set the Future ARS Township Code to the current quarter’s township
code. If the ARS Response Code is 46 or 50, include the Future ARS Township Code of the
pending code change that would be reflected in the first quarter data.
Note: Town or township codes are assigned in New England states and New Jersey.
Note: This field is blank on the EQUI if the record is not being refiled during the current fiscal
year. The Future ARS Township Code does not exist in the EXPO or WIN micro files. This
information is only on the control file in the state systems.
Future ARS CMI Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
826-827
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Next First Quarter CMI
Source:
ARS Control File or the next first quarter micro file
Definition: The information contained in this field is the ARS CMI Code for the next first
quarter EQUI file submittal if that record is included in the current refiling survey.
Note: This field is blank on the EQUI if the record is not being refiled during the current fiscal
year. The Future ARS CMI Code does not exist in the EXPO or WIN micro files. This
information is only on the control file in the state systems.
Future Use
(Leave blank at this time)
EQUI:
Include

Positions:

1187-1190

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Page B-7

Frequency:
Not Determined
Field Length: 4
Type: Alphanumeric/Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
None
Source:
N/A
Definition: Fields for future use. No other information is currently available.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

G Page B-1

G
Geocoding Software
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
738
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Geosoftware, SOFT,
Source:
State staff
Definition: Single character designation of the software used to assign latitude and longitude.
This field will be tied to the most recent location code and match code.
Valid Values:
G = GeoStan, the software previously used by BLS
blank = Web-based geocoding software from i/Lytics Innovative Systems
S = Other state-used software
Blank = if no latitude and longitude assigned
Geocode Source
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
739
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Geosource, geosource-cd, SRC
Source:
State staff
Definition: Indicates where the latitude and longitude were originally assigned. Potential
sources include: state QCEW unit, national office, or outside vendors. A default of blank is used
when no latitude and longitude are assigned.
Valid Values: B = BLS assigned
S = State assigned
W = Web-based assignment (Global Innovative Systems)
Blank = if no latitude and longitude assigned or other source

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

H
No Current Entries.

H Page B-1

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

I Page B-1

I
Initial Date of Liability
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
520-527
Field Length: 8
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Liability Date, Liab Date,
init_liab_date, LIAB
Format:
YYYYMMDD – four positions for year, two for month, and two for day (e.g.,
"20180401" for April 1, 2018
Source:
State UI system (for records with MEEI 1, 2, 4, or 6); system or QCEW staff
assigned (for new worksite records – MEEI 3 or 5); QCEW staff (for federal
reports), EDI, MWR Web system
Definition: This is the date that a new business became subject to UI reporting requirements.
The date applies to single and master accounts and is assigned by UI. The date for worksites
reported on the MWR or through the EDI Center is the date the subunit was first reported on the
MWR or EDI transmission. When a new business begins operations for the first time and files
an initial status determination form with the state (or becomes known to them by some other
method), the employer is assigned an initial date of liability by the UI section. This date is
available for single and master records (MEEI 1, 2, 4, or 6). For worksite records (MEEI 3 or 5),
this preferably is the date of the first employment and wages that appear on the state system. As
in the case of coding for the Set-up Date, it may not be possible to assign an accurate date to
employers who have been active for an extended period; however, it is possible to assign
reasonable dates to all new records. Once assigned, this date would not change for a continuous
UI account or for a continuous establishment being reported via a MWR. This date is necessary
to determine when the business (UI account) or establishment actually became liable under the
UI laws and is typically (but not always) when the business began operations. This date will be
used to track units on the LDB.
Note: If the unit is liable for even a single day, it is liable for the whole quarter.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

J
No Current Entries.

J Page B-1

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

K
No Current Entries.

K Page B-1

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

October 2018

L Page B-1

L
Latitude
(Required)
EQUI:
Frequency:

Include
Twice (old and new)

Positions:
Field Length:

747-755
9
Type:

Alphanumeric with
decimal place

Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Lat
Format:
xx.xxxxxx
Source:
Generated from the geocoding software
Definition: xx.xxxxxx format of the latitude (with two positions before the decimal place and six
places after the decimal for accuracy). Include the decimal place in the format for the EQUI,
listings, and screens.
Note: When a new latitude is assigned based on a change in the PLA data, shift the old latitude
to the old latitude field and write the new latitude to the current latitude field.
Legal Name
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank
Format:
Source:

Positions:
63-97
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
Legal/Corporate Name,
legal_n, LGLNM

Left justified
State UI system; QCEW staff (for worksites); EDI Center (for worksites of
centrally collected employers); ARS Web collected-data files; MWR Web
collected-data files
Definition: Name of the reporting unit for legal purposes, both for single and multi-unit
employers. Referred to as the Corporate Name in many systems. This element is usually
extracted from the UI file thus using the definition of Legal Name as found in each state’s tax
system.
Special Criteria: Either the Legal Name or Trade Name must be present for each record. If both
are available, both must be present.
Examples: The following examples show proper Trade and Legal Name configurations for both
single unit and multi-unit employers.
For a single unit (MEEI=1, 4, or 6) with the Trade Name of Jim's Restaurant where the Legal
Name is the same as the Trade Name, "Jim's Restaurant" appears in both name fields on the state
system and the EQUI.
Trade Name: JIM'S RESTAURANT
Legal Name: JIM'S RESTAURANT
If a single unit (MEEI=1, 4, or 6) has a Trade Name of Jack's Towing Service and a Legal Name
of Jack Smith Enterprises, then "Jack's Towing Service" should appear in the Trade Name field,
and "Jack Smith Enterprises" should appear in the Legal Name field.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

L Page B-2

Trade Name: JACK'S TOWING SERVICE
Legal Name: JACK SMITH ENTERPRISES
Suppose two multi subunits (MEEI=3 or 5) have unique Trade Names of Mike's Bar and Grill
and Mike's Gas Station and they are both part of a multi-establishment employer whose Legal
name is Mike Gray's Enterprises. Suppose further that this employer is not divided into divisions
or subsidiaries. Each subunit record contains the unique Trade name for the subunit in the Trade
Name field and "Mike Gray's Enterprises" in the Legal Name field.
(subunit 1)
Trade Name: MIKE'S BAR AND GRILL
Legal Name: MIKE GRAY'S ENTERPRISES
(subunit 2)
Trade Name: MIKE'S GAS STATION
Legal Name: MIKE GRAY'S ENTERPRISES
For multi subunits (MEEI=3 or 5), assume that the American Computer Corporation (Legal
Name) is not organized into divisions or subsidiaries and has three subunits all with the Trade
Name of Orange Computers. The subunit records on the micro and EQUI files all contain the
Trade Name of "Orange Computers" and the Legal Name of "American Computer Corporation."
Unique worksite identification, such as a store number, is reported in the Reporting Unit
Description field, not in the Trade or Legal Name field.
(subunit 1)
Trade Name
: ORANGE COMPUTERS
Legal Name
: AMERICAN COMPUTER CORPORATION
R.U. Description: STORE NO. 1
(subunit 2)
Trade Name
: ORANGE COMPUTERS
Legal Name
: AMERICAN COMPUTER CORPORATION
R.U. Description: STORE NO. 2
(subunit 3)
Trade Name
: ORANGE COMPUTERS
Legal Name
: AMERICAN COMPUTER CORPORATION
R.U. Description: STORE NO. 3
For multi subunits (MEEI=3 or 5) that are not part of a subsidiary or separate division and where
the Trade Name is the same as the Legal Name, both the Legal and Trade name fields on the
EQUI and state system contain that name. For example, if a multi-establishment employer with
a Legal Name of Smith Accounting Services has two subunits, all having the Trade Name of
Smith Accounting Services, both the Trade Name field and the Legal Name field should contain

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

L Page B-3

"Smith Accounting Services." Again, unique worksite identification is reported in the Reporting
Description field.
(subunit 1)
Trade Name
: SMITH ACCOUNTING SERVICES
Legal Name:
: SMITH ACCOUNTING SERVICES
R.U. Description: BUSINESS AUDIT DIVISION
(subunit 2)
Trade Name
: SMITH ACCOUNTING SERVICES
Legal Name:
: SMITH ACCOUNTING SERVICES
R.U. Description: CORPORATE SERVICES DIVISION
Multi subunits (MEEI=3 or 5) that are part of a corporation organized into divisions or
subsidiaries are reported with the Legal or Corporate Name of the multi-establishment employer
in the Legal Name field and both the division subsidiary name and the trade name in the Trade
Name field. For example, Francis Marlow Corporation has three divisions – the Restaurant
division, the Hotel division, and the Condominium/Timeshare division. Chez Michele, Le
Bistro, and Jacque's are three establishments in the Restaurant division. The record for Chez
Michele should have "Francis Marlow Corporation" reported in the Legal Name field and
"Restaurant Div. - Chez Michele" in the Trade Name field. Necessary abbreviations due to
space restrictions are acceptable but every effort should be made to ensure that they are
understandable.
(subunit 1)
Trade Name: RESTAURANT DIV. - CHEZ MICHELE
Legal Name: FRANCIS MARLOW CORPORATION
(subunit 2)
Trade Name: RESTAURANT DIV. - LE BISTRO
Legal Name: FRANCIS MARLOW CORPORATION
(subunit 3)
Trade Name: RESTAURANT DIV. - JACQUE'S
Legal Name: FRANCIS MARLOW CORPORATION

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

L Page B-4

Location Code
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
744-746
Frequency:
Twice (old and new)
Field Length: 3
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
LocCode, LOC, location-cd
Source:
Geocoding software; BLS Geoload file
Definition: Explains the level of detail used to assign the geocode information as well as the
qualities of the match—used to measure accuracy and reliability. According to the i/Lytics
Innovative Systems documentation, “Address location codes detail the known qualities about the
geocode.”
Valid Values are:
E0
Not geocoded
A1
Street Level - Record was geocoded to the rooftop level
A2
Firm High-rise Point - Record was a firm/high-rise record and was
assigned the latitude/longitude for the given firm/high-rise in the database
A99
State assigned
Z5
Record was geocoded to the ZIP centroid
Z7
Record was geocoded to the ZIP + 2 centroid
Z9
Record was geocoded to the ZIP + 4 centroid
Longitude
(Required)
EQUI:
Frequency:

Include
Twice (old and new)

Positions:
Field Length:

756-766
11 Type: Alphanumeric with
sign and decimal place
Alternate Names:
Long

Default Value: Blank
Format:
+/-xxx.xxxxxx
Source:
Generated from the geocoding software
Definition: +/-xxx.xxxxxx format of the longitude where the first position is the direction, when
positive no sign applied (blank instead of + sign), up to three positions can be used before the
decimal place and six after. Include the decimal place in the format for the EQUI, listings, and
screens.
Note: When a new longitude is assigned based on a change in the PLA date, shift the old
longitude to the old longitude field and write the new longitude to the current longitude field.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-1

M
Mailing/Other (M/O) Address Block
(Required if available)
The Mailing/Other address consists of a block of seven fields, and includes the Mailing/Other
Address Type. These fields are described below. This address, if available, should be used for
ARS mailings and MWR forms mailings to employers (or their agents), as well as missing data
notices, and other correspondence. This address can be locked (as discussed for the Field Lock
Position). Note: At least one complete address (either Physical Location, UI Address, or
Mailing/Other Address), including all appropriate address lines, city, state, and zip information
must appear on each record.
Caution: Few states have an address field on the UI tax file or related supplemental files that
include specific mailing addresses. Mailing/Other address fields are not to be extracted from the
UI tax file unless they are maintained and updated by UI on a regular basis. states use the
Mailing/Other address fields to correct UI addresses. The Mailing/Other address fields can be
locked.
Note: The Mailing/Other Address Block does not include either
Mailing/Other Address Foreign Country Code or
Mailing Other Address Foreign Postal Code.
Mailing/Other Address Line 1
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
355-389
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
Mailing/Other Address –
fields in the
Secondary Address Line,
Mailing/Other address
Mailing Address Line 1, MOblock are blank
A1, mail_st1
Format:
Left justified
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: First line of the mailing address for the reporting unit.
Note: If the street address and room, apartment, or suite number does not fit on one line, the
street should be put in Address Line 1, while the room, apartment or suite number is put in
Address Line 2.
System Action: If the Mailing/Other Address Line 1 is blank, but information is included on
Mailing/Other Address Line 2, the state system moves it to Mailing/Other Address Line 1.

October 2018

Mailing/Other Address Line 2
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-2

Positions:
390-424
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
Mailing/Other Address –
Delivery Address Line,
Mailing Address Line 2, MOA2, mail_st2

Format:
Left justified
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: Second line of the mailing address for the reporting unit. This is to include postal
delivery information.
Note If the street address and room, apartment, or suite number does not fit on one line, the street
should be put in Address Line 1, while the room, apartment or suite number is put in Address
Line 2.
System Action: If the Mailing/Other Address Line 1 is blank, but information is included on
Mailing/Other Address Line 2, the state system moves it to Mailing/Other Address Line 1.
Mailing/Other Address City
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
425-454
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 30 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
Mailing Address City, MO-C1,
fields in the
mail_cty
Mailing/Other address
block are blank
Format:
Left justified
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: City or town of the mailing address for the reporting unit. If the mailing/other
address is located outside the United States, enter the city, a space, followed by the country
abbreviation.
Valid Canadian province abbreviations are listed below:
Canadian Province Codes
Province
Code
Province
Code
Alberta
AB
Nunavut
NU
British Columbia
BC
Ontario
ON
Manitoba
MB
Prince Edward Island
PE
New Brunswick
NB
Quebec
PQ
Newfoundland
NF
Saskatewan
SK
Northwest Territory
NT
Yukon Territory
YT
Nova Scotia
NS
Mailing/Other Address State
(Required if available)

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-3

EQUI:
Frequency:
Default Value:

Include
Positions:
455-456
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Alphabetic
Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
Mailing Address – State, MOfields in the
ST, mailst
Mailing/Other address
block are blank
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: Post Office state abbreviation of the mailing address for the reporting unit. For
Canadian addresses, place “CN”. Other foreign locations should have “ZZ” in this field., in this
field.
For military post offices, enter either AE, AA, or AP in this field as applicable.
Valid Values: The standard Post Office abbreviations for states appear in Appendix C. Other
valid values are as follows:
Destination
American Samoa
Guam
Military Post Offices in Central and South America (APO Miami)
Military Post Offices in Canada, Europe, Africa, and the Middle East
(APO New York)
Military Post Offices in Pacific and some areas of Alaska (APO San
Francisco)
Canada
All other foreign countries

Abbreviation
AS
GU
AA
AE
AP
CN
ZZ

Mailing/Other Address ZIP Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
457-461
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 5
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
Mailing Address – ZIP, MOfields in the
Z5, mail_zip
Mailing/Other address
block are blank
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: ZIP Code of the mailing address for the reporting unit.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-4

Mailing/Other Address ZIP Code Extension
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
462-465
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 4
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Mailing Address - ZIP
Extension, Mailing/Other
ZIP+4, MO-Z4, mail_ext
Format:
Left justified. Place position 6 of a Canadian ZIP Code in the first position of
this field, followed by three blanks.
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: ZIP Code Extension of the mailing address for the reporting unit. However, ZIP
Code Extension is not essential; if all other mailing/other address fields exist but ZIP extension is
missing, the address still passes the edits.
Mailing/Other Address Foreign Postal Code
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 7
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Format:
Source:
State UI system
Definition: The postal code associated with the data in the Mailing/Other Address if the
“Mailing/Other Address Foreign Country Code” field is available and out of country.
Note: EXPO, WIN-202, and the BLS processing system do not include this data element. This
data element is included in the Standardized UI QUEST extract. This data element is only used
for Canadian addresses. It populates the zip code field and the first position of the zip code
expansion. This data element is to be left blank for addresses in Puerto Rico or the U.S. Virgin
Islands.
Mailing/Other Address Type
(Required if the Mailing/Other Address block contains an address)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
466
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: 9 if M/O Address is
Alternate Names:
Address Type, AT, Mailing
included, blank if M/O
Address Type, MO-AT,
Address is blank
mo_addr_ind
Source:
QCEW staff (MWR, ARS, research), or system assigned default
Definition: Code that defines the type of address in the Mailing/Other Address block.
Valid Values:
1 = Physical address (physical and mailing address are the same)
2 = Mailing address (where the mail goes directly to the unit and may include the P.O. Box
or RFD addresses)
3 = Corporate central office mail address
9 = Unknown blank – Mailing/Other address fields are blank
Users should only assign an Address Type of 1 if this physical location address conforms to
postal regulations as a mailable address.
System Action: If 1 is assigned in this field, the state system includes a copy of the Physical
Location Address to the Mailing/Other Address.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-5

Match Code
(Required on records with latitude and longitude)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
740-743
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 4
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
MATCH, Address process
code, match-cd, old-match-cd
Definition: Match codes are status information generated from the i/Lytics Post Locate
Innovative Systems software that identifies the extent to which the software was able to match
the address information to a latitude and longitude or if it was unable to make any kind of match.
Information on the first position is listed below.
Valid Values:
SS Success. Single candidate returned from the database
EW Record matched to an entry in the Early Warning System (EWS) file
LC
The record was not matched to the zip+4 database, but was converted to a ZIP+4 coded
address using the Locatable Address Conversion System
IC Input city/postal code not found in database. Lookup failed.
IS The street name was not found in the database. Lookup failed.
MH Multiple possible candidates in database. Lookup failed.
NC No city/state or postal code found. . Lookup failed.
NH No candidate records in the database. Lookup failed.
SC The street name was not found for the city name entered. Lookup failed.
SH The house number does not exist for the street name entered. Lookup failed.
UZ Record has a ZIP Code flagged as unique but address did not match in database.
Lookup failed.
ZM Record matched entry in ZIP Move file, but did not match new ZIP Code. Lookup failed.
Maximum Reporting Unit Number
(Derived in state systems)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
563-567
Field Length: 5
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Highest Worksite Number;
Highest RUN, Highest
Reporting Unit Number,
max_run, MAXRU
Format:
Right justified, with unused positions zero-filled
Source:
System generated
Definition: The largest Reporting Unit Number ever used or assigned to the unit’s UI Account
Number. If the account is a single establishment and was never a multi-establishment, the
Maximum Reporting Unit Number is “00000.” If a master unit converts to a single
establishment (collapsed multi), this field would include the Maximum Reporting Unit Number
of a worksite that is either no longer on the state system or inactive on the state system. The
Maximum Reporting Unit Number may be higher than any active existing Reporting Unit
Number due to active, inactive, sold or out of business reporting units.
Valid Values: Numbers less than 99999.
Example: A group of multi-establishments has six units with “00006” as the highest reporting
unit number assigned. If unit “00006” is closed, the Maximum Reporting Unit Number remains

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

October 2018

M Page B-6

at “00006”. If a new unit is established, that new unit would be assigned “00007” and the
maximum reporting unit number would also be changed to “00007”.
Caution: This field is included in the systems to help ensure that reporting unit numbers are not
reused. See Reporting Unit Number for additional details.
Monthly Employment and Monthly Employment Indicators
(Required)
There are three monthly employment fields, one for each month of the quarter. Each
employment field is associated with an employment indicator flag that identifies the source of
the data.
First Month Employment
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: None

Positions:
606-611
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Month One Employment, M1,
Emp1, (January, April, July,
October), m1emp, MON1
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros
Source:
State UI system (for single and master records); QCEW staff (for worksites,
federal records); EDI Center (for worksites of centrally collected employers);
or system generated (for imputed data); MWR Web collection systems
Definition: The monthly employment data, which may be reported on the Quarterly
Contribution Report, Multiple Worksite Report, the Report of Federal Employment and Wages
(RFEW), or electronically. This is a count of all full-time and part-time workers who worked
during or received pay (subject to Unemployment Insurance taxes) for the pay period that
includes the 12th day of the first month of the reference quarter. If there is no first month
employment, zero-fill the entire field. The count is unduplicated, so an employee is counted only
once in any month by a given employer.
Rounding Criteria: To the nearest whole number.
System Action: The state system imputes the employment when it is not reported, as appropriate
(see First Month Employment Indicator Flag).
First Month Employment Indicator Flag
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length:
Default Value:

M

612
1
Type:

Alternate Names:

Alphanumeric

Imputed Employment Flag,
Estimated Employment Flag,
Month 1 Indicator,
m1emp_ind, MON1I

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-7

Source:

System generated (blank, K, M, N, P, R, E, X, and S) for all data entered via
extract or batch or from an imputation routine. Also on the IMT. QCEW staff
(other values).
Definition: Indicator showing how the employment data were obtained. Data must be imputed,
prorated or aggregated if: 1) the Quarterly Contribution Report is delinquent; or 2) the
Quarterly Contribution Report has been submitted with wage data but without employment data,
and follow-up to obtain the missing data is unsuccessful; or 3) the Quarterly Contribution
Report is submitted for a multi-establishment employer but the MWR is not; or 4) the MWR is
submitted but the Quarterly Contribution Report is not.
Valid Values:
Blank or R = reported data
A = estimated from CES report
C = changed (re-reported)
D = reported from missing data notice
E = imputed single unit employment or imputed worksite employment prorated from imputed
parent record
H = hand-imputed (not system generated)
K = special system-generated imputation to reflect data impacted by a catastrophe
L = late reported (overrides prior imputation)
M = missing data
N = zero-filled pending resolution of long-term delinquent reporter
P = prorated from reported master to worksite
S = aggregated master from reported MWR or EDI data
W = estimated from wage record employment
X = non-numeric employment zero-filled pending further action
Note: The state needs to resolve all “X” records before submission on the EQUI.
Caution: Imputed data on the UI tax file should not be copied or extracted to QCEW micro files.
Second Month Employment
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: None

Positions:
613-618
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Month Two Employment, M2,
Emp2, (February, May,
August, November), m2emp,
MON2
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros
Source:
State UI system (for single and master records); QCEW staff (for worksites,
federal records); EDI Center (for worksites of centrally collected employers);
or system generated (for imputed data), MWR Web collection systems
Definition: The monthly employment data, which may be reported on the Quarterly
Contribution Report, Multiple Worksite Report, the Report of Federal Employment and Wages
(RFEW), or electronically. This is a count of all full-time and part-time workers who worked
during or received pay (subject to Unemployment Insurance taxes) for the pay period that
includes the 12th day of the second month of the reference quarter. If there is no second month

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-8

employment, zero-fill the entire field. The count is unduplicated, so an employee is counted only
once in any month by a given employer.
System Action: The state system imputes the employment when it is not reported, as appropriate
(see Second Month Employment Indicator Flag).
Second Month Employment Indicator Flag
(Required)
EQUI:
Position:
619
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: M
Alternate Names:
Imputed Employment Flag,
Estimated Employment Flag,
Month 2 Indicator,
m2emp_ind, MON2I
Source:
System generated (blank, K, M, N, P, R, E, X, and S) for all data entered via
extract or batch or from an imputation routine. IMT QCEW staff (other
values).

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-9

Definition: Indicator showing how the employment data were obtained. Data must be imputed,
prorated or aggregated if: 1) the Quarterly Contribution Report is delinquent; or 2) the
Quarterly Contribution Report has been submitted with wage data but without employment data,
and follow-up to obtain the missing data is unsuccessful; or 3) the Quarterly Contribution
Report is submitted for a multi-establishment employer but the MWR is not; or 4) the MWR is
submitted but the Quarterly Contribution Report is not.
Valid Values:
Blank or R = reported data
A = estimated from CES report
C = changed (re-reported)
D = reported from missing data notice
E = imputed single unit employment or imputed worksite employment prorated from imputed
parent record
H = hand-imputed (not system generated)
K = special system-generated imputation to reflect data impacted by a catastrophe
L = late reported (overrides prior imputation)
M = missing data
N = zero-filled pending resolution of long-term delinquent reporter
P = prorated from reported master to worksite
S = aggregated master from reported MWR or EDI data
W = estimated from wage record employment
X = non-numeric employment zero-filled pending further action
Note: The state needs to resolve all “X” records before submission on the EQUI.
Caution: Imputed data on the UI tax file should not be copied or extracted to QCEW micro files.
Third Month Employment
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: None

Positions:
620-625
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Month Three Employment,
M3, Emp3, (March, June,
September, December),
m3emp, MON3
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros
Source:
State UI system (for single and master records); QCEW staff (for worksites,
federal records); EDI Center (for worksites of centrally collected employers);
or system generated (for imputed data), MWR Web collection systems, IMT
Definition: The monthly employment data, which may be reported on the Quarterly
Contribution Report, Multiple Worksite Report, the RFEW, or electronically. This is a count of
all full-time and part-time workers who worked during or received pay (subject to
Unemployment Insurance taxes) for the pay period that includes the 12th day of the third month
of the reference quarter. If there is no third month employment, zero-fill the entire field. The
count is unduplicated, so an employee is counted only once in any month by a given employer.
System Action: The state system needs to impute the employment when it is not reported, as
appropriate (see Third Month Employment Indicator Flag).

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-10

Third Month Employment Indicator Flag
(Required)
EQUI:
Position:
626
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: M
Alternate Names:
Imputed Employment Flag,
Estimated Employment Flag,
Month 3 Indicator,
m3emp_ind, MON3I
Source:
System generated (blank, K, M, N, P, R, E, X, and S) for all data entered via
extract or batch or from an imputation routine, IMT, QCEW staff (other
values).
Definition: Indicator showing how the employment data were obtained. Data must be imputed,
prorated or aggregated if: 1) the Quarterly Contribution Report is delinquent; or 2) the
Quarterly Contribution Report has been submitted with wage data but without employment data,
and follow-up to obtain the missing data is unsuccessful; or 3) the Quarterly Contribution
Report is submitted for a multi-establishment employer but the MWR is not; or 4) the MWR is
submitted but the Quarterly Contribution Report is not.
Valid Values:
Blank or R = reported data
A = estimated from CES report
C = changed (re-reported)
D = reported from missing data notice
E = imputed single unit employment or imputed worksite employment prorated from imputed
parent record
H = hand-imputed (not system generated)
K = special system-generated imputation to reflect data impacted by a catastrophe
L = late reported (overrides prior imputation)
M = missing data
N = zero-filled pending resolution of long-term delinquent reporter
P = prorated from reported master to worksite
S = aggregated master from reported MWR or EDI data
W = estimated from wage record employment
X = non-numeric employment zero-filled pending further action
Note: The state needs to resolve all “X” records before submission on the EQUI.
Caution: Imputed data on the UI tax file should not be copied or extracted to QCEW micro files.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-11

Multi Establishment Employer Indicator
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
660
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: None
Alternate Names:
MEEI, MEEI Code, meei_cd
Source:
QCEW staff ; copied from previous quarter if unchanged on state system
Definition: Code that distinguishes between records for single units, multi-unit master records,
and subunits of a multi-establishment employer.
Valid Values: 1 = Single establishment unit
2 = Multi-unit master record
3 = Subunit establishment level record for a multi-unit employer
4 = Multi-establishment employer reporting as a single unit due to unavailability
of data, including refusals
5 = A subunit record that actually represents a combination
of establishments; finer level breakouts are not yet available
6 = Known multi establishment employer reporting as a single unit and not
solicited for disaggregation because of small employment (< 10) in all
secondary establishments combined
For every multi-unit employer, the state's system and EQUI file contain at least three records (the
master and at least two subunits). The master unit represents the administrative (UI accounting)
aggregation of all subunits under that UI Account Number and should not be confused with the
primary establishment, which is evaluated along with secondary establishment(s) to determine
multi-unit status. At least two active subunits (representing at least two establishments) must be
associated with the master record UI account number. If there is only one active subunit, then
the account has been misidentified and is reclassified as a single unit. If a multi-establishment
employer becomes a single establishment employer, the record for the out-of-business or sold
subunit is inactivated, the record for the remaining establishment is also inactivated, and the
MEEI code of the master record should be changed from "2" to "1." That record (the record with
RUN 00000) is used to report the data for the one remaining establishment. See Sections 5.5 and
5.6 for additional information on multi-unit breakouts and collapses.
Also note the difference between MEEI code "4" and "6." As stated earlier, an MEEI of "6"
indicates that the establishments in question do not meet the employment size criterion for
disaggregating a multi-unit employer. On the other hand, the MEEI of "4" indicates that the
employer does meet the employment criterion, but is unable or unwilling to provide employment
and wage data at the establishment level. Employers with MEEI codes of "4" are solicited
periodically to see if employment and wage data can be reported at the establishment level.
Employers coded as MEEI "6" may be solicited as resources permit.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

M Page B-12

MWR Mail Indicator
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
568
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
MA-CD, mwr-mail-ind
Source:
QCEW staff, EDI load, MWR Web load
Definition: Identifies whether or not a MWR form should be mailed to the respondent.
Valid Values: EXPO and WIN specific
Caution: Both EXPO and WIN default the value to “mailing MWR” even on single accounts.
The field is used in conjunction with the MEEI code. Only accounts with MEEI 2 and this value
are sent a form.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

N Page B-13

N
NAICS Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: 999999

Positions:
591-596
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Organization NAICS, Link
NAICS, naics-cd
Source:
System transferred from ARS Control File in first quarter; copied from
previous quarter if unchanged in state system, EDI for new units and successor
records, MWR Web collection for comparable new units, QCEW staff (for
worksites, economic changes); state UI system (new records)
Definition: NAICS (North American Industry Classification System) codes are uniform
industrial codes used by the United States, Canada, and Mexico to identify the primary activity
of an establishment. The NAICS code uses the NAICS Manual definitions for the handling of
auxiliary establishments, in which each establishment is classified based on its own activities.
Valid Values: Six-digit NAICS codes, as defined by the 2017 NAICS code.
Caution: This field should not be extracted from the UI tax file except for new records.
NAICS12
(Blank for all records unless notified otherwise)
EQUI:
Include as blank
Positions:
585-590
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
NAICS-2012 code
For 2017/1, set by the
state systems to the
NAICS-2012 code in
2016/4, blank for new
records
Source:
For the revision to NAICS-2017, the state systems copied the 2016/4 NAICS
code into this (NAICS12) field for 2017/1.
Definition: For 2017/1, this field holds the 2016/4 NAICS-2012 based NAICS code. Though
quarterly, the 2017/1 value in this field will not roll forward and it should be blank for 2017/2
and subsequent quarters. For new records started 1/1/2017 or later, this field will be blank in all
quarters, including 2017/1.
Valid Values: 2012-based NAICS codes
Caution: Until the revision to NAICS-2017, this field had been named “NAICS07”, having been
used in the last (NAICS-2012) revision and repurposed for the NAICS-2017 revision.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

N Page B-14

Narrative Comment
(Required if applicable)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
668-724
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 57 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
com_narr
Format:
Left justified
Source:
QCEW staff; EDI Center (for worksites of centrally collected employers);
MWR Web collection system, MWR form
Definition: A field used to provide an explanation for any unique changes in an establishment
that cannot be accounted for through the standard QCEW comment codes. State staff are
encouraged to include more details in the narrative comment field if the record is very large or
the change was significant.
Special Criteria: If narrative comment field is included, the comment code 99 or at least one
valid comment code must appear on the micro file record.
Note: This field is 57 positions. State staff should attempt to use reasonable abbreviations to
ensure that they include the useful information without it being truncated.
Nondisclosure/Informed Consent Code
(Optional use in state)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
799
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Informed Consent Code,
ICCD, consent-cd
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros
Source:
Assigned by the state based on receipt of an informed consent form from the
employer or the end of an informed consent period previously approved by the
employer.
Definition: The Nondisclosure/Informed Consent Code identifies if the state and the employer
have established a written understanding and agreement that selected data information may be
released either as micro data from the respondent or with selected macro aggregations including
data from the respondent even though data users may be able to identify confidential information
about the employer and its business.
Valid Values: To be determined at a later date.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

N Page B-15

Nondisclosure/Informed Consent Year Agreed
(Optional use in state)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
800-803
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 4
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Consent initial year, consentinit-yr, Informed Consent Start
Year, ICST
Format:
YYYY
Source:
Assigned by the state based on receipt of an informed consent form from the
employer or the end of an informed consent period previously approved by the
employer.
Definition: The Nondisclosure/Informed Consent Year is the beginning reference year that the
state has been provided with permission to potentially release either selected micro data from the
respondent or selected macro aggregations including data from the respondent even though data
users may be able to identify confidential information about the employer and its business. This
is not the date of the agreement but the year of the reference data that may be released.
Nondisclosure/Informed Consent Year Ended
(Optional use in state)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
804-807
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 4
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Consent end year, consentend-yr, Informed Consent End
Year, ICEND
Format:
YYYY
Source:
Assigned by the state based on receipt of an informed consent form from the
employer or the end of an informed consent period previously approved by the
employer.
Definition: The Nondisclosure/Informed Consent Year is the ending reference year that the state
has been provided with permission to potentially release either selected micro data from the
respondent or selected macro aggregations including data from the respondent even though data
users may be able to identify confidential information about the employer and its business.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

O Page B-1

O
Old County
(Required for a county change when a noneconomic code change is present)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
552-554
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
OCTY
Source:
ARS Control File (system transferred), or QCEW staff when applying code
changes directly to the micro file, derived in WIN
Definition: A data element used to identify a noneconomic code change to the County code. If
the County code for the first quarter reference period (e.g., first quarter 2018 for the FY 2018
refiling) is different than the County code used to report that establishment's data in the
preceding fourth quarter (e.g., fourth quarter 2017) then the micro file should include an Old
County code – provided the change is noneconomic. The Old County code normally equals the
record's county code when the ARS Control File was created during the preceding first quarter
(e.g., first quarter 2017). In special circumstances (e.g., a new multi-establishment breakout),
certain predecessor/successor situations, the Old County is set equal to the fourth quarter County
code of a different record.
System Action: The state system is used to transfer certain information from the Control File to
the micro file during first quarter processing. For each record on the Control File, the state
systems transfer the Old fields from the Control File to the Old fields in the non-quarterly
occurrence portion of the matching micro file record. Meanwhile the system assigns the Control
File's New field, if valid and different from the Old, to the equivalent first quarter classification
code of the micro file record. The ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year will also be passed
from the Control File to the micro file at the same time. If the Old field differs from the
equivalent code in fourth quarter, and if the fourth quarter code is valid, and if the fourth quarter
was active, then the state system sets the Old field on the micro file equal to the fourth quarter
code.
Valid Values: Valid FIPS County codes for the state plus the following county equivalent codes:
995 = Statewide with no primary county
996 = Foreign locations
998 = Out-of-state locations
999 = Unknown locations
Caution: Old fields are copied from the ARS Control File, not from the UI tax file. If Old fields
are not retained on the Control File, the Old fields should equal the corresponding fourth quarter
codes on the micro file.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

O Page B-2

Old NAICS
(Required for a NAICS change when a noneconomic code change is present)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
569-574
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
ONAICS
Source:
ARS Control File (system transferred), or QCEW staff when applying code
changes directly to the micro file, derived in WIN
Definition: A data element used to identify a noneconomic code change to the NAICS code. If
the NAICS code for the first quarter reference period (e.g., first quarter 2018 for the FY2018
refiling) is different than the NAICS code used to report that establishment’s data in the
preceding fourth quarter (e.g., fourth quarter 2017) then the micro file should include an Old
NAICS – provided the change is noneconomic. The Old NAICS code normally equals the
record's NAICS code when the ARS Control File was created during the preceding first quarter
(e.g., first quarter 2017). In special circumstances (e.g., a new multi-establishment breakout), the
Old NAICS may be set equal to the fourth quarter NAICS code of a different record.
System Action: The state system is used to transfer certain information from the Control File to
the micro file during first quarter processing. For each record on the Control File, the state
systems transfer the Old fields from the Control File to the Old fields in the non-quarterly
occurrence portion of the matching micro file record. Meanwhile the system assigns the Control
File's New field, if valid and different from the Old, to the equivalent first quarter classification
code of the micro file record. The ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year will also be passed
from the Control File to the micro file at the same time. If the Old field differs from the
equivalent code in fourth quarter, and if the fourth quarter code is valid, and if the fourth quarter
was active, then the state system sets the Old field on the micro file equal to the fourth quarter
code.
Valid Values: Six-digit NAICS codes, as defined in the 2017 North American Industry
Classification System manual.
Caution: Old fields are copied from the ARS Control File, not from the UI tax file. If Old fields
are not retained on the Control File, the Old fields should equal the corresponding fourth quarter
codes on the micro file.
Old Ownership
(Required for an ownership change when a noneconomic code change is present)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
555
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Old Own, OOWN
Source:
ARS Control File (system transferred), or QCEW staff when applying code
changes directly to the micro file, derived in WIN

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

O Page B-3

Definition: A data element used to identify a noneconomic code change to the Ownership code.
If the Ownership code for the first quarter reference period (e.g., first quarter 2018 for the FY
2018 refiling) is different than the Ownership code used to report that establishment's data in the
preceding fourth quarter (e.g., fourth quarter 2017) then the micro file should include an Old
Ownership code – provided the change is noneconomic. The Old Ownership code normally
equals the record's Ownership code when the ARS Control File was created during the preceding
first quarter (e.g., first quarter 2017). In special circumstances (e.g., certain
predecessor/successor situations), the Old Ownership is set equal to the fourth quarter Ownership
code of a different record.
System Action: The state system is used to transfer certain information from the Control File to
the micro file during first quarter processing. For each record on the Control File, the state
systems transfer the Old fields from the Control File to the Old fields in the non-quarterly
occurrence portion of the matching micro file record. Meanwhile the system assigns the Control
File's New field, if valid and different from the Old, to the equivalent first quarter classification
code of the micro file record. The ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year will also be passed
from the Control File to the micro file at the same time. If the Old field differs from the
equivalent code in fourth quarter, and if the fourth quarter code is valid, and if the fourth quarter
was active, then the state system sets the Old field on the micro file equal to the fourth quarter
code.
Valid Values:
1 = Federal government
2 = State government
3 = Local government
5 = Private sector
Caution: Old fields are copied from the refiling Control File, not from the UI tax file. If Old
fields are not retained on the Control File, the Old fields should equal the corresponding fourth
quarter codes on the micro file.
Old Township
(For New England states and New Jersey, required for a geographic (County/Township) change
when a noneconomic code change is present.)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
560-562
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Old Town, OTOWN
Source:
ARS Control File (system transferred), or QCEW staff when applying code
changes directly to the micro file, derived in WIN
Definition: For certain states, a data element used to identify a noneconomic code change to the
Township code. If the Township code for the first quarter reference period (e.g., first quarter
2018 for the FY 2018 refiling) is different than the Township code used to report that
establishment's data in the preceding fourth quarter (e.g., fourth quarter 2017) then the micro file
should include an Old Township code – provided the change is noneconomic. The Old
Township code normally equals the record's Township code when the ARS Control File was
created during the preceding first quarter (e.g., first quarter 2017). In special circumstances (e.g.,
a new multi-establishment breakout, certain predecessor/successor situations), the Old Township
is set equal to the fourth quarter Township code of a different record.
System Action: The state system is used to transfer certain information from the Control File to
the micro file during first quarter processing. For each record on the Control File, the state

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

O Page B-4

systems transfer the Old fields from the Control File to the Old fields in the non-quarterly
occurrence portion of the matching micro file record. Meanwhile the system assigns the Control
File's New field, if valid and different from the Old, to the equivalent first quarter classification
code of the micro file record. The ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year will also be passed
from the Control File to the micro file at the same time. If the Old field differs from the
equivalent code in fourth quarter, and if the fourth quarter code is valid, and if the fourth quarter
was active, then the state system sets the Old field on the micro file equal to the fourth quarter
code.
Valid Values: Valid FIPS Township codes for the state plus the following Township equivalent
codes:
995 = Statewide with no primary township
996 = Foreign locations
998 = Out-of-state locations
999 = Unknown locations
Caution: Old fields are copied from the refiling Control File, not from the UI tax file. If Old
fields are not retained on the Control File, the Old fields should equal the corresponding fourth
quarter codes on the micro file.
Note: This data element is only used for states required to report Township codes: the New
England states and New Jersey. These states enter Old Township in combination with Old
County. If Old fields are not retained on the Control File, the Old fields should equal the
corresponding fourth quarter codes on the micro file.
Organization Type Indicator
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
598
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Org Type, ORG, org_typ_cd
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff
Definition: The legal form of the organization used for tax purposes by the establishment. It is
valid for the private sector (Ownership code 5) only. This code is used on Initial Status
Determination Forms to solicit information from private sector establishments concerning their
organizational structure.
Valid Vales: I = Individual
P = Partnership
C = Corporation
O = Other
System Action: When this indicator is assigned to a master record in a multi-unit account, the
state system copies the indicator from the master record to the subunit records in the same UI
account.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

O Page B-5

Caution: Several state tax systems collect a limited number of organization types from the Status
Determination Forms. These should be reviewed and converted to the standardized codes listed
above. Blank-fill for Ownership Codes of 1, 2, and 3. In states where Organization Codes are
not used, leave the field blank.
Ownership Code
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
597
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: None
Alternate Names:
Own, own_cd, OWN1
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff (including Federal accounts); copied from
previous quarter if unchanged on state system; system-transferred from the
ARS Control File in first quarter; EDI Center (for birth records of centrally
collected employers), MWR Web collection for births
Definition: A one-position field showing the legal proprietorship of the enterprise and
describing the economic ownership of the enterprise.
Valid Values:
1 = Federal government
2 = State government
3 = Local government
5 = Private sector (includes both domestic and foreign-owned units)
System Action: When this code is assigned to a master record in a multi-unit account, the state
system copies the code from the master record to the subunit records in the same UI account.
Ownership Extension
(Optional in EXPO)
EQUI:
Exclude
Position:
N/A
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Zero
Alternate Names:
None
Source:
Derived from UI tax file status codes; QCEW Staff; system assigned
Definition: A one-position field for use as an optional extension to the Ownership code. Some
states have state-specific codes for subdivisions of the private sector and may place them in this
field.
Example: In a few states, the second digit of the two-digit ownership code includes information
on different types of partnerships (e.g., limited partnerships or limited liability partnerships) or
corporations (e.g., non-profit corporation, in-state corporation, or out-of-state corporations), or
other information on estates, associations, cooperatives, etc.
Caution: States are encouraged to report this information in the Organization Type Indicator.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-1

P
PEO Client Information from EDI or other sources
The following information is collected via the EDI centers or other central collection on
Professional Employer Organizations (PEO), formerly referred to as Employee Leasing
Companies.
PEO Client UI Account Number
(Provided by EDI for PEO units)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 10 Type:
Numeric
Default Value: blank
Alternate Names:
None
Source:
Provided by EDI system for PEO units (record type 3 of the EDI format)
Definition: The ten-digit value of the original client account. This information is transferred
from the EDI load file to the predecessor UI number field of the record. This information should
be written to the unit’s predecessor UI Account Number. Zero-fill the predecessor reporting unit
number in these cases.
Note: See Appendix N – MWR File Layouts for the EDI format.
PEO Client Employer Identification (EI) Number
(Provided by EDI for PEO units)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 9
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
peo-ein
Source:
Provided by EDI for PEO units (record type 3 of the EDI format)
Definition: A nine-position field from the EDI center that identifies that EIN of the client. This
information may be used by the state to identify links between the PEO and the client account to
ensure that duplicate or dropped reporting does not exist. This may be particularly useful if a
client ceases to use a PEO and attempts are made to track who is reporting the data.
Note: See Appendix N – MWR File Layouts for the EDI format.
PEO Client Telephone Number
(Provided by EDI for PEO units)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 10 Type:
Numeric
Default Value: blank
Alternate Names:
None
Source:
Provided by EDI for PEO units (record type 3 of the EDI format)
Definition: A ten-position field for use from EDI to provide the client telephone number. The
load program will move this field to the units telephone number field. This information would
also be useful to contact the employer if the data are no longer reported by the PEO.
Note: See Appendix N – MWR File Layouts for the EDI format.
PEO Client Month and Year Became a Client
(Provided by EDI for PEO units)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:

N/A

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-2

Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: blank
Alternate Names:
None
Source:
Provided by EDI for PEO units (record type 3 of the EDI format)
Definition: A six-position field for use to identify when the unit started as a reporting unit of the
PEO. This can be used as the initial liability date of the new reporter under the PEO’s account.
Note that the client account may still be operating if some of the employees continue to be
reported directly by the client account. This information will be useful to determine if duplicate
reporting is occurring for a particular time period and to explain why the client ceased to report
the data under the client’s account.
Note: See Appendix N – MWR File Layouts for the EDI format.
PEO Client Month and Year Ceased to be a Client
(Provided by EDI for PEO units)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: blank
Alternate Names:
None
Source:
Provided by EDI for PEO units (record type 3 of the EDI format)
Definition: A six-position field for use to identify when the unit ceased as a reporting unit of the
particular PEO. This field would explain when the unit ceased to be reported by the PEO. This
may be used to enter an end of liability date for the record. Note that this record should be
researched to determine if the unit is out of business or being reported by the client or a different
PEO.
Note: See Appendix N – MWR File Layouts for the EDI format.
PEO Client Worksite Economic Activity Description
(Provided by EDI for PEO units)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 33 Type:
Numeric
Default Value: blank
Alternate Names:
None
Source:
Provided by EDI for PEO units (record type 3 of the EDI format)
Definition: A short description from the respondent identifying what the economic activity is for
the client record. This is useful to help identify NAICS codes.
Note: See Appendix N – MWR File Layouts for the EDI format.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-3

Physical Location Address Block
(Required if available)
The Physical Location address consists of a block of six fields, which are described below. This
address can be locked (as discussed for the Field Lock Position).
Note If the street address and room, apartment, or suite number does not fit on one line, the street
should be put in Address Line 1, while the room, apartment or suite number is put in Address
Line 2. At least one complete address (either Physical Location, UI Address, or Mailing/Other
Address), including all appropriate address lines, city, state, and zip information must appear on
each record. All physical location addresses should be geocodeable, at least to a zip-centroid
latitude and longitude.
In some cases it is possible to identify that the UI address or the Mailing/Other address is
actually the physical location address. The appropriate address type field should be marked and
the address copied to the physical location address fields. At least one complete address (either
Physical Location, UI Address, or Mailing/Other Address), including all appropriate address
lines, city, state, and zip information must appear on each record. All large non-master records
must have a physical location address.
Caution: Few states have an address field on the UI tax file or related supplemental files that
include specific physical location addresses. Physical location address fields can be locked.
Physical Location Address Line 1
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank, if all other
fields in the PL
address block are
blank
Format:
Source:

Positions:
244-278
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
PLA – Supplemental Location
Information, Physical address
1, Physical location 1, PL
address 1, PLA-line 1, PL-A1,
phys_str

Left justified
Extracted from UI files; entered by state QCEW staff (from various sources);
system copied (from Mailing/Other Address if MOA Address Type = 1);
system copied (from UI Address if UI Address Type = 1); EDI Center (for
worksites of centrally collected employers); CARS, MWR Web collection
system
Definition: First line of the address where the unit is physically located.
System Action: If the Physical Location Address Line 1 is blank, but information is included on
Physical Location Address Line 2, the state system moves it to Physical Location Address Line
1.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-4

Note: Efforts should be made to ensure that the street address is geocodable and if the physical
location address is the only address on the record, then it must also be mailable. At least one
complete address (either Physical Location, UI Address, or Mailing/Other Address), including all
appropriate address lines, city, state, and zip information must appear on each record. All large
non-master records must have a physical location address that is geocodeable to at least the zip
centroid latitude and longitude.
Physical Location Address Line 2
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Format:
Source:

Positions:
279-313
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
PLA – Street Address,
Physical address 2, Physical
location 2, PL address 2, PLAline 2, PL-A2, phys_str2

Left justified
Copied by the system from the ARS refiling (control) file; CARS; extracted
from UI files; entered by state QCEW staff (from various sources); system
copied (from Mailing/Other Address if MOA Address Type = 1); system
copied (from UI Address if UI Address Type = 1)
Definition: Second line of the address where the unit is physically located.
System Actions: If the Physical Location Address Line 1 is blank, but information is included in
Physical Location Address Line 2, the State system moves it to Physical Location Address Line
1.
Note: Efforts should be made to ensure that the street address is geocodable and if the physical
location address is the only address on the record, then it must also be mailable. At least one
complete address (either Physical Location, UI Address, or Mailing/Other Address), including all
appropriate address lines, city, state, and zip information must appear on each record. All large
non-master records must have a physical location address that is geocodeable to at least the zip
centroid latitude and longitude.
Physical Location Address City
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
314-343
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 30 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
Physical city, PL city, PLA
fields in the PL
city, PL-C1, phys_cty
address block are
blank.
Format:
Left justified
Source:
Copied by the system from the ARS refiling (control) file; CARS; extracted
from UI files; entered by state QCEW staff (from various sources; system
copied (from Mailing/Other Address if MOA Address Type = 1); system
copied (from UI Address if UI Address Type = 1); EDI Center (for worksites
of centrally collected employers); MWR Web collection
Definition: City or town where the unit is physically located.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-5

Note: At least one complete address (either Physical Location, UI Address, or Mailing/Other
Address), including all appropriate address lines, city, state, and zip information must appear on
each record. All large non-master records must have a physical location address that is
geocodeable to at least the zip centroid latitude and longitude.
Physical Location Address State
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
344-345
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Alphabetic
Default Value: Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
Physical State, PL State, PLAfields in the PL
State, PL-ST, physst
address block are
blank
Source:
Copied by the system from the ARS refiling (control) file; CARS; extracted
from UI files; entered by state QCEW staff (from various sources); system
copied (from Mailing/Other Address if MOA Address Type = 1); system
copied (from UI Address if UI Address Type = 1); EDI Center (for worksites
of centrally collected employers) ; MWR Web collection
Definition: Post Office abbreviation of the state where the unit is physically located.
Valid Values: The standard Post Office abbreviations for states appear in Appendix C. Other
valid values are as follows:
Destination
American Samoa
Guam
Military Post Offices in Central and South America (APO Miami)
Military Post Offices in Canada, Europe, Africa, and the Middle East
(APO New York)
Military Post Offices in Pacific and some areas of Alaska (APO San
Francisco)

Abbreviation
AS
GU
AA
AE
AP

Note: This abbreviation must match the state FIPS code for the state reporting the data, except in
the rare circumstance where County code 996 (foreign locations) or 998 (out of state) is
appropriate and is assigned. At least one complete address (either Physical Location, UI
Address, or Mailing/Other Address), including all appropriate address lines, city, state, and zip
information must appear on each record. All large non-master records must have a physical
location address that is geocodeable to at least the zip centroid latitude and longitude.
Physical Location Address ZIP Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length:

346-350
5
Type:

Alphanumeric

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-6

Default Value:

Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
Physical ZIP, PL ZIP, PLA
fields in the PL
ZIP, PL-Z5, phys_zip
address block are
blank
Source:
Copied by the system from the ARS refiling (control) file; CARS; extracted
from UI files; entered by state QCEW staff (from various sources); system
copied (from Mailing/Other Address if MOA Address Type = 1); system
copied (from UI Address if UI Address Type = 1); EDI Center (for worksites
of centrally collected employers) ; MWR Web collection
Definition: ZIP Code of the address where the unit is physically located.
Note: At least one complete address (either Physical Location, UI Address, or Mailing/Other
Address), including all appropriate address lines, city, state, and zip information must appear on
each record. All large non-master records must have a physical location address that is
geocodeable to at least the zip centroid latitude and longitude.
Physical Location Address ZIP Code Extension
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
351-354
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 4
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Physical location - ZIP Ext.,
Physical ZIP expansion, PL
ZIP Ext., PLA ZIPX, PL-Z4,
phys_ext
Format:
Left justified
Source:
Copied by the system from the ARS refiling (control) file; CARS; extracted
from UI files; entered by state QCEW staff (from various sources); system
copied (from Mailing/Other Address if MOA Address Type = 1); system
copied (from UI Address if UI Address Type = 1); EDI Center (for worksites
of centrally collected employers) ; MWR Web collection
Definition: ZIP Code Extension of the address where the unit is physically located.
Note: At least one complete address (either Physical Location, UI Address, or Mailing/Other
Address), including all appropriate address lines, city, state, and zip information must appear on
each record. All large non-master records must have a physical location address that is
geocodeable to at least the zip centroid latitude and longitude. However, ZIP Code Extension is
not essential; if all other physical location address fields exist but ZIP extension is missing, the
address still passes the edits.
Caution: Changes between zero-filled and blank ZIP code extensions are not considered changes
to the physical location addresses.
Place (City) Code
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: Blank
Source:
BLS-supplied

Positions:
772-776
Field Length: 5
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
City, Place, city-cd

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-7

Definition: Five-digit code assigned based on Census supplied boundary tables and latitude and
longitude.
Note: Not all records that are assigned latitude and longitude values will also be assigned place
codes. For more details on the place codes, refer to the following website:
https://www.census.gov/geo/reference/codes/place.html
PLA Type Code
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
661
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
PLA Bypass
Source:
BLS-supplied
Definition: Unlike the Mailing/Other and UI Address Type code, the PLA type code does not
compare the physical location address to any other address. The purpose of the PLA type code is
to override or bypass specific data requirements, counts, geocoding, and editing criteria for a
selected record when its physical location address is either incomplete or missing. Examples of
where this may be appropriate are home health care worksites that are actual residences,
domestics that are also operating in an actual residence, sales agents working out of their own
homes, and some government facilities.
Valid Values:
C = PLA and county confirmed
P = PLA provided and not geocodable
R = PLA blank—worksite is a residence or private home
S = PLA blank—sales agents working out of their own home
G = government facility only providing city, state, and ZIP code but no street address
B = BLS-approved bypass for missing PLA
Blank = PLA is provided or missing but no bypass/override exists
Note: An edit will probably be built into the systems to identify when a bypass is being used that
is not approved or unexpected.
Predecessor SESA ID
(Required if available)
The Predecessor SESA ID is a block of two fields that identifies or points to a predecessor
record. It allows continuous establishments that change key fields (UI Account Number or
RUN) to be linked. It consists of the Predecessor UI Account Number and Predecessor
Reporting Unit Number. If either one of these data elements is present, both must be present.
Predecessor UI Account Number
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include, P/S Record
Frequency:
Transaction
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
21-30
Field Length: 10 Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Predecessor UI Account
Number, Pred UI#
Format:
Right justified, with unused positions zero-filled
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff (for federal reports and worksites); EDI
Definition: The UI Account Number under which the unit was previously reported if it has been
reported under a different UI Account Number/Reporting Unit Number configuration. This is

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-8

explained in greater detail under Predecessor Reporting Unit Number and in Chapter 5. Two
transaction records are created for each full or partial transaction, each showing one of the two
directions of the transfer. For example, if a business (Joe’s Manufacturing) buys three
businesses (Jane Makes, Makes Them Right, and Tim’s Technology), the following records
would be created:
• Jane Makes is a predecessor of Joe’s Manufacturing
• Joe’s Manufacturing is a successor of Jane Makes
• Makes Them Right is a predecessor of Joe’s Manufacturing
• Joe’s Manufacturing is a successor of Makes Them Right
• Tim’s Technology is a predecessor of Joe’s Manufacturing
• Joe’s Manufacturing is a successor of Tim’s Technology
• Joe’s Manufacturing had multiple predecessors
Predecessor Reporting Unit Number
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include, P/S Record
Positions:
31-35
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 5
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank if Predecessor
Alternate Names:
Predecessor RUN, Pred RUN,
UI is blank
Pred RU#
Format:
Right justified, with unused positions zero-filled
Source:
QCEW staff; EDI
Definition: The Reporting Unit Number under which the unit was previously reported if it has
been changed to a different UI Account Number/Reporting Unit Number configuration. This is
explained further below and in Section 5.1.
1. When there is more than one reporting unit to point to as the predecessor of this reporting
unit, each specific Predecessor RUN should be assigned. (In these cases, BLS will generate a
record with “99999” assigned as the Predecessor RUN to indicate that more than one
reporting unit has been identified as a predecessor reporting unit. The “99999” record would
be used by the LDB system.)
2. When there is more than one UI Account Number to point to as the predecessor of this
reporting unit, each specific Predecessor UI Account Number should be assigned. (In these
cases, BLS will generate a record with “9999999999” assigned to indicate that more than one
UI Account has been identified as a predecessor UI account. The “9999999999” record
would be used by the LDB system.)
3. The situations in 1 and 2 above can be fully identified in the LDB by reporting the Successor
UI/Successor RUN in each of the multiple predecessor reporting units’ (in one or more UI
accounts) Successor UI Account Number and Successor RUN fields.
An establishment previously being reported under a different UI Account Number (or different
RUN within the same UI account) that now begins reporting with a newly assigned UI Account
Number (or newly assigned RUN within the same UI account) should identify its predecessor.
Its Predecessor UI and Predecessor RUN fields should be assigned the UI Account Number and
RUN under which the establishment was previously reported. If more than one predecessor
existed, then each predecessor should be identified on the predecessor/successor transaction file.
See Chapter 5 for more details.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-9

The purpose of Predecessor and Successor UI/RUN assignment is to identify establishments as
continuous, especially when they change ownership or UI number. This assignment is used
whether or not the case satisfies the state UI definitions for legal predecessors and successors.
For QCEW program purposes, a predecessor/successor relationship is one where the successor
(the new owner of an establishment) performs similar operations to the predecessor (the previous
owner of an establishment) using some or all of the predecessor’s employees. These operations
are frequently, but not necessarily, performed at the same location as the predecessor.
(1) In the case of single accounts which are acquired by a new owner with a new (or different)
UI Account Number, the previous UI Account Number and RUN (usually 00000) for the single
account should be reported in the Predecessor UI and Predecessor RUN fields.
(2) An individual establishment formerly reported via an MWR (containing several
establishments) may be acquired by another multi-establishment reporter. In this case, the
appropriate Predecessor UI and Predecessor RUN assigned to the newly acquired establishment
would be the previous UI number and RUN of that establishment.
(3) For cases involving the merger of several UI accounts either in whole or in part, it is usually
possible to assign unique Predecessor UI/RUNs to each of the establishments being reported on
the MWR of the re-formed multi establishment reporter.
Changes Within the Same UI Account: UI accounts that change reporting configuration (by
breaking out or consolidating reporting units) should also be assigned a Predecessor UI/RUN.
When data for a multi-unit employer are broken out for the first time, each newly disaggregated
subunit should repeat the UI Account Number and RUN of the previously aggregated unit in the
Predecessor UI Number and Predecessor RUN fields of the transaction records. When a multiunit employer is collapsed (e.g., because the employer refuses to report on the MWR), the new
combined record should include the UI Account Number of the previous multi-unit account in its
Predecessor UI Number field. In this case, each individual worksite reporting unit number being
collapsed would be written as separate transaction records in the transaction file.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-10

In many cases it is not possible to accurately assign predecessor and successor UI/RUNs because
of reporting discrepancies. In the textbook case where there is a change of ownership and all
multi-establishment reporters are reporting their establishments on a MWR, it is possible to
report predecessor and successor UI/RUNs accurately to the individual establishments. In these
cases, it is important to report predecessor and successor UI/RUNs with the individual UI
Account Number and/or RUN if individual UI Accounts/reporting units can be pointed to as the
predecessor or successor.
This information may not be available in time to report it for the year and quarter when the
change occurred. However, the Predecessor/Successor SESA ID fields should still be assigned
as soon as the information becomes available.
Cautions:
(1) The Predecessor UI Number should not be assigned unless the Predecessor RUN is also
assigned. The Predecessor RUN should not be assigned unless the Predecessor UI Number is
also assigned. If either field is present, both must be present.
(2) Most state UI tax files do not include a reporting unit number field, as defined by BLS. In
these cases, the Predecessor Reporting Unit Number should be zero filled when extracting
Predecessor UI Account Numbers from the UI tax files. QCEW staff should then correct the
Predecessor RUN as needed.
Predecessor/Successor Source Code
(Required)
EQUI:
Include, PS record
Positions:
36-37
Frequency:
Transaction
Field Length: 2
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
PS-Action
Source:
QCEW staff, UI extract, UI information, MWR Web, ARS, EDI, SUTA
Dumping Detection Software, others
Definition: The purpose of the predecessor/successor source code is to clearly identify if UI has
made a legal determination of a predecessor/successor relationship or if the QCEW staff have
obtained this information from other sources. It will also be useful when explaining why some
information such as transfer dates may change from when QCEW staff believe it occurred to
when UI actually makes the change to when QCEW staff actually reflect the change in their data.
Valid Values: This is a two digit field. An interim one digit version existed in the systems for a
short period of time. Both sets of values are provided below.

October 2018

Source Code
EX
UI
ER
SD

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

ED

Definition
UI extract load
UI, not loaded through the extract
Information from the employer
Wage record SUTA dumping
detection system
EDI data load

WR

Other wage record tool

RL

State record linkage/scoring

AR
MW
FS*
BL
MD
HS

P Page B-11

Assignment
System-assigned
User-assigned
User-assigned
System-assigned or may be userassigned
System-assigned or may be userassigned
System-assigned or may be userassigned
System-assigned or may be userassigned
User-assigned
User-assigned
User-assigned
User-assigned
User-assigned
System-assigned

ARS
MWR
Other federal/state programs
BLS weighted match system
News Media
Historical information –
initialization of P/S table/files
OT
Other/Unidentified source
User-assigned
blank
Unknown
*No longer used due to the Confidential Information Protection and Statistical Efficiency Act
(CIPSEA).
Note: See Chapter 5 for more details.

Predecessor/Successor Posting Date
(Required)
EQUI:
Include, PS record
Positions:
46-53
Frequency:
Transaction
Field Length: 8
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Source:
System-assigned
Definition: The date that the transaction was posted to the state QCEW database. This date
helps track when the information was available to the state. It will also be used to determine if
the record should be submitted on the EQUI file since the record does not include a reference
year and quarter. In many states, the QCEW are notified of predecessor/successor transactions
that are several quarters or years old. Without the date information, these data may conflict with
the quarterly employment and wage information provided for the predecessor and successor
records. Although the dates may not line up exactly, it is important that no reporting gaps or
overlaps occur between the two (or more) records.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

P Page B-12

Predecessor/Successor Narrative Comment
(Required)
EQUI:
Include, PS record
Positions:
54-198
Frequency:
Transaction
Field Length: 145 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Source:
QCEW staff assigned
Definition: The Predecessor/Successor Narrative Comment is additional space to explain in
more detail any relevant information about the predecessor/successor transaction that would not
fit in other existing fields.
Predecessor/Successor Transfer Date
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include, P/S Record
Positions:
38-45
Frequency:
Transaction
Field Length: 8
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Format:
YYYYMMDD
Source:
UI, QCEW state staff
Definition: The P/S Transfer Date is the actual date of the predecessor/successor transaction. If
the transaction is a full transfer, then this date is typically the same as the end of liability date of
the predecessor. If the transaction is a partial transfer to a new account, then the transfer date
would be the same as the successor’s initial liability date. Records with large employment
(typically one hundred or greater) should have a transfer date.

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

October 2018

Quarter
(Required)
EQUI:
Frequency:
Default Value:

Q Page B-1

Q
Include
Quarterly
None

Position:
8
Field Length: 1
Alternate Names:

Type:
Numeric
Reporting Quarter, Reference
Quarter, qtr
Source:
Input micro transaction records, or system assigned
Definition: The calendar quarter for which the data are being reported.
Valid Values: 1 = January, February, March
2 = April, May, June
3 = July, August, September
4 = October, November, December

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

R Page B-1

R
Reactivation Date
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
536-543
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 8
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
react_dte, REACT
Format:
YYYYMMDD – four positions for year, two for month, and two for day (e.g.,
"20180401" for April 1, 2018)
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff (for federal reports and worksites)
Definition: The date that an inactive unit or out-of-business unit (on the state UI system) is
reactivated. If the reactivated unit is still present on the micro file, the Reactivation Date should
be assigned while all other dates are maintained without change. If the reactivated unit is no
longer in the QCEW system (having been inactive for more than six quarters) but is still on UI
files, the record should be added to the micro file and should include appropriate dates extracted
from the UI files: Input Date, Initial Date of Liability, and End of Liability. If the reactivated
unit has not been submitted on the EQUI file (because it was inactivated on state system), the
entire record should be submitted including the Input Date, Initial Date of Liability, and End of
Liability Date. The End of Liability Date should not change when the reactivation date is
assigned. If a reactivated unit again ceases operations and is assigned an End of Liability Date,
the old End of Liability Date should be overwritten.
Once an establishment receives an “end of liability” date, meaning that the unit has ceased
operations, it has no employees and pays no wages. In those cases where the state allows these
businesses to begin operations again with the same UI Account Number, the inactive unit (in the
QCEW system) should be assigned a reactivation date (while maintaining all other dates without
change). The time period between the End of Liability Date and the Reactivation Date will
indicate the period of time the unit was not operating as a business. This date will be used to
track units on the LDB. This date may not exist or be available in all states. Some states may
have a substantial number of these cases, including seasonal businesses.
Caution: Some states do not permit reactivations, while others do not track the reactivation date
separately. If a previously inactivated unit is reactivated in the UI tax file by replacing the old
liability date with a new date, the new date should be moved to the Reactivation Date. Some
states refer to this as the reinstall date.
Reporting Unit Description
(Required if available for multi subunits (MEEI 3 and 5); optional for all other MEEI codes)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
467-501
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
RUD, Worksite Description,
run_descr
Format:
Left justified
Source:
QCEW staff; EDI Center (for worksites of centrally collected employers);
MWR Web collection system
Definition: Unique description of the reporting unit, in terms meaningful to the reporter. When
possible, use the employer's terminology. The vehicle for collection and verification of the

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

R Page B-2

Reporting Unit Description (RUD) is the Multiple Worksite Report (MWR) and the availability
of this data element is dependent on the reporter. (For MWR data collected by the EDI Center,
the RUD is also provided by the employer.) The RUD should be consistent over time and across
files. The RUD for each subunit should be provided back to the respondent on a quarterly basis
via the MWR for verification and updating. Examples of the RUD include store numbers, plant
numbers, and plant names, which apply to the subunit. If the reporter uses any system such as a
store number or accounting code to identify the subunit, that information should be reported in
the RUD field (for example, "STORE #2986" or "CODE #52"). If such a system is used by the
reporter, wording (STORE, CODE) should be used along with the number to explain the
meaning of the number. The RUD should be unique nationwide for users of the national office
Longitudinal Data Base. BLS surveys will frequently send a data collection form to a corporate
headquarters and refer to each worksite solely by the Reporting Unit Description (without
reference to state).
Reporting Unit Descriptions should generally be provided for subunit records but may be
omitted in certain situations. Specifically, RUDs are not required if all these conditions are met:
(a) the employer has multiple establishments in only one state,
(b) each establishment is uniquely identified by name and address,
(c) the multi-establishment employer has relatively few subunits (five or less), and
(d) the employer uses no other means to identify the establishment.
For a reporting unit which represents more than one establishment of a multi-establishment
employer (e.g., MEEI = 4, 5, or 6), the RUD should describe the aggregation of establishments
that the record represents. For example, if a record has an MEEI of 5, the RUD might contain
"DALLAS PLANT AND FORT WORTH WAREHOUSE" as an adequate description.
Cautions: (1) Industry descriptions or Short Titles should not be used in this field.
(2) This information is not usually available on UI tax files.
Reporting Unit Number
(Required)
EQUI:
Include, regular EQUI Positions:
19-23
record and P/S record
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 5
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: None
Alternate Names:
RUN, RU #, rnum
Format:
Right justified, with unused positions zero-filled
Source:
For new worksite units: state QCEW staff (or the EDI Center for centrally
collected employers); MWR Web collection system
For single and master records: system assigned zeros.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

R Page B-3

Definition: A five-digit number used to uniquely distinguish worksites of a multi-unit account.
This field should be consistent from quarter to quarter to allow identification of the same unit
over time. The RUN is a five digit extension of the UI Account Number. Its purpose is to
uniquely distinguish worksites of a multi-unit account. When more than one unit has the same
state assigned UI Account Number, the RUN will distinguish each particular unit of a multiestablishment account from any other unit. Each subunit record within a UI account should be
assigned a unique RUN. RUNs for subunits of the same UI Number should be assigned
sequentially, and should not be re-used for a different reporting unit under the same UI Account
Number. In the case of inactive reporting units, however, a reactivated unit may have the same
RUN as before. When RUNs are assigned to newly broken out multi subunits, the first subunit
must have a RUN of 00001, and the number for each additional subunit must increase by 1. For
example, a UI account with three subunits will have RUNs numbered 00001, 00002, and 00003.
Gaps in the numbering system may occur over time as a result of units going out of business or
being sold. This systematic pattern will:
Make it easier for states to keep track of which RUNs have been used
Make apparent the next number available for use
Allow employers to keep state assigned RUNs in their payroll system – whether to provide data
in a file or to generate a facsimile of the Multiple Worksite Report
Enable state staff, the EDI Collection Center, or employers to assign the proper RUN to a new
unit when first setting it up
Valid Values: For single and master units, 00000. For subunits, values greater than 00000 and
less than 99999. The Reporting Unit Number of each record should be consistent with the
MEEI. Records with MEEI of 1 (single), 2 (master), 4, (multi reporting as single), or 6 (multi
not solicited) should have a Reporting Unit Number = 00000. Records with MEEI of 3 (subunit)
or 5 (combined subunit) should have a Reporting Unit Number greater than 00000.
Special Notes: (1) UI Account Number and Reporting Unit Number are the identifying fields
(key fields) for records on the national office and state system databases.
(2) Reporting Unit Number 99999 should not be assigned since it is reserved at BLS for use in
the Predecessor RUN and Successor RUN fields to indicate that the predecessor or successor is
not unique. This information will be generated by EXPO and WIN systems and included on the
transaction files when more than one predecessor or successor transaction record is created for
the record between submittals to BLS. BLS will continue to use this information in the LDB
system.
Caution: States that maintain worksite information on tax files are required to follow these
guidelines on state and national office QCEW files. states that allow “orphans” or cases where a
multi-establishment family terminates all units but one (leaving a single, surviving worksite)
must convert its Reporting Unit Number to “00000” during the extract process and ensure the
correct MEEI code is assigned. Most state UI tax files do not include a Reporting Unit Number
field, as defined by BLS. In these cases, the Reporting Unit Number should be zero filled when
extracting single and master accounts from UI tax files.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

S Page B-1

S
Setup Date
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
512-519
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 8
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Input Date, input_dte, SETUP
Format:
YYYYMMDD – four positions for year, two for month, and two for day (e.g.,
"20180501" for May 1, 2018)
Source:
State UI system (for records with MEEI 1, 2, 4, or 6); system assigned (for
new records with MEEI 3 or 5); QCEW staff (federal reports). For states
unable to extract a Setup Date (MEEI 1, 2, 4, or 6), the system assigns the date
that the record was first extracted from the tax file.
Definition: This is the date that the information for the UI account is put into the state UI
system. For a subunit (worksite) record, this is the date the record was assigned an active status
code. Once assigned, this date would not change for a continuous UI account or for a continuous
subunit. For an ownership change, the successor account would have a new setup date that
would match the date the new record was input onto the state UI system. This date is necessary
for determining when units were added to the state UI system. Potential uses are:
1. To distinguish between new units and units which were part of a previous sample frame used
for selecting a sample at a specific point in time. (Sampling for births.) This date is
important in simplifying the task of sampling for births.
2. For use in analyzing LDB data. Some businesses actually enter the state UI system some
period of time after the business’ initial date of liability (when the business actually pays
wages to employees). Sometimes the first employment does not appear on QCEW files until
the setup date even though the initial date of liability indicates that employees were present
earlier.
Note: This date may not be accurate in some states for UI accounts that were already active
before this became a required QCEW data element (before third quarter 1997).
Shared Secret/Temporary Password
(Used for security in the MWR Web systems)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 8
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Shared Secret
Format:
Left justified if alphanumeric
Source:
Provided by BLS for MWR Web solicitation
Definition: Field provided by BLS to states for collection of information via the Web. This
information would be printed on the MWR form and used by the employer for the respondent’s
initial registration and use of the MWR Web system. This information can be found on the
MWR Web Solicitation Request File in Appendix N – MWR File Formats.
Note: the name that the respondent will see for this value is the “Password” or “Temporary
Password”.
SIC Code

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

October 2018

(Required)
EQUI:
Frequency:
Default Value:

S Page B-2

Include
Quarterly
9999

Positions:
581-584
Field Length: 4
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Standard Industrial
Classification code, SIC, siccd-chr
Source:
System-transferred from ARS Control File in first quarter; QCEW staff (for
worksites, economic changes); state UI files (new records); copied from
previous quarter if unchanged on state system; EDI Center (for birth records of
centrally collected employers)
Definition: Standard Industrial Classification code to identify the primary economic activity of
the reporting unit. The primary activity is the primary product or group of products produced or
distributed (or services rendered) by the establishment (reporting unit). The primary activity of
the enterprise is the primary activity of the establishments within a state.
Caution: This code was replaced with the NAICS code as the primary industry code of record.
SICs are no longer coded or maintained.
Valid Values: valid four-digit codes as shown in the 1987 SIC Manual, plus 0740, 0780, and
5810.
Solicitation ID/Temporary ID
(Provided by BLS to states from the Respondent for MWR Web collection)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 12 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Format:
Source:
BLS MWR Web system
Definition: SolicitationID is a unique identifier respondents use when they register to the MWR
Web system. Note that this is the 12-character version of the SolicitationID, where the first three
characters specify the IDCF survey. This information can be found on the MWR Web
Solicitation Request File in Appendix N – MWR File Formats.
The name that the respondent will see for this value is the “ID” or “Temporary Account
Number”.
Special Indicator
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
576
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
SPCL, spec_ind
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: Code used to identify records that may require special handling or provide special
information.
Valid Values:
T = Indian Tribal Council
P = PEO Employer (used in Standardized UI QUEST extract but converted to
“L” in EXPO and WIN)

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

S Page B-3

L = Staff in establishment leased to a PEO
blank (default value) = All other records
Note: Other codes may be developed later.
Special Criteria: Professional employer (staff leasing) firm (master) would be coded with P;
subunit with leased employment would be coded with L.
State Code
(Optional in state systems; required on the EQUI and the national office micro file)
EQUI:
Include, regular EQUI Positions:
2-3
record and P/S record
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: None
Alternate Names:
State FIPS code
Source:
System
Definition: The two-digit numeric FIPS designator for the state that handles the UI Account,
inclusive of the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.
Valid Values: The valid values for each state appear in Appendix C. Invalid codes include 00,
03, 07, 14, 43, 52, 57-71, 73-77, and numbers greater than 78.
Caution: This field will be system-assigned by EXPO and WIN.
State Use Field
(Optional; not reported on the EQUI)
EQUI:
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
State_use, STUSE
Format:
Left justified
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: A field available for use by the state for their own purposes.
Caution: This is for internal use only. Some states, however, with converted UI Account
Numbers, retain the old UI numbers in the non-quarterly state use field in their state system.
These are transmitted to BLS in positions 1130-1165 of the EQUI file.

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

October 2018

Status Code
(Required)
EQUI:
Frequency:
Default Value:

S Page B-4

Include
Quarterly
None

Position:
544
Field Length: 1
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Status; Status Code, SC, STA,
status_cd
Source:
Derived from UI tax file status codes, QCEW staff, or system assigned. May
be system assigned based on Initial Liability Date, End of Liability Date,
and/or Reactivation Date. May be provided for new multi-establishment units
sent through EDI or the Web collection. Also assigned when a record is
“deleted” from the file
Definition: A code showing whether or not the record is active for QCEW purposes. This does
not refer to the UI status of the record. If a record is active for any part of the quarter, it is active
for the entire quarter. Most status codes are system-assigned based on the combination of Initial
Liability Date, End of Liability Date, and Reactivation Date.
Valid Values: 1 = active (also includes reactivated units, active for a portion of the time, and
active for the entire quarter)
2 = inactive (also includes terminated, closed, sold, etc.)
3 = inactive; filler for non-submitted quarters of a record (in the national office
system only)
9 = pending (e.g., a new unit is set up as pending for a multi-establishment in a
quarter to begin the breakout reporting as active in a later quarter)
Note: For records that have been imputed for one or two quarters and have been delinquent for
an additional five quarters, a 2 (inactive) will be assigned unless there is reason to believe the
unit is still active. The standard QCEW systems include a systems option to inactivate these
records.
Caution: Several state tax systems distinguish between inactive and terminated accounts. Other
systems include information on delinquent accounts, seasonal accounts, and other special
characteristics. States need to match specialty codes in their UI tax systems to the QCEW
standardized codes of 1, 2, and 9 to ensure that all records that should be included are extracted.
Successor SESA ID
(Required if available)
The Successor SESA ID is a block of two fields that identifies or points to a successor record. It
allows continuous establishments that change key fields (UI Account Number or RUN) to be
linked. It consists of the Successor UI Account Number and Successor Reporting Unit Number.
If either one of these data elements is present, both must be present.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

S Page B-5

Successor UI Account Number
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include, P/S Record
Frequency:
Transaction
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
21-30
Field Length: 10 Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Successor UI Account
Number, Successor UI#
Format:
Right justified, with unused positions zero-filled.
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff (for federal reports and worksites)
Definition: The UI Account Number under which the unit will be reported, (or is now reporting)
if its UI Account Number/Reporting Unit Number configuration will change (or has already
changed.) This is explained in greater detail under Successor Reporting Unit Number and in
Chapter 5. Two transaction records are created for each full or partial transaction, each showing
one of the two directions of the transfer. For example, if a business (Joe’s Manufacturing) buys
three businesses (Jane Makes, Makes Them Right, and Tim’s Technology), the following records
would be created:
• Jane Makes is a predecessor of Joe’s Manufacturing
• Joe’s Manufacturing is a successor of Jane Makes
• Makes Them Right is a predecessor of Joe’s Manufacturing
• Joe’s Manufacturing is a successor of Makes Them Right
• Tim’s Technology is a predecessor of Joe’s Manufacturing
• Joe’s Manufacturing is a successor of Tim’s Technology
• Joe’s Manufacturing had multiple predecessors
Successor Reporting Unit Number
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include, P/S Record
Positions:
31-35
Frequency:
Transaction
Field Length: 5
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank if Successor UI Alternate Names:
Successor RUN, Succ RUN,
Number is blank
Succ RU#
Format:
Right justified, with unused positions zero-filled
Source:
QCEW staff
Definition: The Reporting Unit Number under which the unit will be reported (or is now
reporting), if its UI Account Number/Reporting Unit Number configuration will change (or has
already changed). This is explained further below, and in Section 5.1.
1. When there is more than one reporting unit to point to as the successor of a predecessor unit,
each specific Successor RUN should be assigned. (In these cases, BLS will generate a record
with “99999” as the Successor RUN to indicate that more than one reporting unit has been
identified as a successor reporting unit. The “99999” record would be used by the LDB
system.)

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

S Page B-6

2. When there is more than one UI Account Number to point to as the successor of a predecessor
unit, each specific Successor UI Account Number should be assigned. (In these cases, BLS
will generate a record with “9999999999” as the Successor UI Account Number to indicate
that more than one UI Account has been identified as a successor UI Account. The
“9999999999” record would be used by the LDB system.)
3. The situations in 1 and 2 above can be fully identified in the LDB by reporting the
Predecessor UI/Predecessor RUN in each of the multiple successor reporting units’ (in one or
more UI accounts) Predecessor's UI Account Number and Predecessor's Reporting Unit
Number fields.
An establishment that ceases reporting under one UI Account Number/Reporting Unit Number
and begins reporting with a newly assigned UI/RUN should have a Successor UI Number and
Successor RUN identified for the record that will no longer be reported. The Successor UI
Number and Successor RUN should reflect the newly assigned and currently reporting UI
number/Reporting Unit Number.
The purpose of Predecessor and Successor UI/RUN assignment is to identify establishments as
continuous, especially when they change ownership or UI number. This assignment should be
used whether or not the case satisfies the state UI definitions for legal predecessors and
successors. For QCEW program purposes, a predecessor/successor relationship is one where the
successor (the new owner of an establishment) performs similar operations to the predecessor
(the previous owner of an establishment) using some or all of the predecessor’s employees.
These operations are frequently, but not necessarily, performed at the same location as the
predecessor.
This information may not be available in time to report it for the year and quarter when the
change occurred. However, the Predecessor/Successor SESA ID fields should still be assigned
as soon as the information becomes available.
Cautions:
(1) The Successor UI Number should not be assigned unless the Successor RUN is also
assigned. The Successor RUN should not be assigned unless the Successor UI Number is also
assigned. If either field is present, both must be present.
(2) Most state UI tax files do not include a reporting unit number field, as defined by BLS. In
these cases, the Successor Reporting Unit Number should be zero filled when extracting
Successor UI Numbers from the UI tax files. QCEW staff should then correct the Successor
RUN as needed.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

T Page B-1

T
Tax Rate
(Required; not reported on the EQUI)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 5
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: None for contributory Alternate Names:
Rate, Employer Tax Rate,
employers. Zero for
tax_rate, TAXRT
reimbursable, non-UIcovered or UCFE
covered
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros; a decimal place is implied after the first
position from the left. For example, the value of 00325 is a tax rate of 0.0325,
or 3.25% (i.e. divide by 100 to obtain the tax rate percentage).
Source:
State UI system
Definition: Tax rate used during the reference quarter to tax contributory employer's taxable
wages to meet the employer's obligation to the UI fund. Tax rates should be assigned, typically
by the UI tax unit, to all active, tax-rated or experience-rated accounts.
Rounding Criteria: To the nearest thousandths place.
Note: Tax rates for master records are copied to all the subunits of the UI account.
Special Criteria: System must associate the appropriate tax rate with any given micro data
record. System must be able to maintain this association on exported files.
Taxable Wages
(Required)
EQUI:
Frequency:
Default Value:
Format:
Source:

Include
Positions:
639-649
Quarterly
Field Length: 11 Type:
Numeric
None
Alternate Names:
Tax Wages, TAXW, tax_wg
Right justified with leading zeros
1) State UI system (masters and singles)
2) System assigned (imputed for worksites).
Definition: Wages of the employer (reported) that are UI taxed. Contributory accounts only.
Even if an employer has a zero tax rate, taxable wages should be reported for subject wages up to
the state wage limit.
Note: “Subject wages” is not the same as “taxable wages”. “Subject wages” are wages that meet
the criteria for being taxed irrespective of minimum or maximum per-employee cutoffs. Thus, if
the state limited its UI Tax collections to X percent of each employee’s subject wages less than
$25,001 in a calendar year, employees earning $80,000 per year would have “subject wages” of
$80,000, providing their wages were otherwise subject to UI Tax, irrespective of the maximum
per-employee taxable limit. In this example, each employee’s wages up to $25,000 in the year
would be “taxable wages”, and each employee’s wages above $25,000 in the year would not be
“taxable wages”.
Rounding Criteria: All wage fields are rounded to the nearest whole dollar amounts. For
example, if taxable wages are $122,465.49, then 00000122465, and not 00012246549, should

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

October 2018

T Page B-2

appear in this field. If taxable wages are $122,465.50, then the data should be rounded up so that
00000122466 appears in this field.
Taxable Wages Indicator Flag
(Required)
EQUI:
Exclude
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: M

Position:
N/A
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
Taxable Wages Indicator;
TaxW-Ind., tax_wg_ind,
Source:
1) System generated for all data entered via extract or batch.
2) Assigned when data imputed or prorated.
3) QCEW staff (manual override).
Definition: Indicator showing the source of the taxable wages.
Valid Values: Blank or R = reported data
B = BLS-initialized quarter. The national office system assigns this taxable wage
indicator when no EQUI record was received from the state for this quarter
C = changed (re-reported)
E = imputed single unit taxable wages or imputed worksite taxable wages
prorated from imputed master taxable wages
H = hand-imputed (not system generated)
K = special system-generated imputation to reflect data impacted by a catastrophe
L = late reported (overrides prior imputation)
M = missing data
N = zero-filled pending resolution of long-term delinquent reporter
P = prorated from reported master to worksites
X = non-numeric taxable wages zero-filled pending further action
Caution: Imputed data on the UI tax file should not be copied or extracted.
Telephone Number
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank
Format:
Source:

Positions:
502-511
Field Length: 10 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
Phone, PH-AR, PHN7,
area_cd,
Ten digits comprised of 3-digit area code, 3-digit prefix, and 4-digit suffix
State UI system; QCEW staff (entered from MWR or ARS forms or from staff
research), EDI, MWR Web, CARS.

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

October 2018

T Page B-3

Definition: The telephone number for the employer. Preferably this is the number of the actual
employer (not an agent), and it corresponds to the physical location of the establishment. The
master record phone number should not be copied to subunits. Do not enter a 3-digit area code
only, without the corresponding 7-digit number. Do not enter directory assistance number, (xxx)
555-1212. If the physical location telephone number is not available, a telephone number for
another location or section of that employer would be preferable, e.g. the number of the
corporate headquarters or central office, as opposed to the number for an outside payroll preparer
or accounting firm.
Note: Some states do retain the phone number of payroll providers to ask the preparer questions,
however; this is not the preferred telephone number if an employer number is available.
Telephone Extension
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
845-849
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 5
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Phone Extension
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros
Source:
State UI system (if available), QCEW staff, MWR Web, and EDI
Definition: This field includes any telephone extension number that would be used to point to a
specific contact within the respondent organization.
Note: ARS Web does not collect nor export to states the respondents’ telephone extensions.
Total Wages
(Required)
EQUI:
Frequency:
Default Value:

Include
Quarterly
None

Positions:
627-637
Field Length: 11 Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Total Quarterly Wages, Gross
Wages, Wages, TOTW, TW,
tot_wg
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros
Source:
1) State UI system
2) System generated (imputed data)
3) EDI Center (for worksites of centrally collected employers)
4) QCEW staff (other)
5) MWR Web collection
Definition: Total amount of UI-subject wages paid quarterly to covered workers on all the
payrolls during the entire reference quarter. Includes taxable and nontaxable (excess) wages, and
bonuses. Total Wages may include the cash value of meals, lodging, bonuses, stock options, tips
and other gratuities depending on state laws and if these items are furnished with the job.
Rounding Criteria: All wage fields are rounded to the nearest whole dollar amounts. For
example, if total wages are $122,465.49, then 00000122465, and not 00012246549, should
appear in this field. If total wages are $122,465.50, then the data should be rounded up so that
00000122466 appears in this field.
Total Wages Indicator Flag
(Required)

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

October 2018

EQUI:
Frequency:
Default Value:

T Page B-4

Include
Quarterly
M

Position:
638
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
Wage Flag, Quarterly Wage
Imputation Flag, TOTWI,
tot_wg_ind, TW-ind
Source:
1) System generated (blank, K, M, N, P, R, E, X, and S) for all data entered via
extract or batch or from an imputation routine.
2) QCEW staff (manual override).
Definition: Indicator showing the source of the wage data.
Valid Values: Blank or "R" = reported data
C = changed (re-reported)
E = imputed single unit or prorated worksite wages from an imputed master
record
H = hand-imputed (not system generated)
K = special system-generated imputation to reflect data impacted by a catastrophe
L = late reported (overrides prior imputation)
M = missing data
N = zero-filled pending resolution of long-term delinquent reporter
P = prorated from master to worksite
S = aggregated master from reported MWR or EDI data
W = imputed from wage record wages
X = non-numeric wages zero-filled pending further action
Note: State should resolve all “X” records before submission on the EQUI.
Special: State System assigns R for all blanks when generating the EQUI file.
Caution: Imputed data on the UI tax file should not be copied or extracted.
Township Code
(Required for New England states and New Jersey, optional for all other states)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
602-604
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: 999 for New England
Alternate Names:
TWN, Town, res_cd, residence
states and New Jersey,
code
zero-filled for all other
states
Source:
State UI system; copied from previous quarter if unchanged on state system;
QCEW staff (staff research); ARS Control File (system transferred); CARS;
EDI Center (for birth records of centrally collected employers); MWR; MWR
Web

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

T Page B-5

Definition: Three-digit numeric code required for New England states and New Jersey, used to
identify the township of the location or place of business. FIPS codes are not required for the
township code. New England states as well as New Jersey must notify national office through
their regional office of any changes to their township code list before submitting the affected
deliverable EQUI file. The notification should include all affected combinations of county and
township codes and include a narrative description that identifies the county/township name of
each combination. Use of 900 on master records is optional and is not required.
Valid Values: Valid township codes for the state plus the following township equivalent codes:
(For a full description of the township equivalent codes, see Section 2.1.3.)
900 = Master record
995 = Statewide with no primary township
996 = Foreign locations
998 = Out-of-state locations
999 = Unknown locations
Note: Township equivalent codes other than 999 first became valid with third quarter 1997 data.
Township Extension
(Optional; for state use only.)
EQUI:
Exclude
Position:
N/A
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: None
Alternate Names:
None
Definition: A one-position field for filler. For states other than New Jersey and the New
England states, this may be used as an optional extension to township code, creating a fourposition zone field. Typically this information is collected and maintained at a more detailed
level than county level.
Example: “Traffic zone” information for the Highway department.
Caution: New England states and New Jersey are required to collect, maintain, and submit
three-digit township information.
Trade Name
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
98-132
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
DBA Name, TRDNM, dba
Format:
Left justified
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff (for worksites); EDI Center (for worksites of
centrally collected employers); ARS Web collected-data files; MWR Web
collected-data files
Definition: Name of the reporting unit as it is known to the public.
Special Criteria: Either the Legal Name or Trade Name must be present for each record. If both
are available, both must be present. (See the examples for Legal Name.)
Transaction Code
(Required)
EQUI:
Include, regular EQUI
record and P/S record

Position:

1

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

T Page B-6

Frequency:

State and BLS
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
generated
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
INA
Source:
State system
Definition: Identifies if the record submitted on the EQUI is a
T = Trailer record
H = Header record
D = Delete record
F = Full record
P = Predecessor/Successor record
U = a selected number of records are submitted by BLS staff to resolve significant
problems that must be corrected quickly for critical BLS users.
Blank = used for limited update directly by BLS
Type of Coverage
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Quarterly
Default Value: None

Position:
659
Field Length: 1
Type:
Numeric
Alternate Names:
Coverage code, COV,
Reimbursable code, REIM
code, REM code, typcov_cd,
TOC
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff for federal, UCFE-covered accounts
Definition: Each employer covered under the state’s Unemployment Insurance or
Unemployment Compensation for Federal Employees (UCFE) is assigned a type of coverage
using a state-specific coding scheme. These codes identify whether the employer is determined
to be experience rated, covered under a standard contributions rate, or is an employer who is not
required to pay contributions but must reimburse when a claim is filed against the account.
Three states have a provision for the possible use of employee contributions. Several states also
collect data from non-UI/UCFE covered employers.
Valid Values: 0 = Experience rated (contributory) (employer funded). Accounts coded as “0”
should be experience-rated, assigned a standard contributions rate, or similar
or special tax rate as specified in the state UI laws. Employees in these
accounts do not contribute to the UI trust fund.
1 = Reimbursable. Certain nonprofit organizations, state or local government
entities, and political subdivisions which elect or are required to reimburse
state UI trust fund when a claim is filed against the employer in lieu of
contributions as provided in the state UI laws.
2 = Taxable (employer and employee funded). Employers deduct employee
contributions from the employees’ pay and include them with the required
employer contributions.
3 = Reimbursable (employer reimburses upon demand but the employee
contributes on a periodic basis).
8 = Non-subject accounts. (These will not be submitted on the EQUI.) These are
accounts that do not meet the UI or UCFE coverage requirements but provide
data to the state for other purposes (e.g., statistical research).

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

T Page B-7

9 = Federal accounts covered under UCFE.
Known Valid Code Combinations within a state: 0, 1, 8, 9
0, 1, 9
1, 2, 9
2, 3, 9
1, 2, 8, 9
Example: Valid codes for a state with employee contributions would be 2, 3, and 9.
System Action: When this code is assigned to a master record in a multi-unit account, the state
system copies the code from the master record to the subunit records in the same UI account.
Caution: State-specific codes must be properly mapped to the six valid codes allowed in the
QCEW standardized state systems.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

U Page B-1

U
UI Account Number
(Required)
EQUI:
Include, regular EQUI
record and P/S record
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: None

Positions:

9-18

Field Length: 10
Alternate Names:

Type:
Numeric
UI Tax Number, UI#, unum,
ACCT
Format:
Right justified, with unused positions zero-filled
Source:
State UI system; QCEW staff (for federal reports)
Definition: The identification number assigned by the state UI unit to identify employers
covered by the state UI laws, or the identification number assigned by the state UI unit or the
QCEW unit to identify Federal government installations covered by UCFE provisions, or the
identification number assigned by the QCEW unit to identify non-UI and non-UCFE covered
employers maintained in the QCEW files. This field should be consistent from quarter to quarter
to allow identification of the same unit over time. Any suffix or prefix that is used to identify
individual units of a multi-unit employer should be reported in the Reporting Unit Number field
and not as part of the UI Account Number.
Valid Values: Cannot be all zeros or all nines. Must be numeric in all positions.
Special Notes: (1) UI Account Number 9999999999 should not be assigned since it is reserved
for use in the Predecessor UI Number and Successor UI Number fields for the BLS LDB system
to indicate that the predecessor or successor is not unique.
(2) UI Account Number and Reporting Unit Number are the identifying fields (key fields) for
records on the national office and state system databases.
(3) If the state plans to change the structure of the UI Account Number, the state must
coordinate implementing these changes with the regional Office and national office before
submitting the EQUI file. Notification is necessary since any change to the structure would
affect the processing of the file. In addition, the changes should be described in the Remarks
section of the QCEW Program Data Transmittal Form.
UI Address Block
The UI address consists of a block of six fields, which are described below. The UI address
should be extracted from UI tax files, but should not be updated. If it needs correction and the
record does not have a usable Mailing/Other address, copy the UI address to the Mailing/Other
address block and make corrections there. Unlike the Mailing/Other address and the Physical
Location address, the UI address cannot be locked.
Caution: Some states will use the Mailing/Other address fields to correct UI addresses.
Mailing/Other address fields can be locked.
Note: At least one complete address (either Physical Location, UI Address, or Mailing/Other
Address), including all appropriate address lines, city, state, and zip information must appear on
each record.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

U Page B-2

Note: The UI Address Block does not include either
UI Address Foreign Country Code or
UI Address Foreign Postal Code.
UI Address Line 1
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
133-167
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
UI Address – Secondary
Address Line, UI-A1, tax_str

Format:
Left justified
Source:
State UI system
Definition: First line of the street address on the UI Tax file.
System Action: If the UI Address Line 1 is blank, but information is included on UI Address
Line 2, the state system moves it to UI Address Line 1. If the UI address for a subunit (worksite)
is blank, and if the worksite has no other address, then the state system copies the master UI
address to the worksite.
UI Address Line 2
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Default Value: Blank

Positions:
168-202
Field Length: 35 Type:
Alphanumeric
Alternate Names:
UI Address – Delivery
Address Line, UI-A2, tax_str2

Format:
Left justified
Source:
State UI system
Definition: Second line of the street address on the UI Tax file.
System Action: If the UI Address Line 1 is blank, but information is included on UI Address
Line 2, the state system moves it to UI Address Line 1. If the UI address for a subunit (worksite)
is blank, and if the worksite has no other address, then the state system copies the master UI
address to the worksite.
UI Address City
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
203-232
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 30 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
UI-C1, tax_cty
fields in the UI address
block are blank
Format:
Left justified
Source:
State UI system
Definition: City or town of the address on the UI Tax file. For foreign addresses, the city,
province or state and country should preferably be included in this field. The list of Canadian
provinces are listed below.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

U Page B-3

Canadian Province Codes
Province
Code
Province
Alberta
AB
Nunavut
British Columbia
BC
Ontario
Manitoba
MB
Prince Edward Island
New Brunswick
NB
Quebec
Newfoundland
NF
Saskatewan
Northwest Territory
NT
Yukon Territory
Nova Scotia
NS

Code
NU
ON
PE
PQ
SK
YT

System Action: If the UI address for a subunit (worksite) is blank, and if the worksite has no
other address, then the state system copies the master UI address to the worksite.
UI Address State
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
233-234
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 2
Type:
Alphabetic
Default Value: Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
UI-ST, taxst
fields in the UI address
block are blank.
Source:
State UI system
Definition: Post Office state abbreviation of the address on the UI Tax file. For Canadian
addresses, place “CN”. Other foreign locations should have “ZZ” in this field.
For military post offices, place either AE, AA, or AP in this field as applicable.
System Action: If the UI address for a subunit (worksite) is blank, and if the worksite has no
other address, then the state system copies the master UI address to the worksite.
Valid Values: The standard Post Office abbreviations for states appear in Appendix C. Other
valid values are as follows:
Destination
Abbreviation
American Samoa
AS
Guam
GU
Military Post Offices in Central and South America (APO Miami)
AA
Military Post Offices in Canada, Europe, Africa, and the Middle East (APO AE
New York)
Military Post Offices in Pacific and some areas of Alaska (APO San
AP
Francisco)
Canada
CN
All other foreign countries
ZZ
UI Address ZIP Code
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Frequency:
Non-quarterly

Positions:
Field Length:

235-239
5
Type:

Alphanumeric

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

U Page B-4

Default Value:

Blank, if all other
Alternate Names:
UI-Z5, tax_zip
fields in the UI address
block are blank
Source:
State UI system
Definition: ZIP Code of the address on the UI Tax file. (For foreign addresses, the foreign
country’s postal code should be left justified in the ZIP code field, with any trailing unused
portions being left blank. For example, the first five positions of a six position Canadian ZIP
code should be placed in this field).
System Action: If the UI address for a subunit (worksite) is blank, and if the worksite has no
other address, then the state system copies the master UI address to the worksite.
UI Address ZIP Code Extension
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
240-243
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 4
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
UI-Z4, tax-ext
Format:
Left justified. Place position 6 of a Canadian ZIP Code in the first position of
this field, followed by three blanks.
Source:
state UI system
Definition: ZIP Code Extension of the address on the UI Tax file.
System Action: If the UI address for a subunit (worksite) is blank, and if the worksite has no
other address, then the state system copies the master UI address to the worksite.
UI Address Foreign Country Code (This is a new data element.)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank (USA should
Alternate Names:
not be the default.)
Format:
Source:
State UI system
Definition: 3-character ISO country code of the UI address.
Valid Values: Valid values are available in Appendix B (Country Codes) of the “QCEW System
Developers Guide for Standardized UI QUEST Extract”, which can be found on Stateweb
Note: EXPO, WIN-202, and the BLS processing system do not include this as a separate data
element but append it to the end of the UI city field. This data element is included in the
Standardized UI QUEST extract. This data element is not part of the UI Address Block. This
data element is to be left blank for addresses in Puerto Rico or the U.S. Virgin Islands.
UI Address Foreign Postal Code (This is a new data element.)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 7
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Format:
Source:
State UI system
Definition: The postal code associated with the data in the UI Address if the “UI Address
Foreign Country Code” field is available and out of country.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

U Page B-5

Note: EXPO, WIN-202, and the BLS processing system do not include this data element. This
data element is included in the Standardized UI QUEST extract. This data element is not part of
the UI Address Block. Canadian Postal Codes are included in the UI Address Zip Code and the
first position of the UI Address Zip Extension. This data element is to be left blank for addresses
in Puerto Rico or the U.S. Virgin Islands.
UI Address Type Code
(Optional use in states)
EQUI:
Include
Position:
729
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 1
Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
UI Type, ui_addr_ind, UI-AT
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: Identifies when the UI address is also the PLA.
Valid Values: 1 = Physical address (physical and UI address are the same)
2 = Address (where the mail goes directly to the unit and may include the P.O.
Box or RFD addresses)
3 = Corporate central office mail address
9 = UI Address or unknown

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

U Page B-6

V
Version Fields
Version fields are two fields maintained on the national Office micro database (Administrative
Version and Quarterly Version) that indicate the submittal version of a state's files to BLS.
These fields indicate when data items were submitted to BLS. These version fields will allow
processes and analysis to better focus on records updated during the quarter. Updates to these
fields will occur each time a specific record's data are submitted for the processing quarter.
Administrative Version
(Provided on national Office micro files only)
EQUI:
N/A
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Aver
Format:
Right justified
Source:
System generated by BLS
Definition: Contains a value for each quarter that indicates when that quarter's data were
updated. This includes both the latest change to a quarterly field or a change to administrative
data. Each of these fields contains three positions. The first position represents the ones place of
the submittal year. The second position represents the submittal quarter. The third position
represents the version of the quarterly submittal (e.g., "1" indicates the first EQUI file submitted;
"2" indicates the next submittal, whether it’s an Update EQUI or a set of BLS Corrections or a
Subset EQUI; "3" indicates the third submittal of the quarterly data, whether it’s an Update
EQUI or a set of BLS Corrections or a Subset EQUI; and so forth ).
Note: If the record was not submitted for the current processing quarter, the Aver value will be
all zeroes.
Example: When the 2017/3 initial EQUI files are processed, all submitted records will be given
an Aver value of "731." If this same record is supplied on the 2017/3 update file, the Aver value
will be "732." If this record is submitted on the 2017/4 initial EQUI file, the Aver value will be
"671.”
Note: As long as a processed file includes a record with a given UI-RUN, the AVER for that UIRUN will be updated to the corresponding AVER (as described above) regardless of whether or
not the UI-RUN is updated by the processed file.
Quarterly Version
(Provided on national Office micro files only)
EQUI:
N/A
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 3
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Qver
Format:
Right justified
Source:
System generated by BLS
Definition: Contains a value for each quarter that indicates when the record was last submitted
in terms of the processing quarter. Each of these fields contains three positions. The first
position represents the ones place of the submittal year. The second position represents the
submittal quarter. The third position represents the version of the quarterly submittal (e.g., "1"

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

U Page B-7

indicates the first EQUI file submitted; "2" indicates the next submittal, whether it’s an Update
EQUI or a set of BLS Corrections or a Subset EQUI; "3" indicates the third submittal of the
quarterly data, whether it’s an Update EQUI or a set of BLS Corrections or a Subset EQUI; and
so forth ).
Example: When the 2017/3 initial EQUI files are processed and the first and second quarter
updates are provided along with current quarter data for a particular record, the Qver values for
each of these three quarters will be set to "731." If this same record is supplied on the update file
with only a third quarter record, the 2017/3 Qver value will be "732." The 2017/2 and 2017/1
Qver values will both still be "731." If this record is submitted on the 2017/4 initial EQUI file
with no back quarter records, the 20176/4 Qver value will be "741." The 2017/3 Qver value will
remain "732." The 2017/2 and 2017/1 Qver values will both still be "731."
Note: As long as a processed file includes a record with a given UI-RUN-YEAR-QTR, the
QVER for that UI-RUN-YEAR-QTR will be updated to the corresponding QVER (as described
above) regardless of whether or not the UI-RUN-YEAR-QTR is updated by the processed file.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

V Page B-1

W
Wage Record Count of Unique Social Security Numbers (SSNs)
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
828-833
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
WRC
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the count of unique social security numbers reported to the UI, of the
employees that received pay at any time during the reference quarter, on the wage record report
for the account
Caution: Leave blank if not available.
Derivation: For each UI account, tally the number of social security numbers appearing on the
current quarter wage record report, counting each unique social security number only once.
Example: If a wage record report has 20 separate “lines of information for a social security
record” but 3 social security numbers are repeated, each receiving possibly regular wages for one
record and the other record for each possibly for bonus checks. The wage record count for this
field would be 17.
Wage Record Count Migrating to Largest Wage Record Recipient (Possible or
Actual Successor)
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1061-1066
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
LWRR
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the count of the largest number of unique social security numbers reported on
wage records that went from the prior UI account to a different, current UI account number. For
instance, a UI account reported 500 wage records in the prior quarter and 300 of these are now
reported under other UI accounts. Using wage record information, if 50 are reported by one UI
account and 250 by another UI account, then 250 would be reported in this count.
Caution: Leave blank if not available.
Derivation: Compare the wage records for the account for the current quarter and the prior
quarter. For those wage records reported to the account in the prior quarter that are now reported
to different accounts and not reported to this account, tally the unique social security number
wage records for each of the receiving accounts. Report the highest tally in this field.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

V Page B-2

Example: Account 1234567890 had 300 people reported on wage records in the prior quarter;
200 of these social security numbers are not reported on account 1234567890’s current quarter
wage record report. In the current quarter, account 2345678901 has 150 of these social security
numbers and account 3456789012 has 50 of them on their wage record reports. 150 would be
reported in this field.
Wage Record – Largest Wage Record Recipient – Possible or Actual Successor
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1051-1060
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 10 Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
LWRR UI
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the account number of the business that received the wage records reported in
the Wage Record Count Migrating to the Largest or Dominant Wage Record Recipient.
Caution: Leave blank if not available.
Derivation: Compare the wage records for the account for the current quarter and the prior
quarter. For those wage records reported to the account in the prior quarter that are now reported
to different accounts and not reported to this account, tally the unique social security number
wage records for each of the receiving accounts. There are three possible types of situations
occurring: 1) the wage record movement described above occurred and the recipient of the wage
records is known to be a successor (possibly because UI had already made the determination or
from some other source), 2) the wage record movement described above occurred and the
recipient is known NOT to be a successor (the state QCEW analyst should have some ability to
make this determination and mark it in the EXPO and WIN systems), and 3) the wage record
movement described above occurred and it is unknown if the recipient is a successor or not.
Report the UI account number with the highest tally in this field where the relationship is
unknown (exclude known successors and accounts known not to be linked) .
Note: Exclude the reference account as its own possible predecessor or successor.
Example: Account 1234567890 had 300 people reported on wage records in the prior quarter;
200 of these social security numbers are not reported on account 1234567890’s current quarter
wage record report. In the current quarter, account 2345678901 has 150 of these social security
numbers and account 3456789012 has 50 of them on their wage record reports. The state did not
yet make a determination of the possible relationship between accounts 12345675690 and
2345678901. Account number 2345678901 would be reported in this field.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

V Page B-3

Wage Record Count from Largest Wage Record Contributor (Possible or Actual
Predecessor)
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1077-1082
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
LWRC
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the count of the largest number of unique social security numbers reported on
wage records that came to this account from a different UI account number. For instance, a UI
account reported 100 wage records in the prior quarter and 300 additional wage records in the
current quarter, for a total of 400 wage records. Using wage record information, if 50 of those
new wage records were reported in one UI account in the prior quarter and 250 of those new
wage records were reported by another UI account in the prior quarter, the 250 would be
reported in this count.
Caution: Leave blank if not available.
Derivation: Compare the wage records for the account for the current quarter and the prior
quarter. For those wage records reported to the account in the current quarter that were reported
to different accounts and not reported to this account, tally the unique social security number
wage records for each of these contributing accounts. Report the highest tally in this field.
Example: Account 4567890123 had 600 people reported on wage records in the current quarter;
400 of these social security numbers were not reported on account 4567890123’s prior quarter
wage record report. In the prior quarter, account 5678901234 had 300 of these social security
numbers and account 6789012345 had 100 of them on their wage record reports. 300 would be
reported in this field for account 4567890123.
Wage Record – Largest Wage Record Contributor – Possible or Actual
Predecessor
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1067-1077
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 10 Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
LWRC UI
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the account number of the business that previously reported the wage records
counted in the Wage Record Count from the Largest or Dominant Wage Record Contributor.
Caution: Leave blank if not available.
Derivation: Compare the wage records for the account for the current quarter and the prior
quarter. For those wage records reported to the account in the current quarter that were reported
to different accounts and not reported to this account, tally the unique social security number
wage records for each of these contributing accounts. Report the UI account number with the
highest tally in this field.
Note: Exclude the reference account as its own possible predecessor or successor.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

V Page B-4

Example: Account 4567890123 had 600 people reported on wage records in the current quarter;
400 of these social security numbers were not reported on account 4567890123’s prior quarter
wage record report. In the prior quarter, account 5678901234 had 300 of these social security
numbers and account 6789012345 had 100 of them on their wage record reports. Account
number 5678901234 would be reported in this field for account 4567890123.
Wage Record Count of Covered Workforce “New Entrants”
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1095-1100
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
WREN
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the count of wage records included in the current quarter for the employer
that were not reported to any one reporting wage records in the prior quarter. These records
appear for the first time on the wage records for the two consecutive quarters.
Note: This count may be effected by missing wage records, delinquent or sporadic reporters, as
well as those employers not required to submit wage records, such as federal government. This
is a count of “New Entrants to the State’s Workforce”, and may be one source of an employer’s
new hires or rehires.
Caution: Leave blank if not available.
Derivation: Compare the wage records for the account for the current quarter and the prior
quarter. For those wage records reported to the account in the current quarter that were not
reported to this account or any other account in the prior quarter, tally the unique social security
number wage records. Report this tally in this field.
Example: Account 7890123456 had 200 people reported on wage records in the current quarter;
50 unique social security numbers were not reported on account 7890123456’s prior quarter
wage record report nor were they reported under any other UI account in the prior quarter. 50
would be reported in this field for account 7890123456.
Wage Record Count of Covered Workforce – Hires
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1083-1088
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
N/A
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the count of wage records included in the current quarter for the employer
that were not reported to the employer on the account’s reporting wage records in the prior
quarter. The count is always of unique social security numbers, not a count of lines on the report
or checks.
Note: This count may be effected by missing wage records, and delinquent or sporadic reporters.
This is different from the count of “New Entrants to the State’s Workforce”. The hires count
will include the count of employees reporting to a different employer in the prior quarter and

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

V Page B-5

now reporting this employer as well as employees who are still reporting to the other employer
as well as now to this employer.
Caution: Leave blank if not available. If the employer did not provide any wage records last
quarter even though it was active and had positive employment but does report wage records this
quarter, do not count the difference as hires.
Wage Record Count of Covered Workforce “Exits”
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1101-1106
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
WREX
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the count of wage records reported in the prior quarter for an employer that
are not reported by any employer in the current quarter. These records appeared for the last time
on the wage records the last quarter of the two consecutive quarters.
Note: This count may be effected by missing wage records, delinquent or sporadic reporters, as
well as those employers not required to submit wage records, such as federal government, and
those on extended leave, e.g., maternity or paternity leave. This is a count of “Left the State’s
Workforce, and may be one source of an employer’s separations.
Caution: Leave blank if not available.
Derivation: Compare the wage records for the account for the current quarter and the prior
quarter. For those wage records reported to the account in the prior quarter that are not reported
to this account or any other account in the current quarter, tally the unique social security number
wage records. Report this tally in this field.
Example: Account 8901234567 had 250 people reported on wage records in the prior quarter;
70 unique social security numbers found on the prior quarter report are not reported on account
8901234567’s current quarter wage record report nor are they reported under any other UI
account in the current quarter. 70 would be reported in this field for account 8901234567.
Wage Record Count of Covered Workforce – Separations
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1089-1094
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
N/A
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

V Page B-6

Definition: This is the count of wage records reported in the prior quarter for an employer that
are not reported to the employer on the account’s reporting wage records in the current quarter.
These records appeared for the last time on the wage records the last quarter of the two
consecutive quarters for a specific account. This count is different from the count of exits since
it includes those wage records that are still found on the state UI wage record system reporting to
other employers. The count is always of unique social security numbers, not a count of lines on
the report or checks.
Note: This count may be effected by missing wage records, and delinquent or sporadic reporters.
It will also include those still on the employers payroll but on extended leave, e.g., maternity or
paternity leave.
Caution: Leave blank if not available. If the employer did not provide any wage records this
quarter even though it was active and had positive employment but did report wage records last
quarter, do not count the difference as separations.
Wage Record Count of “Continuous Records”
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
1107-1112
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
WRCR
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the count of wage records included in both the current and prior quarters
wage records for the employer. The individuals represented in this count may also be reported
by other employers when the individual is a multiple job holder.
Caution: Leave blank if not available.
Derivation: Compare the wage records for the account for the current quarter and the prior
quarter. For those wage records reported to the account in both the current and prior quarter,
tally the unique social security number wage records. Report this tally in this field.
Example: Account 9012345678 had 40 people reported on wage records in both the current and
prior quarter. 40 would be reported in this field.
Wage Record Matched Number of Occurrences
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Exclude
Positions:
N/A
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 6
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Number of Occurrences,
matched SSN’s, MSHSSN,
shared wage records
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the number of wage records that were previously reported under one account
and later report to a specific different account. These wage record tallies identify the number of
employees potentially involved in a predecessor/successor transfer.
Caution: Leave blank if not available or not applicable.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

V Page B-7

Derivation: When comparing wage records by Social Security Number, identify all the unique
SSNs that were reported to one specific account in the prior reference period and are now
reported to one specific different account.
Example: Account 2233445566 had 600 people reported on wage records in the prior quarter;
400 of these social security numbers were not reported on account 2233445566’s current quarter
wage record report. In the current quarter, account 7788990011 had 300 of these social security
numbers and account 9988776655 had 100 of them on their wage record reports. The wage
record matched number of occurrences between 2233445566 and 7788990011 was 300 and the
wage record matched number of occurrences between 2233445566 and 9988776655 was 100.
Wage Record Wages
(Required if available on MEEI records coded 1, 2, 4, or 6; Optional on MEEI records coded 3 or
5)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
834-844
Frequency:
Quarterly
Field Length: 11 Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
WRW
Format:
Right justified with leading zeros if numeric
Source:
State UI system (if available)
Definition: This is the total amount of wages reported on the wage record report for wages paid
during any time in the quarter.
Caution: Leave blank if not available.
Derivation: Total all wage records reported on the wage records regardless of the number of
times that a given social security number may be reported separately.
Example: 15 wage records are reported to account 1122334455 in the current quarter, there are a
total of $7,456,635.68 in wages reported. Round to a whole dollar amount and report 7456636 in
this field.
Website Address
(Required if available)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
990-1049
Frequency:
Non-quarterly
Field Length: 60 Type:
Alphanumeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
web
Format:
left justified if alphanumeric
Source:
Web collection systems, QCEW state staff
Definition: This is the Uniform Resource Locator (URL), or website, of the business for which
the respondent is reporting employment and wage data.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

X
No Current Entries.

W Page B-1

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

October 2018

X Page B-1

Y
Year
(Required)
EQUI:
Frequency:
Default Value:

Include
Quarterly
None

Positions:
4-7
Field Length: 4
Alternate Names:

Type:
Numeric
Reporting Year, Reference
Year, Yr

Format:
YYYY (four-digit year, e.g., "2018")
Source:
Input micro transaction records, or system assigned
Definition: Four-digit reporting or reference year of the data.
Caution: The year should be within the time period maintained on the file. For example, if the
quarters available on the state systems are
future quarter:
2018/2
current quarter:
2018/1
prior quarter:
2017/4
2nd historical quarter: 2017/3
3rd historical quarter: 2017/2
4th historical quarter: 2017/1
5th historical quarter: 2016/4
The Year would be 2016, 2017, or 2018.
Year and Quarter of New Latitude and Longitude
(Required)
EQUI:
Include
Positions:
767-771
Frequency:
Twice (old and new)
Field Length: 5
Type:
Numeric
Default Value: Blank
Alternate Names:
Lat/Long Date, GYRQ, ll-chgqtr, ll-chg-yr
Format:
YYYYQ
Source:
State System Assigned
Definition: Year Quarter that new geocode information would be available for publication, etc.
Used to keep the latitude and longitude in sync with quarter area codes such as county, town,
city, etc.

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
Data Element Definitions

Z
No Current Entries.

Y Page B-1

QCEW Operating Manual
State Codes

September 2019

Page C-1

Appendix C – State Codes
The table below lists state FIPS Codes and standard state abbreviations, and identifies the BLS
regional office that serves each state. A second table at the end identifies valid abbreviations that
may be used for non-state destinations.
FIPS
Code
01
02
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

State
Alabama
Alaska
Arizona
Arkansas
California
Colorado
Connecticut
Delaware
District of Columbia
Florida
Georgia
Hawaii
Idaho
Illinois
Indiana
Iowa
Kansas
Kentucky
Louisiana
Maine
Maryland
Massachusetts
Michigan
Minnesota
Mississippi
Missouri
Montana
Nebraska
Nevada
New Hampshire
New Jersey
New Mexico
New York
North Carolina
North Dakota

State
Abbreviation
AL
AK
AZ
AR
CA
CO
CT
DE
DC
FL
GA
HI
ID
IL
IN
IA
KS
KY
LA
ME
MD
MA
MI
MN
MS
MO
MT
NE
NV
NH
NJ
NM
NY
NC
ND

Region
Atlanta
San Francisco
San Francisco
Dallas/Kansas City
San Francisco
Dallas/Kansas City
Boston/New York
Philadelphia
Philadelphia
Atlanta
Atlanta
San Francisco
San Francisco
Chicago
Chicago
Chicago
Dallas/Kansas City
Atlanta
Dallas/Kansas City
Boston/New York
Philadelphia
Boston/New York
Chicago
Chicago
Atlanta
Dallas/Kansas City
Dallas/Kansas City
Chicago
San Francisco
Boston/New York
Philadelphia
Dallas/Kansas City
Boston/New York
Atlanta
Chicago

QCEW Operating Manual
State Codes

September 2019

FIPS
Code
39
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
53
54
55
56
72
78

State
Ohio
Oklahoma
Oregon
Pennsylvania
Rhode Island
South Carolina
South Dakota
Tennessee
Texas
Utah
Vermont
Virginia
Washington
West Virginia
Wisconsin
Wyoming
Puerto Rico
Virgin Islands

State
Abbreviation
OH
OK
OR
PA
RI
SC
SD
TN
TX
UT
VT
VA
WA
WV
WI
WY
PR
VI

Page C-2

Region
Chicago
Dallas/Kansas City
San Francisco
Philadelphia
Boston/New York
Atlanta
Chicago
Atlanta
Dallas/Kansas City
Dallas/Kansas City
Boston/New York
Philadelphia
San Francisco
Philadelphia
Chicago
Dallas/Kansas City
Boston/New York
Boston/New York

Destination
American Samoa
Guam
Military Post Offices in Central and South
America (APO Miami)
Military Post Offices in Canada, Europe, Africa,
and the Middle East (APO New York)
Military Post Offices in Pacific and some areas
of Alaska (APO San Francisco)
Canada
All other foreign countries

Abbreviation
AS
GU
AA
AE
AP
CN
ZZ

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Due Dates

Page D-1

Appendix D – Due Dates

The submittal schedule for the Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) deliverable
is viewable in the Fed/State Deliverables Calendar which is available for download on the main
StateWeb page. In addition, the deliverable dates are listed in the Cooperative Agreement and the
first page of the QCEW Valid Values spreadsheet, commonly known as the Cheat Sheet, which is
located on the “QCEW Quick Links” menu under the QCEW section on StateWeb. Subset due
dates are found in the same places.
At the start of each quarter, states and regional offices should review the quarterly EQUI file
processing email distributed by the national office that lists major processing changes for the
current quarter. In addition, this email provides a calendar of due dates for important milestones
for current quarter processing. States should add these due dates to their calendar or processing
schedule.
The state may meet the EQUI deliverable requirements in one of the following ways:
1. Create the EQUI deliverable through the service center
2. Transmit the EQUI deliverable via file transfer protocol (FTP) no later than the due date
3. Transmit the EQUI deliverable via EUSWeb no later than the due date
Section 12.3 covers the technical aspects of each transmittal option
In addition to generating the EQUI file and making it available to the national office for processing
no later than the due date, states must ensure all fields of the QCEW Program Data Transmittal
Form are properly populated.
If the state cannot submit the EQUI deliverable by the due date or if there are any data quality
problems that will significantly affect the accuracy of the EQUI deliverable, then the state must
notify the regional office as soon as possible so appropriate action can be taken.
States should work closely with their regional office to develop the most efficient processing
schedule to produce the highest quality data on the EQUI deliverable. Examples of state
processing schedules can be found on StateWeb.
If a state provides a subset to BLS, it must be made available for BLS processing no later than
the due date.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
State Processing Schedule

Page E-1

Appendix E – State Processing Schedule
The two tables below outline the suggested schedule for State processing, although actual
schedules may vary in each State due to State-specific circumstances.
The first table gives a view of the quarterly processing cycle, detailing a suggested weekly schedule
for generating each quarter's Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) deliverable.
Note that due dates and deadlines are subject to change. While deadlines must be met, the steps
needed to reach those deadlines do not have hard and fast deadlines. The schedule listed below
should be treated as a guideline, rather than a firm schedule States are required to follow.
The second table gives a view of the annual processing cycle, showing the major steps for
conducting the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) and for generating quarterly EQUI files throughout
the year.
Quarterly Processing Cycle
The following table is a proposed weekly activity schedule for processing State data in a single
quarter. Sample time frames are given for each activity, based on particular quarterly processing
cycles. Where available, EXPO Jobs and WIN Routines that correspond with the proposed
activities are included. States are encouraged to work with their regional office to develop a
processing schedule that best fits their data environment.
STATE PROCESSING ACTIVITIES

Prior to and Including Week 1
Week 1 is the week following the end of each calendar quarter or reference period.
For 1Q processing, Week 1 is the first week of April. For 2Q, this is the first week of July, etc.
UI sends Quarterly Contribution Reports (QCRs), QCEW sends Multiple Worksite Reports (MWRs),
and Reports of Federal Employment and Wages (RFEWs) to employers.
Electronic reporting reminders are sent, including MWR Web emails.
Review and update State edit parameters.
Prior to the start of the first quarter (ONLY!!):
EXPO-QCEW States only- Load non-economic code changes and other information to State system
from the refiling system.
Weeks 2-5
Receive completed QCRs, MWRs, and RFEWs.
Enter data from QCRs to UI tax file, screen reports, and generate missing data notices (which may be
done by UI or QCEW, depending on the State).
Process MWRs and RFEWs, and enter data to State system.
Load Contractor collected MWR data
Load MWR BLS Web Confirmed Register File
Load BLS MWR Collected Data file and Confirmed Registry Updates
Week 6 or 7

After the Initial submittal, roll the quarter which archives the oldest data and moves the next quarter
to file, and loads the initial UI extract.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
State Processing Schedule

Page E-2

STATE PROCESSING ACTIVITIES

Impute missing data for all incomplete QCRs on hand. States may wait until after the second UI
extract to do this.
Send notices for delinquent QCRs.
Follow-ups for missing MWRs and RFEWs. Begin contacting delinquent reporters.
Create 2nd mailing print file for MWR Print Contract - current collection quarter
Weeks 6-9

Contact delinquent reporters not submitting MWRs or RFEWs with significant employment.
Enter missing data (provided by employers in response to missing data notices) to State system.
Refer wage corrections to UI tax section (done in some States but not all).
Run edits and review edit listings.
Possible future quarter
Editing on reference quarter while finishing up previous quarter.
Perform focused editing (FESTER) of micro data.
Do multi-balance edit for current and previous quarters.
Perform predecessor/successor edit.
Document unusual fluctuations in the data, and assign micro level comment codes as needed.
Enter corrections and comments from edit review to State system.
Load Contractor collected MWR Data
Week 9: Create list of MWR Actives
Week 9 or 10
Perform second UI extract with edit and estimation for accounts with missing data.
Prorate accounts with missing subunit data.
Create State Historical File
Create initial mailing print file for MWR print contract- next quarter collection
Weeks 10-12
Contact large imputed employers.
Run edits and review edit listings.
Document unusual fluctuations in the data, and assign micro level comment codes as needed.
Enter corrections and comments from edit review to State system.
Week 13

Multi-balance edit for the current and previous quarters
Predecessor/successor edit (if needed)
Streamlined focused edit
Produce gross error listing
Generate 46f data and send to regional office for review
Week 14
Multi-balance edit for the current and previous quarters
Focused editing
EQUI-Based Scoring edit, just prior to submittal
Thursday: EQUI File due (Note: Tuesday due date for 3Q)
Weeks 14-17
BLS edits EQUI data.
BLS questions/listings forwarded to States for additional corrections or comments.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
State Processing Schedule

Page E-3

STATE PROCESSING ACTIVITIES

States update State system with corrections and comments based on their own review, BLS review,
or other sources.
Week 18
Tuesday: Subset file due (optional for most States)
BLS edits Subset data.
BLS questions/listings forwarded to States for additional corrections or comments.
States update State system with corrections and comments based on their own review, BLS review,
or other sources.
Thursday: Clean certifications due
Annual Processing Cycle
The following table is a recommended schedule for the major processing activities, including both
the ARS (Annual Refiling Survey) and the quarterly EQUI deliverables. As shown on this
schedule, at most times during the year the State is working with two quarters of data as well as
the ARS.
This table begins in July, since this is when the ARS processing cycle begins. The national office
disseminates a checklist of directions at the start of each ARS cycle as an aid to States.

Early- July
For the end of the current refiling year
BLS Activities
State Activities
Cut off the updating of refiling responses and
other code changes to the ARS control file

BLS initializes ARS Web and tests the
system

For EXPO States- apply refiling information to
the State system
Run final Summary Management Report
Refile is submitted with the first quarter EQUI
July
States submit updates to contact information
sheet (ongoing)

BLS creates control and print files

States load control file to State system. States
may generate first summary management
report of the new cycle

BLS sends NCA 1 print spreadsheets to
States

States provide YES or No responses for NCA1

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
State Processing Schedule

Page E-4

States review NVS proofs and provide
feedback

NVS proofs posted for 24-hour review
First ARS email blast is sent

August
States send remove list prior to 2nd email blast

NVS1a/NCA1 mailing complete
NVM Web closes for 2Q collection
Second ARS email blast sent

September
BLS uploads ARS transmittals 1 and 2.
Transmittal 2 includes NVM data
NVM Web opens for 3Q collection

States process ARS transmittals 1 and 2.

BLS send NVS1b, NVM1 print files and
State contact information spreadsheet to the
contractor
NVS1b mailing complete
October
States process ARS data from transmittals 3
and 4, and send the SMR by the 25th

BLS uploads ARS transmittals 3 and 4
Contractor completes the first NVM
mailing
Third ARS email blast is sent

November
States process ARS data from transmittal 5 and
sends the SMR by the 25th

BLS uploads ARS transmittal 5
NVM Web closes for 3Q collection

December
States send remove lists prior to 4th email blast
BLS uploads ARS transmittal 6, including
NVM responses

States process ARS data from transmittal 6 and
sends the SMR by the 25th

BLS sends NVM2 print files to contractor
Late-December, NVM Web opens for 4Q
collection
BLS sends NCA2 print spreadsheet to
States

January
State review NCA2 print spreadsheet, provide
a yes or no for mailing

BLS sends NVS2, NCA2, and State contact
information spreadsheet to print contractor

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
State Processing Schedule

States process ARS data from transmittal 7,
and send the SMR by the 25th

BLS uploads ARS transmittal 7
NVM2, NVS2, and NCA2 mailing
complete

Page E-5

February
States process ARS data from transmittal 8 and
9, and send the SMR by the 25th

BLS uploads ARS transmittal 8 and 9
NVM Web closes for 4Q collection

March
BLS uploads ARS transmittal 10, including
NVM responses

States process ARS data from transmittal 6 and
sends the SMR by the 25th

NVM Web opens for 1Q collection
Fourth ARS email blast (if needed)
April
BLS uploads ARS transmittal 11

States process ARS data from transmittal 11,
and send the SMR by the 25th

BLS sends NCA3 print spreadsheet to
States

State review NCA3 print spreadsheet, provide
a yes or no for mailing

BLS sends NVS3, NCA3, and State contact
information spreadsheet to print contractor
NVS3, NCA3 mailing complete
States initiate procedures for delinquent
reporters
States send UI respondent email addresses to
qualify for rebate
Generate CCS edit 1a and 1b, send to regional
office
May
BLS uploads ARS transmittal 12

States process ARS data from transmittal 12,
and send the SMR by the 25th
Generate CCS edit 1a and 1b, send to regional
office

NVM Web closes for 1Q
June
BLS uploads ARS transmittal 13 and 14.
Transmittal 14 is the final of the ARS year.
ARS Web closes for the year

States process ARS data from transmittal 13
and 14, and send the SMR by the 25th

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-1

Appendix F – Edit Conditions and Formulas
This appendix provides the edit specifications for all the required edits used in the standard state
QCEW processing systems and in the BLS system. The edits are presented in edit code order,
grouped by edit level. Frequently used formulas, symbols, and abbreviations appear first, followed
by edit descriptions. The following information is provided for the edits:
Descriptive Information

Explanation

General Description:

Identifies the data element or elements being edited, and gives
the basic purpose of the edit.

Location:

Tells whether the edit is performed in state systems, the BLS
system, or both.

Level:

Micro (the Unemployment Insurance/Reporting Unit Number
(UI/RUN) record is edited), macro (the county-ownershipindustry cell is edited), or both.

Edit Level:

Every edit is included in an edit level, based on its purpose and
on the severity of the error or flag. The characteristics of each
edit level are explained in the body of the appendix, just before
the edit descriptions for that level. There are nine edit levels:
1 Pre-edits (edits 001-006)
2 Key field (industry, county, ownership) invalid errors (010017)
3 Date and status code invalid errors (021-025)
4 Remaining invalid errors (031-080)
5 Large record employment and wage edits (089-099)
6 Warning and other summed level edits (088, 101-146)
7 Predecessor/Successor edits (156-164)
8 Multi-establishment edits (171-185)
9 Wage record edits (193-198)

Edit Type:

Distinguishes between invalid (I) errors and warning (W) flags.

Priority:

A, B, or C. Priorities for correcting or explaining flagged data
are discussed in Section 13.3.3.

BLS Edit Publ. Criteria:

Identifies whether a record is included in BLS publication
aggregations if one of these edit flags exists. Include = ignore
the flag and use the data. Exclude = do not use the record.
Records with no edit flags are typically included in publication
totals depending on their status code, coverage code, and
possibly other factors.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-2

Descriptive Information
Edit Message:

Explanation
The message typically displayed when the edit flag is assigned.
Appendix G gives a complete list of edit messages arranged in
order by edit code and grouped by edit level.

Edit Conditions:

The data conditions that cause the system to assign the flag.
This section sometimes begins with bypasses: data conditions
that cause the system to skip the edit and pass the record. The
edit conditions are written in the form of system requirements,
that is, as instructions to the computer.

Editing
Parameters/Tolerances:

Parameters or tolerances (if any) used by the edit. These are
displayed with italicized small capital letters. Appendix H
provides a consolidated list of the parameters and tolerances for
all the edits.

System Action:

Actions taken by state or BLS systems, if they take any action
apart from flagging the record. For example, the system may
replace invalid values with blanks.

Appendix B (Data Element Definitions) gives the purposes and uses of the data elements being
edited, and describes the valid values and default values (where applicable).

Frequently Used Formulas
Average Monthly Employment (AME) is the sum of the three monthly employment fields
divided by three:
AME = M1 + M2 + M3
3
Average Quarterly Wages (AQW) equals Total Wages (TW) divided by Average Monthly
Employment:
AQW = TW
AME
(When AME = 0, then AQW = 0.)

Average Weekly Wages (AWW) equals Average Quarterly Wages divided by 13:
AWW = AQW
13

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-3

Frequently Used Symbols


sum of (for example, M1 subi = M1sub1 + M1sub2 + ... + M1sub-last)

| |

absolute value (for example, |a - b| or if a = 3 and b = 5, then |3 - 5| = | -2| = 2

>

greater than or equal

<

less than or equal

≠

not equal

±

plus or minus

÷

divided by (for example AQW = TW ÷ AME)

√

may also be used to identify when taking a square root of a number or portion of a
formulae (for example, √9 = 3)

n½

square root of n (for example, 9 ½ = square root of 9 = 3)

Subscripts (letters with a lowered position) show which quarter's data are used:






Subscripts of "c" represent the current quarter. For example, TWc = Total Wages for the
current quarter.
Subscripts of "p" represent the prior quarter. For example, AQWp = Average Quarterly
Wages for the prior quarter.
Subscripts of "cy" represent the quarter one year ago from the current quarter. For example,
AMEcy = Average Monthly Employment from the quarter one year ago from the current
quarter.
Subscripts of “py” represent the quarter one year ago from the prior quarter. For example,
M1py = First Month Employment from the quarter one year ago from the first month of the
prior quarter.

Frequently Used Data Field Abbreviations:
AME
AQW
ARS
AWW
CNTY
CTB
EOL

Average Monthly Employment
Average Quarterly Wages
Annual Refiling Survey
Average Weekly Wages
County Code
Contributions Due
End of Liability Date

September 2019

LIAB
LWRC
LWRR
M1
M2
M3
MEEI
MOA
MWRC
OWN
PLA
PRED
QTR
REACT
RUN
SETUP
STATUS
SUCC
TAXW
TOWN
TW
UI#
UIA
YEAR

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-4

Initial Liability Date
Wage Record Count from Largest Wage Record Contributor (excluding self)
Wage Record Count from Largest Wage Record Recipient (excluding self)
First Month Employment
Second Month Employment
Third Month Employment
Multi-establishment Employer Indicator
Mailing Other Address
Matched Wage Record Count
Ownership Code
Physical Location Address
Predecessor
Reference Quarter
Reactivation Date
Reporting Unit Number
Set-up Date
Status Code
Successor
Taxable Wages
Township Code
Total Wages
UI Account Number
UI Address
Reference Year

QTR refers to the quarter whose data are being edited. Processing quarter refers to the current
quarter, i.e., the quarter treated as current by the processing system.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-5

Edit Descriptions – Pre-edits
Pre-Edits ensure that each record’s identifying information is properly formatted as numeric or
alpha-numeric, has the expected values, and can be loaded to the BLS system. These errors
rarely if ever occur in state systems since the data elements are usually system-controlled. These
edits are important in the BLS system to ensure that the correct state’s data are loaded to the
database for the correct year and quarter and are processed as instructed by the state.
001 — Transaction Code Check
General Description: All micro records submitted to BLS on the Enhanced Quarterly
Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) deliverable must have a valid Transaction Code. The
Transaction Code identifies the type of record being submitted from the state to BLS. These
codes are assigned by state systems when generating an EQUI file. The transaction codes are
used by BLS to determine how to process the record. Valid codes are:
D - delete record
F - data record. "F" stands for full record, since all data records provide full data in
every field, even if they only modify (update) selected fields.
P - predecessor/successor record
H - header record
T - trailer record
U - a selected number of records are submitted by BLS staff to resolve significant
problems that must be corrected quickly for critical BLS users.
Blank- partial record (no longer used)

Location: BLS only
Edit Level: 1
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: N/A

Edit Message: Invalid Transaction Code
Edit Conditions:
Flag if
 Transaction Code  “D”, “F”, “P”, “H”, “T”, “U”, or blank.
002 — UI Account Number (UI#) Check
General Description: The UI Account Number edit checks for valid numeric values. The UI
Account Number field must be numeric in all ten positions, and must not be zero-filled, ninefilled, or blank. The field should be right justified with unused positions zero-filled. If the
structure of the UI Account Number is in any way different from the structure on the previous
quarter’s file, the state should provide a description of the changes and coordinate with the BLS
prior to submitting the file.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Location: Both BLS & state system
Edit Level: 1
Priority: A

Page F-6

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: N/A

Edit Message: Invalid UI Account Number
Edit Conditions:
Flag if
 UI # = all zeroes, all nines, all blanks, or contains a non-numeric value in any position
System Action: State systems will right justify and zero-fill any unused positions. State systems
create files or printouts of those records, such as those with non-numeric UI account numbers,
which cannot be loaded to their state system.
003 — Reporting Unit Number (RUN) Check
General Description: The Reporting Unit Number is a 5-digit field that must be numeric in every
position. The field must be right justified with unused positions zero-filled. It can never be
blank. It cannot be nine-filled, since “99999” is reserved for selected cases of the Predecessor
RUN and Successor RUN fields.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 1
Priority: A
Edit Message: Invalid Reporting Unit Number

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: N/A

Edit Conditions:
Flag if either condition occurs
 RUN  numeric in any position or
 RUN = 99999.
System Action: State systems will right-justify and zero-fill any unused positions. State systems
create files or printouts of those records, such as those with non-numeric Reporting Unit
Numbers, which cannot be loaded to their state system.
004 — Reference Year (YEAR) Check
General Description: The Reference Year is a four digit numeric field. This field helps ensure
that only data for the reference period are entered into the correct year/quarter positions of the
database.

Location: Both BLS & state system
Edit Level: 1
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: N/A

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-7

Edit Message: Invalid Reference Year
Edit Conditions:
Flag if either condition occurs:
 YEAR  numeric in any positions or
 First two digits of YEAR  19 or 20.
System Action: If the reference year/reference quarter combination is valid but does not
correspond to the range of unlocked quarters, the BLS system will not load and process the
record.
005 — Reference Quarter (QTR) Check
General Description: This edit checks the Reference Quarter field to verify that it is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
This field helps ensure that only data for the reference period are entered into the correct
quarterly portion of the database.

Location: Both BLS & state system
Edit Level: 1
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: N/A

Edit Message: Invalid Reference Quarter
Edit Conditions:
Flag if
 QTR  1, 2, 3, or 4.
System Action: If the reference year/reference quarter combination is valid but does not
correspond to the range of unlocked quarters, the BLS system will not load and process the
record.
006 — State Code Check
General Description: This edit checks for a valid State Federal Information Processing
Standards (FIPS) Code in the BLS system. The State FIPS code is present on EQUI data records
but is not required on the state files. The State Code must match a parameter (STATE-FIPS-CODE),
to verify that the EQUI file is being processed for the correct state.

Location: BLS only
Edit Level: 1
Priority: A
Edit Message: Invalid State Code

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: N/A

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-8

Edit Conditions:
Flag if
 STATE  STATE-FIPS-CODE.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
STATE-FIPS-CODE

Parameter Name
State FIPS Code

Length
2

EXPO
PK #
N/A

WIN
PK #
N/A

State
BLS Default
Default
Valid FIPS
Valid FIPS
code of state code of state
being
being
processed
processed

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-1

Level 2 Edit Descriptions – Key Field Edits
Key fields, typically industry, ownership, and county, are essential classification fields which are
most used for aggregation, sampling, and other data uses. Errors in these fields render a record
fundamentally unusable.
010 — NAICS Code Check
General Description: The NAICS code check ensures that only valid codes under the North
American Industry Classification System are used in the NAICS field on QCEW data files.
Normally the NAICS Code is not edited for inactive records; however, it is edited when an
inactive record in first quarter has a Response Code that may include it on the Code Change
Supplement (CCS) for the same reference/refiling year.
Location: Both BLS & State systems
Edit Level: 2
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid NAICS Code
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 3 or 9.
Bypass if STATUS = 2 and MEEI = 2.
Flag if both of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9 and
 NAICS  valid 6-digit NAICS.
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 QTR = 1 and
 STATUS = 2 and
 ARS REFILE YEAR = Current Refiling Year and
 (RESPONSE CODE = 46 or 50 in the state systems) or (RESPONSE CODE = 30, 33, 46
or 50 in the national office System) and
 NAICS  valid 6-digit NAICS.
System Action: If data for 2016/4 or earlier, use 2012-based list of valid NAICS codes. If data
for 2017/1 or later, use 2017-based list of valid NAICS codes. Note: Do not edit locked quarters
or quarters beyond the maximum length of the correction policy.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-2

012 — Ownership (OWN) Code Check
General Description: This edit flags the Ownership if it is not one of the following valid codes:
1
2
3
5

Federal Government
State Government
Local Government
Private Sector

Normally the Ownership Code is not edited for inactive records; however, it is edited when an
inactive record in first quarter has a Response Code that may include it on the CCS for the same
reference/refiling year.
Location: Both BLS & state system
Edit Level: 2
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Ownership Code
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 3 or 9.
Bypass if STATUS = 2 and MEEI = 2.
Flag if both of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9 and
 OWN  1, 2, 3, or 5.
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 QTR = 1 and
 STATUS = 2 and
 ARS REFILE YEAR = Current Refiling Year and
 (RESPONSE CODE = 46 or 50 in the state systems) or (RESPONSE CODE = 30, 33, 46
or 50 in the BLS System) and
 OWN  1, 2, 3, or 5.
Note: Do not edit locked quarters or quarters beyond the maximum length of the correction
policy.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-3

013 — County (CNTY) Code Check
General Description: The County Code must be a valid FIPS county code for the state, or one of
the valid county equivalent codes: 995, 996, 998, or 999. Master records may carry code 900.
Normally the County Code is not edited for inactive records; however, it is edited when an
inactive record in first quarter has a Response Code that may include it on the CCS for the same
reference/refiling year.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 2
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid County Code
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 3 or 9.
Bypass if STATUS = 2 and MEEI = 2.
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9 and
 MEEI = 1, 3, 4, 5, or 6 and
 (CNTY  valid county FIPS code) or (CNTY  995, 996, 998, or 999).
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9 and
 MEEI = 2 and
 (CNTY  valid county FIPS code) or (CNTY  900, 995, 996, 998, or 999).
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 QTR = 1 and
 STATUS = 2 and
 ARS REFILE YEAR = Current Refiling Year and
 (RESPONSE CODE = 46 or 50 in the state systems) or (RESPONSE CODE = 30, 33, 46
or 50 in the BLS System) and
 MEEI = 1, 3, 4, 5, or 6 and
 (CNTY  valid county FIPS code) or (CNTY  995, 996, 998, or 999).
Note: Do not edit locked quarters or quarters beyond the maximum length of the correction
policy.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-4

016 — Ownership/NAICS Conflict
General Description: The Ownership/NAICS Conflict edit looks for situations in which the
ownership and NAICS are incompatible. Normally NAICS and Ownership Codes (and their
combinations) are not edited for inactive records; however, they are edited when an inactive
record in first quarter has a Response Code that may include it on the CCS for the same
reference/refiling year.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 2
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: NAICS & Ownership Inconsistent
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 3 or 9.
Bypass if STATUS = 2 and MEEI = 2.
Flag if (STATUS  2, 3, or 9) and any of the following conditions occur:
 (NAICS = 814110 and OWN  5) or
 ((NAICS = 921110  921140) and OWN = 5) or
 ((NAICS = 921190  928120) and OWN = 5) or
 (NAICS = 921150 and OWN  5 and Year < 2000) or
 (NAICS = 921150 and OWN  3 and Year > 2001) or
 (NAICS = 521110 and OWN = 2 or 3) or
 (NAICS = 551111  551114 and OWN = 1, 2, or 3) or
 (NAICS = 491110 and OWN = 2 or 3).
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 QTR = 1 and
 STATUS = 2 and
 ARS REFILE YEAR = Current Refiling Year and
 (RESPONSE CODE = 46 or 50 in the State Systems) or (RESPONSE CODE = 30, 33,
46 or 50 in the BLS System) and
 Any of the following conditions occur:
 (NAICS = 814110 and OWN  5) or
 ((NAICS = 921110  921140) and OWN = 5) or
 ((NAICS = 921190  928120) and OWN = 5) or
 (NAICS = 921150 and OWN  5 and Year < 2000) or
 (NAICS = 921150 and OWN  3 and Year > 2001) or
 (NAICS = 521110 and OWN = 2 or 3) or
 (NAICS = 551111  551114 and OWN = 1, 2, or 3) or
 (NAICS = 491110 and OWN = 2 or 3).

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-5

Note: Do not edit locked quarters or quarters beyond the maximum length of the correction
policy.

Level 3 Edit Descriptions – Date and Status Code Edits
The Date and Status Code edits are used to ensure that the record has adequate information to
properly determine its status. These fields are used to determine whether or not the record
should be edited, refiled, aggregated, and provided to various state and BLS users.
The year portion of the Liability Date, End of Liability Date, Set Up Date, and Reactivation Date
is a four-digit numeric field. Note that state extract programs can use 1935 as the lowest valid
value for any year starting with 19.
021 — Liability Date Format Check
General Description: For single and master records, this is the date that an employer became
subject to UI reporting requirements; it is assigned by UI. For worksites, this is the date they
were first reported on the Multiple Worksite Report (MWR) or alternate MWR data collection
modes. The edit checks that the field, if provided, is numeric in every position and is properly
formatted as a date.
Both the EXPO and WIN systems use Liability, Reactivation, and End of Liability dates to
override most Status Code procedures and or settings. Liability dates and End of Liability dates
are also used to determine if a particular month of employment should be imputed or if the
wages should be adjusted for a shorter quarterly work period.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 3
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Initial Liability Date Format
Edit Conditions:
Format = YYYYMMDD (where YYYY = year, MM = month, and DD = day).
Bypass if LIAB blank.
Bypass if OWN = 1.
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Flag if any of the following conditions are met:
 MM = 0 or > 12, or
 DD = 00, or
 First two digits of the year  “19” or “20,” or
 YYYYMMDD is non-numeric in any positions but not all blank

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-6

System Action: If the values are non-numeric (other than blank) or all zeros, the systems (both
state and BLS) will change the values to blanks. If the day positions (DD) are blank but the rest
of the field (YYYYMM) is not blank, the EXPO and WIN systems will change DD to 01. If
MM = 02 and DD > 29, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 28. If MM = 04, 06, 09 or
11 and DD > 30, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 30. If MM = 01, 03, 05, 07, 08, 10,
or 12 and DD > 31, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 31. If an invalid date is entered
online the state system will require that it be corrected.
022 — End of Liability Date Format Check
General Description: The End of Liability Date (sometimes called the Termination Date) is
assigned by UI for single and master records showing when an employer no longer has
employment or wages, ceases to be active, or is no longer operating. For worksites, it is the
closest date available showing when the establishment closed. The edit checks that the field, if
provided, is numeric in every position and is properly formatted as a date.
Both the EXPO and WIN systems use Liability, Reactivation, and End of Liability dates to
override most Status Code procedures and or settings. Liability dates and End of Liability dates
are also used to determine if a particular month of employment should be imputed or if the
wages should be adjusted for a shorter quarterly work period.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 3
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid EOL Date Format
Edit Conditions:
Format = YYYYMMDD (where YYYY = year, MM = month, and DD = day).
Bypass if EOL blank.
Bypass if STATUS = 3 or 9.
Bypass if OWN = 1.
Flag if any of the following conditions are met:
 MM = 0 or > 12, or
 DD = 00, or
 First two digits of the year  “19” or “20,” or
 YYYYMMDD is non-numeric in any positions but not all blank

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-7

System Action: If the values are non-numeric (other than blank) or all zeros, the systems (both
state and BLS) will change the values to blanks. If the day positions (DD) are blank but the rest
of the field (YYYYMM) is not blank, the EXPO and WIN systems will change DD to 28. If
MM = 02 and DD > 29, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 28. If MM = 04, 06, 09 or
11 and DD > 30, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 30. If MM = 01, 03, 05, 07, 08, 10,
or 12 and DD > 31, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 31. If an invalid date is entered
online the state system will require that it be corrected.
023 — Setup Date Format Check
General Description: The Setup Date shows when the reporting unit entered the state UI system.
Typically it should not be missing (blank) for singles or masters, but may be missing for
subunits. The edit checks that the field, if provided, is numeric in every position and is properly
formatted as a date.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 3
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Set-Up Date Format
Edit Conditions:
Format = YYYYMMDD (where YYYY = year, MM = month, and DD = day).
Bypass if SETUP is blank.
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Bypass if OWN = 1.
Flag if any of the following conditions are met:
 MM = 0 or > 12, or
 DD = 00, or
 First two digits of the year  “19” or “20,” or
 YYYYMMDD is non-numeric in any positions but not all blank
System Action: If the values are non-numeric (other than blank) or all zeros, the systems (both
state and BLS) will change the values to blanks. If the day positions (DD) are blank but the rest
of the field (YYYYMM) is not blank, the EXPO and WIN systems will change DD to 01. If
MM = 02 and DD > 29, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 28. If MM = 04, 06, 09 or
11 and DD > 30, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 30. If MM = 01, 03, 05, 07, 08, 10,
or 12 and DD > 31, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 31. If an invalid date is entered
online, the state system will require that it be corrected.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-8

024 — Reactivation Date Format Check
General Description: The Reactivation Date shows when an inactive unit in the UI system is
reactivated. The interval between the End of Liability Date and the Reactivation Date will
indicate the period of time the unit was not operating as a business. If a reactivated unit again
ceases operations, its End of Liability Date should be updated. The edit checks that the field, if
provided, is numeric in every position and is properly formatted as a date.
Both the EXPO and WIN systems use Liability, Reactivation, and End of Liability dates to
override most Status Code procedures and or settings.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 3
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Reactivation Date Invalid or Earlier than Initial Liability Date
Edit Conditions:
Format = YYYYMMDD (where YYYY = year, MM = month, and DD = day).
Bypass if REACT is blank.
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Bypass if OWN = 1.
Flag if any of the following conditions are met:
 MM = 0 or > 12, or
 DD = 00, or
 First two digits of the year  “19” or “20,” or
 YYYYMMDD is non-numeric in any positions but not all blank
Flag if REACT < LIAB
System Action: If the values are non-numeric (other than blank) or all zeros, the systems (both
state and BLS) will change the values to blanks. If the day positions (DD) are blank but the rest
of the field (YYYYMM) is not blank, the EXPO and WIN systems will change DD to 01. If
MM = 02 and DD > 29, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 28. If MM = 04, 06, 09 or
11 and DD > 30, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 30. If MM = 01, 03, 05, 07, 08, 10,
or 12 and DD > 31, the EXPO and WIN systems will set DD = 31. If an invalid date is entered
online the state system will require that it be corrected.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-9

025 — Status Code Check
General Description: The Status Code edit check is used to ensure that the entries in the Status
Code are valid:
1 = Active
2 = Inactive
3 = Not submitted on the EQUI for the reference quarter (used in the BLS system only)
9 = Pending
The Status Code is used as a quarterly data element in both state and BLS systems and is
included on the EQUI file. This data element is critical for identifying active reporting units,
because their economic data belong on the macro file and other data aggregations. Most other
edits use the Status code, typically for bypassing inactive or pending records.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 3
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Status Code
Edit Conditions:
Flag if STATUS  1, 2, or 9 in state systems.
Flag if STATUS  1, 2, 3, or 9 in BLS systems.
State System Action:
If the Liability Date and the End of Liability Date are the same valid date, but not blank, the state
systems consider the record inactive and set the Status Code = 2.
If the record has a valid, non-blank Reactivation Date which is equal to the valid, non-blank End
of Liability Date, the state systems consider the record active and set the Status Code = 1.
If the Liability Date, End of Liability Date, and Reactivation Date are valid, non-blank, and
equal, the state systems consider the record active and set the Status Code = 1.
If the Reactivation Date is blank or earlier or equal to the End of Liability Date, and if the End of
Liability Date is the first day of the quarter and the employment and wages fields have zeroes
and “M” indicators, the state systems consider the record inactive and set the Status Code to 2.
WIN-202 System: If the End of Liability Date is the first day of the quarter (i.e., January 1,
April 1, July 1, October 1) and the quarter of the End of Liability Date has employment, wages,
and/or contributions > 0, the End of Liability Date is changed to the second day of the quarter
(i.e., January 2, April 2, July 2, October 2) and the status is set to Active (1).
EXPO System: EXPO gives its users the option to inactivate records that have not reported in
six quarters even without an End of Liability Date. EXPO also has an option to reactivate
records that were inactive and report positive data.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-10

BLS and State Systems Action:
If the delete indicator is set to D, then change the Status Code to 2 on all unlocked quarters
regardless of the End of Liability Date. Note: Unlocking older quarters will trigger this Status
Code reset.
If the delete indicator is changed to blank in the state systems, the Status Code is changed to
active in all unlocked quarters except those where a state analyst sets the Status Code to
something other than 1 or the End of Liability Date is entered, triggering resetting of the Status
Codes on unlocked quarters. These updates will mark EQUI updates for those quarters covered
under the BLS correction policy.
BLS will update its files based on updated EQUI records submitted by the states.

Level 4 Edit Descriptions – Remaining Invalid Error Edits
Edits in this level review the data elements for:
 Valid numeric or alpha conditions
 Valid responses from a limited set of expected values
 Valid relationships between two or three data elements
In almost all cases, these edit flags must be corrected. There are a few situations where the state
systems will override an invalid response with a blank, or will zero fill.
031 — First Month Employment (M1) Check
General Description: The monthly employment fields are numeric on both the state and BLS
databases, and only numeric values may be entered.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid First Month Employment
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Flag if M1 is not numeric.
In the BLS system, also flag if the M1-IND = X.
System Action: The state system right-justifies and zero-fills leading blanks. If non-numeric
characters occur during initial entry to the system, the state system puts an “X” in the first month
employment indicator field to signify a non-numeric entry, lists the non-numeric values, and
zero-fills first month employment.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-11

032 — Second Month Employment (M2) Check
General Description: The monthly employment fields are numeric on both the state and BLS
databases, and only numeric values may be entered.

Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Second Month Employment
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Flag if M2 is not numeric.
In the BLS system, also flag if the M2-IND = X.
System Action: The state system right-justifies and zero-fills leading blanks. If non-numeric
characters occur during initial entry to the system, the state system puts an “X” in the second
month employment indicator field to signify a non-numeric entry, lists the non-numeric values,
and zero-fills second month employment.
033 — Third Month Employment (M3) Check
General Description: The monthly employment fields are numeric on both the state and BLS
databases, and only numeric values may be entered.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Third Month Employment
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Flag if M3 is not numeric.
In the BLS system, also flag if the M3-IND = X.
System Action: The state system right-justifies and zero-fills leading blanks. If non-numeric
characters occur during initial entry to the system, the state systems puts an “X” in the third
month employment indicator field to signify a non-numeric entry, lists the non-numeric values,
and zero-fills third month employment.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-12

034 — Total Wages (TW) Check
General Description: The Total Wages field is numeric on both the state and BLS databases, and
only numeric values may be entered. The Total Wages edit checks for numeric values and no
decimal places. The Total Wages field should contain whole dollar amounts only – round to
next higher dollar if residual cents are greater than or equal to 50 cents.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Total Wages
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Flag if TW not numeric.
In the BLS system, also flag if the TW-IND = X.
System Action: The state system right-justifies and zero-fill leading blanks. If non-numeric
characters occur during initial entry to the system, the state system puts an “X” in the Total
Wages Indicator field to signify a non-numeric entry, lists the non-numeric values, and zero-fills
Total Wages.
035 — Taxable Wages (TAXW) Check
General Description: The Taxable Wages field is numeric on both the state and BLS databases,
and only numeric values may be entered. This edit checks for numeric values and no decimal
places. The Taxable Wages field should contain whole dollar amounts only – round to next
higher dollar if residual cents are greater than or equal to 50 cents.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Taxable Wages
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Flag if TAXW not numeric.
System Action: The state system right-justifies and zero-fills leading blanks. If non-numeric
characters occur during initial entry to the system, the state system puts an “X” in the Taxable
Wages Indicator field to signify a non-numeric entry, lists the non-numeric values, and zero-fills
Taxable Wages.
036 — Contributions (CTB) Check

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-13

General Description: Contributions are not valid for Federal, reimbursable, or non-covered
accounts. The Contributions field is numeric on both the state and BLS databases, and only
numeric values may be entered. This edit checks for non-numeric values, including decimal
places, as well as for non-zero Contributions on records with certain Type of Coverage or
Ownership codes. This is because Contributions should not be present on reimbursable, noncovered, or Federal records. The Contributions field should contain whole dollar amounts only –
round to next higher dollar if residual cents are greater than or equal to 50 cents.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Contributions
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Flag if any of the following occur:
 CTB not numeric or
 OWN = 1 and CTB > 0 or
 COVERAGE = 1, 8, or 9, and CTB > 0
System Action: The state system right-justifies and zero-fills leading blanks. If non-numeric
characters occur during initial entry to the system, the state system puts an “X” in the
Contributions Indicator field to signify a non-numeric entry, lists the non-numeric values, and
zero-fills Contributions.
039 — Type of Coverage Check
General Description: This edit flags the Type of Coverage Code (sometimes called the
Reimbursable Code) if it is not valid. A few states also collect employee contributions. In these
cases, special Type of Coverage Codes were created to allow for additional contributions beyond
the amount of Taxable Wages times the Employer Tax Rate.
Type of Coverage Code 8 (non-subject accounts) is valid in State systems, but not in BLS.
Records with this code are excluded from the EQUI.
Location: Both BLS & State systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Type of Coverage
Edit Conditions:
In state systems, flag if both conditions are met:

September 2019




QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-14

STATUS  2 or 9, and
COVERAGE  0, 1, 2, 3, 8, or 9.

In the BLS system, flag if both conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 (COVERAGE  0, 1, 2, 3, or 9) or (COVERAGE not valid for the state being edited).
040 — MEEI Code Check
General Description: This edit checks for valid values for the Multi Establishment Employer
Indicator.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid MEEI Code
Edit Conditions:
Flag if both conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 MEEI  1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
043 — Predecessor UI Account Number or Predecessor Reporting Unit Number Check
General Description: The Predecessor UI Account Number edit checks for valid numeric values.
The Predecessor UI Account Number must be numeric in all ten positions. It cannot be all zeros.
The Predecessor UI Account Number is used to track a change of ownership between accounts
and to link successor accounts to predecessor accounts.
The Predecessor Reporting Unit Number, if provided, must be numeric in all five positions.
Edit code 043 is used for both parts of the Predecessor SESA ID: the Predecessor UI Account
Number and the Predecessor Reporting Unit Number.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: B
Edit Message: Invalid Predecessor SESA ID
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if PRED UI# is blank.
Bypass if PRED RUN is blank.

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-15

Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Flag if PRED UI# includes nonnumeric values.
Flag if PRED RUN includes nonnumeric values.
System Action: If the Predecessor UI Account Number is reported, the state system will rightjustify it and zero-fill unused positions.
If the Predecessor Reporting Unit Number is provided, the state system will right-justify it and
zero-fill unused positions. If the Predecessor UI Account Number is blank, and the Predecessor
Reporting Unit Number is all blank, the system will leave them as blank.
If all fifteen positions of the UI account and Reporting Unit Number are zeroes, the system will
change it to all blanks in the BLS System. State systems should check that
predecessor/successor transaction records do not have zero or blank predecessors or successors.
044 — Successor UI Account Number Check or Successor Reporting Unit Number Check
General Description: The Successor UI Account Number edit checks for valid numeric values.
The Successor UI Account Number must be numeric in all ten positions. It cannot be all zeroes.
The Successor UI Account Number is used to track a change of ownership between accounts and
to link successor accounts to predecessor accounts.
The Successor Reporting Unit Number, if provided, must be numeric in all five positions.
Edit code 044 is used for both parts of the Successor SESA ID: the Successor UI Account
Number and the Successor Reporting Unit Number.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Successor SESA ID
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if SUCC UI# is blank.
Bypass if SUCC RUN is blank.
Bypass if STATUS = 3 or 9.
Flag if SUCC UI# includes nonnumeric values.
Flag if SUCC RUN includes nonnumeric values.
System Action: If the Successor UI Account Number is reported, the state system will rightjustify it and zero-fill unused positions.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-16

If the Successor Reporting Unit Number is provided, the state system will right-justify it and
zero-fill unused positions. If the Successor UI Account Number is blank, and the Successor
Reporting Unit Number is all blank, the system will leave them as blank.
If all fifteen positions of the UI account and Reporting Unit Number are zeroes, the system will
change it to all blanks in the BLS System. State systems should check that
predecessor/successor transaction records do not have zero or blank predecessors or successors.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-17

045 — Federal Employer Identification Number (EIN) Check
General Description: This edit checks the EIN for invalid values including non-numeric, invalid
prefixes, and values between 000000001 and 009999999. The EIN is assigned to each employer
by the IRS and is used by BLS to link units of the same enterprise. Multi-establishment subunits should have the same EIN as their master record. EINs are sometimes unavailable or
unreliable for government units and private households. The list of valid prefixes will be
periodically reviewed and updated as IRS updates their list of valid prefixes.
EINs are used extensively for sampling, multi-state matching and corporate linking, research,
nondisclosure processing, Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) processing, etc. It is important that
usable EINs be properly maintained.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Federal EI Number
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Bypass if NAICS = 814110.
Bypass if COVERAGE = 8 or 9.
If EIN blank, change to zeroes and do edit 116 instead.
[In State systems only, if
 EIN has the first 2 digits of 70,
 Set EIN = 000000000.]
Flag if EIN is any of these values:
 One-filled (111111111) or
 Two-filled (222222222) or
 Three-filled (333333333) or
 Four-filled (444444444) or
 Five-filled (555555555) or
 Six-filled (666666666) or
 Seven-filled (777777777) or
 Eight-filled (888888888) or
 Nine-filled (999999999).
Flag if all of these conditions are met:
 AME > EIN-ERROR-AME and
 OWN = 5 and
 EIN is in the range of 000000001 - 009999999, inclusive.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-18

Flag if all of these conditions are met:
 AME > EIN-ERROR-AME and
 OWN = 5 and
 EIN has the first 2 digits of: 07, 08, 09, 17, 18, 19, 28, 29, 49, 78, 79, or 89
In BLS edit system, flag if all of these conditions are met:
 AME > EIN-ERROR-AME and
 OWN = 5 and
 EIN has the first 2 digits of 70.
In BLS edit system, flag if EIN is nonnumeric in any position.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
EIN-ERROR-AME

Parameter Name
Small Record EIN Parm

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
066

WIN
PK #
070

State
Default
5

BLS
Default
5

System Action: If EIN is all blank, the State systems zero fill the field. If EIN is all zeroes, the
BLS and State systems bypass this check and perform the Missing Federal Employer
Identification Number Check, code 116.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-19

046 — ARS Response Code/Year Check
General Description: This edit ensures that the ARS Response Code and ARS Refile Year, if
provided, are valid. These two data elements, in combination, show what refiling response the
record last received and when it received that response. Their use is discussed in detail in
Chapter 11; definitions for the ARS Response Code appear in Appendix Q. If either ARS
Response Code or ARS Refile Year is present, both must be present. This edit is performed for
inactive reporting units (with Status Code = 2) because they can be included on the CCS and
therefore need accurate Response Code/ARS Refile Year combinations.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid ARS Response Code/Year
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 3 or 9.
Bypass if RESPONSE CODE and ARS REFILE YEAR are both blank.
Flag if
STATUS = 2 and (QTR = 1) and (in BLS system, the quarter is unlocked for CCS
processing), and any of the following conditions occur:
 RESPONSE CODE is not blank nor a valid code (00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 11, 12, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 41, 42, 43, 46, 50, 63, 64, 65, 86, 98, 99) or
 ARS REFILE YEAR is not numeric and not blank, or ARS REFILE YEAR is later than
FISCAL-YEAR (the current refiling year) or
 (RESPONSE CODE is numeric but not 50 or) and the ARS REFILE YEAR is blank, or
 ARS REFILE YEAR is numeric but the ARS RESPONSE CODE is blank.
Flag if
STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and any of the following conditions occur:
 RESPONSE CODE not blank nor valid code (00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 11, 12, 30, 31, 32, 33,
34, 35, 41, 42, 43, 46, 50, 63, 64, 65, 86, 98, 99) or
 (ARS REFILE YEAR is not numeric and not blank) or (ARS REFILE YEAR is later
than FISCAL-YEAR) or
 (RESPONSE CODE is numeric but not 50) and the ARS REFILE YEAR is blank, or
 ARS REFILE YEAR is numeric but the RESPONSE CODE is blank.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Length
Name
FISCAL-YEAR
Fiscal Year
4

EXPO
PK #
—

WIN
PK #
—

Page F-20

State Default

BLS Default

Processing or
fiscal year for
current
refiling

Current
processing year,
or fiscal year for
the refiling just
completed

System Action: If the ARS Response Code = 50 and the ARS Refile Year is blank, the State
systems will change the ARS Refile Year to the current fiscal year. The BLS system assigns
Response Codes 33, 34, and 35 when the state-assigned Response Code is not appropriate given
the code change information provided.
047 — Tax Rate Range Check
General Description: The Employer Tax Rate is a 5-position numeric field on state files. This
edit checks the field values against the minimum and maximum tax rate parameters for nonFederal, non-reimbursing accounts. A valid Tax Rate is required to edit the non-reimbursable
account Contributions. It is also used to impute any missing contributory Contributions.
Location: State only
Edit Level: 4
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: N/A

Edit Message: Invalid Tax Rate - Beyond Minimum/Maximum Range
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2 or 9, and
 COVERAGE = 0 or 2 and
 OWN > 1 and
 (RATE > MAX-TAX-RATE) or (RATE < MIN-TAX-RATE).
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name

Length

MAX-TAX-RATE

Maximum Tax Rate

6

EXPO
PK #
001

MIN-TAX-RATE

Minimum Tax Rate

6

002

WIN
PK #
001

002

State Default
15% (expressed
as 015000 in
EXPO, 15.00 in
WIN)
0

BLS
Default
N/A

N/A

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-21

048 — Comment Code Check
General Description: Three comment code fields of two positions each are available to provide
clarifications relating to the data or to explain unusual data fluctuations. This edit checks all
three fields. Unused comment code fields should be left blank. Current Employment Statistics
(CES)-only comment codes are invalid for this edit. Comment code 99 may be used if a
Narrative Comment is present on the record.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Comment Code
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if COMMENT is all blank.
Flag if both conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3 or 9, and
 Any COMMENT = 37-38, 62-74, 84, or 94; or contains non-numeric values.
049 — First Month Employment Indicator Check
General Description: This edit checks that the one-position alpha-numeric First Month
Employment Indicator field contains a valid entry. This data element describes whether the
employment data were reported or imputed. If imputed, the indicator describes the type of
imputation performed on the employment field.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid First Month Employment Indicator
Edit Conditions:
Flag if both conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 M1-IND  R, A, C, D, E, H, K, L, M, N, P, S, W, X, or blank.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-22

050 — Second Month Employment Indicator Check
General Description: This edit checks that the one-position alpha-numeric Second Month
Employment Indicator field contains a valid entry. This data element describes whether the
employment data were reported or imputed. If imputed, the indicator describes the type of
imputation performed on the employment field.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Second Month Employment Indicator
Edit Conditions:
Flag if both conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 M2-IND  R, A, C, D, E, H, K, L, M, N, P, S, W, X, or blank.
051 — Third Month Employment Indicator Check
General Description: This edit checks that the one-position alpha-numeric Third Month
Employment Indicator field contains a valid entry. This data element describes whether the
employment data were reported or imputed. If imputed, the indicator describes the type of
imputation performed on the employment field.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Third Month Employment Indicator
Edit Conditions:
Flag if both conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 M3-IND  R, A, C, D, E, H, K, L, M, N, P, S, W, X, or blank.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-23

052 — Total Wages Indicator Check
General Description: This edit checks that the one-position alpha-numeric Total Wage Indicator
field contains a valid entry. This data element describes whether the Total Wages data were
reported or imputed. If imputed, the indicator describes the type of imputation performed on the
Total Wages field.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Total Wages Indicator
Edit Conditions:
Flag if both conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 TW-IND  R, C, E, H, K, L, M, N, P, S, W, X, or blank.
053 — Taxable Wages Indicator Check
General Description: This edit checks that the one-position alpha-numeric Taxable Wages
Indicator field contains a valid entry. This data element describes whether the Taxable Wages
data were reported or imputed. If imputed, the indicator describes the type of imputation
performed on the Taxable Wages field.
Location: State Only
Edit Level: 4
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: N/A

Edit Message: Invalid Taxable Wages Indicator
Edit Conditions:
Flag if both conditions occur:
 STATUS  2 or 9, and
 TAXW-IND  R, C, E, H, K, L, M, N, P, X, or blank.
054 — Contributions Due Indicator Check
General Description: This edit checks that the one-position alpha-numeric Contributions
Indicator field contains a valid entry. This data element describes whether the Contributions data
were reported or imputed. If imputed, the indicator describes the type of imputation performed
on the Contributions field.
Location: State only
Edit Level: 4

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Priority: C

Page F-24

BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: N/A

Edit Message: Invalid Contributions Due Indicator
Edit Conditions:
Flag if both conditions occur:
 STATUS  2 or 9, and
 CTB-IND  R, C, E, H, K, L, M, N, P, X, or blank.
056 — Federal/Type of Coverage Check
General Description: This edit verifies that all Federal government installations (Ownership
Code 1) are coded with the appropriate Type of Coverage Code (code 9, Federal accounts
covered under Unemployment Compensation for Federal Employees (UCFE)). These types of
error conditions are rare but usually occur when new UCFE units are set up with the wrong Type
of Coverage Code.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Inconsistent Ownership/Type of Coverage
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN = 1 and
 COVERAGE  9
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 COVERAGE = 9, and
 OWN > 1

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-25

057 — Federal/Taxable Wage Check
General Description: This edit verifies that Taxable Wages are not included on Federal
government records. These problems are rare but sometimes occur because:
 Federal government data have projected Taxable Wages and Contributions from the UI Tax
File or supplemental files
 Contributory accounts are incorrectly assigned the wrong ownership
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Taxable Wages on Federal Record
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN = 1 or COVERAGE = 9, and
 TAXW > 0
058 — Federal/Contributions Check
General Description: This edit verifies that Contributions are not included on Federal
government records. These problems are rare but sometimes occur because:
 Federal government data have projected Taxable Wages and Contributions from the UI Tax
File or supplemental files
 Contributory accounts are incorrectly assigned the wrong ownership
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Contributions on Federal Record
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN = 1 or COVERAGE = 9, and
 CTB > 0

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-26

059 — Coverage/Taxable Wage Check
General Description: This edit checks for inconsistencies between the Type of Coverage Code
and the Taxable Wages field. The UI-covered Type of Coverage Code should be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 9
on the EQUI, and may be 8 (non-subject) on state files. The record is flagged if Taxable Wages
are included on a reimbursable record, a reimbursable/employee-funded record, a federal
government record, or on a non-covered record.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Taxable Wages > 0 for Non-Experience-Rated Record
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 COVERAGE = 1, 3, 8, or 9 and
 TAXW > 0
060 — Coverage/Contributions Check
General Description: This edit checks for inconsistencies between the Type of Coverage Code
and the Contributions field. Contributions should be zero on reimbursing records without
employee funding, federal government records, or on non-covered records. Contributions must
not be included on an employer-funded reimbursing record or non-covered record.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Contributions > 0 for Non-Experience-Rated Record
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 COVERAGE = 1, 8, or 9, and
 CTB > 0

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-27

062 — Taxable > Total Wage Check
General Description: This edit ensures that the Taxable Wages are not greater than the Total
Wages. This problem may infrequently occur during the imputation or proration processes or on
the UI extract if there are rounding problems. Significant differences frequently occur when the
employer incorrectly completes the Quarterly Contribution Report (QCR) or if there are possible
scanning problems when reading the QCR.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Taxable Wages > Total Wages
Edit Conditions:
Flag if both conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 TW < TAXW
063 — Contributions > Taxable Wages Check
General Description: This edit ensures that the Contributions are not greater than the Taxable
Wages. The edit treats Pennsylvania differently to allow for its handling of employee
contributions.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Exclude, if flagged

Edit Message: Contributions > Taxable Wages
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 STATE FIPS  42 and
 COVERAGE = 0 and
 TAXW < CTB
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATE FIPS = 42 and
 COVERAGE = 2 or 3 and
 TAXW < CTB - (TW  EMPLOYEE-TAX-RATE)

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-28

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
EMPLOYEE-TAX-RATE

Parameter Name
Employee Tax Rate

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
051

WIN
PK #
003

State
BLS
Default
Default
3%
3%
(express (expressed
ed as
as 003000)
3000 in
EXPO
and
3.00 in
WIN)

064 — Inconsistent MEEI and Reporting Unit Number Check
General Description: This edit checks for consistency between the Reporting Unit Number and
MEEI code. This check ensures that a master record or a single account (MEEI 1, 2, 4 or 6) has
a Reporting Unit Number = 00000 and a sub-unit (MEEI 3 or 5) has a Reporting Unit Number
greater than 00000.
This problem may occur as a single unit is converted to a multi-establishment reporter and the
single unit’s MEEI code is changed to 3 or 5. In these cases, the single unit should typically be
changed to the master record, and separate records should be set up for each worksite as
appropriate. The new worksites should have MEEI codes of 3 or 5 and Reporting Unit Numbers
greater than 00000.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A
Edit Message: MEEI/RUN Inconsistent
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 MEEI = 1, 2, 4, or 6, and
 RUN > 00000
Flag if all of the conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 MEEI = 3 or 5, and
 RUN = 00000

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-29

065 — Inconsistent County and Township Codes Check
General Description: This edit checks for valid County code /Township code configurations for
New England states (including, for this purpose, New Jersey). For these states,
County/Township consistency editing verifies that the Township code on each record is valid for
the specified county. Township codes can be used by any state; however, Township codes from
Non-New England states are zero-filled on EQUI submittals. This edit is only performed for
New England states (Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode Island,
Vermont), and New Jersey.
Location: Both state & BLS systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Inconsistent County/Township Combination
Edit Condition (only for Township states):
 Bypass if STATUS is 3 or 9.
 Bypass if STATE  09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50.
Flag if both of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 TOWN  valid for the associated STATE.
Flag if both of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 CNTY and TOWN are inconsistent based on lookup tables.

MEEI
1-6
1-6
1-6

These are valid combinations for county and township equivalent codes:
County/Township
MEEI
County/Township
valid county/valid town combination
1-6
999/999
996/996
1-6
995/995
998/998
2
900/900

Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2 and
 QTR = 1 and
 MEEI  2 and
 ARS REFILE YEAR = current Refiling year and
 RESPONSE CODE = 30, 33, 46, or 50 and
 TOWN  valid for the associated STATE.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-30

Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2 and
 QTR = 1 and
 MEEI  2 and
 ARS REFILE YEAR = current Refiling year and
 RESPONSE CODE = 30, 33, 46, or 50 and
 CNTY and TOWN are inconsistent based on lookup tables.

MEEI
1, 3-6
1, 3-6
1, 3-6

These are valid combinations for county and township equivalent codes:
County/Township
MEEI
County/Township
valid county/valid town combination
1, 3-6
999/999
996/996
1, 3-6
995/995
998/998

066 — Predecessor Account Format Check
General Description: This edit ensures that both the Predecessor Reporting Unit Number and the
Predecessor UI Account Number are present, if one or the other is present. If the Predecessor UI
Account Number is not blank, then the Predecessor Reporting Unit Number cannot be blank.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Format in Predecessor Account
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 PRED UI#  blank and
 PRED RUN is blank and
 AMEc > PRED-SUCC-AME.
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 PRED RUN  blank and
 PRED UI# is blank.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
PRED-SUCC-AME

Parameter Name
Predecessor and
Successor AME Cutoff

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
006

WIN
PK #
004

State
Default
0

BLS
Default
0

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-31

067 — Successor Account Format Check
General Description: This edit ensures that both the Successor Reporting Unit Number and the
Successor UI Account Number are present, if one or the other is present. If the Successor UI
Account Number is not blank, then the Successor Reporting Unit Number cannot be blank. This
edit checks inactive records (Status Code = 2) because their Successor SESA IDs are often
needed to link predecessors to successors.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Format in Successor Account
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  3 or 9, and
 SUCC UI#  blank and
 SUCC RUN is blank and
 AMEc > PRED-SUCC-AME.
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  3 or 9, and
 SUCC RUN  blank and
 SUCC UI# is blank.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
PRED-SUCC-AME

Parameter Name
Predecessor And
Successor AME Cutoff

Length
6

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #
006
004

State
Default
0

BLS
Default
0

070 — Address Edits
General Description: Records have as many as three possible addresses (physical location,
Mailing/Other, and UI address). These addresses are field specific on the State and BLS Micro
files and on the EQUI files. To pass this edit, records must contain one full, mailable address
that meets postal regulations. To test for usability and mailable in at least one address, the
system examines each address field separately, then blocks the fields together as an individual
address, and then compares the blocked addresses to determine if any block meets all editing
requirements.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-32

An Address block is defined as having
 Street Line - 1
 Street Line - 2
 City
 State
 Zip Code
 Zip Extension.
If at least one address block passes the edits, then all flags are counted but only a limited number
of fields (where appropriate) will be listed for review. If none of the address blocks pass the
edits, the system will list all three addresses so that the reviewer will have all information readily
available to resolve the address problems for that record. At least one full block must be
corrected before the address data are acceptable. UI Addresses cannot be manually updated in
State systems. Changes to UI addresses should be made through the UI Tax system or can be
entered into the MOA addresses if not used for a different address.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: No Useable Address
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Bypass if OWN = 1. (Continue if OWN > 1.)
1. Edit each field of all the addresses separately (the specifications are listed with each data field
below for edits 102-114).
2. If all fields in the address block pass the individual edits, then the address block also passes.
3. If any field in the address block fails an edit, then the address block also fails:
 the Physical Location address block fails if edits 102-104, or 114 are flagged or PLA is
missing.
 the Mailing/Other address block fails if edits 109-111 are flagged or Mailing/Other
address is missing.
 the UI address block fails if edits 106-108 are flagged or UI address is missing.
4. If all three address blocks are blank and if the record has an MEEI code of 3 or 5, then copy a
clean, usable address from the master record, if possible, as described in the system actions
below. Otherwise, flag the record with code 070.
5. If all 3 address blocks pass the edits, continue editing other fields or records, as appropriate.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-33

6. Identify the address blocks that have flags. Pass or flag edit 070 based on the following
table:
PLA address block UIA address block MOA address block Flag edit 070?
(edits 102-104,114) (edits 106-108)
(edits 109-111)
Pass
Pass or flag or
Pass or flag or
Pass
missing
missing
Pass or flag or
Pass
Pass or flag or
Pass
missing
missing
Pass or flag or
Pass or flag or
Pass
Pass
missing
missing
Flag or missing
Flag or missing
Flag or missing
Pass if AME <
ADDRESS-AME
Flag or missing
Flag or missing
Flag or missing
Flag if AME >
ADDRESS-AME
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
ADDRESS-AME

Parameter Name
Length
Address Edit Cutoff
6

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #
069
095

State
Default
5

BLS
Default
5

State System Actions:
1. If any address contains all zeroes in one of the following fields, the system will blank out the
field: Street Address Line 1, Street Address Line 2, City, or State Abbreviation. (This system
action occurs before editing.)
2. For any address, if Address Line 1 is blank but Address Line 2 is not, the State systems move
the contents of Line 2 to Line 1. When the State systems print addresses onto forms, the
system will not print a blank street address line.
3. When the State Abbreviation = ZZ or CN, the State systems do not print the ZZ or CN onto
forms. (The country or province name/abbreviation required by the Post Office should be
present at the end of the City field.)
4. For multis, if a master’s Mailing/Other Address is present and passes all address edits, but any
subunit has no useable address, then the State systems copy the Mailing/Other Address from
the master to the subunit. Note that if a subunit had earlier been flagged for having no clean
address, this system action should remove the flag.
5. For multis, if a master’s Mailing/Other Address is unavailable, and its UI Address is present
and passes all address edits, and any subunit has no useable address, then the State systems
copy the UI Address from the master to the subunit's UI Address. Note that if a subunit had
earlier been flagged for having no clean address, this system action should remove the flag.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-34

072 — Blank Name Check
General Description: This edit ensures that either a Trade Name (DBA) or a Legal Name is
present on each record. An employment parameter is used. This allows some leeway
particularly for new accounts where complete information may not be immediately available.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Both Trade Name and Legal Name are Blank
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 AME > NAME-AME and
 TRADE NAME blank and
 LEGAL NAME blank.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
NAME-AME

Parameter Name
Name AME

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
070

WIN
PK #
096

State
Default
3

BLS
Default
3

State System Action:
When printing forms, if Trade Name and Legal Name are the same, the system only prints one
name.
074 — Old Ownership Code Check
General Description: This edit verifies that the non-quarterly Old Ownership field, if present,
contains a valid code. Where the record has a valid Ownership code in the most recent fourth
quarter and fourth quarter is active, the system uses this code to update the Old Ownership. The
Old Ownership is essential for generating the CCS file. This edit is only performed when the
Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and MEEI code qualify the record for the CCS. MEEI 2
records are not included on the CCS.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: B
Edit Message: Invalid Old Ownership
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if QTR = 1 and STATUS = 3.

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-35

Bypass if ARS REFILE YEAR  FISCAL-YEAR.
Bypass if RESPONSE CODE  30, 33, 46, or 50.
Bypass if MEEI of the most recent first quarter = 2 or if the MEEI of the most recent fourth
quarter = 2.
[In BLS system only: Bypass if OLD OWN is blank.]
Flag if OLD OWN  1, 2, 3, or 5.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter Parameter Name Length
FISCAL-YEAR
Fiscal Year
4

EXPO WIN
PK # PK # State Default
—
— Processing or
fiscal year for
current refiling

BLS Default
Current processing year,
or fiscal year for the
refiling just completed

System Action: If Old Ownership is invalid or not equal to the valid fourth quarter Ownership,
the State systems replace the Old Ownership with the valid, active fourth quarter Ownership
code in the year prior to the refile year. If CCS is locked, the system will not run this edit.
075 — Old County Code Check
General Description: This edit verifies that the non-quarterly Old County field, if present,
contains a valid code. Where the record has a valid County code in the most recent fourth
quarter and fourth quarter is active, the system uses this code to update the Old County. The Old
County is essential for generating the CCS file. This edit is only performed when the Response
Code, ARS Refile Year, and MEEI code qualify the record for the CCS. MEEI 2 records are not
included on the CCS.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Old County
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if QTR = 1 and STATUS = 3.
Bypass if ARS REFILE YEAR  FISCAL-YEAR.
Bypass if RESPONSE CODE  30, 33, 46, or 50.
Bypass if MEEI of the most recent first quarter = 2 or if the MEEI of the most recent fourth
quarter = 2.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-36

[In BLS system only: Bypass if OLD COUNTY is blank.]
Flag if OLD CNTY  valid County code nor 995, 996, 998, nor 999.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Length
Name
FISCAL-YEAR Fiscal Year
4

EXPO
PK #
—

WIN State default
PK #
— Processing or
fiscal year
for current
refiling

BLS Default
Current processing
year, or fiscal year for
the refiling just
completed

System Action: If Old County is invalid or not equal to the valid fourth quarter County, the State
systems replace the Old County with the valid, active fourth quarter County code in the year
prior to the refile year. If the CCS is locked, the system will not run this edit.
076 — Old County/Township Code Check
General Description: This edit verifies that the non-quarterly Old Township field, if present, is
valid and consistent with the Old County code. This edit is only used for New England states
(including, for this purpose, New Jersey). Where the record has a valid Township code in the
most recent fourth quarter and fourth quarter is active, the system uses this code to update the
Old Township. The Old Township is used for generating the CCS file in New England states
and New Jersey. This edit is only performed when the Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and
MEEI code qualify the record for the CCS. MEEI 2 records are not included on the CCS.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Old County/Old Township Combination
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if QTR = 1 and STATUS = 3.
Bypass if ARS REFILE YEAR  FISCAL-YEAR (the current refiling year).
Bypass if RESPONSE CODE  30, 33, 46, or 50.
Bypass if the state is not Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode Island,
Vermont, or New Jersey (if STATE  09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50).
Bypass if MEEI of the most recent first quarter = 2 or if the MEEI of the most recent fourth
quarter = 2.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-37

In BLS system only: Bypass if OLD CNTY and OLD TOWN are blank.
Flag if the OLD CNTY/OLD TOWN combination is not a valid county/township
combination for the state or is not an acceptable combination of county/township equivalent
codes.
These are valid combinations for county and township equivalent codes:
MEEI County/Township
MEEI County/Township
1, 3-6
valid county/valid town combination
1, 3-6
999/999
1, 3-6
996/996
1, 3-6
995/995
1, 3-6
998/998
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Length
Name
FISCAL-YEAR
Fiscal
4
Year

EXPO
PK #
—

WIN
PK #
—

State default

BLS Default

Processing or
fiscal year for
current refiling

Current processing year,
or fiscal year for the
refiling just completed

System Action: If Old Township is invalid or not equal to the valid fourth quarter Township, the
state systems replace the Old Township with the valid, active fourth quarter Township code in
the year prior to the refile year. If the CCS is locked, the system will not run this edit.
078 — Old NAICS Code Check
General Description: This edit verifies that the non-quarterly Old NAICS field, if present,
contains a valid code. Where the record has a valid NAICS code in the most recent fourth
quarter and fourth quarter is active, the system uses this code to update the Old NAICS field.
The Old NAICS is used for generating the CCS file. This edit is only performed when the
Response Code, ARS Refile Year, and MEEI code qualify the record for the CCS. MEEI 2
records are not included on the CCS.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Invalid Old NAICS Code
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if QTR = 1 and STATUS = 3.
Bypass if ARS REFILE YEAR  FISCAL-YEAR.
Bypass if RESPONSE CODE  30, 33, 46, or 50.
Bypass if MEEI of the most recent first quarter = 2 or if the MEEI of the most recent fourth
quarter = 2.
[In BLS system only: Bypass if OLD NAICS is blank.]

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-38

Flag if OLD NAICS  valid 6-digit 2017-based NAICS code in 2018/1 processing.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
FISCALYEAR

Parameter Length
Name
Fiscal
4
Year

EXPO
PK #

WIN
PK #

—

—

State Default

BLS Default

Processing or
fiscal year for
current
refiling

Current processing
year, or fiscal year for
the refiling just
completed

System Action: If Old NAICS is invalid or not equal to the valid fourth quarter NAICS, the state
systems replace the Old NAICS with the valid, active fourth quarter NAICS code in the year
prior to the refile year. If the CCS is locked, the system will not run this edit.
080 — Indian Tribal Indicator Ownership/NAICS Conflict Check
General Description: The Indian Tribal Ownership/NAICS Conflict edit looks for situations in
which the ownership and/or NAICS is/are incompatible with the Special Indicator value T
(Indian Tribal Council). When the Special Indicator T is used, the ownership code should
always be 3. Also, when the NAICS code is 921150, the Special Indicator should be a T. Note
that it is possible for records in ownership 3 with many other NAICS codes to be valid with a
Special Indicator of T as well. For instance, a federally recognized tribe running a gambling
casino would be coded in 713210 and ownership 3 with a special indicator of T. Note also that
edit 016 checks the NAICS and ownership combination for industry 921150.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 4
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Pub Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Indian Tribal Indicator Inconsistent with NAICS or OWN
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9 and
 SPECIAL INDICATOR = T and
 OWN  3.
Flag if all conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9 and
 NAICS = 921150 and
 SPECIAL INDICATOR  T

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-39

085 — Potential Predecessor Check
General Description: An existing or new account receives a significant number of its employees
from one primary contributing account based on information from matching wage records. A
check of wage records show that many of the wage records were previously reported to, but no
longer report to, a different account. That previous wage records reporter may be a potential
predecessor to the account being edited.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Potential Predecessor (UI #) found based on Wage Records
EXPO and WIN Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are true:
 OWNc = 5
 STATUSc  2 or 9
 MEEIc  3 or 5
 COVERAGEc = 0
 Each of the 6 earlier quarters has either
M1-IND, M2-IND, and M3-IND = R, C, E, H, K, M, N, X, or blank
OR
STATUS = 2 or 9 (In other words, the earlier quarters may be a combination of =
R, C, E, H, K, M, N, X, or blank employment indicators or STATUS 2 or 9)
 AMEc > POTENTIAL-PS-EMP
 No positively identified predecessor information (ignore possible predecessors) is found
for the current time period in the predecessor/successor or other files.
 LWRCC (reported to account in current quarter but reported to someone else in the prior
quarter) > AMEc  PPS-EMP%
If flagged, bypass edits 096 and 139.
BLS Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are true:
 OWNc = 5
 STATUSc  2, 3, or 9
 MEEIc  3 or 5
 COVERAGEc = 0
 Each of the 6 earlier quarters has either
M1-IND, M2-IND, and M3-IND = R, C, E, H, K, M, N, X, or blank
OR

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019





Page F-40

STATUS = 2, 3, or 9 (In other words, the earlier quarters may be a combination
of = R, C, E, H, K, M, N, X, or blank employment indicators or STATUS 2, 3, or
9)
AMEc > POTENTIAL-PS-EMP
No supplemental predecessor/successor records in current quarter that identify one or
more predecessors
LWRCC > AMEc  PPS-EMP%

If flagged, bypass edits 096 and 139.
System Actions: (1) Display the UI account of the possible predecessor LWRC UI either in the
error message, on the listing output, or on the on-line edit screen. (2) Allow states to run these
edits separately or at a different time than the rest of the edits since they are dependent upon
access to wage record information which may be available later in the edit cycle. (3) Exclude the
reference account from being its own predecessor.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name
POTENTIAL-PS-EMP
PPS-EMP%

Potential Predecessor/
Successor Employment
Potential Predecessor/
Successor Employment
Percentage

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
086

WIN
PK #
N/A

State
Default
100

BLS
Default
100

6

087

N/A

75

75

086 — Potential Successor Check
General Description: An existing account is delinquent or possibly inactive. Many or all of the
wage records reported to an account in a prior quarter are now reported by one different, primary
receiving account in the current quarter. The recipient of those wage records may be a potential
successor.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Potential Successor (UI #) found based on Wage Records

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-41

EXPO and WIN Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are true:
 OWNp = 5
 STATUSp  2 or 9
 MEEIp  3 or 5
 COVERAGEp = 0
 The current quarter has either
M1-IND, M2-IND, and M3-IND = R, C, E, H, K, M, N, X, or blank
OR
STATUS = 2 or 9 (In other words, the current quarter may be a combination of =
R, C, E, H, K, M, N, X, or blank employment indicators or STATUS 2 or 9)
 AMEp > POTENTIAL-PS-EMP
 No positively identified successor information (ignore possible successors) is found for
the current time period in the predecessor/successor or other files.
 LWRRC (reported to account in prior quarter but reported to different account in the
current quarter) > AMEp  PPS-EMP%
If flagged, bypass edits 097 and 140.
BLS Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are true:
 OWNp = 5
 STATUSp  2, 3, or 9
 MEEIp  3 or 5
 COVERAGEp = 0
 The current quarter has either
M1-IND, M2-IND, and M3-IND = = R, C, E, H, K, M, N, X, or blank
OR
STATUS = 2, 3, or 9 (In other words, the current quarter may be a combination of
= R, C, E, H, K, M, N, X, or blank employment indicators or STATUS 2, 3, or 9)
 AMEp > POTENTIAL-PS-EMP
 No supplemental predecessor/successor records in current quarter that identify one or
more successors
 LWRRC > AMEp  PPS-EMP%
If flagged, bypass edits 097 and 140.
System Actions: (1) Display the UI account of the possible successor either in the error
message, on the listing output, or on the on-line edit screen. (2) Allow states to run these edits
separately or at a different time than the rest of the edits since they are dependent upon access to
wage record information which may be available later in the edit cycle. (3) Exclude the
reference account from being its own successor.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name
POTENTIAL-PS-EMP
PPS-EMP%

Potential Predecessor/
Successor Employment
Potential Predecessor/
Successor Employment
Percentage

Length

Page F-42

6

EXPO
PK #
086

WIN
PK #
N/A

State
default
100

BLS
Default
100

6

087

N/A

75

75

088 — Large Record without Usable PLA Check
General Description: Each record has as many as three possible addresses (physical location,
Mailing/Other, and UI address). These addresses are field specific on the State and BLS Micro
files and on the EQUI files. To pass this edit, records must contain a full Physical Location
address that can be geocoded. To test for usability and the ability to geocode the Physical
Location Address, the system examines each address field separately, then blocks the fields
together as an individual address, and then compares the blocked address to determine if it meets
all editing requirements.
A Physical Location Address block is defined as having
 PLA Street Line - 1
 PLA Street Line - 2
 PLA City
 PLA State
 PLA Zip Code
 PLA Zip Extension.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Level: Micro
Edit Level: 6
Edit Type: Warning
Priority: B
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged
Edit Message: Large Record Without Usable PLA
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Bypass if OWN = 1-3. (Continue if OWN = 5.)
Bypass if MEEI = 2, 4 or 5.
Bypass if CNTY = 995, 996, 998, or 999
Bypass if AME < LARGE-PLA-ADDRESS-AME-CUTOFF
Flag if either condition is met:
 All of the PL address fields are blank or missing, or
 The record's PL address is flagged for any other PLA edit (for edit 102, 103, 104, or 114).

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-43

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
LARGE-PLA-ADDRESS-AME

EXPO WIN
Parameter Name Length PK # PK #
Large PLA
6
080
099
Address Cutoff

State
default
100

BLS
Default
100

State System Actions:
If the PLA contains all zeroes in one of the following fields, the system will blank out the field:
Street Address Line 1, Street Address Line 2, City, or State Abbreviation. (This system action
occurs before editing.)

Level 5 Edit Descriptions – Large Record Employment and Wage
Edits
Several of the employment and wage edits are divided into significant changes (Level 5) and
important but not as large changes (Level 6). This was done to help reviewers focus first on
those changes that have the greatest impact on the data. Most of these edits are performed at
both the micro and macro level.
These edits identify
 Fluctuations over time in employment or wages,
 Significantly large new or discontinued records,
 Records with high wages but no employment, or
 Records with high employment but no wages.
Most of these records warrant further review, possible corrections, and usually some explanation
if not corrected. Problems can be researched
 Using wage records,
 Using UI correspondences or supplemental information,
 Using similar units of a multi-establishment employer, similar employers in the cell, or
 By contacting the employer.
089 — Large Monthly Employment Change Check - Month 1 (WIN-202)
General Description: Edits 089 and 136 look for unusual employment fluctuations in month 1
employment. Larger fluctuations flag with code 089, while smaller (but still questionable)
fluctuations flag with code 136. These two edits are only used in the WIN-202 System (EXPO
and BLS use 091 and 126 instead).
See edit 091 for a full description.
Location: WIN-202 System only
Edit Level: 5

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning

September 2019

Priority: A

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-44

BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Month 1 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
Edit Conditions: See Edit 091 in this section for details and parameter values
090 — Large Monthly Employment Change Check - Month 2 (WIN-202)
General Description: Edits 090 and 137 look for unusual employment fluctuations in month 2
employment. Larger fluctuations flag with code 090, while smaller (but still questionable)
fluctuations flag with code 137. These two edits are only used in the WIN-202 System (EXPO
and BLS use 091 and 126 instead).
See edit 091 for a full description.
Location: WIN-202 System only
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Month 2 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
Edit Conditions: See Edit 091 in this section for details and parameter values.
091 — Large Monthly Employment Change Check
General Description: Edit 091 looks for unusual employment fluctuations. The edit works
differently in the WIN-202 System, so the general description is broken out below by system.
EXPO and BLS System: Edits 091 and 126 look for unusual employment fluctuations in all
three months of employment. The largest fluctuations flag with edit code 091, while smaller (but
still questionable) fluctuations flag with code 126. The edit is performed three times for any
given record, once for each month of employment in the quarter. The monthly employment edit
consists of six different tests. If all steps that can be performed fail for any one of those months,
the edit is flagged with either 91 or 126. This edit is performed at both the micro and macro
levels. The edit description for 091 is quite lengthy, and includes an example to illustrate the
process. This edit is attempted three times for any given record, once for each month of
employment in the current quarter. If all steps that can be performed fail for any one of those
months, the edit is flagged with either 091 or 126.
WIN-202 System: Edits 091 and 138 look for unusual employment fluctuations in month 3
employment. Larger fluctuations flag with code 091, while smaller (but still questionable)
fluctuations flag with code 138. This edit consists of six different tests. If all steps that can be
performed fail for month 3 employment, the edit is flagged with either 091 or 138. This edit is
performed at both the micro and macro levels. (Fluctuations in month 1 employment are covered
by edit 089 and 136, and fluctuations in month 2 are covered by edits 090 and 137.)

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Page F-45

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message:
EXPO and BLS: Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
WIN-202: Month 3 Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
Definitions:
AME = (month 1 employment + month 2 employment + month 3 employment)/3
AMEy = AME from the quarter one year ago from the current quarter
MC = employment of the current quarter month that is being tested (month 1, month 2,
or month 3)
MCy = employment of the month one year ago from MC (if MC = month 1 employment, MC y =
month 1 employment one year ago; if MC = month 2 employment, MC y = month 2
employment one year ago; and if MC = month 3 employment, MC y = month 3
employment one year ago)
MP = month preceding MC (if MC = month 1 employment, MP = month 3 employment of the
prior quarter; if MC = month 2 employment, MP = month 1 employment of the current
quarter; and if MC = month 3 employment, MP = month 2 of the current quarter)
Subscripts of c refer to the current quarter
Subscripts of y refer to the quarter one year ago from the current quarter (e.g., MC y = current
month, one year ago)
Subscripts of p refer to the prior quarter

F.3.1 Micro Edit Conditions
Edit Conditions:
Bypass the edit if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9 in the current quarter.
A. SMALL RECORD BYPASS
Condition:
 Max(M1p, M2p, M3p, M1c, M2c, M3c) < SMALL-REC-BYPASS
If the condition is true, bypass the edit. (stop - do not fail this edit for any of the three months of
employment.)
If the condition is false, go to B. (Continue to 'NO HISTORY BYPASS.')

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-46

B. NO HISTORY BYPASS
Condition:
 All 4 prior quarters have either of the following occur:
- M1-IND and M2-IND and M3-IND = M, N, or X
OR
- STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
If the condition is true, bypass the edit (stop - does not fail this edit for any of the three months of
employment. This record may receive 096 or 139. See edit 096 for details.)
If the condition is false, continue with the C, PRELIMINARY STEP.’
EXPO and BLS: Steps C through J are performed on all three months of employment
WIN-202: Steps C through J are performed only on month 3 employment.
C. PRELIMINARY STEP
(i) Conditions:
 Employment indicator code for current month one year ago (MCy-IND) = M, N, or X


and MCy = 0
Employment indicator code for preceding month (MP-IND) = M, N, or X and MP = 0

If both conditions are true, continue with step (ii) of 'preliminary step'
If either of the conditions is false, go to D (continue with 'step 1')
(ii) Conditions:
 |MC – MP|  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME  EMPL-CHECK-MULTIPLIER (regardless of MP-IND)
 LOW-EMPL-MAX-DIFF < |MC-MP| < EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME  EMPL-CHECK-MULTIPLIER
If the 1st condition is true, flag with edit code 091 for that month.
If the 2nd condition is true, flag with edit code 126 in EXPO and BLS or 138 in WIN-202 for that
month.
If both conditions are false, bypass the rest of the edit for that month (stop - does not fail this edit
for month being tested).
D. STEP 1 – Current Month to preceding month -- absolute change
(i) Condition:
 Employment indicator code for preceding month (MP-IND) = M, N, or X
If the condition is true, go to G (bypass steps 1, 2, and 3 and continue with 'step 4')
If the condition is false, continue with step (ii) of 'step 1'

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-47

(ii) Conditions:
1)
 AMEp < EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME
 MC – MP > LOW-EMPL-MAX-DIFF
OR
2)



AMEp  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME
MC – MP  > HIGH-EMPL-MAX-DIFF

If either pair of conditions is true, go to E (continue with 'step 2').
If both pairs of conditions are false, bypass the rest of the edit (stop - does not fail this edit for
month being tested).
E. STEP 2 – Current month to preceding month -- percent change
Conditions:
1)
If both of the following occur:
 Number of months where M1-IND, M2-IND, and M3-IND  M, N, or X and
STATUS = 1 from the four prior quarters  6, and
 ( MC – MP) > HIGH-REPORTING-PCT-CHG  MP
OR
2)

If both of the following occur:
 Number of months where M1-IND, M2-IND, and M3-IND  M, N, or X and
STATUS = 1 from the four prior quarters < 6
 ( MC – MP ) > REPORTING-PCT-CHG  MP

If 1st condition is true, go to F (continue with 'step 3').
If 2nd condition is true, go to G (bypass 'step 3' and continue with 'step 4').
If both pairs of conditions are false, bypass the rest of the edit (stop - does not fail this edit for
month being tested).
F. STEP 3 – T-test
Identify the largest employment value and smallest employment value in the four prior quarters.
Exclude months with an employment indicator code MX-IND of M, N, or X or STATUS  1.
Let RANGE = Largest Employment Value in four prior quarters – Smallest Employment Value
in four prior quarters.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-48

Determine T-Value from table where n = total number of available months in four prior quarters
(include only months with employment indicator code MX-IND  M, N, or X and STATUS =
1).
n
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

T-Value
2.571
2.447
2.365
2.306
2.262
2.228
2.201

Let M_TOL = T-Value  2  (RANGE/6)
Condition:
  MC – MP  > M_TOL
If condition is true, go to G (continue with 'step 4').
If condition is false, bypass the rest of the edit (stop - does not fail this edit for month being
tested).
G. STEP 4 – Current month to year-ago month -- absolute change
(i) Condition:
 Employment indicator code for current month one year ago (MCy-IND) = M, N, or X
If the condition is true, go to J (bypass steps 4, 5, and 6 and continue to 'determining edit level')
If the condition is false, continue with step (ii) of 'step 4'
(ii) Conditions:
(1)
 AMEy < EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME
 MC – MCy > LOW-EMPL-MAX-DIFF
OR
(2)



AMEy  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME
MC – MCy > HIGH-EMPL-MAX-DIFF

If either pair of conditions is true, go to H (continue with 'step 5')
If both pairs of conditions are false, bypass the rest of the edit (stop - does not fail this edit for
month being tested)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-49

H. STEP 5 – Current month to year ago month -- percent change
Conditions:
(1)
 Number of available months employment in previous four quarters  6 (include only
months with M1-IND, M2-IND, and M3-IND  M, N, or X and STATUS = 1)
 (MC – MCy) > HIGH-REPORTING-PCT-CHG  MCy
OR
(2)



Number of available months’ employment in previous four quarters < 6 (include only
months with employment indicator code MX-IND  M, N, or X and STATUS = 1)
(MC – MCy) > REPORTING-PCT-CHG  MCy

If condition (1) is true, go to I (continue with 'step 6')
If condition (2) is true, go to J (continue to 'determining edit level')
If both pairs of conditions are false, bypass the edit (stop - does not fail this edit for month being
tested)
I. STEP 6 – Current month to year-ago month -- t-test
Condition:
 MC – MCy > M_TOL (M_TOL is defined in 'step 3')
If condition is true, go to J (continue to 'determining edit level')
If condition is false, continue with the following comparison between the First Month of the
Current Quarter and the Last Month of the Prior Quarter:
Conditions:

|M1c – M3p| > BETWEEN-QUARTERS-ABS-DIFF

|M1c – M3p| > BETWEEN-QUARTERS-PERCENT-DIFF × M3p
Defaults for the parms are BETWEEN-QUARTERS-ABS-DIFF = 500 and BETWEEN-QUARTERS-PERCENTDIFF = 0.10
If both conditions are true, go to J (continue to 'determining edit level')
If either of the conditions is false, bypass the edit (stop - does not fail this edit for month being
tested).
J. DETERMINING EDIT LEVEL
Condition:
 MC – MP > EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME  EMPL-CHECK-MULTIPLIER

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-50

If condition is true, flag with edit 091.
If condition is false, flag with edit 126 in EXPO and BLS and 138 in WIN-202.
EXPO and BLS: If one of the three months receives a 091 or a 126, the record receives that edit
code. If one month receives a 091 and another receives a 126, the record receives a 091.
WIN-202: Edits 089/136 and 090/137 follow these same rules. Anything receiving what would
have been a 091/138 edit had it been month 3 employment would receive a 089/136 in month 1
or a 090/137 in month 2.
EDITING UPDATES TO PREVIOUS QUARTERS
States extract or update data up to four quarters earlier than the current processing quarter.
Updates include corrections to reported data and the replacement of estimates with reported data.
However, there are limited quarters of historical data available on the database. Since all updates
should be edited, even if they are from four quarters back, the normal micro edits described
earlier do not have enough historical data available to perform all the tests. If fewer tests were
performed, a record would have fewer opportunities to pass the edits. This would cause updates
to the earliest quarters to be more likely to flag. Therefore, the data that are used to edit back
quarters will not be restricted to data from prior to the quarter being edited, but may also include
quarters that are more recent than the quarter being reviewed.
A. Quarters to Use for T-Test (Steps 3 and 6)
For the t-test, the editing of updates to previous quarters may involve using data from any of the
historical quarters on the file. Twelve months of data must be used to perform the test. The
following table shows which quarters to use when performing the t-test.
For example, if the current quarter was 2018/1 and an update was made to 2017/3, the T-Test
would use data from 2018/1, 2017/4, 2017/2, and 2017/1 to edit the updated record.

Quarters to
Use
Current
Current – 1
Current – 2
Current – 3
Current – 4
Current – 5

Current – 1

Quarter Being Updated
Current – 2 Current – 3 Current – 4
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

B. Quarter to Use for Seasonality Test (Steps 4 and 5)

X
X
X
X

Current – 5

X
X
X
X

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-51

For the seasonality test portion of the employment edit, the updated employment data must be
compared to data from the same month from the quarter either four quarters before or four
quarters after the quarter being edited. Thus, for updates to the two oldest quarters on the file,
the comparison will be to the quarter that is four quarters after the updated quarter. For the
quarter that immediately precedes the current quarter, the comparison will be to the quarter that
is four quarters before the updated quarter. The following table illustrates the appropriate
quarters that are used. Note that the seasonality test cannot be performed for updates to the
quarters that precede the current quarter by two or three quarters.

Quarters to
Use
Current
Current – 1
Current – 2
Current – 3
Current – 4
Current – 5

Current – 1

Quarter Being Updated
Current – 2 Current – 3 Current – 4

Current – 5

X
X

X

Micro Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter

Parameter Name
Small Record Bypass
EMPL-CHECKEmployment Check
MULTIPLIER
Multiplier
EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME Split Level For
Employment Difference
LOW-EMPL-MAXLow Employment
DIFF
Maximum Employment
Difference
HIGH-EMPL-MAXHigh Employment
DIFF
Maximum Employment
Difference
HIGH-REPORTINGEmployment Percent
PCT-CHG
Change Limit For > 6
Reported Months
REPORTING-PCT-CHG Employment Percent
Change Limit For < 6
Reported Months
BETWEENBetween quarters
QUARTERS-ABS-DIFF absolute difference
BETWEENBetween quarters percent
QUARTERS-PERCENT- difference
SMALL-REC-BYPASS

DIFF

Length
2
2

EXPO
PK #
071
053

WIN
PK #
085
010

State
default
25
10

BLS
Default
25
10

2

010

005

20

20

2

011

006

15

15

2

012

007

40

40

2

013

008

10

10

2

014

009

30

30

6

081

100

500

500

2

082

101

0.10

0.10

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-52

F.3.2 Macro Edit Conditions
A. SMALL RECORD BYPASS
(i) Condition:
 Max(M1c, M2c, M3c, M1p, M2p, M3p) < SMALL-MACRO-REC-BYPASS
If the condition is true, bypass the edit (stop - does not fail this edit for any of the 3 months)
If the condition is false, continue to step (ii) of the pre-edit
(ii) Let NumEstabc = number of establishments in the current quarter with non-zero total wages
or at least one non-zero month of employment
Let NumEstabp =
number of establishments in the prior quarter with non-zero total wages or
at least one non-zero month of employment
Let NumEstablMultiplier = 0.5  MIN(NumEstabc, NumEstabp)
If NumEstablMultiplier < 1, let NumEstablMultiplier = 1
Else let NumEstabMultiplier = Round(NumEstablMultiplier)
{rounding is done to the nearest whole number}
If NumEstablMultiplier > NUM-ESTABL-LIMIT, let NumEstablMultiplier = NUM-ESTABL-LIMIT
Go to B (continue with 'pre-edit').
EXPO AND BLS: Steps B through I are performed on all three months of employment!
WIN-202: Steps B through I are performed on month 3 only!
B. PRE-EDIT
Conditions:
(1)
 Each of the four prior quarters has Number of Establishment = 0
OR
(2)




Each of the two prior quarters has Number of Establishments = 0
Mc = First Non-Zero Emp
Mc < NONZERO-EMPL-CUTOFF



Each of the two prior quarters has Number of Establishments = 0

OR
(3)

September 2019



QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-53

Mc = 0

If (1) OR (2) OR (3) is true, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail this edit for month being
tested.)
If both conditions are false, go to C. (Continue with 'step 1.')
EXPO and BLS: If the first nonzero month of employment is month 1 and the number of
establishments in the two prior quarters is zero, continue to edit month 2 and month 3 through
edits 091/126. If the first nonzero month of employment is month 2, continue to edit month 3
through edits 091/126.
C. STEP 1 - Minor Fluctuation Test—Absolute Difference:
Conditions:
(1)
 AMEp < (NumEstablMultiplier  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME)
 | MC – MP | > (NumEstablMultiplier  LOW-EMPL-MAX-DIFF)
OR
(2)
 AMEp > (NumEstablMultiplier  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME)
 | MC – MP | > (NumEstablMultiplier  HIGH-EMPL-MAX-DIFF)
If either pair of conditions is true go to D. (Continue with 'step 2.')
If both pairs of conditions are false, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail this edit for month
being tested.)
D. STEP 2 - Minor Fluctuation Test—Percent Change:
Conditions:
(1)
 Number of available months (including month1, month 2, and month 3) of available
employment (in quarters where the number of establishments > 0) from the four prior
quarters > 6


| MC – MP | > (HIGH-REPORTING-PCT-CHG  MP)



Number of available months (including month 1, month 2, and month 3) of available
employment (in quarters where the number of establishments > 0) from the four prior
quarters < 6
| MC – MP | > (REPORTING-PCT-CHG  MP)

OR
(2)



If (1) is true, go to E. (Continue with 'step 3.')

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-54

If (2) is true, go to F. (Continue with 'step 4.')
If both (1) and (2) are false, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail this edit for month being
tested.)
E. STEP 3 - t-test:


Identify the largest monthly employment value and smallest monthly employment value
in the 12 months in the four prior quarters. Exclude months in quarters with Number of
Establishments = 0.



Let RANGE = largest employment value in four prior quarters– smallest employment
value in four prior quarters

Determine t-Value from table where n = total number of available months in four prior quarters
(excluding months in quarters with Number of Establishments = 0)
n
6
7
8
9
10
11
12


T-Value
2.571
2.447
2.365
2.306
2.262
2.228
2.201

Let M_TOL = t-Value  2  (RANGE/6)

Condition:
 | MC – MP | > M_TOL
If the condition is true, go to F. (Continue with 'step 4.')
If the condition is false, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail this edit for month being tested.)
F. STEP 4 - Seasonality Fluctuation Test—Absolute Difference:
Conditions:
(1)


OR

AMEy < (NumEstablMultiplier  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME)
|MC - MCy| > (NumEstablMultiplier  LOW-EMPL-MAX-DIFF)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-55

(2)



AMEy > (NumEstablMultiplier  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME)
|MC - MCy| > (NumEstablMultiplier  HIGH-EMPL-MAX-DIFF)

If either pair of conditions is true, go to G. (Continue with 'step 5.')
If both pairs of conditions are false, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail this edit for month
being tested.)
G. STEP 5 - Seasonality Fluctuation Test—Percent Change:
Conditions:
(1)
 Number of available months employment (number of establishments in the quarter zero)
>6
 |MC - MCy | > HIGH-REPORTING-PCT-CHG  MCy
(2)
 Number of available months employment (including month 1, month 2, and month 3) of
available employment (in quarters where the number of establishments > 0) from the 4
prior quarters < 6
 |MC - MCy | > REPORTING-PCT-CHG  MCy
If 1st condition is true, go to H. (Continue with 'step 6.')
If 2nd condition is true, go to I. (Skip 'step 6' and continue with 'edit level.')
If both pairs of conditions are false, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail this edit for month
being tested.)
H. STEP 6 - Seasonality t-test:
Condition:
 |MC - MCy| > M_TOL where (M_TOL is defined in 'step 3')
If condition is true, go to I. (Continue to 'determining edit level.')
If condition is false, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail this edit for month being tested.)
I. DETERMINING EDIT LEVEL
Condition:
 | MC – MP | > (NumEstablMultiplier  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME  EMPL-CHECK-MULTIPLIER)
If the condition is true, flag with edit 091.
If the condition is false, flag with edit 126 in EXPO and BLS or 138 in WIN.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-56

EXPO and BLS: If one of the three months receives a 091 or a 126, the record receives that edit
code. If one month receives a 091 and another receives a 126, the record receives a 091.
WIN: Edits 089/136 and 090/137 follow these same rules. Anything receiving what would have
been a 091/138 edit had it been month 3 employment would receive a 089/136 in month 1 or a
090/137 in month 2.
CODE CHANGE INTEGRATION
Editing macro data across years may be impacted by noneconomic code changes. For example,
a large micro record that changed its industry in first quarter due to a noneconomic code change
could cause a large and apparently unexplained change in a macro cell; the micro record would
be in a different macro cell, and the macro cell it came from could have a precipitous drop in
employment. To adjust for cases like this, the first quarter data are temporarily adjusted to
eliminate the effect of the code changes only when the first quarter is the processing quarter (the
quarter being edited). This adjustment is based on the net change for the cell from the Summary
of Differences file, described in Chapter 11. (The only exception to this occurs when there are
two first quarters on the file and the update is to the older first quarter. Whenever this occurs,
there is no CCS or Summary of Differences file for that quarter, so the data cannot be adjusted.)
Non-adjusted data are maintained on the files. If the second quarter of the current year is the
processing quarter, both the first and second quarter data for the current year are left unadjusted
and edited as described in the earlier tables.

EDITING UPDATES TO PREVIOUS QUARTERS
States extract or update data up to four quarters earlier than the current processing quarter.
Updates include corrections to reported data and the replacement of estimates with reported data.
However, there are limited quarters of historical data available on the database. Since all updates
should be edited, even if they are from four quarters back, the normal macro edits described
earlier do not have enough historical data available to perform all the tests. If fewer tests were
performed, a record would have fewer opportunities to pass the edits. This would cause updates
to the earliest quarters to be more likely to flag. Therefore, the data that are used to edit back
quarters will not be restricted to data from prior to the quarter being edited, but may also include
quarters that are more recent than the quarter being reviewed.
A. Quarters to Use for T-Test (Steps 3 and 6)
For the t-test, the editing of updates to previous quarters may involve using data from any of the
historical quarters on the file. Twelve months of data must be used to perform the test. The
following table shows which quarters to use when performing the t-test.
For example, if the current quarter was 2018/1 and an update was made to 2017/3, the t-test
would use data from 2018/1, 2017/4, 2017/2, and 2017/1 to edit the updated record.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Current – 1

Quarters to
Use
Current
Current – 1
Current – 2
Current – 3
Current – 4
Current – 5

Quarter Being Updated
Current – 2 Current – 3 Current – 4
X
X

X
X
X
X

Page F-57

X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

X

Current – 5

X
X
X
X

B. Quarter to Use for Seasonality Test (Steps 4 and 5)
For the seasonality test portion of the employment edit, the updated employment data must be
compared to data from the same month from the quarter either four quarters before or four
quarters after the quarter being edited. Thus, for updates to the two oldest quarters on the file,
the comparison will be to the quarter that is four quarters after the updated quarter. For the
quarter that immediately precedes the current quarter, the comparison will be to the quarter that
is four quarters before the updated quarter. The following table illustrates the appropriate
quarters that are used. Note that the seasonality test cannot be performed for updates to the
quarters that precede the current quarter by two or three quarters.
Current – 1

Quarters to
Use
Current
Current – 1
Current – 2
Current – 3
Current – 4
Current – 5

Quarter Being Updated
Current – 2 Current – 3 Current – 4
X

X

X

Example of Macro 091/126 using State Default Parameters:
Macro data
Quarter
Number of
M1
M2
M3
Establishments
4
3
2
1
Current

Current – 5

4
4
4
3
2

135
82
63
100
180

136
59
63
105
190

101
60
63
110
190

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Current Quarter Micro data:
UI/RUN
M1 Emp
0000000001/00000
0000000002/00000
0000000003/00000
0000000004/00000

100
80
0
0

Prior Quarter Micro data:
UI/RUN
M1 Emp
0000000001/00000
0000000002/00000
0000000003/00000
0000000004/00000

90
10
0
0

M2 Emp

M3 Emp

100
90
0
0

100
90
0
0

M2 Emp

M3 Emp

95
10
0
0

90
20
0
0

Page F-58

Total Wages
100,000
60,000
0
0

Total Wages
100,000
60,000
10,000
0

A. Example Small Record Bypass:
(i)

Max (135, 136, 101, 82, 59, 60) = 136
Since 136 > 40 (SMALL-MACRO-REC-BYPASS), go to step (ii).

(ii)

NumEstabc = 2
NumEstabp = 3
NumEstablMultiplier = 0.5  Min(NumEstabc, NumEstabp) = 0.5  Min(2, 3) = 0.5 * 2 =

1
Go to B (Pre-edit for Month 1).
B. Example Pre-edit (MONTH 1):
Number of Establishments  0 for all four prior quarters
Go to C (Step 1).
TEST MONTH 1
C. Example Step 1: Minor Fluctuation Test--Absolute Difference (MONTH 1):
MC = Month 1 = 180
MP = Prior Quarter Month 3 = 110
AMEp = (100 + 105 + 110)/3 = 105  NumEstablMultiplier  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME = 1  20
=20
| MC – MP | = |180 - 110| = 70 > NumEstablMultiplier  HIGH-EMPL-MAX-DIFF = 1  30 = 30
The conditions in (2) are true, so go to D (Step 2).

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-59

D. Example Step 2: Minor Fluctuation Test--Percent Change (MONTH 1):
Number of available months in four prior quarters = 12
| MC – MP | = |180 - 110| = 70 > HIGH-REPORTING-PCT-CHG  MP = 0.1  110 = 11
The conditions in (1) are true, so go to E (Step 3).
E. Example Step 3: t-test (MONTH 1):
Max(employment in four prior quarters) = Max(100, 105, 110, 63, 63, 63, 82, 59, 60, 135,
136, 101) =136
Min(employment in four prior quarters) = Min(100, 105, 110, 63, 63, 63, 82, 59, 60, 135,
136, 101) = 59
RANGE = maximum employment - minimum employment = 136 - 59 = 77
n - 1 = total number of months available - 1 = 12 -1 =11
t-value = 2.201 when n-1 = 11
M_TOL = t-value  2  (RANGE / 6) = 2.201  2  (77/6) = 39.946
| MC – MP | = |180 - 110| = 70 > M_TOL = 39.946
The condition is true, so go to F (Step 4).
F. Example Step 4: Seasonality Fluctuation Test--Absolute Difference (MONTH 1):
AMEy = (135+ 136 + 101)/3 > (NumEstablMultiplier  HIGH-EMPL-MAX-DIFF) = 1  20
124 > 20
|MC - MCy| = |180 - 135| > (NumEstablMultiplier  HIGH-EMPL-MAX-DIFF) = 1  30
45 > 30
The conditions in (2) are true, so go to G (Step 5).
G. Example Step 5: Seasonality Fluctuation Test--Percent Change (MONTH 1):
Number of available months employment = 12
|MC - MCy | = |180 - 135| > HIGH-REPORTING-PCT-CHG  Mcy = (0.10)  (135)
45 >13.5
The conditions in (2) are true, so go to H (Step 6).

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-60

H. Example Step 6: Seasonality t-test (MONTH 1):
|MC - MCy| = |180 - 135| > M_TOL (M_TOL was defined in Step 3)
45 > 39.946
The condition is true, so go to I ‘determining edit level.’)
I. Example Determining Edit Level (MONTH 1):
| Mc – Mp | < (NumEstablMultiplier 
|180 - 110| < (1)  (20)  (10)
70 < 200

EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME  EMPL-CHECK-MULTIPLIER)

The condition is false, so month 1 receives edit 126 in EXPO and BLS or edit 136 in WIN.
Go to J to test Month 2.
TEST MONTH 2
J. Example Pre-edit (MONTH 1):
Number of Establishments  0 for all 4 prior quarters.
Go to K (Step 1).
K. Example Step 1: Minor Fluctuation Test--Absolute Difference (MONTH 2):
MC = Month 2 = 190
MP = Month 1 = 180
AMEp = (100 + 105 + 110)/3 = 105  NumEstablMultiplier  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME = 1  20
=20
|MC - MP| = |190 - 110| = 10 < NumEstablMultiplier  HIGH-EMPL-MAX-DIFF = 1  30 = 30
The 2nd condition in (2) is false, so bypass the rest of the edit for Month 2.
Go to L to test Month 3.
TEST MONTH 3
L. Example Pre-edit (MONTH 1):
Number of Establishments  0 for all four prior quarters
Go to M (Step 1)

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-61

M. Example Step 1: Minor Fluctuation Test--Absolute Difference (MONTH 3):
MC = Month 3 = 190
MP = Month 2 = 190
AMEp = (100 + 105 + 110)/3 = 105  NumEstablMultiplier  EMPL-DIFF-SPL-AME = 1  20
=20
| MC – MP | = |190 - 190| = 0 < NumEstablMultiplier  HIGH-EMPL-MAX-DIFF = 1  30 = 30
The 2nd condition in (2) is false, so bypass the rest of the edit for Month 3.
EXPO and BLS: Since Month 1 received edit 126, the record receives edit 126.
WIN-202: Record receives edit 136.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
EMPL-CHECK-

EXPO
PK #
053

WIN
PK #
010

2

010

005

20

20

2

011

006

15

15

2

012

007

40

40

2

013

008

10

10

2

014

009

30

30

2 (3 in
BLS)
6

073

086

100

100

076

087

100

100

6

075

088

50

50

Parameter Name
Length
Employment Check Multiplier
2

State
BLS
Default Default
10
10

MULTIPLIER
EMPL-DIFFSPL-AME

Split Level For Employment
Difference
LOW-EMPLLow Employment Maximum
MAX-DIFF
Employment Difference
HIGH-EMPLHigh Employment Maximum
MAX-DIFF
Employment Difference
HIGHEmployment Percent Change
REPORTINGLimit For > 6 Reported
PCT-CHG
Months
REPORTINGEmployment Percent Change
PCT-CHG
Limit For < 6 Reported
Months
SMALL-MACRO- Macro Small Record Bypass
REC-BYPASS
NUM-ESTABLMacro Number of
LIMIT
Establishments Limit
NONZEROMacro Non-zero Employment
EMPL-CUTOFF Cutoff

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-62

092 — Large Wage Change Check
General Description: Edits 092 and 127 look for unusual fluctuations in Average Quarterly
Wages. The largest fluctuations flag with code 092, while smaller (but still questionable)
fluctuations flag with code 127. This edit is performed at both the micro and macro levels and
consists of two stages: (1) the current quarter AQW is compared to the prior quarter AQW, and
(2) a statistical test is used to compare the current AQW to the four prior AQWs. There are some
additional tests, but these two parts comprise the core of the edit.
The record fails the edit in the following situations:
 Fails stage one, and
 Does not have sufficient data for stage two
OR



Fails stage one, and
Fails stage two





Fails stage one, and
Passes stage two, and
Fails the supplement edit

OR

Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: AQW Change Is Significantly > Parm and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW
Range
Definitions
M1 = Month 1 Employment
M2 = Month 2 Employment
M3 = Month 3 Employment
TW = Total Wages
AME = (Month 1 Employment + Month 2 Employment + Month 3 Employment)/3
AQW = Total Wages  AME , if AME  0
Total Wages, if AME = 0
TW-IND = Total Wage Indicator
Subscripts of c refer to the current quarter
Subscripts of cy refer to the quarter one year ago from the current quarter
Subscripts of p refer to the prior quarter

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-63

Micro Edit Conditions
Edit Conditions:
Edit if:
 MEEIc  2
 STATUSc  2, 3, or 9

A. PRE-EDIT
(i) Conditions:
 AMEc > NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL
 TWc = 0
If one or both of these conditions is false, continue to step (ii) of the 'pre-edit'.
If both conditions are true, bypass the rest of the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or 127. It will
fail 093 or 130. See edit 093 for details.).
(ii) Conditions:
 M1c = M2c = M3c = 0
 TWc > NO-EMP-MAX-WAGE
If one or both of these conditions is false, go to B. (Continue to ‘small record bypass.’)
If both conditions are true, bypass the rest of the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or 127. It will
fail 094 or 131. See edit 094 for details.)
B. SMALL RECORD BYPASS
Conditions:
1)
 AMEp < AME-WAGE-CUTOFF
 AMEc < AME-WAGE-CUTOFF
 TWp < TW-WAGE-CUTOFF
 TWc < TW-WAGE-CUTOFF
OR

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-64

2)


|TWc - TWp| < TW-CHANGE-SMALL-RECORD-BYPASS

If all four of the conditions in (1) are true or the condition in (2) is true, bypass the edit (stop does not fail 092 or 127).
Otherwise, go to C. (Continue to ‘checking for newly reported records.’).
C. CHECKING FOR NEWLY REPORTED RECORDS
(i) Condition:
 TW-INDc = M, N, or X
If the condition is true, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or 127.)
If the condition is false, continue with step (ii).
(ii) Conditions:
 Each of the 4 prior quarters has
- TW-IND = M, N, or X
OR
- STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
 AQWc  WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF  EMPL-CHECK-MULTIPLIER
If both conditions are true, flag with 092 and bypass the rest of the edit.
If 1st condition is true but not the 2nd, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or 127.)
If 1st condition is false, go to D. (Continue with 'large record flag.')
D. LARGE RECORD FLAG
Conditions:
 STATUSc = 1
 STATUSp = 1
 |TWc – TWp| > 2,000,000
 |AQWc – AQWp|  WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF
 |AQWc – AQWp|/AQWp  0.25 (only do this condition when AQWp  0)
If all of the conditions are true, then flag with 092 and stop. (Bypass the rest of the edit.)
If at least one of the conditions is false, go to E. (Continue with 'stage 1.')
E. STAGE 1
Condition:
 AQWc – AQWp > WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-65

If the condition is true, go to F. (Continue with 'stage 2.')
If the condition is not true, bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or 127.)
F. STAGE 2
(i) Condition:
 At least one of the current or four prior quarters has
- TW-IND = M, N, or X
OR
- STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
If the condition in (i) is true, go to H. (Bypass the rest of stage 2 and the supplemental edit and
continue to ‘edit level check.’)
If the condition is false, continue to (ii) of 'stage 2.'
(ii) Let
FU = 2nd highest AQW of all AQWs of the current and four prior quarters
FL = 2nd lowest AQW of all AQWs of the current and four prior quarters
This is done by eliminating the highest and lowest AQW and finding the maximum and
minimum of the remaining three. It is possible to have FU equal to the highest value and
FL equal to the lowest value.
Let
WAGE RANGE = 2  (FU – FL)
If WAGE RANGE < WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF, then let WAGE RANGE = WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF
Conditions:
 AQWc > FU + WAGE RANGE
 AQWc < FL – WAGE RANGE
If one of the conditions in (ii) is true, go to H. (Bypass the supplemental edit and continue to
‘edit level check.’)
If both conditions in (ii) are false, go to G. (Continue to ‘supplemental edit.’)
G. SUPPLEMENTAL EDIT
Conditions:
 AQWc is less than the AQWs of all four prior quarters
 (FL – WAGE RANGE) < 0
 AQWc - AQWp > SUPPL-WAGE-DIFF
 AMEc > SUPPL-AME or AMEp > SUPPL-AME

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-66

If all four of these conditions are true, go to H. (Continue to the 'edit level check.')
If at least one of these conditions is false, bypass the rest of the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or
127.)
H. EDIT LEVEL CHECK


AQWc – AQWp > WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF  WAGE-CHECK-MULTIPLIER

If this condition is true, flag with edit 092.
If this condition is false, flag with edit 127.
EDITING UPDATES TO PREVIOUS QUARTERS
States extract or update data up to four quarters earlier than the current processing quarter.
Updates include corrections to reported data and the replacement of estimates with reported data.
However, there are limited quarters of historical data available on the database. Since all updates
should be edited, even if they are four quarters back, the normal micro edits described earlier do
not have enough historical data available to perform all the tests. If fewer tests were performed,
a record would have fewer opportunities to pass the edits. This would cause updates to the
earliest quarters to be more likely to flag. Therefore, the data that are used to edit back quarters
are not restricted to data from quarters prior to the quarter being edited, but may also include
quarters that are more recent than the quarter being reviewed.
Quarters to Use for Stage 2 and Supplemental Edit
For the Stage 2 test and the supplemental edit, the editing of updates to previous quarters
involves using data from historical quarters. Current and four additional quarters worth of data
must be used to perform the test. The following table shows which quarters to use when
performing the Stage 2 test and the Supplemental edit.
For example, if the current quarter was 2018/1 and an update was made to total wages for
2017/3, the Stage 2 test and Supplemental Edit would use 2018/1, 2017/4, 2017/3, 2017/2, and
2017/1 to edit the updated record.

Quarters to
Use
Current
Current – 1
Current – 2
Current – 3
Current – 4
Current – 5

Current – 1

X
X
X
X
X

Quarter Being Updated
Current – 2 Current – 3 Current – 4
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

Current – 5

X
X
X
X
X

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-67

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
AME-WAGE-CUTOFF
TW-WAGE-CUTOFF
TW-CHANGE-SMALLRECORD-BYPASS
EMPL-CHECKMULTIPLIER
NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL
NO-EMPL-MAX-WAGE
WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF
WAGE-CHECKMULTIPLIER
SUPPL-AME
SUPPL-WAGE-DIFF

Parameter Name
Length
AME Wage Cutoff
6
TW Cutoff
6
TW Change Small
6
Record Bypass
Employment Check
2
Multiplier
No Total Wages With
2
AME Cutoff
No Employment
6
With TW Cutoff
Total Wage Change
6
Parm
Total Wage Check
2
Multiplier
Supplemental Edit
6
AME
Supplemental Edit
6
AQW Difference

EXPO
PK #
071
072
077

WIN
State
BLS
PK # Default Default
091
25
25
092 100,000 100,000
N/A 50,000 50,000

053

010

10

10

008

011

15

15

007

015

100,000 100,000

019

012

15,000

15,000

059

013

10

10

057

071

75

75

058

072

10,000

10,000

Macro Edit Conditions
Edit Conditions:
A. PRE-EDIT
(i) Conditions:
 Each of the four prior quarters has Number of Establishments = 0
 Each of the two prior quarters has Number of Establishments = 0 and TWc < NONZEROWAGE-CUTOFF
If either condition is true, then bypass the rest of the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or 127.)
If both conditions are false, continue with step (ii) of 'pre-edit.'
(ii) Conditions:
 AMEc > NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL
 TWc = 0
If one or both of these conditions is false, continue with step (iii) of the Pre-edit.
If both conditions are true, bypass rest of the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or 127. It should fail
093 or 130. See Edit 093 for details.)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-68

(iii) Conditions:
 M1c = M2c = M3c = 0
 TWc > NO-EMP-MAX-WAGE
If one or both of these conditions is false, go to B. (Continue to ‘small record bypass.’)
If both conditions are true, bypass the rest of the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or 127. It should
fail 094 or 131. See Edit 094 for details.)
B. SMALL RECORD BYPASS
Conditions:
 AMEp < MACRO-AME-WAGE-CUTOFF
 AMEc < MACRO-AME-WAGE-CUTOFF
 TWp < MACRO-TW-WAGE-CUTOFF
 TWc < MACRO-TW-WAGE-CUTOFF
If all four of the conditions are true, the system will bypass the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or
127.)
If at least one of the four conditions are false, go to C. (Continue with ‘large record flag.’)
C. LARGE RECORD FLAG
Conditions:
(1)
 AMEc > 1000
 |AQWc - AQWp| > 5000
OR
(2)



AMEc > 10000
|AQWc - AQWp| > 1000





|AQWc – AQWp|  WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF
|TWc – TWp| > 1,000,000
|AQWc – AQWp|  MAX(AQWc, AQWp) > 0.25 (if MAX(AQWc, AQWp) = 0 then do
not use this condition)
|TWc – TWy| > 1,000,000
|AQWc – AQWy|  MAX(AQWc, AQWy) > 0.25 (if MAX(AQWc, AQWy) = 0 then do
not use this condition)

OR
(3)




September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-69

If all the conditions in (1) are true or all conditions in (2) are true or all conditions that can be
performed in (3) are true, then flag with 092 and bypass the rest of the edit.
Otherwise, if all three sets of conditions contain at least one false statement, go to D. (Continue
with 'stage1.')
D. STAGE 1
Condition:
 AQWc – AQWp > WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF
If the condition is true, go to E. (Continue with 'stage 2.')
If the condition is false, bypass the rest of the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or 127.)
E. STAGE 2
(i) Condition:
 At least one of the current or four prior quarters has Number of Establishments = 0
If the condition is true, go to F. (Bypass rest of 'stage 2' and 'supplemental edit' and go to 'edit
level check.')
If the condition is false, continue with step (ii) of 'stage 2.'
(ii) Let
FU = 2nd highest AQW of all AQWS of the current and four prior quarters
FL = 2nd lowest AQW of all AQWS of the current and four prior quarters
The system does this by eliminating the highest and lowest AQW and finding the
maximum and minimum of the remaining three. It is possible to have FU equal to the
highest value and FL equal to the lowest value.
Let
WAGE RANGE = 2  (FU – FL)
If WAGE RANGE < WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF, then let WAGE RANGE = WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF
Conditions:
 AQWc > FU + WAGE RANGE
 AQWc < FL – WAGE RANGE
If one of the conditions is true, go to G. (Bypass the 'supplemental edit' and continue to the 'edit
level check.')
If both conditions are false, go to F. (Continue to the ‘supplemental edit.’)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-70

F. SUPPLEMENTAL EDIT
Conditions:
 AQWC IS LESS THAN THE AQWS OF THE 4 PRIOR QUARTERS
 (FL – WAGE RANGE) < 0
 AQWC - AQWP > SUPPL-WAGE-DIFF
 AMEC > SUPPL-AME OR AMEP > SUPPL-AME
If all four of the conditions are true, go to G. (Continue to the 'edit level check.')
If at least one of the conditions is false, bypass the rest of the edit. (Stop - does not fail 092 or
127.)

G. EDIT LEVEL CHECK
Condition:
 AQWC – AQWP > WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF  WAGE-CHECK-MULTIPLIER
If this condition is true, flag with edit 092.
If this condition is false, flag with edit 127.
CODE CHANGE INTEGRATION
Macro editing of updates to historical data becomes complicated due to the Code Change
Integration in the first quarter of each calendar year. Therefore, whenever the updated quarter is
the first quarter, the data are temporarily adjusted to eliminate the effect of the code changes.
This adjustment is based on the net change for the cell from the Summary of Differences file,
described in Section 11.6. (The only exception to this occurs when there are two first quarters on
the file and the update is to the older first quarter. Whenever this occurs, there is no CCS or
Summary of Differences file for that quarter, so the data cannot be adjusted.) Non-adjusted data
are maintained on the files.
EDITING UPDATES TO PREVIOUS QUARTERS
States extract or update data up to four quarters earlier than the current processing quarter.
Updates include corrections to reported data and the replacement of estimates with reported data.
However, there are limited quarters of historical data available on the database. Since all updates
should be edited, even if they are four quarters back, the normal macro edits described earlier do
not have enough historical data available to perform all the tests. If fewer tests were performed,
a record would have fewer opportunities to pass the edits. This would cause updates to the
earliest quarters to be more likely to flag. Therefore, the data that are used to edit back quarters
are not restricted to data from quarters prior to the quarter being edited, but may also include
quarters that are more recent than the quarter being reviewed.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-71

Quarters to Use for Stage 2 test and Supplemental Edit
For the Stage 2 test and the supplemental edit, the editing of updates to previous quarters
involves using data from historical quarters. Current and four additional quarters worth of data
must be used to perform the test. The following table shows which quarters to use when
performing the Stage 2 test and the Supplemental edit.
For example, if the current quarter was 2018/1 and an update was made to total wages for
2017/3, the Stage 2 test and Supplemental Edit would use 2018/1, 2017/4, 2017/3, 2017/2, and
2017/1 to edit the updated record.

Quarters to Use
Current
Current – 1
Current – 2
Current – 3
Current – 4
Current – 5

Current – 1
X
X
X
X
X

Quarter Being Updated
Current – 2 Current – 3 Current – 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Current – 5
X
X
X
X
X

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
EMPL-CHECKMULTIPLIER
NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL
NO-EMPL-MAX-WAGE
WAGE-CHG-CUTOFF
WAGE-CHECKMULTIPLIER
SUPPL-AME
SUPPL-WAGE-DIFF
MACRO-AME-WAGECUTOFF
TW-WAGE-CUTOFF
NONZERO-WAGECUTOFF

Parameter Name
Employment Check
Multiplier
No Total Wages
With AME Cutoff
No Employment
With TW Cutoff
Total Wage Change
Parm
Total Wage Check
Multiplier
Supplemental Edit
AME
Supplemental Edit
AQW Difference
Macro AME Wage
Cutoff
Macro TW Wage
Cutoff
Macro Nonzero
Wage Cutoff

Length
2

EXPO
PK #
053

WIN
PK #
010

State
Default
10

BLS
Default
10

2

008

011

15

15

6

007

015

100,000

100,000

6

019

012

15,000

15,000

2

059

013

10

10

6

057

071

75

75

6

058

072

10,000

10,000

6

073

093

100

100

6

074

089

500,000

500,000

6 (9 at
BLS)

N/A

090

2,000,000 2,000,000

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-72

093 — Employment Without Wages Check
General Description: Edits 093 and 130 look for situations in which employment is significant
but there are no wages. These edits help ensure that wage data are either reported or imputed.
When a record flagged for these edit conditions has large employment (larger than a parameter),
edit code 093 is assigned. Smaller (but still significant) levels of employment receive edit code
130.
This edit flags when partial imputations are made (where the system was able to generate
employment imputations but not the wage imputation) or when a predecessor/successor situation
occurs and the employment is transferred to only one owner while the employment is reported by
each employer.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Average Employment Is Significantly > parm, but Total Wages = $0
Edit Conditions:
MICRO
Flag if the following conditions are true:
 STATUS  2, 3 or 9
 AME > NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL
 TW = 0
Determining Edit Level:
When flagged, code as 093 if AME > NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL  NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL-MULTIPLIER
Else code as 130.
MACRO
Flag if the following conditions are true:
 AME > NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL
 TW = 0
Determining Edit Level:
When flagged, code as 093 if AME > NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL  NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL-MULTIPLIER
Else code as 130.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-73

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPL
NO-WAGE-MAX-EMPLMULTIPLIER

Parameter Name
No Total Wages
With AME Cutoff
No Wages But AME
Multiplier

Length
2

EXPO
PK #
008

WIN
PK #
011

State
Default
15

BLS
Default
15

2

053

014

10

10

094 — Wages Without Employment Check
General Description: Edits 094 and 131 look for situations in which employment is zero but
wages are significant. These edits help ensure that employment data are either reported or
imputed. When a record flagged for these edit conditions has large wages, edit code 094 is
assigned. When a flagged record has a lower wage level (that is still significant), the edit code
131 is assigned.
This situation occurs more often than employment without wages (edits 093 and 130). There are
more situations where wages are either reported or successfully imputed without reported or
imputed employment than where wages are missing and employment is present. Additionally,
since wages represent those wages earned during the entire quarter and employment represents
the employment reported or imputed for the reporting periods which include the 12th of each
month, it is possible that wages are only paid for a period of time for which the employment
were not reported.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages Is Significantly > parm
Edit Conditions:
MICRO
Flag if the following conditions are true:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9
 M1 = M2 = M3 = 0
 TW > NO-EMPL-MAX-WAGE
Determining Edit Level:
When flagged, code as 094 if TW > NO-EMPL-MAX-WAGE  NO-EMPL-MAX-WAGE-MULTIPLIER
Else code as 131.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-74

MACRO
Flag if the following conditions are true:
 M1 = M2 = M3 = 0
 TW > NO-EMPL-MAX-WAGE
Determining Edit Level:
When flagged, code as 094 if TW > NO-EMPL-MAX-WAGE  NO-EMPL-MAX-WAGE-MULTIPLIER
Else code as 131.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
NO-EMPL-MAX-WAGE
NO-EMPL-MAXWAGE-MULTIPLIER

Parameter Name
No Employment With
TQW Cutoff
No Employment with
TQW Cutoff Multiplier

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
007

2

059

WIN
State
PK # Default
015 100,000
016

3

BLS
Default
100,000
10

095 — Wages/Employment Sum Check
General Description: Edits 095 and 132 check for entries in total wages that are equal to the sum
of the three months employment. This edit identifies situations where monthly wages appear to
have been reported in lieu of monthly employment. If the edit conditions apply and employment
is large, edit code 095 is assigned. If the flagged record has smaller employment (but is still
significant), edit 132 is assigned.

Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Total Wages = Sum of Employment +/- parm If AME Is Large
Edit Conditions:
Flag if the following conditions are true:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9
 AME > EMPL-EQ-WAGE-AME
 |TW- (M1 + M2 + M3)| < EMPL-EQ-WAGE-TOL
Determining Edit Level:
When flagged, code as 095 if AME > EMPL-EQ-WAGE-AME  EMPL-EQ-WAGE-MULTIPLIER
Else code as 132

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-75

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
EMPL-EQ-WAGETOL
EMPL-EQ-WAGEAME
EMPL-EQ-WAGEMULTIPLIER

Parameter Name
Employment Equals Total
Wages Tolerance
Employment Equals Total
Wages AME Cutoff
Employment Equals Total
Wages Multiplier

Length
2

EXPO
PK #
041

WIN
PK #
017

State
Default
5

BLS
Default
5

6

042

018

100

100

2

053

019

10

10

096 — Large New Record Check
General Description: Edits 096 and 139 are designed to find new employers with unusually high
initial employment. Such a condition generally suggests that a predecessor/successor
relationship should be reported since most new employers do not start off with a large number of
employees the first month. If a predecessor account is identified for the new establishment, these
edits are bypassed. New establishments that do not have the high employment level of the Large
New Employment parameter can still fail the less severe edit 139 exception, if the lower
threshold of the New Employment parameter is reached. Again, those accounts with an assigned
predecessor will not be flagged here, because the high employment is assumed to have been
brought across from the previous account.
If this edit flag is assigned, check wage records to determine if a large number of the employees
of this new record were previously reported by the same terminated or downsized account. This
may help identify the record's predecessor.
If the flagged large record is the result of a multi collapse, work with the employer to resume the
multi breakouts, arrange for periodic breakout reporting, or notify the EDI Center if the record is
part of a large multi- state reporter.
If no other sources are available, contact the employer or its representative to obtain additional
information about such a large new account.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusually Large New Record on File
Edit Conditions:

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-76

Flag if all conditions are true:
 STATUSc  2, 3, or 9
 Each of the 6 earlier quarters has either
M1-IND, M2-IND, and M3-IND = M, N, or X
OR
STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
(In other words, the earlier quarters may be a combination of M, N, or X employment
indicators, or STATUS = 2, 3 or 9)
 PRED UI# is blank
 PRED RUN is blank
 The first month of non-zero employment in the current quarter  NEW-EMPL
Determining Edit Level:
When flagged, if first month of nonzero employment in current quarter  LARGE-NEW-EMPL, then
code as 096.
Else if NEW-EMPL  first month of nonzero employment in current quarter  LARGE-NEW-EMPL,
then code as 139.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
NEW-EMPL
LARGE-NEW-

Parameter Name
New Employer
Large New Employer

Length
6
6

EXPO
PK #
061
060

WIN
PK #
075
073

State
Default
50
250

BLS
Default
50
250

EMPL

System Action: Edit bypassed if flagged for 085.
097 — Large Discontinued Record Check
General Description: Edit 097 is essentially the reverse of edit 096. Instead of looking for a new
high-employment unit, this edit flags employers that have gone out of business with a high final
employment. This combination most often carries a successor relationship, so that the large
number of employees can be carried over to the new employer. Because of this, records with a
successor account are exempt from this edit. An unusual aspect of this edit is that it requires the
account to be currently inactive, the opposite of most other edits. A smaller scale version of this
edit is edit 140, described later in this appendix. Edit 140 uses a lower-limit cutoff value (the
Discontinued Employment parameter) for accounts that terminate without a successor and with
substantial employment, though not quite up to the scale of the parm used in edit 097.
It is rare that accounts or units terminate with such large employment levels without transferring
their employees to a successor. If this record does not have a successor, check wage records or
contact the employer to find out if the data should truly drop off in this manner. A large unit
may also be terminated if the data from the unit is distributed among other units as the result of a
multi breakout.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Page F-77

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusually Large Discontinued Record Inactivated
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are true:
 STATUS p = 1





STATUS c = 2 or 3
SUCC UI# is blank
SUCC RUN is blank
M3p  DISC-EMPL

Determining Edit Level:
When flagged, if M3p  LARGE-DISC-EMPL, then code as 097
Else if DISC-EMPL  M3p  LARGE-DISC-EMPL, then code as 140
Edit Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
DISC-EMPL
LARGE-DISCEMPL

Parameter Name
Discontinued Employer
Large Discontinued
Employer

Length
6
6

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #
061
076
060
074

State
Default
50
250

BLS
Default
50
250

System Action: Edit bypassed if flagged for 086.
099 — Large Imputation Check
General Description: When attempting to generate imputations for delinquent accounts, the state
processing systems either successfully impute (where the system was able to derive a value for
the employment and/or wage field) or fail to impute (where the record had already been imputed
for two or more quarters or there were not sufficient historical data or information to derive an
imputation). It is important to review large records that are imputed to ensure that it is still in
business, was not sold, and was imputed at a level similar to what should have been reported.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-78

Most states review larger failed imputations and either contact the employer for actual data,
make a hand imputation, or determine if the business has been sold or is now inactive. Many
states do not review successful imputations but rely on the edits to fail questionable data. Since a
typical imputation is based on the record’s history and most of the edits compare the record to its
history, successful imputations rarely fail employment and wage micro edits. In some cases, if
the record is large and was sold and was reported with a unit that was coded in the same
industry/area/ownership cell, the macro data may fail.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 5
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Questionable Large Imputation
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all conditions are true:
 OWN = 5
 STATUSc  2, 3, or 9


MEEIc  2



[(M1c > LARGE-IMP-EMP and M1-INDc = E, K, M, or N)
OR
(M2c > LARGE-IMP-EMP and M2-INDc = E, K, M, or N)
OR
(M3c > LARGE-IMP-EMP and M3-INDc = E, K, M, or N)]



[(TW-INDc  blank, R, C, L)] OR [(TWc < LARGE-IMP-WAGE)]

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name
LARGE-IMP-EMP
LARGE-IMP-WAGE

Large Imputation Employment
Large Imputation Wages

Length
6
6

EXPO
PK #
084
085

WIN
PK #
102
103

State
Default
100
10,000

BLS
Default
100
10,000

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-1

Level 6 Edit Descriptions – Warning Edits
Edits in this level identify fluctuations in the economic data (on both micro and macro records)
that are smaller than at Level 5, but still significant. Level 6 also includes most other W
(Warning) edits that flag questionable data. While the flagged data may sometimes be accurate,
they are sufficiently unusual that data users would look for an explanation. Records flagged by
these edits should be reviewed and corrected (where necessary) or explained with an appropriate
comment code.
101 — (Mailing/Other) Address Type (MOA TYPE) Code Check
General Description: The Address Type is used to characterize the type of address in the
Mailing/Other (M/O) address block: physical location address, mailing address of the reporting
unit, a central office, or type unknown. If the M/O address block is blank, the Address Type
should also be blank. If the M/O address block is present (indicated by the presence of an M/O
state abbreviation), then the Address Type cannot be blank and must contain a valid code.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusable Address Type Code
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 MOA STATE is not blank, and
 MOA TYPE is blank or MOA TYPE  1, 2, 3, or 9.
Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.
System Action:
In the Sate Systems, if all of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 MOA STATE is blank, and
 MOA TYPE is not blank.
Then, set MOA TYPE to blank.
In the BLS system, if the M/O address fields are blank but the MOA Address Type is not, the
system bypasses the edit.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-2

102 — Blank Physical Location City Check
General Description: The Blank Physical Location City edit checks for a blank City field in the
PLA block. The City field should not be blank unless the entire address block is blank. If the
Physical Location City is not blank, edit the other physical location address fields to ensure it is a
usable address block.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Blank Physical Location City; Other PLA Fields Present
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN > 1 and
 PLA CITY is blank and
 At least one other PLA field is not blank.
Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.
103 — Physical Location State Abbreviation Check
General Description: A standard two-letter postal state abbreviation should be used in this field.
The PLA State Abbreviation edit ensures that the PLA address, if present, contains a valid state
abbreviation. For military post offices, the field may contain “AE”, “AA,” or “AP,” while
Canadian addresses may use either “CN” or “ZZ.” Foreign addresses outside Canada may use
"ZZ."
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusable Physical Location State Abbreviation
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN > 1 and
 PLA STATE ABBREVIATION is blank and
 At least one other PLA field is not blank.
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:

September 2019





QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-3

STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
OWN > 1 and
PLA STATE ABBREVIATION  AL, AK, AZ, AR, CA, CO, CT, DE, DC, FL, GA, HI,
ID, IL, IN, IA, KS, KY, LA, ME, MD, MA, MI, MN, MS, MO, MT, NE, NV, NH, NJ,
NM, NY, NC, ND, OH, OK, OR, PA, PR, RI, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT, VT, VA, VI, WA,
WV, WI, WY, AS, GU, AE, AA, AP, CN, or ZZ.

Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.
104 — Physical Location ZIP Code Format Check and Physical Location ZIP Code
Extension Format Check
General Description: The PLA ZIP Code Format edit ensures that a proper ZIP Code is used in
the Physical Location address. The ZIP Code is a 5-digit alphanumeric field. For U.S.
addresses, this is the numeric code used by the Post Office for the specified address. For
Canadian addresses, this field should contain the first five digits of the six-digit alphanumeric
Canadian ZIP Code, while the Physical Location ZIP Code Extension field should contain the
sixth digit followed by three blanks. The field is not edited for foreign addresses (designated by
state abbreviation "ZZ").
This edit also ensures that the ZIP Code ZIP Extension field is properly used in the Physical
Location address. The ZIP Code Extension is a four-digit alphanumeric field. For U.S.
addresses that have a ZIP Code Extension, the field should be strictly numeric. For Canadian
addresses, the ZIP Code Extension begins with the last digit of the six-position alphanumeric
Canadian ZIP Code; this position is numeric and is followed by three blanks. The field is not
edited for foreign addresses (designated by state abbreviation "ZZ").
Edit code 104 is used for both the Physical Location ZIP Code Format Check and the Physical
Location ZIP Code Extension Format Check. The same edit message is also used for both parts
of the edit.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusable Physical Location ZIP Code Format
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, or
 OWN = 1 or
 CNTY = 996 or 998, or
 PLA STATE ABBREVIATION = AA, AE, AP, or ZZ, or
 PLA ZIP is blank and all other P/L address fields are blank.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-4

Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 (PLA STATE ABBREVIATION = AL, AK, AZ, AR, CA, CO, CT, DE, DC, FL, GA,
HI, ID, IL, IN, IA, KS, KY, LA, ME, MD, MA, MI, MN, MS, MO, MT, NE, NV, NH,
NJ, NM, NY, NC, ND, OH, OK, OR, PA, PR, RI, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT, VT, VA, VI,
WA, WV, WI, WY, AS, or GU), and
 (PLA ZIP nonnumeric , 00000 or 99999) or (PLA ZIP EXTENSION is nonnumeric but
not blank or 9999), and
 AMEc > ZIP-CODE-AME.
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 PLA STATE ABBREVIATION = CN, and
 (PLA ZIP is numeric or blank) or (PLA ZIP EXTENSION  a numeric followed by 3
blanks and), and
 AMEc > ZIP-CODE-AME.
Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.
System Action: If the ZIP Code Extension is all zeros, the system will blank fill.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name
ZIP-CODE-AME ZIP Code AME Cutoff

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
005

WIN
PK #
020

State
Default
250

BLS
Default
250

105 — Telephone Number Check
General Description: This edit checks for a usable telephone number for the UI account. The
telephone number is used to contact the employer regarding reporting problems or for sampling
purposes. The edit is not performed for multi subunits, since the employer should be contacted
using the phone number on the master record.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusable Telephone Format
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9, or
 OWN = 1 or
 MEEI = 3 or 5, or
 TELEPHONE NUMBER is blank.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-5

Flag if AMEc > PHONE-AME and any of the following conditions occur:
 TELEPHONE NUMBER = (any area code) + 555-1212, or
 TELEPHONE NUMBER = “000” in positions 4-6, or
 TELEPHONE NUMBER positions 1-3 or 7-10 are non-numeric but not blank.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
PHONE-AME

Parameter Name
Telephone AME Cutoff

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
005

WIN
PK #
021

State
Default
999,999

BLS
Default
999,999

Since address and telephone information is used by numerous data users, states are encouraged
to leave the default parameter at an amount no higher than 99. If the state has significant address
problems, then they should temporarily increase it to an amount no higher than 250.
State System Action: The state system will blank fill the field if
 The Telephone number field is all zeros or
 The last 7 digits of the field are zero or
 AMEc > PHONE-AME and Telephone = (any area code)+555-1212 or
 AMEc > PHONE-AME and Telephone = "000" in positions 4-6 or
 AMEc > PHONE-AME and Telephone is non numeric (but not blank) in positions 1-3 or
positions 7-10.
106 — UI Address City Check
General Description: This edit checks for a non-blank City field in the UI address block. The
City field should not be blank unless the entire address block is blank. If the UI Address City is
not blank, edit the other UI address fields to ensure it is a usable address block.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Blank UI City; Other UI Address Fields Present
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN > 1 and
 UI ADDRESS CITY is blank and
 At least one other UI ADDRESS field is not blank.
Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-6

107 — UI State Abbreviation Check
General Description: This edit ensures that a valid state abbreviation is in the UI Address, if a
UI Address is present. The standard two-letter Post Office state abbreviation is used in this field.
For military post offices, the field may contain “AE”, “AA,” or “AP,” while Canadian addresses
may use either “CN” or “ZZ.” Foreign addresses outside Canada should use "ZZ."
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusable UI State Abbreviation
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN > 1 and
 UI STATE ABBREVIATION is blank and
 At least one other UI ADDRESS field is not blank.
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN > 1 and
 UI ADDRESS STATE ABBREVIATION  AL, AK, AZ, AR, CA, CO, CT, DE, DC,
FL, GA, HI, ID, IL, IN, IA, KS, KY, LA, ME, MD, MA, MI, MN, MS, MO, MT, NE,
NV, NH, NJ, NM, NY, NC, ND, OH, OK, OR, PA, PR, RI, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT, VT,
VA, VI, WA, WV, WI, WY, AS, GU, AE, AA, AP, CN, or ZZ.
Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.
108 — UI Address ZIP Code Format Check and UI Address ZIP Code Extension Format
Check
General Description: This edit helps ensure the proper use of the ZIP Code in the UI address.
The ZIP Code is a five-digit alphanumeric field. United States (US) ZIP Codes are always
numeric. For Canadian addresses, this field is used for the first five positions of a Canadian ZIP
Code, while the UI ZIP Extension field should contain the final position of the Canadian ZIP
Code. The system edits Canadian ZIP codes for proper alphanumeric format when the UI State
Abbreviation field contains "CN" (for Canada). Other Foreign ZIP codes are not edited when the
UI State Abbreviation is "ZZ." Guam, American Samoa, APO, and FPO ZIP codes are five-digit
numeric.
This edit also ensures that the ZIP Code Extension field is properly used in the UI address. The
ZIP Code Extension is a four-digit alphanumeric field. For U.S. addresses that have a ZIP Code

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-7

Extension, the field should be strictly numeric. For Canadian addresses, the ZIP Code Extension
begins with the last digit of the six-position alphanumeric Canadian ZIP Code; this position is
numeric and is followed by three blanks. The field is not edited for foreign addresses
(designated by state abbreviation "ZZ").
Edit code 108 is used for both the UI ZIP Code Format Check and the UI ZIP Code Extension
Format Check.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusable UI Zip Code Format
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9, or
 OWN = 1 or
 CNTY = 996 or 998, or
 UI ADDRESS STATE ABBREVIATION = AA, AE, AP, or ZZ, or
 UI ADDRESS ZIP CODE is blank and all other UI address fields are blank.
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 UI ADDRESS STATE ABBREVIATION = AL, AK, AZ, AR, CA, CO, CT, DE, DC,
FL, GA, HI, ID, IL, IN, IA, KS, KY, LA, ME, MD, MA, MI, MN, MS, MO, MT, NE,
NV, NH, NJ, NM, NY, NC, ND, OH, OK, OR, PA, PR, RI, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT, VT,
VA, VI, WA, WV, WI, WY, AS, or GU, and
 (UI ADDRESS ZIP CODE is nonnumeric, 00000 or 99999) or (UI ZIP EXTENSION is
nonnumeric or 9999), and
 AMEc > ZIP-CODE-AME.
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 UI STATE ABBREVIATION = CN and
 (UI ADDRESS ZIP CODE) is numeric or blank, or (UI ZIP EXTENSION  a numeric
followed by 3 blanks), and
 AMEc > ZIP-CODE-AME.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
ZIP-CODE-AME

Parameter Name
ZIP Code AME Cutoff

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
005

WIN
PK #
020

State
Default
250

BLS
Default
250

Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-8

System Action: If the ZIP Code Extension is all zeros, the system will blank fill the field.
109 — Blank Mailing/Other City Check
General Description: This edit checks for a non-blank City field in the M/O address block. The
City field should not be blank unless the entire address block is blank. If the Mailing/Other City
is not blank, edit the other mailing/other address fields to ensure it is a usable address block.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Blank Mailing/Other City; Other M/O Address Fields Present
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN > 1 and
 MOA CITY is blank and
 At least one other MOA field (other than MOA ADDRESS TYPE) is not blank.
Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-9

110 — Mailing/Other State Abbreviation Check
General Description: This edit ensures that a valid state abbreviation is in the Mailing/Other
address block. The standard two-letter Post Office state abbreviation is used in this field. For
military post offices, the field may contain “AE”, “AA,” or “AP,” while Canadian addresses may
use either “CN” or “ZZ.” Foreign addresses outside Canada should use "ZZ."
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusable Mailing/Other State Abbreviation
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN > 1 and
 MOA STATE ABBREVIATION is blank and
 At least one other MOA field is not blank. (A non-blank MOA ADDRESS TYPE should
not be considered as part of the MAILING/OTHER address for this edit condition.)
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 OWN > 1 and
 MOA STATE ABBREVIATION  AL, AK, AZ, AR, CA, CO, CT, DE, DC, FL, GA,
HI, ID, IL, IN, IA, KS, KY, LA, ME, MD, MA, MI, MN, MS, MO, MT, NE, NV, NH,
NJ, NM, NY, NC, ND, OH, OK, OR, PA, PR, RI, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT, VT, VA, VI,
WA, WV, WI, WY, AS, GU, AE, AA, AP, CN, or ZZ.
Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.
111 — Mailing/Other Zip Code Format Check and Mailing/Other Zip Code Extension
Format Check
General Description: The Physical/Location ZIP Code Format edit ensures that a proper ZIP
Code is used in the Mailing/Other address block. The ZIP Code is a five-digit alphanumeric
field. For U.S. addresses, this is the numeric code used by the Post Office for the specified
address. For Canadian addresses, this field should contain the first five digits of the six-digit
alphanumeric Canadian ZIP Code, while the Mailing/Other ZIP Code Extension field should
contain the sixth digit followed by three blanks. The field is not edited for foreign addresses
(designated by state abbreviation "ZZ").
This edit also ensures that the ZIP Code Extension field is properly used in the Mailing/Other
address. The ZIP Code Extension is a four-digit alphanumeric field. For U.S. addresses that

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-10

have a ZIP Code Extension, the field should be strictly numeric. For Canadian addresses, the
ZIP Code Extension begins with the last digit of the six-position alphanumeric Canadian ZIP
Code; this position is numeric and is followed by three blanks. The field is not edited for foreign
addresses (designated by state abbreviation "ZZ").
Edit code 111 is used for both the Mailing/Other ZIP Code Format Check and the Mailing/Other
ZIP Code Extension Format Check.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unusable Mailing/Other ZIP Code Format
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9, or
 OWN = 1 or
 CNTY = 996 or 998, or
 MOA STATE ABBREVIATION = AA, AE, AP, or ZZ, or
 MOA ZIP blank and all other mailing/other address fields blank. (A non-blank MOA
ADDRESS TYPE should not be considered as part of the MOA address for this edit
condition.)
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 MOA STATE ABBREVIATION = AL, AK, AZ, AR, CA, CO, CT, DE, DC, FL, GA,
HI, ID, IL, IN, IA, KS, KY, LA, ME, MD, MA, MI, MN, MS, MO, MT, NE, NV, NH,
NJ, NM, NY, NC, ND, OH, OK, OR, PA, PR, RI, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT, VT, VA, VI,
WA, WV, WI, WY, AS, or GU, and
 (MOA ZIP nonnumeric, 00000, or 99999) or (MOA ZIP EXTENSION is nonnumeric or
9999), and
 AMEc > ZIP-CODE-AME.
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 MOA STATE ABBREVIATION = CN and
 (MOA ZIP numeric or blank) or (MOA ZIP EXTENSION  a numeric followed by 3
blanks), and
 AMEc > ZIP-CODE-AME.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
ZIP-CODE-AME

Parameter Name
ZIP Code AME Cutoff

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
005

WIN
PK #
020

State
Default
250

BLS
Default
250

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-11

Note: The system will not list the record for this flagged condition if there is at least one usable
address.
System Action: If the ZIP Code Extension is all zeros, the system will blank fill the field.
112 — Fax Number Check
General Description: The Fax Number edit checks for usable fax numbers for the account.
Location: Both state and BLS systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Questionable Fax Number Format
State System Actions and Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
 OWN = 1
 MEEI = 3 or 5
 FAX is all blank
Blank fill the FAX number if any of the following conditions occur: [Note that the AME
parameter was removed. Fix all of these regardless of employment]
 FAX is all zeros, all ones, all twos, all threes, all fours, all fives, all sixes, all sevens, all
eights, or all nines
 FAX = (any area code) + 555-1212
 FAX = “000” in positions 4-6
 FAX is not numeric in any of positions 4-10
Flag if AMEc > FAX-AME and both of the following conditions occur:
 FAX = “000” in positions 1-3 or nonnumeric (including blank) in any position of 1-3 and
FAX positions 4-10 are all numeric but not all zero
BLS Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
 OWN = 1
 MEEI = 3 or 5
 FAX is all blank
Flag if AMEc > FAX-AME and any of the following conditions occur:
 FAX is all zeros, all ones, all twos, all threes, all fours, all fives, all sixes, all sevens, all
eights, or all nines
 FAX = (any area code) + 555-1212

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019





Page F-12

FAX = “000” in positions 4-6
FAX is not numeric in any of positions 4-10
FAX = “000” in positions 1-3 or nonnumeric (including blank) in any position of 1-3 and
FAX positions 4-10 are all numeric but not all zeroes

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
FAX-AME

Parameter Name
FAX AME

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
005

WIN
PK #
021

State
Default
99

BLS
Default
99

114 — Physical Address Format Check
General Description: Physical Location addresses, if provided, are required to use the state
abbreviation of the reference state, to have a corresponding Zip Code, and to have at least one
street address line. This edit also flags Post Office boxes in the PL address, since they do not
identify a physical location. The edit flags records with a blank PL address if employment is
high.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: P.O. Box, Blank Street, or Out-of-State in PLA Block
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions occur:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9, or
 OWN = 1, or
 MEEI = 2, or
 AMEc  PHYS-ADDR-AME.
Flag if both conditions occur:
 CNTY  996 or 998, and
 PLA STATE ABBREVIATION  STATE ABBREVIATION of the reference/reporting
state (not in-state).
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 PLA STREET ADDRESS - LINE 1 blank and
 PLA STREET ADDRESS - LINE 2 blank and
 PLA CITY not blank
Flag if either condition occurs:
 PLA STREET ADDRESS - LINE 1 includes P.O. Box or RR, or
 PLA STREET ADDRESS - LINE 2 includes P.O. Box or RR.
(I.e., checks for variations of P.O. Box and rural route addresses.)

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-13

Flag if both conditions occur:
 CNTY  996 or 998, and
 PLA ZIP is not in the range of valid Zip codes for the reference state.
Flag if both conditions occur:
 CNTY  996 or 998, and
 PLA ZIP is zero-filled, nine-filled, or contains any nonnumeric values.
Flag if both conditions occur:
 At least one other PL address field is not blank, and
 PLA ZIP is blank.
Flag if PLA CITY is equal to “Unknown” or “Statewide”.
Flag if both conditions occur:
 AMEc > LARGE-PHYS-ADDR-AME, and
 All PL address fields are blank.
Note: For records with AMEc  LARGE-PHYS-ADDR-AME, the system will not list the record for
this edit flag if there is at least one usable address.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
PHYS-ADDR-AME

Parameter Name
Physical Location
Address AME

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
006

WIN
PK #
022

State
Default
5

BLS
Default
5

116 — Missing Federal Employer Identification Number Check
General Description: The Missing Federal Employer Identification Number edit checks the EIN
for questionable values and to determine if it has been missing for several quarters. The EIN is
assigned to each employer by the IRS. Subunits should have the same EIN as their master
record. The edit compares the month and year of the Setup Date against the earliest month of the
reference quarter to see if the reporting unit has been in existence for more than a number of
months based on a parm. If so, and if employment is large, then the reporting unit should have a
specific (non-zero) EIN. If the Setup Date is blank, the edit uses the Liability Date.
Missing EINs are useless in any kind of research, sampling, and other critical uses of the field.
Efforts should be made to attempt to contact the employer and obtain missing EINs for large
employers.
Example:
Liability Date YYYYMM:
Setup Date YYYYMM:

201701 (January 2017)
201708 (August 2017)

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

First Month of Current Quarter:

Page F-14

201807 (July 2018)

In this example, the current quarter is the 2018 third quarter. If the parm is set at 6 months,
201708 < 201807 – "parm" months (the August 2017 Setup Date is earlier than the July 2018
beginning of the current quarter minus 6 months). Therefore, the reporting unit would flag if its
EIN is still zero-filled. In other words, more than 6 months elapsed between the Setup Date
(August 2017) and the first month of the current quarter (July 2018), so the edit expects to find a
specific, valid EIN.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: EIN Missing for More Than Parm Months
Edit Conditions:
Format = YYYYMMDD (where YYYY = year, MM = month, and DD = day).
Bypass if any of the following conditions are met:
 MEEI = 3 or 5, or
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9, or
 OWN = 1, 2, or 3, or
 NAICS 814110, or
 COVERAGE = 8 or 9.
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 EIN = all zeros and
 AMEc > EIN-AME and
 YYYYMM of the SETUP < YYYYMM of the first month of the current quarter – EINMONTH months. (If the SETUP is blank, then use the LIAB.)
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
EIN-AME
EIN-MONTH

Parameter Name
EIN AME Parm
EIN Months Missing

Length
6
2

EXPO
PK #
062
052

WIN
PK #
023
024

State
Default
50
6

BLS
Default
50
6

Note: This edit is required and must be run at least once each quarter.
System Action: The State systems have options to do the following:
 Suppress this edit from appearing on the online edit screens with the rest of the edits
 Suppress this edit from appearing on the same listings as the rest of the edits
 Allow this edit to be listed separately from the rest of the edit output
 Modify edit output and scoring formulae input to reflect the new priorities.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-15

118 — Tax Rate Consistency Check
General Description: This check applies to only non-reimbursing, non-Federal ownership units –
units with Type of Coverage Code 0 and Ownership Code greater than 1. Three states have
employee contributions and are handled using an adjustment. Each reporting unit’s
Contributions must equal its Taxable Wages multiplied by its Tax Rate. California does not
collect Taxable Wage information. Taxable Wages are derived by dividing Contributions Due
by the Tax Rate after the annual reconciliation.
Location: State systems only
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Computed Tax Rate > TOL % from Reported, and Computed Tax TOL from
Reported
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions occur:
 OWN = 1
 STATUS = 2 or 9
 State-FIPS = 06, and CALIF-RATE-EDIT-BYPASS = 1
Flag if all of the following conditions occur:
 COVERAGE = 0 and
 |CTB - (TAXW  TAX RATE)| > MAX-CONTRIB-DEV and
 |TAX RATE - (CTB  TAXW)| > MAX-TAX-RATE-DEV.
Flag if all of the following conditions are met:
 COVERAGE = 2 or 3, and
 |CTB - (TAXW  TAX RATE) - ADJUSTMENT| > MAX-CONTRIB-DEV and
 |TAX RATE - (CTB  TAXW)| - ADJUSTMENT) > MAX-TAX-RATE-DEV.
If state 42, ADJUSTMENT = TW  EMPLOYEE TAX RATE.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-16

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Length
6

EXPO
PK #
027

WIN
PK #
025

Maximum
Contributions Due
Deviation
EMPLOYEE- Employee Tax
TAX-RATE
Rate

6

028

026

6

051

003

CALIFRATE-EDITBYPASS

1

N/A

027

Parameter
MAX-TAXRATE-DEV

Parameter Name
Maximum Tax
Rate Deviation

MAXCONTRIBDEV

Bypass Switch For
California Rate

State Default
0.33% (expressed
as 330 in EXPO
and 0.33 in WIN)
2.50 (expressed as
000250 in EXPO
and 2.5 in WIN)
3% (expressed as
3000 in EXPO and
3.00 in WIN)
0

BLS
Default
N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

119 — Missing Taxable Wage Check
General Description: This edit checks for high Total Wages when no Taxable Wages are
reported. The edit is only performed in first quarter. All Contributory accounts are required to
meet their Taxable Wage obligations beginning with each first quarter even if their tax rate may
be zero and they pay no Contributions.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: First Quarter Taxable Wages Missing for Experienced-Rated Account
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if OWN = 1.
Bypass if QTR  1.
Bypass if state-FIPS = 06 and CALIF-NO-TAXW-BYPASS = 1.
Flag if
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 TW > MAX-TOTW-NO-TAXW,
 COVERAGE = 0 or 2, and
 TAXW = 0.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-17

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
MAX-TOTW-NOTAXW
CALIF-NO-TAXWBYPASS

Parameter Name
Maximum Total Wages
With No Taxable Wages
Bypass Switch For
California Taxable Wages

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
020

1

N/A

WIN
State
PK # Default
028 999,999
029

0

BLS
Default
999,999
0

120 — Non-Economic Code Change Check
General Description: Changes to the classification codes (Ownership, NAICS, County, and – for
some states – Township) are normally handled as either economic or noneconomic.
Noneconomic code changes, which are more frequent, must be held until first quarter and must
carry an ARS Response Code and Refile Year that will place the record onto the CCS.
Economic code changes should be identified using the Economic Code Change Indicator (ECCI)
or a comment code (code 82); these changes may be made in any quarter. Exceptions to these
rules are made for master records as well as records with code changes only from an "unknown"
industry or geographic code. This edit flags code changes on records with significant
employment that are not properly coded as noneconomic or economic. The edit does not flag
records with changes only from an "unknown" code; however, it flags code changes from a
specific industry or geographic code to an "unknown" code in any quarter, since such changes
are inappropriate. If the existing, specific code is wrong, identify the correct code and handle the
change as a noneconomic code change.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Possible Non-Economic Code Change
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if MEEIc = 2.
Bypass if STATUSc or STATUSp  1. (Edit only if the record is active in both the current
and prior quarter.)
Bypass if both M3p and M1c < NECC-PARM
Bypass if both M3p and M1c < ECCI-LRG-EMP-PARM and COMMENT CODEc = 82.
Bypass the township portions of the edit if not New Jersey or a New England states (if
STATE  09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50).

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-18

The edit consists of two parts. Perform Part 1 if the processing quarter = 2, 3, or 4. (Edit
only when the current quarter is a second, third, or fourth quarter.) Perform Part 2 if the
processing quarter = 1 (Edit only when the current quarter is a first quarter). Part 2
includes its own bypass conditions – conditions that only apply if the processing quarter = 1.
Both the first and second parts of the edit are performed in different ways, depending on
employment. Where employment is significant but not large (greater than 25 but less than a
100), the edit does not flag a code change when the Employment Code Change Indicator
carries the appropriate value.
Part 1
Flag if
 Processing quarter = (2, 3, or 4), and
 Both M3p and M1c < ECCI-LRG-EMP-PARM, and
 At least one of the following code changes occurs in the current quarter compared with
the prior quarter, and the change is not explained by the ECCI:
OWNp  OWNc and (ECCI  04, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, 14, or 15),
OR
NAICSp  NAICSc and NAICSp  999999 and (ECCI  02, 03, 06, 07, 10, 11,
14, or 15),
OR
CNTYp  CNTYc and CNTYp  900-999 and (ECCI  08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, or 15),
OR
TOWNp  TOWNc and (TOWNp  900, 995, 996, 998, or 999) and (STATE =
09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50) and (ECCI  01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 11, 13, or 15).
(In other words, current ownership is not equal to prior ownership or current NAICS is
not equal to prior NAICS or current county is not equal to prior county or (for certain
states) current township is not equal to prior township, and in each case the prior quarter
is not the fourth quarter. Disregard any NAICS, ownership, county, and township
changes from the “unknown” codes. Disregard any code changes identified by an
appropriate ECCI value.)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-19

Flag if
 Processing quarter = (2, 3, or 4), and
 Either M3p or M1c > ECCI-LRG-EMP-PARM, and
 At least one of the following code changes occurs in the current quarter compared with
the prior quarter, regardless of the ECCI:
OWNp  OWNc, or
NAICSp  NAICSc and NAICSp  999999, or
CNTYp  CNTYc and CNTYp  900-999, or
TOWNp  TOWNc and (TOWNp  900, 995, 996, 998, or 999) and (STATE = 09,
23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50).
(In other words, current ownership is not equal to prior ownership or current NAICS is
not equal to prior NAICS or current county is not equal to prior county or (for certain
states) current township is not equal to prior township, and in each case the prior quarter
is not the fourth quarter. Disregard any NAICS, ownership, county, and township
changes from the “unknown” codes.)
Flag if either of the following occur
 NAICSc = 999999 and NAICSp < 999999, or
 COUNTYc = 999 and COUNTYp < 900.
Part 2
Bypass if ARS REFILE YEAR = current Refiling Year and RESPONSE CODE = 46 or 50
(in the BLS System: RESPONSE CODE = 30, 33, 46 or 50).
Flag if
 Processing quarter = 1, and
 Both M3p and M1c < ECCI-LRG-EMP-PARM, and
 At least one of the following code changes occurs in the current quarter, compared with
the prior quarter, and the change is not explained by the ECCI:
OWNp  OWNc and (ECCI  04, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, 14, or 15),
OR
NAICSp  NAICSc and NAICSp  999999 and (ECCI  02, 03, 06, 07, 10, 11, 14, or
15),
OR
CNTYp  CNTYc and CNTYp  900-999 and (ECCI  08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or
15),
OR

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-20

TOWNp  TOWNc and (TOWNp  900, 995, 996, 998, or 999) and (STATE = 09,
23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50) and (ECCI  01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 11, 13, or 15).
(In other words, current ownership is not equal to prior ownership or current NAICS is
not equal to prior NAICS or current county is not equal to prior county or (for certain
states) current township is not equal to prior township, and in each case the current
quarter is the first quarter. Disregard any NAICS, ownership, county, and township
changes from the “unknown” codes. Disregard any code changes identified by an
appropriate ECCI value.)
Flag if
 Processing quarter = 1, and
 Either M3p or M1c > ECCI-LRG-EMP-PARM, and
 At least one of the following code changes occurs in the current quarter, compared with
the prior quarter, regardless of the ECCI:
OWNp  OWNc, or
NAICSp  NAICSc and NAICSp  999999, or
CNTYp  CNTYc and CNTYp  900-999, or
TOWNp  TOWNc and (TOWNp  900, 995, 996, 998, or 999) and (STATE = 09,
23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50).
(In other words, current ownership is not equal to prior ownership or current NAICS is
not equal to prior NAICS or current county is not equal to prior county or (for certain
states) current township is not equal to prior township, and in each case the current
quarter is the first quarter. Disregard any NAICS, ownership, county, and township
changes from the “unknown” codes.)
Flag if either of the following occur
 NAICSc = 999999 and NAICSp < 999999, or
 COUNTYc = 999 and COUNTYp < 900.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
NECCPARM

ECCILRG-EMPPARM

Parameter Name
Length
Noneconomic Code Change
2
Monthly Employment Parm
Economic Code Change Large
6
Employment Parm

EXPO
PK #
009

WIN
PK #
030

State
Default
25

BLS
Default
25

N/A

098

50

100

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-21

121 — Reversed Code Change Check
General Description: This edit captures very mobile units that keep reversing code changes.
This edit is a supplement to edit 120.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Code Change Back to a Recent Code
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if MEEI = 2.
Bypass if STATUSc or STATUSp  1. (Edit only if active in both the current and prior
quarter.)
Bypass the township portions of the edit if not New Jersey or a New England states (CT, ME,
MA, NH, RI, and VT).
Flag if AMEc > REVS-CCS and any of the following occur:
 NAICSc  NAICSp and NAICSc = NAICS in any of the three previous quarters, or
 TOWNc  TOWNp and TOWNc = TOWN in any of the three previous quarters, or
 CNTYc  CNTYp and CNTYc = CNTY in any of the three previous quarters, or
 OWNc  OWNp and OWNc = OWN in any of the three previous quarters.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
REVS-CCS

Parameter Name
Rev CCS AME

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
009

WIN PK
#
094

State
Default
100

BLS
Default
100

123 — CCS Edit Checks
General Description: This edit checks for a missing noneconomic code change. When the
Response Code and ARS Refile Year indicate that a noneconomic code change is present on the
record, the edit compares the Old Fields to the first quarter classification codes to verify the code
change. (Changes only from unknown industry or county codes are not considered
noneconomic, and are not sufficient to pass the edit.)
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: B
Edit Message: Expected Code Change Not Made

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-22

Edit Conditions:
Bypass if MEEI of the most recent 1st quarter = 2 or MEEI of the most recent 4th quarter = 2.
(For example, for 2018/1 processing, bypass if MEEI =2 in either 2018/1 or in 2017/4.)
Bypass if STATUSc or STATUSp  1. (Edit only if active in both the current and prior
quarter.)
Flag if all of the following occur:
 QTR = 1 and
 ARS RESPONSE CODE = (50 or 46), and [In the BLS system, ARS RESPONSE CODE
= 30, 33, 46 or 50] and
 ARS REFILE YEAR = processing year and
 OLD NAICS = (NAICSc or blank or 999999) and
 OLD CNTY = (CNTYc or blank or 900-999) and
 OLD TOWN = (TOWNc or blank or 900-999) and
 OLD OWN = (OWNc or blank) and
The BLS system only performs this edit when the processing quarter is first quarter.
124 — Active Account Check
General Description: The Active Account edit checks to determine if a QCR or MWR has
reported employment and wage data for the quarter, when the unit was coded out-of-business or
inactive. This edit is used to ensure that there are no records with reported or imputed
employment or wages, with an End Of Liability date or Status Code that indicates that it is outof-business or inactive. The records that should be most closely examined are those with sizable
employment that are coded as inactive or out-of-business to ensure that the record should truly
be considered inactive. Data for inactive records are not used for any application or aggregation.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Inactive Record with Reported Employment/Wage Data
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if EOL is blank.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-23

Flag if the economic data exceeds either of these thresholds:
 Any monthly EMPLOYMENT for the current quarter (Mc) > ACTIV-AME or
 TWc > ACTIV-WAGE
and
if either the date fields or the Status Code show that the unit is closed:
 EOL < reference period where the EOL date is > non blank REACT or
 Where STATUS = 2.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name
ACTIV-AME
ACTIV-WAGE

Active Account AME
Active Account Total
Wages

Length

EXPO
PK #
009
019

2
6

WIN
PK #
032
033

State
Default
99
500,000

BLS
Default
99
500,000

125 — Liability Check
General Description: The Liability edit checks to determine if a QCR or MWR was received
with reported employment and wage data prior to the unit's Liability Date. This edit is used to
ensure that there are no new records on the file that have a liability date that is after the reference
quarter.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Data Reported Prior to Liability Date
Edit Conditions:
The system determines the earlier of Setup Date and Liability Date and uses the earlier date
in the edit. If only one of the dates is available, the system will use it.
Bypass if neither SETUP nor LIAB is present.
Flag if all of the following occur:
 STATUSc = 1 and
 AME > LIAB-AME or TW > LIAB-WAGE and
 (SETUP or LIAB > the last day of the QTR) or (EOL DATE < first day of the QTR and
REACT > the last day of the QTR).

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name
LIAB-AME
LIAB-WAGE

Length

Liability Check Employment
Liability Check Wages

2
6

EXPO
PK #
009
055

Page F-24

WIN
PK #
034
035

State
Default
99
500,000

BLS
Default
99
500,000

126 — Monthly Employment Change Check
General Description: This is the same edit as 091, but with a smaller threshold for the difference
between current and prior employment. If the difference between the current and prior average
monthly employment is greater than a parameter times a multiplier, the system will code as edit
091. If not, the system will code as edit 126.
Note: This edit does not appear in the WIN-202 System. The WIN-202 System uses edit codes
136, 137, and 138 instead.
See edit 091 for a full description.
Location: Both BLS & EXPO
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
Edit Conditions: See Edit 091 for details and parameter values.
127 — Wage Change Check
General Description: This is the same as edit 092, but with a smaller threshold for the difference
between current and previous Average Quarterly Wage. If the difference is greater than a
parameter times a multiplier, then the system will code as edit 092. If not, the system will code
as edit 127.
See edit 092 for a full description.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: AQW Change > Parm and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW Range
Edit Conditions: See Edit 092 for details and parameter values.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-25

128 — Identical Monthly Employment Check
General Description: The Identical Monthly Employment edit looks for situations in which all
three months show the same level of employment within the quarter, while current and prior
quarter employment both exceed a parameter and none of the months is imputed. This helps
ensure valid reporting of employment for each month. Identical monthly reporting frequently
occurs when the employer reports
 The end of the quarter count in all three months each quarter
 A current employee count at the time the report is completed
 The last month’s data in all three months
The employer should be contacted and advised on proper reporting procedures.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Identical Monthly Employment > Parm
Edit Conditions:
Flag if all of the following occur:
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 MEEI = 1, 2, 4 or 6, and
 AMEc > MAX-IDENT-EMPL and
 AMEp > MAX-IDENT-EMPL and
 M1c = M2c = M3c and
 M1p = M2p = M3p and
 M1c-IND nor M2c-IND nor M3c-IND = E, H, or K and
 M1p-IND nor M2p-IND nor M3p-IND = E, H, or K
Note: This edit is required and must be run at least once each quarter.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
MAX-IDENT-EMPL

Parameter Name
Maximum Identical
Employment AME

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
021

WIN
PK #
036

State
Default
1,000

System Action: The State systems have options to do the following:
 Suppress this edit from appearing on the online edit screens with the rest of the edits
 Suppress this edit from appearing on the same listings as the rest of the edits
 Allow this edit to be listed separately from the rest of the edit output

BLS
Default
1,000

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-26

129 — Taxable/Total Wage Change Check
General Description: The Taxable/Total Wage Change edit checks the ratio of taxable wages to
total wages. A record is questionable if the ratio is outside the acceptable range based on the
taxable wage-to-total wage ratio from current quarter a year ago plus or minus the tolerance.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Taxable/Total Wage Ratio > Prior Year Ratio by Parm %
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if STATUS = 2, 3, or 9.
Bypass if TWc or TWcy = 0.
Flag if
 AMEc > TAXW-TOTW-CHG-AME and
 |(TAXWc ÷ TWc) - (TAXWcy ÷ TWcy)| > TAXW-TOTW-CHG-PCT.
Editing Parameters and Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name
TAXW-TOTWCHG-PCT
TAXW-TOTWCHG-AME

Taxable Wages To Total
Wages Percent Tolerance
Taxable Wages To Total
Wages AME

Length
2

EXPO
PK #
043

WIN
PK #
037

State
Default
99

BLS
Default
99

6

044

038

500

500

130 — Employment Without Wages Check
General Description: This edit is the same as edit 093 but with a smaller threshold.
See edit 093 for a full description.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Average Employment > Parm, but Total Wages = 0
Edit Conditions: See Edit 093 for details and parameter values.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-27

131 — Wages Without Employment
General Description: This edit is the same as edit 094 but with a smaller threshold.
See edit 094 for a full description.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages > Parm
Edit Conditions: See Edit 094 for details and parameter values.
132 — Wages/Employment Sum Check
General Description: This edit is the same as 095 but with a smaller threshold.
See edit 095 for a full description.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Total Wages = Sum of Empl +/- Parm
Edit Conditions: See Edit 095 for details and parameter values.
133 — Unclassified Industry Check
General Description: The unclassified industry check looks for situations in which the average
monthly employment of the current period is greater than a parm, and NAICS is 999999 for two
quarters. This edit encourages states to assign valid, specific NAICS to records with high
employment. Unclassified records cannot be properly aggregated to their correct industry and
have more limited use in data analysis and publications.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Unclassified Industry, Empl > Parm

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-28

Edit Conditions:
Flag if
 STATUS  2, 3, or 9, and
 NAICSc = 999999 and
 NAICSp = 999999 and
 AMEc > UNCLASS-MAX-AME
Editing Parameters and Tolerances:
Parameter
UNCLASSMAX-AME

Parameter Name
Unclassified Industry
AME

EXPO
PK #
018

Length
2

WIN
PK #
039

State
Default
50

BLS
Default
50

134 — Number of Establishments Change Check
General Description: The Number of Establishments Change edit looks for large fluctuations in
the number of reporting units in the macro cell in the current quarter, as compared to the
previous quarter. During first quarter processing, this edit is not done until after the data are
temporarily adjusted based on the net change of the Summary of Differences data for the cell (if
any); this is part of the process called Code Change Integration.
A significant change in the number of establishments could represent growth in the industry and
county, may result from a large employer breakout into multi-establishment reporting, or may
result from an unexpected mid-year reporting problem or unusual predecessor/successor
reporting situation.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Macro
Edit Type: Summed Level/Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Number of Establishments Out Of Range
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions are true:
 AMEc < 25 or
 AMEp < 25 or
 NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSp = 0 or
 NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSc = 0 or
Flag if either or both pairs of conditions are true:
(1)
 0 < NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSp  32 and
 |NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSc - NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSp| > 8

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-29

OR
(2)
 NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSp > 32 and
 |NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSc - NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSp| >
NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSp  0.25
135 — New and Discontinued Macro Record Checks
General Description: The New and Discontinued Macro Record edit checks for whole macro
cells that never existed before or cease to exist. Macro cells with small employment are not
flagged. (Note: New and discontinued micro conditions can be found in edits 096, 097, 139,
and 140.)
Micro level predecessor/successor situations should not normally explain new and discontinued
problems at the macro level. In most cases, the predecessor and successor should be reported in
the same macro cells unless the change is included on the Code Change Supplement.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Macro
Edit Type: Summed Level/Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: New or Discontinued Macro Record
Edit Conditions:
Flag if the following conditions are true:
 AMEp > MACRO-DISCONTINUED-AME
 NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSc = 0
OR
Flag if the following conditions are true:
 AMEc > MACRO-NEW-AME
 NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTSp = 0
Editing Parameters and Tolerances:
Parameter
MACRO-DISCONTINUEDAME
MACRO-NEW-AME

Parameter Name
New and Discontinued
Macro Record
Macro New Record
AME

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
054

WIN
PK #
040

State
Default
100

BLS
Default
100

6

054

041

100

100

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-30

136 — Monthly Employment Change Check - Month 1 (WIN-202)
General Description: This is the same edit as 091, but with a smaller threshold for the difference
between current and prior employment. If the difference between the current and prior average
monthly employment is greater than the parameter times a multiplier, the system will code as
edit 089. If not, the system will code as edit 136.
Note: This edit does not appear in either EXPO or the BLS System. These systems use edit 126
instead.
See edit 091 for a full description.
Location: WIN-202 Only
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Month 1 Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
Edit Conditions: See Edit 091 for details and parameter values.
137 — Monthly Employment Change Check - Month 2 (WIN-202)
General Description: This is the same edit as 091, but with a smaller threshold for the difference
between current and prior employment. If the difference between the current and prior average
monthly employment is greater than the parameter times a multiplier, the system will code as
edit 090. If not, the system will code as edit 137.
Note: This edit does not appear in either EXPO or the BLS System. These systems use edit 126
instead.
See edit 091 for a full description.
Location: WIN-202 Only
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Month 2 Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
Edit Conditions: See Edit 091 for details and parameter values.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-31

138 — Monthly Employment Change Check - Month 3 (WIN-202)
General Description: This is the same edit as 091, but with a smaller threshold for the difference
between current and prior employment. If the difference between the current and prior average
monthly employment is greater than the parameter times a multiplier, the system will code as
edit 091. If not, the system will code as edit 138.
Note: This edit does not appear in either EXPO or the BLS System. These systems use edit 126
instead.
See edit 091 for a full description.
Location: WIN-202 Only
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro & Macro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Month 3 Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
Edit Conditions: See Edit 091 for details and parameter values.
139 — New Record Check
General Description: This is a small employment version of edit 096 described earlier in this
appendix. It uses a smaller (but still significant) employment cutoff.
See edit 096 for a full description.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: New Record?
Conditions: See Edit 096 for details and parameter values.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-32

140 — Discontinued Record Check
General Description: This is a small employment version of edit 097. The Discontinued Record
edit flags accounts that have just gone inactive, show no successor account, and had a sizable
employment when they terminated. This is the counterpart of edit 139, but is not as
sophisticated. This is one of the few edits that applies only to currently inactive employers.
See edit 097 for a full description.
Location: Both state & BLS systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Discontinued Record?
Edit Conditions: See Edit 097 for details and parameter values.
146 — Inconsistent Old Code Check
General Description: This edit checks the non-quarterly Old fields to verify that they match the
fourth quarter classification codes. This edit is only performed when the Response Code and
ARS Refile Year qualify the record to be included on the CCS, and only when the fourth quarter
is active.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 6
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Old Codes Are Inconsistent with 4th Quarter Codes
Edit Conditions:
IN THE BLS SYSTEM:
Bypass if any of the following occur:
 QTR = 1 and STATUS = 3 or
 MEEI of the most recent first quarter = 2 or if the MEEI of the most recent fourth quarter
= 2 or
 The fourth quarter prior year STATUS  1 or
 ARS REFILE YEAR  FISCAL-YEAR or
 RESPONSE CODE  30, 33, 46 or 50, or
 OLD OWN, OLD NAICS, and OLD CNTY are all blank, or
 Edit Flags for 074, 075, 076, or 078 have been assigned, or
 AMEc < OLD-CODE-CUTOFF.
Flag if any of the following occur:
 Non-blank OLD OWN  OWN of the active 4th quarter of the prior year or
 Non-blank OLD NAICS  NAICS of the active 4th quarter of the prior year or

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019




Page F-33

Non-blank OLD CNTY  CNTY of the active 4th quarter of the prior year or
If STATE = 09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50, non-blank OLD TOWN  TOWN of the active
4th quarter of the prior year.

IN STATE SYSTEMS:
No flag or edit message is used.
System Action:
In state systems, if any Old field is different from the valid code of the active fourth quarter of
the prior year, then the system replaces it with the valid code of the active fourth quarter of the
prior year. (Note: if fourth quarter of the prior year was not active, then Old fields are not
replaced.) These are the Old fields that should be replaced:
 OLD CNTY
 OLD TOWN
 OLD OWN
 OLD NAICS
If the CCS is locked, the system will not run this edit.
Edit Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
FISCAL-YEAR

OLD-CODECUTOFF

Parameter
Name
Fiscal
Year

Length

EXPO
PK #

4

—

Old Code
Cutoff

6

N/A

WIN
PK #

State Default

BLS Default

—

Processing or
fiscal year for
current refiling

N/A

N/A

Current processing
year, or fiscal year
for the refiling just
completed
50

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-34

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-1

Level 7 Edit Descriptions – Predecessor/Successor Edits
Predecessor/Successor edits are designed to identify potential relationship problems between
predecessor and successor units. In these cases, either the predecessor of a new or merged unit is
identified and/or the successor of a partially or completely discontinued unit is identified.
Level 7 edits identify two general types of errors, code discrepancies and suspect economic data.
First, a comparison of the predecessor’s and successor's data fields may show unexpected
differences in one of the following codes:





Ownership
County
Township (for certain states)
NAICS

Usually, the codes of the predecessor and successor are the same unless the successor had an
immediate economic code change at the time of the ownership transfer. If there was a noneconomic code change (e.g., the predecessor was incorrectly coded and the successor is assigned
the correct code), the change should be held until first quarter unless the employment level is less
than 25. The parameters used in these edits should exclude these smaller units. If the code
change should be held, follow instructions in Chapter 5 of this manual.
The second type of error is an overlap or gap in reporting economic data. When both the
predecessor and successor – or neither the predecessor nor the successor – reported during the
reference period, there is either an overlap or a gap in reporting.
When the predecessor and successor both have employment and wages, one of the following has
generally occurred:
 One of the units was imputed and the imputed record should have been inactivated, or
 Both the predecessor and successor reported, and only one should have. To correct this,
 The predecessor should have had the employment and wages changed to zero, or
 the predecessor should be inactivated for the reference period, or
 the successor should have its employment and wages changed to zero and the record
coded as pending until the appropriate quarter when it would be activated.
 The ownership transfer occurred in the middle of the reference period and the information
should be either
 merged under one unit, or
 properly explained using numeric or narrative comments.
 A partial transfer of some of the assets of the business was sold to another business resulting
in both reporting part of the employment and wages. When this occurs,
 the sum of each month of employment and the sum of the wages should be comparable to
the amount of employment and wages the business had prior to the transfer.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-2

If neither the predecessor nor the successor reported during the reference period, it should be
determined
 If the business’ employees continued to work during this time period, and if so,
 Who paid their wages.
The appropriate record’s data should be either reported or imputed based on the data of the
predecessor’s last report.
Because the procedures for the predecessor/successor edits are very similar, the edit conditions
for all the edits are combined. The record would receive the appropriate edit message for each
edit flagged.
156 — Predecessor/Successor County Code Change Conflict Edit
General Description: The Predecessor/Successor County Code Change Conflict edit checks to
see that predecessors and successors have the same county codes. Like ownership codes,
township codes, and NAICS codes, the County Code is generally expected to remain the same.
It is generally assumed that a one-to-one predecessor-to-successor transfer should not require a
change in county code. Noneconomic code changes are allowed in first quarter only, so County
Code differences will not be flagged in first quarter if the record is on the ARS and has a
response code indicating a code change. Also, County Code changes will not be flagged if the
Economic Code Change Indicator shows that there has been an economic code change.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 7
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Predecessor/Successor County Code Change Conflict
Edit Conditions: See Predecessor/Successor edit conditions in Predecessor/Successor later in
this chapter.
157 — Predecessor/Successor Ownership Code Change Conflict Edit
General Description: The Predecessor/Successor Ownership Code Change Conflict edit checks
to see that predecessors and successors have the same ownership codes. Like county codes,
township codes, and NAICS codes, the Ownership Code is generally expected to remain the
same. This condition is the code change least likely to occur, since government-controlled
agencies generally remain under government control through a transition, and privately owned
businesses usually stay privately owned. A possible exception occurs when a government
transfers its reporting responsibilities to a professional employee leasing company. In these
cases, even if the employees continue to perform their activities for the government installation,
the employees are paid by the leasing company and are coded with a private sector ownership
code. Noneconomic code changes are allowed in first quarter only, so Ownership Code
differences will not be flagged in first quarter if the record is on the ARS and has a response
code indicating a code change. Also, Ownership Code changes will not be flagged if the
Economic Code Change Indicator shows that there has been an economic code change.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 7
Priority: B

Page F-3

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Predecessor/Successor Ownership Change Conflict
Edit Conditions: See Predecessor/Successor edit conditions in Predecessor/Successor later in
this chapter.
159 — Predecessor/Successor Township Code Change Conflict Edit
General Description: The Predecessor/Successor Township Code Change Conflict edit checks to
see that predecessors and successors have the same township codes. Like county codes,
ownership codes, and NAICS codes, the Township Code (required for New England states and
New Jersey) is generally expected to remain the same. This edit is only performed for New
England states (Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode Island, and
Vermont) and New Jersey. Noneconomic code changes are allowed in first quarter only, so
Township Code differences will not be flagged in first quarter if the record is on the ARS and
has a response code indicating a code change. Also, Township Code changes will not be flagged
if the Economic Code Change Indicator shows that there has been an economic code change.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 7
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Predecessor/Successor Township Code Change Conflict
Edit Conditions: See Predecessor/Successor edit conditions in Predecessor/Successor later in
this chapter.
160 — Predecessor/Successor Overlap Edit
General Description: The Predecessor/Successor Employment Overlap edit checks to see if both
the predecessor and the successor have reported or estimated employment for the same month of
the reference period. The edit examines three months of employment in the current and month 3
of the prior quarter to find overlapping data (namely, non-zero employment for the same month
in both the predecessor and successor). Whenever there is more than one predecessor and/or
more than one successor, the sum of the employment across all predecessors and successors
should be used.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 7
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Both Predecessor and Successor Reported

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-4

Edit Conditions: See Predecessor/Successor edit conditions in Predecessor/Successor later in
this chapter.
161 — Predecessor/Successor Employment Gap Edit
General Description: The Predecessor/Successor Employment Gap edit checks to see if neither
the predecessor nor the successor reported or estimated employment for a period of time. As the
flip side of the overlap check, the edit looks for a gap in employment between the predecessor
and successor. This means that one month shows non-zero data in the predecessor, the following
months thereafter show zero data in both accounts, and one of the next couple of months
thereafter shows non-zero data in the successor account. Therefore, for a period of one month,
neither the predecessor nor the successor shows any employees present. (Note: Whenever there
is more than one predecessor and/or more than one successor, all predecessors and successors
should be examined to determine whether there is a gap in employment.)
There are only four months of data used, the third month of the prior quarter and the three
months of the processed quarter. Four possible combinations can exist to produce this edit
exception. The first case would be the combination of non-zero employment for the predecessor
in the third month of the prior quarter, zero data in the first month of the processed quarter for
both accounts, and non-zero employment in the second month of the quarter for the successor
account. The second case would be the combination of non-zero employment for the
predecessor in the third month of the prior quarter, zero data in the first and second month of the
processed quarter for both accounts, and non-zero employment in the third quarter for the
successor account. Similarly, the third case, dealing strictly with the processed quarter, would
show non-zero data for the predecessor in the first month, zero data for both accounts in the
second month, and non-zero employment for the successor in the third month of the quarter.
Finally, this edit flags large records that have predecessor or successor information but do not
match to another record.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 7
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Neither Predecessor nor Successor Reported
Edit Conditions: See Predecessor/Successor edit conditions in Predecessor/Successor later in
this chapter.
164 — Predecessor/Successor NAICS Code Change Conflict Edit
General Description: The Predecessor/Successor NAICS Code Change Conflict edit checks to
see that predecessors and successors have the same NAICS codes. Like county codes, township
codes, and ownership codes, the NAICS Code is generally expected to remain the same.
Noneconomic code changes are allowed in first quarter only, so NAICS code differences will not
be flagged in first quarter if the record is on the ARS and has a response code indicating a code

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-5

change. Also, NAICS Code changes will not be flagged if the Economic Code Change Indicator
shows that there has been an economic code change.
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 7
Priority: B

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Predecessor/Successor NAICS Code Change Conflict
Edit Conditions: See Predecessor/Successor edit conditions below.

F.6.1 Predecessor/Successor Edits
Edit Conditions:
Definitions:
Y - current record
X – record(s) linked to Y using Y's predecessor UI# and RUN
Z – record(s) linked to Y using Y's successor UI# and RUN
ARS - ARS Refile Year
RC - ARS Response Code
ECCI - Economic Code Change Indicator
Note that there are the following 4 possible predecessor/successor scenarios:
1. One predecessor and one successor
2. One predecessor and many successors
3. Many predecessors and one successor
4. Many predecessors and many successors
Whenever there is more than one predecessor and/or successor, create an “aggregated” record
that is the sum of the multiple predecessors or successors. These aggregated records will be used
in the predecessor and successor checks.
Also, when a condition is checked in the edit such as “STATUSYc = 1”, if Yc is an aggregate
record, then the condition only needs to be met by at least one of the records that were
aggregated. The aggregate record should then be modified so that it only includes records that
meet the specified conditions. The employment for the aggregate record should be the sum of
employment for all of the records that were aggregated.
For example, in the Predecessor Check below, if an aggregate record needs to be created, do not
include any records that do not meet all of the four conditions listed below.
A. Predecessor Check

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-6

Check:
 STATUSYc = 1
 STATUSYp  1
 Y's Predecessor UI#  blank
 Y's Predecessor RUN  blank
If one or more the conditions is false, bypass the rest of the edit
If all four conditions are true, do the following steps in the predecessor check:
1. Calculate FirstY and FirstempY:
FirstY = 1st active month in which there is non-zero employment in record Y
(emp>0, STATUS=1, only consider M1, M2, or M3 of the current quarter)
FirstempY = employment in that FirstY month
If Record Y's first active month in which
non-zero employment occurs is:
M1c
M2c
M3c
M1c = M2c = M3c = 0

Set
FirstY =
2
3
4
5

Set
FirstempY=
M1c
M2c
M3c
0

2. The system will try to match Y's predecessor UI#/RUN to the record in the state
system with that UI#/RUN (X)

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-7

3. If there is no match between X and Y then do:
If FirstempY > PS-UPPER-PARM then flag edit 161
4.

If there is a match then calculate LastX and LastempX:
LastX = last active month in which there is non-zero employment in record X
(emp>0, STATUS=1, only consider M1, M2, and M3 of current quarter and M3
of prior quarter)
LastempX = employment in that Last month
If Record X's last active month in which
non-zero employment occurs is:
M3p
M1c
M2c
M3c
(M1c = M2c = M3c = 0 or STATUSc  1)
AND (M3p = 0 or STATUSp  1)

Set
LastX =
1
2
3
4
0

Set
LastempX =
M3p
M1c
M2c
M3c
0

5. Check the following conditions:
 UI#Y  UI#X or MEEIYc  (3 or 5) or MEEIXc  2
 FirstY  LastX
 FirstY  5
 Max(FirstempY, LastempX) > PS-UPPER-PARM
 Min(FirstempY, LastempX) > PS-LOWER-PARM
If all the conditions in 5 are true, then flag edit 160
6. Check:
 UI#Y  UI#X or MEEIYc  (3 or 5) or MEEIXc  2
 FirstY > (LastX + 1) or (LastX = 0 and FirstY  0) or (FirstY = 5 and LastX 
0)
 Max(FirstempY, LastempX) > PS-UPPER-PARM
If all the conditions in 6 are true, then flag edit 161
7. Check:
 ECCIYc > 0
 Min(FirstempY, LastempX)  PS-LOWER-PARM

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-8

If either of the above conditions is true, then bypass the rest of the edit
If both of the above conditions are false, then check the following
If QTR  1, then check (a) and (b)
If QTR =1, check the following conditions:
 ARSY = Current Year and RCY = (46 or 50)
 ARSX = Current Year and RCX = (46 or 50)
If either of the above conditions is true, then bypass the rest of the edit
If both of the above conditions are false, check (a) and (b)
(a) Check:
 STATUSXc = 1 and OWNXc  OWNYc
 STATUSXc  1 and STATUSXp = 1 and OWNXp  OWNYc
If either condition is true and Max(FirstempY, LastempX) > PS-UPPER-PARM, then
flag edit 157
(b) Check:
 MEEIYc  2
 MEEIYp  2
 MEEIXc  2
 MEEIXp  2
If all of the above conditions in (b) are true, then do (i) through (iii):
(i)

Check:
 STATUSXc = 1 and CNTYXc  CNTYYc and CNTYXc  (995, 996,
998, or 999)
 STATUSXc  1 and STATUSXp = 1 and CNTYXp  CNTYYc and
CNTYXp  (995, 996, 998, or 999)
If either condition in (i) is true and Max(FirstempY, LastempX) > PSUPPER-PARM, then flag edit 156

(ii)

Check:
 STATUSXc = 1 and TOWNYc  TOWNXc and TOWNXc  (995, 996,
998, or 999) and STATE = (09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50)
 STATUSXc  1 and STATUSXp = 1 and TOWNYc  TOWNXp and
TOWNXp  (995, 996, 998, or 999) and STATE = (09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44,
or 50)

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-9

If either condition in (ii) is true and Max(FirstempY, LastempX) > PSUPPER-PARM , then flag edit 159
(iii)

Check:
 STATUSXc = 1 and NAICSYc  NAICSXc and NAICSXc  999999
 STATUSXc  1 and STATUSXp = 1 and NAICSYc  NAICSXp and
NAICSXp  999999
If either condition in (iii) is true and Max(FirstempY, LastempX) > PSUPPER-PARM, then flag edit 164

B. Successor Check
Check:
 STATUSYp =1
 Y's Successor UI#  blank
 Y's Successor RUN  blank
If at least one of the above conditions is false, bypass the rest of the edit
If all the above conditions are true, then do the following steps in the successor check:
1. Calculate LastY and LastempY
LastY = last active month in which there is non-zero employment in record Y
(emp>0, STATUS=1, only consider M1, M2, or M3 of the current quarter or M3
of the prior quarter)
LastempY = employment in that LastY month
If Record Y's last active month in which
non-zero employment occurs is:
M3p
M1c
M2c
M3c
(M1c = M2c = M3c = 0 or STATUSc  1)
AND (M3p = 0 or STATUSp  1)

Set
LastY =
1
2
3
4
0

Set
LastempY =
M3p
M1c
M2c
M3c
0

2. The system will try to match Y's successor UI#/RUN to the record in the microfile
with that UI#/RUN (Z)
3. If there is no match between Y and Z then do:
If STATUSYc  1 and LastempY > PS-UPPER-PARM then flag edit 161

September 2019

4.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-10

If there is a match then check:
 STATUSZc = 1
 STATUSZp  1
If the above conditions in (4) are both true, go to 5
Otherwise, bypass the rest of the edit

5. Calculate FirstZ and FirstempZ
FirstZ = first active month in which there is non-zero employment in record Z
(emp>0, STATUS=1, only consider M1, M2, and M3 of the current quarter)
FirstempZ = employment in that First month
If Record Z's first active month in which
non-zero employment occurs is:
M1c
M2c
M3c
M1c = M2c = M3c = 0 or STATUSc  1

Set
FirstZ =
2
3
4
5

Set
FirstempZ =
M1c
M2c
M3c
0

6. Check the following conditions:
 UI#Y  UI#Z or MEEIYc  2 or MEEIZc  (3 or 5)
 FirstZ  LastY
 FirstZ  5
 Max(FirstempZ, LastempY) > PS-UPPER-PARM
 Min(FirstempZ, LastempY) > PS-LOWER-PARM
If the conditions are true, then flag edit 160
7. Check
 UI#Y  UI#Z or MEEIYc  2 or MEEIZc  (3 or 5)
 FirstZ > (LastY + 1) or (LastY = 0 and FirstZ  0) or (FirstZ = 5 and LastY  0)
 Max(FirstempZ, LastempY) > PS-UPPER-PARM
If the conditions in (7) are true, then flag edit 161

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-11

8. Check
 ECCIZc > 0
 Min(FirstempZ, LastempY)  25
If either of the above conditions is true, then bypass the rest of the edit
If both of the above conditions are false, then check the following:
If QTR  1, then check (a) and (b)
If QTR =1, check the following conditions:
 ARSY = Current Year and RCY = (46 or 50)
 ARSZ = Current Year and RCZ = (46 or 50)
If either of the above conditions is true, then bypass the rest of the edit
If both of the above conditions are false, check (a) and (b)
(a) Check
 STATUSYc = 1 and OWNYc  OWNZc
 STATUSYc  1 and STATUSYp = 1 and OWNZc  OWNYp
If either condition in (a) is true and Max(FirstempZ, LastempY) > PS-UPPERPARM then flag edit 157
(b) Check:
 MEEIYc  2
 MEEIYp  2
 MEEIZc  2
 MEEIZp  2
If all of the above conditions in (b) are true, then do (i) through (iii)
If at least one of the conditions in (b) are false, bypass the rest of the edit
(i) Check:
 STATUSYc = 1 and CNTYYc  CNTYZc and CNTYYc  (995, 996,
998, or 999)
 STATUSYc  1 and STATUSYp = 1 and CNTYZc  CNTYYp and
CNTYYp  (995, 996, 998, or 999)
If either condition in (i) is true and Max(FirstempZ, LastempY) > PSUPPER-PARM then flag edit 156

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-12

(ii) Check:
 STATUSYc = 1 and TOWNYc  TOWNZc and TOWNYc  (995, 996,
998, or 999) and STATE = (09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50)
 STATUSYc  1 and STATUSYp = 1 and TOWNZc  TOWNYp and
TOWNYp  (995, 996, 998, or 999) and STATE = (09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44,
or 50)
If either condition in (ii) is true and Max(FirstempZ, LastempY) > PSUPPER-PARM, then flag edit 159
(iii) Check:
 STATUSYc = 1 and NAICSYc  NAICSZc and NAICSYc  999999
 STATUSYc  1 and STATUSYp = 1 and NAICSYp  NAICSZc and
NAICSYp  999999
If either condition in (iii) is true and Max(FirstempZ, LastempY) > PSUPPER-PARM, then flag edit 164
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
PS-UPPER-PARM
PS-LOWER-PARM

Parameter Name
Pred/Succ Upper Parm
Pred/Succ Lower Parm

Length
6
6

EXPO
PK #
015
016

WIN
PK #
042
043

State
Default
250
25

BLS
Default
250
25

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-13

Example:
This is an example with many predecessors (Xi) and one successor (Y). The same
principles apply when there are many successors.
Record Y has predecessor information, and there is more than one
predecessor. Other fields are as follows:
Prior Quarter
Pred.
Record

STATUS in
Curr.
Qtr.

M1

M2

M3

X1
X2
X3

2
2
2

300
0
100

311
0
100

211
125
125

Current Quarter, Record Y
ST
AT
US

ME
EI

OWN

NAICS

CNTY

TOWN

M1

M2

M3

1

1

5

561114

013

011

411

412

421

A. Predecessor Check
Check:
 STATUSYc =1
 STATUSYp  1 for one or more predecessors (Xi)
 Y's Predecessor UI#  blank
 Y's Predecessor RUN  blank
All four conditions are true, so go to 1:
1. Calculate FirstY and FirstempY:
FirstY = 2
FirstempY = 411
2. The system will try to match Y's predecessor UI#/RUN to
the record(s) in the microfile with that UI#/RUN (Xi).

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-14

There are matches between Xi and Y and the resulting data
are as follows:

1

1

5

561114

Y

2

M3

X
3

M2

561114

M1

5

TOWN

1

2
1
1
1
2
5
1
2
5

CNTY

1

0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1

NAICS

X
2

0
2
2
0
2
2
0
2
2

OWN

561114

MEEI

5

STATUS

NAICS

1

M3

OWN

1

TOWN

MEEI

X
1

Current Quarter

CNTY

STATUS

Prior Quarter

1

1

5

561114

0
2
2

0
1
1

3
0

3
0

0

1

1

5

561114

5

0

1

5

561114

0
1
1
0
1
1

1
5

1

0
2
2
0
1
3

4
1
1

4
1
2

4
2
1

2

4. There is a match, so calculate LastX and LastempX:
LastX = 3
LastempX = 30 + 5 = 35
5. Check the following conditions:
 UI#Y  UI#X or MEEIYc  (3 or 5) or MEEIXc  2
 FirstY  LastX: 2  3:
 FirstY  5: 2  5
 Max(FirstempY, LastempX) > PS-UPPER-PARM: 461 > 250
 Min(FirstempY, LastempX) > PS-LOWER-PARM: 35 > 25
All of the conditions are false, so record fails edit
160.
6. Check:
 UI#Y  UI#X or MEEIYc  (3 or 5) or MEEIXc  2
 FirstY > (LastX + 1) or (LastX = 0 and FirstY  0) or
(FirstY = 5 and LastX  0)
 Max(FirstempY, LastempX) > PS-UPPER-PARM
Not all of the conditions are true, so record does not
flag edit 161.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-15

7. Check:
 ECCIYc > 0
 Min(FirstempY, LastempX)= 35 < 25
Neither of these conditions is true, so check the
following:
If QTR  1, then check (a) and (b)
If QTR =1, check the following conditions:
 ARSY = Current Year and RCY = (46 or 50)
 ARSX = Current Year and RCX = (46 or 50)
These conditions are not true so check (c)
(a)
Check:
 STATUSXc = 1 and OWNXc  OWNYc
 STATUSXc  1 and STATUSXp = 1 and OWNXp  OWNYc
Neither condition is true -- record does not flag edit
157
(b)
Check:
 MEEIYc  2
 MEEIYp  2
 MEEIXc  2
 MEEIXp  2
None of the above conditions are true, so do (i)
through (iii):
(i)

Check:
 STATUSXc = 1 and CNTYXc  CNTYYc and CNTYXc 
(995, 996, 998, or 999)
 STATUSXc  1 and STATUSXp = 1 and CNTYXp 
CNTYYc and CNTYXp  (995, 996, 998, or 999)
The first condition in (i) is true and
Max(FirstempY, LastempX) = 411 > PS-UPPER-PARM, so
flag edit 156

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-16

(ii) Check:
 STATUSXc = 1 and TOWNYc  TOWNXc and TOWNXc 
(995, 996, 998, or 999) and STATE = (09, 23, 25,
33, 34, 44, or 50)
 STATUSXc  1 and STATUSXp = 1 and TOWNYc 
TOWNXp and TOWNXp  (995, 996, 998, or 999) and
STATE = (09, 23, 25, 33, 34, 44, or 50)
Neither condition in (ii) is true, so record does
not flag edit 159
(iii)
Check:
 STATUSXc = 1 and NAICSYc  NAICSXc and NAICSXc 
999999
 STATUSXc  1 and STATUSXp = 1 and NAICSYc 
NAICSXp and NAICSXp  999999
Neither condition in (iii) is true, so record
does not flag edit 164
Record fails edit 156
In this example, record X or Y flags for edit 156—PredecessorSuccessor County Code Change Conflict and edit 160—Both
Predecessor and Successor Reported.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-17

Level 8 Edit Descriptions – Multi-establishment Edits
Multi-establishment edits review the relationships of each unit or the total of the worksites
against the master or parent record. The purposes of these edits are to ensure that:
 The sum of the economic data from sub-units is relatively close to the amount reported
for the master record. Edits 171-176, the additivity balance edits, cover this.
 Each multi-establishment family or group has a master record and at least two worksites.
 All members of the family have the same ownership code and EIN.
Additivity/Balance Edits (171-176)
This group of Level 8 edits is used to ensure that the data received electronically or on the
Multiple Worksite Report for multi establishment accounts add to the exact amount (or
reasonably close to the amount reported) on the Quarterly Contributions Report. Federal
government data are bypassed since they do not report QCRs.
Differences may occur when different respondent representatives such as accountants, payroll
providers, etc. Complete the MWR or EDI data that are being compared to the QCR. If the data
do not add, then the analyst should examine them for the following potential problems:
 Data entry errors
 Inclusion of out-of-state data on the QCR
 Exclusion of new worksites from the MWR
 Mergers or other acquisitions that may be included in one report but not in the other
 Transfers or partial sales that may be reflected in one report but not in the other
 Reporting differences resulting from different people completing the reports
Definitions:
M1
M2
M3
TW
TAXW
CTB
Mas
Wks

x(wks)
Lowx
absDx

absPx

Month One Employment
Month Two Employment
Month Three Employment
Total Wages
Taxable Wages
Contributions Due
Master Record
Worksite Records
Sum of worksite data where x = M1, M2, M3, TW, TAXW, or
CTB
Lower value between the master record and the sum of the
worksites for x where x = M1, M2, M3, TW, TAXW, or CTB
Absolute difference for data element x where x = M1, M2, M3,
TW, TAXW, or CTB between the master record and the sum of the
worksite
Absolute percent difference for data element x where x = M1, M2,
M3, TW, TAXW, or CTB between the master record and the sum
of the worksite

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-18

171 — First Month Employment Additivity/Balance Check
General Description: This Additivity/Balance Check compares data reported in the QCR to data
received on either an MWR or via the EDI Center. Minimal differences are allowed. This edit is
used for all multi-units except for Federal Government. Federal Government is not edited in this
manner, since there are no QCRs to compare against the data on the Report of Federal
Employment and Wages (RFEW).
Location: Both BLS & state systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: First Month Empl Not in Balance
Edit Conditions:
Perform this edit when
 The reference quarter equals the current quarter
OR
 The reference quarter equals the prior quarter and the data element changed for either the
master record or for at least one of the worksites
Identify all records with an individual multi UI #.
Exclude each individual record if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
 OWN = 1
 RUN = 00000 record if it’s MEEI  2.
 Worksite unit (RUN > 00000) record if it’s MEEI  3 or 5.
For the multi UI#, sum M1 for all remaining (not bypassed) worksites (MEEI = 3 or 5).
M1(wks) = sum of all not excluded M1.
Set

LowM1 = Min(M1(mas),M1(wks)).
absDM1 = |M1(MAS) – M1(WKS)|.

Determine the Edit Level:
Limit = LowM1 x MED-EMPL-BAL-PCT
If Limit < LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL, go to Level 1.
If LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL < Limit < HIGH -EMPL-BAL-TOL, go to Level 2.
If Limit > HIGH -EMPL-BAL-TOL, go to Level 3.
Level 1:
If absDM1 > LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-19

Level 2:
Compute absPM1 = (absDM1  M1(wks))  100
If absPM1 > MED-EMPL-BAL-PCT, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 3:
If absDM1 > HIGH-EMPL-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Example:
RUN
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006

Status Code
1
1
1
2
1
1

Master—00000
Sum of Worksites
LOW-EMP
Net Difference
Absolute Value
Percent Difference
Limit
Employment Level
Used:
Tolerance Used:
Flag the Record:

First Month Employment
50
300
100
0
20
66

M1(MAS)
M1(WKS)
LowM1

440
536
440
-96
96
17.9

AbsDM1
absPM1
440 x .10 = 44
Middle range: Level is greater than LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL
but less than HIGH-EMPL-BAL-TOL
MED-EMPL-BAL-PCT
Since the percent difference of 17.9 is greater than the
default tolerance of 10, flag the record

State Parameters and Tolerances:
Parameter
LOW-EMPL-BALTOL
MED-EMPL-BALPCT
HIGH-EMPL-BALTOL

Parameter Name
Small Employment
Balance Tolerance
Mid-Sized Employment
Balance Tolerance
Large Employment
Balance Tolerance

Length
2

EXPO
PK #
032

WIN
PK #
051

State
Default
5

BLS
Default
10

2

033

052

10

50

6

034

054

100

100

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-20

172 — Second Month Employment Additivity/Balance Check
General Description: This Additivity/Balance Check compares data reported in the QCR to data
received on either an MWR or via the EDI Center. Minimal differences are allowed. This edit is
used for all multi-units, except for Federal Government. Federal Government is not edited in
this manner, since there are no QCRs to compare against the data on the RFEW.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Second Month Empl Not in Balance
Edit Conditions:
Perform this edit when
 The reference quarter equals the current quarter
OR
 The reference quarter equals the prior quarter and the data element changed for either the
master record or for at least one of the worksites
Identify all records with an individual multi UI#.
Exclude each individual record if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
 OWN = 1
 RUN = 00000 record if it’s MEEI  2.
 Worksite unit (RUN > 00000) record if it’s MEEI  3 or 5.
For the multi account number, sum M2 for all remaining (not bypassed) worksites (MEEI
= 3 or 5).
M2(wks) = sum of all not excluded M2.
Set

LowM2 = Min(M2(mas),M2(wks)).
absDM2 = |M2(MAS) – M2(WKS)|.

Determine the Edit Level:
Limit = LowM2 x MED-EMPL-BAL-PCT
If Limit < LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL, go to Level 1.
If LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL < Limit < HIGH -EMPL-BAL-TOL, go to Level 2.
If Limit > HIGH -EMPL-BAL-TOL, go to Level 3.
Level 1:
If absDM2 > LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-21

Level 2:
Compute absPM2 = (absDM2 M2(wks))  100
If absPM2 > MED-EMPL-BAL-PCT, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 3:
If absDM2 > HIGH-EMPL-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name
LOW-EMPL-BAL- Small Employment Balance
TOL
Tolerance
MED-EMPL-BAL- Mid-Sized Employment
PCT
Balance Tolerance
HIGH-EMPLLarge Employment Balance
BAL-TOL
Tolerance

Length
2

EXPO
PK #
032

WIN
PK #
051

State
Default
5

BLS
Default
10

2

033

052

10

50

6

034

054

100

100

173 — Third Month Employment Additivity/Balance Check
General Description: This Additivity/Balance Check compares data reported in the QCR to data
received on either an MWR or via the EDI Center. Minimal differences are allowed. This edit is
used for all multi-units, except for Federal Government. Federal Government is not edited in
this manner, since there are no QCRs to compare against the data on the RFEW.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Third Month Empl Not in Balance
Edit Conditions:
Perform this edit when
 The reference quarter equals the current quarter
OR
 The reference quarter equals the prior quarter and the data element changed for either the
master record or for at least one of the worksites
Identify all records with an individual multi UI account number.
Exclude each individual record if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
 OWN = 1

September 2019




QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-22

RUN = 00000 record if it’s MEEI  2.
Worksite unit (RUN > 00000) record if it’s MEEI  3 or 5.

For the multi UI#, sum M3 for all remaining (not bypassed) worksites (MEEI = 3 or 5).
M3(wks) = sum of all not excluded M3.
Set
LowM3 = Min(M3(mas),M3(wks)).
absDM3 = |M3(MAS) – M3(WKS)|.
Determine the Edit Level:
Limit = LowM3 x MED-EMPL-BAL-PCT
If Limit < LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL, go to Level 1.
If LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL < Limit < HIGH -EMPL-BAL-TOL, go to Level 2.
If Limit > HIGH -EMPL-BAL-TOL, go to Level 3.
Level 1:
If absDM3 > LOW-EMPL-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 2:
Compute absPM3 = (absDM3  M3(wks))  100
If absPM3 > MED-EMPL-BAL-PCT, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 3:
If absDM3 > HIGH-EMPL-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-23

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter

Parameter Name

Length

EXPO
PK #

WIN
PK #

State
Default

2

032

051

5

BLS
Defau
lt
10

2

033

052

10

50

6

034

054

100

100

LOW-EMPL-BALTOL

Small Employment Balance
Tolerance
MED-EMPL-BAL- Mid-Sized Employment
PCT
Balance Tolerance
HIGH-EMPLLarge Employment Balance
BAL-TOL
Tolerance
174 — Total Wages Additivity/Balance Check

General Description: This Additivity/Balance Check compares data reported in the QCR to data
received on either an MWR or via the EDI Center. Minimal differences are allowed. This edit is
used for all multi-units, except for Federal Government. Federal Government is not edited in
this manner, since there are no QCRs to compare against the data on the RFEW.

Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Total Wages Not in Balance
Edit Conditions:
Perform this edit when
 The reference quarter equals the current quarter
OR
 The reference quarter equals the prior quarter and the data element changed for either the
master record or for at least one of the worksites
Identify all records with an individual multi UI#.
Exclude each individual record if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
 OWN = 1
 RUN = 00000 record if it’s MEEI  2.
 Worksite unit (RUN > 00000) record if it’s MEEI  3 or 5.
For the multi UI#, sum TQW for all remaining (not bypassed) worksites (MEEI = 3 or 5).
TQW(wks) = sum of all not excluded TW.
Set

LowTW = Min(TW(mas),TW(wks)).

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-24

AbsDTW = |TW(MAS) – TW(WKS)|.
Determine the Edit Level:
Limit = LowTW x MED-WAGE-BAL-MIL
If Limit < LOW-WAGE-BAL-TOL, go to Level 1.
If Limit  LOW-WAGE-BAL-TOL but Limit  HIGH-WAGE-BAL-TOL, go to Level 2.
If Limit > HIGH-WAGE-BAL-TOL, go to Level 3.
Level 1:
If AbsDTW > LOW-WAGE-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 2:
Compute absPTW = (AbsDTW  TW(wks))  100
If absPTW > MED-WAGE-BAL-MIL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 3:
If absDTW > HIGH-WAGE-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Example:
RUN
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
Master—00000
Sum of Worksites
LOW-WAGE
Net Difference
Absolute Value
Percent Difference
Limit
Wage Level Used:
Tolerance Used:
Flag the Record:

Status Code
1
1
1
2
1
1
TW(mas)
TW(WKS)
LowTW

Total Wages
10,000
30,000
7,500
0
22,000
5,500
65,000
75,000
65,000
-10,000
10,000
13.3

absDTW
absPTW
65,000 x 1% = 650
middle range greater than LOW-WAGE-BAL-TOL but less than HIGHWAGE-BAL-TOL –(650 is between 500 and 10,000)
MED-WAGE-BAL-MIL
Since the percent difference of 13.3 is greater than the default
tolerance of 1, flag the record

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-25

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Length
6

MED-WAGEBAL-MIL

Parameter Name
Small Wage
Balance Tolerance
Medium Wage Mill
Balance Tolerance

EXPO
PK #
037

2

038

057

HIGH-WAGETOL

Large Wage
Balance Tolerance

6

039

059

Parameter
LOW-WAGEBAL-TOL

WIN
PK #
056

State Default

1% (expressed as
10 in EXPO & 1
in WIN)
10,000

500

BLS Default
5,000
10% (expressed
as 10)
100,000

175 — Taxable Wages Additivity/Balance Check
General Description: This Additivity/Balance Check compares data reported on the master
record to data reported on multi worksites. Minimal differences are allowed. This edit is used
for all multi-units, except for Federal Government. Federal Government records should never
report Taxable Wages or Contributions.
Location: State only
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning, if used
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Not Applicable

Edit Message: Taxable Wages Not in Balance
Edit Conditions:
Perform this edit when
 The reference quarter equals the current quarter
OR
 The reference quarter equals the prior quarter and the data element changed for either
the master record or for at least one of the worksites
Identify all records with an individual multi UI#.
Exclude each individual record if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
 OWN = 1
 RUN = 00000 record if it’s MEEI  2.
 Worksite unit (RUN > 00000) record if it’s MEEI  3 or 5.
For multi UI#, sum TAXW for all remaining (not bypassed) worksites (MEEI = 3 or 5).
TAXW(wks) = sum of all not excluded TAXW.
Set

LowTAXW = Min(TAXW(mas),TAXW(wks)).
absDTAXW = |TAXW(MAS) – TAXW(WKS)|.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-26

Determine the Edit Level:
Limit = LowTAXW x MED-TAXWAGE-BAL-MIL
If Limit < LOW-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL, go to Level 1.
If Limit  LOW-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL but Limit  HIGH-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL, go to Level 2.
If Limit > HIGH-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL, go to Level 3.
Level 1:
If AbsDTAXW > LOW-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family
with STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 2:
Compute absPTAXW = (AbsDTAXW  TAXW(wks))  100
If absPTW > MED-TAXWAGE-BAL-MIL, flag all units of the multi establishment family with
STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 3:
If absDTAXW > HIGH-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL, flag all units of the multi establishment family
with STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
LOW-TAXWAGEBAL-TOL
MED-TAXWAGEBAL-MIL
HIGH-TAXWAGETOL

Parameter Name Length
Low Wage Balance
6
Tolerance
Medium Wage
2
Mill Balance
Tolerance
Large Wage
6
Balance Tolerance

EXPO
PK #
037

WIN
PK #
056

038

057

039

059

State Default
500
1% (expressed
as 10 in EXPO
and 1 in WIN)
10,000

BLS
Default
N/A
N/A

N/A

176 — Contributions Additivity/Balance Check
General Description: This Additivity/Balance Check compares data reported on the master
record to data reported on multi worksites. Minimal differences are allowed. This edit is used
for all multi-units, except for Federal Government. Federal Government records should never
report Taxable Wages or Contributions.
Location: State only
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A
Edit Message: Contributions Not in Balance

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning, if used
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Not Applicable

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-27

Edit Conditions:
Perform this edit when either condition is true
 The reference quarter equals the current quarter
OR
 The reference quarter equals the prior quarter and the data element changed for either
the master record or for at least one of the worksites
Identify all records with an individual multi UI#.
Exclude each individual record if any of the following conditions are met:
 Status = 2, 3, or 9
 Own = 1
 RUN = 00000 record if it’s MEEI  2.
 Worksite unit (RUN > 00000) record if it’s MEEI  3 or 5.
For multi UI#, sum CTB for all remaining (not bypassed) worksites (MEEI = 3 or 5).
 CTB(wks) = sum of all not excluded CTB.
 Set LowCTB = Min(CTB(mas),CTB(wks)).
 absDCTB = |CTB(mas) – CTB(wks)|.
Determine the Edit Level:
Limit = LowCTB x MED-TAXWAGE-BAL-MIL
If Limit < LOW-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL, go to Level 1.
If Limit  LOW-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL but Limit  HIGH-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL, go to Level 2.
If Limit > HIGH-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL, go to Level 3.
Level 1:
If AbsDCTB > LOW-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL X CONTRIB-BAL-PCT, flag all units of the multi
establishment family with STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 2:
Compute absPCTB = (AbsDCTB  CTB(wks))  100
If absPCTB > MED-TAXWAGE-BAL-MIL X CONTRIB-BAL-PCT, flag all units of the multi
establishment family with STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.
Level 3:
If absDCTB > HIGH-TAXWAGE-BAL-TOL X CONTRIB-BAL-PCT, flag all units of the multi
establishment family with STATUS ≠ 2, 3, or 9. Else pass the edit.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-28

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
LOW-TAXWAGEBAL-TOL
MED-TAXWAGEBAL-MIL
HIGH-TAXWAGETOL
CONTRIB-BALPCT

Parameter Name
Low Wage Balance
Tolerance
Medium Wage Mill
Balance Tolerance

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
037

WIN
PK #
056

2

038

057

Large Wage Balance
Tolerance
Contributions
Percentage Applied
To Balance

6

039

2

040

State Default
500

BLS
Default
N/A
N/A

059

1% (expressed as
10 in EXPO and
1 in WIN)
10,000

067

10

N/A

N/A

178 — Master Without Multiple Worksites Check
General Description: The Master Without Multiple Worksites edit checks for worksites when a
master record exists. If an active unit is determined to be a master record with an MEEI code of
2, then there must be at least 2 corresponding active worksite records for the same UI Account
Number in the same year and quarter. This error may occur when
 An employer account is being set up as a multi-establishment reporter and the RUN =
00000 record's MEEI code is not changed to 2, or the worksites are not set up, or the
worksites have STATUS = 9.
 When a multi-establishment reporter is reduced to only a single worksite. In these cases,
the master should be converted to a single unit (MEEI = 1, 4, or 6) comprised of the data
for the worksite. The remaining worksite is inactivated.
Location: Both BLS and state Systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Master Without Multiple Worksites
Edit Conditions:
Examine all active records (STATUS = 1) that have the same UI#.
Flag if both conditions are met
 A unit has RUN = 00000 and MEEI = 2, and
 Less than two units have active RUN > 00000 with MEEI codes = 3 or 5.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-29

179 — Worksites Without Master Account Check
General Description: The Worksites Without Master Account edit checks for a master record
when worksites exist. If a worksite record is active, then the unit must have a corresponding
active master record. This situation frequently occurs
 When a single establishment is broken out into multiple establishments and the single is
dropped from the file or inactivated, or
 When a multi account is sold to another account. The data for the master record is moved
to the new account but the worksites are not inactivated or properly transferred.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Worksite Missing Master
Edit Conditions:
Examine all active records (STATUS = 1) that have the same UI#.
Flag if both conditions are met
 None of the units have a RUN = 00000 with an MEEI = 2, and
 At least one unit has a RUN > 00000 or is coded MEEI = 3 or 5.
180 — Single Has Active Worksites Check
General Description: The Single Has Active Worksites edit checks for single units with
worksites that exist for the same UI Account Number. This error frequently occurs
 When an employer account is being set up as a multi-establishment reporter and the RUN
= 00000 record’s MEEI code is not changed to 2, or
 When a multi-establishment report is being collapsed and the RUN = 00000 record is
given an MEEI code of 1, 4, or 6 but the worksites are not inactivated.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Single Account/Active Worksites
Edit Conditions:
Examine all active records (STATUS = 1) that have the same UI#.
Flag if both conditions are met
 At least one unit has a RUN = 00000 and is coded MEEI = 1, 4, or 6, and
 At least one other unit is coded as a sub-unit (MEEI = 3 or 5 or RUN > 00000)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-30

181 — Master/Worksite Owner Code Check
General Description: The Master/Worksite Ownership Code edit checks for ownership
discrepancies between master and worksites. A multi-establishment master record and its
worksites should all have the same Ownership Code. A professional employee organization
(PEO) or employee leasing firm may report data on a MWR for units in multiple ownerships
(e.g., a local government hospital and a private sector factory). If they are all reported using the
PEO's UI Account Number, they should all be reported as private sector (ownership 5) units
since the PEO is in the private sector.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Worksite Ownership Code Differs from Master
Edit Conditions:
Compare all active records (STATUS = 1) that have the same UI#.
Flag if not all records have the same OWN.
182 — Master/Worksite EIN Check
General Description: The Master/Worksite EIN edit checks for EIN discrepancies between
master and sub-units. A multi-establishment master record and its worksites should not have
more than one EIN. EIN must be the same for master and worksites with the same UI Account
Number. In some cases where partial or complete mergers occur, the predecessor’s EIN may be
inadvertently retained on some of the worksites and will cause this edit to flag the account.

Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Worksite EIN Differs From Master
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if OWN = 1
Compare all active records (STATUS = 1) that have the same UI#.
Flag if not all records have the same EIN.
System Action: If the EIN of the worksite is missing or zero-filled and the master record EIN is
a valid non-zero value, then the state systems will copy the master record EIN to the worksite.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-31

185 — Master/Worksite Indian Tribal Check
General Description: The Master/Worksite Indian Tribal Code edit checks for special indicator
code T discrepancies between master and worksites. A multi-establishment master record and its
worksites should all have the T indicator if truly Indian Tribal Council records.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 8
Priority: A

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Invalid
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if flagged

Edit Message: Inconsistent Indian Tribal Codes within the Multi Account
Edit Conditions:
Compare all active records (STATUS = 1) that have the same UI#.
Flag if not all records have the same SPECIAL INDICATOR = T.

Level 9 Edit Descriptions – Wage Record Edits
Wage record edits are a tool which can be used in conjunction with the employment and wage
edits to help determine if the employment or wage change is supported by data changes in wage
record data. These edits should only be run if the state can obtain and load automated files of
wage record data.
Note: States using these editing tools should ensure that data for their wage records include all
UI-covered employees and that wage data on wage records include adequate dollar field length
for the total wage amount.
193 — First Month Employment/Wage Record Comparison
General Description: The Wage Record Count is a 6-digit numeric, unduplicated tally of all
employees’ wage record listed on the QCR. The month-to-month employment found in the
Micro extract file should be less than or equal to wage record count. The validation of this
relationship is conducted using a percentage tolerance (tol).
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 9
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if
flagged

Edit Message: First Month Empl > Wage Record Count
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions are met:

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019










Page F-32

STATUS = 2 or 9
WAGE RECORD WAGE is not numeric
WAGE RECORD WAGE = 0
MEEI = 3 or 5
Wage records not reported or not available
COVERAGE = 1, 3, 8, or 9
OWN = 1
AMEc < WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME.

Flag if both conditions are met
 AMEc > WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME and
 M1c - WAGE RECORD COUNT > (M1c x EMPL-GT-WRC-PCT)/100.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME

EMPL-GT-WRC-PCT

Parameter Name
Maximum AME For
Wage Record Edits
Bypass
Limit For Employment >
Wage Record Count
(Percent)

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
046

WIN
PK #
062

2

047

063

State
BLS
Default Default
50
50

10

10

Note: States using these editing tools should ensure that data for their wage records include all
UI-covered employees and that wage data on wage records include adequate dollar length for the
total wage amount.
System Actions: (1) Display the UI account of the possible predecessor either in the error
message, on the listing output, or on the on-line edit screen. Allow state to run these edits
separately or at a different time than the rest of the edits since they are dependent upon access to
wage record information which may be available later in the edit cycle. (2) If wage records are
not available, then the edit is bypassed.
194 — Second Month Employment/Wage Record Comparison
General Description: The Wage Record Count is a 6-digit numeric, unduplicated tally of all
employees’ wage record listed on the QCR. The month-to-month employment found in the
Micro extract file should be less than or equal to the wage record count. The validation of this
relationship is conducted using a percentage tolerance.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 9
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if
flagged

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-33

Edit Message: Second Month Empl > Wage Record Count
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2 or 9
 WAGE RECORD WAGE is not numeric
 WAGE RECORD WAGE = 0
 MEEI = 3 or 5
 Wage records not reported or not available
 COVERAGE = 1, 3, 8, or 9
 OWN = 1
 AMEc < WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME.
Flag if both conditions are met
 AMEc > WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME and
 M2c - WAGE RECORD COUNT > (M2c x EMPL-GT-WRC-PCT)/100.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME

EMPL-GT-WRC-PCT

Parameter Name
Maximum AME For
Wage Record Edits
Bypass
Limit For Employment >
Wage Record Count
(Percent)

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
046

WIN
PK #
062

2

047

063

State
BLS
Default Default
50
50

10

10

Note: States using these editing tools should ensure that data for their wage records include all
UI-covered employees and that wage data on wage records include adequate dollar length for the
total wage amount.
System Actions: (1) Display the UI account of the possible predecessor either in the error
message, on the listing output, or on the on-line edit screen. Allow state to run these edits
separately or at a different time than the rest of the edits since they are dependent upon access to
wage record information which may be available later in the edit cycle. (2) If wage records are
not available, then the edit is bypassed.
195 — Third Month Employment/Wage Record Comparison
General Description: The Wage Record Count is a 6-digit numeric, unduplicated tally of all
employees’ wage record listed on the QCR. The month-to-month employment found in the
Micro extract file should be less than or equal to the wage record count. The validation of this
relationship is conducted using a percentage tolerance.
Location: Both BLS and state systems

Level: Micro

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Edit Level: 9
Priority: C

Page F-34

Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if
flagged

Edit Message: Third Month Empl > Wage Record Count
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2 or 9
 WAGE RECORD WAGE is not numeric
 WAGE R
 ECORD WAGE = 0
 MEEI = 3 or 5
 Wage records not reported or not available
 COVERAGE = 1, 3, 8, or 9
 OWN = 1
 AMEc < WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME.
Flag if both conditions are met
 AMEc > WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME and
 M3c - WAGE RECORD COUNT > (M3c x EMPL-GT-WRC-PCT)/100.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
Parameter Name
WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME Maximum AME For
Wage Record Edits
Bypass
EMPL-GT-WRC-PCT
Limit For Employment >
Wage Record Count
(Percent)

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
046

WIN
PK #
062

State
Default
50

BLS
Default
50

2

047

063

10

10

Note: States using these editing tools should ensure that data for their wage records include all
UI-covered employees and that wage data on wage records include adequate dollar length for the
total wage amount.
System Actions: (1) Display the UI account of the possible predecessor either in the error
message, on the listing output, or on the on-line edit screen. Allow state to run these edits
separately or at a different time than the rest of the edits since they are dependent upon access to
wage record information which may be available later in the edit cycle. (2) If wage records are
not available, then the edit is bypassed.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-35

196 — Wage Record Check
General Description: This edit ensures that employment does not equal the number of wage
records. Wage record edits are to be run in the state if the data are accessible. They should be
run either with the other edits or on a lagged basis (when most of the information would be
available), or periodically to capture potential reporting problems. These edits help to identify
reporting problems that are frequently missed in the other systems because the data normally do
not fluctuate from month to month or over time. Where appropriate, letters should be generated
to send to the employer to resolve long standing reporting problems.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 9
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if
flagged

Edit Message: All Months Empl = Wage Record Count
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2 or 9
 WAGE RECORD WAGE is not numeric
 WAGE RECORD WAGE = 0
 MEEI = 3 or 5
 Wage records not reported or not available
 COVERAGE = 1, 3, 8, or 9
 OWN = 1
 AMEc < WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME.

Flag if all conditions are met
 AMEc > WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME and
 M1c = M2c = M3c = WAGE RECORD COUNT, where M1-INDc nor M2-INDc nor
M3-INDc = “E” or “H”.
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME

Parameter Name
Maximum AME For
Wage Record Edits
Bypass

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
046

WIN
PK #
062

State
BLS
Default Default
50
50

Note: States using these editing tools should ensure that data for their wage records include all
UI-covered employees and that wage data on wage records include adequate dollar length for the
total wage amount.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-36

System Actions: (1) Display the UI account of the possible predecessor either in the error
message, on the listing output, or on the on-line edit screen. Allow state to run these edits
separately or at a different time than the rest of the edits since they are dependent upon access to
wage record information which may be available later in the edit cycle. (2) If wage records are
not available, then the edit is bypassed.
197 — Total Wages/Wage Record Wages Comparison Check
General Description: Wage record edits are to be run in the state if the data are accessible. They
should be run either with the other edits, or on a lagged basis (when most of the information
would be available), or periodically to capture potential reporting problems. These edits help to
identify reporting problems that are frequently missed in the other systems because the data
normally do not fluctuate from month to month or over time. Where appropriate, letters should
be generated to send to the employer to resolve long standing reporting problems.
Location: Both BLS and state systems
Edit Level: 9
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if
flagged

Edit Message: Total Wages Vary from Wage Records
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2 or 9
 WAGE RECORD WAGE is not numeric
 WAGE RECORD WAGE = 0
 MEEI = 3 or 5
 Wage records not reported or not available
 COVERAGE = 1, 3, 8, or 9
 OWN = 1
 AME c < WAGE-REC-WAGE-AME.
Flag if both conditions are met
 AMEc > WAGE-REC-WAGE-AME and
 |TWc - WAGE RECORD WAGES| > (WAGE-GT-WRW-PCT x TWc).
Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
WAGE-REC-WAGE-AME

WAGE-GT-WRW-PCT

Parameter Name
Length
Maximum AME For
6
Wage Record Wage
Edits Bypass
Limit For Total Wages >
2
Wage Record Wages %

EXPO WIN State
PK # PK # Default
049
065
100

050

066

20

BLS
Default
100

20

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

Page F-37

Note: States using these editing tools should ensure that data for their wage records include all
UI-covered employees and that wage data on wage records include adequate dollar length for the
total wage amount.
System Actions: (1) Display the UI account of the possible predecessor either in the error
message, on the listing output, or on the on-line edit screen. Allow state to run these edits
separately or at a different time than the rest of the edits since they are dependent upon access to
wage record information which may be available later in the edit cycle. (2) If wage records are
not available, then the edit is bypassed.
198 — Divergent Employment Trend Check
General Description: This edit compares the employment movement between the current and
prior quarter against the wage record count movement between the same time periods. It would
be reasonable to assume that both should be moving somewhat similarly.
Location: State only
Edit Level: 9
Priority: C

Level: Micro
Edit Type: Warning
BLS Edit Publ. Criteria: Include, if
flagged

Edit Message: Divergent Employment Trends (empl vs wage records)
Edit Conditions:
Bypass if any of the following conditions are met:
 STATUS = 2, 3, or 9
 WAGE RECORD WAGE is not numeric
 MEEI = 3 or 5
 Wage records not reported or not available
 COVERAGE = 1, 3, 8, or 9
 OWN = 1
 AMEc < WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME.
Flag if all conditions are met
 STATUSc ≠ 2, 3, or 9
 RUN = 00000 (MEEI = 1, 2, 4, or 6)
 AMEc > WAGE-REC-EDIT-AME
 WAGE RECORD COUNTc > 0
 WAGE RECORD COUNTp > 0
 |(AMEc – AMEp) – (WAGE RECORD COUNTc – WAGE RECORD COUNTp)| >
AMEc x PPS-EMP%

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Conditions and Formulas

September 2019

Page F-38

Editing Parameters/Tolerances:
Parameter
WAGE-REC-EDITAME
PPS-EMP%

Parameter Name
Maximum AME For
Wage Record Edits
Bypass
Potential Predecessor
/Successor Employment
Percentage

Length
6

EXPO
PK #
046

WIN
PK #
062

State
Default
50

BLS
Default
50

6

087

N/A

75

75

Note: States using these editing tools should ensure that data for their wage records include all
UI-covered employees and that wage data on wage records include adequate dollar length for the
total wage amount.
System Actions: (1) Display the UI account of the possible predecessor either in the error
message, on the listing output, or on the on-line edit screen. Allow state to run these edits
separately or at a different time than the rest of the edits since they are dependent upon access to
wage record information which may be available later in the edit cycle. (2) If wage records are
not available, then the edit is bypassed.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Codes and Messages

May 2019

Page G-1

Appendix G – Edit Codes and Messages
The following table contains summary information on edits by edit code. Edit messages may
appear on some listings or screens in a slightly abbreviated or varied form. The edit codes are
listed in numerical order.
The table identifies whether edits are performed at the micro level, the macro level, or both.
Most of the edits listed below are performed at the micro level only. Edits 089, 090, 091, 092,
093, 094, 126, 127, 130, 131, 136, 137, and 138 are performed at both the micro and macro
levels, while edits 134 and 135 are macro level edits only. Edits 089, 090, 136, 137, and 138
only exist in the WIN system (the edits are performed in EXPO and the national office system,
but they are coded as 091 or 126). Edits 001 and 006 are performed only in the national office
system. Edits 047, 053, 054, 118, 175, and 176 are performed only in the WIN and EXPO State
systems.
The table also identifies the priority of the edits according to the ABC list. The column Pub Ex
identifies edits that cause a record to be excluded from BLS publication. Edit conditions and
formulas are described in detail in Appendix F. The ABC list is described in depth in Section
13.3.3.
Edit
Code

ABC

Pub Ex

Mic, Mac
or Both

Edit Message

Level 1 – Pre-edits
001-I
002-I

C
A

mic
mic

003-I
004-I
005-I
006-I

A
A
A
A

mic
mic
mic
mic

BLS Only: Invalid Transaction Code
Invalid Unemployment Insurance (UI) Account
Number
Invalid Reporting Unit Number
Invalid Reference Year
Invalid Reference Quarter
BLS Only: Invalid State Code

Level 2 – Key Field edits
010-I
012-I
013-I
016-I

A
A
A
A

Y
Y
Y
Y

mic
mic
mic
mic

Invalid NAICS Code
Invalid Ownership Code
Invalid County Code
NAICS & Ownership Inconsistent

Level 3 – Date and Status Code Edits
021-I
022-I
023-I
024-I

C
C
C
C

mic
mic
mic
mic

Invalid Initial Liability Date Format
Invalid End of Liability (EOL) Date Format
Invalid Setup Date Format
Reactivation Date Invalid or Earlier than Liability
Date

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Codes and Messages

May 2019

Edit
Code
025-I

ABC

Pub Ex

A

Y

Mic, Mac
or Both
mic

Page G-2

Edit Message
Invalid Status Code

Level 4 – Remaining Invalid Error Edits
031-I
032-I
033-I
034-I
035-I
036-I
039-I
040-I

A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic

043-I
044-I
045-I
046-I

B
B
A
B

mic
mic
mic
mic

047-I

C

mic

048-I
049-I
050-I
051-I
052-I
053-I
054-I
056-I
057-I
058-I
059-I

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A
A
A
A

Y
Y
Y
Y

mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic

060-I

A

Y

mic

062-I
063-I
064-I
065-I
066-I
067-I
070-I
072-I
074-I
075-I

A
A
A
A
B
B
A
A
B
B

Y
Y

mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic

Invalid First Month Employment
Invalid Second Month Employment
Invalid Third Month Employment
Invalid Total Wages
Invalid Taxable Wages
Invalid Contributions
Invalid Type of Coverage
Invalid Multi-establishment Employer Indicator
(MEEI) Code
Invalid Predecessor SESA ID
Invalid Successor SESA ID
Invalid Federal EI Number
Invalid Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) Response
Code/Year
State Only: Invalid Tax Rate - Beyond
Minimum/Maximum Range
Invalid Comment Code
Invalid First Month Employment Indicator
Invalid Second Month Employment Indicator
Invalid Third Month Employment Indicator
Invalid Total Wages Indicator
State Only: Invalid Taxable Wages Indicator
State Only: Invalid Contributions Due Indicator
Inconsistent Ownership/Type of Coverage
Taxable Wages on Federal Record
Contributions on Federal Record
Taxable Wages > 0 for Non-Experience Rated
Record
Contributions > 0 for Non-Experience Rated
Record
Taxable Wages > Total Wages
Contributions > Taxable Wages
MEEI/Reporting Unit Number (RUN) Inconsistent
Inconsistent County/Township Combination
Invalid Format in Predecessor Account
Invalid Format in Successor Account
No Usable Address
Both Trade Name and Legal Name are Blank
Invalid Old Ownership
Invalid Old County

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Codes and Messages

May 2019

Edit
Code
076-I
078-I
080-I

ABC
B
B
A

Pub Ex

Mic, Mac
or Both
mic
mic
mic

Page G-3

Edit Message
Invalid Old County/Old Township Combination
Invalid Old NAICS Code
Indian Tribal Indicator Inconsistent with NAICS or
OWN

Level 6 – Warning Edits
085-W

A

mic

086-W

A

mic

088-W

B

mic

Potential Predecessor (UI #) found based on Wage
Records
Potential Successor (UI #) found based on Wage
Records
Large Record without Usable Physical Location
Address (PLA)

Level 5 – Significant Employment and Wage Edits
089-W

A

090-W

A

091-W

A

WIN
mic/mac
WIN
mic/mac
mic/mac

092-W

A

mic/mac

093-W

A

mic/mac

094-W

A

mic/mac

095-W

A

mic

096-W
097-W
099-W

A
A
A

mic
mic
mic

WIN-202 Only: Month 1 Employment Change
Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
WIN-202 Only: Month 2 Employment Change
Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
EXPO and BLS: Employment Change Greatly
Exceeds Test Parameters
WIN-202: Month 3 Employment Change Greatly
Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change is Significantly > PARM And Exceeds
Twice the Quartile AQW Range
Average Employment is Significantly > PARM, but
Total Wages = 0
Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages is
Significantly > PARM
Total Wages = Sum of Empl +/- PARM if AME is
Large
Unusually Large New Record on File
Unusually Large Discontinued Record Inactivated
Questionable Large Imputation

Level 6 – Warning Edits
101-W
102-W

C
C

mic
mic

103-W
104-W
105-W
106-W
107-W
108-W

C
C
C
C
C
C

mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic

Unusable Address Type Code
Blank Physical Location City; Other PLA Fields
Present
Unusable Physical Location State Abbreviation
Unusable Physical Location Zip Code Format
Unusable Telephone Format
Blank UI City; Other UI Address Fields Present
Unusable UI State Abbreviation
Unusable UI Zip Code Format

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Codes and Messages

May 2019

Edit
Code
109-W

ABC

Pub Ex

C

Mic, Mac
or Both
mic

110-W
111-W
112-W
114-W

C
C
C
C

mic
mic
mic
mic

116-W
118-W

A
C

mic
mic

119-W

C

mic

120-W
121-W
123-W
124-W

B
B
B
C

mic
mic
mic
mic

125-W
126-W

C
A

127-W

A

mic
EXPO &
BLS
mic/mac
mic/mac

128-W
129-W

C
C

mic
mic

130-W
131-W
132-W
133-W
134-W
135-W
136-W

A
A
A
A
A
A
A

mic/mac
mic/mac
mic
mic
mac
mac
WIN
mic/mac

137-W

A

WIN
mic/mac

138-W

A

WIN
mic/mac

139-W
140-W

A
A

mic
mic

Page G-4

Edit Message
Blank Mailing/Other (M/O) City, Other M/O
Address Fields Present
Unusable Mailing/Other State Abbreviation
Unusable Mailing/Other Zip Code Format
Questionable Fax Number Format
P.O. Box, Blank Street, or Out-of-State in PLA
Block
EIN missing for More Than PARM Months
State Only: Computed Tax Rate > TOL % from
Reported, and Computed Tax TOL from Reported
First QTR Taxable Wages Missing for ExperienceRated Account
Possible Non-Economic Code Change
Code Change Back to a Recent Code
Expected Code Change Not Made
Inactive Record with Reported Employment/Wage
Data
Data Reported Prior to Liability Date
EXPO and BLS Only: Employment Change
Exceeds Test Parameters
(edits 136, 137, and 138 in WIN-202)
AQW Change > Parm and Exceeds Twice the
Quartile AQW Range
Identical Monthly Employment > PARM
Taxable/Total Wage Ratio > Prior Year Ratio by
PARM %
Average Employment > PARM, but Total Wages = 0
Average Employment = 0, but Total Wages > PARM
Total Wages = Sum of Empl +/- PARM
Unclassified Industry Empl > PARM
Number of Establishments out of Range
New or Discontinued Macro Record
WIN-202 Only: Month 1 Employment Change
Exceeds Test Parameters (edit 126 in EXPO and
BLS)
WIN-202 Only: Month 2 Employment Change
Exceeds Test Parameters (edit 126 in EXPO and
BLS)
WIN-202 Only: Month 3 Employment Change
Exceeds Test Parameters (edit 126 in EXPO and
BLS)
New Record?
Discontinued Record?

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Codes and Messages

May 2019

Edit
Code
146-W

ABC
B

Pub Ex

Mic, Mac
or Both
mic

Page G-5

Edit Message
Old Codes Are Inconsistent with 4th Quarter Codes

Level 7 – Predecessor/Successor Edits
156-W

B

mic

157-W
159-W

B
B

mic
mic

160-W
161-W
164-W

A
A
B

mic
mic
mic

Predecessor/Successor County Code Change
Conflict
Predecessor/Successor Ownership Change Conflict
Predecessor/Successor Township Code Change
Conflict
Both Predecessor and Successor Reported
Neither Predecessor nor Successor Reported
Predecessor/Successor NAICS Code Change
Conflict

Level 8 – Multi-establishment Edits
171-W
172-W
173-W
174-W
175-W
176-W
178-I
179-I
180-I
181-I
182-I

A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A

mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic

185-I

A

mic

First Month Empl Not in Balance
Second Month Empl Not in Balance
Third Month Empl Not in Balance
Total Wages Not in Balance
State Only: Taxable Wages Not in Balance
State Only: Contributions Not in Balance
Master Without Multiple Worksites
Worksite Missing Master
Single Account/Active Worksites
Worksite Ownership Code Differs from Master
Worksite Employer Identification Number (EIN)
Differs from Master
Inconsistent Indian Tribal Codes within the Multi
Account

Level 9 – Wage Record Edits
193-W
194-W
195-W
196-W
197-W
198-W

C
C
C
C
C
C

mic
mic
mic
mic
mic
mic

First Month Empl > Wage Record Count
Second Month Empl > Wage Record Count
Third Month Empl > Wage Record Count
All Months Empl = Wage Record Count
Total Wages Vary from Wage Records
Divergent Employment Trends

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

Page H-1

Appendix H – Edit Parameters
Parameters and tolerances are used to control the edit workload and focus edit exceptions to
records that have a greater impact on the data. The following table provides a summary of states
and BLS edit parameters and tolerances, in edit code order. Parameters that are used in more
than one edit are listed with the lowest applicable edit code. The parameters are used in micro
level editing, except where shown otherwise.
Most of these parameters are used in both the standard state QCEW systems and the national
office. The table below includes the Program Constant (PK) numbers assigned to the parameters
in the standard state systems, EXPO and WIN. The edits are described in detail in Appendix F.

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code
045

046

Edit Name

Also Used
in Edits

Federal Employer Identification
Number

ARS Response Code Year

074-076,
078, 146

Page H-2

Parameter Name

Length

AME for EIN Edit

6

Fiscal Year

4

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #
066

-

070

-

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

5

5

Processing
or fiscal
year for
current
refiling

Current
processing
year, or
fiscal year
for the
refiling
just
completed

15%
(expressed
as 015000
in EXPO;
15.00 in
WIN)
0
3%
(expressed
as 3000 in
EXPO and
3.00 in
WIN)

15%
(expressed
as
015000)

047

Tax Rate Range

Maximum Tax Rate

6

001

001

047

Tax Rate Range

Minimum Tax Rate

6

002

002

063

Contributions > Taxable Wages

Employee Tax Rate

6

051

003

066

Predecessor Account Format

6

006

004

0

0

067

Successor Account Format

6

006

004

0

0

070

Address Edit

6

069

095

5

5

072

Trade and Legal Name Edit

6

070

096

3

3

118

Predecessor and
Successor AME
Cutoff
Predecessor and
Successor AME
Cutoff
Address Edit Cutoff
Cutoff Parm for
Trade/Legal Name

0
3%
(expressed
as 030000

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code

Edit Name

074-076 Old Code Checks
078

085

Potential Predecessor Check

085

Potential Predecessor Check

086

Potential Successor Check

086

Potential Successor Check

PLA Address Edit
088
089/136 WIN-202 only - See 091/126
090/137 WIN-202 only - See 091/126
Monthly Employment Change
091/126 (micro)

Monthly Employment Change
091/126 (micro and macro)

Also Used
in Edits

046, 146

198

198

089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202),
92/127

Parameter Name

Fiscal Year

Potential
Predecessor/
Successor
Employment
Potential
Predecessor/
Successor
Employment %
Potential
Predecessor/
Successor
Employment
Potential
Predecessor/
Successor
Employment %
PLA Address Parm

Between Quarters
Absolute Difference

Between Quarters
Percent Difference

Page H-3

Length

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #

State
Default
Value
Processing
or fiscal
year for
current
refiling

4

BLS
Default
Value
Current
processing
year, or
fiscal year
for the
refiling
just
completed

6

086

N/A

100

100

6

087

N/A

75

75

6

086

N/A

100

100

6

087

N/A

75

75

6

080

099

100

100

2 (6 at
BLS)

081

100

500

500

2

082

101

.10

.10

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code

Edit Name

Also Used
in Edits

091/126 Non Zero Employment Cutoff
Monthly Employment Change
091/126 (micro and macro)
Monthly Employment Change
091/126 (micro and macro)
Monthly Employment Change
091/126 (micro and macro)
Monthly Employment Change
091/126 (micro and macro)
Monthly Employment Change
091/126 (micro and macro)

091/126

Monthly Employment Change
(micro and macro)

091/126 Small Record Bypass

089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)

Parameter Name

Page H-4

Length

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

Non Zero
Employment Cutoff

6

075

088

50

50

Split Level For
Employment
Difference

2

010

005

20

20

2

011

006

15

15

2

012

007

40

40

High Reporting
Percent Change

2

013

008

10

10

Reporting Percent
Change

2

014

009

30

30

Employment Check
Multiplier

6

053

010

10

10

Small Record
Bypass

2

071

085

25

25

Low Employment
Maximum
Employment
Difference
High Employment
Maximum
Employment
Difference

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code

Edit Name

091/126 Small Macro Record Bypass

091/126 Establishment Limit
Wage Change
092/127 (macro)
Wage Change
092/127 (micro and macro)
Wage Change
092/127 (micro and macro)
Wage Change
092/127 (micro and macro)
092/127

Wage Change
(micro and macro)

Wage Change
(micro and macro
Wage Change
092/127
(micro and macro)

Also Used
in Edits
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)

094/131
093/130

091/126,
089/136,
090/137,
138 (WIN202)

092/127

092/127 Wage Change
092/127 Micro AME Wage Cutoff
092/127 Micro Total Wage Cutoff
092/127 Macro AME Wage Cutoff

094/131

Parameter Name

Page H-5

Length

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

2
(3 at
BLS)

073

086

100

100

6

076

087

100

100

6

N/A

090

2,000,000

2,000,000

6

007

015

100,000

100,000

2

008

011

15

15

6

019

012

15,000

15,000

Employment Check
Multiplier

2

053

010

10

10

Supplemental AME

6

057

071

75

75

6

058

072

10,000

10,000

2

059

013

10

10

6

071

091

25

25

6

072

092

100,000

100,000

6

073

093

100

100

Small Macro
Record Bypass
Macro Number of
Establishments
Limit
Non Zero Wage
Cutoff
No Employment
with TW Cutoff
No Total Wages
with AME Cutoff
Total Wage Change
Parm

Supplemental Wage
Difference
Total Wage Check
Multiplier
AME Wage Cutoff
(micro)
Total Wage Cutoff
(micro)
AME Wage Cutoff
(macro)

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code

Edit Name

Also Used
in Edits

Total Wage Cutoff
(macro)
TW Change Small
Record Bypass
No Total Wages
with AME Cutoff
No Wages but AME
Multiplier
No Employment
with TW Cutoff
No Employment
TW Cutoff
Multiplier
Employment Equals
Total Wages
Tolerance
Employment Equals
Total Wages AME
Cutoff
Employment Equals
Total Wages
Multiplier
Large New
Employer
Large Discontinued
Record Check
Large Imputation
Employment
Large Imputation
Wages

092/127 Macro Total Wage Cutoff
092/127 TW Change Small Rec Bypass
093/130

Employment Without Wages
(micro and macro)

093/130 Employment without Wages
094/131

Wages Without Employment
(micro and macro)

094/131 Wages Without Employment
095/132

Wages/ Employment Sum
(micro and macro)

095/132

Wages/ Employment Sum
(micro and macro)

095/132 Wages/ Employment Sum
096/139 Large New Record
097/140
099
099
104

Large Discontinued Record
Check
Questionable Large Imputation
Check
Questionable Large Imputation
Check
Physical Location (P/L) Zip
Code Format

Parameter Name

108, 111

Zip Code AME
Cutoff

Page H-6

Length

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

6

074

089

500,000

500,000

6

077

N/A

50,000

50,000

2

008

011

15

15

2

053

014

10

10

6

007

015

100,000

100,000

6

059

016

10

10

2

041

017

5

5

6

042

018

100

100

2

053

019

10

10

6

060

073

250

250

6

060

074

250

250

6

084

102

100

100

6

085

103

10,000

10,000

6

005

020

250

250

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code

Edit Name

104

Physical Location Zip Code
Expansion Format

105

Telephone Number

108

UI Address Zip Code

108

UI Address Zip Code Expansion
Format

111

Mailing/Other Zip Code Format

111

Mailing/Other Zip Code

112

Fax Edit

114

Physical Address Format

116
116

Missing Federal Employer
Identification Number
Missing Federal Employer
Identification Number

Also Used
in Edits
108, 111

104

Parameter Name
Zip Code AME
Cutoff
Telephone AME
Cutoff
Zip Code AME
Cutoff
Zip Code AME
Cutoff
Zip Code AME
Cutoff
Zip Code AME
Cutoff
FAX AME Parm
Physical Location
Address AME
EIN Months
Missing
EIN AME Parm

Page H-7

Length

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

6

005

020

250

250

6

005

021

999,999

999,999

6

005

020

250

250

6

005

020

250

250

6

005

020

250

250

6

005

020

250

250

6

005

021

99

99

6

006

022

5

5

2

052

024

6

6

6

062

023

50

50

118

Tax Rate Consistency

Maximum Tax Rate
Deviation

6

027

025

118

Tax Rate Consistency

Maximum
Contributions Due
Deviation

6

028

026

0.33%
(expressed
as 330 in
EXPO and
0.33 in
WIN)
2.50
(expressed
as 000250
in EXPO
and 2.5 in
WIN)

N/A

N/A

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code

Edit Name

118

Tax Rate Consistency

118

Tax Rate Consistency

119

Missing Taxable Wage

119

Missing Taxable Wages

120

Non-Economic Code Change

120

Non-Economic Code Change

121

Reversed Code Change

124

Active Account

124

Active Account

125

Liability

125

Liability

126
127

See 091/126
See 092/127

128

Identical Monthly Employment

129

Taxable/ Total Wage Change

Also Used
in Edits

063

Parameter Name
Bypass Switch For
California Rate
Employee Tax Rate
Bypass Switch for
California Taxable
Wages
Maximum Total
Wages with No
Taxable Wages
Noneconomic Code
Change Monthly
Employment Parm
Noneconomic Code
Change Large
Employment Parm
Rev CCS AME
(Reverse Code
Change Parm)
Active Account
AME
Active Account
Total Wages
Liability Check
Employment
Liability Check
Wages
Maximum Identical
Employment AME
Taxable Wages To
Total Wages
Percent Tolerance

Page H-8

Length

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

1

N/A

027

0

N/A

6

051

003

3%

N/A

1

N/A

029

0

0

6

020

028

999,999

999,999

2

009

030

25

25

6

N/A

098

50

100

6

009

094

100

100

2

009

032

99

99

6

019

033

500,000

500,000

2

009

034

99

99

6

055

035

500,000

500,000

6

021

036

1,000

1,000

2

043

037

99

99

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code

Edit Name

129

Taxable/ Total Wage Change

130
131
132

See 093/130
See 094/131
See 095/132

133

NAICS=999999

139/96

New and Discontinued Edit
(macro)
New and Discontinued Edit
(macro)
New Record Check

140/97

Discontinued Record Check

146

Inconsistent Old Code Check

136
137
138
139
140

See 091/126
See 091/126
See 091/126
See 096/139
See 097/140

135
135

146

Inconsistent Old Code

156-157
159-161 Predecessor/Successor Edits
164

Also Used
in Edits

046,
074 – 076,
078

Page H-9

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

038

500

500

018

039

50

50

6

054

040

100

100

New Record AME

6

054

041

100

100

New Record Check
Discontinued
Record Check
Inconsistent Old
Code Check

6

061

075

50

50

6

061

076

50

50

6

N/A

N/A

N/A

50

Current
processing
year, or
fiscal year
for the
refiling
just
completed
250

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #

Parameter Name

Length

Taxable Wages To
Total Wages AME

6

044

Unclassified
NAICS AME
Discontinued
Record AME

2

Fiscal Year

4

—

—

Processing
or fiscal
year for
current
refiling

Pred/Succ Upper
Parm

6

016

042

250

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code
160

Edit Name

Additivity/Balance
(Monthly Employment)

171-173

Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly Employment)

171-173

Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly Employment)

171-173

Additivity/Balance
(Monthly Employment)

174
174
174

Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly Employment)
Additivity/ Balance
(Total Wages)
Additivity/ Balance
(Total Wages)
Additivity/ Balance
(Total Wages)

174

Additivity/Balance
(Total Wages)

174

Additivity/Balance
(Total Wages)

176

Contributions Additivity/Balance

193

1st Month Employment/ Wage
Record Comp

Parameter Name
Pred/Succ Lower
Parm
First Employment
Balance Split Level
Second
Employment
Balance Split Level
Low Employment
Balance Tolerance
Mid-Size
Employment
Balance Tolerance
High Employment
Balance Tolerance
First Wage Balance
Split Level
Second Wage
Balance Split Level
Low Wage Balance
Tolerance

Predecessor/Successor Edits

171-173

171-173

Also Used
in Edits

Medium Wage Mill
Balance Tolerance
(1/10%)

196, 198

High Wage Balance
Tolerance
Contributions
Percentage Applied
To Balance
Maximum AME
For Wage Record
Edits Bypass

Page H-10

Length

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

6

015

043

25

25

2

030

050

N/A

50

2

031

053

N/A

1,000

2

032

051

5

10

2

033

052

10

50

6

034

054

100

100

6

035

055

N/A

50,000

6

036

058

N/A

999,999

6

037

056

500

5,000

1%
(expressed
10%
as 10 in
(expressed
EXPO; 1 in
as 10)
WIN)

2

038

057

6

039

059

10,000

100,000

2

040

067

10

N/A

6

046

062

50

50

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code

Edit Name

Also Used
in Edits

st

193

1 Month Employment/ Wage
Record Comp

194

2nd Month Employment/ Wage
Record Comp

194

2nd Month Employment/ Wage
Record Comp

195

3rd Month Employment/ Wage
Record Comp

195

3rd Month Employment/ Wage
Record Comp

196

Wage Record Check

197

TTL Wages/ Wage Record Wage
Comp

197

TTL Wages/ Wage Record Wage
Comp

198

Divergent Employment Trends

193-195,
198

193-195,
196

Parameter Name
Limit for
Employment >
Wage Record Count
%
Maximum AME for
Wage Record Edits
Bypass
Limit for
Employment >
Wage Record Count
%
Maximum AME for
Wage Record Edits
Bypass
Limit for
Employment >
Wage Record Count
%
Maximum AME
For Wage Record
Edits Bypass
Maximum AME
For Wage Record
Wage Edits Bypass
Limit For Total
Wages > Wage
Record Wages %
Maximum AME
For Wage Record
Edits Bypass

Page H-11

Length

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

2

047

063

10

10

6

046

062

50

50

2

047

063

10

10

6

046

062

50

50

2

047

063

10

10

6

046

062

50

50

6

049

065

100

100

2

050

066

20

20

6

046

062

50

50

QCEW Operating Manual
Edit Parameters

September 2019

Edit
Code
198

Edit Name

Divergent Employment Trends

Also Used
in Edits
085, 086

Parameter Name
Potential
Predecessor/
Successor
Employment %
BLS Table 9B Print
Cutoff – Edit Level
Two
BLS Table 9B Print
Cutoff – Edit Level
Three
BLS Table 9B Print
Cutoff – Edit Level
Four
BLS Table 9B Print
Cutoff – Edit Level
Five
BLS Table 9B Print
Cutoff – Edit Level
Six
BLS Table 10 Print
Cutoff – Edit Level
Eight
BLS Table 9B Print
Cutoff – Edit Level
Nine

Page H-12

Length

6

EXPO WIN
PK # PK #
087

N/A

State
Default
Value

BLS
Default
Value

75

75

300
300
300
300
300
600
300

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Page I-1

Appendix I – Comment Codes
Valid QCEW comment codes are listed below. Section I.1 gives an abridged version with
associated short titles, and Section I.2 gives the full version. Traditionally, comment codes are
assigned by state staff to explain economic data fluctuations or other unusual circumstances. In
recent years, more and more comment codes are being assigned directly by the respondent, on
collection web sites, or through automated touchtone response systems. In addition, many
reports are collected via EDI centers. These centers use standard edit/screening systems to flag
unusual data movements and re-contact employers when necessary for clarification. This often
results in entry of a comment code. However, comment codes should not be used as
validation of incorrectly reported data. Consider the collection source when reviewing data
and the reliability of the associated comment code.
On the abridged list, the codes are given in numerical order. On the full list, codes are typically
grouped together based on the associated data elements. (Some codes may not follow this
grouping since they are also being used to address new economic or reporting issues.) Use the
comment code that best explains the data fluctuation, regardless of its grouping. On the full list,
the "Direction" column shows whether employment or wages would typically increase (+),
decrease (–), not move in a consistent direction (+/–), or not be affected (N/A). The "E/N"
column indicates whether the data fluctuation or change is economic (E) or noneconomic (N).
Three comment code fields, as well as a 57-position Narrative Comment field, are available on
state and BLS QCEW systems. The standard state systems include these fields on the Enhanced
Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file. State staff should use the first comment code
field to report the most relevant code, but may use one or two additional codes or the Narrative
Comment field to explain the data further. Section 9.6 describes the use of comment codes in
some detail.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Page I-2

I.1 – Comment Codes Short Titles
Code
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Short Title
Multi worksite to single. Remaining worksite converted to single.
Seasonal increase
Seasonal decrease
More business (expansion)
Less business (contraction)
Short-term/specific business project starting or continuing
Short-term/specific business project completed or approaching completion
Layoff, not elsewhere classified
Strike, lockout, or other labor dispute
Temporary shutdown
Conversion or remodeling of facilities, retooling, or repair and maintenance of
equipment resulting in employment decrease
Conversion or remodeling of facilities, retooling, or repair and maintenance of
equipment resulting in employment increase
Internal reorganization, downsizing or bankruptcy resulting in an employment
decrease
Internal reorganization resulting in an employment increase
Nonstandard work schedule
Intra-account (firm) transfers
Establishment moved out of state
Establishment moved into state
Active employer reporting zero employment and wages
Employment returns or returning to normal or a new normal after coded 07-18
Wage rate decrease
Wage rate increase (including COLAs)
Increase in percentage of lower-paid employees
Increase in percentage of higher-paid employees
Lower hourly earnings or wages because of piecework or lower incentive pay
Higher hourly earnings or wages because of piecework or higher incentive pay
Less overtime worked at premium pay or less overtime worked
Overtime worked at premium pay or more overtime pay
Stock options exercised and distributed
Severance pay distributed
Wages paid to employees working in pay periods not including the 12th of the month
and not shown in employment
Bonuses, executive pay, profits distributed, or unidentified lump-sum payments
Change in commissions
Faculty paid over a 9-month period. Lump-sum payments made at end of school term
Change in hourly earnings or pay due to change in amount of shift work with pay
differential

September 2019

Code
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66-74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Page I-3

Short Title
Changes in hours, earnings, or wages due to legislation/administrative regulations
Pay returns or returning to normal or a new normal after coded 29-35
Not used by QCEW
Not used by QCEW
Decrease in employment resulting from a labor shortage
Shorter scheduled workweek; fewer hours worked; number of pay periods less than
usual
Longer scheduled workweek; more hours worked; number of pay periods greater than
usual
Decrease in part-time workers
Increase in part-time workers
Return to normal after end of paid vacation or receiving vacation pay or other paid
leave
Paid vacation or receiving vacation pay or other paid leave
Unpaid vacation or unpaid leave
Return to normal after end of unpaid vacation or unpaid leave
Improved reporting
Working and receiving vacation pay
Adverse weather conditions
Fire disruption
Natural disaster disruption
Non-natural disaster disruption
Energy shortage
Data returns or returning to normal or new normal after coded 50-54, 56 or 57
Secondary-effects decrease
Secondary-effects increase
Environmental legislation
Defense-related buildups
Defense-related cutbacks
NAICS 2017 direct, consolidation, or split
Temporary use code
Temporary use code
Temporary use code
Temporary use code
Not used by QCEW
Change in tax rate
Change in reimbursing/non-reimbursing status
Change in UI coverage
Change in taxable wage base
Change in taxable wages and/or contributions
Change in unclassified to classified
Noneconomic code change
Economic code change

September 2019

Code
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Short Title
Employee leasing reporting change to or from a PEO
Not used by QCEW
New establishment or worksite
Establishment permanently out of business
Reactivated UI account or worksite
Establishment dissolution
Establishment merger or acquisition
Changed basis of reporting with more detail
Changed basis of reporting with less detail
Partial Predecessor/Successor transaction
Full Predecessor/Successor transfer
Not used by QCEW
Data verified using CES
Data used pending verification
Data verified using wage records
Data verified by EDIC
Data verified--see narrative

Page I-4

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

September 2019

Page I-5

I.2 – Comment Codes Full Detail
General Business Conditions (01-49)
Employment Shifts (00-19)
Code

Direction

E/N

QCEW Description

Multi worksite to
single. Remaining
worksite
converted to
single.

—

E/N

All but one worksite of a multi-establishment
account sold or closed, remaining single
worksite becomes a single account.

01

Seasonal increase

+

E

Seasonal increase; seasonal reopening; hiring
of school personnel at the beginning of the
school term.

02

Seasonal decrease

—

E

Seasonal decrease; seasonal closing; layoff of
school personnel at the end of the school term.

03

More business
(expansion)

+

E

More business (other than seasonal); new
orders; new
long-term contracts; expansion. Example:
New department store increases employment
during several reference periods.

04

Less business
(contraction)

—

E

Less business (other than seasonal); long-term
contracts completed, nearing completion, or
canceled; lack of orders; contraction. These
conditions may result in layoffs.

05

Short-term/
specific business
project starting or
continuing

+

E

Short-term business project began, in
progress, or for full duration during the
reference period or short-term specific job or
occurrences. Examples: construction, mining,
or drilling project; television or movie
production.

00

Title

Show predecessor/successor link from
inactivated worksite to account (RUN =
00000).

September 2019

Code

Title

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Direction

E/N

Page I-6

QCEW Description

06

Short-term/
specific business
project completed
or approaching
completion

—

E

Short-term business project or specific job or
occurrence completed or approaching
completion since the last reference period.

07

Layoff, not
elsewhere
classified

—

E

Layoff of some or all employees began, in
progress, or for full duration; these layoffs
could not be attributed to any other reason.
Also includes furloughs. (Establishments
permanently out of business are coded 86, not
07.)

08

Strike, lockout, or
other labor
dispute

—

E

Strike, lockout, or other labor dispute began,
in progress, or for full duration.

09

Temporary
shutdown

—

E

Temporary shutdowns that are not due to
business conditions. Examples: inventory,
plant cleaning, opening of hunting season,
plant-wide vacations, failure of health or
safety inspections. (Permanent shutdowns –
plant closings – are coded 86. Unplanned
shutdowns due to external factors such as fire,
flood, etc., are coded 50-55. Temporary
shutdowns directly caused by strikes or labor
disputes are coded 08.)

10

Conversion or
remodeling of
facilities,
retooling, or
repair and
maintenance of
equipment
resulting in an
employment
decrease

—

E

Conversion or remodeling of facilities, model
changeover, retooling, automation,
modernization, repair and/or maintenance of
equipment resulting in a permanent or
temporary employment decrease.

September 2019

Code

Title

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Direction

E/N

Page I-7

QCEW Description

11

Conversion or
remodeling of
facilities,
retooling, or
repair and
maintenance of
equipment
resulting in an
employment
increase

+

E

Conversion or remodeling of facilities, model
changeover, retooling, automation,
modernization, repair and/or maintenance of
equipment resulting in a permanent or
temporary employment increase.

12

Internal
reorganization,
downsizing, or
bankruptcy
resulting in
employment
decrease

—

E

Internal reorganization, downsizing,
elimination or phase out of department(s), or
bankruptcy resulting in a permanent or
temporary employment decrease within the
same account/worksite.
(Predecessor/Successor link does not exist.)
Example: Restructuring of branches or
divisions may eliminate mid-level
management positions. Use code 86 if
firm/location is out of business.

13

Internal
reorganization
resulting in
employment
increase

+

E

Internal reorganization resulting in a
permanent or temporary employment increase
within the same account/worksite.
(Predecessor/Successor link does not exist.)
Example: Restructuring junior or mid-level
management may create new divisions or
branches with additional workload.

14

Nonstandard work
schedule

+/–

E

Nonstandard work patterns such as working
alternating work weeks, or selected weeks in a
quarter.

15

Intra-account
(firm) transfers

+/–

E

Intra-account (firm) transfers result in changes
or shifts in employment. Show
predecessor/successor link(s).

16

Establishment
moved out of state

—

E

Establishment ceased operations within the
state and relocated to a different state.

17

Establishment
moved into state

+

E

Establishment relocated from another state
and began operations within the state.

September 2019

Code

Title

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Direction

E/N

Page I-8

QCEW Description

18

Active employer
reporting zero
employment and
wages

+/–

E

Active employer submits report with zero
employment and wages (e.g., on the QCR or
MWR, through EDI or MWR Web, etc.).

19

Employment
returns or
returning to
normal or a new
normal

+/–

E

Employment returns or returning to normal or
a new normal after events coded 07-18. (Do
not use if formerly coded 00-06.)

Pay Shifts (20-39)
Code

Title

Direction

E/N

QCEW Description

20

Wage rate
decrease

—

E

Wage rate (hourly earnings, weekly or
monthly pay, or annual salary) decreases.
Example: re-negotiation of union contract
resulting in a wage rate decrease.

21

Wage rate
increase (including
cost-of-living
adjustments)

+

E

Wage rate (hourly earnings, weekly or
monthly pay, or annual salary) increases as a
result of annual pay increases, cost-of-living
adjustments, across the board pay increases,
etc. (Use code 35 for an increase in the
national minimum wage.)

22

Increase in
percentage of
lower-paid
employees

—

E

Increase in the percentage of lower-paid
employees or a decrease in the percentage of
higher-paid employees will cause the average
pay of the unit or industry to decrease.
Example: Higher-paid employees on strike
are replaced with new, lower-paid
employees.

23

Increase in
percentage of
higher-paid
employees

+

E

Increase in the percentage of higher-paid
employees or a decrease in the percentage of
lower-paid employees will cause the average
pay of the unit or industry to increase.
Example: company decreases the number of
lower-paid laborers.

September 2019

Code

Title

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Direction

E/N

Page I-9

QCEW Description

24

Lower hourly
earnings or wages
because of
piecework or
lower incentive
pay

—

E

Lower hourly earnings or wages caused by
less piecework activity or due to end of work
on rated job or a reduction in incentive pay.

25

Higher hourly
earnings or wages
because of
piecework or
higher incentive
pay

+

E

Higher hourly earnings or wages caused by
more piecework activity or due to work on
rated job or an increase in incentive pay.

26

Less overtime
worked at
premium pay or
less overtime
worked

—

E

Less overtime worked at premium pay or less
overtime worked.

27

Overtime worked
at premium pay or
more overtime pay

+

E

Overtime worked at premium pay including
daily and weekend work or more overtime
pay.

28

Stock options
exercised and
distributed

+

E

Stock options exercised and distributed.

29

Severance pay
distributed

+

E

Employer distributes severance pay to laidoff employees.

30

Wages paid to
employees
working in pay
periods not
including the
twelfth of the
month and not
shown in
employment

—

N

Employer was in business during the
reference period and paid wages in the
quarter; however, most or all employees
worked in pay periods other than the pay
period including the twelfth of any month of
the reference period.

September 2019

Code

Title

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Page I-10

Direction

E/N

QCEW Description

+

E

Bonuses, executive pay (an employer pays
self), profit distribution, or lump-sum
payments paid to employees other than
faculty. (Use code 33 for lump-sum
payments to faculty.)

+/–

E

Increase/decrease in commissions paid.

31

Bonuses, executive
pay, profits
distributed, or
unidentified
lump-sum
payments

32

Change in
commissions

33

Faculty paid over
a nine-month
period. Lumpsum payments
made at end of
school term

+

E/N

Faculty are typically paid over a nine-month
period or during the school term. At the end
of the school term, a lump-sum payment is
made for the remainder of the year.

34

Change in hourly
earnings or pay
because of change
in amount of shift
work with pay
differential

+/–

E

Change in wages because of a change in the
amount of shift work with a pay differential.

35

Change in hours,
earnings, or wages
due to legislation
or administrative
regulations

+/–

E

Change in wages due to legislation or
administrative regulations. Example: change
in the minimum wage.

36

Pay returns or
returning to
normal or a new
normal

+/–

E/N

Wages return or returning to normal or a new
normal after events coded 29-35.

37

DO NOT USE. NOT A COMMENT CODE USED IN

QCEW.
38

DO NOT USE. NOT A COMMENT CODE USED IN

QCEW.

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

September 2019

Code
39

Title
Decrease in
employment or a
change in wages
resulting from a
labor shortage.

Direction
+/-

E/N
E

Page I-11

QCEW Description
Employment decreases due to labor shortage
(i.e., cannot find qualified workers to replace
workers that have left).
Change in wages because of a labor shortage.

Hours (Time & Vacation) (40-49)
Code
40

41

Title

Direction

E/N

QCEW Description

Shorter scheduled
workweek or
fewer hours
worked. Number
of pay periods less
than usual.

—

E

Shorter scheduled workweek or fewer hours
worked.

—

N

Number of pay periods is less than usual or
is lower when the number of pay periods
fluctuates between six and seven pay
periods in the quarter.

Longer scheduled
workweek or more
hours worked.
Number of pay
periods greater
than usual.

+

E

Longer scheduled workweek or more hours
worked.

+

N

Number of pay periods is greater than usual
or is higher when the number of pay periods
fluctuates between six and seven pay
periods in the quarter.
Example: a quarter with seven pay periods
for biweekly payroll establishments.

42

Decrease in parttime workers

+/–

E

Decrease in part-time workers, part-time
workers become full-time or given increased
hours, or a decrease in job-sharing resulting
in a change in total or average wages.

43

Increase in parttime workers

+/–

E

Increase in part-time staff, working shorter
workweeks or working for a short duration,
or an increase in job-sharing resulting in a
change in total or average wages.

44

Return to normal
after end of paid
vacation or
receiving vacation
pay or other paid
leave

+/–

E

Return to normal after the end of PAID
leave, vacation, or vacation pay.

September 2019

Code

Title

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Direction

E/N

Page I-12

QCEW Description

45

Employees on paid
vacation or
receiving vacation
pay or other paid
leave

+/–

E

Employees on PAID leave or vacation.
(Use code 49 for employees who are both
working and receiving vacation pay.)

46

Employees on
unpaid vacation or
unpaid leave

+/–

E

Employees on UNPAID leave or vacation.

47

Return to normal
after end of
unpaid vacation or
unpaid leave

+/–

E

Return to normal after the end of UNPAID
leave or vacation.

48

Improved
reporting

+/–

N

Employer reports correctly after a period of
prorated, imputed or inaccurate data. Data
now unrelated to previous data.

49

Employees
working and
receiving vacation
pay

+/–

E

Employees are working and receiving
vacation pay.

Special Conditions (50-60)
External Factors (50-55)
Use these codes when the reason for a change is due to external factors.
Code

Title

Direction

E/N

QCEW Description

50

Adverse weather
conditions

+/–

E

Data change because of adverse weather
conditions. Examples: blizzards, hurricanes,
and tornadoes.

51

Fire disruption

+/–

E

Data change because of a fire.

52

Natural disaster
disruption

+/–

E

Data change because of natural disasters.
Examples: earthquakes, floods, rock slides,
insect infestations.

September 2019

Code

Title

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Direction

E/N

Page I-13

QCEW Description

53

Nonnatural
disaster disruption

+/–

E

Data change because of nonnatural
disasters. Examples: explosions, flooding
caused by sprinkler systems.

54

Energy shortage

—

E

Activities curtailed or reduced because of
shortage in the supply of natural gas, oil,
coal, electricity, etc.

55

Data return or
returning to
normal or a new
normal

+/–

E

Data return or returning to normal or a new
normal after events coded 50-54, 56, or 57.

Secondary Effects (55-57)
Use these codes when the reason for a change in employment or other data is due to secondary
effects from situations other than those due to defense-related changes.
Code

Title

Direction

E/N

QCEW Description

55

Data return or
returning to
normal or a new
normal

+/–

E

Data return or returning to normal or
stabilizing after events coded 50-54, 56, or
57.

56

Secondary-effects
decrease

—

E

Data decrease or activities cease or
decrease in non-defense-related industries
because of the secondary effects of
adverse weather conditions, fires, floods,
natural disasters, nonnatural disasters,
energy shortages, strikes, materials
shortages, or service disruptions.
Example: a manufacturer or supplier of
auto parts lays off employees because the
demand for the product has declined due
to a strike in the auto industry.
(Secondary effects of defense-related
cutbacks are coded 60.)

September 2019

Code
57

Title
Secondary-effects
increase

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Direction

E/N

+

E

Page I-14

QCEW Description
Data increase or activities resume or
increase in non-defense-related industries
because of the secondary effects of
adverse weather conditions, fires, floods,
natural disasters, nonnatural disasters,
energy shortages, strikes, materials
shortages, or service disruptions.
Example: Construction activity increases
due to rebuilding because of a fire or
flood. (Secondary effects of defenserelated buildups are coded 59.)

Environmental Legislation (58)
Use this code when the reason for a change is due to environmental issues.
Code
58

Title
Environmental
legislation

Direction

E/N

+/–

E

QCEW Description
Data affected by environmental legislation.

Defense-Related (59-60)
Use these codes when the reason for a change is due to defense-related changes.
Code
59

Title
Increase in
employment due
to defense-related
buildups

Direction

E/N

+

E

QCEW Description
Increased funding or activities result in
higher employment in defense-related
industries or businesses dependent on
them. Examples: A firm receives a large
defense contract or subcontract, or stores
and restaurants near a defense supplier
experience an increase in business. Note:
Secondary effects (increases) specific to
defense-related industries are coded 59,
not 57.

September 2019

Code
60

Title
Decrease in
employment due
to defense-related
cutbacks

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Direction

E/N

—

E

Page I-15

QCEW Description
Decreased funding or activities result in
lower employment in defense-related
industries or businesses dependent on
them. Example: A firm completes a large
defense contract or subcontract; restaurant
near a military base loses employment due
to a reduction in force at the base. Note:
Secondary effects (decreases) specific to
defense-related industries are coded 60,
not 56.

Note: The NAICS codes of defense-focused establishments were reviewed to pinpoint those
NAICS industries with the most defense related employment. The list below provides the
NAICS industries that may be most directly affected by changes in government funding or
activities.

NAICS NAICS Title
23, Construction
Commercial and Institutional
236220
Building Construction
Other Heavy and Civil
237990
Engineering Construction
31-33, Manufacturing
All Other Miscellaneous Textile
314999
Product Mills
315210
315220
315240
325920
331110
332322
332912
332992

Relevant Index Item
Armory construction
Missile facility
construction
Military insignia textile mfg.

Field jackets, military, cut and sew apparel
contractors
Field jackets, military, men’s and boy’s, cut and
Men’s and Boys’ Cut and Sew
sewn from purchased fabric (except apparel
Apparel Manufacturing
contractors)
Women’s, Girls’, and Infants’ Cut Military dress uniforms, tailored, women’s and
and Sew Apparel Manufacturing
girls
Explosives Manufacturing
Explosives manufacturing
Iron and Steel Mills and
Armor plate made in iron and steel mills
Ferroalloy Manufacturing
Casings, sheet metal (except stampings),
Sheet Metal Work Manufacturing
manufacturing
Fluid Power Valve and Hose
Hydraulic aircraft subassemblies manufacturing
Fitting Manufacturing
Small Arms Ammunition
Small arms ammunition (i.e., 30 mm. or less,
Manufacturing
1.18 inch or less) manufacturing
Cut and Sew Apparel Contractors

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

NAICS NAICS Title
Ammunition (except Small Arms)
332993
Manufacturing
Small Arms, Ordnance, and
332994 Ordnance Accessories
Manufacturing
All Other Miscellaneous
332999 Fabricated Metal Product
Manufacturing
Optical Instrument and Lens
333314
Manufacturing
Other Commercial and Service
333318 Industry Machinery
Manufacturing
Turbine and Turbine Generator
333611
Set Units Manufacturing
All Other Miscellaneous General
333999 Purpose Machinery
Manufacturing
Electronic Computer
334111
Manufacturing
Radio and Television
Broadcasting and Wireless
334220
Communications Equipment
Manufacturing
Bare Printed Circuit Board
334412
Manufacturing
Semiconductor and Related
334413
Device Manufacturing
Printed Circuit Assembly
334418 (Electronic Assembly)
Manufacturing
Other Electronic Component
334419
Manufacturing
Search, Detection, Navigation,
Guidance, Aeronautical, and
334511
Nautical System and Instrument
Manufacturing
Totalizing Fluid Meter and
334514
Counting Device Manufacturing
Instrument Manufacturing for
334515 Measuring and Testing Electricity
and Electrical Signals
Analytical Laboratory Instrument
334516
Manufacturing

Page I-16

Relevant Index Item
Grenades, hand or projectile, manufacturing
Aircraft artillery manufacturing

Military insignia metal mfg.
Gun sights, optical, manufacturing
Flight simulation machinery manufacturing
Turbine generator set units manufacturing
Aircraft carrier catapults manufacturing
Computers manufacturing

Space satellites, communications, manufacturing

Circuit boards, printed, bare, manufacturing
Infrared sensors, solid-state, manufacturing
Loaded computer boards manufacturing
Cathode ray tubes (CRT) manufacturing
Warfare countermeasures equipment
manufacturing
Tank truck meters manufacturing
Measuring equipment for electronic and electrical
circuits and equipment manufacturing
Atomic force microscopes manufacturing

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

NAICS NAICS Title
Other Measuring and Controlling
334519
Device Manufacturing
336411 Aircraft Manufacturing
Aircraft Engine and Engine Parts
336412
Manufacturing
Other Aircraft Parts and Auxiliary
336413
Equipment Manufacturing
Guided Missile and Space
336414
Vehicle Manufacturing
Guided Missile and Space
Vehicle Propulsion Unit and
336415
Propulsion Unit Parts
Manufacturing
Other Guided Missile and Space
336419 Vehicle Parts and Auxiliary
Equipment Manufacturing
336611

Ship Building and Repairing

Military Armored Vehicle, Tank,
336992 and Tank Component
Manufacturing
All Other Transportation
336999
Equipment Manufacturing
42, Wholesale Trade
Electrical Apparatus and
Equipment, Wiring Supplies, and
423610
Related Equipment Merchant
Wholesalers
Other Electronic Parts and
423690
Equipment Merchant Wholesalers
Transportation Equipment and
423860 Supplies (except Motor Vehicle)
Merchant Wholesalers
Other Miscellaneous Durable
423990
Goods Merchant Wholesalers
48, Transportation and Warehousing
488190

Other Support Activities for Air
Transportation

Other Support Activities for
Water Transportation
51, Information
511210 Software Publishers
488390

Page I-17

Relevant Index Item
Aircraft engine instruments manufacturing
Aircraft manufacturing
Engines and engine parts, aircraft manufacturing
Aircraft assemblies, subassemblies, and parts
(except engines) manufacturing
Rockets (guided missiles), space and military,
complete, manufacturing
Developing and producing prototypes for guided
missile and space vehicle engines
Guided missile and space vehicle parts (except
engines) manufacturing
Ships (i.e., not suitable or intended for personal
use) manufacturing
Tanks, military (including factory rebuilding),
manufacturing
Off-highway tracked vehicles mfg.

Industrial controls, electrical, merchant
wholesalers
Communications equipment merchant wholesalers
Military vehicles (except trucks) merchant
wholesalers
Ammunition (except sporting) merchant
wholesalers
Aircraft maintenance and repair services (except
factory conversion, factory overhaul, factory
rebuilding)
Ship dismantling at floating drydock
Software publishers

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Page I-18

NAICS NAICS Title
Relevant Index Item
517919 All Other Telecommunications
Satellite tracking stations
Data Processing, Hosting, and
518210
Computer data storage services
Related Services
54, Professional and Technical Services
541330 Engineering Services
Engineering services
Geophysical Surveying and
541360
Aerial geophysical surveying services
Mapping Services
Custom Computer Programming
541511
Computer software programming services, custom
Services
Computer Systems Design
CAD (computer-aided design) systems integration
541512
Services
design services
Computer Facilities Management Computer systems facilities (i.e., clients' facilities)
541513
Services
management and operation services
Process, Physical Distribution,
541614
Customs consulting services
and Logistics Consulting Services
Other Scientific and Technical
541690
Energy consulting services
Consulting Services
Research and Development in
Nanobiotechnologies research and experimental
541713
Nanotechnology
development laboratories
Research and Development in the
Physical, Engineering, and Life
Guided missile and space vehicle engine research
541715
Sciences (except Nanotechnology and development
and Biotechnology)
56, Administrative and Waste Services
561210 Facilities Support Services
Military base support services
Security Guards and Patrol
561612
Patrol services, security
Services
561613 Armored Car Services
Armored Car Services
61, Education Services
Elementary and Secondary
611110
Military academies, elementary or secondary
Schools
Colleges, Universities, and
611310
Academies, military service (college)
Professional Schools
611512 Flight Training
Military flight instruction training
Other Technical and Trade
Specialized military training (except flight
611519
Schools
instruction, academies, and basic training)
71, Arts, Entertainment, and Recreation
712110 Museums
Military museums
81, Other Services, Except Public Administration
Computer and Office Machine
Computer equipment repair and maintenance
811212
Repair and Maintenance
services without retailing new computers
Communication Equipment
Communication equipment repair and
811213
Repair and Maintenance
maintenance services

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

NAICS NAICS Title
Other Electronic and Precision
811219 Equipment Repair and
Maintenance
92, Public Administration
928110 National Security

Page I-19

Relevant Index Item
Radar and sonar equipment repair and
maintenance services
Armed forces

Temporary Codes (61-64)
States and/or regional offices may request the establishment of a temporary code. Temporary
codes are set up and removed by the national office and new codes are made available to the
states and regional offices.
Temporary codes are to be used when it has been determined that a situation…
 May not fit any of the existing comment codes,
 Applies to an entire area, region, or industry, and
 Typically will last for a short duration, but is not a permanent change.
Note: QCEW used code 61 to identify records that were impacted by the 2017 NAICS revision.
Code
61

Title
NAICS 2017
Direct,
Consolidation, or
Split

Direction

E/N

+/–

N

QCEW Description
Change in the record’s NAICS code
effective first quarter 2017 resulting from a
direct one-to-one NAICS revision change,
a consolidation of more than one NAICS
code to one code, or the records coded in
one code recoded into one of a limited set
of codes split from the original code.

State-Specific Codes (65-74)
(Currently not used by QCEW)
Ten codes previously reserved exclusively for state-specific CES use. These may be used
in the future by QCEW.

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

September 2019

Page I-20

Tax or Coverage Changes (75-79)
Information on tax rate changes, taxable wage base changes, coverage changes, etc., should be
provided to the regional office in a timely manner as well as be included in the remarks section
of the EQUI Transmittal Form.
Code

Title

Direction

E/N

QCEW Description

75

Change in tax rate

+/–

E

Change in the employer's tax rate or in the
industry's overall tax rate causes a notable
change in the contributions due or in the
contributions-to-taxable-wages ratio.

76

Change in
reimbursing/
nonreimbursing
status

+/–

E

Change in the status from reimbursing to
nonreimbursing status or from
nonreimbursing to reimbursing status.

77

Change in UI
coverage

+/–

E

Change from non-UI-covered status to UIcovered status or from UI-covered status to
non-UI-covered status.

78

Change in taxable
wage base

+/–

E

Change in the taxable wage base results in
a change in taxable wages and
contributions from expected levels.

79

Change in taxable
wages and/or
contributions

+/–

E

Change in taxable wages and/or
contributions. Examples: an increase may
result from hiring new employees after
typical taxable wage obligations are met
(excluding first quarter) causing an unusual
increase in taxable wages and
contributions. A decrease may result from
an unusual layoff of employees causing an
unexpected drop in taxable wages and
contributions. Also included in this code
would be cases where the taxable-wage-tototal-wage ratio is atypical. Example: a
significant number of higher-paid
employees would have total wages higher
than the taxable wage base.

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

September 2019

Page I-21

Coding and Classification Changes (80-82)
Coding and classification changes are divided into three types, defined in Section 2.3.1.
 Unclassified to classified
 Noneconomic changes
 Economic changes
Note: Comment codes are not required, but can be helpful, for noneconomic code changes with
an appropriate ARS Response Code.
Code

Title

Direction

E/N

QCEW Description

80

Change in
unclassified
(NAICS 999999 or
county 9xx) to
classified NAICS
or county

+/–

N

Unclassified or unknown NAICS or
county code changed to a classified
NAICS code (from NAICS 999999 to
another NAICS) or to a classified county
(from county 995-999 to a specific county
code).

81

Noneconomic code
change

+/–

N

Change in NAICS, county, township
(New England and New Jersey), and/or
ownership code as a result of a
noneconomic code change.

82

Economic code
change

+/–

E

Change in NAICS, county, township
(New England and New Jersey), and/or
ownership code as a result of an economic
code change.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Page I-22

Reporting Issues (00, 83-93)
Use these codes when reporting practices change but the employer did not alter
operations, or when the content or scope of the report changed.
83

Data previously
reported by the
firm are reported
now by a
Professional
Employer
Organization
(PEO); data
previously
reported by a PEO
are reported now
by the firm

84

+/–

N

Data previously reported by the firm are
reported now by a PEO/Leasing Firm or
data previously reported by a PEO/Leasing
Firm are now reported by the firm.
Where possible, include
predecessor/successor links.

+/–

N

DO NOT USE. NOT A COMMENT CODE USED
IN QCEW.

+

E

New establishment or worksite. If an
employer had multiple worksites and
started to report each separately (e.g., on
the Multiple Worksite Report), those new
breakouts would be coded 90. If the same
employer opened a brand new worksite,
that new unit would be coded 85.

85

New establishment
or worksite

86

Establishment
permanently out
of business

+/—

E

Establishment is permanently inactivated
or out of business. (Use alternative codes,
02, 04, or 06-10, for temporary business
disruptions.)

87

Reactivated UI
account or
worksite

+/—

E/N

Account or worksite report reactivated after
being coded inactive or out-of-business.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Page I-23

—

E/N

Some worksites or portions of the UI
account are sold or reorganized into more
than one new establishment with new UI
account numbers. When this occurs, the
worksite(s) or portions of the original UI
account are in the process of closing.
There is typically a continual decrease in
employment. (Use comment code 86
when the UI account/worksite is inactive
or finally has zero or near-zero
employment and wages.) Do not use for
new units or breakout of new QCEW
worksites.

Establishment
merger/acquisition

N/A

E/N

Existing establishment buys or acquires all
or some worksites or portions of another
UI account(s). Show a
predecessor/successor link with comment
code 92 or 93 to identify partial or full
transaction.

90

Reporter changes
basis of reporting
— greater detail

N/A

N

UI account has made a change in its basis
of reporting resulting in a report with
more detail, providing new or improved
multi-establishment breakout either by
providing a new account breakout or
breakout of an existing worksite for the
first time. Show Predecessor/Successor
links.

91

Reporter changes
basis of reporting
— less detail

N/A

N

UI account has made a change in its basis
of reporting resulting in a report with less
detail, either collapsing the entire account
or some combination of worksites. Show
Predecessor/Successor links.

88

Establishment
dissolution

89

September 2019

92

Partial
Predecessor/
Successor
transactions

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

N/A

E/N

Page I-24

New or existing UI account/worksite(s)
that represents a partial
predecessor/successor relationship. Such
relationships occur when:
 A predecessor’s employees and/or
business are acquired by more than
one UI account/worksite. The
successors may or may not have
previously existed.
OR



The predecessor continues to exist, but
some of the employees or portions of
the business are acquired by one or
more UI accounts/worksites.
OR



A portion of the predecessor’s
employees are acquired by one or
more UI accounts/ worksites, and the
balance of employment can be
explained by an economic event such
as a layoff or closing.

Show Predecessor/Successor links.

93

Full Predecessor/
Successor transfer

N/A

E/N

New or existing UI account(s)/worksite(s)
that represent a full successor relationship.
The old UI account(s)/worksite(s) is/are
either inactive or has zero employment.
Show predecessor/successor link(s).

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Comment Codes

Page I-25

Verification (94-99)
Use these codes when data are being verified or have been verified.
Code

Title

Direction

E/N

94

QCEW Description
DO NOT USE. NOT A COMMENT CODE USED
IN QCEW.

95

Data verified using
CES

+/–

N

Employment data verified by comparing
Current Employment Statistics (CES)
sample data with quarterly reports for the
same reporting unit or UI account.

96

Data used pending
verification

N/A

N

Data used as reported until an explanation
and/or correction are received.

97

Data verified using
Wage Records

+/–

N

QCEW data accepted by the state based on
a comparison with data aggregated from
wage records. Wage record employment
totals cover the entire quarter and not each
specific month. Therefore, wage record
totals may be somewhat larger than QCEW
employment, although total wages should
be in close agreement. A review of
individual wage records may also identify
unusual wage payments or may explain
significant changes in average wages.

98

Data
verified/accepted
by EDIC

+/–

N

The EDI Center (EDIC) will assign this
code to worksite records they export to the
states if they are satisfied that the data are
accurate, and that none of the other codes is
more appropriate. States should not assign
or change this code, since it distinguishes
EDIC-verified data from state-verified
data.

99

Data verified, see
narrative

N/A

E/N

Data verified, but cannot be explained by a
standardized comment code. A Narrative
Comment must be provided.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-1

Appendix J – Imputation Formulas
The standard state systems, EXPO and WIN, include the capability to impute (estimate)
economic data that the state has not received in time to complete quarterly processing.
Imputation is discussed in general terms in Chapter 8 – Imputation of Missing and Delinquent
Data. Chapter 8 focuses on state analysts' responsibilities for reviewing imputed data and related
edit results, and for making changes where appropriate. This appendix provides detailed
information about the imputation processing performed by the State systems.
Selection for Imputation
The standard state systems generate micro level imputations for the following situations:
• A delinquent account, where no employment or wage fields were reported, that last reported
within a parameter-controlled number of quarters (typically no more than the last two) or
• A delinquent Multiple Worksite Report (MWR) and the account’s master record was
reported or
• A delinquent MWR and the account’s master record was reported within the last two quarters
or
• A delinquent master record if the current quarter MWR was reported or
• A current quarter missing at least one employment field data if the current quarter total
wages were reported or
• Current quarter missing taxable wages or contributions if the current quarter total wages were
reported or
• An MWR or master account Quarterly Contributions Report (QCR) is already imputed but
new data were received which adjusts the missing data
The systems will not impute in the following cases:
• The account is inactive or
• The account did not report for a parameter-controlled number of quarters (typically the last
two) or
• Imputations are not allowed by the program parameters or
• The account has been previously imputed or is fully reported or
• The worksite does not have a matching master record
For each record selected for imputation, the state system examines the initial liability and end of
liability dates to determine if the record was only partially active during the quarter. If the end of
liability date is within the processed quarter, the month and day are used to determine if the
record was active for the entire quarter or only for one or two months. If the record was active
for all three months an indicator is set to “3” but would be reduced by one for each month that
the record was inactive based on the end of liability date. If the end of liability date is within the
quarter, then the indicator would also be adjusted for the number of months in the quarter for
which the account was not active.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-2

If the indicator is less than three, a proration factor, Prorate, is computed as the fraction of the
quarter for which the account is liable. The default for the Prorate is a factor of 1.0000000. An
account active for two months would be prorated by a factor of 0.6666667; an account active for
only one month would be prorated by a factor of 0.3333333. Those with no full months of
activity show a zero proration factor. This factor is used throughout the Total Wage and
Employment imputation processes.
Nomenclature
In the pages that follow, several abbreviations and subscripts are used. Although these will
generally be described with each specific method or formula, the list below provides a general
reference. Key field names include:
Mon1
Mon2
Mon3
MonX
TOTW
TAXW
CTRB

First month’s employment
Second month’s employment
Third month’s employment
Any month’s employment (indiscriminate)
Total wages
Taxable wages
Contributions due

Subscripts are used for identifying quarters, as well as master, worksite, and macro record
values. The subscript values include:
c
cs
p
ps
cy
py
Mast
Wkst
Mac
IncMax
DecMax

Current quarter data
Current quarter summed worksite data, using only the units
active in both current and prior quarter, less any worksites
already used for current quarter prorations
Prior quarter data
Prior quarter summed worksite data, using only the units active
in both current and prior quarter, less any worksites already used
for current quarter prorations
Same quarter for prior year
Prior quarter for previous year
Master record value
Worksite value
Macro record value
Increase between quarters exceeds a parameter (e.g., 25% – state
specific – applies only to non-seasonal accounts).
INCMax = 1 + (parm value/100).
Decrease between quarters exceeds a parameter (e.g., 20% –
state specific – applies only to non-seasonal accounts).
DECMax = 1 – (parm value/100).

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-3

Indicator Flags and Code Settings
For each employment, total wage, taxable wage, and contributions due imputation, the state
system assigns two codes. A 4-digit code explains if the imputation worked or failed and why it
worked or failed. This code is not normally stored in the system but appears on output to help
users review the results. The complete set of successful imputation codes and imputation failure
codes are listed at the end of this appendix.
The second type of code is an indicator flag for each economic data field (monthly employment,
total wages, taxable wages, and contributions). These indicator flags are stored on the state
system and are submitted to national office on the EQUI file. Indicator flags are defined at the
end of this appendix.
Before any economic data for the quarter are extracted, entered by state staff, or imputed, the
state system contains zeros for the data field and "M" for the corresponding indicator. These are
the initial values. If no reported data are extracted or entered, and if imputation fails, the initial
values (zero data and indicator M) will be included on the EQUI file.
Imputation Methodology
The imputation information below is a compendium of formulae and features used in EXPO
and/or WIN. Not all formulae and features are used by both systems. EXPO and WIN
documentation should be used for more system specific details.
The imputation formulae are described by data element. state
Total Wage Imputation
Two situations determine if the Total Wages are missing. The first is simple: if the Total Wage
Indicator flag is set to ‘M’, it is missing. The other condition is substantially more involved. If
the Total Wages are imputed (with an ‘E’ indicator flag), and if it is a worksite (MEEI = 3 or 5)
that is part of a multi whose Total Wages for all worksites are missing, and if the account’s
master record was modified, then Total Wages for the worksite are missing.
If Total Wages are not missing, an indicator of ‘R’ or blank is retained and the record is tested
for Taxable Wages. An account that requires a Total Wage imputation is processed differently
depending on its MEEI code. Master, single, and worksite records are each dealt with
separately.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-4

Master Account Total Wage Imputation (TOT1)
If some of the worksites of the UI account have reported Total Wages, the master record’s Total
Wages are imputed as the sum of the worksites’ Total Wages. An ‘S’ Total Wage Indicator code
and an imputation code TOT1 are assigned, and the following formula is used.
TotWc = ∑TotW Wkst

Equation J-1

Example:
Worksite
RUN
00001
00002
00004
00005

Total Wages
$40,030
20,045
25,090
32,115

TotWc = ∑TotW Wkst = $40,030 + $20,045 + $25,090 + $32,115 = $117,280
If the worksite Total Wages are not reported, this method is unusable. Since this is the only
Total Wages imputation formula specifically for master records, masters not using this method
will pass on to the single account imputation methods below.
Single Account Total Wage Imputation
If a single or master record (MEEI = 1, 2, 4, or 6) has any reported employment or wage data, the
missing data fields are imputed regardless of how many quarters the data fields were already
imputed. A parameter is used in each of the state systems to determine the number of quarters
for which imputations can be continuously generated for a delinquent account.
If the delinquent account was already imputed for the number of consecutive quarters allowed
(typically for two consecutive quarters), it would not be system-imputed again. An ‘N’ Total
Wage Indicator and an Imputation Report Code of TOTA are assigned. The Total Wage data
field will retain the zeroes it was originally assigned when the quarter was first initialized.
If an account has a seasonal code, the state systems will skip to the Seasonal Account Total
Wage Imputation formula following the standard methodology. Seasonal codes are state record
specific.
Total Wage Ratio Imputation (TOT2)
The prior-year same-quarter (e.g., 2020/4), and prior-year prior-quarter (e.g., 2020/3), Total
Wages (i.e., four and five quarters before the processed quarter (e.g., 2021/4)) are checked for

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-5

non-zero values. If they are greater than zero, and the quarter immediately before the one
processed (e.g., 2021/3) shows either reported or non-zero Total Wages, the TOT2 edit is
employed. A Total Wage Indicator code of ‘E’ is assigned to the record. This edit uses the
following formula:
TotW cy
TotW py
If Ratio > IncMax or < DecMax
Set Ratio to Limit
TotWc = Ratio × TotW p × Prorate
Ratio =

Equation J-2

Where

Inc Max = 1 + PK

DecMax = 1 - PK

x
100

Equation J-3

y
100

Example: Record was active throughout the entire quarter.
Year/Q
2021/4
2021/3
2021/2
2021/1
2020/4
2020/3

Q
c
p

Total Wages
Missing TotW
$123,400
127,900
134,230
168,500
125,120

cy
py

INCMax = 1 + (25/100) = 1.25
DECMax = 1 – (20/100) = .80
Ratio = TotWcy
TotWpy

= 168,500
125,120

=

1.3467

Ratio > INCMax
Ratio = Limit = 1.25
TotW = Ratio x TotWp × Prorate (equal to 1 in this example)
TotW = 1.25 × 123,400 × 1.0000000
TotW = 154,250

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-6

If this TOT2 formula is used, processing continues on to the Taxable Wage Imputation.
Otherwise, processing transfers to the Other Total Wage Imputation for Singles section, which
follows the Seasonal Account Wage Imputation section below.
Seasonal Account Total Wage Imputation (TOT3)
This method no longer exists in EXPO but does in WIN. Seasonal accounts (i.e., those identified
as seasonal for the particular state) are not subject to the maximum increase and maximum
decrease restrictions used in the TOT2 approach. Each state must identify those records that they
choose to treat as seasonal accounts. If a record is treated as seasonal, ratio imputations (TOT2)
are bypassed and the record is imputed using the method below.
Seasonal accounts require historical data from one year ago to make imputations for the
processed quarter.
The seasonal account’s Total Wage and First Month Employment Indicators from the year-ago
quarter are checked for imputed or missing data. If either is reported, the TOT3 imputation
method is used:
TotW = TotW cy × Prorate

Equation J-4

Example: Record was active throughout the entire quarter and is in a seasonal industry.
Year/Q
2018/4
2018/3
2018/2
2018/1
2017/4
2017/3

Q
c
p
cy
py

Total Wages
Missing TotW
$123,400
127,900
134,230
168,500
125,120

TotW = TotWcy × Prorate
TotW = 168,500 x 1.0000000 = 168,500.
If the TOT3 formula is used, a Total Wage Indicator of ‘E’ is assigned, and processing then
continues with the Taxable Wage Imputation section. Otherwise, continue to the other single
unit Total Wage Imputation formulas.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-7

Macro File Total Wages (TOT8)
This method no longer exists in EXPO but does in WIN. The remaining accounts will be
processed using this Macro Total Wages imputation formula. Prior quarter and prior year’s same
quarter macro cell data are used.
The TOT8 imputation method using the following formula:

TotW =

TotW p × TotW Maccy
TotW Mac p

× Prorate

Equation J-5

Here, the Mac subscripts indicate the Macro File data, p indicates prior quarter data, and cy
indicates a prior-year, same-quarter value. The Prorate factor denotes the portion of the quarter
during which the account is active. A Total Wage Indicator code of ‘E’ is assigned. Processing
then continues with the Taxable Wage Imputation section.
Example:
The macro cell has prior quarter and prior year data. Record was active throughout the entire
quarter and is in a seasonal industry.
Year/Q
TotWc
TotWp
TotWMaccy
TotWMacp
Prorate
TotW = TotWp × TotWMaccy
TotWMacp

Total Wages
Missing TotW
$123,400
927,900
934,230
1.0000000
×

Prorate

TotW = ((123,400 x 927,900) / 934,230) × 1.0000000 = 122,564.
If the Macro File records are not found, or if the prior quarter macro Total Wages are zero, or if
the prior year's same quarter Total Wages is zero, the imputation fails and the imputation failure
code of TOTB is assigned. Subsequent imputation attempts are bypassed unless the account’s
data are modified, clearing the edit flag. After the TOTB code is assigned, the state system will
not impute Taxable Wages and Contributions but does attempt to impute employment.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-8

Other Total Wage Imputation for Singles or Masters
Prior Quarter Total Wages (TOT4)
This imputation method for non-seasonal single accounts uses the account’s prior quarter total
wages. If prior quarter Total Wages are zero, and they are either imputed or missing, then the
state system will attempt to use current quarter employment to predict the current Total Wages.
If the employment is missing or imputed as well, a TOTA failure code (indicating that
insufficient data exist to impute the Total Wages) is assigned. Taxable Wages and Contributions
are also not imputable, and the programs will skip to the Employment Imputation section.
For an account with non-zero or reported data in the prior quarter Total Wages, the following
TOT4 imputation method is used:
TotW = TotW p × Prorate

Equation J-6

Note that the p subscript denotes prior quarter data and Prorate notes the proration factor, or the
fraction of the quarter for which the account is active. A Total Wage Indicator code of ‘E’ is
assigned if the Total Wages can be imputed using the TOT4 method, and processing moves to
the Taxable Wage Imputation section.
Example:
Record was active throughout the entire prior quarter and is in a seasonal industry.
Year/Q
TotWc
TotWp
Prorate

Total Wages
Missing TotW
$123,400
1.0000000

TotWc = TotWp × Prorate
TotWc = 123,400 × 1.0000000 = 123,400.
Total Wage Imputations Using Employment (TOT9)
These cases are very rare. Not only must both current and prior quarter total wages be missing
but current quarter monthly employment as well as year ago macro employment must be
reported. To attempt to make a Total Wage Imputation for this type of account, auxiliary macro
information is needed.
If the Macro File record for the same industry, county, and ownership exists for the same quarter
of the previous year and the employment and wage data are greater than zero, the TOT9 formula
is used. If one or both of these values is zero, the imputation fails with a failure code of TOTE.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-9

When the macro data do exist and have both employment and wage data for the prior year’s
same quarter, a total wage imputation can be generated, identified by the TOT9 code (imputed
from macro data). A Total Wage Indicator of ‘E’ is assigned. This is computed from the
equation:

TotW =

(Mon1 + Mon2 + Mon3) × Prorate × TotW Maccy
(Mon 1Maccy + Mon 2Maccy + Mon 3Maccy )

Equation J-7

in which Mac identifies macro data fields, cy represents the prior year’s same quarter data, and
Prorate is the proration factor, denoting the fraction of the quarter during which the account is
active. The program then moves to the Taxable Wage Imputation section.
Example: The macro cell has prior year data. The micro record was active throughout the entire
quarter and has employment data.
Year/Q
Current
Current, year ago
Micro Emp, current
Macro Emp, year ago

TotWc
TotWcy
Moncy
MonMacp
Prorate

Micro Total
Macro Total
Wages
Wages
Missing TotW
$123,400
1.0000000

1,567,000

Mon1 Mon2 Mon3
5
50

6
55

6
55

TotWc = ((Mon1 + Mon2 + Mon3) × Prorate × TotWMaccy ) ÷
(Mon1Maccy + Mon2Maccy + Mon3Maccy)
TotWc = ((17 × 1.0000000 × 1,567,000) ÷ (160)
= 26,639,000 ÷ 160 = 166,493.75 ≅ 166,494
Worksite Total Wage Imputation (TOT5/TOT6)
Worksite Total Wage imputation uses the data from the master record and the other worksites to
generate data for each worksite.
If some or all worksites are missing (for example, the MWR is not received), then the state
system will attempt to impute the worksite data. If the current quarter’s master record could not
be imputed, an imputation failure code of TOTD is assigned. If the prior quarter master record
Total Wages are not available, then an imputation failure code of TOTC is assigned (indicating
summed worksite and master Total Wages for the prior quarter do not exist).
If the master’s prior quarter Total Wages are zero, the worksite’s Total Wages are forced to zero,
but no failure code results.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-10

When this occurs, no imputation is made for Taxable Wages and Contributions for the missing
worksites, and the program passes to the Employment Imputation section.
If none of the three previous conditions exist, the state system will impute the missing Total
Wages for each worksite in the account with each receiving a successful imputation code of
TOT5. The following formula is used:

Ratio =

TotW cs
TotW ps

( Ratio = 0 if TotW ps = 0 )

Equation J-8

TotW = Ratio × TotW Wkst p
in which cs and ps represent specialized current quarter master and prior quarter worksite data,
respectively, and p identifies the prior quarter value for the individual worksite. Initially the cs
Total Wage value is just the master record’s current quarter Total Wages. The ps wage value is
initially the sum of worksite Total Wages from the prior quarter using only the units that remain
active through both the prior and the current quarter.
After a worksite has been imputed in this manner the cs and ps wage values are adjusted by
removing this worksite’s current and prior quarter Total Wages, respectively. This is done using
the following formulae
TotWcsadjusted = TotW cs - TotW

Equation J-9

TotWpsadjusted = TotW ps - TotW Wkst p

Equation J-10

in which the TotW value subtracted on the top line is the worksite’s current quarter Total Wage
value that was just imputed, and the value subtracted on the lower line is the same worksite’s
prior quarter Total Wages. This subtraction will produce a slightly different ratio for the next
worksite in the multi, which will counterbalance any rounding errors that would normally occur
by simply using a fixed ratio based upon the master account’s current and prior quarter Total
Wages. In addition, if some of the worksites had terminated at the end of the previous quarter,
they will be excluded, eliminating an out-of-balance condition found when the inactive unit’s
wages are included in the master records data.
Once the worksite Total Wages are imputed for all active worksites, the program moves to the
Taxable Wage Imputation section.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-11

Example:
A multi-establishment account with ten reporting units had both the contribution report and the
MWR reported in the previous quarter. The account’s contribution report data were received and
entered for the current quarter, but the current quarter MWR form was not received. The prior
quarter total wages for the master were $235,166, with $247,804 reported for the current quarter.
The ten worksites (reporting units numbered 00001 through 00010) total wages are listed below.
Even though the account was out-of-balance by $5 in the prior quarter, no adjustment was made
to the reported data. The prorations of total wages for the current quarter are listed below.
Worksite
RUN

Previous Qtr
Total Wages

TotWcs

TotWps

Ratio

Current Qtr
Total Wages

00001

45,326

247,804

235,161

1.053763

47,763

00002

18,095

200,041

189,835

1.053762

19,068

00003

5,712

180,973

171,740

1.053762

6,019

00004

30,479

174,954

166,028

1.053762

32,118

00005

9,401

142,836

135,549

1.053759

9,906

00006

4,366

132,930

126,148

1.053762

4,601

00007

14,825

128,329

121,782

1.053760

15,622

00008

7,290

112,707

106,957

1.053760

7,682

00009

40,258

105,025

99,667

1.053759

42,422

00010

59,409

62,603

59,409

1.053763

62,603

For the table above,
• The first column is the reporting unit number (RUN),
• The second column shows the worksite’s prior quarter Total Wages,
• The third column is the current quarter’s master Total Wages less any current quarter
worksite imputation already made,
• The fourth column denotes the prior quarter summed worksite Total Wages less any prior
quarter Total Wages already accounted for in prior lines,
• The fifth column is the ratio of current to prior quarter Total Wages, and
• The sixth column is the worksite’s estimated Total Wages for the new quarter.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-12

Note: The worksite totals used in the prior quarter values (the ps subscript) will exclude any of
the worksites that were active in the previous quarter but inactive in the imputed quarter. If this
were not used, imputations would be short by the Total Wages represented in the inactivated
worksites, which would cause an extensive amount of manual intervention to reconcile the outof-balance condition.
The first worksite uses the full master account Total Wages divided by the prior quarter’s
summed worksite Total Wages to produce the first ratio. This ratio is multiplied by the prior
quarter’s worksite Total Wages to produce the imputed current quarter Total Wages for the
worksite. Then the first reporting unit’s prior quarter Total Wages are subtracted from the
column 4 value to give the next line’s revised prior quarter Total Wage sum. The imputed
worksite’s Total Wage value for the current quarter is subtracted from the column 3 value to
produce the second line’s current quarter Total Wages sum. The same process is repeated
through the rest of the worksites. Rounding causes a particular unit’s Total Wages to vary
slightly from the original ratio, the adjusted current and prior quarter summed values produce a
revised ratio to adjust for the discrepancy.
Using a constant ratio for worksite distribution produces an average variance from exact
balancing that increases as the number of worksites increases. The imputed difference from an
exact balance in either wages or employment is found from the equation:
Out - of - Balance Avg =

RUN Ct
2

Equation J-11

where RUN Ct is a count of the number of RUNs for the account.
If the master record’s Total Wages were reported (indicator “R”), then the worksite Total Wages
that are generated are assigned a Total Wage Indicator code of ‘P’. If, however, the master
record was imputed, then the Total Wage Indicator code of ‘E’ would be assigned.
EXPO also allows the option of online seasonal proration of total wages. Total wages are prorated
in the same manner as non-seasonal prorations except instead of using the prior quarter, year ago
is used as the denominator of the ratio:
Ratioseas = TotWcs ÷ TotWcys
TotW = TotWcy × Ratioseas
to project total wages forward.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-13

Taxable Wage Imputation
Selection Criteria
Five fields (Status Code, Type of Coverage, Total Wages, Total Wage Indicator Code, and
Taxable Wage Indicator Code) are used to determine if a Taxable Wage imputation should be
made. The selection criteria for each field is:
• Status Code (impute unless inactive or impute if Status Code not equal to 2)
• Type of Coverage Code (must be experience-rated or Type of Coverage Code = 0 or 2)
• Taxable Wage Indicator Code (impute if M for missing as well as if E for imputed when the
master record data were changed).
• Total Wages and the Total Wage Indicator (if Total Wages are zero or the Total Wages are
missing (indicator M) and cannot be imputed, do not impute Taxable Wages)
Single and Master Taxable Wage Imputations (TAX1)
Total Wages greater than zero are required from the previous year’s same quarter to make a
direct imputation for the Taxable Wages of an account. This method uses the following
equation:

TaxWc =

TotW × TaxW cy
TotW cy

Equation J-12

where cy represents data from the previous year’s same quarter. Once the Taxable Wages are
computed, an imputation is made for Contributions Due. (See the Contributions Due section
after Worksite Taxable Wage Imputations.)
Example:
Year/Q
Current
Current, year ago

Total Wage
Formula
TotWc
TotWcy

Total Wages
765,000
744,000

Taxable Wages
Formula
TaxW
TaxWcy

Taxable Wages
Missing
456,000

TaxWc = (TotWc × TaxWcy) ÷ TotWcy
TaxWc = (765,000 × 456,000) ÷ 744,000 = (348,840,000,000 ÷ 744,000)
468,870.97 ≅ 468,871
If the record does not have Total Wages greater than zero, an imputation failure code of TAXA is
assigned. This also means that the state system then passes on to the Employment Imputation
Section since it is impossible to generate Contributions Due without Taxable Wages.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-14

Worksite Taxable Wage Imputations (TAX3 and TAX4)
Worksite proration of Taxable Wages is made when the Taxable Wages and Total Wages were
reported for the master record. In these cases, the Total Wages would have already been
prorated from the master record’s Total Wages. If the master record data were imputed, then the
state system would attempt to impute the missing Taxable Wages based on the ratios of the
imputed Total Wages.
If an imputation failure occurred for the master's Total Wages, the worksite’s Taxable Wage
imputation also fails and is coded TAXC (not imputed due to master imputation failure). If no
Total Wage imputation failure occurred in the master account but the master record’s Total
Wages equal zero, the worksites are each assigned zero as their Taxable Wages and a successful
imputation code of TAX4 (zero Taxable Wages from master). In either case, it is impossible to
impute Contributions Due. The process moves to the Employment Imputation section.
The remaining cases use the following formula to compute Taxable Wages for each worksite and
are assigned the successful imputation code of TAX3. The formula is
TaxWc =

TotWc × TaxW Mast

Equation J-13

TotW Mast

in which Mast denotes the master account’s data. This successful imputation moves the record
to the Contribution Imputation section of the program, which is described below. As with Total
Wages, however, rounding errors will be adjusted through the use of diminishing sums (taxable
and total wages reduced by individual worksite values) as they are imputed.
Example:
A multi-establishment account has five reporting units for which the Taxable Wages need to be
prorated. The QCR Total Wages are $996,053 and its Taxable Wages are $747,804. The five
worksites (reporting units numbered 00001 through 00005) reported total wages on the MWR.
The prorations of Taxable Wages for the current quarter are listed below.
RUN

TotWc

Adjusted
TotWMast

Adjusted
TaxWMast

TaxWc

Ratio

Master
00000

$996,053

$996,053

$747,804

$747,804

0.750767

00001

118,095

996,053

747,804

88,662

0.750767

00002

95,712

877,958

659,142

71,857

0.750767

00003

230,479

782,246

587,285

173,036

0.750768

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-15

RUN

TotWc

Adjusted
TotWMast

Adjusted
TaxWMast

TaxWc

Ratio

00004

129,401

551,767

414,249

97,150

0.750768

00005

422,366

422,366

317,099

317,099

0.750768

Contributions Due Imputation
It is impossible to have an imputation failure for Contributions. However, Taxable Wages must
be greater than zero to produce an imputation for Contributions. Otherwise, Contributions Due
is left as zero and the program passes to the Employment Imputation section.
Contributions Due is defined to be the Taxable Wage amount multiplied by the Tax Rate for the
account. The Tax Rate of the master record is used to compute worksite Contribution prorations.
The successful imputation code is CTB1.
Single and Master Contributions
The formula for single and master imputations is:
Ctrbc =

( TxRt Int × TaxWc )
100,000

Equation J-14

in which TxRtInt represents the tax rate (multiplied by 1000) of the account (or the master account
if the imputation is performed on a worksite).
Example:
A single unit with $87,549 in Taxable Wages and a Tax Rate of 2.17 has Contributions of:
Ctrbc = (TxRtInt × TaxWc) ÷ 100,000 = ((2.17 × 1000) × 87,549) ÷ 100,000
= 189,981,330 ÷ 100,000 = 1,899.81 = 1,900
Worksite Contributions
The formula for worksite is:

Ctrbc =

( Ctrbcs × TaxWc )
TaxWcs

Equation J-15

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-16

This method uses the counterbalancing method for rounding errors. The cs subscript denotes the
summed current quarter worksite expected values, which start out as the master account’s
Contribution and Taxable Wage values, but are decreased by each worksite’s associated values.
The adjustments are

CtrbcsAdjusted = Ctrbcs - Ctrb

Equation J-16

TaxW csAdjusted = TaxW cs - TaxW

Equation J-17

The Contributions-versus-Taxable-Wages ratio provides the worksite equivalent of Tax Rate for
worksite Contribution imputation. As the values are reduced, however, the effective Tax Rate
(summed Contributions divided by summed Taxable Wages) will vary slightly. This variation
counteracts any potential cumulative effects of possible rounding errors so that the account
remains in balance.
Example:
A multi-establishment account with five reporting units where the Taxable Wages have been
prorated. The QCR Contributions Due need to be imputed.
Adjusted
CtrbMast

Adjusted
TaxWMast

TaxW

Ctrb

Ratio

Master
00000

$17,053

$747,804

$747,804

$17,053

0.022804

00001

17,053

747,804

88,662

2,022

0.022804

00002

15,031

659,142

71,857

1,639

0.022804

00003

13,392

587,285

173,036

3,946

0.022803

00004

9,446

414,249

97,150

2,215

0.022803

00005

7,231

317,099

317,099

7,231

0.022804

RUN

The next step is the Employment Imputation procedure, described below.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-17

Employment Imputation
Selection Criteria
If the employment indicator flags show ‘M’ for at least one month, then the state system will
attempt to impute the missing employment. Worksites may also be re-imputed if the master
record is received or is re-imputed. If the worksite has no historical quarter employment data
upon which to base an imputation for the current quarter, the existing hand-generated imputation
is left intact.
Once the system has determined whether any of the three months of employment require an
imputation, the primary employment imputation process divides into two main processes, one for
singles and master records, and one for worksites.
Single/Master Employment Imputations
Sum of Worksites (EMP2)
If the record is the master of a multi (MEEI code of 2), and if the worksite employment data are
not fully delinquent (i.e., at least one of the worksites show reported data in the first month of
employment), any missing employment months for the master account are imputed by summing
the worksite data for the missing months using the EMP2 imputation equations:
Mon1 = ∑ Mon 1Wkst

Equation J-18

Mon2 = ∑ Mon 2Wkst

Equation J-19

Mon3 = ∑ Mon 3Wkst

Equation J-20

in which Wkst denotes the worksite data.
Example:
An account’s MWR was received but the QCR is still missing. The master record is imputed
using the sum of the worksite data.
RUN

Mon1

Mon2

Mon2

Master
00000

Missing

Missing

Missing

00001

53

47

48

00002

110

94

87

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

RUN

Mon1

Mon2

Mon2

00003

392

358

370

00004

94

89

97

00005

31

31

31

Page J-18

Mon1 = ∑Mon1Wkst = 53 + 110 + 392 + 94 + 31 = 680
Mon2 = ∑Mon2Wkst = 47 + 94 + 358 + 89 + 31 = 619
Mon3 = ∑Mon3Wkst = 48 + 87 + 370 + 97 + 31 = 633
The remaining processing is for master accounts with delinquent worksite employment, as well
as all single accounts with missing employment fields. Here the processing splits between
seasonal single accounts and all other types. This processing is described in the Seasonal Single
Employment Imputations and Other Single/Master Employment Imputations sections that
follow.
Proration Factors
The initial setting of the Proration factor (the fraction of the quarter for which the account is in
active status - see Selection for Imputation for details) sets an initial liability and end of liability
month count value. For an account that is activated at the beginning of the second month of the
quarter, the liability month count is 2 (active for the last two months of the quarter). If the
account is terminated at the end of the first month of the quarter, the termination indicator is set
to 1 (active for the first month of the quarter). These indicators are used in each of the monthly
employment imputations, except for the worksite-to-master method just described (which is
based upon reported data in the worksites). For months with missing month fields, each of the
imputation methods to follow will be regulated by the following formula:

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

For Mon1 missing If MonCt Liab > 2 And MonCt Term > 0,

Page J-19

Equation J-21

Then Mon1 = Imp Else Mon1 = 0
For Mon2 missing If MonCt Liab > 1 And MonCt Term > 1

Equation J-22

Then Mon2 = Imp Else Mon2 = 0
For Mon3 missing If MonCt Liab > 0 And MonCt Term > 2

Equation J-23

Then Mon3 = Imp Else Mon3 = 0

in which MonCtLiab and MonCtTerm represent the liability and termination month counts,
respectively, as described above, and Imp denotes the employment imputation value for the
month. Therefore, the imputation is computed regardless of the month counts, but is only put in
place within the specific employment month if the initial liability and end-of-liability dates show
that the account is active during that month. Those months imputed as zero are still considered
successful imputation.
Single Employment Imputations (EMP9)
If the maximum number of consecutive delinquent quarters had been reached, the EMPB
imputation failure code is assigned. When the EMPB code is assigned, the imputation
processing has been completed.
For those remaining single accounts (with recently reported data in a prior quarter), a failure can
also occur if the Total Wages could not be imputed. If employment were imputed without Total
Wages, a partial record would result and is therefore not acceptable. This imputation code is
EMPF, which simply represents "employment imputation failure due to failed wage imputation
attempt."
This method no longer exists in EXPO but does in WIN. Remaining accounts are checked for
prior year, same quarter employment and Total Wages. If either of the prior year’s fields (Total
Wages or First Month Employment) is not missing, an imputation can be generated. This EMP9
imputation method follows for each month:

MonX =

TotW × MonX cy
TotW cy × Prorate

Equation J-24

in which MonX represents any of the three months that may be missing (Mon1, Mon2, or Mon3),
cy denotes prior year same quarter data, and Prorate indicates the proration factor, specifying the

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-20

portion of the quarter for which the account is active. Of course, this formula will not be applied
to any month not conforming to the liability and termination date range as specified in the
equations found in the Employment Imputation portion of this appendix. In addition, this
method requires the prior year total wages and the proration factor to be non-zero. If either is
zero, the imputed value is zero.
Example:
The record is in a seasonal industry and Total Wages were reported or have already been
imputed.
Year/Q

Mon1

Mon2

Mon3

TotW

Current

Missing

Missing

Missing

4,663,218

Current, year ago

161

194

187

4,338,764

Prorate

1.000000

1.000000

1.000000

Mon1c = (TotWc × Mon1cy) ÷ (TotWcy × Prorate)
= (4,663,218 × 161) ÷ (4,338,764 × 1.000000)
= (750,778,098) ÷ (4,338,764) = 173
Mon2c = (TotWc × Mon2cy) ÷ (TotWcy × Prorate)
= (4,663,218 × 194) ÷ (4,338,764 × 1.000000)
= (904,664,292) ÷ (4,338,764) = 209
Mon3c = (TotWc × Mon3cy) ÷ (TotWcy × Prorate)
= (4,663,218 × 187) ÷ (4,338,764 × 1.000000)
= (872,021,766) ÷ (4,338,764) = 201
Seasonal Single/Master Imputations Using Macro Data (EMP6)
The remaining seasonal accounts are those that have no employment or Total Wages from the
prior year. For these records, macro year-ago data reflecting the same cell (the same county,
ownership and NAICS code) are used. If macro data do not exist for the cell, the EMPC
imputation failure code is assigned (imputation not possible since macro record is non-existent).
If the record exists, the prior year employment and Total Wages are checked for zeroes. If either
are zero, an imputation is not made and the EMPD imputation failure code is assigned (not
estimated due to insufficient macro data).
If the macro cell employment and Total Wage values are greater than zero, the state system
successfully applies the following EMP6 imputation technique:

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

MonX c =

Page J-21

(Mon 1Maccy + Mon 2Maccy + Mon 3Maccy ) × TotWc
TotW Maccy × 3 × Prorate

Equation J-25

in which MonXc represents any of the three months that are missing, Mac identifies macro-level
data, cy specifies the prior year’s same quarter data, and Prorate denotes the quarter proration
factor (the fraction of the quarter for which the account is active).
Example:
The record is in a seasonal industry and Total Wages were reported or have already been
imputed. Macro data are used since the record’s own year ago data are not available. All three
months of employment are missing.
Year/Q

Mon1Maccy

Mon2Maccy

Mon3Maccy

TotWMaccy

TotW

Current

–

–

–

–

4,663,218

Current, year
ago

461

494

487

9,338,764

–

Prorate

1.000000

1.000000

1.000000

MonX = Mon1 = Mon2 = Mon3 =
((Mon1Maccy + Mon2Maccy + Mon3Maccy) × TotW) ÷ (TotWMaccy × 3 × Prorate)
= ((461+ 494 + 487) × 4,663,218) ÷ (9,338,764 × 3 × 1.000000)
= (1,442 × 4,663,218) ÷ (28,016,292)
= (6,724,360,356) ÷ (28,016,292)
= 240
Other Single/Master Employment Imputations
Non-seasonal accounts are also checked to see if the maximum allowable imputations have
already been reached. If so, the EMPB (insufficient data) failure code is assigned, and all
missing employment months remain missing.
Non-seasonal accounts also require previous quarter employment to generate a current quarter
imputation. If the previous quarter shows an inactive status, but the current quarter’s Total
Wages are greater than zero, a macro-based estimate is generated (the same as that described
above in the seasonal account imputation process. Failure codes (EMPC and EMPD) and the
success code (EMP6) are the same as those detailed above.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-22

Employment Ratio Imputations (EMP3)
If the record was active in the prior quarter, the state system identifies how many months of prior
quarter employment are available. If all of the three prior year employment months are positive,
the standard EMP3 imputation method is used. This method cannot be used for prior quarter
imputations because the prior year, prior quarter’s third month employment is not available.
Each missing month is treated separately. Month 1 Employment (January, April, July or
October) is estimated using the following equations:
Ratio =

Mon 1cy
Mon 3 py

If Ratio > IncMax or Ratio < DecMax

Equation J-26

Then Set Ratio to Limit
Mon1 = Mon 3 p × Ratio

Equation J-27

in which IncMax and DecMax are the greatest increase and decrease allowed. See Total Wage
Ratio Imputation (TOT2) for additional information on the ratios. The p subscript specifies the
prior quarter’s value, whereas the cy and py values represent the prior-year same-quarter and
prior-year prior-quarter values, respectively. These equations are used only when the first
month’s employment value is missing, and the record was active for that month.
The equations for Month 2 Employment (February, May, August or November) of the quarter
are listed below:
Ratio =

Mon 2cy
Mon 1cy

If Ratio > IncMax or Ratio < DecMax
Then Set Ratio to Limit
Mon2 = Mon1 × Ratio

Equation J-28

Equation J-29

where IncMax and DecMax again specify the ratio range for employment change. See Total Wage
Ratio Imputation (TOT2) for additional information on the ratios. cy represents the prior-year
same-quarter value. This second month imputation is only conducted for accounts that are active
during the second employment month and are missing this field.
The Month 3 Employment (March, June, September or December) are imputed using the
following formulae:

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Ratio =

Page J-23

Mon 3cy
Mon 2cy

Equation J-30

If Ratio > IncMax or Ratio < DecMax
Then Set Ratio to Limit

Equation J-31

Mon3 = Mon2 × Ratio
Once again the IncMax, DecMax, and cy values were previously defined.

Example:
The record is in a non-seasonal industry and year ago data and prior quarter data are available.
Year/Q

Mon1

Mon2

Mon3

Current Quarter

Missing

Missing

Missing

Prior Quarter,
same year

p

87

81

83

Current Quarter,
year ago

cy

72

75

98

Prior Quarter,
year ago

py

61

59

68

IncMax = 1 + (25/100) = 1.25
DecMax = 1 – (20/100) = .80
Mon1:
Ratio = (Mon1cy ÷ Mon3py)
= 72 ÷ 68 = 1.058823
Mon1 = Mon3p × Ratio
= 83 × 1.058823
= 88
Mon2:

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-24

Ratio = (Mon2cy ÷ Mon1cy)
= 75 ÷ 72 = 1.041667
Mon2 = Mon1 × Ratio
= 88 × 1.041667
= 92
Mon3:
Ratio = (Mon3cy ÷ Mon2cy)
= 98 ÷ 75 = 1.306667
Ratio = 1.306667 > 1.25; therefore Ratio = 1.25
Mon3 = Mon2 × Ratio
= 92 × 1.25
= 115
Prior Quarter Imputations (EMP4)
The remaining single records to impute were active in the prior quarter, but did not have
employment greater than zero in all three months in the previous year. If Third Month
Employment in the prior quarter is greater than zero, use the following EMP4 employment
imputation formulae:

MonX = Mon 3 p ×

TotW
TotW p × Prorate

If

TotW
< DecMax, MonX = Mon3p × DecMax
TotWp × Prorate

If

TotW
> IncMax, MonX = Mon3p × IncMax
TotWp × Prorate

Equation J-32

Equation J-33

If TotWp = 0, MonX = Mon3p
MonX denotes any month in the quarter with missing employment (if the record is active during
that month), p represents prior quarter data, DecMax and IncMax form the lower and upper limits
for the monthly employment change, and Prorate is a proration factor for the fraction of the
quarter during which the account is active.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-25

Example:
The record is in a non-seasonal industry but year-ago data are not available. Third Month
Employment in the prior quarter is greater than zero. All three months of the current quarter are
missing.
Year/Q

Mon1

Mon2

Mon3

TotW

Current
Quarter

Missing

Missing

Missing

699,009

87

81

83

608,283

Prior Quarter,
same year

p

Prorate = 1.000000
IncMax = 1 + (25/100) = 1.25
DecMax = 1 – (20/100) = .80

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-26

MonX = Mon3p × (TotW ÷ (TotWp × Prorate))
(TotW ÷ (TotWp × Prorate)) = 699,009 ÷ (608,283 × 1.000000)
= 1.14915
1.14915 is greater than 0.80 and is less than 1.25
MonX = Mon3p × (TotW ÷ (TotWp × Prorate))
= 83 × 1.14915
= 95
Prior Quarter AME Imputations (EMP5)
The remaining single and master records are those that were active in the prior quarter but had
zero employment in the third month of that quarter. Year ago data are not available. This EMP5
method uses non-zero prior quarter’s AME (average monthly employment) where the formula
follows:
AME p =

Mon 1p + Mon 2 p + Mon 3 p
3

Equation J-34

TotW
TotW p × Prorate

Equation J-35

MonX = AME p ×

If

TotW
< DecMax, MonX = AMEp × DecMax
TotWp × Prorate

If

TotW
> IncMax, MonX = AMEp × IncMax
TotW p × Prorate
If TotWp = 0, MonX = AMEp

where MonX is any missing employment month, p represents prior quarter data, DecMax and
IncMax bound the change in employment from the prior quarter’s AME value to the processed
quarter’s employment, and Prorate identifies the proration factor (the fraction of the quarter for
which the account is active).
Example:
The record is in a non-seasonal industry but year-ago data are not available. Third Month
Employment in the prior quarter is greater than zero. All three months of the current quarter are
missing.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-27

Year/Q

Mon1

Mon2

Mon3

TotW

Current Quarter

Missing

Missing

Missing

699,009

87

81

0

608,283

Prior Quarter,
same year

p

Prorate = 1.000000
IncMax = 1 + (25/100) = 1.25
DecMax = 1 – (20/100) = .80
AMEp = (Mon1p + Mon2p + Mon3p) ÷ 3
= (87 + 81 + 0) ÷ 3
= 168 ÷ 3 = 56
MonX = AMEp × (TotW ÷ (TotWp × Prorate))
(TotW ÷ (TotWp × Prorate)) = 699,009 ÷ (608,283 × 1.000000)
= 1.14915
1.14915 is greater than 0.80 and is less than 1.25
MonX = AMEp × (TotW ÷ (TotWp × Prorate))
= 56 × 1.14915
= 64
Single/Master Imputation Using Macro Data (EMP6)
If the record’s prior quarter AME equals zero, the state system looks for macro data in the same
industry, county, and ownership. If the cell does not exist, then the EMPC imputation failure
code is assigned (imputation not possible since Macro record is non-existent). If the macro
record is found, but either the employment or Total Wages equal zero, then the EMPD
imputation failure code is assigned (not imputed due to insufficient macro data). If non-zero
macro data are available, then a successful imputation is generated using the following EMP6
imputation formula:

MonX =

(Mon 1Maccy + Mon 2Maccy + Mon 3Maccy ) × TotW
TotW Maccy × 3 × Prorate

Equation J-36

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-28

in which MonX represents any of the three months that are missing, Mac identifies macro-level
data, cy specifies the prior year’s same quarter data, and Prorate denotes the quarter proration
factor (the fraction of the quarter for which the account is active).
See Seasonal Single/Master Imputations Using Macro Data (EMP6) for an example of this
formula.
Worksite Employment Estimates (EMP7/EMP8)
If all units on the MWR in the multi are missing employment and the master record data are
available, either reported or imputed, then the worksite employment can be imputed.
If some (but not all) of the worksites that compose the multi account have reported employment
data, the remaining worksites (with missing data) should be prorated if the difference between
the sum of reported worksite data from the master record employment is greater than zero. If it
is zero or less, then those worksites which show missing data are treated like they were zero
reporters and are assigned a successful imputation code of EMP8.
If the master record was not reported and could not be imputed, the worksite can not be imputed
either and an imputation failure code of EMPE is assigned.
The other potential failure occurs when the master does not have prior quarter employment. If
the master’s prior quarter Third Month Employment equals zero, the prior quarter worksite-tomaster employment ratio is undefined. This causes the worksite employment distribution to fail
with a code of EMPG (could not impute employment due to absence of prior quarter data).
The successful worksite employment distribution occurs if none of the preceding conditions
occurred. This EMP7 imputation method using the following equations:

Mon1 =

Mon 1cs × Mon 3 p
Mon3 ps

Equation J-37

Mon2 =

Mon 2cs × Mon1
Mon1cs

Equation J-38

Mon3 =

Mon 3cs × Mon2
Mon2cs

Equation J-39

cs identifies master account data (reduced by applied worksite estimates), ps signifies the prior
quarter’s summed worksite data (decreased by processed worksite values) and p stands for
worksite’s prior quarter employment value.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-29

The initial liability and end of liability dates are checked. The record must be active throughout
the entire quarter. If it was not active during any month, then no month will be imputed. Either
all three months can be imputed for the worksites, or no employment can be imputed.
As imputations are generated, the cs and ps subscripted fields are adjusted, according to the
following equations:

Mon 3 psadjusted = Mon 3 ps - Mon 3 p

Equation J-40

Mon 1csadjusted = Mon 1cs - Mon1

Equation J-41

Mon 2csadjusted = Mon 2cs - Mon2

Equation J-42

Mon 3cs adjusted = Mon 3cs - Mon3

Equation J-43

in which the p-subscripted Mon3 is the worksite’s prior quarter third month employment, and the
Mon1, Mon2 and Mon3 values (subtracted from each of the ps-subscripted fields) are the
worksite’s just-imputed monthly employment for the current quarter. The remaining
employment provides a new month-to-month ratio for the next worksite employment imputation
that can vary to a minute degree from the original ratio.
Note: The summed third month’s employment value excludes all worksites that were inactivated during the previous quarter. If these inactivated worksites were left in the process, the
current quarter estimates would be low by the final employment in the terminated worksites,
resulting in an out-of-balance situation.
Employment Proration Example:
The following demonstrates the methods used in the imputation of employment for delinquent
worksites. The multi had reported employment, both for worksites and the master account, in the
prior quarter. There were eight worksites in the multi, but reporting unit #00007 was closed at
the end of the prior quarter. The current quarter master account employment has been reported,
but the worksites require imputation. The following table summarizes the known and unknown
data for the multi.
Reporting
Unit No.
00000
00001
00003
00004
00005

Month 3 p

Month1 c
72
7
3
14
5

Month 2 c
57
?
?
?
?

Month 3 c
58
?
?
?
?

63
?
?
?
?

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Reporting
Unit No.
00007
–
inactivated
00008
00011
00012
Worksite
Sum

Month 3 p

Month1 c

Page J-30

Month 2 c

Month 3 c

26

0

0

0

4
10
6
(75 w/ inactive
unit) 49

?
?
?
?

?
?
?
?

?
?
?
?

The master account’s third month prior quarter employment (72) disagrees with the worksite
sum for the same month (75 when the inactive worksite is included; it is even farther off when
the inactive worksite is removed (49 versus 72)). However, the worksite sum is used for the
prior quarter rather than the master account’s value. So the initial ratios for month-to-month
employment become 57/49 (Mon1c /Mon3p), 58/57 (Mon2/Mon1) and 63/58 (Mon3/Mon2).
These are applied to RUN #00001’s prior quarter third month employment (7) and rounded to
give the imputed First Month Employment, found from
Mon1RUN1 = Mon3p RUN1 × Mon1cs / Mon3ps
= 7 × 57 / 49 = 8.1429... → 8 (rounded)
from which the second and third employment months can be imputed. Mon2 is found by
multiplying the first month estimate (8) by the Mon2/Mon1 imputation ratio (58/57), for a
rounded value of 8 (from 8.140...); the third month is determined by using the estimated second
month (8) times the Mon3/Mon2 imputation ratio (63/58) which also rounds to 9 (from 8.6897).
Because of the rounding, the precise summed level ratio cannot be maintained for all worksites,
unless cumulative rounding is used. Hence the need for realigning the ratio based on the
estimates computed thus far.
The three imputed monthly employment values (8, 8, and 9, respectively,) are subtracted from
what had been the master account’s monthly employment, leaving 49, 50 and 54, respectively.
The worksite’s prior quarter third month employment is deducted from the pqs sum to give a
new value of 42. The process is then repeated on each of the other worksites (excluding the
inactivated reporting unit #00007) using the revised employment sum values. The table below
demonstrates how this works.
RUN→

00001

00003

00004

00005

00007

00008

00011

00012

M3 ps

49

42

39

25

20

20

16

6

M1 cs

57

49

45

29

23

23

18

7

M2 cs

58

50

46

30

24

24

19

7

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-31

RUN→

00001

00003

00004

00005

00007

00008

00011

00012

M3 cs

63

54

50

33

26

26

21

8

Ratio 1

1.163

1.167

1.154

1.160

1.150

1.150

1.125

1.167

Ratio 2

1.018

1.020

1.022

1.034

1.043

1.043

1.056

1.000

Ratio 3

1.086

1.080

1.087

1.100

1.083

1.083

1.105

1.143

M3 p

7

3

14

5

26

4

10

6

Mon1

8

4

16

6

0

5

11

7

Mon2

8

4

16

6

0

5

12

7

Mon3

9

4

17

7

0

5

13

8

The above table shows the figures involved in preparing the imputations (the last three rows) for
each of the worksites. The first row under the Reporting Unit Numbers is the summed prior
quarter third month employment with any already-processed worksites’ inclusion in this sum
removed from the total (subtracting the “M3 p” value before the next “M3 ps” value is
displayed). The next three rows are initially the employment fields from the master account, but
these have any already-enacted imputations removed from the equivalent fields in the bottom
three rows. The three rows labeled “Ratio 1”, “Ratio 2”, and “Ratio 3” are the results of dividing
M1cs/M3ps, M2cs/ M1cs, and M3cs/M2cs, respectively. These form another version of the
equations already described, so that the ratios form two-part equations, namely:
Ratio1 = Mon1cs ÷ Mon3ps
Mon1 = Mon3p × Ratio1
Ratio2 = Mon2cs ÷ Mon1cs
Mon2 = Mon1 × Ratio2
Ratio3 = Mon3cs ÷ Mon2cs
Mon3 = Mon2 × Ratio3
EXPO also allows the option of online seasonal proration. Employment is prorated in the same
manner as non-seasonal prorations except instead of using third month employment of the prior
quarter,
• Month one of the same quarter, year ago is used for month one
• Month two of the same quarter, year ago is used for month two
• Month three of the same quarter, year ago is used for month three
as the denominator of the ratio:

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-32

Ratio1seas = Mon1cs ÷ Mon1cys
Mon1 = Mon1cy × Ratio seas
Ratio2seas = Mon2cs ÷ Mon2cys
Mon2 = Mon2cy × Ratio2seas
Ratio3seas = Mon3cs ÷ Mon3cys
Mon3 = Mon3cy × Ratio3seas
to project employment forward.
Imputation Report Code Settings and Indicator Flags
The three lists that follow identify successful imputation codes, imputation failure codes, and the
indicator flags for employment, total wages, taxable wages, and contributions.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-33

Imputation Report Codes:
Successful Imputation Codes

Code

Description

TOT1

TotW(c) = SUMMATION OF WORKSITES' TotW(c)

TOT2

TotW(c) = TotW(p)*(TotW(cy)/TotW(py)

TOT3

TotW(c) = TotW(p) (Seasonal accounts only)

TOT4

TotW(c) = TotW(p)

TOT5

TotW(c) = MASTER TotW(c)* (WORKSITE TotW(p)/MASTER TotW(p)

TOT6

WORKSITE TotW NOT IMPUTED (LEFT MISSING)

TOT8

TotW(c) = TotW(p)* MACRO (TotW(cy)/TotW(py))

TOT9

TotW(c) = AME(c)*MACRO (TotW(cy)/AME(cy))

TAX1

TaxW(c) = TotW(c)* (TaxW(cy)/TotW(cy)

TAX2

TaxW(c) = TotW(c)* (TaxW/TotW RATIO FROM MACRO FILE)

TAX3

TaxW(c) = TotW(c) * (MASTER TaxW(c)/MASTER TotW(c))

TAX4

TaxW(c) = Ctrb(c) = 0, BECAUSE MASTER TotW(c) = 0

CTB1

Ctrb(c) = TAXABLE WAGES(c) * ACCOUNT'S TAX RATE

EMP2

EMPLOYMENT(c) = SUM OF WORKSITES' EMPLOYMENT(c)

EMP3

Mon1(c) = Mon3(p) * (Mon1(cy)/Mon3(py))
Mon2(c) = Mon1(c) * (Mon2(cy)/Mon(cy))
Mon3(c) = Mon2(c) * (Mon3(cy)/Mon2(cy))

EMP4

Mon1(c) = Mon2(c) = Mon3(c) = EMPLOYMENT(c) = Mon3(p) * TotW(c)/TotW(p)

EMP5

Mon1(c) = Mon2(c) = Mon3(c) = EMPLOYMENT(c) = AME(p)*TOTAL
WAGES(c)/TOTAL WAGES(p)

EMP6

Mon1(c) = Mon2(c) = Mon3(c) = EMPLOYMENT(c) = TOTAL WAGES(c)*
(EMPLOYMENT/TOTAL WAGES RATIO FROM MACRO FILE)/3

EMP7

Mon1(c) = Mon2(c) = Mon3(c) = EMPLOYMENT(c) = MASTER
EMPLOYMENT(c)* (WORKSITE MONTH3(p)/MASTER MONTH3(p)

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

Page J-34

Imputation Report Codes:
Successful Imputation Codes

Code

Description

EMP8

Mon1(c) = Mon2(c) = Mon3(c), WORKSITE EMPLOYMENT NOT ESTIMATED
(LEFT MISSING).

EMP9

Mon1(c) = Mon2(c) = Mon3(c) = EMPLOYMENT(c) = EMPLOYMENT(5) *
TOTAL WAGES(c)/TOTAL WAGES(cy)
Imputation Report Codes:
Imputation Failure Codes

Code

Description

TOTA

TOTAL WAGES not imputed because TOTAL WAGES(p) are missing.

TOTB

TOTAL WAGES not imputed because TOTAL WAGES(cy) are missing (seasonal
account).

TOTC

TOTAL WAGES, TAXABLE WAGES, CONTRIBUTIONS not imputed because
master TOTAL WAGES(p) are missing.

TOTD

TOTAL WAGES are not imputed because master account had imputation error.

TOTE

TOTAL WAGES not imputed because macro data are 0.

TAXA

TAXABLE WAGES not imputed because TOTAL WAGES(cy) = 0, CTY-OWNNAICS group not found on MACRO FILE.

TAXB

TAXABLE WAGES not imputed because TOTAL WAGES(cy) = 0, MACRO FILE
TOTAL WAGES = 0

TAXC

TAXABLE WAGES not imputed because master account had imputation error.

EMPB

EMPLOYMENT no imputed because EMPLOYMENT(p) is missing due to prior
quarter(s) delinquency.

EMPC

EMPLOYMENT not imputed because COUNTY-OWNER-NAICS group not found
on MACRO FILE.

EMPD

EMPLOYMENT not imputed because MACRO FILE EMPLOYMENT = 0.

EMPE

EMPLOYMENT not imputed because master account EMPLOYMENT had
imputation error.

QCEW Operating Manual
Imputation Formulas

September 2019

Page J-35

Imputation Report Codes:
Imputation Failure Codes

Code

Description

EMPF

EMPLOYMENT not imputed because no employment formula is available.

EMPG

EMPLOYMENT not imputed because master account MONTH3(p) = 0.
Indicator Flags

Code

Meaning

Blank or R
A

Reported data.
Estimated/imputed using data reported to the CES
program.
Changed (re-reported).
Reported from missing data notice.
Estimated/imputed single unit data.
Imputed worksite data prorated from imputed
parent/master record.
Hand-imputed (vs. system generated).
Special system-generated imputation emulating data
impacted by a catastrophe
Late reported (overrides prior imputation).
Missing data.
Zero-filled, pending resolution of long-term delinquent
reporter
Prorated from reported parent/master to subunit/worksite.
Aggregated parent/master from reported MWR or EDI
data.
Estimated/imputed using data reported on quarterly wage
records
Non-numeric data zero-filled pending further action.

C
D
E
H
K
L
M
N
P
S
W
X

For Data Field(s)
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.
EMPL.
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.
EMPL.
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.
EMPL, TW.
EMPL, TW.
EMPL, TW, TAX, CTB.

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Page K-1

Appendix K – EQUI File Layout
Every Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file generated by the state
processing systems consists of one header record, one trailer record, and as many data records as
are needed to provide initial or updated micro data to the national office. The record length of
each EQUI record is 1190 positions. The blocksize of the EQUI file is 27,370. The following
EQUI file layout has been effective since 2006/2.
EQUI Data Record
The normal data record provides all data elements available on the state system for the specified
Unemployment Insurance (UI) Account Number/Reporting Unit Number (RUN) for that year
and quarter. A delete record is a special type of data record that removes all data for the
specified UI/RUN for all years and quarters. Appendix B defines the data elements.
Start

End

Length

1
2
4
8
9
19
24
33
43
48
58
63
98

1
3
7
8
18
23
32
42
47
57
62
97
132

1
2
4
1
10
5
9
10
5
10
5
35
35

Field
Type
Adm
Adm
Qtr
Qtr
Adm
Adm
Adm
─
─
─
─
Adm
Adm

133
168
203
233
235
240

167
202
232
234
239
243

35
35
30
2
5
4

Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm

UI Address Block (133-243)
UI Street Address--Line 1
UI Street Address--Line 2
UI Address—City
UI Address—State
UI Address--5-Digit ZIP Code
UI Address--ZIP Code Extension

Adm
Adm
Adm

Physical Location Address Block (244-354)
Physical Location (PLA) Street Address--Line 1
Physical Location (PLA) Street Address--Line 2
Physical Location Address (PLA)--City

244
279
314

278
313
343

35
35
30

Data Element
Transaction Code
State FIPS Numeric Code
Year
Quarter
UI Account Number
Reporting Unit Number
EIN (Employer Identification Number)
Filler
Filler
Filler
Filler
Legal/Corporate Name
Trade Name/DBA

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Start

End

Length

344
346
351

345
350
354

2
5
4

Field
Type
Adm
Adm
Adm

Data Element
Physical Location Address (PLA)--State
Physical Location Address (PLA)--5-Digit ZIP Code
Physical Location Address (PLA)--ZIP Code Extension

355
390
425
455
457
462
466

389
424
454
456
461
465
466

35
35
30
2
5
4
1

Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm

Mailing/Other Address Block (355-466)
Mailing/Other (MOA) Street Address--Line 1
Mailing/Other (MOA) Street Address--Line 2
Mailing/Other (MOA) Address--City
Mailing/Other (MOA) Address--State
Mailing/Other (MOA) Address--5-Digit ZIP Code
Mailing/Other (MOA) Address--ZIP Code Extension
Mailing/Other (MOA) Address Type

467

501

35

Adm

Reporting Unit Description

502
505
508

504
507
511

3
3
4

Adm
Adm
Adm

Telephone Number (502-511)
Phone Area Code
Phone Prefix
Phone Suffix

512
516
518
520
524
526
528
532
534

515
517
519
523
525
527
531
533
535

4
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2

Page K-2

Setup Date (512-519)

Adm
Adm
Adm

Setup Date—Year
Setup Date—Month
Setup Date—Day

Adm
Adm
Adm

Initial Date of Liability (520-527)
Initial Date of Liability--Year
Initial Date of Liability--Month
Initial Date of Liability--Day

Adm
Adm
Adm

End of Liability Date (528-535)
End of Liability Date—Year
End of Liability Date—Month
End of Liability Date—Day

536
540
542

539
541
543

4
2
2

Adm
Adm
Adm

Reactivation Date (536-543)
Reactivation Date--Year
Reactivation Date--Month
Reactivation Date--Day

544
545
546

544
545
547

1
1
2

Qtr
Adm
Adm

Status Code
CES Indicator
ARS Response Code

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Start

End

Length

548
552
555
556
560
563
568
569
575
576
577
581
585
591
597
598
599
602
605
606
612
613
619
620
626
627
638
639
650
659
660
661
662
664
666
668
725
727
729
730
738
739
740

551
554
555
559
562
567
568
574
575
576
580
584
590
596
597
598
601
604
605
611
612
618
619
625
626
637
638
649
658
659
660
661
663
665
667
724
726
728
729
737
738
739
743

4
3
1
4
3
5
1
6
1
1
4
4
6
6
1
1
3
3
1
6
1
6
1
6
1
11
1
11
9
1
1
1
2
2
2
57
2
2
1
8
1
1
4

Field
Type
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Qtr
Adm
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Adm
Qtr
Qtr
─
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Adm
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Adm
Qtr
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm

Data Element
ARS Refile Year
Old County Code
Old Ownership Code
ARS Verification Year
Old Township Code
Maximum Reporting Unit Number
MWR Mail Indicator
Old NAICS Code
Data Source
Special Indicator Code
Agent Code
SIC
NAICS12 Code (previously NAICS07)
NAICS Code
Ownership Code
Organization Type Code
County Code
Township Code
Filler
First Month Employment
First Month Employment Indicator
Second Month Employment
Second Month Employment Indicator
Third Month Employment
Third Month Employment Indicator
Total Wages
Total Wages Indicator
Taxable Wages
Contributions (Due)
Type of Coverage Code
MEEI Code
PLA Type Code
First Comment Code
Second Comment Code
Third Comment Code
Narrative Comment
Collection Mode Indicator
ECCI
UI Address Type Code
Date PLA Changed
Geocoding Software
Geocoding Source
Match Code

Page K-3

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Start

End

Length

744
747
756
767
772
777
779

746
755
766
771
776
778
793

3
9
11
5
5
2
15

Field
Type
Twice
Twice
Twice
Twice
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr

794
798

797
798

4
1

─
Adm

Location Code
Latitude
Longitude
Year and Quarter of New Latitude and Longitude
Place Code
Class Code
Census ID:
2 digit State code
3 digit County code
6 digit Census Tract
1 digit Census Block Group
2 digit Census Block Code
1 digit optional Block Code letter
Filler
Address Source Code

Adm
Adm
Adm

Nondisclosure/Informed Consent (799-807)
Nondisclosure/Informed Consent Code
Nondisclosure/Informed Consent Year Agreed
Nondisclosure/Informed Consent Year Ended
Future QCEW Contact Block (808-827)
Future ARS Refile Year
Future ARS Response Code
Future NAICS Code
Future County Code
Future Town Code
Future CMI Code

799
800
804

799
803
807

1
4
4

Data Element

808
812
814
820
823
826

811
813
819
822
825
827

4
2
6
3
3
2

Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm

828
834

833
844

6
11

Qtr
Qtr

845

849

5

Adm

Phone Extension
QCEW Contact Block (850-1049)
QCEW Contact (Attention Line)
QCEW Contact Title
QCEW Contact Email Address
QCEW Contact Fax
Website Address

850
885
920
980
990

884
919
979
989
1049

35
35
60
10
60

Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm

1050 1050

1

─

Page K-4

Wage Record Summary Information (828-844)
Wage Record Count of Unique SSNs
Wage Record Wages

Future Use

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Start

End

Length

1051 1060

10

Field
Type
Qtr

1061 1066
1067 1076

6
10

Qtr
Qtr

1077
1083
1089
1095
1101
1107

1082
1088
1094
1100
1106
1112

6
6
6
6
6
6

Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr
Qtr

1113
1117
1119
1121
1127
1130
1187

1116
1118
1120
1126
1129
1186
1190

4
2
2
6
3
57
4

Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
Adm
─

Page K-5

Data Element
Largest Wage Record Recepient─Possible or Actual
Successor
Wage Record Count to Largest Wage Record Recepient
Largest Wage Record Contributor─Possible or Actual
Predecessor
Wage Record Count from Largest Wage Record Contributor
Hires
Separations
"New Entrants"
"Exits"
"Continuous Employees"
Discrepancy Information (1113-1190)
Fact of Discrepancy Year
Fact of Discrepancy Month
Fact of Discrepancy Control/Action Code
Fact of Discrepancy NAICS
Fact of Discrepancy County
Fact of Discrepancy Explanation
Filler/Future Field

Predecessor/Successor Supplemental Records
Predecessor/Successor supplemental records provide detailed information about the relationship
between a predecessor and its successor. A pred/succ supplemental record is generated for each
EQUI data record with a comment code of 85, 86, 87, 92, or 93. This means that for each
identified pred/succ relationship (or pair), two pred/succ records are generated: one for the
predecessor and one for the successor.
Start End Len
1
1
1
2
3
2
4
13
10
14
18
5
19
19
1
20
20
1
21
30
10
31
35
5
36
37
2
38
45
8
46
53
8
54
198 145

Data Element
Transaction Code where the value is set to "P"
State FIPS Numeric Code
UI Account Number
Reporting Unit Number
Format Type
Action Code
Predecessor or Successor UI Account Number
Predecessor or Successor Reporting Unit Number
P/S Source Code
P/S Transfer Date
P/S Posting Date
P/S Narrative Comment

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Page K-6

EQUI Header Record
The header record, whose file layout is shown below, provides the parameter values used by the
state. For each parm on the header record, the table shows the edit or edits that use the parm, as
well as the default value for that parm in state systems. The edit conditions and formulas are
described in detail in Appendix F.
Positions

Data Element

Length

State
Default
Value
(Always
"H")

1

Transaction Code

1

2-3
4-7
8
9-18

State FIPS Code
Year
Quarter
UI Account
Number
Reporting Unit
Number

2
4
1
10

zero-filled

5

zero-filled

19-23

Creation Year
Creation Month
Creation Day
Creation Hour
Creation Minutes

36-37
38-39

Creation Seconds
Creation 100ths
Seconds

2
2

40-42
43-47

Record Length
Block Size

3
5

66-71
72-73

Tax Rate Range
Tax Rate Range
Contributions >
Taxable Wages
Predecessor/
Successor Format
Monthly
Employment
Change

Edit
Code

Creation Date and Time (24-39)
4
2
2
2
2

24-27
28-29
30-31
32-33
34-35

48-53
54-59
60-65

Parameter or
Tolerance Name

724
31856

Edit Parms (48-433)
15000
6
Maximum Tax Rate
0
6
Minimum Tax Rate
0
6
Employee Tax Rate
6

0

2

20

047
047
063, 118

066-067
Predecessor and
Successor AME Cutoff
091, 126
Split Level for
Employment Difference micro/
macro
Check

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Positions

2
2

30

2

10

2

30

2

10

84-85

Monthly
Employment
Change
Monthly
Employment
Change
Monthly
Employment
Change
Monthly
Employment
Change
Monthly
Employment
Change
Wage Change

State
Default
Value
10

2

10

No Total Wages with
AME Cutoff

86-91

Wage Change

6

10000

Total Wage Change
Parm

92-93

Wage Change

2

03

Total Wage Check
Multiplier

94-95

Employment
Without Wages

2

10

No Wages But AME
Multiplier

96-101

Employment
Without Wages

6

10000

No Employment with
TW Cutoff

102-103 Wages Without
Employment

2

3

No Employment with
TW Cutoff Multiplier

104-105 Wages/
Employment Sum
106-111 Wages/
Employment Sum

2

5

6

50

112-113 Wages/
Employment Sum
114-119 Zip Code Format

2

10

6

99

120-125 Phone Number

6

99

74-75
76-77
78-79
80-81
82-83

Data Element

Length

Page K-7

Parameter or
Tolerance Name
Low Employment
Maximum Employment
Difference
High Employment
Maximum Employment
Difference
Employment Percent
Change Limit for > 6
Reported Months
Employment Percent
Change Limit for < 6
Reported Months
Employment Check
Multiplier

Edit
Code
091, 126
micro/
macro
091, 126
micro/
macro
091, 126
micro/
macro
091, 126
micro/
macro
091, 126
micro/
macro
092, 093,
127, 130
micro/
macro
092, 127
micro/
macro
092, 127
micro/
macro
093, 130
micro/
macro
092, 094,
127, 131
micro/
macro
094, 131
micro/
macro
095, 132

Employment Equals
Total Wages Tolerance
095, 132
Employment Equals
Total Wages AME
Cutoff
095, 132
Employment Equals
Total Wages Multiplier
Zip Code AME Cutoff 104, 108,
111
105
Telephone AME Cutoff

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Positions

Data Element

Length
6

State
Default
Value
0

6

Page K-8

Parameter or
Tolerance Name

Edit
Code
114

50

Physical Location
Address AME
EIN AME Parm

2

6

EIN Months Missing

116

6

330

118

6

250

Tax Rate
Consistency
153-158 Missing Taxable
Wages
159
Missing Taxable
Wages

1

0

6

25000

1

0

160-161 Non-Economic
Code Change

2

5

162-163 Logical SIC
Change
164-165 Active Account
166-171 Active Account

2

25

2
6

99
150000

172-173 Liability

2

99

174-179 Liability
180-185 Identical Monthly
Employment
186-187 Taxable/ Total
Wage Change

6
6

150000
50

2

20

188-193 Taxable/ Total
Wage Change
194-195 SIC = 9999
196-201 New and
Discontinued Edit
(Macro)
202-207 New and
Discontinued Edit
(Macro)

6

99

2
6

25
50

Maximum Tax Rate
Deviation
Maximum
Contributions Due
Deviation
Bypass Switch for
California Rate
Maximum Total Wages
with No Taxable Wages
Bypass Switch for
California Taxable
Wages
Noneconomic Code
Change Monthly
Employment Parm
Logical SIC Change
Employment
Active Account AME
Active Account Total
Wages
Liability Check
Employment
Liability Check Wages
Maximum Identical
Employment AME
Taxable Wages To
Total Wages Percent
Tolerance
Taxable Wages to Total
Wages AME
Unclassified SIC AME
Discontinued Record
AME

6

50

New Record AME

135

126-131 Physical Address
Format
132-137 Missing Federal
EIN
138-139 Missing Federal
EIN
140-145 Tax Rate
Consistency
146-151 Tax Rate
Consistency
152

116

118
118
119
119
120
122
124
124
125
125
128
129
129
133
135

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Positions

Data Element

Length

Page K-9

208-209 New and
Discontinued Edit
(Micro)

2

State
Default
Value
25

Parameter or
Tolerance Name

Edit
Code

210-211 New and
Discontinued Edit
(Micro)
212-213 Employment
Change for
Predecessor/
Successor
214-215 Count Change for
Breakout/
Consolidation

2

25

2

25
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)

2

216-217 Count Change for
Breakout/
Consolidation

2

10
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)
10
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)

218-219 Employment
Change for
Breakout/
Consolidation
220-221 Employment
Change for
Breakout/
Consolidation

2

50
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)

2

10
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)

222-223 Count Change for
Non 999

2

20
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)

224-229 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)
230-231 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)
232-233 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)

6

50

2

5

Small Employment
Balance Tolerance

171-173

2

10

Mid-Sized Employment
Balance Tolerance

171-173

Minimum Employment
for Predecessor/
Successor, New/
Discontinued Singles
Employment Cutoff for
New/ Discontinued
Multis
Maximum Allowed
Predecessor/ Successor
Employment Change

151-163

Maximum RU Count
Change for Breakout/
Consolidation

162

Maximum RU Count
Percent Change for
Breakout/
Consolidation (Non 1st
Quarter)
Employment Difference
In Breakout/
Consolidation (Non-1st
Quarter)
Maximum Employment
Percent Difference In
Breakout/
Consolidation (Non-1st
Quarter)
Maximum RU Count
Change Old
County/SIC No 999s
(Non-1st Quarter)
First Employment
Balance Split Level

162

151-163
162

162

162

162

171-173

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Positions

Data Element

Length

234-239 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)
240-245 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)
246-251 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)
252-257 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)
258-259 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)
260-265 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)
266-271 Additivity/ Balance
(Monthly
Employment)
272-277 CCS Division
Change
278-283 CCS Intra-Division
Change
284-289 Wage Record Edit

6

State
Default
Value
1000

6

Page K-10

Parameter or
Tolerance Name

Edit
Code

Second Employment
Balance Split Level

171-173

100

Large Employment
Balance Tolerance

171-173

6

50000

First Wage Balance
Split Level

174-176

6

250

Small Wage Balance
Tolerance

174-176

2

10

174-176

6

999999

Medium Wage Mill
Balance Tolerance
(1/10%)
Second Wage Balance
Split Level

6

10000

Large Wage Balance
Tolerance

174-176

6

100

6

250

6

50

290-291 Wage Record Edit

2

10

292-293 Wage Record Edit

2

20

294-299 Wage Record Edit

6

100

300-301 Wage Record Edit

2

20

302-307 AME Print Cutoff

6

0

Maximum AME for
Wage Record Edits
Bypass
Limit for Employment
> Wage Record Count
(Percent)
Limit for Wage Record
Count > Employment
(Percent)
Maximum AME for
Wage Record Wage
Edit Bypass
Limit for Total Wages
> Wage Record Wages
(Percent)
Average Monthly
Employment Print
Cutoff Level

174-176

CCS
Table 1A
CCS
Table 1B
191-196
193-195
191
192, 197
192, 197

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Positions

Data Element

Length

308-313 AQW Print Cutoff

6

State
Default
Value
0

314-319 EIN Edit
320-325 Wage Change

6
6

5
25

326-331 Wage Change

6

3000

332-337 Large New Record
Check
338-343 Large Discontinued
Record Check
344-349 New Record Check
350-355 Discontinued
Record Check
356-361 Pred/Succ
Employment

6

500

6

500

6
6

100
100

6

362-367 Multi-Breakout
Employment

6

368-373 Multi-Collapse
Employment

6

374-379 Large MultiCollapse AME

6

380-385 Multi-Collapse
AME

6

386-391 Multi-Unit
Collapse

6

392-397 Comment Error
AME

6

398-403 Future Use
404-409 Future Use
410-415 Future Use

6
6
6

100
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)
100
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)
100
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)
1000
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)
500
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)
50
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)
10
(Edit
deferred –
zero fill.)
Zero-fill
Zero-fill
Zero-fill

Page K-11

Parameter or
Tolerance Name

Edit
Code

Average Quarterly
Wage Print Cutoff
Level
045
Small Record EIN Parm
092, 127
Supplemental Edit
AME
92, 127
Supplemental Edit
AQW Wage Difference
Large New Employer 096, 139
097, 140
Large Discontinued
Employer
139
New Employer
140
Discontinued Employer
Pred/Succ Employment
Difference

162

Multi-Establishment
Breakout Employment
Difference

177

Multi-Establishment
Collapse Employment
Difference

183

AME for Large Multis

184

AME for Other MultiCollapses

184

Worksite Unit Count

184

Small Record Comment
Code Parm

048

----

----

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Positions
416-421
422-427
428-433
434-1190

Data Element
Future Use
Future Use
Future Use
Filler (blank)

Length
6
6
6
767

State
Default
Value
Zero-fill
Zero-fill
Zero-fill

Page K-12

Parameter or
Tolerance Name
----

Edit
Code
----

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Page K-13

EQUI Trailer Record
The trailer record includes information that the national office uses to compare the expected
characteristics of the EQUI file to the actual characteristics. This comparison helps ensure that
no records were lost either when the file was created in the state or when it was loaded in the
national office.
Positions
1
2-3
4-7
8
9-23
24-31
32-36
37-44
45-49
50-57
58-62
63-70
71-75
76-83
84-88
89-96
97-104
105-113
114-122
123-131
132-145
146-159
160-171
172-179
180-188
189-197
198-206
207-220
221-234

Data Element
Transaction Code (Always “T”)
State FIPS Code
Year
Quarter
UI Account Number and Reporting Unit Number
(Zero-filled)
Count of All Deleted Records
Newest Quarter Information (e.g., 2003/1)
Newest Year/Quarter
Newest Count of Records
Next Oldest Quarter's Information (e.g., 2002/4)
Next Oldest Year/Quarter
Next Oldest Count of Records
Next Oldest Quarter's Information (e.g., 2002/3)
Next Oldest Year/Quarter
Next Oldest Count of Records
Next Oldest Quarter's Information (e.g., 2002/2)
Next Oldest Year/Quarter
Next Oldest Count of Records
Next Oldest Quarter's Information (e.g., 2002/1)
Next Oldest Year/Quarter
Next Oldest Count of Records
Control Totals for All Quarters for All Ownerships
Number of Establishments
First Month Employment
Second Month Employment
Third Month Employment
Total Wages
Taxable Wages
Contributions Due
Control Totals for the Current Quarter for All Ownerships
Number of Establishments
First Month Employment
Second Month Employment
Third Month Employment
Total Wages
Taxable Wages

Length
1
2
4
1
15
8
5
8
5
8
5
8
5
8
5
8
8
9
9
9
14
14
12
8
9
9
9
14
14

QCEW Operating Manual
EQUI File Layout

May 2019

Page K-14

Positions
Data Element
Length
235-246
Contributions Due
12
Control Totals for the Current Quarter for Federal Government
247-254
Number of Establishments
8
255-263
First Month Employment
9
264-272
Second Month Employment
9
273-281
Third Month Employment
9
282-295
Total Wages
14
296-309
Taxable Wages
14
310-321
Contributions Due
12
Control Totals for the Current Quarter for State Government
322-329
Number of Establishments
8
330-338
First Month Employment
9
339-347
Second Month Employment
9
348-356
Third Month Employment
9
357-370
Total Wages
14
371-384
Taxable Wages
14
385-396
Contributions Due
12
Control Totals for the Current Quarter for Local Government
397-404
Number of Establishments
8
405-413
First Month Employment
9
414-422
Second Month Employment
9
423-431
Third Month Employment
9
432-445
Total Wages
14
446-459
Taxable Wages
14
460-471
Contributions Due
12
Control Totals for the Current Quarter for the Private Sector
472-479
Number of Establishments
8
480-488
First Month Employment
9
489-497
Second Month Employment
9
498-506
Third Month Employment
9
507-520
Total Wages
14
521-534
Taxable Wages
14
535-546
Contributions Due
12
547-1190

Filler (blank)

654

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Supplement (CCS) File Layout

Page L-1

Appendix L – Code Change Supplement (CCS)
File Layout
The CCS file is a compilation of all records with noneconomic code changes in one or more of
the essential classification codes. (See Chapter 11 for how records can be put on the CCS.) For
most states, these are the county, ownership, and industry codes. Township is also included for
New England States (including Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode
Island, and Vermont) and New Jersey.
The following is the layout for the CCS file generated by the national office. The state systems
use different variations of this format and some fields may be generated in a different manner.
Check system-specific documentation for these formats.
Field
Positions
1-2
3-6

7-16
17-21
22-30

Data Element
State FIPS Code
Year

Field
Length
2
4

10
5
9

31-63

UI Account Number
Reporting Unit Number (RUN)
Employer Identification Number
(EIN)
Name

64-65

ARS Response Code

2

66
67
68-71
72-77
78-83
84
85-87
88-90
91-94
95-100
101-106

MEEI Code
Filler
Filler
Filler
Old NAICS Code
Old Ownership Code
Old County Code
Old Township Code
Filler
Filler
New NAICS Code

1
1
4
6
6
1
3
3
4
6
6

107

New Ownership Code

1

33

Comments/Source
Should correspond to the most recent
first quarter (e.g."2020" when 2020/1 is
the current quarter)

Trade Name if present; otherwise the
Legal Name
From the ARS Response Code, if 46 or
50
The first quarter MEEI code
Blank (formerly Auxiliary Code)
Blank (formerly Old SIC)
Blank (formerly Old NSTA)
From the Old NAICS, if present
From the Old Ownership, if present
From the Old County, if present
From the Old Township, if present
Blank (formerly the first quarter SIC)
Blank (formerly the first quarter NSTA)
First quarter NAICS, if different that the
Old NAICS
First quarter Ownership, if different than
the Old Ownership

October 2018

Field
Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
Code Change Supplement (CCS) File Layout

Data Element

Field
Length

108-110

New County Code

3

111-113

New Township Code

3

114-119
120-125
126-131
132-137
138-148
149-159

December Employment
January Employment
February Employment
March Employment
First Quarter Wages
Fourth Quarter Wages

6
6
6
6
11
11

Page L-2

Comments/Source
First quarter County, if different than the Old
County
First quarter Township, if different than Old
Township
From Month 3 Employment in fourth quarter
From Month 1 Employment in first quarter
From Month 2 Employment in first quarter
From Month 3 Employment in first quarter
From Total Wages in first quarter
From Total Wages in fourth quarter

QCEW Operating Manual
Summary of Differences File Layout

May 2019

Page M-1

Appendix M – Summary of Differences File
Layout
The following is the layout for the CCS Summary of Differences file generated by the national
office. For each county/ownership/industry cell, the Summary of Differences file shows the
economic data that enter or leave due to noneconomic code changes. The standard state systems
use the same layout, although some fields may be generated in a different manner.
Field
Positions

Data Element

Field
Length

1-2
3-5
6
7-12

State FIPS Code
County Code
Ownership Code
NAICS Code

2
3
1
6

13-16

Year

4

17-25

December Employment (From)

9

26-39

Fourth Quarter Wages (From)

14

40-48

December Employment (To)

9

49-62

Fourth Quarter Wages (To)

14

63-71

January Employment (From)

9

72-80

February Employment (From)

9

81-89

March Employment (From)

9

90-103

First Quarter Wages (From)

14

104-112

January Employment (To)

9

113-121

February Employment (To)

9

122-130

March Employment (To)

9

131-144

First Quarter Wages (To)

14

145-152

Total Records Leaving

8

153-160

Total Records Entering

8

Comments/Source

Industry code under which the
Summary of Difference is aggregated
Should correspond to the most recent
first quarter (e.g."2020" when 2020/1 is
the current quarter)
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records leaving the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records leaving the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records entering the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records entering the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records leaving the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records leaving the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records leaving the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records leaving the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records entering the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records entering the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records entering the cell
Aggregated from corresponding field
of all CCS records entering the cell
Total number of records leaving
aggregated cell
Total number of records entering
aggregated cell

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-1

Appendix N – MWR File Layouts
The Electronic Data Interchange Center (EDIC) uses the format below to export Multiple
Worksite Report (MWR)/Report of Federal Employment & Wages (RFEW) data files to the
states each quarter. This format also provides data fields covering Professional Employer
Organizations (PEO) and Payroll Provider Firms (PPF). The Supplemental Record Format is
used to export MWR data when additional data elements are required, such as
predecessor/successor account information. States should use their standard state processing
system (EXPO or WIN) to load these MWR data files as needed to their QCEW during routine
quarterly processing. The collection and processing of MWR data by the EDIC is discussed in
Chapter 4 – Multiple Worksite Central Reporting.
The EDIC receives the data from reporters (employers or their agents) in various file formats.
Reporters are encouraged to use the standard 350 MWR File Format with Four-Digit Year. The
national office also collects data from reporters using Multiple Worksite Report Web (MWR
Web), an interactive web-based processing system with online editing of various fields including
employment and wages.
---------- File Layouts ---------Standard 424 MWR File Format Exported to the states from the EDIC
Supplemental P/S Record Format (EDIC)
EDI File Formats:
350 Position MWR File Format– Received by EDIC
Standard 350 MWR File Format (for PEOs) – Received by EDIC
Standard 350 MWR File Format (for PPF's)– Received by EDIC
MWR Web File Formats
Solicitation Request File
State Historical Data File
State Historical Data File – Record Format Type 1 (UI Account)
State Historical Data File - Record Format Type 2 (Worksite)
State Historical Data File – Record Format Type 3 (Worksite-Quarter)
Confirmed Register File Format Exported to the states via MWR Web
479 Position MWR Print Contract Mail File Format – Exported by states to generate
mailing by print contractor.
479 Position MWR Print Contract Mail File Format – Exported by states to generate
mailing by print contractor. (masters)
479 Position MWR Print Contract Mail File Format – Exported by states to generate
mailing by print contractor. (worksites)
424 Position MWR Print Contract Data File Format – Exported by print contractor and sent
to the states
Standard 799 MWR File Format Exported to the states via MWR Web (Collected Data file)

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Page N-2

Standard 424 MWR File Format Exported to the states from the EDIC
The EDIC uses this format to export reporter data to the states (i.e., “detail records”). Codes in
the four fields that occupy positions 309-322 are provided by the EDIC for "birth" records (new
establishments) and are generally not provided by reporters.
Position Length Data Element
1-2
2 Program Code
3

1

4-5

2

6-15

10

16-20

5

21

1

22-30

9

31-65

35

66-100

35

101-130

30

131-132

2

133-137

5

138-141

4

Data Specification
Required. A 2-digit program code indicating the type of data
being reported.
02 = MWR/QCEW
Record Type
Required. A 1-digit number indicating the type of reporter:
3 = PEO
4 = PPF
5 = MWR or RFEW
Reference State Required. The 2-digit state FIPS code indicating the location
of the establishment.
UI Account
Required. The Unemployment Insurance (UI) account number
Number
assigned to the employer by the state. Right-justified, zerofilled.
Reporting Unit Required. The Reporting Unit Number (RUN) assigned by the
Number
state to distinguish between records with the same UI account
number. Right-justified, zero-filled.
Format Type
Required. Type = D, for Detail Record. This is not the same
as Record Type.
Employer
Required. The 9-digit EIN assigned to the employer by the
Identification
Internal Revenue Service (IRS). Numeric, right-justified.
Number (EIN) Zero-filled if EIN is unknown.
Trade Name
Required if Legal Name is blank. The division or subsidiary
name of the establishment. "Mom's Restaurant" is an example
of a trade name of ABC Enterprises. Left-justified, blankfilled.
Street Address The physical street address of the establishment. If provided,
is abbreviated as necessary in accordance with the U.S. Postal
Service’s National Zip Code and Postal Service Directory.
Left-justified, blank-filled.
City
The city of the establishment, if provided. Left-justified,
blank-filled.
State
If provided, it will be a standard 2-letter Postal Service state
abbreviation for the establishment.
Zip Code
If provided, the 5-digit Zip Code used by the Postal Service
for the establishment.
Zip Code
The 4-digit Zip Code Extension used by the Postal Service for
Extension
the establishment. It is zero-filled if no Zip Code Extension is
provided.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-3

Position Length Data Element Data Specification
142-143 2 Primary
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Comment Code explain flagged data, or values that differ substantially from
previously reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
144-145 2 Secondary
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Comment Code explain flagged data, or values that differ substantially from
previously reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
146-147 2 Third Comment Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Code
explain flagged data, or values that differ substantially from
previously reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
148-151 4 Reference Year Required. The four digits of the calendar year covered by the
report.
152
1 Reference
Required. The 1-digit number indicating the reference
Quarter
calendar quarter for the report. The calendar quarters are:
1 = January–March
2 = April–June
3 = July–September 4 = October–December
153-187 35 Legal Name
Required if Trade Name is blank. The legal or corporate name
of the establishment. For example "ABC Enterprises" or
"Smith Companies, Inc." Left-justified, blank-filled.
188-222 35 Reporting Unit Required and must be alphanumeric for private (MWR)
Description
reporters. For DOD, NFC, and other federal reporters, may be
(RUD)
zero-filled. Should contain a meaningful, unique description
of the establishment, such as store number or plant name (e.g.,
Store 101, Jones River Plant). Left-justified, blank-filled.
223-228 6 Month 1
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment
who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
229-234 6 Month 2
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment
who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
235-240 6 Month 3
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment
who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
241-250 10 Quarterly Wages Required. The total amount of wages (both taxable and nontaxable) paid to employees during the entire reference quarter.
All numeric (no $ signs or commas). Right-justified, zerofilled. Rounded to the nearest dollar (no cents). Zero-filled if
no wages were paid.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position Length Data Element
251-307 57 Comments

308

1

309-311

3

312-314

3

315

1

316
317-322

1
6

323-326
327-330

4
4

331-332

2

333-334

2

335-338

4

339-340

2

Page N-4

Data Specification
Optional. Any large changes in employment or wages due to
store closings, layoffs, bonuses, seasonal changes, etc. should
be explained in this field. If any units of a firm are being
reported for the first time following expansion of operations or
purchase of units from another firm, a description of the
business activity(s) that will be conducted at each
establishment should be provided. The national office will use
this information in assigning industrial classification codes to
the new unit(s). In addition, if units were purchased from
another firm, the name of the firm, the effective date of the
transaction, and the UI number of the seller, if known, should
be provided. If units have been sold to another firm, the name
of the firm, the effective date of the transaction, and the UI
number of the purchaser, if known, should be provided. Leftjustified, blank-filled.
Source Code
Required. The value is currently “C”. This indicates data
(Data Source)
processed and edited by the EDIC.
County FIPS
Required for birth records. 3-digit numeric Federal
Code
Information Processing Standard (FIPS) code used to identify
each establishment location or place of business.
Township Code Required for birth records. 3-digit numeric code required in
New England states and New Jersey. Used to identify
township of each establishment location or place of business.
Ownership Code Required for birth records. 1-digit numeric code used to
identify the economic ownership of the establishment.
Filler
Blank
NAICS Code
Required for birth records. 6-digit numeric code used to
identify the primary activity of the establishment.
Agent Code
Applicable to record type 4 (PPF).
Initial Date of The four-digit year of a firm's initial liability date. This is
Liability - Year applicable to birth records for record types 3, 4, and 5.
Initial Date of The two-digit month of a firm's initial liability date. This is
Liability –
applicable to birth records for record types 3, 4, and 5.
Month
Initial Date of The two-digit day of a firm's initial liability date. This is
Liability – Day applicable to birth records for record types 3, 4, and 5.
End of Liability The four-digit year of a firm's end of liability date. This is
Date – Year
applicable to death records for record types 3, 4, and 5.
End of Liability The two-digit month of a firm's end of liability date. This is
Date – Day
applicable to death records for record types 3, 4, and 5.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-5

Position Length Data Element Data Specification
341-342 2 End of Liability The two-digit day of a firm's end of liability date. This is
Date – Year
applicable to death records for record types 3, 4, and 5.
343-346 4 Reactivation
The four-digit year of a firm's re-activation date. This is
Date - Year
applicable to record types 3, 4, and 5.
347-348 2 Reactivation
The two-digit month of a firm's re-activation date. This is
Date – Month
applicable to record types 3, 4, and 5.
349-350 2 Reactivation
The two-digit day of a firm's re-activation date. This is
Date – Day
applicable to record types 3, 4, and 5.
351-360 10 Client UI
The UI account number assigned to the client before the client
Account Number entered the co-employer relationship with the Professional
Employer Organization (PEO). Right-justified, zero-filled.
361-369 9 Client EIN
The EIN assigned to the client before the client entered the coemployer relationship with the Professional Employer
Organization (PEO).
370-379 10 Client Telephone The telephone number of the client.
Number
380-381 2 Month Became The 2-digit month that the record became a client of the PEO.
Client
382-385 4 Year Became
The 4-digit year that the record became a client of the PEO.
Client
386-387 2 Month Client
The 2-digit month that the record terminated being a client of
Terminated
the PEO.
388-391 4 Year Client
The 4-digit year that the record terminated being a client of the
Terminated
PEO.
392-424 33 Worksite
A description of the client worksite's economic activity.
Economic
Economic activity is the principal business(es) in which the
Activity
worksite is engaged.
Description

Supplemental P/S Record Format (EDIC)
Supplemental predecessor/successor (P/S) records provided by the EDIC to states contain
detailed information about the relationship between a predecessor and its successor. This means
that for each identified predecessor/successor relationship (or pair), two records are generated:
one for the predecessor and one for the successor. These records are included within the
Standard 424 MWR File as supplemental records below each “detail” 424 position record as
applicable. Please note that not all “detail” records exported by the EDIC will have associated
predecessor and successor records.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position Length Data Element
1-2
2
Program Code
3

1

4-5

2

6-15

10

16-20

5

21

1

22

1

23-32

10

33-37

5

38-41
42

4
1

Page N-6

Data Specification
A 2-digit program code indicating the type of data being
reported.
02 = MWR/QCEW
Record Type
A 1-digit number indicating the type of reporter. Type =
3, PEO; Type = 4, PPF; Type = 5, MWR/RFEW
Reference State
The 2-digit state FIPS code indicating the location of the
establishment.
UI Account
The UI account number assigned to the employer by the
Number
state. Right-justified, zero-filled.
Reporting Unit
The RUN assigned to the establishment by the state to
Number
distinguish between records with the same UI Account
Number. Right-justified, zero-filled.
Action Code
Blank = predecessor or successor data provided; D =
delete record
Format Type
P = The UI/RUN identified in positions 6-20 has a
Predecessor
S = The UI/RUN identified in positions 6-20 has a
Successor
Pred/Succ UI
The UI account number of the Predecessor (Successor)
Account Number to the UI/RUN identified in positions 6-20.
Pred/Succ
The RUN of the Predecessor (Successor) to the UI/RUN
Reporting Unit
identified in positions 6-20.
Number
Reference Year
The 4-digit year of the current processing year.
Reference
The 1-digit quarter of the current processing quarter.
Quarter

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-7

EDI File Formats:
350 Position MWR File Format– Received by EDIC
Position Length Data Element Data Specification
1-2
2
Program Code Required. A 2-digit program code indicating the type of data
being reported.
02 = MWR
3
1
Record Type
Required. A 1-digit number indicating the record format is
Y2K compliant. Value = 2 for this record format.
1 = The file format is not Y2K compliant
2 = The file format is Y2K compliant - All values of 2 and
greater are Y2K compliant.
3 = The reporter is a Professional Employer Organization
(PEO)
4 = The reporter is a Payroll Provider Firm (PPF)
4-5
2
Reference State Required. The 2-digit state FIPS code indicating the location
of the establishment.
6-15
10 UI Account
Required. The UI account number assigned to the employer
Number
by the state. Right-justified, zero-filled.
16-20
5
Reporting Unit Required. The RUN number assigned by the state to
Number
distinguish between records with the same UI Account
Number. Right-justified, zero-filled.
21-29
9
Employer
Required. The 9-digit EIN assigned to the employer by the
Identification IRS. Numeric, right-justified. Should be zero-filled if EIN is
Number
unknown.
30-64
35 Trade Name
Required. The division or subsidiary name of the
establishment. "Mom's Restaurant" is an example of a trade
name of ABC Enterprises. Left-justified, blank-filled.
65-99
35 Street Address Required. The physical street address of the establishment.
Abbreviate as necessary in accordance with the U.S. Postal
Service’s National Zip Code and Postal Service Directory.
Left-justified, blank-filled.
100-129 30 City
Required. The city of the establishment. Left-justified,
blank-filled.
130-131
2
State
Required. The standard 2-letter Postal Service state
abbreviation for the establishment.
132-136
5
Zip Code
Required. The 5-digit Zip Code used by the Postal Service
for the establishment.
137-140
4
Zip Code
Optional. The 4-digit Zip Code Extension used by the Postal
Extension
Service for the establishment. Zero-filled if not used.
141-142
2
Delivery Point Optional. The 2-digit delivery point Bar-code used by the
Bar-code
Postal Service for the establishment. Zero-filled if not used.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-8

Position Length Data Element Data Specification
143-144
2
Primary
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Comment Code explain data values that differ substantially from previously
reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
145-146
2
Secondary
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Comment Code explain data values that differ substantially from previously
reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
147-148
2
Third Comment Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Code
explain data values that differ substantially from previously
reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
149-152
4
Reference Year Required. The four digits of the calendar year covered by the
report.
153
1
Reference
Required. The 1-digit number indicating the reference
Quarter
calendar quarter for the report. The calendar quarters are:
1 = January - March
2 = April - June
3 = July - September
4 = October - December
154-188 35 Legal Name
Optional. The legal or corporate name of the establishment.
For example "ABC Enterprises" or "Smith Companies, Inc."
Left-justified, blank-filled.
189-223 35 Worksite
Required. A meaningful, unique description of the
Description
establishment, such as store number or plant name (e.g., Store
101, Jones River Plant). Left-justified, blank-filled.
224-229
6
Month 1
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment
who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
230-235
6
Month 2
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment
who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
236-241
6
Month 3
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment
who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
242-251 10 Quarterly
Required. The total amount of wages (both taxable and nonWages
taxable) paid to employees during the entire reference quarter.
Must be numeric (no $ signs or commas). Right-justified and
zero-filled.. Should be rounded to the nearest dollar (no
cents). Zero-filled if no wages were paid.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-9

Position Length Data Element Data Specification
252-301 50 Comments
Optional. Any large changes in employment or wages due to
store closure, layoffs, bonuses, seasonal changes, etc. should
be explained in this field. If any units of a firm are being
reported for the first time following expansion of operations
or purchase of units from another firm, a description of the
business activity(s) that will be conducted at each
establishment should be provided. The national office will
use this information in assigning industrial classification
codes to the new unit(s). In addition, if units were purchased
from another firm, the name of the firm, the effective date of
the transaction, and the UI number of the seller, if known,
should be provided. If units have been sold to another firm,
the name of the firm, the effective date of the transaction, and
the UI number of the purchaser, if known, should be
provided. Left-justified, blank-filled.
302-322 21 Worksite
Required. Alpha/numeric indicator that uniquely identifies
Identification the business at this physical location. This code should not be
Code
duplicated within a state UI number. This field is reserved to
include crosswalk information provided by an employer so
that the EDIC may process the data to assign UI/RUNs.
There is no unique format within these 21 positions as they
are dependent upon the reporter. Left-justified, blank-filled.
323-350 28 Blank
For future use. Blank-filled.

Standard 350 MWR File Format (for PEOs) – Received by EDIC
Position Length Data Element Data Specification
1-2
2
Program Code Required. A 2-digit program code indicating the type of data
being reported.
02 = MWR
3
1
Record Type
Required. A 1-digit number indicating the reporter is a PEO.
Value = 3 for this format.
1 = The file format is not Y2K compliant
2 = The file format is Y2K compliant – All values of 2 and
greater are Y2K compliant.
3 = The reporter is a PEO
4 = The reporter is a PPF
4-5
2
Reference
Required. The 2-digit state FIPS code indicating the location
State
of the client establishment (State where PEO pays UI taxes
for that client).

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-10

Position Length Data Element Data Specification
6-15
10 UI Account
Required. The UI account number assigned to the PEO and
Number
pertaining to the state listed above. Right-justified, zerofilled.
16-20
5
Reporting
Required. The RUN assigned by the state to distinguish
Unit Number between records with the same UI Account Number. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
21-29
9
Employer
Required. The 9-digit EIN assigned to the PEO by the IRS.
Identification Numeric, right-justified. Zero-filled if EIN is unknown.
Number
30-64
35 Trade Name
Required. The name of the client establishment. “Mom’s
Restaurant” is an example of a trade name of ABC
Enterprises. Left- justified, blank-filled.
65-99
35 Street Address Required. The physical street address of the client
establishment. Abbreviate as necessary in accordance with
the U.S. Postal Service’s National Zip Code and Postal
Service Directory. Left-justified, blank filled.
100-129 30 City
Required. The city of the client establishment. Left-justified,
blank filled.
130-131
2
State
Required. The standard 2-letter Postal Service state
abbreviation for the client establishment.
132-136
5
Zip Code
Required. The 5-digit Zip Code used by the Postal Service
for the client establishment.
137-140
4
Zip Code
Optional. The 4-digit Zip Code Extension used by the Postal
Extension
Service for the client establishment. Zero-filled if not used.
141-142
2
Delivery Point Optional. The 2-digit delivery point Bar-code used by the
Bar-code
Postal Service for the establishment. Zero-filled if not used.
143-144
2
Primary
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Comment Code explain data values that differ substantially from previously
reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
145-146
2
Secondary
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Comment Code explain data values that differ substantially from previously
reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
147-148
2
Third Comment Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Code
explain data values that differ substantially from previously
reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
149-152
4
Reference Year Required. The four digits of the calendar year covered by the
report.
153
1
Reference
Required. The 1-digit number indicating the reference
Quarter
calendar quarter for the report. The calendar quarters are:
1 = January – March
2 = April – June
3 = July – September
4 = October – December
154-188 35 Legal Name
Required. The legal or corporate name of the client
establishment. For example “ABC Enterprises” or “Smith
Companies, Inc.” Left-justified, blank-filled.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-11

Position Length Data Element Data Specification
189-223 35 Worksite
Required. Enter a meaningful, unique description of the
Description
client establishment, such as store number or plant name (e.g.,
Store 101, Jones River Plant). Left-justified, blank-filled.
224-229
6
Month 1
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment
who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero filled.
230-235
6
Month 2
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment
who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero filled.
236-241
6
Month 3
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment
who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero filled.
242-251 10 Quarterly
Required. The total amount of wages (both taxable and nonWages
taxable) paid to employees during the entire reference quarter.
Must be numeric (no $ signs or commas). Right-justified and
zero-filled. Should be rounded to the nearest dollar (no
cents). Zero-filled if no wages were paid.
252-261 10 Client UI
The UI account number assigned to the client before entering
Account
the co-employer relationship with the PEO. Right-justified,
Number
zero-filled.
262-267
6
Client SIC or The 4-digit SIC or 6-digit NAICS code assigned to the client.
NAICS Code Right-justified, zero-filled.
268-301 34 Client
The Client Economic Activity describes the principal
Economic
business(es) in which the client is engaged. Left-justified.
Activity
302-322 21 Worksite
Required. Alpha/numeric indicator that uniquely identifies
Identification the business at this physical location. This code should not be
Code
duplicated within a state UI number. This field is reserved to
include crosswalk information provided by an employer so
that the EDIC may process the data to assign UI/RUNs.
There is no unique format within these 21 positions as they
are dependent upon the reporter. Left-justified, blank-filled.
323-331
9
Client EIN
Required. The federal Employer Identification Number
(EIN) assigned to the client before entering the co-employer
relationship with the Professional Employer Organization
(PEO).
332-341 10 Client
Required. The telephone number of the client.
Telephone
Number
342-343
2
Month Became Required. The 2-digit month that the record became a client
Client
of the PEO.

September 2019

Position Length Data Element
344-345
2
Year Became
Client
346-347
2
Month Client
Terminated
348-349
2
Year Client
Terminated
350
1
Blank

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-12

Data Specification
Required. The 2-digit year that the record became a client of
the PEO.
Required. The 2-digit month that the record terminated being
a client of the PEO.
Required. The 2-digit year that the record terminated being a
client of the PEO.
For future use. Blank-filled.

Standard 350 MWR File Format (for PPF's)– Received by EDIC
Position Length Data Element Data Specification
1-2
2
Program Code Required. A 2-digit program code indicating the type of data
being reported.
02 = MWR
3
1
Record Type Required. A 1-digit number indicating the record format is
Y2K compliant. Value = 4 for this format.
1 = The file format is not Y2K compliant
2 = The file format is Y2K compliant - All values of 2 and
greater are Y2K compliant.
3 = The reporter is a PEO
4 = The reporter is a PPF
4-5
2
Reference
Required. The 2-digit state FIPS code indicating the location
State
of the establishment.
6-15
10 UI Account
Required. The Unemployment Insurance (UI) account
Number
number assigned to the employer by the state. Right-justified,
zero-filled.
16-20
5
Reporting Unit Required. The number assigned by the state to distinguish
Number
between records with the same UI Account Number. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
21-29
9
Employer
Required. The 9-digit EIN assigned to the employer by the
Identification IRS. Numeric, right-justified. Zero-filled if EIN is unknown.
Number (EIN)
30-64
35 Trade Name
Required. The division or subsidiary name of the
establishment. "Mom's Restaurant" is an example of a trade
name of ABC Enterprises. Left-justified, blank-filled.
65-99
35 Street Address Required. The physical street address of the establishment.
Abbreviate as necessary in accordance with the U.S. Postal
Service’s National Zip Code and Postal Service Directory.
Left-justified, blank-filled.
100-129 30 City
Required. The city of the establishment. Left-justified,
blank-filled.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

Page N-13

Position Length Data Element Data Specification
130-131
2
State
Required. The standard 2-letter Postal Service state
abbreviation for the establishment.
132-136
5
Zip Code
Required. The 5-digit Zip Code used by the Postal Service for
the establishment.
137-140 4
Zip Code
Optional. The 4-digit Zip Code Extension used by the Postal
Extension
Service for the establishment. Zero-filled if not used.
141-142
2
Delivery Point Optional. The 2-digit delivery point Bar-code used by the
Bar-code
Postal Service for the establishment. Zero-filled if not used.
143-144
2
Primary
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Comment Code explain data values that differ substantially from previously
reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
145-146
2
Secondary
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Comment Code explain data values that differ substantially from previously
reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
147-148
2
Third
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment codes used to
Comment Code explain data values that differ substantially from previously
reported data. Blank-filled if not used.
149-152
4
Reference Year Required. The four digits of the calendar year covered by the
report.
153
1
Reference
Required. The 1-digit number indicating the reference
Quarter
calendar quarter for the report. The calendar quarters are:
1 = January - March
2 = April - June
3 = July - September
4 = October - December
154-188 35 Legal Name
Required. The legal or corporate name of the establishment.
For example "ABC Enterprises" or "Smith Companies, Inc."
Left-justified, blank-filled.
189-223 35 Worksite
Required. A meaningful, unique description of the
Description
establishment, such as store number or plant name (e.g., Store
101, Jones River Plant). Left-justified, blank-filled.
224-229
6
Month 1
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
230-235
6
Month 2
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero-filled.
236-241
6
Month 3
Required. The number of all full- and part-time employees
Employment who worked during or received pay (subject to UI wages) for
the pay period which includes the 12th of the month. Rightjustified, zero-filled.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Page N-14

Position Length Data Element Data Specification
242-251 10 Quarterly
Required. The total amount of wages (both taxable and nonWages
taxable) paid to employees during the entire reference quarter.
Must be numeric (no $ signs or commas). Right-justified and
zero-filled. Should be rounded to the nearest dollar (no
cents). Zero-filled if no wages were paid.
252-261 10 Client Contact Required. The phone number (with area code) of the client’s
Phone Number contact person to call in reference to data questions.
Parentheses and hyphens should be omitted.
262-301 40 Client Contact Required. The name of the client’s contact person. LeftName
justified, blank-filled.
302-322 21 Worksite
Required. Alpha/numeric indicator that uniquely identifies
Identification the business at this physical location. This code should not be
Code
duplicated within a state UI number. This field is reserved to
include crosswalk information provided by an employer so
that the EDIC may process the data to assign UI/RUNs.
There is no unique format within these 21 positions as they
are dependent upon the reporter. Left-justified, blank-filled.
323-350 28 Filler2
For future use. Blank-filled.

MWR Web File Formats
Solicitation Request File
The MWR Web solicitation request file is sent by the national office to the states on a quarterly
basis. The request file contains the identification of employers that the national office has
selected to be solicited to participate in providing MWR data via MWR Web.
Position
1-2

Length
2

Data Element
Program Code

3

1

Record Type

4-5

2

Reference State

6-15

10

16-24

9

25-36

12

UI Account
Number
Employer
Identification
Number
IDCF Temporary
Account Number

Data Specification
Required. A 2-digit program code indicating the
type of data being reported.
02 = MWR data for the QCEW program
Required. A 1-digit number indicating the record
format.
"1" = MWR Web Solicitation Request File
Required. The 2-digit state FIPS code indicating
the location of the establishment.
Required. The UI account number assigned to the
employer by the state. Right-justified, zero-filled.
The 9-digit EIN assigned to the employer by the
IRS. When used in the MWR Web system this
field will always be blank.
Temporary Account Number that the Respondent
will need in order to register for MWR Web. The

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position

Length

Data Element

37-44

8

45-48

4

IDCF Temporary
Password
Reference Year

49

1

Reference Quarter

Page N-15

Data Specification
IDCF Temporary Account and Password should
appear on initial and follow-up solicitation forms,
but should be retained for only the one quarter.
Once the employer registers and reports this
information it is not used in the EXPO and WIN
systems again.
Temporary Password that the Respondent will need
in order to register for MWR Web
Required. The four digits of the calendar year
covered by the report.
Required. The 1-digit number indicating the
reference calendar quarter for the report. The
calendar quarters are:
1 = January–March
2 = April–June
3 = July–September 4 = October–December

State Historical Data File
States send the State Historical Data file to the national office on a quarterly basis. Every record
on the State Historical Data File is identified by a Format Type value, which indicates its
format. The three possible Format Types in the State Historical Data File correspond to the
three major entities that are covered by the MWR survey:
Format Type
1
2
3

Data Specification
Information about a UI account
Information about a worksite
Information about one quarter of data for a worksite

Note: For a given UI account, all records on the state EXPO and WIN-202 database should be
included on the State Historical Data file, regardless of the Status Code: active, inactive, and
pending records. Further note, some inactive records may have no quarterly records for the time
period requested. Pending records may not have quarterly data either.
State Historical Data File – Record Format Type 1 (UI Account)
Position
1-2

Length
2

Data Element
Reference State

3-12

10

UI Account
Number

13-21

9

Blank

Data Specification
Required. The 2-digit state FIPS code
indicating the location of the establishment.
Required. The UI account number assigned to
the employer by the state. Right-justified,
zero-filled.
Not Used.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position
22

Length
1

Data Element
MWR Mailing
Indicator

23
24-32

1
9

33-42

10

43

1

Format Type
Employer
Identification
Number
Predecessor UI
Account Number
Ownership Code

44-78

35

Legal Name

79-113

35

Contact Name

114-148

35

Mailing Other
Address 1

149-183

35

184-213

30

Mailing Other
Address 2
Mailing Other
Address City

214-215

2

Mailing Other
State

216-220

5

221-224

4

225-284

60

Mailing Other
Zip Code
Mailing Other
Zip Code
Extension
Email address

285-294

10

Fax Number

295-304

10

Phone Number

305-309

5

310-313

4

Phone Number
Extension
Agent Code

Page N-16

Data Specification
Mailing Code (EXPO)/MWR Mailing
Indicator (WIN) of UI Account’s master RUN
(00000)
1 = UI Account
The 9-digit EIN assigned to the employer by
the IRS.
The UI account number of the predecessor, if
applicable. If none, then blank.
1-digit numeric code used to identify the
economic ownership of the enterprise.
The Legal Name of the UI account. (Trade
Name not used here. It is used only in Format
Type 2—Worksite). Left-justified, blankfilled.
Contact Name or Attention Line. Leftjustified, blank-filled.
The address that would be used to mail the
MWR to the respondent for the UI account.
Left-justified, blank-filled.
See note above. May also be left blank.
The city that would be used to mail the MWR
to the respondent for the UI account. Leftjustified, blank-filled.
The standard 2-letter Postal Service state
abbreviation that would be used to mail the
MWR to the respondent for the UI account.
The Zip Code that would be used to mail the
MWR to the respondent for the UI account.
The Zip Code Extension that would be used to
mail the MWR to the respondent for the UI
account. If unavailable, blank.
Contact’s e-mail address. Left-justified,
blank-filled.
Contact’s fax number if provided, otherwise
blank. (No parentheses or hyphens)
Contact’s phone number. (No parentheses or
hyphens)
Contact’s phone extension if provided,
otherwise blank.
State-defined 4-digit agent code (used for
payroll service or similar agency). Blank if
not used.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position
314-318

Length
5

Data Element
Maximum RUN

Page N-17

Data Specification
The highest used value of RUN for any
worksite in this UI account. Right-justified,
zero-filled.

State Historical Data File - Record Format Type 2 (Worksite)
Position
1-2

Length
2

Data Element
Reference State

3-12

10

UI Account
Number

13-17

5

18-22
23
24-33

5
1
10

34-38

5

39-73

35

Reporting Unit
Number
Blank
Format Type
Predecessor UI
Account Number
Predecessor
Reporting Unit
Number
Trade Name

74-108

35

Physical
Location
Address

109-138

30

City

139-140

2

State

141-145

5

Zip Code

146-149

4

150-184

35

Zip Code
Extension
Worksite
Description

185-187

3

County Code

188-190

3

Township Code

Data Specification
Required. The 2-digit state FIPS code
indicating the location of the establishment.
Required. The UI account number assigned to
the employer by the state. Right-justified,
zero-filled.
RUN of the worksite within the UI account.
Right-justified, zero-filled.
All blank.
2 = Worksite
The UI account number of the predecessor, if
applicable. If none, then blank.
The RUN of the predecessor, if applicable.
Right-justified, blank-filled. If none, then
blank.
The division or subsidiary name of the
establishment. Left-justified, blank-filled.
Physical address of the establishment. Line 1
of the PLA street address; if Line 1 is not
available, line 2 used. Left-justified, blankfilled.
City of the establishment. Left-justified,
blank-filled.
The standard 2-letter Postal Service state
abbreviation.
Zip Code used by the Postal Service for the
establishment.
Zip Code Extension used by the Postal Service
for the establishment. If unavailable, blank.
A meaningful, unique description of the
establishment, such as store number or plant
name. Left-justified, blank-filled.
3-digit numeric Federal Information
Processing Standard (FIPS) county code used
to identify each reporting unit's location or
place of business.
3-digit numeric township code required in
New England states and New Jersey, used to

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position

Length

Data Element

191
192-197

1
6

Auxiliary Code
NAICS

198-318

121

Blank

Page N-18

Data Specification
identify township of location or place of
business. If not applicable, blank.
Blank
North American Industry Classification
System code
Not used – blank.

State Historical Data File – Record Format Type 3 (Worksite-Quarter)
Position
1-2

Length Data Element
2
Reference State

3-12

10

UI Account
Number

13-17

5

18-21
22
23

4
1
1

Reporting Unit
Number
Year
Quarter
Format Type

24

1

Status Code

25-30

6

31

1

32-37

6

38

1

39-44

6

45

1

46
57

11
1

Month 1
Employment
Month 1
Employment
Indicator
Month 2
Employment
Month 2
Employment
Indicator
Month 3
Employment
Month 3
Employment
Indicator
Total Wages
Total Wage
Indicator

Data Specification
Required. The 2-digit state FIPS code
indicating the location of the establishment.
Required. The UI account number assigned
to the employer by the state. Right-justified,
zero-filled.
RUN of the worksite within the UI account.
Right-justified, zero-filled.
Year of data collection for this worksite
Quarter of data collection for this worksite
Format Type.
3 = Worksite-Quarter
1 = active
2 = inactive
9 = pending
Month 1 employment. Right-justified, zerofilled.
First month employment indicator flag
Month 2 employment. Right-justified, zerofilled.
Second month employment indicator flag
Month 3 employment. Right-justified, zerofilled.
Third month employment indicator flag
Total Wages. Right-justified, zero-filled.
Total Wages Indicator Flag

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position
58-59

Length Data Element
2
Comment Code 1

60-61
62-63
64-120

2
2
57

Comment Code 2
Comment Code 3
Narrative
Comment

121-318

198

Blank

Page N-19

Data Specification
Comment code #1: Standard 2-digit comment
codes used to explain data values that differ
substantially from previously reported data
Comment code #2. See above.
Comment code #3. See above.
Explanation of large changes in employment
or wages due to store closure, layoffs,
bonuses, seasonal changes. Left-justified,
blank-filled.
Not used – blank.

Confirmed Register File Format Exported to the states via MWR Web
A list of firms that have been solicited, registered to participate in MWR Web, and completed
entering data for their UI account area are provided in the Confirmed Register File provided to
the states by the national office/Division of Business Establishment Systems (DBES) in the 29
position file layout given below.
Position
1-2
3
4-5
6-15

Length
2
1
2
10

16-24
25-28
29

9
4
1

Data Element
Program Code
Filler
Reference State
UI Account Number
Filler
Year
Quarter

Data Specifications
02 = QCEW
Blank
The 2-digit numeric FIPS code of the state.
The UI account number assigned to the
employer by the state. Right-justified, zerofilled.
Blank
Year of data collection for this account.
Quarter of data collection for this account.

479 Position MWR Print Contract Mail File Format – Exported by states to generate
mailing by print contractor.
Format Type
RUN = 00000
RUN > 00000

Data Specification
Information about a UI account
Information about a worksite

Note: The sorting of this file is such that all records with the same UI Account Number are
grouped together and sorted ascending, but the records are then sorted on RUN with the >00000
RUNs appearing first, sorted ascending, and the RUN 00000 record last.
Example:
FIPS/UIN/RUN
01/0123456789/00001

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Page N-20

01/0123456789/00002
01/0123456789/00003
01/0123456789/00000
01/0123456790/00001
01/0123456790/00003
01/0123456790/00000
479 Position MWR Print Contract Mail File Format – Exported by states to generate
mailing by print contractor. (masters)
Position Length Data Element
1-2
2
State FIPS Code
3-12
10 UI Account Number
13-17

5

18-26

9

27-61
62-96
97-131

35
35
35

132-166

35

167-201

35

202-231
232-233

30
2

234-238
239-242
243-277
278-312

5
4
35
35

313-342
343-344
345-349
350-353
354-388

30
2
5
4
35

389-392

4

Data Specification
Required. Right-justified, leading 0’s
Required. The UI account number assigned to the
employer by the state. Right-justified, zero-filled.
Reporting Unit
Required. The RUN assigned by the state to
Number
distinguish between records with the same UI
Account Number. Right-justified, zero-filled.
Federal Employer
The 9-digit EIN assigned to the employer by the IRS.
Identification Number Numeric, right-justified. Should be zero-filled if EIN
is unknown.
Trade Name
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
Legal Name
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
UI Contact (Attention) Left-justify, trailing spaces.
Name
MOA - Delivery
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
Address Line
MOA - Secondary
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
Address Line
MOA - City
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
If foreign, blank; if Canadian, Canadian province
MOA - State
abbr.
MOA - Zip Code
If foreign, leave blank.
MOA - Zip 4 Extension If foreign, leave blank.
PLA - Street Address Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.
PLA - Supplemental
Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.
Location Information
PLA - City
Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.
PLA - State
Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.
PLA - Zip Code
Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.
PLA - ZIP 4 Extension Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.
Reporting Unit
Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.
Description
Year
Required. Year of collection, specified when
generating file.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position Length Data Element
393
1
Quarter

Page N-21

Data Specification
Required. Quarter of collection, specified when
generating file.
If first mailing, “1”; if subsequent mailing, “2”.
1-digit numeric code used to identify the economic
ownership of the establishment.
1-digit numeric code used to identify the relationship
of the record to those of its broader UI Account
Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.

394
395

1
1

Request Type
Ownership Code

396

1

MEEI Code

397-402

6

NAICS Code

403-408

6

Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.

409-414

6

415-420

6

421-430

10

Month One
Employment
Month Two
Employment
Month Three
Employment
Total Wages

431-432

2

Filler

Space-fill.

433-435

3

County Code

Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.

436-439

4

Township/Zone Code

Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.

440-449

10

Phone Number

Respondent phone number

450-461

12

MWR Web ID

462-469

8

MWR Web Password

470-472

3

12-digit numeric ID provided by MWR Web
Solicitation Request File, used by respondents for
first-time online login
8-digit alpha-numeric password, case sensitive,
provided by MWR Web Solicitation Request File,
used by respondents for first-time online login
Left-justified, trailing spaces.

473-479

7

MOA - Foreign
Country
MOA - Foreign Postal Left-justified, trailing spaces.
Code

Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.
Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.
Space-fill, for RUN > 00000 records only.

479 Position MWR Print Contract Mail File Format – Exported by states to generate
mailing by print contractor. (worksites)
Position Length Data Element
1-2
2
State FIPS Code
3-12
10 UI Account
Number
13-17
5
Reporting Unit
Number

Data Specification
Required. Right-justified, leading 0’s
Required. The UI account number assigned to the
employer by the state. Right-justified, zero-filled.
Required. The RUN assigned by the state to
distinguish between records with the same UI Account
Number. Right-justified, zero-filled.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position Length Data Element
18-26
9
Federal Employer
Identification
Number
27-61
35 Trade Name
62-96
35 Legal Name
97-131
35 UI Contact
(Attention) Name
132-166 35 MOA - Delivery
Address Line
167-201 35 MOA - Secondary
Address Line
202-231 30 MOA - City
232-233
2
MOA - State
234-238
5
MOA - Zip Code
239-242
4
MOA - Zip 4
Extension
243-277 35 PLA - Street
Address
278-312 35 PLA Supplemental
Location
Information
313-342 30 PLA - City
343-344
2
PLA - State
345-349
5
PLA - Zip Code
350-353
4
PLA - ZIP 4
Extension
354-388 35 Reporting Unit
Description
389-392
4
Year
393
1
Quarter
394
1
Request Type
395
1
Ownership Code
396

1

MEEI Code

397-402

6

NAICS Code

403-408

6

409-414

6

Month One
Employment
Month Two
Employment

Page N-22

Data Specification
The 9-digit EIN assigned to the employer by the IRS.
Numeric, right-justified. Should be zero-filled if EIN is
unknown.
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.
Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.
Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.
Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.
Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.
Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
Left-justify, trailing spaces.

Left-justify, trailing spaces.
If foreign, blank; if Canadian, Canadian province abbr.
If foreign, leave blank.
If foreign, leave blank.
Left-justify, trailing spaces.
Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.
Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.
If first mailing, “1”; if subsequent mailing, “2”.
1-digit numeric code used to identify the economic
ownership of the establishment.
1-digit numeric code used to identify the relationship of
the record to those of its broader UI Account
6-digit numeric code used to identify the primary activity
of the establishment.
Right-justify, leading 0’s.
Right-justify, leading 0’s.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Page N-23

Position Length Data Element
415-420
6
Month Three
Employment
421-430 10 Total Wages

Data Specification
Right-justify, leading 0’s.

431-432

2

Filler

Space-fill.

433-435

3

County Code

436-439

4

Township/Zone
Code

440-449

10

Phone Number

3-digit numeric code used to identify the county where
the worksite is physically located
Left-justified, trailing spaces; if state uses Township
Codes, write 3-digit code used to identify the township of
the worksite’s physical location; if state uses Zone Codes,
write 4-digit code used to identify the zone of the
worksite’s physical location; if the state uses neither,
space-fill.
Respondent phone number

450-461

12

MWR Web ID

Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.

462-469

8

Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.

470-472

3

473-479

7

MWR Web
Password
MOA - Foreign
Country
MOA - Foreign
Postal Code

Right-justify, leading 0’s.

Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.
Space-fill, for RUN = 00000 records only.

424 Position MWR Print Contract Data File Format – Exported by print contractor and
sent to the states
Position Length Data Element
1-2
2
Program Code
3

1

Record Type

4-5

2

Reference State

6-15

10

16-20

5

UI Account
Number
Reporting Unit
Number

21
22-30

1
9

Format Type
Federal Employer
Identification
Number

Data Specification
Required. A 2-digit program code indicating the type of
data being reported.
02 = MWR
Required. 5 = MWR or RFEW
Required. The 2-digit state FIPS code indicating the
location of the establishment.
Required. The UI account number assigned to the
employer by the state. Right-justified, zero-filled.
Required. The RUN number assigned by the state to
distinguish between records with the same UI Account
Number. Right-justified, zero-filled. This file only
contains subunits, RUN > 00000.
Required. D = Detail Type
The 9-digit EIN assigned to the employer by the IRS.
Numeric, right-justified. Should be zero-filled if EIN is
unknown.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position Length Data Element
31-147
117 Filler
148-151
4
Year
152

1

Quarter

153-222
223-228

70
6

229-234

6

235-240

6

241-250
251-307
308
309-424

10
57
1
116

Filler
Month One
Employment
Month Two
Employment
Month Three
Employment
Total Wages
Filler
Data Source Code
Filler

Page N-24

Data Specification
Space-filled.
Required. The year of data collection to which the file’s
data reference.
Required. The quarter of data collection to which the
file’s data reference.
Space-filled
Right-justify, leading 0’s.
Right-justify, leading 0’s.
Right-justify, leading 0’s.
Right-justify, leading 0’s.
Space-filled.
Required. P = Print.
Space-filled.

Various file formats received by the EDIC are provided next in this appendix, including the
standard 350 position MWR reporter files: regular (non-PEO/PPF); PEO; and PPF. All data
processed by the EDIC, regardless of the file format in which it was received at the EDIC, are
exported to the states in the standard 424-position file EDIC export format shown at the
beginning of this appendix.
Standard 799 MWR File Format Exported to the states via MWR Web (Collected Data
file)
The data of firms who report via the MWR Web system are provided to the states by the national
office/Division of Business Establishment Systems (DBES) in the 799 position file layout given
below. This is known as the Collected Data file referred to in Section 4.8.
Position
1-2
3

Length
2
1

4-5

2

Data Element
Program Code
Record Type
(MWR Web = 6)
Reference State

6-15

10

UI Account Number

16-20

5

Reporting Unit Number

21

1

Format Type

Data Specifications
02 = QCEW
Record Type = 6
Required. The 2-digit numeric FIPS code of the
state.
Required. The UI account number assigned to
the employer by the state. Right-justified, zerofilled.
Required. The RUN assigned by the state to
distinguish between records with the same UI
Account Number. Right-justified, zero-filled.
Format Type = D

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position
22-30

Length
9

31-65

35

66-100

35

101-130

30

131-132

2

133-137

5

138-141

4

142-143

2

144-145

2

146-147

2

148-151

4

152

1

153-187

35

Data Element
Employer Identification
Number

Page N-25

Data Specifications
Required. The 9-digit EIN assigned to the
employer by the IRS. Numeric, right-justified.
Should be zero-filled if EIN is unknown.
Trade Name
Required. The division or subsidiary name of
the establishment. "Mom's Restaurant" is an
example of a trade name of ABC Enterprises.
Left-justified, blank-filled.
Street Address
Required. The physical street address of the
establishment. Abbreviate as necessary in
accordance with the U.S. Postal Service’s
National Zip Code and Postal Service Directory.
Left-justified, blank-filled.
City
Required. The city of the establishment. Leftjustified, blank-filled.
State
Required. The standard 2-letter Postal Service
state abbreviation for the establishment.
Zip Code
Required. The 5-digit Zip Code used by the
Postal Service for the establishment.
Zip Code Extension
Optional. The 4-digit Zip Code Extension used
by the Postal Service for the establishment.
Blank-filled if not used.
Primary Comment Code
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment
codes used to explain data values that differ
substantially from previously reported data.
Blank-filled if not used.
Secondary Comment Code Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment
codes used to explain data values that differ
substantially from previously reported data.
Blank-filled if not used.
Third Comment Code
Optional. One of the standard 2-digit comment
codes used to explain data values that differ
substantially from previously reported data.
Blank-filled if not used.
Reference Year
Required. The four digits of the calendar year
covered by the report.
Reference Quarter
Required. The 1-digit number indicating the
reference calendar quarter for the report. The
calendar quarters are:
1 = January - March
2 = April - June
3 = July - September
4 = October December
Legal Name
Optional. The legal or corporate name of the
establishment. For example "ABC Enterprises"

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position

Length

Data Element

188-222

35

Worksite Description

223-228

6

Month 1 Employment

229-234

6

Month 2 Employment

235-240

6

Month 3 Employment

241-250

10

Quarterly Wages

251-307

57

Narrative Comment

308

1

Data Source Code

309-311

3

County Fips Code

312-314

3

Township Code

Page N-26

Data Specifications
or "Smith Companies, Inc." Left-justified,
blank-filled.
Required. A meaningful, unique description of
the establishment, such as store number or plant
name (e.g., Store 101, Jones River Plant). Leftjustified, blank-filled.
Required. The number of all full- and part-time
employees who worked during or received pay
(subject to UI wages) for the pay period which
includes the 12th of the month. Right-justified,
zero filled.
Required. The number of all full- and part-time
employees who worked during or received pay
(subject to UI wages) for the pay period which
includes the 12th of the month. Right-justified,
zero filled.
Required. The number of all full- and part-time
employees who worked during or received pay
(subject to UI wages) for the pay period which
includes the 12th of the month. Right-justified,
zero filled.
Required. The total amount of wages (both
taxable and non-taxable) paid to employees
during the entire reference quarter. Must be
numeric (no $ signs or commas). Must be rightjustified and filled with leading zeros. Should be
rounded to the nearest dollar (no cents). Should
be zero-filled if no wages were paid.
Explanation of large changes in employment or
wages due to store closure, layoffs, bonuses,
seasonal changes.
Required. The value is currently “W”. This
indicates data processed and edited via MWR
Web.
Required for birth records. 3-digit numeric
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS)
code used to identify each establishment location
or place of business.
Required for birth records. 3-digit numeric code
required in New England States and New Jersey.
Used to identify township of each establishment
location or place of business.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position
315

Length
1

Data Element
Ownership Code
(Births Only)

316

1

Filler

317-322

6

NAICS Code
(Births Only)

323-326
327-330

4
4

331-332

2

333-334

2

335-338

4

339-340

2

341-342

2

343-492

150

Agent Code
Initial Date of Liability –
Year
Initial Date of Liability –
Month
Initial Date of Liability –
Day
End of Liability Date Year
End of Liability Date Month
End of Liability Date –
Day
Worksite Economic
Activity Description

493-527
528-562

35
35

MWR Contact
Contact Title

563-597

35

598-632

35

633-662

30

Mailing Street Address
Line 1
Mailing Street Address
Line 2
Mailing Address - City

663-664

2

Mailing Address - State

665-669

5

670-673

4

Mailing Address – 5-digit
ZIP Code
Mailing Address – 4-digit
ZIP Code Extension

674-676
677-679
680-683

3
3
4

Area Code
Phone Prefix
Phone Suffix

Page N-27

Data Specifications
Required for birth records. 1-digit numeric code
used to identify the economic ownership of the
establishment.
1-digit numeric, assigned value is “5.” (Formerly
Auxiliary Code)
Required for birth records. 6-digit numeric code
used to identify the primary activity of the
establishment.
Record Type 6
The four-digit year of a firm's initial liability
date. This is applicable to birth records.
The two-digit month of a firm's initial liability
date. This is applicable to birth records.
The two-digit day of a firm's initial liability date.
This is applicable to birth records.
The four-digit year of a firm's end of liability
date. This is applicable to death records.
The two-digit month of a firm's end of liability
date. This is applicable to death records.
The two-digit day of a firm's end of liability
date. This is applicable to death records.
A description of the client worksite's economic
activity. Economic activity is the principal
business(es) in which the worksite is engaged.
The contact’s name. Left-justified, blank-filled.
The contact’s job title. Left-justified, blankfilled.
The line 1 mailing street address for the contact.
Left-justified, blank-filled.
The line 2 mailing street address for the contact.
Left-justified, blank-filled.
The mailing address city for the contact. Leftjustified, blank-filled.
The standard 2-letter Postal Service state
abbreviation for the contact’s mailing address.
The 5-digit Zip Code used by the Postal Service
for the contact’s mailing address.
The 4-digit Zip Code Extension used by the
Postal Service for the contact’s mailing address.
Blank-filled if not used.
The contact’s phone number area code.
The contact’s phone number prefix.
The contact’s phone number suffix.

QCEW Operating Manual
MWR File Layouts

September 2019

Position
684-688

Length
5

Data Element
Phone Extension

689-698

10

Contact Fax

699-758

60

Email Address

759

1

760

1

761

1

762

1

763

1

764-798

35

799

1

Business Transfer
Event Type 1
Business Transfer
Event Type 2
Business Transfer
Event Type 3
Business Transfer
Event Type 4
Business Transfer
Event Type 5
Business Transfer
Company
Collection Status

Page N-28

Data Specifications
The contact’s phone extension, if available.
Left-justified, blank-filled.
The contact’s fax number, if available. No
hyphens or parentheses.
The contact’s email address, if available. Leftjustified, blank-filled.
1 = “Acquired another company”
2 = “Been sold to another company.”
3 = “Been in a merger”
4 = “Reorganized”
5 = “Opened a new UI account”

1 = No action required
2 = Mail indicator “Y”
3 = “Now is a single worksite account – state
action required.”
4 = “UI account no longer active.”
5 or 6 = No action required

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

Page 1

Appendix O – Central Collection Data Editing
This appendix describes in general terms the edits performed by the System for processing Large
volume Employment Data (SLED) processing system used by the Electronic Data Interchange
Center (EDIC). They are being presented so that state staff can better understand how their data
are being processed by the EDIC before being provided to the state. (For a more comprehensive
overview of the work performed at the EDIC, see Chapter 4 – Multiple Worksite Central
Reporting.)
The SLED system edits closely resemble the following list of edits performed in the standard
state systems and the BLS-Washington system. For detailed edit information on these edits, refer
to – Edit Conditions and Formulas.
Edit Code
002
003
004
005
006
010
012
013
016
031
032
033
034
045
048
065
072
091
092
093
094
095
102
103
104
104
126
127
128

State/BLS System Edit
UI Account Number Check
Reporting Unit Number Check
Reference Year Check
Reference Quarter Check
State Code Check
NAICS Code Check
Ownership Code Check
County Code Check
Ownership/NAICS Conflict
First Month Employment Check
Second Month Employment Check
Third Month Employment Check
Total Wages Check
Federal Employer Identification Number Check
Comment Code Check
Inconsistent County and Township Codes Check
Blank Name Check
Large Monthly Employment Change Check
Large Wage Change Check
Employment Without Wages Check
Wages Without Employment Check
Wages/Employment Sum Check
Blank Physical Location City Check
Physical Location State Abbreviation Check
Physical Location Zip Code Format Check
Physical Location Zip Code Extension Format Check
Monthly Employment Change Check
Wage Change Check
Identical Monthly Employment Check

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

Page 2

This appendix provides specific, detailed edit information only for those editing processes that
SLED performs differently or that have no corresponding edits in the states and
BLS-Washington, as well as some additional information.
Normal SLED Processing from Initial Load Through Export
The processing sequence of the SLED system is outlined below. SLED provides EDIC staff
with the option of performing a crosswalk, which is needed when employers do not provide UI
Account Numbers (UIs) and/or Reporting Unit Numbers (RUNs). Steps 2 and 3 are only
performed if the crosswalk processing is used. If the crosswalk option is not used, SLED moves
from the pre-edits (step 1) directly into single unit processing (step 4).
1. Pre-Edits – Pre-edit checks are performed to flag invalid state FIPS codes, missing unique
crosswalk/worksite identifiers as well as non-numeric employment and wages
2. Crosswalk Matching – SLED assigns a UI and RUN to each record using linking information
built into the reporter’s crosswalk information. SLED performs the linking process by
matching a unique worksite identifier on the reporter's file with the company identifier on
their crosswalk information. If a match is found, SLED copies the UI and RUN from the
reporter’s crosswalk information onto the appropriate record on the reporter file.
3. Single Unit Identification – The system identifies and displays potential single-unit records
on the reporter’s file. This applies to private sector reporters only. For private sector
employers, SLED does not accept zero-filled RUNs; however, government reporters may
have zero-filled RUNs.
4. Aggregation – Data of records having an identical combination of state FIPS code, UI, and
RUN are aggregated into a single record. This step is needed because some reporters provide
data at a sub-establishment level (for example, for store departments rather than for the entire
store). If the reporter file received is from a Professional Employer Organization (PEO), any
client data of the PEO are also copied to a “PEO client table” which holds the client data.
This step is done immediately after aggregation processing is completed. The client data are
later used as part of building the state export files during the exporting process.
5. Missing Record Identification/Processing – The system identifies and displays records that
are potentially missing/out-of-business. Typically, these are records not present on the file
submitted by the reporter for the current quarter but were present on the same reporter file for
the previous quarter. Records that are truly out-of-business can be added back to the
reporter’s file for the current quarter along with a comment code of 86 (establishment
permanently out-of-business) for export and identification to the state. Other missing record
situations may involve comment code 88 (establishment dissolution) or 18 (active employer
reporting zero employment and wages) or 93 (record has a successor UI/RUN).
6. Detail Edits – Detail edits are performed to check the validity of fields on the reporter file
and to compare fields for consistency.
7. Interquarter Editing of Employment and Wages – The system performs interquarter edits for
employment and wages using the reporter file and historical reporter data (data collected by
the EDIC for that reporter in previous quarters).

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

Page 3

8. Employment Warning Edits – The analyst will select and run Employment Warnings editing.
SLED performs editing on employment fields to check for unusual fluctuations in the current
quarter firm record. Current quarter and historical employment data are used in this editing.
SLED lists any current quarter firm record flagged for review and processing.
9. Birth Record Processing – The system identifies and edits birth records (records on the
current quarter reporter file but not on earlier quarters). Birth records carry the classification
codes (including NAICS, County/Township, and Ownership codes) and appropriate
comment code (85 = new establishment or worksite, or 90 = reporter changes basis of
reporting – greater detail) needed to set up the new reporting units in the state.
10. Non-Wage, Non-Employment Interquarter Editing – SLED checks for content changes in
fields other than wages and monthly employments (name and address fields, Employer
Identification Number (EIN), and Reporting Unit Description). The system compares these
fields using current and prior quarter reporter records.
11. Detail Edits – Detail edits are performed a second time. Typically, at this stage, there are no
critical detail edit errors to correct.
12. Single Unit Identification – The system identifies and displays potential single-unit records a
second time on the reporter’s file. This applies to private sector reporters only. For private
sector employers, SLED does not accept zero-filled RUNs; however, government reporters
may have zero-filled RUNs.
13. Reporter Data to Export Work Table – Once all editing is finished, SLED moves the
reporter’s data to an export work holding table for later transmission to states.
14. Export – Data are exported to the states using the first export file format (424 positions)
shown in Appendix N – MWR File Formats. Predecessor/successor data are also exported
within State export files if entered by the EDIC prior to the exporting process.
General Differences Between SLED and the State/BLS Systems


With few exceptions, SLED does not allow data to be processed to completion and exported
to the states until records with edit flags are either fixed or explained. Invalid data must be
corrected, while suspect data must be explained with an appropriate comment code
(sometimes accompanied by a narrative comment).



Back quarter data available during SLED processing may differ from back quarter data
available during state processing for employers who recently switched to EDIC reporting.
Generally speaking, the EDIC only receives, processes, and exports current quarter data.
However, states routinely update and process back quarter data that were reported late.
States may have more accurate or complete back quarter data for employers who make the
transition to the EDIC. Differences in back quarter data could occasionally lead to different
editing results in the interquarter edits for employment and wages.



Records submitted to the EDI Center have only one address, a physical location address. In
the state and BLS systems, records may have up to three addresses: physical location address,
Mailing/other address, and UI address. The address edit in the state and BLS systems
requires that each record must contain one clean address that meets postal regulations. (See

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

May 2019

Page 4

edit 070 in Appendix F.) In SLED, it is possible for a record to pass editing when all of the
address fields are blank.


The Multiple Worksite Report (MWR) data processed through SLED do not include a
number of data elements present in the state systems, such as Taxable Wages, Contributions,
Type of Coverage Code, and Status Code. All SLED data are presumed to describe active,
covered reporting units.



Some parameters in SLED are tighter than the parameter defaults in the state systems. This
situation can explain why a record fails a state edit but does not have an EDI provided
comment code.

In addition, SLED performs two edits (see Consistency Edits later in this chapter) that are not
included in the state and BLS systems. For several other edits, SLED screens data more
stringently than the state and BLS systems. For example, several SLED edits do not use the
employment cutoff parameters that allow comparable edits in the state and BLS systems to
bypass records with low employment. In other words, SLED flags some records that would not
flag in the states or BLS.
SLED Pre-edits
The purpose of the pre-edits is to check for critical errors in key fields. SLED flags these errors
in the pre-edits:
Edit Code
002
003
004
005
006
031
032
033
034

State/BLS System Edit Message
Invalid UI Account Number
Invalid Reporting Unit Number
Invalid Reference Year
Invalid Reference Quarter
Invalid State Code
Invalid First Month Employment
Invalid Second Month Employment
Invalid Third Month Employment
Invalid Total Wages

If a crosswalk is used to process the reporter's file and assign UI Account Numbers or Reporting
Unit Numbers, the edits for those two fields are not performed until after crosswalk processing is
completed.
SLED allows the RUN field to be alphanumeric and to contain all nines; however, the field is
changed to appropriate number values during crosswalk processing. The state and BLS systems
require the RUN field to be numeric only and do not permit the field to contain all nines. See
edit 003. For private sector employers, SLED does not export zero-filled RUNs; however, the
National Finance Center (NFC), Department of Defense (DoD), and other Federal government
establishments may have zero-filled RUNs.

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

May 2019

Page 5

Detail Edits
SLED runs the detail edits after the pre-edits and the crosswalk matching process. The detail
edits are composed of data type, range, and value checks of a particular field within each record.
The SLED detail edits flag the same conditions as these state/BLS edits:
Edit Code
045
048
072
102
103
104

State/BLS System Edit Message
Invalid Federal EI Number
Invalid Comment Code
Both Trade Name and Legal Name are Blank
Blank Physical Location City; Other PLA Fields Present
Unusable Physical Location State Abbreviation
Unusable Physical Location Zip Code Format

In addition, SLED screens the address block in a manner similar to state/BLS edit 114, the
Physical Address Format Check. The record is flagged if the street address line contains a Post
Office Box or drawer lock box. SLED also compares the state abbreviation to the state FIPS
code (for example, if the FIPS code is 17 (Illinois), the state abbreviation should be IL).
However, this is not a critical edit and does not require correction for SLED to continue
processing. Some worksite records contain the address of the company's headquarters, which
may be in a different state. The state and BLS systems have three address blocks, and can use
the Mailing/Other address block for such cases. SLED has only one address block, which is
presumed to be a physical location address. The EDIC is unable to collect a physical location
address on some occasions (for example, when a group of employees are not assigned to any
specific, fixed location) and accepts a headquarters address instead. For this reason,
inconsistencies between state FIPS codes and state abbreviations are flagged only as warnings.
SLED also screens the comment codes to ensure that the same code is not used in more than one
comment code field. Comment code 99 is not permitted unless a narrative comment is present.
Beginning several quarters after the reporting unit's Setup Date, the state and BLS systems assign
a Warning (W) flag to UI accounts with significant employment and zero-filled EINs. (See edit
116 in Appendix F.) Though the SLED system permits records of zero filled EINs to be
exported, as a matter of policy the EDIC will not send the data without valid EINs.
Consistency Edits
The consistency edits are run as part of the detail edits. The consistency edits are composed of
relationship checks between fields of the same record. Several of these edits use parameters
from the State Abbreviation Table located within SLED. (See State Parameters later in this
appendix.) The consistency edits check the reporter file for the following:

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

Page 6

1. State physical location – The state abbreviation is compared to the state FIPS code (e.g. if
the state FIPS code is 17 (Illinois), then the state abbreviation is expected to be IL).
However, this is not a critical edit in SLED and does not need to be corrected to pass detail
edits. This is because the EDIC is unable to collect a physical location address on some
occasions (for example, when a group of employees are not assigned to any specific, fixed
location) and accepts a headquarters address instead.
2. Monthly Employment


A record is flagged if employment for all three months is zero when wages are greater
than the Quarterly Wages Parm (parm default = 10,000).

3. Quarterly Wages


A record is flagged when wages are zero when average monthly employment is greater
than the average monthly employment (AME) Parm (parm default =10).



A record is flagged when wages minus the sum of month 1 employment + month 2
employment + month 3 employment are less than the AME Tolerance Parm (parm
default = 5). SLED will only perform the edit if average monthly employment is greater
than the AME Tolerance Parm.

In addition, SLED performs two edits that are not mechanically performed in the states or BLSWashington:
1. Monthly employment flags if month 1 employment, month 2 employment, month 3
employment, and quarterly wages are all = 0.
2. Total wages flag if the average weekly wage is very low (less than $8.00). The system
calculates average weekly wages for a 13 week quarter – quarterly wages are divided by the
average monthly employment and then divided by 13.
(Wages/Quarter)  (Average Number of Workers)  (13 Weeks/ Quarter) = Wages per
Employee per Week. The system does not perform this edit when wages equal zero or when
employment equals zero.
Records flagged by the consistency edits can be processed to completion if given a proper
comment code.
State Parameters
The SLED system uses a table of parameters during editing called the State Abbreviation Table.
Each state's parameters may be adjusted separately. Table 1 below lists parameters/tolerances
that are used during the consistency edits phase. In addition, eight parameters and tolerances on
the State Parameters Table are used specifically during the interquarter edits for employment and
wages. These parameters and tolerances are listed in Table 2.

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

May 2019

Page 7

Table 1. Detail Edit Parameters/Tolerances
SLED
Parm
No Total
Wages with
AME Cutoff
(default = 10)

State
System
Parm
NO-WAGEMAX-EMPL
(default = 10)

SLED Edit

Flags zero wages when
average monthly
employment (AME) is
greater than this parm.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edit 130.
Flags zero employment
Quarterly
NO-EMPLMAX-WAGE
for all three months
Wages
(default =
when wages are greater
Parm
25,000)
than this parm.
(default =
Corresponds to
10,000)
State/BLS edit 131.
Employment EMPL-EQThe monthly wage
Equals Total WAGE-TOL
check flags records with
Wages
(default = 5) absolute difference
Tolerance
between wages and the
(default = 5)
sum of month1, month2,
and month3
employment less than
this parm.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edit 132.
Employment EMPL-EQThe monthly wage
Equals Total WAGE-AME
check is performed only
Wages AME (default = 50) when the record’s
Cutoff
average monthly
(default = 25)
employment is above
this parm.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edit 132.

EXPO
PK #
008

WIN
PK
#
011

007

015

041

017

042

018

Interquarter Edits
Interquarter edits for employment and wages are performed on the reporter file after the initial
detail edit process is completed. The edits used by SLED during this phase of processing closely
resemble the following edits performed in the state and BLS systems:

May 2019

Edit Code
091
092
126
127
128

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

Page 8

State/BLS System Edit Message
Employment Change Greatly Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change is Significantly > Parm and Exceeds Twice the Quartile
AQW Range
Employment Change Exceeds Test Parameters
AQW Change > Parm and Exceeds Twice the Quartile AQW Range
Identical Monthly Employment > Parm

SLED uses data reported to the EDIC in prior quarters as the historical data for performing
interquarter edits. If the reporter file has less than four consecutive quarters of historical data,
the record automatically passes the interquarter edits. Birth records (i.e., those with no historical
data) also pass these edits automatically. After non-wage/non-employment interquarter editing,
SLED cycles the reporter file back through detail editing a final time, checking for any
remaining detail edit errors and permitting correction of errors as necessary.
Records flagged by these interquarter edits can be processed to completion if given a proper
comment code. In addition, comment code 98 (data verified by EDIC) can also be assigned by
the EDIC to records flagged during these interquarter edits. They can only use it during this
stage of SLED processing. It cannot be used to pass reporter records with other types of errors.
Table 2. Interquarter Edit Parameters and Tolerances
SLED
Parm
Split Level
for
Employme
nt
Difference
(Default = 20)

Low
Employment
Maximum
Employment
Difference
(Default = 10)

State
SLED Edit
System
Parm
EMPL-DIFF-SPL- Interquarter edit for
AME
employment
(Default = 20) fluctuations; used to
check seasonal
fluctuations and
seasonality.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edits 091
and 126.
LOW-EMPLInterquarter edit for
MAX-DIFF
employment
(Default = 10) fluctuations; used to
check differences on
an absolute basis and
seasonal fluctuations
on an absolute basis.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edits 091
and 126.

EXPO
PK #

WIN
PK #

010

005

011

006

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

May 2019

SLED
Parm
High
Employment
Maximum
Employment
Difference
(Default = 30)

State
System
Parm
HIGH-EMPLMAX-DIFF
(Default = 30)

High
Reporting
Percent
Change
(Default = 10)

HIGHREPORTINGPCT-CHG

Reporting
Percent
Change
(Default = 30)

REPORTINGPCT-CHG

Employment
Check
Multiplier
(Default = 10)

EMPL-CHECKMULTIPLIER

Wage Change
Cutoff
(Default =
10,000)

(Default = 10)

(Default = 30)

(Default = 10)

WAGE-CHGCUTOFF

(Default =
10,000)

SLED Edit
Interquarter edit for
employment
fluctuations; used to
check differences on
an absolute basis and
seasonal fluctuations
on an absolute basis.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edits 091
and 126.
Interquarter edit for
employment
fluctuations; used to
check differences on
a percent basis and
seasonal fluctuations
on a percent basis.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edits 091
and 126.
Interquarter edit for
employment
fluctuations; used to
check differences on
a percent basis and
seasonal fluctuations
on a percent basis.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edits 091
and 126.
This parm is used to
determine the
severity of the edit
flag.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edits 091
and 126.
Interquarter wage
edit.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edits 092
and 127.

Page 9

EXPO
PK #

WIN
PK #

012

007

013

008

014

009

053

010

019

012

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

May 2019

SLED
Parm
Wage Check
Multiplier
(Default = 3)

State
System
Parm
WAGE-CHECKMULTIPLIER

(Default = 3)

SLED Edit

Page 10

EXPO
PK #

WIN
PK #

059

013

This parm is used to
determine the
severity of the edit
flag.
Corresponds to
State/BLS edits 092
and 127.

Birth Record Edits
Three files are used during birth record processing.
1. Reporter file – This file contains the current reporter data to be processed.
2. Historical Employment file – Records on the Reporter Work File are compared to the records
on this file. No matches indicate a birth record.
3. Birth file – Contains a list of all birth records processed by SLED.
After SLED completes the interquarter employment and wage edits, it identifies births submitted
on the reporter file. SLED does this by comparing the state FIPS Code, UI Account Number,
and Reporting Unit Number (state FIPS-UI-RUN combination) of each record on the reporter
file to the same fields of records located on the Historical Employment file. (The Historical
Employment file contains up to five quarters of data.) Each record on the reporter file that does
not have a corresponding record on the Historical Employment file with an identical state FIPSUI-RUN combination is considered a birth record by SLED. EDIC staff assign classification
codes to birth records, and these codes are screened by the birth record edits. The SLED birth
record edits flag the same conditions as these state/BLS edits:
Edit Code
010
012
013
016
065

State/BLS System Edit Message
Invalid NAICS Code
Invalid Ownership Code
Invalid County Code
NAICS & Ownership Inconsistent
Inconsistent County/Township Combination

Birth records flagged for any of these errors cannot complete processing until they are corrected.
In addition, the EDIC assigns a comment code of 85 (new establishment or worksite) or 90
(reporter changes basis of reporting – greater detail) to birth records to identify them as new
worksites to the State.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Central Collection Data Editing

Page 11

Non-Wage, Non-Employment Interquarter Checks
After birth edits are completed, SLED then proceeds to the interquarter check for non-wage and
non-employment fields. The non-wage, non-employment check applies to private companies
only. There are no comparable edits in the state or BLS systems. This stage checks for changes
in information on nine fields that do not include economic data:
EIN
Street Address
Zip Code

Trade Name
City
Zip Code Extension

Legal Name
State Abbreviation
Reporting Unit Description

For each of these fields, SLED compares the current information (located on the reporter file)
with the previous quarter's information (located on SLED's Historical Address Table). SLED
allows the data processing staff to view and/or resolve any discrepancies discovered during the
comparison. For each of the nine data fields compared, SLED gives the data processing staff
three options:
1. Accepting the data values from the current quarter's data.
2. Accepting the data values from the previous quarter's data.
3. Updating the current quarter data field, if flagged for being different than the previous
quarter, with updated information.
The current reporter file must contain records of companies located on the Historical Address
Table for these edits to take place. Reporters submitting data for the first time to the EDIC do
not meet this requirement and the edits are not performed on their record.

QCEW Operating Manual
NAICS Aggregation Tree

May 2019

Page P-1

Appendix P – NAICS Aggregation Tree
The North American Industry Classifications and their descriptions are available in the QCEW
BLS NAICS search application located on the BLS website.
The NAICS aggregation tree below, displays the connection between the most common data
aggregations by industry. States may find it helpful to use these aggregations in their own
publications.
Domain Supersector Sector
Total, All Industries

Code
10

Goods-Producing Industries
Natural Resources and Mining
Agriculture, forestry, fishing and hunting
Mining
Construction
Construction
Manufacturing

101
1011
11
21
1012
23
1013
3133

Manufacturing
Service-Providing Industries
Trade, Transportation, and Utilities
Wholesale trade
Retail trade
Transportation and warehousing
Utilities
Information
Information
Financial Activities
Finance and insurance
Real estate and rental and leasing
Professional and Business Services
Professional and technical services
Management of companies and enterprises
Administrative and waste services
Education and Health Services
Educational services
Health care and social assistance
Leisure and Hospitality
Arts, entertainment, and recreation
Accommodation and food services
Other Services
Other services, except public administration

102
1021
42
4445
4849
22
1022
51
1023
52
53
1024
54
55
56
1025
61
62
1026
71
72
1027
81

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
NAICS Aggregation Tree

Public Administration
Public administration
Unclassified
Unclassified

Page P-2

1028
92
1029
99

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Refiling Codes

Page Q-1

Appendix Q – ARS Refiling Codes
The Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) Response Code field on the Control File shows the status of
the record as it progresses through the refiling cycle. Each record included in the ARS always
has an ARS Response Code. Two ARS Response Codes are included in the systems: the
response code assigned to the record from the most recently completed refiling for that account
and the “future’ response code of the refiling cycle in progress. The refile year and “future”
refile year are included for each response code. A Collection Mode Indicator (CMI) is also
assigned to records for the current refilling cycle to indicate that a record was collected through
the ARS Web system. As of the 2018 refiling cycle, CMI codes are updated when states load the
CARS Response Code Files.
At the conclusion of the ARS, the state system copies each record's Collection Mode Indicator,
ARS Response Code, and ARS Refile Year to subsequent EQUI files. Future response codes
and refile year equal the information from the refiling cycle in progress or just completed prior to
building the next control file.
The valid values for the ARS Response Codes are listed below.
Code

blank
00
01-04
11
12
86
98
99
30
31
32
33
34
35
63
64
65

Definition

Non-respondents
State default value, for records not included in the survey
Account included in normal annual ARS email and mailings
Accounts selected for QCEW Research Projects/Panels
Clean subunit record in a mailable multi
Clean record in a multi, but unmailable due to errors on another record
Record on the control file but either not mailed or not re-mailed; non-respondents excluded
from response rates
Carryover non-respondent from prior refiling; no longer used
Unmailable due to errors (single, master, or subunit)
Responses – Unusable Response
CCS I-error on both the state and BLS Micro file
Record not reviewed, pending
Industry information centrally collected by BLS
BLS-assigned, submitted as 46 or 50, but has a CCS I-error on BLS Micro file
BLS-assigned, submitted as 46 or 50, but doesn’t have a true code change on BLS Micro
File
BLS-assigned, submitted with Comment Code 81 and a true code change but not with a
Response Code of 30, 46 or 50
Post Office return
Out of Business
Refusal

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Refiling Codes

September 2019

41

42
43
46
50
57
76
77
78
79

Page Q-2

Responses – Usable Response or System-assigned Codes
Reviewed, no refiling changes (no NAICS, county, township (New England or New Jersey
only) or ownership change) on a single or subunit record. Response Code 41 is also
assigned to a reviewed master record (MEEI =2) with or without any code changes. This
code is also used for refiling records that changed from unclassified to classified area where
the NAICS is unchanged.
Employer misunderstood industry description but codes are correct.
TRS respondent to ARS refiling. (no longer assigned after 2003).
Clean record with CCS updates from the ARS refilling. Noneconomic code change made
to NAICS, county, township (New England and New Jersey only) or ownership.
Code changes from non-refiling sources. Noneconomic code change made to NAICS,
county, township (New England and New Jersey only) or ownership but not from the ARS
refilling.
Code changes from non-refiling sources. (no longer assigned after 2007)
Code change to industry code, county, township (New England and New Jersey only) or
ownership also results in a NAICS 2007 code assignment. (no longer assigned after 2007)
2007 NAICS code assigned during refiling but with no correction to the 2002-based
NAICS code. (no longer assigned after 2007)
NAICS code system-assigned (no longer assigned after 2001)
NAICS code system-assigned based on known business activities (no longer assigned after
2001)

The valid values for the Collection Mode Indicator (CMI) are listed below.

Code
00
01-04
10
11-14

Collection Mode Indicator (CMI) Codes
Brief Definition

Refiling CMI’s
Record in current refiling
Special research panels
ARS responses
Special research panel responses

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

Page R-1

Appendix R – ARS Management Report and File
Layout
States and regional offices use the Summary Management Report (SMR) to monitor the status of
the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS). Refer to Chapter 6 for more details.
The SMR provides the following information:
• Counts and percentages by response code by single/subunits
• Total and usable response rates
• Information on code changes
o Response rates by size class
o Response rates by NAICS Sector
o Number and percentage of NAICS changes only
o Number and percentage of location changes only
o Number and percentage of NAICS and location changes
o Total number and percentage of code changes
The standard state processing systems (EXPO and WIN-202) generate the file format and the
report format. EXPO states run job EARJ106M. WIN-202 states run the ARCS Management
Report (under Listings) in the Reports screen/Reports tab.
States submit the SMR to their regional offices by the 25th of each month or earlier if the 25th
falls on a weekend or a holiday. Regional office emails both the file format and the report
format to the Office of Field Operations (OFON) by the 25th of each month. States should
contact their regional offices to determine the method in sending these files and the frequency
(i.e., every month or only during the annual refilling cycle).
For DMA EXPO States, regional offices can obtain these outputs by:
• Email from states
• Attachmate Reflection FTP software
• DBES routes the report format outputs to a local server (but not the file format)
• A combination of the above
For non-DMA EXPO and WIN-202 states, the only method is sending an email to the regional
office.
The file format is listed below. All fields are numeric. Fields that give percentages or rates are
five positions long, with two of the five positions implied to the right of the decimal place. For
example, a value of 08934 in a percent field represents 89.34%. Date fields are eight positions
long, including a four-digit year. For EXPO states only, the total figures (positions 441-466) on
the file format have higher numbers than what is shown on the report format due to including
Response Code (RC) 32, while the report format excludes the counts for RC 32. OFON uses the
file format to generate their numbers and percentages.

September 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

See the report format (EXPO and WIN-202) in EXHIBIT R at the end of this section.

Page R-2

September 2019

Positions
1-8
9 - 16
17 - 18

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Date of report (YYYY/MM/DD)
Date of previous report (YYYY/MM/DD)
State FIPS Code

Page R-3

Length
8
8
2

UI Accounts (19-39)
19 - 25
26 - 32
33 - 39

Number of UI accounts for the first email blasts or mailings
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)

7
7
7

Printing Dates (40-110)
40 - 46
47 - 54
55 - 62
63 - 70
71 - 78
79 - 86
87 - 94
95 - 102
103 - 110

Number of NVM Forms in First Printing
Date of 1st printing, NVS (YYYY/MM/DD)
Date of 1st printing, NVM (YYYY/MM/DD)
Date of 2nd printing, NVS (YYYY/MM/DD)
Date of 2nd printing, NVM (YYYY/MM/DD)
Date of 3rd mailing, NVS (YYYY/MM/DD)
Date of 3rd printing, NVM (YYYY/MM/DD)
Date of 4th printing, NVS (YYYY/MM/DD)
Date of 4th printing, NVM (YYYY/MM/DD)

7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

Response Codes (111-414)
Code 41 (111-129)
111 - 115
116 - 122
123 - 129

Percent of total, response code 41
Number of singles, response code 41
Number of subunits, response code 41

5
7
7

Code 42 (130-148)
130 - 134
135 - 141
142 - 148

Percent of total, response code 42
Number of singles, response code 42
Number of subunits, response code 42

5
7
7

Code 46 (149-167)
149 - 153
154 - 160
161 - 167

Percent of total, response code 46
Number of singles, response code 46
Number of subunits, response code 46

5
7
7

Code 50 (168-186)
168 - 172

Percent of total, response code 50

5

September 2019

Positions
173 - 179
180 - 186

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Number of singles, response code 50
Number of subunits, response code 50

Page R-4

Length
7
7

Code 30 (187-205)
187 - 191
192 - 198
199 - 205

Percent of total, response code 30
Number of singles, response code 30
Number of subunits, response code 30

5
7
7

Code 31 (206-224)
206 - 210
211 - 217
218 - 224

Percent of total, response code 31
Number of singles, response code 31
Number of subunits, response code 31

5
7
7

Code 63 (225-243)
225 - 229
230 - 236
237 - 243

Percent of total, response code 63
Number of singles, response code 63
Number of subunits, response code 63

5
7
7

Code 64 (244-262)
244 - 248
249 - 255
256 - 262

Percent of total, response code 64
Number of singles, response code 64
Number of subunits, response code 64

5
7
7

Code 65 (263-281)
263 - 267
268 - 274
275 - 281

Percent of total, response code 65
Number of singles, response code 65
Number of subunits, response code 65

5
7
7

Codes 00-11 (282-300)
282 - 286
287 - 293
294 - 300

Percent of total, response codes 00-11
Number of singles, response codes 00-11
Number of subunits, response codes 00-11

5
7
7

Code 01 (301-319)
301 - 305
306 - 312
313 - 319

Percent of total, response code 01
Number of singles, response code 01
Number of subunits, response code 01

5
7
7

September 2019

Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Page R-5

Length

Code 02 (320-338)
320 - 324
325 - 331
332 - 338

Percent of total, response code 02
Number of singles, response code 02
Number of subunits, response code 02

5
7
7

Code 03 (339-357)
339 - 343
344 - 350
351 - 357

Percent of total, response code 03
Number of singles, response code 03
Number of subunits, response code 03

5
7
7

Code 04 (358-376)
358 - 362
363 - 369
370 - 376

Percent of total, response code 04
Number of singles, response code 04
Number of subunits, response code 04

5
7
7

Codes 12-99 (377-395)
377 - 381
382 - 388
389 - 395

Percent of total, response codes 12-99
Number of singles, response codes 12-99
Number of subunits, response codes 12-99

5
7
7

Code 98 (396-414)
396 - 400
401 - 407
408 - 414

Percent of total, response code 98
Number of singles, response code 98
Number of subunits, response code 98

5
7
7

Nonrespondents (415-440)
415 - 419
420 - 426
427 - 433
434 - 440

Percent of total, nonrespondents, excluding master records
Number of singles, nonrespondents
Number of subunits, nonrespondents
Total number of nonrespondents

5
7
7
7

Total (441-466)
441 - 445
446 - 452
453 - 459
460 - 466

Percent of all refiled establishments
Total number of single establishments involved in the refiling

Total number of worksite sub-units involved in the
refiling
Total number of establishments (singles plus sub-units)
involved in the refiling

5
7
7
7

September 2019

Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Page R-6

Length

Response Rates (467 - 546)
Usable Response Rate (467-506)
467 - 471
472 - 476
477 - 481
482 - 486
487 - 491
492 - 496
497 - 501
502 - 506

Usable response rate all, units
Usable response rate all, employment
Usable response rate singles, units
Usable response rate singles, employment
Usable response rate subunits, units
Usable response rate subunits, employment
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Total Response Rate (507-546)
507 - 511
512 - 516
517 - 521
522 - 526
527 - 531
532 - 536
537 - 541
542 - 546

Total response rate all, units
Total response rate all, employment
Total response rate singles, units
Total response rate singles, employment
Total response rate subunits, units
Total response rate subunits, employment
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Filler (547 – 630)
(Previously Carryover Nonressponse Rates 547 – 567)
547 - 553
554 - 560
561 - 567

Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)

7
7
7

Filler (Previously Carryover Usabe Responses 568 574)
568 - 574
575 - 581
582 - 588

Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)

7
7
7

Filler (Prviously Carryover Unusable Responses 589 – 609)
589 - 595
596 - 602
603 - 609

Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)

7
7
7

September 2019

Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Page R-7

Length

Filler (Pending Carryover Pending 610 – 630)
610 - 616
617 - 623
624 - 630

Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)

7
7
7

Response Rate and Ranges (631 - 868)
Size Range 0 (631-664)
631 - 635
636 - 640
641 - 645
646 - 650
651 - 657
658 - 664

Total response rate, size range (0), units
Total response rate, size range (0), employment
Usable response rate, size range (0), units
Usable response rate, size range (0), employment
Total size range (0), units
Total size range (0), employment

5
5
5
5
7
7

Size Range 1-9 (665-698)
665 - 669
670 - 674
675 - 679
680 - 684
685 - 691
692 - 698

Total response rate, size range (1-9), units
Total response rate, size range (1-9), employment
Usable response rate, size range (1-9), units
Usable response rate, size range (1-9), employment
Total size range (1-9), units
Total size range (1-9), employment

5
5
5
5
7
7

Size Range 10-49 (699-732)
699 - 703
704 - 708
709 - 713
714 - 720
719 - 725
726 - 732

Total response rate, size range (10-49), units
Total response rate, size range (10-49), employment
Usable response rate, size range (10-49), units
Usable response rate, size range (10-49), employment
Total size range (10-49), units
Total size range (10-49), employment

5
5
5
5
7
7

Size Range 50-99 (733-766)
733 - 737
738 - 742
743 - 747
748 - 752
753 - 759
760 - 766

Total response rate, size range (50-99), units
Total response rate, size range (50-99), employment
Usable response rate, size range (50-99), units
Usable response rate, size range (50-99), employment
Total size range (50-99), units
Total size range (50-99), employment

5
5
5
5
7
7

September 2019

Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Page R-8

Length

Size Range 100-249 (767-800)
767 - 771
772 - 776
777 - 781
782 - 786
787 - 793
794 - 800

Total response rate, size range (100-249), units
Total response rate, size range (100-249), employment
Usable response rate, size range (100-249), units
Usable response rate, size range (100-249), employment
Total size range (100-249), units
Total size range (100-249), employment

5
5
5
5
7
7

Size Range 250-999 (801-834)
801 - 805
806 - 810
811 - 815
816- 820
821 - 827
828 - 834

Total response rate, size range (250-999), units
Total response rate, size range (250-999), employment
Usable response rate, size range (250-999), units
Usable response rate, range (250-999), employment
Total size range (250-999), units
Total size range (250-999), employment

5
5
5
5
7
7

Size Range 1000+ (835-868)
835 - 839
840 - 844
845 - 849
850 - 854
855 - 861
862 - 868

Total response rate, size range (1000+), units
Total response rate, size range (1000+), employment
Usable response rate, size range (1000+), units
Usable response rate, size range (1000+), employment
Total size range (1000+), units
Total size range (1000+), employment

5
5
5
5
7
7

NAICS Sectors (869 - 1288)
NAICS Sector 11 (869-888)
869 - 873
874 - 878
879 - 883
884 - 888

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 11, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 11, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 11, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 11, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 21 (889-908)
889 - 893
894 - 898
899 - 903
904 - 908

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 21, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 21, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 21, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 21, employment

5
5
5
5

September 2019

Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Page R-9

Length

NAICS Sector 22 (909-928)
909 - 913
914 - 918
919 - 923
924 - 928

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 22, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 22, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 22, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 22, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 23 (929-948)
929 - 933
934 - 938
939 - 943
944 - 948

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 23, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 23, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 23, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 23, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 31-32-33 (949-968)
949 - 953
954 - 958
959 - 963
964 - 968

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 31-32-33, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 31-32-33, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 31-32-33, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 31-32-33, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 42 (969-988)
969 - 973
974 - 978
979 - 983
984 - 988

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 42, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 42, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 42, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 42, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 44-45 (989-1,008)
989 - 993
994 - 998
999 - 1003
1004 - 1008

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 44-45, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 44-45, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 44-45, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 44-45, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 48-49 (1,009-1,028)
1009 - 1013
1014 - 1018
1019 - 1023
1024 - 1028

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 48-49, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 48-49, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 48-49, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 48-49, employment

5
5
5
5

September 2019

Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Page R-10

Length

NAICS Sector 51 (1,029-1,048)
1029 - 1033
1034 - 1038
1039 - 1043
1044 - 1048

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 51, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 51, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 51, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 51, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 52 (1,049-1,068)
1049 - 1053
1054 - 1058
1059 - 1063
1064 - 1068

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 52, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 52, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 52, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 52, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 53 (1,069-1,088)
1069 - 1073
1074 - 1078
1079 - 1083
1084 - 1088

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 53, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 53, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 53, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 53, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 54 (1,089-1,108)
1089 - 1093
1094 - 1098
1099 - 1103
1104 - 1108

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 54, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 54, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 54, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 54, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 55 (1,109-1,128)
1109 - 1113
1114 - 1118
1119 - 1123
1124 - 1128

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 55, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 55, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 55, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 55, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 56 (1,129-1,148)
1129 - 1133
1134 - 1138
1139 - 1143
1144 - 1148

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 56, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 56, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 56, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 56, employment

5
5
5
5

September 2019

Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Page R-11

Length

NAICS Sector 61 (1,149-1,168)
1149 - 1153
1154 - 1158
1159 - 1163
1164 - 1168

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 61, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 61, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 61, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 61, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 62 (1,169-1,188)
1169 - 1173
1174 - 1178
1179 - 1183
1184 - 1188

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 62, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 62, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 62, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 62, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 71 (1,189-1,208)
1189 - 1193
1194 - 1198
1199 - 1203
1204 - 1208

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 71, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 71, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 71, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 71, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 72 (1,209-1,228)
1209 - 1213
1214 - 1218
1219 - 1223
1224 - 1228

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 72, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 72, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 72, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 72, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 81 (1,229-1,248)
1229 - 1233
1234 - 1238
1239 - 1243
1344 - 1248

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 81, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 81, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 81, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 81, employment

5
5
5
5

NAICS Sector 92 (1,249-1,268)
1249 - 1253
1254 - 1258
1259 - 1263
1264 - 1268

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 92, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 92, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 92, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 92, employment

5
5
5
5

September 2019

Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

Page R-12

Length

NAICS Sector 99 (1,269-1,288)
1269 - 1273
1274 - 1278
1279 - 1283
1284 - 1288

Total response rate, NAICS Sector 99, units
Total response rate, NAICS Sector 99, employment
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 99, units
Usable response rate, NAICS Sector 99, employment

5
5
5
5

Changes (1,289 – 1,336)
1289 - 1295
1296 - 1300
1301 - 1307
1308 - 1312
1313 - 1319
1320 - 1324
1325 - 1331
1332 - 1336

Number of code changes, NAICS only
Percentage of total code changes that are NAICS only
Number of code changes, location only
Percentage of total code changes that are location only
Number of code changes, NAICS and location
Percentage of total code changes, NAICS and location
Total CCS code changes
Percentage of total CCS code changes

7
5
7
5
7
5
7
5

Filler (Previously TRS 1337 – 1390)
1337 - 1343
1344 - 1348
1349 - 1355
1356 - 1362
1363 - 1369
1370 - 1376
1377 - 1383
1384 - 1390

Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)

5
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

Date of Printing (1,391 – 1,570)
Date of FirstPrinting (1,391 - 1,435)
1391 - 1398
1399 - 1405
1406 - 1413
1414 - 1420
1421 - 1428
1429 - 1435

Date of first NVS printing
Number of NVS Printed
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Date of first NVM printing
Number of NVM printed

8
7
8
7
8
7

Date of Second Printing (1,436 - 1,480)
1436 - 1437
1444 - 1450
1451 - 1458
1459 - 1465

Date of second NVS printing
Number of NVS Printed
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)

8
7
8
7

September 2019

Positions

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

ARS Management Report

Data Element

1466 - 1473 Date of second NVM printing
1474 - 1480 Number of NVM printed

Page R-13

Length
8
7

Date of Third Printing (1,481 - 1,525)
1481 - 1488
1489 - 1495
1496 – 1503
1504 - 1510
1511 - 1518
1519 - 1525

Date of third NVS printing
Number of NVS Printed
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Date of third NVM printing
Number of NVM printed

8
7
8
7
8
7

Date of Fourth Printing (1,526 - 1,570)
1526 - 1533
1534 - 1540
1541 - 1548
1549 - 1555
1556 - 1563
1564 - 1570

Date of fourth NVS printing
Number of NVS Printed
Filler (blank spaces)
Filler (blank spaces)
Date of fourth NVM printing
Number of NVM printed

8
7
8
7
8
7

Filler (1,571 – 1,665)
1571 - 1665 Filler (blank spaces)

95

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

Page R-14

EXHIBIT R – EXPO ARS Management Report
PROGRAM: EARUT08 V9.05
EARS SYSTEM - REFILING PROCESSING
EARJ106M
RUN DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
ARS MANAGEMENT REPORT FOR XXSTATE
PAGE 1
RUN TIME: HH:MM:SS
DATE OF PREVIOUS SUMMARY: MM/DD/YYYY
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TOTAL NUMBER OF UI ACCOUNTS PRINTED IN THE FIRST MAILOUT:
0
DATE OF 1ST MAILING:
NVS
NVM
NUMBER OF UI ACCOUNTS PRINTED -:
0
DATE OF 2ND MAILING:
NVS
NVM
:
0
DATE OF 3RD MAILING:
NVS
NVM
NUMBER OF NVM IN FIRST PRINTING:
0
DATE OF 4TH MAILING:
NVS
NVM
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------RESPONSE STATUS
_______________
USABLE RESPONSES -REVIEWED, NO CCS CHANGE, CODES CORRECT
EMPLOYER MISUNDERSTOOD THE
INDUSTRY DESCRIPTION, CODES CORRECT
CLEAN RECORD WITH CCS UPDATES
CODE CHANGE FROM OTHER SOURCES
TOTAL USABLE RESPONSES
OTHER RESPONSES -UPDATES, BUT HAS CCS I-ERROR
NOT REVIEWED -- PENDING
POST OFFICE RETURN
OUT OF BUSINESS
REFUSAL

CODE
____

PERCENT
OF TOTAL
________

SINGLES
_______

SUBUNITS
________

(41)

XXX.XX%

X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX

(42)
(46)
(50)

XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
------XXX.XX%

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

(30)
(31)
(63)
(64)
(65)

XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
------XXX.XX%
------XXX.XX%

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX

XXX.XX%
-------

X,XXX,XXX
---------

X,XXX,XXX
---------

X,XXX,XXX
---------

TOTAL OTHER RESPONSES
TOTAL ALL RESPONSES
NONRESPONDENTS
MAILABLE, NOT YET MAILED
MAILED ONCE
MAILED TWICE
MAILED THREE TIMES
MAILED FOUR TIMES
UNMAILABLE RECORDS
TOTAL NONRESPONDENTS - NOT YET MAILED,
MAILED, UNMAILABLE, ETC.

(00, 11)
(01)
(02)
(03)
(04)
(12, 99)

TOTAL
_____

TOTAL NUMBER OF CONTROL FILE RECORDS
(EXCLUDING MASTER RECORDS)
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

October 2018

Page R-15

EXHIBIT R – EXPO ARS Management Report (continued)
USABLE RESPONSE RATE:
ALL
SINGLES
SUBUNITS
PROGRAM: EARUT08 V9.05
RUN DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
RUN TIME: HH:MM:SS

UNITS
_____
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

EMPLOYMENT
__________
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

TOTAL RESPONSE RATE:
ALL
SINGLES
SUBUNITS

UNITS
_____
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

EARS SYSTEM - REFILING PROCESSING
ARS MANAGEMENT REPORT FOR XXSTATE

EMPLOYMENT
__________
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
EARJ106M
PAGE 2

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------USABLE
TOTAL
TOTAL RECORDS
RESPONSE RATES BY SIZE CLASS:
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
____________________________
_____________________
______________________
______________________
SIZE RANGE (0)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE (1-9)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE (10-49)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE (50-99)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE (100-249)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE (250-999)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE (1000+)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0RESPONSE RATES
USABLE
TOTAL
BY NAICS SECTOR
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
CODE CHANGES:
NUMBER PERCENTAGE
_______________
____________________
____________________
SECTOR 11
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
------------------ ---------SECTOR 21
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
NAICS CHANGE ONLY:
X,XXX,XXX
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 22
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
LOCATION CHANGE ONLY:
X,XXX,XXX
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 23
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
NAICS AND LOCATION:
X,XXX,XXX
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 31-33
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 42
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
TOTAL CCS CODE CHANGES:
X,XXX,XXX
100.00%
SECTOR 44-45
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 48-49
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 51
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 52
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 53
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 54
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

Page R-16

EXHIBIT R – EXPO ARS Management Report (continued)
SECTOR 55
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 56
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 61
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 62
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 71
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 72
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 81
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 92
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 99
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
USABLE RESPONSE RATE:
NUMERATOR - RESPONSE CODES
DENOMINATOR - RESPONSE CODES
TOTAL RESPONSE RATE:
NUMERATOR -- RESPONSE CODES
DENOMINATOR -- RESPONSE CODES
PROGRAM: EARUT08 V9.05
RUN DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
RUN TIME: HH:MM:SS

32 + 41 + 42 + 46 + 50
------------------------------------------------------------------00 + 01 + 02 + 03 + 04 + 11 + 30 + 31 + 32 + 41 + 42 + 46 + 50 + 65
30 + 31 + 32 + 41 + 42 + 46 + 50 + 63 + 64 + 65
----------------------------------------------------------------------------00 + 01 + 02 + 03 + 04 + 11 + 30 + 31 + 32 + 41 + 42 + 46 + 50 + 63 + 64 + 65
EARS SYSTEM - REFILING PROCESSING
ARS MANAGEMENT REPORT FOR XXSTATE

EARJ106M
PAGE 3

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TRS STATUS
__________

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

EXHIBIT R – EXPO ARS Management Report (continued)
ARS PRINTED - NVS and NVM
______________________________________________
NUMBER OF NVS
)
NUMBER OF NVM
DATE
PRINTED
DATE
DATE
PRINTED
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
===========================================================================================================
TOTALS
0
0
0
A mailing now would generate:
X,XXX,XXX NVS
X,XXX,XXX NVM

Page R-17

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

October 2018

Page R-18

EXHIBIT R – WIN ARS Management Report
DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS
PAGE: 1
TIME: 10:55:41
ANNUAL REFILING CONTROL SYSTEM
PRINTED FOR YR/QTR: YYYY/Q
DATE OF PREVIOUS SUMMARY: MM/DD/YYYY
ARS MANAGEMENT REPORT FOR XXSTATE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MAILING COUNTS ARE NOT AVAILABLE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CODE
----

PERCENT
OF TOTAL
--------

SINGLES
-------

SUBUNITS
--------

TOTAL
-----

(41)

XXX.XX%

X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX

(42)
(46)
(50)

XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
------XXX.XX%

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

(30)
(31)
(63)
(64)
(65)

XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
------XXX.XX%
------XXX.XX%

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX
--------X,XXX,XXX

(00, 11)
(01)
(02)
(03)
(04)
(12, 99)

XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
-------

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
---------

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
---------

X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
---------

XXX.XX%

X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX

-------

---------

---------

---------

100.00%

X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX

X,XXX,XXX

RESPONSE STATUS
--------------USEABLE RESPONSES -REVIEWED, NO CCS CHANGES
CODES CORRECT, EMPLOYER MISUNDERSTOOD
THE INDUSTRY DESCRIPTION
CLEAN RECORD WITH CCS UPDATES
CODE CHANGE FROM OTHER SOURCES
TOTAL USEABLE RESPONSES
OTHER RESPONSES -UPDATES, BUT HAS CCS I-ERROR
NOT REVIEWED - PENDING
POST OFFICE RETURN
OUT OF BUSINESS
REFUSAL
TOTAL OTHER RESPONSES
TOTAL ALL RESPONSES
NONRESPONDENTS
MAILABLE, NOT YET MAILED,
MAILED ONCE
MAILED TWICE
MAILED THREE TIMES
MAILED FOUR TIMES
UNMAILABLE RECORDS
TOTAL NONRESPONDENTS - NOT YET MAILED,
MAILED, UNMAILABLE, ETC.
(EXCLUDING MASTER RECORDS)
TOTAL NUMBER OF CONTROL FILE RECORDS
(EXCLUDING MASTER RECORDS)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

October 2018

Page R-19

EXHIBIT R – WIN ARS Management Report (continued)
USEABLE RESPONSE RATE:
ALL
SINGLES
SUBUNITS

UNITS
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

EMPLOYMENT
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

TOTAL RESPONSE RATE:
ALL
SINGLES
SUBUNITS

UNITS
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

EMPLOYMENT
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME: HH:MM:SS

BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS
PAGE: 2
ANNUAL REFILING CONTROL SYSTEM
PRINTED FOR YR/QTR: YYYY/Q
ARS MANAGEMENT REPORT FOR XXSTATE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TOTAL
USEABLE
TOTAL RECORDS
RESPONSE RATES BY SIZE RANGE:
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SIZE RANGE 0 (0)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE 1 (1-9)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE 2 (10-49)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE 3 (50-99)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE 4 (100-249)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE 5 (250-999)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
SIZE RANGE 6 (1000+)
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
X,XXX,XXX
X,XXX,XXX
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TOTAL
USABLE
RESPONSE RATES BY NAICS SECTOR
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
UNITS
EMPLOYMENT
CODE CHANGES:
NUMBER
PERCENTAGE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTOR 11
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
NAICS CHANGE ONLY:
X,XXX,XXX
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 21
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
LOCATION CHANGE ONLY:
X,XXX,XXX
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 22
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
NAICS AND LOCATION:
X,XXX,XXX
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 23
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 31-33
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 42
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
TOTAL CCS CODE CHANGES: X,XXX,XXX
100.00%
SECTOR 44-45
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 48-49
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 51
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 52
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 53
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 54
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 55
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 56
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%

October 2018

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

Page R-20

EXHIBIT R – WIN ARS Management Report (continued)
SECTOR 61
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 62
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 71
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 72
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 81
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 92
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
SECTOR 99
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
XXX.XX%
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------USEABLE RESPONSE RATE:
NUMERATOR -- RESPONSE CODES
32 + 41 + 42 + 46 + 50
-------------------------------------------------------------DENOMINATOR -- RESPONSE CODES
00 + 03 + 04 + 11 + 30 + 31 + 32 + 41 + 42 + 46 + 50 + 65
TOTAL RESPONSE RATE:
NUMERATOR - RESPONSE CODES
30 + 31 + 32 + 41 + 42 + 46 + 50 + 63 + 64 + 65
-----------------------------------------------------------------------DENOMINATOR - RESPONSE CODES
00 + 03 + 04 + 11 + 30 + 31 + 32 + 41 + 42 + 46 + 50 + 63 + 64 + 65
FOR THE USEABLE RESPONSE RATE, THE NUMERATOR EXCLUDES LATE RESPONSES TO THE CURRENT REFILING.
THE DENOMINATOR EXCLUDES NONRESPONDENTS CARRIED OVER FROM LAST YEAR, UNLESS THEY HAVE A USEABLE RESPONSE.

DATE: MM/DD/YYYY
TIME: HH:MM:SS

BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS
PAGE: 3
ANNUAL REFILING CONTROL SYSTEM
PRINTED FOR YR/QTR: YYYY/Q
ARS MANAGEMENT REPORT FOR XXSTATE
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ARS PRINTED
----------------DATE

NUMBER OF NVS
DATE
DATE
NUMBER OF NVM
PRINTED
PRINTED
==============================================================================================================================================
Totals:
0
0
0
Total Responses: XXX,XXX

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

October 2018

Page R-21

EXHIBIT R – WIN ARS Management Report (continued)
/*********************************************************************/
/* Response Codes ***************************************************/
/*********************************************************************/
/* 1= singles;
2= subunits; 3= (singles + subs ); 4= masters;
*/
/* 5= single emp3; 6= sub emp3; 7= master emp3
*/
/*********************************************************************/
Array Name
1
-------------------rcd00
XXXXXXX
rcd01
XXXXXXX
rcd02
XXXXXXX
rcd03
XXXXXXX
rcd04
XXXXXXX
rcd11
XXXXXXX
rcd12
XXXXXXX
rcd30
XXXXXXX
rcd31
XXXXXXX
rcd32
XXXXXXX
rcd41
XXXXXXX
rcd42
XXXXXXX
rcd43
XXXXXXX
rcd46
XXXXXXX
rcd50
XXXXXXX
rcd57
XXXXXXX
rcd63
XXXXXXX
rcd64
XXXXXXX
rcd65
XXXXXXX
rcd76
XXXXXXX
rcd77
XXXXXXX
rcd98
XXXXXXX
rcd99
XXXXXXX

2
----XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX

3
----XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX

4
5
6
7
----- -------- -------- -------XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX

Array Name
1
--------------------

2
-----

3
-----

4
5
6
7
----- -------- -------- --------

/******************************************************************/
/* # of units by size category, and response code
*/
/******************************************************************/
/* 1 = 0 emp;
2 = 1-9 emp;
3 = 10-49 emp; 4 = 50-99 emp */
/* 5 = 100-249 emp; 6 = 250-999 emp; 7 = 1000+ emp
*/
/******************************************************************/
Array Name
1
-------------------size00
XXXXXX
size01
XXXXXX
size02
XXXXXX
size03
XXXXXX
size04
XXXXXX
size11
XXXXXX
size12
XXXXXX
size30
XXXXXX
size31
XXXXXX
size32
XXXXXX
size41
XXXXXX
size42
XXXXXX
size43
XXXXXX
size46
XXXXXX

2
----XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

3
----XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

4
----XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

5
----XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

6
----XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

7
----XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

QCEW Operating Manual
ARS Management Report and File Layout

October 2018

Page R-22

EXHIBIT R – WIN ARS Management Report (continued)
size50
size57
size63
size64
size65
size76
size77
size98
size99

XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

/******************************************************************/
/* month 3 employment totals by size category, and response code */
/******************************************************************/
/* 1 = 0 emp;
2 = 1-9 emp;
3 = 10-49 emp; 4 = 50-99 emp */
/* 5 = 100-249 emp; 6 = 250-999 emp; 7 = 1000+ emp
*/
/******************************************************************/
Array Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-------------------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------emp-00
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-01
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-02
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-03
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-04
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-11
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-12
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-30
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-31
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-32
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-41
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-42
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-43
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-46
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-50
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-57
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-63
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-64
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-65
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-76
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-77
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-98
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
emp-99
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
Response Code 20 (Wave 2 records):

0

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
BLS Naming Convention

Page S-1

Appendix S – BLS Naming Convention
This appendix details the recommended standard naming convention for production email shared
between national office, BLS regional offices, and states. This serves to expedite operations by
helping to clarify details in the subject line related to the production email. These standards
should be followed by state and BLS production staff when composing email subject lines. This
does not affect the naming of files.

STATE SUBMITTALS:
YYQ.ST_Submittal
YYQ: two-digit year followed by one-digit quarter.
Example: 2019 quarter 1 is 191.
ST: two-digit state abbreviation
Submittal: identifies what is currently being delivered or discussed.
Some example values include: Macro, Primary, Secondary, Subset, Subset2.
Examples:
2019 third quarter first macro file from TX:
2019 third quarter primary file from TX:
2019 third quarter primary file from TX:
2019 third quarter subset file from TX:
2019 third quarter second subset file from TX:

193.TX_Macro
193.TX_Primary
193.TX_Secondary
193.TX_Subset
193.TX_Subset2

STATE RESPONSE TO BLS REVIEW QUESTIONS (NOQs/ROQs):
Append _RESP_S to the end of NOQ/ROQ subject lines when responding back to BLS.
Example:
CDA Branch sends INOQ set #2 to California during 2025 third quarter review.
CDA question subject line is: 253_CA_INOQ_2_CDA
CA response subject line is: 253_CA_INOQ_2_CDA_RESP_S

OTHER MESSAGES RELATING TO PRODUCTION
Begin messages with YYQ.ST_ followed by subject line text chosen by the author.
Example: New York concern re a PEO during 2018 fourth quarter production.
184.NY_A Big PEO stopped reporting by client
Issues that affect more than one state should use US instead of a state abbreviation.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Useful Links and References

Page T-1

Appendix T – Useful Links and References
This appendix contains links to Internet websites, Intranet sites and documents that state and
BLS staff may find useful. The title of each is followed by the URL (or the path) and a brief
explanation of what that site or document contains. Clicking on the URL or path will take you
directly to the site. Many of these sites contain sub menus or links that might also prove helpful.
American Statistical Association (ASA)
http://www.amstat.org/
This is the official website of the American Statistical Association, which works to promote
statistical practice, applications, and research; publish statistical journals; improve statistical
education; and advance the statistics profession. The ASA serves its members as well as the
broader scientific community and the public at large. Several links and responses to FAQs are
provided.
Association for University Business and Economic Research (AUBER)
http://www.auber.org/
AUBER is a professional organization dedicated to continually improving the quality,
effectiveness, and application of research in business, economics, and public policy. Every state
has its own experts and specialized data collections; one fast way to find them is through
AUBER’s state-by-state directory of resources.
Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA)
http://www.bea.gov/
This site is the home page of the Bureau of Economic Analysis, an agency of the U.S.
Department of Commerce that prepares measurements and estimates of key aspects of the U.S.
economy including the gross domestic product (GDP.) BEA is an important customer of QCEW.
Business Employment Dynamics (BED)
http://www.bls.gov/bdm.
This web page is dedicated to providing information about Business Employment Dynamics
data. BED data are a quarterly series of gross job gains and gross job losses statistics for the
entire economy. These data track changes in employment at the establishment level, and thus
provide a picture of the dynamics underlying aggregate net employment growth statistics. The
microdata used to construct the gross job gains and gross job losses statistics are from the QCEW
program.
Bureau of the Census
http://www.census.gov
This site is the home page of the Census Bureau, an agency of the U.S. Department of
Commerce that conducts the decennial census of the United States and gathers data on various
aspects of the population. It is a source of quality data about the nation’s people and economy.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Useful Links and References

Page T-2

Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS)
http://www.bls.gov
This site is the home page of the Bureau of Labor Statistics. It contains a wealth of BLS
statistics, reports, publications, and links to other useful sites. The Bureau of Labor Statistics of
the U.S. Department of Labor is the principal Federal agency responsible for measuring labor
market activity, working conditions, and price changes in the economy. Its mission is to collect,
analyze, and disseminate essential economic information to support public and private decisionmaking. As an independent statistical agency, BLS serves its diverse user communities by
providing products and services that are objective, timely, accurate, and relevant.
BLS Handbook of Methods
https://www.bls.gov/opub/hom/home.htmThis site presents detailed explanations on how BLS
obtains and prepares the economic data it publishes. BLS statistics are used for many purposes,
and sometimes data well suited to one purpose may have limitations for another. This
publication aims to provide users of BLS data with the most current information necessary to
evaluate the suitability of the statistics for their needs.
Cheat Sheet (please see Valid Values)
City/County Cross Reference
http://www.citycountyxref.info/#
This site provides city and county cross references by state. Select a state to enter a city and
view the county the city is located in. Another site states have reported is helpful for verifying
county assignments is http://www.mob-rule.com Enter (or copy and paste) an address to identify
in what county the address is located. Please see Zip Code related entries at the end of this
appendix for more useful links.
Comparison of State Unemployment Insurance Laws
https://workforcesecurity.doleta.gov/unemploy/Statelaws.asp
The Comparison of State Unemployment Insurance Laws provides state-by-state information on
workers covered, benefit eligibility, methods of financing and other areas of interest in the UI
program. It also includes information on the temporary disability programs operated in six
states. The Comparison is published annually.
Corporate Information
http://www.corporateinformation.com
This site provides links to global company information, such as company profiles, research
reports, and industry analyses. It also includes links by state to many providers of Web-based
company information (for example, business directories) often including addresses, phone
numbers, and website addresses. It focuses on publically traded companies.
Department of Labor (DOL)
http://www.dol.gov/
This is the home page of the U.S. Department of Labor, an agency whose mission is “To foster,
promote, and develop the welfare of the wage earners, job seekers, and retirees of the United
States; improve working conditions; advance opportunities for profitable employment; and

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Useful Links and References

Page T-3

assure work-related benefits and rights.” It includes, among numerous other topics, statistics and
data published by several DOL agencies. The publication schedule is available here
https://www.dol.gov/general/aboutdol/content.
Econ Data.Net
http://www.econdata.net
This site is a guide to regional economic data on the web. It is designed to help data users
quickly gain access to relevant state and sub-state socioeconomic data. It includes various links
for employment data, industry sectors, and firm listings, and provides access to a user's guide for
understanding regional socioeconomic data.
Economagic
http://www.economagic.com/
This site gives you easy access to more than 100,000 data series including state, metro and
county employment data compiled by federal statistical agencies. It has some international data,
as well. The site will create spreadsheet files of data on-line as well as graphing data in your
internet browser. Registered users can generate forecasts from historical data.
EXPO
http://199.221.111.170/program/ES202/EXPOWIN.htm
This is the home page for the Exportable QCEW System (EXPO), the standard QCEW state
processing system developed by the state of Utah and used by the majority of states. This site
provides program updates, access to user and system documentation, and details about DMA.
Contact details: The EXPO hotline is 877-614-3387 or you can email [email protected]
This email group contains members BLS national office staff, as well as Utah state staff who
work on the EXPO system. *Please be sure to –cc your regional office if you are a state staff
member emailing EXPOHELP.
Electronic Data Interchange Center (EDIC)
https://199.221.111.47/
This is the homepage for the EDIC, a BLS Center located in Chicago that is responsible for
collecting, editing, and correcting Multiple Worksite Reports (MWR) and Current Employment
Statistics (CES) data for multi-state employers and providing this data to the states. Contact
details: [email protected] is the general email group for the EDIC.
Electronic Data Reporting
https://www.bls.gov/cew/cewmwr02.htm
Copies of the Electronic Data Reporting Booklet are provided to employers who are considering
the central reporting of their MWR data to the EDI Center in Chicago. It provides the standard
flat file formats for reporting the MWR data for the QCEW program as well as CES data. The
same information is also available on the Multiple Worksite Report website.
Federal Committee on Statistical Methodology (FCSM)
https://fcsm.sites.usa.gov/

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Useful Links and References

Page T-4

This is the website of FCSM, an interagency committee sponsored by the U.S. Office of
Management and Budget to improve the quality of federal statistics, as well as the efficiency and
effectiveness of statistical practice among Federal agencies.
Federal Statistics (FedStats)
https://fedstats.sites.usa.gov/
This site contains links to more than 100 federal government agencies producing and
disseminating federal statistics of interest to the public. It is maintained by the Federal
Interagency Council on Statistical Policy.
Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
https://www.census.gov/geo/reference/codes/cou.html
This site provides links to the complete and current FIPS county codes for all States and
territories. FIPS codes were developed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST) but later discontinued by NIST; the Census Bureau continues to maintain and issue codes
for geographic entities.
Information Technology Support Center (ITSC)
http://www.itsc.state.md.us/Pages/default.aspx
This is the home page of the ITSC, a collaboration of State Employment Security Agencies, the
U.S. Department of Labor, and private sector partners. The ITSC is dedicated to advancing the
appropriate application of information technology, which states may adopt, to provide more
accurate, efficient, cost effective, and timely service for unemployed insurance customers. It
contains a map that shows which states are undergoing UI modernization efforts.
http://www.itsc.state.md.us/Pages/UI-IT-Mod.aspx
Melissa Data
http://melissadata.com/Lookups/index.htm
This website provides free lookups online for zip codes, NAICS codes, counties, and other useful
information.
Merriam-Webster's Dictionary
https://www.merriam-webster.com/
This is an obvious, but useful, site which may help make sense of a respondent's explanation of
their product or services. It helps to classify a widget company if you know what it is.
Mexico National Institute of Statistics, Geography and Informatics (INEGI in
Spanish)
http://en.www.inegi.org.mx/
English version home page of the Mexican government agency that provides statistical,
geographic, demographic, and economic information on the country.
Monthly Labor Review Online
http://www.bls.gov/opub/mlr/mlrhome.htm
This site is based on the print version of the Monthly Labor Review (MLR). The MLR is the
principal journal of fact, analysis, and research from the Bureau of Labor Statistics. The

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Useful Links and References

Page T-5

Economics Daily section, which is updated daily to highlight one or two particular points, can
also be reached from this MLR page or directly at https://www.bls.gov/opub/ted/home.htm
Multiple Worksite Report (MWR)
http://stats.bls.gov/cew/cewmwr00.htm
This site describes the MWR and provides related information, including contact information by
State, FAQs, and information on reporting electronically through the EDI Center.
National Technical Information Service
https://www.ntis.gov/
Provide innovative data services to federal agencies, through joint venture partnerships with the
private sector, to advance federal data priorities, promote economic growth, and enable
operational excellence.
North American Industry Classification System (NAICS)
https://www.bls.gov/bls/naics.htm
The general BLS NAICS page introduces the classification system.
https://www.bls.gov/cew/bls_naics/v1/bls_naics_app.htm
This BLS WebNAICS application provides access to the North American Industry Classification
System (NAICS) as implemented at BLS. It is intended for use by BLS data users and by BLS
and state staff working on statistical data development and production. It is possible to toggle
between the 2012 and 2017 versions.
http://www.census.gov/epcd/www/naics.html
This site, maintained by the U.S. Census Bureau, includes background information, a 2017
NAICS manual, and related information on NAICS. Please note, BLS-only NAICS codes are
not listed in the NAICS search feature.
Policy Council (QCEW)
http://199.221.111.170/Programs/BLOC/qcew/qcewPC.html
This section of StateWeb contains the QCEW policy council charter, meeting minutes,
membership details, as well as links to the BLOC and other program policy council pages
Quarterly Census of Employment and Wages (QCEW)
http://www.bls.gov/cew/
The Quarterly Census of Employment and Wages (QCEW) program publishes a quarterly count
of employment and wages reported by employers covering more than 95 percent of U.S. jobs,
available at the county, MSA, state and national levels by industry. This site gives an overview
of the QCEW Program, provides QCEW data, answers Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), and
gives contact information.
Quarterly Census of Employment and Wages (QCEW) Management Information
http://199.221.111.170/Programs/QCEW/qcewprograminfo.html
This section of StateWeb provides useful charts, tables, and other data on state performance
indicators.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Useful Links and References

Page T-6

Social Security’s Online Guide to Wage Reporting for Employers
https://www.ssa.gov/employer/
This site provides information, requirements, services, and assistance for employer wage
reporting.
State Help
StateHelp provides IT- related support to state users for resetting passwords, unlocking accounts,
and adding EXPO, EUSWeb, and email accounts.
Contact information:
http://199.221.111.170/statehelpdesk/default.aspx
STATEHELP Network Assistance 202-691-5950
StateWeb
http://199.221.111.170/index.html
This site provides access to the Fed/State numbered memoranda for QCEW, CES, and other
Fed/State programs. It also gives access to meeting and training schedules, policy council
minutes, regional office telephone numbers, and general program information. The direct link to
the QCEW section is http://199.221.111.170/program/ES202/QCEWmain.htm
Statistics Canada
http://www.statcan.gc.ca/eng/start
This is the English home page of Canada’s national statistical agency, which provides economic,
geographic, demographic, social, socio-economic, and socio-political information about the
nation.
SuperPages
http://www.superpages.com/
This search site allows the user to locate businesses by category, business name, and city, State.
It gives business information, including phone, fax numbers, addresses and URLs and includes a
nationwide yellow pages and reverse phone number lookup facility. This site may be useful for
identifying, researching, or contacting employers.
Unemployment Insurance Program Letters (UIPL)
https://wdr.doleta.gov/directives/
This site provides access to UI Program Letters (UIPL). UIPL give coverage rulings, policy, and
determinations made by the Director of the Unemployment Insurance Service of the
Employment and Training Administration. There are also links to Training & Employment
Guidance Letters (TEGL) and Training & Employment Notices (TEN).

Valid Values (aka Cheat Sheet)
http://199.221.111.170/Programs/QCEW/index.html
This document provides a summary of due dates, code definitions, contact information, and a
variety of other useful documentation.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Useful Links and References

Page T-7

WebNAICS (Please also see North American Industry Classification System)
https://www.bls.gov/cew/bls_naics/v1/bls_naics_app.htm
WIN
http://www.state.me.us/labor/lmis/win-202/
This is the home page for the WIN –202 System, a standard QCEW State processing system
developed by the State of Maine. This site provides system documentation, training info,
prefabricated queries, new release info, a facility for submitting questions or comments, contact
information, and a list of FAQs.
Contact details:
PHONE: 207-621-5186
http://www.maine.gov/labor/lmis/win-202/
[email protected]
*Please be sure to –cc your regional office if you are a state staff member emailing win-202.
Workforce Information Advisory Council (WIAC)
https://www.doleta.gov/wioa/wiac/ The Workforce Information Advisory Council (WIAC) is a
Federal Advisory Committee of workforce and labor market information experts representing a broad
range of national, state, and local data and information users and producers. The purpose of the WIAC is
to provide recommendations to the Secretary of Labor, working jointly through the Assistant Secretary
for Employment and Training and the Commissioner of Labor Statistics

ZipInfo
http://www.zipinfo.com/search/zipcode.htm
For any valid zip code, this site will find the city and state plus the county name and FIPS code,
time zone, MSA/PMSA, area code, latitude and longitude, and population. Please note that this
site uses the zip centroid method of geocoding, which is considered less desirable than finding
the latitude and longitude at the street address level.
Zip+4 Code Lookup
http://www.usps.gov/ncsc/lookups/lookup_zip+4.html
This site, developed by the U.S. Postal Service National Customer Support Center, can be used
to find Zip codes. Enter the delivery address onto the form, and it returns the Zip code and the
standardized address.

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Publication Macro Aggregation Levels

Page U-1

Appendix U – Publication Macro Aggregation
Levels
QCEW micro data are aggregated to macro levels for publication purposes. This appendix is
included for reference purposes to show the macro levels at which data are produced. The code
associated with each level is an internal code used in the systems within the national office.
Eventual publication drives many of the questions that are asked during the BLS review phase of
QCEW operations.
Aggregation Level

Code

National ......................................................................10
All MSAs ...................................................................91
All CSAs ....................................................................92
All non-MSA counties ...............................................93
National x Own2-5 (UI-covered) ...............................94
National x Own1-3 .....................................................95
State x Own1-3 ..........................................................96
National x Own ..........................................................11
National x Own x Domaina ........................................12
National x Own x Supersectorb ..................................13
National x Own x Sector ............................................14
National x Own x 3-digit NAICS ..............................15
National x Own x 4-digit NAICS ..............................16
National x Own x 5-digit NAICS ..............................17
National x Own x 6-digit NAICS ..............................18
National x Own5 x Size .............................................21
National x Own5 x Size x Domaina ...........................22
National x Own5 x Size x Supersectorb .....................23
National x Own5 x Size x Sector ...............................24
National x Own5 x Size x 3-digit NAICS .................25
National x Own5 x Size x 4-digit NAICS .................26
National x Own5 x Size x 5-digit NAICS .................27
National x Own5 x Size x 6-digit NAICS .................28
CSA ............................................................................30
MSA ...........................................................................40
MSA x Own ...............................................................41
MSA x Own5 x Domaina ...........................................42
MSA x Own5 x Supersectorb .....................................43
MSA x Own5 x Sector ...............................................44
MSA x Own5 x 3-digit NAICS .................................45
MSA x Own5 x 4-digit NAICS .................................46
MSA x Own5 x 5-digit NAICS .................................47
MSA x Own5 x 6-digit NAICS .................................48
State............................................................................50
State x Own ................................................................51
State x Own x Domaina ..............................................52
State x Own x Supersectorb........................................53
State x Own x Sector..................................................54
State x Own x 3-digit NAICS ....................................55
State x Own x 4-digit NAICS ....................................56
State x Own x 5-digit NAICS ....................................57
State x Own x 6-digit NAICS ....................................58

September 30, 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Publication Macro Aggregation Levels

State x Own5 x Size ...................................................61
State x Own5 x Size x Domaina .................................62
State x Own5 x Size x Supersectorb ...........................63
State x Own5 x Size x Sector.....................................64
County ........................................................................70
County x Own ............................................................71
County x Own x Domaina ..........................................72
County x Own x Supersectorb ....................................73
County x Own x Sector ..............................................74
County x Own x 3-digit NAICS ................................75
County x Own x 4-digit NAICS ................................76
County x Own x 5-digit NAICS ................................77
County x Own x 6-digit NAICS ................................78
MicroSA.....................................................................80
__________________________________

a

b

Domain refers to the division of all economic activity into two domains, goods-producing and service-producing.
Supersector refers to the 11 alternate aggregation sectors defined by the ECPC plus the additional sector for unclassified.

Page U-2

QCEW Operating Manual
Geocode File Layouts

September 2019

Page V-1

Appendix V – Geocode File Format
The national office sends to the states geocoded Load files and Reject files containing records
that were unable to be geocoded. The Reject file contains non geocodable records with
employment of 100 or more. The file format for both files are below:

Geocode Load Format
Positions

Load/No Load

1-2
3-6
7-7
8-17
18-22
23-57
58-92
93-100
101-104
105-105
106-111
112-112
113-115
116-121

No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

122-156

Not at this time

157-191
192-221
222-223
224-228
229-232
233-235
236-246
247-255
256-259
260-262
263-267
268-269

Not at this time
Not at this time
Not at this time
Not at this time
Not at this time
Future Use
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

270-284
285-288
289-289
290-349

Yes, if available
Future Use
Future Use
Future Use

Data Element
State FIPS Code
Load Year
Load Quarter
UI Account Number
Reporting Unit Number
Trade Name
Legal Name
PLA Date Changed
ARS Refile Year
MEEI Code
NAICS Code
Ownership Code
County Code
Month Three Employment
Standardized or from Alternate Source PLA Street
Address--Line 1
Standardized or from Alternate Source PLA Street
Address--Line 2
Standardized or from Alternate Source PLA City
Standardized or from Alternate Source PLA State
Standardized or from Alternate Source PLA ZIP Code
Standardized or from Alternate Source PLA ZIP Extension
Filler
Longitude
Latitude
Match Code
Location Code
Place Code
Class Code
Census ID (comprised of 2-position State code, 3-positon
County code, 6-position Tract code, 1-position block
group, 2-position block code, and 1-position block code
letter)
Filler
Address Source Code
E-mail Address from Alternate Source

Length
2
4
1
10
5
35
35
8
4
1
6
1
3
6
35
35
30
2
5
4
3
11
9
4
3
5
2

15
4
1
60

QCEW Operating Manual
Geocode File Layouts

September 2019

Page V-2

Geocode Load Format
Positions

Load/No Load

350-355
356-370
371-380
381-415
416-450
451-480
481-482
483-487
488-491

Future Use
Future Use
Future Use
Future Use
Future Use
Future Use
Future Use
Future Use
Future Use

Data Element

Length

NAICS from Alternate Source
Phone from Alternate Source
Fax from Alternate Source
MOA Street Address--Line 1 from Alternate Source
MOA Street Address--Line 2 from Alternate Source
MOA City from Alternate Source
MOA State from Alternate Source
MOA ZIP Code from Alternate Source
MOA ZIP Extension from Alternate Source

6
15
10
35
35
30
2
5
4

Geocode Reject File Format
Positions Data Element
1-2
3-6
7-7
8-17
18-22
23-23
24-29
30-30
31-33
34-39
40-74
75-109
110-144
145-179
180-209
210-211
212-216
217-220
221-221
222-222
223-226
227-229
230-289
290-295
296-305
306-310

State FIPS Code
Reference Year
Reference Quarter
UI Account Number
Reporting Unit Number
MEEI Code
NAICS Code
Ownership Code
County Code
Month Three Employment
Legal Name
Trade Name
Input PLA Street Address--Line 1
Input PLA Street Address--Line 2
Input PLA City
Input PLA State
Input PLA ZIP Code
Input PLA ZIP Extension
MOA Address Type Code
UI Address Type Code
Match Code
Location Code
Website URL
NAICS from Alternate Source
Telephone Number
Telephone Number Extension

Length
2
4
1
10
5
1
6
1
3
6
35
35
35
35
30
2
5
4
1
1
4
3
60
6
10
5

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-1

Glossary
The following defined terms are used in the QCEW program, and most of them appear in this
manual.
Advance Release
Providing a BLS news or data release (or any part or derivative of a release) to a person or
organization outside the BLS prior to its official date and time of public release.
Agent
An individual who meets the definition of agent as set forth by CIPSEA and who has been
designated by the BLS to perform exclusively statistical activities through an Agent Agreement.
The 53 State Workforce Agency LMI staffs that work on the BLS Federal/State Cooperative
Programs, such as the QCEW program, are designated as agents of the BLS.
The QCEW program also collects identifiers on businesses that either only file or fully prepare
and report QCR data and UI taxes to the states for specific employers. These identifiers are
collected in the form of an Agent Code. Additional information on Agent Codes can be found in
appendix B, section A of this manual.
Annual Refiling Survey (ARS)
A survey conducted by the QCEW program to verify and update the industry, geographic area,
addresses, and codes of business establishments covered by state unemployment insurance
programs
ARS Web
Internet based collection of Annual Refiling Survey.
Authorized Persons
Officers, employees, and agents of the BLS who are responsible for collecting, processing, or
using confidential data in furtherance of statistical purposes or for the other stated purposes for
which the data were collected. Authorized persons are authorized access to only those
confidential data that are integral to the program or project on which they work, and only to the
extent required to perform their duties.
Authorization Statement
The statement included on BLS forms and Cover Letters that cites the United States Code that
authorizes the BLS survey and, if applicable, the state law that mandates it.
Average Monthly Employment (AME)
Computed as the average of the three monthly employment figures in a given calendar quarter.
AME = (M1+M2+M3)
3
where M1 = Month One Employment
M2 = Month Two Employment

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-2

M3 = Month Three Employment
Average Quarterly Wages (AQW)
Computed as total quarterly wages (TQW) divided by average monthly employment (AME).
AQW = TQW
AME
Average Weekly Wages (AWW)
Computed as average quarterly wages divided by 13.
AWW = AQW
13
Benchmarking
A point of reference (either an estimate or a count) from which measurements can be made or
upon which adjustments to estimates are based. The QCEW data serves as a benchmark input
for many BLS programs.
Birth
Those units that are new establishments that are not linked to any pre-existing establishment(s) in
the state.
Breakout
The disaggregation to more detailed sub-units of a reporting unit.
Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA)
A Federal statistical agency that is part of the U.S. Department of Commerce. BEA uses data
from the QCEW program in the estimation of Gross Domestic Product (GDP) and personal
income statistics.
Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS)
A Federal statistical agency that is part of the U.S. Department of Labor. BLS functions as the
principal data-gathering agency of the Federal government in the field of labor economics. The
BLS collects, processes, analyzes, and disseminates data relating to employment, unemployment,
the labor force, productivity, prices, family expenditures, wages, industrial relations, and
occupational safety and health.
Business Cycle
A periodically repeated sequence of fluctuations in the aggregate economy of an area, or the
nation as a whole, varying in duration, but consisting of: (a) upturn, including recovery and
prosperity; (b) cyclical peak; (c) downturn, including recession; and (d) cyclical trough.
Business Employment Dynamics (BED)
Quarterly data produced by the QCEW program that shows the number of job gains from
opening and expanding establishments, the number of job losses from closing and contracting
establishments, and the net gain or loss. BED statistics show the dynamic labor market changes
that underlie the net employment change statistic.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-3

Census
A complete count (i.e., not a sample) of a specified population or some other measurable
characteristic in a given area (housing, industry, etc.).
Census Block
A subdivision of a census tract. A block is the smallest geographic unit for which the Census
Bureau tabulates data.
Census Tract
A small, relatively permanent statistical subdivision of a county delineated by a local committee
of census data users for the purpose of presenting data.
CARS
Central Annual Refiling Survey (CARS). Contractor utilized for central sending and receiving
of the ARS forms.
Central Review
As a part of the Annual Refiling Survey (ARS) BLS staff review the industry classification of
selected large multi-firms based on size class, employment and NAICS homogeneity. The
purpose of the central review is to increase coding consistency across states while reducing both
respondent burden and postage costs.
Centroid
The calculated center of a zip code. The centroid is part of the methodology sometimes used to
assign latitude and longitude to addresses based on zip code.
Code Change Supplement (CCS)
A computer file generated from the BLS or state system. The Code Change Supplement
documents all non-economic changes to industry, area, and ownership classification codes that
will be made effective with the first quarter data. It is used to measure the impact of
classification changes on QCEW macro data tabulations.
Collapse
The consolidation of detailed sub-units to a single reporting unit.
Combined Statistical Area (CSA)
Consists of two or more adjacent metropolitan and micropolitan statistical areas that have
substantial employment interchange. The metropolitan and micropolitan statistical areas that
combine to create a CSA retain separate identities within the larger CSA.
Comment Codes
Standardized numeric codes used by the QCEW program to explain fluctuations and unusual
economic and noneconomic occurrences in the data. These codes are assigned to micro data
records.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-4

CIPSEA
Confidential Information Protection and Statistical Efficiency Act of 2002 (CIPSEA), Title 5 of
Public Law 107 347, establishes statutory provisions protecting the confidentiality of data
collected by Federal Executive Branch agencies for exclusively statistical purposes under a
pledge of confidentiality.
Consumer Price Index (CPI)
A Bureau of Labor Statistics program that measures the average change in the prices of a fixed
set of goods and services purchased by households. It is the most commonly recognized measure
of inflation.
Contributions
Taxes paid to the state Unemployment Insurance (UI) system from employers based on the
wages of covered workers or from the employees themselves.
Core
A densely settled concentration of population, comprising either an urbanized area (of 50,000 or
more population) or an urban cluster (of 10,000 to 49,999 population) defined by the Census
Bureau, around which a Core Based Statistical Area is defined.
Core Based Statistical Area (CBSA)
Consists of the county or counties or equivalent entities associated with at least one core
(urbanized area or urban cluster) of at least 10,000 population, plus adjacent counties having a
high degree of social and economic integration with the core as measured through commuting
ties with the counties associated with the core.
County Codes
See definition of Federal Information of Processing Standards (FIPS). FIPS county codes are
used to report data on the EQUI file and the state’s system.
Covered Employment
Employees who are subject to state Unemployment Insurance (UI) laws or the Unemployment
Compensation for Federal Employee (UCFE) program. These "covered" employees should be
counted in the QCEW micro data if they worked or received pay for the pay period that included
the 12th day of the month.
Current Employment Statistics (CES) Survey
A monthly survey of non-farm business establishments used to collect wage and salary
employment, worker hours, and payroll, by industry and area. Through the Federal/State
cooperative effort, these data are used to compute current monthly employment, hours, and
earnings estimates, by industry, for the nation, all 50 states, the District of Columbia, Puerto
Rico, the Virgin Islands, and about 450 Metropolitan Areas and Divisions.
Current Population Survey (CPS)
A monthly household survey of the civilian non-institutional population of the United States.
This BLS survey provides statistics on employment, unemployment, and wages, by industry,

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-5

occupation, and demographic characteristics. Micro data for this survey are collected for BLS by
the U.S. Census Bureau.
DASLT
Division of Administrative Statistics and Labor Turnover, also known as the program office for
the QCEW and Job Openings and Labor Turnover Survey (JOLTS) programs. This division is
responsible for program policy and overall program management.
DBES
Division of Business Establishments Systems. The division within the Directorate of Survey
Processing (DSP) that includes staff for the QCEW program, the Occupational Employment
Statistics (OES) program, and the Job Openings and Labor Turnover Survey (JOLTS).
Deaths
Establishments that have gone out of business.
Delinquent Accounts
Quarterly Contribution Reports or MWR forms that are missing both employment and wage data
or the information is not received in time for use in deliverables.
Deliverable
As specified by the Labor Market Information (LMI) cooperative agreement, any product
required to be delivered by the states to the BLS is generally called a “deliverable."
Department of Labor (DOL)
Cabinet-level agency that enforces laws protecting workers, promotes labor-management
cooperation, sponsors employment training and placement services, oversees the unemployment
insurance system, and produces statistics on the labor force and living conditions.
Disclose or Disclosure
The release of non-confidential information to anyone other than authorized persons or the
respondent who provided or is the subject of the data.
Economic Code Change (ECC)
A change in the reporting unit’s industry, area, or ownership classification code resulting from
the actual conversion or re-location of the unit from one industry, area, or ownership type to
another. See Appendix B.
EDB
The EQUI Database (EDB) compiles the EQUI deliverables of the states to aid the national
office editing efforts. The EDB only shows what has been submitted to the national office, it
does not show any changes made in the state systems that have not been submitted.
Editing
Verification of data for accuracy and conformance with pre-established criteria or tolerance
limits.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-6

Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) Center
A BLS center located in Chicago that is responsible for collecting Multiple Worksite Report
(MWR) and Current Employment Statistics (CES) data for multi- state employers, mostly with
more than 50 worksites, and providing it to the states.
Embargoed Data
Pre-release economic data produced by the BLS.
Employee Contributions
Funds deducted from an employee’s pay by the employer and paid with the employer’s
contribution to the state UI agency. These monies fund the Unemployment Insurance (UI)
program.
Employer
The legal entity that either pays the unemployment insurance tax, or is required to reimburse the
state unemployment fund for unemployment insurance benefits costs in lieu paying the UI tax.
Employment
The number of covered workers who earned wages during the pay period that includes the 12th of
the month. The employment count should include all corporation officials, executives, the
supervisory personnel, clerical workers, wage earners, persons on paid vacations or paid sick
leave, pieceworkers, part-time workers, and workers earning wages that are nontaxable because
the taxable wage limit has been exceeded.
Employment and Training Administration (ETA)
An agency within the U.S. Department of Labor. It oversees the state UI programs and job
training and placement services provided by State Workforce Agencies.
Enhanced Quarterly Unemployment Insurance (EQUI) file
A computer file prepared quarterly by state QCEW programs and provided to the national office.
These files comprise the primary deliverable under the LMI cooperative agreement. It conveys
the names, addresses, employment, wages, as well as other data items, of the establishments
covered by state unemployment insurance programs and Unemployment Compensation for
Federal Employees.
Enterprise
All establishments having more than 50 percent common direct to indirect ownership.
Establishment
An economic unit that produces goods and services, usually at a single physical location, and
engaged in one or predominantly one industry activity.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-7

EUSWeb
A data communication system developed by BLS to support file transfers between states and the
BLS.
EXPO
A mainframe state QCEW processing system developed and maintained by the state of Utah and
used by the majority of states.
Federal Agency Codes (FACs)
Developed by the Employment and Training Administration (ETA) to properly charge each
Federal agency for unemployment benefits received by their former workers under the UCFE
program
Federal Employer Identification Number
Nine-digit number assigned by IRS to identify employers for tax collection.
Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
Standards for information processing issued by the National Bureau of Standards in the U.S.
Department of Commerce. Includes numeric designations (codes) for geographic areas such as
states, counties, and metropolitan areas.
Federal Reserve Board (Fed)
An independent government agency primarily responsible for keeping prices stable. The Fed’s
primary tool is control over certain short term interest rates. The Fed is a key user of
Federal/State Cooperative Programs data.
Federal/State Cooperative Programs
Statistical programs in which the state and Federal governments cooperate in accomplishing
program goals. CES, QCEW, OES, LAUS, and OSHS are BLS Federal/State Cooperative
Programs.
Firm
A business entity, either corporate or otherwise. May consist of one or several establishments.
Fiscal Year (FY)
A 12-month period established for budgetary and accounting purposes. In the Federal
Government, the fiscal year begins October 1 and ends September 30.
FUTA
Federal Unemployment Tax Act. This Act became Chapter 23, Sections 3301-3311, of the U.S.
Internal Revenue Code, authorizing the tax imposed on employers with respect to persons they
employ for the purpose of funding unemployment insurance benefits. The FUTA made possible
the federal/ state system that establishes an employment security program in each state.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-8

GBF
Geographic Base File. A generic term for a computer file of geographic attributes of an area
(street names, address ranges, geographic codes, hydrography, railroads and so forth).
GDP
Gross Domestic Product. The total of all goods and services produced by the U.S. economy.
GDP is compiled quarterly by the U.S. Department of Commerce. QCEW wage data are used
for the final GDP estimates.
Geocode
The geographic information associated with a unique address or centroid, such as longitude and
latitude coordinates, census block group, census tract, or county.
GIS
Geographic Information System is an organized collection of computer hardware, software,
geographic data, and personnel designed to efficiently capture, store, update, manipulate,
analyze, and display all forms of geographically referenced information.
Header Record
Part of the EQUI file, it includes information on the processing state, Year, Quarter, creation date
and time of the file and state editing parameters and tolerances. The transaction code is always
H on the header record.
Imputation
A process used to estimate employment and wages data when the actual data are not provided by
the employer.
Inactive Employer
A unit, not currently reporting employment or paying wages subject to the state’s unemployment
compensation law that has been terminated, administratively inactivated, or granted permission
to suspend filing contribution reports or payment in lieu of contribution reports; or who have
paid no wages during the eight calendar quarters immediately preceding the due date of the
Quarterly Contributions Report.
Individually Identifiable Data
Any representation of information that permits the identity of the respondent to whom the
information applies to be reasonably inferred by either direct or indirect means.
Industry
Describes the type of economic activity engaged in by a group of firms as used in the
compilation of economic statistics. The North American Industry Classification System
(NAICS) provides numerical classification for industries.
Industry Code
Each establishment is assigned a NAICS code. Using the production process, each establishment
is assigned a code that describes their primary economic activity.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-9

Job Openings and Labor Turnover Survey (JOLTS)
A monthly survey of establishments covering payroll employment in nonagricultural industries
in both the private and public sectors. Included are total employment, job openings, total hires,
resignations, discharges, and other separations. DASLT is the program office and DBES is the
project office for this survey.
LABSTAT
BLS’s public repository of data, available through the Internet. LABSTAT is a database that
contains most published BLS data.
Labor Dispute
Any controversy concerning terms or conditions of employment, or concerning the association or
representation of persons in negotiating, fixing, maintaining, changing, or seeking to arrange
terms or conditions of employment, regardless of whether or not the disputants stand in the
proximate relation of employer and employee.
Labor Market Area (LMA)
An economically integrated geographical unit within which workers may readily change jobs
without changing their place of residence. All states are divided into exhaustive LMAs, which
usually consist of a county or a group of contiguous counties (except in New England, where
township is the smallest government unit).
LAUS Program
Local Area Unemployment Statistics Program. A Federal/state cooperative program that
produces employment, labor force, and unemployment estimates for states and local areas.
LMI
Labor Market Information. The body of data available on a particular labor market, including
employment and unemployment statistics, occupational statistics, and average hours and
earnings data. LMI is also used to refer to the statistical research and analysis offices of the State
Workforce Agencies.
LMI Cooperative Agreement
A contract between the State Workforce Agencies and the Bureau of Labor Statistics for the
collection and tabulations of Labor Market Information, including the QCEW, CES, OES, and
LAUS programs.
Longitudinal Database (LDB)
The LDB is a database of business establishments based on the data submitted quarterly by the
states on the EQUI. Every unit on the database contains a unique identifier that allows tracking
of individual establishments across quarters. The LDB is the sampling frame for many Bureau
of Labor Statistics surveys, and serves as an important resource for labor market research. It is
used to produce tabulations for the Business Employment Dynamics.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-10

Longitudinal Employer-Household Dynamics (LEHD)
A U.S. Census program. The LEHD files generated in the states are used as input files for the
wage file creator and other wage records programs.
Macro Data
Single establishment (micro) data aggregated to any level.
Mailing Other Address (MOA)
An address for the business where mail is received that is not the UI nor the physical location
address.
Master Record
In QCEW micro data, a master record represents the Quarterly Contributions Report data for
multi-establishment employers (employers with more than one worksite). A master record's
economic data is the summation of data from all of its composite worksites. Master records are
not included in macro data aggregations because they duplicate the economic data of the
worksite records.
MEEI Code
Codes used to specify the multi-unit status of each reporting unit. These codes are carried on the
state’s file and reported on the EQUI.
Mean
A number obtained by dividing the sum of the observations by the number of observations. The
mean can be weighted or unweighted.
Metropolitan Statistical Area (MSA)
The general concept of a Metropolitan Statistical Area or a Micropolitan Statistical Area is that
of an area containing a recognized population nucleus and adjacent communities that have a high
degree of integration with that nucleus. The definitions provide a nationally consistent
definitions for collecting, tabulating, and publishing Federal statistics for a set of geographic
areas. OMB establishes and maintains the definitions of Metropolitan and Micropolitan
Statistical Areas, Combined Statistical Areas, and New England City and Town Areas solely for
statistical purposes.
A Metropolitan Statistical Area has at least one urbanized area of 50,000 or more population,
plus adjacent territory that has a high degree of social and economic integration with the core as
measured by commuting ties. Metropolitan Statistical Areas are defined in terms of whole
counties (or equivalent entities) in all states including the six New England states. MSAs are
revised every ten years.
Micropolitan Statistical Area
A Micropolitan Statistical Area is a type of statistical areas which has at least one urban cluster
of at least 10,000 but less than 50,000 population, plus adjacent territory that has a high degree of
social and economic integration with the core as measured by commuting ties. Micropolitan

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-11

Statistical Areas are defined in terms of whole counties (or equivalent entities), in all states
including the six New England states.
Micro Data
Data reported from an individual establishment or reporting unit.
Missing Data
A term typically describing when at least one of the employment (each of three months of
employment) and wage fields (total wages, taxable wages, contributions due) is missing. When
all are missing the report is considered delinquent.
Moving Average
A series of calculations made by initially taking the simple average, or arithmetic mean, of a
consecutive number of items, and then dropping the first item and adding the next item in
sequence and averaging, so that the number of items in the series remains constant. This is a
continuous process.
Multi-establishment
An account that consists of more than one establishment.
Multiple Worksite Report (MWR)
A standardized data collection form approved by OMB that the state QCEW staff or a print
contractor sends employers with multiple worksites. The Multiple Worksite Report allows the
QCEW program to obtain worksite-level information.
MWR Web
A QCEW web-based processing system that allows small to moderately sized multiple worksite
reporters to report and transmit their quarterly MWR data to BLS via the internet. EDI reporters
are excluded from MWR Web reporting. Information gathered via MWR Web is fed back to the
states, loaded to their processing systems, and transmitted to the national office on the EQUI.
New Unit
Newly reporting account or unit that may or may not be linked to an existing reporting account.
NAICS
North American Industry Classification System, the system used to classify the primary
economic activity of the establishment.
NCA Form
An OMB approved form used to collect data about unclassified establishments that can then be
used to assign an industry code.
Non-Economic Code Change (NECC)
A change in a reporting unit’s industry, area, or ownership classification code that:

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-12

1. Does not result from an actual conversion or re-location of the unit from one industry,
area, or ownership type to another.
2. Results from an actual conversion or re-location that was discovered by QCEW staff
long after the data could be entered on the state system.
3. Lacks sufficient evidence to be classified as an economic code change.
Nonresponse
Failure to submit response with usable data from eligible units.
Nontaxable Wages
That part of an employee’s total wages that is in excess of wages that are taxable under the state
Unemployment Insurance law.
Number of Wage Records
The number of unique social security numbers appearing on the wage report for the quarter.
Also referred to as the Wage Record Count.
NVM (NAICS Verification Mult-establishment) Form
An OMB approved form used to verify the industry and geographic codes of Multi-establishment
employers as part of the Annual Refiling Survey.
NVM Web
Used in conjunction with MWR Web, NVM web allows current MWR reporters to verify and/or
update the NAICS code of their worksites.
NVS (NAICS Verification Single-establishment) Form
An OMB approved form used to verify the industry and geographic codes of Single
establishment employers as part of the Annual Refiling Survey.
Numbered Memoranda
A series of technical memoranda issued for the purpose of disseminating information to regional
offices (R-memos) and states (S-memos) on new developments in the Fed/State programs,
changes in operating procedures, and updates to manuals.
OES Program
Occupational Employment Statistics Program. A Federal/State cooperative program that collects
detailed occupational and wage data by industry and area.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-13

Office of Employment and Unemployment Statistics (OEUS)
The BLS office that includes the “program offices” of the Federal/State Cooperative Programs:
Division of Current Employment Statistics (CES), Division of Administrative Statistics and
Labor Turnover (DASLT), and Division of Local Area Unemployment Statistics (LAUS).
OEUS also includes other divisions: Division of Labor Force Statistics (DLFS), Statistical
Methods Staff (SMS), and Division of Data Development and Publications (DDDP).
Office of Field Operations (OFO)
Coordinates the work of regional offices and acts as a liaison between the national office and the
regional offices. Regional offices are part of the office of field operations.
Office of Management and Budget (OMB)
Located in the Executive Office of the President, this agency prepares the President’s budget
with the Council of Economic Advisors and the Treasury Department. OMB also oversees all
Federal data collection. Among other duties, this federal agency is responsible for enforcing the
Paperwork Reduction Act and, in so doing, must approve all survey and data collection forms
that represent a reporting burden on employers and the general public.
Office of Technology and Survey Processing (OTSP)
The national office that includes the various "project offices" for the QCEW, Current
Employment Statistics (CES), Occupational Employment Statistics (OES), and Local Area
Unemployment Statistics (LAUS) programs. Also responsible for LABSTAT development and
maintenance of the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) LAN.
Organization Type Indicator
Codes used by several states to further refine private industry businesses in to sole
proprietorships, corporations, partnerships or other legal business arrangements.
Out-of-Business (OOB)
Status assigned to a unit that was once active but that has permanently ceased to conduct
business or perform services.
Ownership
Codes that designate businesses as private or government accounts, The ownership code permits
separate or combined publication and analysis of private sector employment and wage data.
P-Percent
A complex formula designed to avoid disclosure of large, dominant establishments.
Physical Location Address (PLA)
Where the business is actually located and conducting business. This is the address if the place
where business is conducted and deliveries received. This address cannot be a Post Office Box.
Predecessor
The previous owner of a business establishment. In QCEW microdata, a predecessor is an
establishment that previously reported under one UI Account Number or Reporting Unit Number

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-14

which is now being reported under a different UI Account Number/Reporting Unit Number
configuration.
Predecessor/Successor Relationship
The QCEW program defines a predecessor/successor relationship as one where the successor
(the new owner of an establishment) performs similar operations to the predecessor (the previous
owner of an establishment). These operations are frequently, but not necessarily, performed at
the same location as the predecessor.
Primary County
The county with the largest employment for a multicounty employer.
Private Sector Employment
That employment not accounted for in governmental agencies.
Professional Employer Organization (PEO)
A firm that provides a service under which an employer can outsource employee management
tasks, such as employee benefits, payroll and workers' compensation, recruiting, risk/safety
management, and training and development. For QCEW purposes, a PEO will report multiple
employers under the same UI account number within a state.
Program Offices
Generic term for the divisions within OEUS responsible for the various Fed/State survey
programs. See DASLT.
Proration
Worksite data derived by applying previous ratios of employment and wages to current data.
QCEW Program
A Federal/State cooperative program that collects and compiles employment and wage data for
workers covered by state unemployment insurance (UI) laws, and Federal civilian workers
covered by Unemployment Compensation for Federal Employees (UCFE).
Quarterly Contribution Report (QCR)
A mandatory report filed quarterly by almost all U.S. employers to the SWA for UI purposes.
Employers report the number of employees, total quarterly wages, and UI taxable wages, and
compute their UI tax liability for each quarter. Used by the QCEW program as the source of
most data on the state QCEW database.
Reference Date
The reference date of a sample frame is the date when the characteristics of the population
existed on the frame. The reference date of a survey or file, however, is the date for which the
respondents are requested to submit the data.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-15

Regional Office (R.O.)
Term used to refer to the offices and employees of the Bureau of Labor Statistics in the field
office locations.
Report of Federal Employment and Wages (RFEW)
A standardized data collection form (BLS 3021) that the state QCEW staff sends federal
government employers with multiple worksites. The RFEW allows the QCEW program to
obtain worksite level information from federal agencies and reporting agents for federal
employers from the state administrative files of the Unemployment Compensation for Federal
Employers.
Reporting Unit
A reporting unit is the most detailed economic unit for which data are reported by the employer.
Usually, a reporting unit is an individual establishment, but sometimes two or more
establishments are reported as a single unit.
Respondent
A person who, or organization that, is requested or required to supply information to the BLS, is
the subject of information requested or required to be supplied to the BLS, or provides that
information to the BLS.
Sample
A subset of a universe. Usually selected as representative of the universe.
Sample Survey
A survey in which only a sample or part of the population is studied.
Scoring
Method used to prioritize records for additional review.
Seasonal Adjustment
Adjustment of time-series data to eliminate the effect of seasonal variations. Examples of such
variations include school terms, holidays, yearly weather patterns, etc.
Secondary Non-disclosure
Prevents the ready determination of data for sensitive cells suppressed by the arithmetic
calculation using other cells in the hierarchy.
Series Break
A large change in the level of a time series resulting from: a major change in methodology; a
major change in industry definition; a major industry or area coding error; the permanent loss of
a major reporter; area redefinition. If a series has been broken, data before the break are not
comparable to data after the break.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-16

SLED
System for processing Large Volume Employment Data is a system that handles the central
collection of Multiple Worksite Report (MWR) data at the Chicago Electronic Data Interchange
(EDI) center. This system processes QCEW program data that is collected from multi- state
employers and prepares it for distribution to the appropriate states. The system updates
incoming data, performs edits, aggregates records, and builds historical files.
SMS
Statistical Methods Staff. A division within OEUS that researches and sets statistical standards
for Federal/State surveys.
State Workforce Agency (SWA)
A generic name for the state agency usually responsible for three activities:
1. Unemployment Insurance (UI) Program - UI tax collection, administration, and
determination and payment of unemployment benefits.
2. LMI -- collection, analysis, and publication of labor market information.
3. Employment or Job Service Program - an exchange for workers seeking work and employers
seeking workers.
StateWeb
BLS state Intranet where technical memoranda, program documentation, and Policy Council
information are stored.
Status Determination Form
(Also called Status Report) A mandatory form filed by most U.S. employers with the SWA
when they begin business operations. Information on the form is used to determine the
employer’s UI liability and establish a UI account.
Strike
A work stoppage by employees acting together in an attempt to bring pressure on management to
give in to their demands concerning wages, working conditions, union recognition, or other
issues.
Successor
The new owner of a business establishment. In QCEW micro data, a successor is an
establishment that is now reported (or that will be reporting) under one UI Account Number or
Reporting Unit Number, that was being reported under a different UI Account
Number/Reporting Unit Number configuration.
Summary Management Report (SMR)
A report generated by the state processing systems that shows the progress in meeting the
necessary response rates for the Annual Refiling Survey.
Supersector
BLS publication aggregation of industries.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-17

Survey
A study of all or a portion of the whole, conducted for the purpose of making generalized
statements about the whole.
Survey Design
All procedures used in a survey, including, but not limited to, frame development, sample
design, form design, estimation, and tabulation.
Taxable Wages
The portion of total UI-covered wages subject to state Unemployment Insurance tax.
Time Series
A variable in which the values are successive observations over time.
Total Wages
The total amount of wages paid or payable to covered workers for services performed during the
quarter.
Trailer Record
Includes summary information on the number of records in the EQUI transmission as well as
establishment counts and employment and wage totals by year, quarter, and ownership. The
Transaction Code is always T on the trailer record. BLS uses the trailer to compare the expected
output of the EQUI file to the actual output to ensure that no records were lost either when the
file was created or when it was loaded.
UCFE
Unemployment Compensation for Federal Employees. The federal program that provides
temporary financial assistance to eligible federal workers who become unemployed. (Federal
employees are not covered under state-administered Unemployment Insurance programs.)
UI
Unemployment Insurance. Social welfare program first instituted in the Great Depression to
provide temporary financial assistance to eligible unemployed workers. Unemployment
insurance programs are administered by state Employment Security Agencies under state law,
subject to federal minimum standards.
UI Account Number
The number which identifies the state Unemployment Insurance account for which an
establishment pays UI taxes. These taxes fund Unemployment Insurance benefits for eligible
workers in that state. UI account numbers are assigned by the State Workforce Agency’s UI Tax
Unit. Generally, one UI account number is assigned per firm per state, regardless of how many
establishments the firm has in the state.
UI Tax Address
The address provided to the Unemployment Insurance office by a new business for the purpose
of reporting Quarterly Contributions Reports.

May 2019

QCEW Operating Manual
Glossary

Page g-18

U.S. Census Bureau
A Federal statistical agency that is part of the U.S. Department of Commerce. As its name
implies, the Census Bureau conducts the decennial census of population and housing and
monthly, annual and/or quinquennial surveys of all major industry groups. The Census Bureau
also conducts the monthly Current Population Survey (CPS) in cooperation with BLS. Data
from this survey are the source of unemployment statistics.
Universe
The entire population to be measured.
Wage Records
An attachment to employer’s Quarterly Contribution Reports that lists the Social Security
numbers, the individual quarterly wages, and in some instances names of all UI-covered
employees on the payroll.
WebNAICS
A tool housed on the BLS website that is designed to easily search NAICS codes for the BLS
and state systems.
WIN
A client/server QCEW processing system developed and maintained by the state of Maine, and
used as the standardized processing system in some state. It is a PC-based system that operates
in a Windows environment.